Construction Contract

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
New York City

Department of
Environmental Protection
59-17 Junction Boulevard

Flushing, New York 11373
Vincent Sapienza, P.E.

Commissioner
Elisa Velazquez
Assistant Commissioner
Agency Chief
Contracting Officer
Invitation for Bids for Furnishing all Labor and

Material Necessary and Required for:
Contract: DEL-260G - GENERAL, DEL-260H - HVAC,

DEL-260E - ELECTRICAL
Description: SHAFT 18 DA KENSICO ELECTRICAL AND HV UPGRADES
Volume 2 of 2
Contract Terms and Specifications
(with separate Bid Booklets)
December 2017
CITY OF NEW YORK
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
BUREAU OF ENGINEERING DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION
SHAFT 18 DA KENSICO ELECTRICAL AND HV UPGRADES

CONTRACT DEL-260G – GENERAL
CONTRACT DEL-260H – HVAC
CONTRACT DEL-260E – ELECTRICAL
TOWN OF MOUNT PLEASANT, WESTCHESTER NY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS .................................................................................................1
CITY OF NEW YORK STANDARD CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ................13
WESTCHESTER COUNTY SCHEDULE OF PREVAILING WAGES .............129
DAVIS BACON ACT – SCHEDULE OF PREVAILING WAGES ......................229
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1 Scope and Intent ..........................................................................................249

2 Provisions Referenced with Information for Bidders and Standard
Construction Contract .................................................................................251
(A) Schedule “A” ........................................................................................251
(B) Excise Taxes .........................................................................................251
(C) Labor .....................................................................................................251
(D) Partial Payments for Materials in Advance of Their Incorporation in
Work Pursuant to Article 42 of the Standard Construction Contract ..251
(E) Conflicts of Interest ..............................................................................254
3 Contract Drawings and Specifications ........................................................255
4 NOT USED .................................................................................................257
5 NOT USED .................................................................................................257
6 Temporary Structures..................................................................................257
7 Contractor's Superintendent ........................................................................258
8 NOT USED .................................................................................................258
9 Surveys ........................................................................................................258
10 NOT USED .................................................................................................259
11 NOT USED .................................................................................................259
12 NOT USED .................................................................................................259
1353
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13 NOT USED .................................................................................................259

14 NOT USED .................................................................................................259
15 Contractor’s Daily Reports .........................................................................259
16 NOT USED .................................................................................................259
17 Certificates of Occupancy and/or Completion ............................................259
18 Coordination Among Contractors ...............................................................260
19 NOT USED .................................................................................................261
20 Public Dissemination of Information ..........................................................261
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02105 Soil Sampling and Analysis ........................................................................293
02222 Demolition and Removals...........................................................................311
02230 Site Clearing ...............................................................................................323
02316 Excavation...................................................................................................337
02317 Backfilling ..................................................................................................357
02371 Dust, Soil, Erosion and Sedimentation Control .........................................373
02481 Footings, Foundation Piers and Foundation Walls .....................................385
02505 Leakage Tests..............................................................................................389
02741 Asphaltic Concrete Pavements ...................................................................397
02771 Concrete Curbs, Headers and Sidewalks ....................................................415
02910 Planting .......................................................................................................421
02920 Soil Mixes ...................................................................................................449
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Formwork ....................................................................................465
03210 Reinforcing Steel ........................................................................................479
03290 Joints in Concrete ........................................................................................498
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete................................................................................511
03350 Concrete Finishes .......................................................................................593
03600 Grout ...........................................................................................................603
03931 Concrete Rehabilitation ..............................................................................611
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04051 Mortar and Masonry Grout .........................................................................623
04200 Unit Masonry ..............................................................................................631
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05061 Stainless Steel Work ...................................................................................649
05081 Galvanizing .................................................................................................661
05091 Welding .......................................................................................................669
05092 Metal Fastening ...........................................................................................679
05120 Structural Steel ............................................................................................689
ii
1354
TABLE OF CONTENTS
05501 Metal Fabrications ......................................................................................703

05524 Aluminum Pipe Railing ..............................................................................713
05533 Aluminum Floor Gratins and Checkered Plates .........................................733
05561 Miscellaneous Metal Castings ....................................................................739
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTIC
06100 Rough Carpentry .........................................................................................743
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07140 Fluid Applied Waterproofing ......................................................................749

07811 Cementitious Fireproofing ..........................................................................765
07900 Caulking and Sealants .................................................................................773
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 Galvanized Steel Frames and Doors ...........................................................785
08710 Finish Hardware ..........................................................................................795
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09740 Concrete Toppings ......................................................................................819
09900 Painting .......................................................................................................841
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10200 Louvers .......................................................................................................865
10400 Identifying Devices .....................................................................................871
10521 Fire Extinguishers .......................................................................................883
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13281 Asbestos Management ................................................................................887
13282 Mercury Management .................................................................................919
13283 Lead Management .......................................................................................939
13284 PCB Management .......................................................................................973
13862 Non-Metallic Ductwork ............................................................................1011
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15060 Hanger and Supports .................................................................................1033
15076 Piping and Equipment Identification .......................................................1049
15081 Piping Insulation .......................................................................................1073
15720 Heating and Ventilation Units ..................................................................1087
15761 Heaters, Electric ........................................................................................1103
15810 Ductwork and Duct Accessories ...............................................................1117
15815 Duct Insulation ..........................................................................................1137
15830 Fans ...........................................................................................................1145
15951 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing .............................................................1163
iii
1355
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010 General Electrical Requirements ..............................................................1165
16020 Temporary Electrical Systems ..................................................................1171
16035 Demolition, Electrical ...............................................................................1179
16061 Grounding .................................................................................................1185
16071 Supporting Devices ...................................................................................1189
16076 Labeling and Identification .......................................................................1195
16121 Electric Wires and Cables .........................................................................1199
16131 Electric Conduit System ...........................................................................1217
16133 Underground Ducts - Ducts in Concrete ...................................................1239
16134 Electric Manholes .....................................................................................1245
16211 Electrical Service Entrance ......................................................................1251
16221 Electric Motors..........................................................................................1259
16231 Standby Power ..........................................................................................1279
16271 Dry Type Transformers.............................................................................1281
16281 Power Filters and Conditioners .................................................................1287
16292 Power Distribution System Coordination .................................................1297
16430 Low Voltage Switchgear...........................................................................1305
16441 Panelboards ...............................................................................................1319
16442 Electrical Control Equipment - Low Voltage A.C. Motors and
Devices ......................................................................................................1325
16491 Fuses .........................................................................................................1333
16511 Lighting Fixtures and Devices ..................................................................1337
- END OF VOLUME I -
iv
1356
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01120 Contract Summary ....................................................................................1363
01140 Work Restrictions .....................................................................................1367
01241 Value Engineering Proposals ....................................................................1417
01270 Measurement and Payment .......................................................................1423
01291 Detailed Estimate Breakdown...................................................................1433
01310 Project Coordination .................................................................................1441
01311 Project Partnering......................................................................................1443
01312 Web-based Project Management Information System .............................1449
01321 Progress Schedule .....................................................................................1457
01323 Job Photographs and Videos .....................................................................1485
01330 Submittal Procedures ................................................................................1491
01332 Final Record Documents...........................................................................1501
01333 Records in Paper Formats .........................................................................1511
01334 Records in Microfilm Formats ..................................................................1515
01335 Records in Electronic Formats ..................................................................1535
01355 Hazardous Materials Control ....................................................................1545
01356 Environmental Health and Safety (EHS) Requirements ...........................1557
01410 Regulatory Requirements..........................................................................1583
01415 Miscellaneous Project Requirements ........................................................1589
01420 Reference Standards..................................................................................1597
01430 Approval of Product Manufacturers- Named or Equal .............................1607
01432 Contractor’s Work Quality .......................................................................1613
01433 Witness Shop Testing and Quality Assurance Inspection ........................1621
01511 Temporary Water and Sanitary Services ..................................................1631
01513 Temporary Electrical System ....................................................................1633
01520 Temporary Construction Facilities ...........................................................1641
01550 Vehicular Access and Parking ..................................................................1651
01560 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures..........................................................1653
01570 Temporary Controls ..................................................................................1657
01583 Construction Site Signs .............................................................................1665
01651 Transportation and Handling of Materials ................................................1671
01661 Protection of Materials and Equipment ....................................................1675
01711 Maintenance of Operations and Construction Staging .............................1679
01721 Protection and Restoration of Structures ..................................................1683
01732 Installation of Equipment ..........................................................................1689
01733 Construction Waste Management .............................................................1697
01740 Cleaning and Site Maintenance ................................................................1703
01750 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials ....................................................1709
01781 Project Closeout ........................................................................................1713
01811 Preliminary and Final Field Tests .............................................................1717
01821 Equipment Start-Up and Training .............................................................1725
01831 Operation and Maintenance Manuals .......................................................1739
1357
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260G GENERAL

02105G Soil Sampling and Analysis ......................................................................1745
02222G Demolition and Removals.........................................................................1747
02230G Site Clearing .............................................................................................1749
02316G Excavation.................................................................................................1751
02317G Backfilling ................................................................................................1753
02371G Dust, Soil, Erosion and Sedimentation Control .......................................1755
02481G Footings, Foundation Piers and Foundation Walls ...................................1757
02505G Leakage Test .............................................................................................1759
02741G Asphaltic Concrete Pavements .................................................................1761
02771G Concrete Curbs, Headers and Sidewalks ..................................................1763
02910G Planting .....................................................................................................1765
02920G Soil Mixes .................................................................................................1767
03100G Concrete Formwork ..................................................................................1769
03210G Reinforcing Steel ......................................................................................1771
03290G Joints in Concrete ......................................................................................1773
03300G Cast-in-Place Concrete..............................................................................1775
03350G Concrete Finishes .....................................................................................1781
03600G Grout .........................................................................................................1785
03931G Concrete Rehabilitation ............................................................................1787
04051G Mortar and Masonry Grout .......................................................................1789
04200G Unit Masonry ............................................................................................1793
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05061G Stainless Steel Work .................................................................................1795
05081G Galvanizing ...............................................................................................1797
05091G Welding .....................................................................................................1799
05092G Metal Fastening .........................................................................................1801
05120G Structural Steel ..........................................................................................1803
05501G Metal Fabrications ....................................................................................1805
05524G Aluminum Pipe Railing ............................................................................1807
05533G Aluminum Floor Gratings and Checkered Plates .....................................1809
05561G Miscellaneous Metal Castings ..................................................................1811
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTIC

06100G Rough Carpentry .......................................................................................1813
vi
1358
TABLE OF CONTENTS

07811G Cementitious Fireproofing ........................................................................1815
07900G Caulking and Sealants ...............................................................................1817
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110G Steel Doors and Frames ............................................................................1819
08710G Finish Hardware ........................................................................................1821
09740G Concrete Toppings ....................................................................................1823
09900G Painting .....................................................................................................1825
10200G Louvers .....................................................................................................1829
10400G Identifying Devices ...................................................................................1831
10521G Fire Extinguisher .......................................................................................1833

13281G Asbestos Management ..............................................................................1835
13282G Mercury Management ...............................................................................1837
13283G Lead Management .....................................................................................1839
13284G PCB Management .....................................................................................1841
vii
1359
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260H HVAC

02222H Demolition and Removals.........................................................................1843
03600H Grout .........................................................................................................1845
04051H Mortar and Masonry Grout .......................................................................1847
04200H Unit Masonry ............................................................................................1851
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05081H Galvanizing ...............................................................................................1853
05091H Welding .....................................................................................................1855
05092H Metal Fastening .........................................................................................1857
05501H Metal Fabrications ....................................................................................1867

07900H Caulking and Sealants ...............................................................................1869
09900H Painting .....................................................................................................1871
10200H Louvers .....................................................................................................1875

13281H Asbestos Management ..............................................................................1877
13282H Mercury Management ...............................................................................1879
13283H Lead Management .....................................................................................1881
13284H PCB Management .....................................................................................1883
13862H Non-Metallic Ductwork ............................................................................1885
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15060H Hanger and Supports .................................................................................1901
15076H Piping and Equipment Identification .......................................................1913
15081H Piping Insulation .......................................................................................1923
15185 Hydronic Pumps........................................................................................1931
15515 Piping, Valves and Accessories ................................................................1939
15720H Heating and Ventilation Units ..................................................................1969
15761H Heaters, Electric ........................................................................................1981
15810H Ductwork and Duct Accessories ...............................................................1987
15815H Duct Insulation ..........................................................................................2001
viii
1360
TABLE OF CONTENTS
15830H Fans ...........................................................................................................2007

15950 HVAC Monitoring and Control System ...................................................2017
15951H Testing, Adjusting and Balancing .............................................................2057
16010H General Electrical Requirements ..............................................................2065
16076H Labeling and Identification .......................................................................2067
16121H Electric Wires and Cables .........................................................................2069
16131H Electric Conduit System ...........................................................................2073
16221H Electric Motors..........................................................................................2077
ix
1361
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260E ELECTRICAL

07140E Fluid Applied Waterproofing ....................................................................2079

13281E Asbestos Management ..............................................................................2081
13282E Mercury Management ...............................................................................2083
13283E Lead Management .....................................................................................2085
13284E PCB Management .....................................................................................2087
16010E General Electrical Requirements ..............................................................2089
16020E Temporary Electrical Systems ..................................................................2091
16035E Demolition, Electrical ...............................................................................2093
16061E Grounding .................................................................................................2095
16071E Supporting Devices ...................................................................................2097
16076E Labeling and Identification .......................................................................2099
16121E Electric Wires and Cables .........................................................................2101
16131E Electric Conduit System ...........................................................................2105
16133E Underground Ducts - Ducts in Concrete ...................................................2109
16134E Electric Manholes .....................................................................................2113
16211E Electrical Service Entrance ......................................................................2115
16221E Electric Motors..........................................................................................2121
16231E Standby Power ..........................................................................................2123
16271E Dry Type Transformers.............................................................................2149
16281E Power Filters and Conditioners .................................................................2153
16285 Surge Protective Devices (SPD) ...............................................................2155
16292E Power Distribution System Coordination .................................................2167
16361 Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear .........................................2173
16430E Low Voltage Switchgear...........................................................................2183
16441E Panelboards ...............................................................................................2189
16442E Electrical Control Equipment - Low Voltage A.C. Motors and
Devices ......................................................................................................2191
16482 Motor Control Center................................................................................2193
16491E Fuses .........................................................................................................2207
16496 Automatic Transfer Switches ....................................................................2209
16511E Lighting Fixtures and Devices ..................................................................2225
- END OF VOLUME II -
1362
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01120 – MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
CONTRACT DEL-260 G, H, E
SECTION 01120
Multiple Contract Summary
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 NOTICE
The Contractors are advised that the Detailed Specifications of Division 1 – General
Requirements are applicable to all Contracts. Wherever the words “the Contractor” are
used, it shall be taken to mean “each Contractor”. Where an individual Contractor is
responsible for a particular item of Work, the Specifications shall specifically name that
Contractor.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Location of Work
B. Work included under Contract DEL-260G General
C. Work included under Contract DEL-260H HVAC
D Work included under Contract DEL-260E Electrical
E. Inspection before bidding
F. Datum plane
G. Environmental Health and Safety Policies And Procedures
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. When specified in the Contract Documents, the term “General Contract”, “Electrical
Contract”, and “HVAC Contract” shall refer to the Contract for DEL-260G, DEL-260E
and DEL-260H, respectively.
1.04 LOCATION OF WORK
A. Work under this Contract will be performed at the Shaft 18 Delaware Aqueduct (DA)
Site (Shaft 18). Shaft 18 is located in the Town of Mount Pleasant, Westchester
County, NY on City-owned property. Refer to the Contract Drawings for the Site
location map.
B. No activity or access of any kind shall be permitted to the Contractors beyond the limits
of Work shown on the Contract Drawings, except as directed by the Engineer.
01120-1 11/2017
1363
C. Restrictions concerning access to the Site are specified in Detailed Specifications

01140 – Work Restrictions and 01550 – Vehicular Access and Parking.
1.05 CONTRACT DEL-260G General
A. The following is general description of the principal Work items, and shall not be
construed as a complete description of the Work to be performed.
B. The Principal Items of Work are:
1. Installation of concrete pads for outdoor natural gas generator and switchgear
equipment.
2. Improvements to the existing electrical room allowing for required fire rated walls
and barriers.
3. Landscaping improvements outside the building.
4. Removal of interior generator and conversion of area to new electrical room.
1.06 CONTRACT DEL-260H HVAC
1. Upgrade of the ventilation system for the chlorine storage room and the
chlorination room at Shaft 18 including air handling unit, fans, louvers, ductwork,
chlorine detectors, conduit and wiring.
2. Install a heating and ventilation system for the electrical room.
3. Install a Hydronic Pump.
1.07 CONTRACT DEL-260E Electrical
01120-2 11/2017
1364
1. Replacement of all power system components including panels, circuit breakers,

transformers, disconnect switches, transfer switches, conduit and wiring to a new
electric room.
2. Installation of standby outdoor natural gas generator.
3. Completion of Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) data

entry sheets. All equipment provided shall be supplied with populated Avantis
Data Entry Sheets. At a minimum information to be included shall be the entity
parameters and preventive maintenance procedures and schedule.
1.08 INSPECTION BEFORE BIDDING
A. It is recommended that the prospective bidders visit the Site before bidding. Bidders
shall obtain all necessary information, and make its own determinations of any and all
conditions which may affect in any way the performance of its Work and its bid prices
under its Contract. All pertinent data and dimensions with regard to existing
construction shall be verified by the Contractor. Access to the Site for inspection
purposes prior to bidding will only be on the date advertised for the pre-bid tour.
1.09 DATUM PLANE
A. All elevations, indicated or specified for refer to North American Vertical Datum 1988
(NAVD-88), unless otherwise noted.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
A. Compliance with the latest versions of DEP EHS Policies, Procedures and Guidelines
is required on all DEP Contract Work.
1. These will be revised and updated by the BEDC Division of Environmental

Health and Safety Compliance on a regular basis. When updated, a notification
will be sent out via email to all Contractors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01120-3 11/2017
1365
NO TEXT ON THIS PAGE
01120-4 11/2017
1366
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
SECTION 01140
Work Restrictions
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Work Restrictions
B. Normal Project Working Hours
C. Emission Control Technology for Non-Road Vehicles
D. Vehicle Idling Time
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any Work required under this
Section and the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump sum price
bid for the Contract.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Detailed Specification 01513 – Temporary Electrical System
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. New York City Administrative Code, Section 24-163
1.05 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Travelling Screens cannot be taken out of service during the Spring or the Fall.
B. Gates can only be taken out service one at a time. Gate 10 is remain open at all
times.
C. All equipment shutdowns must be coordinated with and approved by BWS
Operations.
D. All work must follow Exhibit B – Quality Assurance For Design and
Construction of New and Modified Risk Management Programs – Regulated
Chlorine Processes.
1.06 CONFIDENTIALITY OF DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor shall note that all documents related to this Work are confidential
in nature. The Contractor may not distribute project-specific information to any
other company or entity unless such entity has a confidentiality agreement as
directed by the City.
01140-1 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1367
1.07 ACCESS TO THE SITE

A. All Contractor and Subcontractor employees at a DEP facility or work site will
submit to a prescreening security interview by DEP Bureau of Police and Security
(BPS) and will successfully complete all phases of the investigative process prior
to entering said facility or Site, as required in Exhibit C of this Specification. The
Contractor shall obtain security clearance at least two weeks prior to the
commencement of Work.
B. All Contractor employees, Subcontractors, and visitors shall visibly wear their DEP
Non-Employee Identification Cards at all times and any representative of the City
or the Resident Engineer may request see it at any time. All Contractor employees,
Subcontractors, and visitors without the issued photo identification badge will be
required to leave the Site immediately.
C. Visitors are not allowed at any DEP facility or construction site without prior
permission from the Commissioner and only while in possession of a valid DEP
Authorized Visitor Identification Card issued by BPS. Contractors and/or
Subcontractors whose employees willfully violate this policy by inviting and /or
escorting unauthorized visitors in to a DEP facility or construction site will be
permanently banned from the Site and may result in a Stop Work Order due to the
safety violation. Visitors will comply with all applicable OSHA regulations.
D. The Contractor must submit all required information to BPS and the Engineer for
all vehicles that will access the Site before the commencement of the Work, and
obtain security clearance at least two weeks prior to the commencement of Work.
E. Depending on the circumstances BPS may implement additional security measures
that limit accessibility to the Site. The Contractor shall follow all BPS security
protocols at no additional cost.
1.08 LAND FOR CONTRACTOR’S USE

A. Land for Contractor’s use is indicated on the Contract Drawings. The available
area is limited and shall be shared with facility operations personnel and the
Engineer. Should the Contractor require additional space, they shall provide the
space off-site and all such costs and arrangements shall be at his expense.
B. Following completion of the Contract or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall remove all material and equipment from the allocated area and restore the Site
to its original condition.
1.09 GENERAL JOB CONDITIONS

A. Work shall be performed by competent workmen experienced in the various types
of demolition and removal work required and it shall be carried through to
completion with the prevention of damage or injury to structures, occupants thereof,
City employees, work persons on the Site, the public and adjacent features which
might result from falling debris or other causes, and so as not to interfere with the
use of, and free and safe passage to and from, adjacent structures.
01140-2 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1368
B. Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain catch platforms, lights, barriers,
weather protection, warning signs and other items as required for proper protection
of the public, occupants of the building, work persons engaged in operations and
adjacent construction.
C. Contractor shall provide and maintain weather protection at exterior openings so as
to fully protect the interior premises against damage from the elements until such
openings are closed by new construction.
D. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary protection of the existing structure
designated to remain where new work is being done, connections made, materials
handled or equipment moved. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to
the existing structure or contents by reason of providing insufficient protection.
E. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to control dust. Dust shall be prevented
from rising by wetting masonry, concrete, plaster and similar debris. Unaltered
portions of the existing buildings affected by the operations under this Section shall
be protected by dustproof partitions and other adequate means.
F. Contractor shall provide adequate fire protection in accordance with local Fire
Department requirements.
G. Contractor shall carry out all operations so as to avoid interference with operations
and work in the existing facilities and the work under other contracts. Refer to
Article 1.10 and 1.11 for additional facility requirements.
H. Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all necessary arrangements and
for performing all necessary work involving the discontinuance or interruption of
all utilities or services. Refer to Article 1.10 and 1.11 for additional facility
requirements.
I. Any equipment, piping and appurtenances disconnected without proper
authorization, and that are necessary for the operations of the existing or expanded
facilities, shall immediately be replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no
cost to the City.
J. Closing or obstructing of roadways, sidewalks, and passageways adjacent to the
Work by the placement or storage of materials will not be permitted, and all
operations shall be conducted with minimum interference to traffic.
K. Contractor shall repair damage caused by his operations to facilities to remain, or
to any property belonging to the City or occupants of the facilities.
L. The Work shall comply with 29 CFR Part 1926 -- Safety and Health Regulations
for Construction, applicable provisions and recommendations of ANSI/ASSE A10
-- Construction and Demolition Safety Standards, all governing codes and rules,
and as specified herein or in the Detailed Specifications.
M. Contractor shall make such investigations, explorations and probes as are necessary
to ascertain any required protective measures before proceeding with Work.
01140-3 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1369
N. Contractor shall be required to test for and mitigate hazardous materials impacted
in Work areas included in this Contract. Demolition and removal of hazardous
materials shall be in accordance with applicable Federal, State and Local
regulations.
1.10 EXISTING CHLORINATION FACILITY

A. The Contractor shall be aware that there is an existing chlorination feed and storage
system at Shaft 18.
B. All Contractor personnel accessing the Site must attend and pass the NYCDEP Risk
Management Program Awareness Facility Orientation Training for the chlorination
system at Kensico Reservoir Shaft 18 prior to commencement of Work.
C. The area of Work is within the active chlorine process area at Shaft 18. The
Contractor will be required to evacuate the work area for approximately two hours
(possibly segmented lengths of time) of every eight-hour shift for the NYCDEP to
perform chlorine tank changes and other maintenance. The time during the eight-
hour work shift and the duration of the required evacuation will vary depending on
what work needs to be performed by the NYCDEP. The Contractor should include
this additional time in their proposed schedule and lump sum bid price.
D. Contractor shall not disrupt the existing heating system in the building during the
winter months (Dec through March). If the Contractor intends to make the final
connection to the boiler system required under this contract during the winter
months, the contractor shall request and obtain approval from the City and the
Contractor shall be responsible for providing any additional heating required at no
additional cost to the City. The Contractor shall submit for approval the temporary
heating system proposed.
1.11 PROTECTION OF THE WATER SUPPLY

A. All Contractor operations shall be conducted in such a manner as to ensure the
protection of the public water supply. All necessary precautions shall be taken to
prevent the introduction of pollutants into the water supply.
B. All Contractor operations shall be conducted in such a manner as to ensure the
protection of the public water supply and watercourses and compliance with all
permits for the project. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the
introduction of pollutants into the water supply and watercourses, all at no
additional cost to the City.
C. All of the Contractor’s equipment shall use vegetable oil-based hydraulic fluid such
as “EAL 224H” as manufactured by Mobil or approved equal.
D. All of the Contractor’s equipment shall use propylene glycol-based antifreeze such
as “Fleet Charge PG” as manufactured by Old World Industries or approved equal.
01140-4 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1370
E. Equipment, tools, and vehicles shall be prohibited from use until the City or
Resident Engineer is satisfied that the requirements of Articles 1.11.C and
1.11.Dabove have been met.
F. Comply with Rules and Regulations for the Protection from Contamination,
Degradation and Pollution of the New York City Water Supply and its Sources.
This document and documents incorporated by reference are available for
inspection and copying at the Department of Environmental Protection, Bureau of
Water Supply and Wastewater Collection, Division of Drinking Water Quality
Control, 465 Columbus Avenue, Valhalla, New York, 10595.
1.12 WORKING HOURS

A. “Normal Project Working Hours” for this Contract are between the hours of 7:00
AM through 3:30 PM, Monday through Friday (except for holidays). The
Contractor shall have the management, labor, equipment and subcontracted
capabilities needed to complete the Work within the period of performance
indicated in the General Conditions – Schedule A, by working only during “Normal
Project Working Hours”.
B. The Contractor shall abide by all federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations
governing or restricting the performance of the Work, both during and outside
Normal Project Working Hours.
C. The Contractor is advised that strict adherence to the local noise control code is
mandatory, and that the Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that any
required variance(s) from restrictions on construction hours are obtained.
D. The Work shall be substantially completed (as defined where applicable in Article
14 of the Standard Construction Contract) within the period of performance
specified in Schedule “A” of the General Conditions; all in strict accordance with
the Contract Documents. The Contractor will make no claim for extra
compensation solely because of additional costs to meet the scheduled dates.
E. If the Contractor for any reason fails to adhere to the official project schedule, the
Contractor shall promptly adopt such other or additional means and methods of
construction sufficient to make up for the time lost and assure completion of the
Work in accordance with said schedule. The City may require the Contractor to
adopt such corrective measures as the Engineer deems necessary, appropriate and
adequate to recover lost time; and may also direct the Contractor to propose
corrective measures for consideration (without any obligation by City to adopt the
same), at no additional cost to the City.
F. The Contractor is advised that it has the option to work a second shift or additional
scheduled overtime, as needed, to complete all intermediate activities, contract
milestones and to meet the date of Substantial Completion of the Work as defined
by Article 14 of the Standard Construction Contract and not exceed the period of
performance as shown in Schedule A of the General Conditions.
01140-5 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1371
G. The Contractor shall have sufficient forms, shoring and other construction
materials; labor; permanent materials; equipment; tools and supervision available
to support a second shift and/or scheduled overtime.
H. When work is scheduled to be performed beyond the Normal Project Working
Hours, a second shift, at night or during weekends, the Engineer shall be informed
a minimum of 5 business days or other reasonable length of time specified by the
Engineer in advance of the beginning of such work. The Contractor shall adhere to
any local laws or ordinances that may govern or restrict the performance of such
work. Requirements for the provision and use of temporary light and power outside
Normal Project Working Hours are included in Section 01513 – Temporary
Electrical System.
1.13 EMISSION CONTROL TECHNOLOGY FOR NON-ROAD VEHICLES

A. The Contractor shall comply with all technical requirements of Section 24-
163.3 of the Administrative Code of the City of New York, and Article 5 of the
Standard Construction Contract. for the entire duration of the Contract.
B. The Contractor shall complete and submit to the Engineer the attached Local
Law 77: DEP Monthly Reporting Forms (Exhibit A, attached to this Section) to
report on usage of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel and Best Available
Technology in diesel-powered non-road vehicles for reducing emission of
pollutants on a monthly basis.
1.14 VEHICLE IDLING TIME

A. Idling time shall be limited to three consecutive minutes for all delivery,
concrete and materials trucks as well as all other diesel powered equipment
(hereinafter referred to as a mobile source) except as follows:
1. When a mobile source is forced to remain motionless because of traffic
conditions or mechanical difficulties over which the operator has no
control.
2. When it is necessary to operate heating, cooling or auxiliary equipment
installed on the mobile source when such equipment is necessary to
accomplish the intended use of the mobile source.
3. To bring the mobile source to the manufacturer’s recommended
operating temperature.
4. When the outdoor temperature is below twenty (20) degrees Fahrenheit.
5. When the mobile source is being repaired.
B. The Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Section 24-163 (f) of the
Administrative Code of the City of New York, regarding vehicle idling time
adjacent to schools.
01140-6 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1372
1.15 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit A - Local Law 77: DEP Monthly Reporting Forms
B. Exhibit B - Quality Assurance For Design and Construction of New and
Modified Risk Management Programs – Regulated Chlorine Processes
C. Exhibit C – Contractor Site Security Guidelines Water Supply Sites
END OF SECTION
01140-7 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1373
01140-8 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1374
ATTACHMENTS - DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01140
EXHIBIT A – LOCAL LAW 77: DEP MONTHLY REPORTING FORMS
PAGE 1 OF 42 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1375
PAGE 2 OF 42 11/2017
DEP 5/26/16
1376
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
EXHIBIT B
PAGE 3 OF 42
1377 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date Issued 3/15/08

PAGE 2 OF 6
1. PURPOSE
This procedure establishes specific quality assurance (QA) requirements that shall be completed
during the execution of new construction projects on processes covered by EPA Risk
Management Programs (RMP) or equivalent OSHA Process Safety Management (PSM)
regulations. It outlines DEP’s approach to meet the regulatory requirements and ensure the
quality checks and inspections established by the contract specifications and drawings conform
to the applicable regulatory, code and other recognized standards for the type of work. It is
consistent with, but provides more detail than, the Mechanical Integrity section of the Process
Safety Management / Risk Management Program. These checks and inspections must be
completed, documented and placed into the Process Safety Information and Mechanical Integrity
Quality Assurance permanent records for the regulated facility. This procedure specifically
addresses 40 CFR 68.73(f)(1) and (2) of the following EPA RMP regulations (and equivalent
OSHA PSM regulations found at 29 CFR 1910.119(j)):
40 CFR, Part 68.73 Mechanical Integrity

(a) Application. Paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section apply to the following process
equipment:
(1) Pressure vessels and storage tanks;
(2) Piping systems (including piping components such as valves);
(3) Relief and vent systems and devices;
(4) Emergency shutdown systems;
(5) Controls (including monitoring devices and sensors, alarms, and interlocks) and
(6) Pumps.
(f) Quality assurance.

(1) In the construction of new plants and equipment, the owner or operator shall assure
that equipment as it is fabricated is suitable for the process application for which they
will be used.
(2) Appropriate checks and inspections shall be performed to assure that equipment is
installed properly and consistent with design specifications and the manufacturer’s
instructions.
(3) The owner or operator shall assure that maintenance materials, spare parts and
equipment are suitable for the process application for which they will be used.
2. SCOPE
This procedure applies to all new construction or major modifications of RMP/PSM regulated
chlorination processes (e.g., replacement of all chlorinators/evaporators or installation of any
new chlorinators/evaporators that is not a replacement-in-kind) and addresses applicable
regulatory requirements, governing codes (Federal, State and Local) and other recognized
standards for the type of work (e.g., National Electric Code (NEC), Uniform Building Code
(UBC), National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA), American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), and Chlorine Institute (CI)). Existing construction projects (where design and
PAGE 4 OF 42
1378 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date Issued 3/15/08

PAGE 3 OF 6
construction specifications have already been issued for bids) must also meet the regulatory
requirements, but these projects may use alternative methods.
All modifications are reviewed under the Management of Change procedure and receipt
inspection is performed under the Mechanical Integrity program for maintenance materials, spare
parts and equipment for RMP/PSM regulated chlorine processes to address the requirements of
40 CFR 68.73(f)(3) above.
3. PROCEDURE
Fabrication and construction Quality Assurance requirements for specific chlorination process
equipment are summarized in Attachment A along with the primary codes and standards used as
the basis for design and Quality Assurance. Simpler checklists are also provided that may be
used by the design/construction project managers (Attachment B), the Bureau which owns and
operates the process (Attachment C) and the Contractor (Attachment D, E and F). The
following sections describe steps to be taken during design and construction and identify specific
roles and responsibilities.
Wherever this procedure refers to DEP Design Project Manager or DEP construction Contract
Supervisor, these individuals may delegate the execution of these responsibilities to other staff or
consultants who may be an “RMP QA Specialist” or otherwise have the necessary QA
experience. They may choose to select a single individual who will oversee the DEP RMP
project efforts through design and construction or to select different individuals for different
phases of the project.
3.1 DESIGN OF NEW / MODIFIED CHLORINATION PROCESSES

The DEP Design Project Manager and the construction Contract Supervisor will ensure that the
Design Contract and Construction Management/Resident Engineering Contract specifications (or
task definition documents) include all requirements necessary to support RMP/PSM compliance
including RMP QA fabrication/ installation execution and submittal of documentation (as well as
for all other RMP/PSM requirements, e.g., PSSR, training, etc.) items. At minimum, this will
include the QA requirements listed in Attachment G.
The DEP Design Project Manager (or his/her designee) is responsible for ensuring that all
design phase requirements are actually implemented during the design phase and may use
Attachment E to , or equivalent, to track incorporation of minimum equipment QA
requirements into the design.
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

For design projects initiated after the effective date of this procedure, the DEP Design Project
Manager (or designee) will ensure that a comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan (QA Plan) will
be developed during the design phase. The QA Plan will define all RMP/PSM process QA
requirements from ordering through receipt, installation and startup and require a consolidated
PAGE 5 OF 42
1379 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date Issued 3/15/08

PAGE 4 OF 6
implementation record. Preparing the QA Plan will generally be part of the Design contract. The
QA Plan must be submitted to the operating Bureau RMP Manager and DEP Design Project
Manager for review and approval and will then be integrated into the construction contract
requirements.
The QA Plan would define:
• The required inspection and testing.

• The type and frequency of testing.
• The type and frequency of inspection.
• The frequency and distribution of testing and inspection reports.
• The observations to be performed.
• The frequency and distribution of observation reports.
For design projects initiated before the effective date of this procedure, the DEP Contract
Supervisor will achieve compliance in other ways (e.g., assigning RMP QA responsibilities to
DEP or construction management staff and using the attached checklists).
3.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FOR NEW / MODIFIED CHLORINATION

PROCESSES
The DEP Design Project Manager (or designee) will ensure that the QA fabrication/ installation
requirements listed in Attachment H (as well as for all other RMP/PSM requirements, e.g.,
participate in Pre-Startup Safety Review prior to startup and, if conducted during the work, PHA
and/or MoC reviews, etc.) are included in the Construction Contract Specifications to
supplement contract General Article on Receipt Quality Assurance or will otherwise ensure that
these requirements are met.
Construction contracts would require that the contractor establish, implement and maintain their
own effective project Contractor Quality Program to meet the QA Plan (to be submitted and
approved by DEP) to manage, control, document and assure that their work complies with the
requirements of the contract documents and QA Plan.
The Contractor Quality Program shall include procedures, responsibilities and a clearly assigned
organization necessary to assure adequate control (inspection) and assure quality for materials,
workmanship, fabrication and operations covering both off-site fabrication and on-site
construction work. Contractors must assign a person whose function is to manage all quality
matters relating to the project and to audit the performance of other individuals who may be
doing inspection and testing and to ensure that they are performed in compliance with all
applicable standards and the contract documents. The Contractor would be required to have
personnel on site performing QA whenever QA activities are required by the QA Plan or
specifications during chlorination equipment and piping installation work.
PAGE 6 OF 42
1380 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date Issued 3/15/08

PAGE 5 OF 6
The Contractor would be required to identify those responsible for the various types of
inspections and tests they are required to perform under the QA Plan. The quality assurance
personnel of a fabricator are permitted to be inspectors if they are qualified for the tasks they
perform (e.g., for code vessel certification by the authority having jurisdiction).
3.4 CONSTRUCTION AND STARTUP

The Contract Supervisor is the person responsible for managing and overseeing the Construction
contract. The Contract Supervisor is assigned by Bureau management based on the type, scale
and phase of the project (e.g., Project Manager, Construction Manager, Resident Engineer,
Chief, Deputy Chief, etc.). The Contract Supervisor (or their designee) will ensure that the
Construction Manager, Resident Engineer, the Contractor and any other assigned Contractors or
personnel meet all requirements necessary to support RMP/PSM compliance including RMP QA
fabrication/ installation execution and submittal of documentation (as well as for all other
RMP/PSM requirements, e.g., PSSR, training, etc.) including the items on the Construction QA
Checklist in Attachment B. The Bureau which owns and operates the process may use
Attachment C to track the completion of the required QA by the project. The Contractors may
use Attachments D, E and F, or equivalent, to track their minimum QA requirements.
Verification of construction against the approved design documents is performed throughout the
construction phase. Personnel and Consultants assigned to the construction of chlorine processes
will perform oversight of construction activities, and assure, on a day-to-day basis, that the
contractor is in compliance with construction documents, including quality and safety
requirements. This oversight takes the form of: checking contractor supplied documentation;
witnessing contractor operations, inspections and tests; performing independent inspections and
tests to verify contractor results; or any combination of these activities.
3.5 COMMUNICATION OF QA RESULTS

All deficiencies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction by
the person performing QA inspection or testing. Each Contractor and Consultant and any DEP
staff performing QA inspection or testing shall furnish copies of all inspection and testing reports,
noting any work not in compliance with the approved construction documents and corrections
made to previously reported work to the Construction Manager/Resident Engineer and the
Contract Supervisor on an ongoing basis.
If the deficiency will leave equipment in permanent non-conformance with plans or

specifications, the Resident Engineer shall prepare a Non-Conformance Report (NCR) using the
example BEDC NCR in Attachment I or equivalent and submit it to the Design Engineer and
the Contract Supervisor for approval of the Disposition Plan. The Contract Supervisor shall
forward a copy of all NCRs for RMP/PSM processes to the operating Bureau’s RMP Manager
to determine if this requires Management of Change review. The Contractor must execute the
Disposition Plan. Upon completion, the Resident Engineer will sign the bottom “Verification”
section of the NCR describing how the proper completion of the Disposition Plan was verified.
PAGE 7 OF 42
1381 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Date Issued 3/15/08

PAGE 6 OF 6
At completion of construction, each Contractor or Consultant with QA obligations shall submit a

certification confirming that all inspected work was completed in compliance with the approved
construction specifications or, for items identified in NCRs, in conformance with all NCR
Disposition Plans. They shall provide a copy of all inspection and testing documentation
completed during the construction and startup and all verified NCRs. Work not in compliance
with the approved construction documents shall be described in the report and changes shown in
as-built drawings.
For construction management projects initiated after the effective date of this procedure, the DEP
Contract Supervisor (or designee) will include all requisite construction RMP/PSM process QA
oversight requirements into the Construction Management contract including a requirement to
submit a final Quality Assurance Report to obtain a consolidated implementation record.
4.0 RECORDKEEPING
The Construction Manager/Resident Engineer, under direction of the Contract Supervisor, has
the responsibility to maintain a comprehensive record of the QA activities during the work. At
completion of construction, the Construction Manager/Resident Engineer, under direction of
the Contract Supervisor, shall submit a complete copy of the final Quality Assurance
documentation to the operating Bureau’s RMP Manager, including at a minimum:
• A summary or listing of all specifications, procedures and plans governing fabrication,

receipt and installation QA.
• QAS Inspection and Testing Plan and reports (e.g., for QAS inspection of scrubber).
• Contractor and Consultant QA certifications complete with all inspection and testing
documentation for the facility RMP/PSM records (e.g., receipt QA, Certificates of
Conformance on Suitability for Chlorine Service for all chlorination equipment, NCRs,
ASME Code vessel submittals, pressure tests, calibration tests, other installation testing,
etc.).
The above may be in the form of a comprehensive QA Report, if it was included in project
design and/or construction specifications. The operating Bureau’s RMP Manager shall retain
these records for the life of the operating equipment.
PAGE 8 OF 42
1382 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT A
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION QA REQUIRED BY COMPONENT
Design and Construction QA Requirements by Chlorine System Component
Note: In addition to the codes/standards based installation QA, all projects will require Equipment Receipt QA documentation (verify equipment received meets specs and route QA documentation to
project QA files) and installation QA documentation (verification of manufacturer required & functional tests before startup and requirements below).
Type of Typical Rated Applicable Primary Ref’d Source in Design QA Requirement Construction QA Requirement
Chlorine Pressure/ Size Code/Standard/ Current Code/Std (for Specifications After the Effective Date of This
Process Temperature Range Guideline Defining QA Procedure)
Equipment Rqmt.
All Equipment NA NA Chlorine Institute None > Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s > Review/approve Contractor’s QA Plan (if provided)
below governed Pamphlet 6, Edition Certificate of Conformance for all chlorination and check that the Table specifies the correct
by Chlorine 15 equipment expected to normally be in contact Manufacturer’s O&M Manual Installation Instructions
Institute with chlorine (not ancillaries, ducts, etc.) per CI and route to Quality Assurance (QA) records.
Pamphlet 6 and Pamphlet 6 – Section 2.2: “Manufacturers or
overall process. suppliers must certify to their end user, when > Verify receipt of manufacturer’s Certificates of
requested, that their product is suitable for Conformance on Suitability for Chlorine Service for
chlorine in the specified service. all chlorination equipment expected to normally be in
contact with chlorine (not ancillaries, ducts, etc.) and
> Installation and fabrication QA shall be route to QA Records.
performed in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions and Chlorine Institute > Review/approve Contractor submittal of written
requirements. Receipt Inspection QA and Installation QA
documentation prior to turnover for startup that is
Note: Items in gray > Contractor shall submit a chlorination complete for all chlorination process equipment and
are to be performed equipment QA Plan describing how receipt confirms all equipment meets specs and installation
independent of the inspection and installation QA will be performed QA successfully performed. This must include test of
contractor. They for all chlorination system equipment, including each switch/detector/alarm, overall process
must be conducted a Table listing and referencing manufacturers instrumentation functionality checks, & installed
by the Contract and standards requirements prior to installation. system pressure tests.
Supervisor’s It shall also include system-wide cleaning,
designee (e.g., RE) hydrostatic pressure tests, drying, and inert gas > DEP Contract Supervisor (CS) will ensure
and may be pressure tests upon completion of each phase independent on-site:
independently in preparation for startup in accordance with CI • Receipt Inspection QA of Major Equipment
checked by DEP Pamphlet 6 – Section 11. (chlorinators and evaporators).
QAS. • Observation of Contractor installation QA of Major
> Contractor shall submit written documentation Equipment.
of Receipt Inspection, Fabrication QA and • Observation of Contractor process instrument
Installation Inspection prior to turnover for functionality tests
startup. • Observation of Contractor system
cleaning/degreasing, hydrostatic pressure tests,
drying, and inert gas pressure tests upon
completion of each phase in preparation for
startup.
Page 1 of 7
PAGE 9 OF 42
1383 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT A
Equipment Rqmt.
Chlorinator To Full All Sizes Chlorine Institute None > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Vacuum Pamphlet 6, Edition governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
15 > DEP CS will ensure independent:
• Receipt Inspection QA.
• Observation of Contractor installation QA in
accordance with O&M/Installation Manual.
Chlorine Various Various Chlorine Institute ASME Boiler & > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Evaporator Pamphlet 9, Edition Pressure Vessel governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
6 Code, Section VIII, > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI Pamphlet
Division I, Part Pamphlet 9. 9.
UW-2 > Provide code cert. of compliance (Form U-1A) > Verify stamp and route certificate to records.
& ASME Code "L" stamp on vaporizer vessel to > DEP CS will ensure independent:
demonstrate it meets the following: • Receipt Inspection QA.
• W-L: welding meets lethal gas requirements • Observation of Contractor installation QA in
• S-L: fabricated using seamless pipe for lethal accordance with O&M/Installation Manual.
gas
• HT: whole vessel post weld heat-treated
• RT-1: complete vessel satisfies the full
radiography requirements (100%) of all
welded joints for lethal substances or design
pressures exceeding 50 psi.
Rupture Disks Various Various Chlorine Institute None > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15; governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
ASME Boiler & > Rupture disks shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify Materials and trim meets the requirements of
Pressure Vessel Pamphlet 6 - Sections 5.1 and 5.2. CI Pamphlet 6 - Sections 5.1 and 5.2.
Code, Section VIII,
Div. I, Part UG-127
Pressure Safety Per Vaporizer Various Chlorine Institute ASME Boiler & > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Relief Valves Manufacturer Pamphlet 6, Edition Pressure Vessel governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
(PSV) 15 Code, Section VIII, > Relief valves shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify Materials and trim meets the requirements of
Division I, Part Pamphlet 6 - Section 5.2. CI Pamphlet 6 - Section 5.2.
UW-2 and UG-126 > Store in a vertical position per API 576.
Pressure Various NA Chlorine Institute NEMA 4X > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Switches Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15; governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Chlorine Institute > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1 Pamphlet 165. Pamphlet 165.
Other Various NA Chlorine Institute NEMA 4X > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Detectors, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15; governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Switches and Chlorine Institute > Instrumentation and controls shall meet the > Verify instrumentation and controls meets the
Controls (e.g., Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1 requirements of CI Pamphlet 6 - Section 6. requirements of CI Pamphlet 6 - Section 6.
level, temp.) > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Pamphlet 165. Pamphlet 165.
Page 2 of 7
PAGE 10 OF 42
1384 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT A
Equipment Rqmt.
Electrical Various NA Chlorine Institute NEMA 4X, > Electrical controls shall meet the requirements > Verify electrical controls meet the requirements of CI
Enclosures Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15; Fiberglass of CI Pamphlet 6 - Section 6. Pamphlet 6 - Section 6 and NEMA 250.
NEMA Stds Pub. Reinforced
250, “Enclosures for Polyester (FRP)
Electrical Equipment
(1000 V Maximum)
Chlorine Up to 800psi Chlorine Institute General Industry > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Pressure (diaphragm) Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15; Practice governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Gauge (Liquid Chlorine Institute > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Cl2) Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1 Pamphlet 6 and Pamphlet 165. Pamphlet 6 and Pamphlet 165.
Chlorine Up to 800psi Chlorine Institute General Industry > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Pressure (diaphragm) Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15; Practice governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Gauge (Vapor Chlorine Institute > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Cl2) Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1 Pamphlet 6 - Section 6 and Pamphlet 165. Pamphlet 6 - Section 6 and Pamphlet 165.
Misc. Various NA Chlorine Institute None > Provide manufacturer’s Certificate of > Verify receipt of manufacturer’s Certificates of
Appurtenances: Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Conformance per CI Pamphlet 6 – Section 2.2 Conformance on Suitability for Chlorine Service and
> Basket route to Quality Assurance (QA) Records.
Strainer
Pressure Various Various Chlorine Institute None > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Regulating Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Valves
Vacuum Various Various Chlorine Institute None > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Regulating Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Valves
Liquid ≥ 560 PSI (per 20% pipe Chlorine Institute 1. ASME Boiler & > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Expansion DEP volume Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Pressure Vessel governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Chambers requirement) –Section 5.5, Code, Section VIII, > Chambers shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify Materials meet the requirements of CI Drawing
Section 10.6, and Division I, Part Drawing 136 (either ASME Pressure Vessel, 136.
Drawing 136 UW-2 DOT Cylinder or Pipe options). > For ASME vessel, verify stamp and route certificate
or > If ASME, provide code certificate of compliance to records.
2. DOT Cylinder (Form U-1A) and ASME Code "L" stamp on > For DOT Cylinder, verify stamp and document for
Specifications (49 vessel to demonstrate it meets the following records.
CFR 178) code certifications: > For Pipe, verify materials meet the requirements of
or • W-L: welding meets lethal gas requirements CI Pamphlet 6.
3. Pipe and • S-L: fabricated using seamless pipe for lethal > DEP CS will ensure independent:
Fittings per gas • Receipt Inspection QA.
Chlorine Institute • HT: whole vessel post weld heat-treated • Observation of Contractor installation QA in
Pamphlet 6- • RT-1: complete vessel satisfies the full accordance with O&M/Installation Manual.
Section 3 radiography requirements (100%) of all
welded joints for lethal substances or design
pressures exceeding 50 psi.
> If DOT, provide code req. DOT cylinder stamp.
> If Pipe, materials shall meet the requirements of
CI Pamphlet 6. Page 3 of 7
PAGE 11 OF 42
1385 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT A
Equipment Rqmt.
Pipe – Vacuum Vacuum to 6 Through Chlorine Institute ASTM D3915, > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
PSIG 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Sch. 80 PVC with governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
o
212 F Screwed Joints (CI > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Pamphlet 6 refs Pamphlet 6 - Section 9. Pamphlet 6 - Section 9.
D1784, but this is
superceded by
D3915)
Pipe - Pressure Class IV- Through Chlorine Institute ASTM A106, > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Gas/Liquid, 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Sch.80 Carbon governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
300 psig, Steel Seamless > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
o o
-20 F to 300 F ASME/ANSI Pamphlet 6 - Section 3. Pamphlet 6 - Section 3.
B36.10; ASME/ > Verify maximum spacing and integrity of pipe and
ANSI B31.3 large valves hangers and supports.
Fittings Class IV- Through Chlorine Institute ASTM A105 > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Gas/Liquid, 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Class 3000 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
300 psig, Forged Steel > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
o o
-20 F to 300 F ASME/ ANSI Pamphlet 6 - Section 3. Pamphlet 6 - Section 3.
B16.11
Flanges Class IV- Through Chlorine Institute ASTM A105 > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Gas/Liquid, 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Class 300 Forged governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
300 psig, Steel, > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
o o
-20 F to 300 F ASME/ANSI B16.5 Pamphlet 6 - Section 3. Pamphlet 6 - Section 3.
Ammonia-Type 1000psi (per 1” Chlorine Institute ASTM A105 > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Union (2-bolt F&P Chem Fd Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Class 300 Forged governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Flanged Union) Eq 70-9001 Steel, ASME/ANSI> Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Rev 2) B16.5 Pamphlet 6 – Section 3 (See Note 4 for Table Pamphlet 6 – Section 3 (See Note 4 for Table 3-1).
3-1).
Unions Class IV- Through Chlorine Institute ASTM A105 > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Gas/Liquid, 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Class 300 Forged governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
300 psig, Steel, > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
o o
-20 F to 300 F ASME/ANSI B16.5 Pamphlet 6 - Section 3. Pamphlet 6 - Section 3.
Bolts Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute ASTM A193, > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Grade B7 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
300 psig, > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
o o
-20 F to 300 F Pamphlet 6 - Section 3. Pamphlet 6 - Section 3.
Nuts Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute ASTM A194, > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Grade 2H governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
o o
Gaskets Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute General Industry > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 95 Practice governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
o o
-20 F to 300 F Pamphlet 95 Pamphlet 95
PAGE 12 OF 42 Page 4 of 7
1386 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT A
Equipment Rqmt.
Chlorine 560psi, 140F 1” Chlorine Institute General Industry > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Auxiliary Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Practice governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Valves, > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
Chlorine Pamphlet 6 and Drawing 113. Pamphlet 6 and Drawing 113.
Manifold Valves
Globe Valves- Class IV- Through Chlorine Institute Forged API Class > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Threaded or Gas/Liquid, 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 800 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Socket Welded 300 psig, > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
Globe Valves- Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute Forged or Cast > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Flanged or Butt- Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 ANSI Classes 150 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Welded 300 psig, or 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
Unlined Ball Class IV- Through Chlorine Institute Forged or Cast > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Valves - Gas/Liquid, 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 ANSI Classes 150 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Threaded 300 psig, or 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
Unlined Ball Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute Forged or Cast > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Valves – Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 ANSI Classes 150 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Flanged 300 psig, or 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
Unlined Plug Class IV- Through Chlorine Institute Forged or Cast > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Valves - Gas/Liquid, 1–½” Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 ANSI Classes 150 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Threaded 300 psig, or 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
Unlined Plug Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute Cast ANSI > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Valves – Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Classes 150 or governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Flanged 300 psig, 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
High Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute Plate or Cast ANSI > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Performance Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Classes 150 or governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Butterfly Valves 300 psig, 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
(Unlined) – -20 F to 300 F Pamphlet 6 - Section 4. Pamphlet 6 - Section 4.
Wafer or
Lugged
High- Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute Cast ANSI > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Performance Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Classes 150 or governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Butterfly Valves 300 psig, 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
(unlined) – -20 F to 300 F Pamphlet 6 – Section 4. Pamphlet 6 – Section 4.
Flanged
Single-Seated Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute Cast ANSI > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Segmented Ball Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Classes 150 or governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Valves - Wafer 300 psig, 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
-20 F to 300 F Pamphlet 6 – Section 4. Pamphlet 6 – Section 4.
Page 5 of 7
PAGE 13 OF 42
1387 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT A
Equipment Rqmt.
Single-Seated Class IV- All Sizes Chlorine Institute Forged or Cast > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Segmented Ball Gas/Liquid, Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 ANSI Classes 150 governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Valves - 300 psig, or 300 > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials and trim meet the requirements of CI
o o
Flanged -20 F to 300 F Pamphlet 6 – Section 4. Pamphlet 6 – Section 4.
Chlorine 560psig per Standard – Chlorine Institute ASTM B165, Cold > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Flexible Lines DEP Monel Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Drawn, annealed governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
requirements > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Pamphlet 6 - Section 7. Pamphlet 6 - Section 7.
Chlorine N/A Standard – Chlorine Institute ASTM B88, > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Flexible Lines Copper Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 Seamless, Type K, governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
or heavier, > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
[NOTE: Not annealed Pamphlet 6 - Section 7. Pamphlet 6 - Section 7.
used by DEP]
Chlorine N/A Local Building Code General Industry > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
Emergency (and generally Int’l Practice governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Shutoff Valves Fire Code 2003 or > Performance shall meet the requirements of > Verify proper installation per manufacturer’s
latest ed., Section IFC (2003 or latest edition) Section instructions and controls meet requirements of IFC
3704.2.2.10.3) 3704.2.2.10.3. (2003 or latest edition) Section 3704.2.2.10.3.
Chlorine N/A Local Building Code General Industry > Design Engineer shall verify that ventilation > Verify receipt of Manufacturer certification of
Emergency (and generally Practice flow pattern optimally sweeps incidental conformance with IFC Section 3704.2.2.7.1
Scrubber International Fire releases from the working area around performance requirements or more stringent DEP
Code 2003 or latest containers. specifications.
edition, Section > Manufacturer certifies the design conforms > DEP CS will ensure independent:
3704, or Uniform with IFC Section 3704.2.2.7.1 or UFC Article • Fabrication and installation QA in accordance with
Fire Code Article 80 performance requirements (1 ton to < ½ DEP Inspection and Testing Plan for the
80), Chlorine IDLH in 30 min.) or more stringent DEP specs Fabrication of Emergency FRP Venturi Chlorine
Institute Pamphlet (i.e., worst-case release of 2 tons). Scrubber and manufacturer’s requirements.
89, Ed. 3 > Contractor shall comply with the DEP • Observation of Contractor installation QA in
Inspection and Testing Plan for the Fabrication accordance with O&M/Installation Manual.
of Emergency FRP Venturi Chlorine Scrubber. • Observation of contractor flow verification testing
> Contractor shall perform flow pattern and air and receipt of written report.
flow rate performance verification testing.
Top Running, N/A OSHA 29 CFR Regulatory > Conduct load test in accordance with ASME > DEP CS will ensure independent:
Double Beam 1910.179 Requirements standards and provide load test report. • Observation of Contractor installation QA in
Crane ASME B30.17c accordance with O&M/Installation Manual
• Observation of Contractor Load Test.
> Verify receipt of load test report.
SCBA N/A NIOSH Regulatory > Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s > Verify receipt of manufacturer’s Certificates of
MSHA Requirements Certificate of Conformance. Conformance and route to Quality Assurance (QA)
Records.
Page 6 of 7
PAGE 14 OF 42
1388 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT A
Equipment Rqmt.
Chlorine N/A Chlorine Institute General Industry > Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s > Verify receipt of manufacturer’s Certificates of
Emergency Kit Pamphlet 1, Edition Practice Certificate of Conformance. Conformance and route to Quality Assurance (QA)
6 Records.
> Verify appropriate emergency kit for container size,
e.g. Emergency Kit B for Chlorine Ton containers.
Chlorine Scales N/A Manufacturer’s Manufacturer’s > Contractor shall provide Calibration Certificates. > Verify receipt of Calibration Certificates and route to
Specifications Only Specifications Quality Assurance (QA) Records.
Ventilation Fan N/A Applicable NEMA Regulatory > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
(Cl2 Storage Codes Requirements governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Room)
Ventilation Fan N/A Applicable NEMA Regulatory > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
(Chlorination Codes Requirements governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
Room)
Ejector (New ejectors Manufacturer’s Manufacturer’s > All items required under “All Equipment > All items required under “All Equipment governed by
rated @ 300psi Specifications Only Specifications governed by CI Pamphlet 6” above. CI Pamphlet 6” above.
@ 90F)
Windsock N/A Manufacturer’s General Industry > None > None
Specifications Only Practice
Employee N/A Manufacturer’s Manufacturer’s > None > Functional test and audibility in all areas in and
Evacuation Specifications Only Specifications around the chlorination process area confirmed.
Alarm
Atmospheric NA NA Chlorine Institute General Industry > Materials shall meet the requirements of CI > Verify materials meet the requirements of CI
Monitoring Pamphlet 73, Ed. 7 Standard Pamphlet 73. Pamphlet 73.
Equipment for
Chlorine
Page 7 of 7
PAGE 15 OF 42
1389 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT B
Quality Assurance (QA) Checklist
for Design/Construction Project Management
1, 2 Responsible Delegated Compl.

Phase / Task Description
Person To (sign &
date)
Design plans/specs integrate requirements of Att. A of QA for Design and
Construction of New and Modified RMP/PSM Regulated Chlorine Processes
D e s i g n
under the “Design QA Requirement” column?

Updated list of codes and standards provided with a summary of changes to the
list predating the design?
“Owning” Bureau engineering and/or operations management review and
approval of the preliminary (60%) and final (100%) designs?
Provided Owning Bureau documentation to complete PHA and MOC, including
all QA documentation and as built drawings?
QA Plan submitted (when specified, or see next item below)?
Pre
Have summary / listing of all specs, procedures and plans governing fabrication,
receipt and installation QA prepared and the documents are available to support
construction QA?
Confirmed contractors performing/documenting receipt inspection QA:
> Shipping/packing documents and items themselves checked against Pos/specs
to verify the proper material/equipment was received.
> All items clearly marked/ID’d, including useful life.
> Periodic checks on items in storage subject to deterioration.
> All items controlled from the point of receipt through installation.
> All items maintained, properly stored and used per manufacturer’s
storage/handling requirements to prevent damage, loss, deterioration.
Performed/documented independent receipt QA on major chlorination equipment
Construction
per Chlorine Equipment QA Checklist?

Confirmed contractors perform required installation QA insp./testing?
Directly observed and reported on critical installation QA activities as indicated
in Chlorine Equipment QA Checklist?
Verified BEDC Quality Assurance Section (QAS) inspection of any equipment
specified in QAS Inspection and Testing Plan?
Contractor installation QA and post-installation acceptance tests (e.g., piping
pressure tests) including calibrations and instrument / alarm tests documented
per design specs and manufacturers instructions?
Acquired all Certifications of Certificates of Conformance on Suitability for
Chlorine Service for all chlorination equipment, ASME Code vessel submittals
for all pressure vessels and all other QA records from the contractor per Chlorine
Equipment QA Checklist? [Design responsibility]
Received QAS Inspection and Testing Reports from the contractor?
Verified completion of all other QA specified in Chlorine Equipment QA
Checklist and the comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan (when specified)?
1
Refer to Attachment A of the DEP procedure Quality Assurance for Design and Construction of New and Modified
RMP/PSM Regulated Chlorine Processes for specific guidance for all items on this list.
2
This document is intended to be used in conjunction with the Owner Bureau QA and Contractor QA Checklists in
implementing DEP’s above cited procedure.
PAGE 16 OF 42
1390 11/2017
________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT B
Quality Assurance (QA) Checklist
for Design/Construction Project Management

Person To (sign &
date)
All Non-Conforming Reports (NCR) submitted for approval of the Disposition
Plans? All Disposition Plans completed?
Manage the QA submittals and records during the project?
Involve a representative of the owner Bureau’s management in substantial
completion inspections?
Received Contractor and Consultant QA final certifications w/all
inspection/testing documentation (e.g., receipt QA, Certificates of Conformance
on Suitability for Chlorine Service for all chlorination equipment, NCR
corrective actions completed per NCR Disposition Plans, ASME Code vessel
submittals, pressure tests, calibration tests, other installation testing, etc.)
covering all construction work and indicating constructed substantially in
compliance with specs?
Transmitted final QA documentation (e.g., Quality Assurance Report, if
specified) and other RMP/PSM requirements for startup to the Bureau operations
(e.g., maintenance and operating procedures and PSI) for final acceptance?
PAGE 17 OF 42
1391 11/2017
________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT C
Owning Bureau Role
in BEDC Quality Assurance (QA) Checklist Obligations
Note: The following is a summary of suggested involvement of the Owning Bureau RMP staff in the BEDC QA
Checklist obligations. Note that on some projects, the Owning Bureau may take a more active role.
1, 2 Owning Delegated Compl.
Bureau Role To (sign &
date)
Design plans/specs integrate requirements of Att. A of Design and Review and
Construction of New and Modified RMP/PSM Regulated Chlorine Processes verify
under the “Design QA Requirement” column?
D e s i g n
Updated list of codes and standards provided with a summary of changes to Review and
the list predating the design? verify
Owning Bureau engineering and/or operations management review and Participate,
approval of the preliminary (60%) and final (100%) designs? comment,
approve
Obtained documentation to complete PHA and MOC, including all QA Review and
documentation and as built drawings. verify
QA Plan submitted (when specified, or see next item below). Review and
verify
Pre
Have summary / listing of all specs, procedures and plans governing Review and
fabrication, receipt and installation QA prepared and the documents available verify
to support construction QA.
Confirmed contractors performing/documenting receipt inspection QA: At Bureau’s
> Shipping/packing documents and items themselves checked against option, audit
Pos/specs to verify the proper material/equipment was received. execution on
> All items clearly marked/ID’d, including useful life. selected
> Periodic checks on items in storage subject to deterioration. equipment
Construction
Performed/documented independent receipt QA on major chlorination Same as above

equipment per Chlorine Equipment QA Checklist?
Confirmed contractors perform required installation QA insp./testing? Same as above
Directly observed and reported on critical installation QA activities as Same as above
indicated in Chlorine Equipment QA Checklist?
Verified BEDC Quality Assurance Section (QAS) inspection of any Same as above
equipment specified in QAS Inspection and Testing Plan?
Contractor installation QA and post-installation acceptance tests (e.g., piping Same as above
pressure tests) including calibrations and instrument / alarm tests documented
per design specs and manufacturers instructions?
Acquired all Certificates of Conformance on Suitability for Chlorine Service Same as above
for all chlorination equipment, ASME Code vessel submittals for all pressure
vessels and all other QA records from the contractor per Chlorine Equipment
QA Checklist? [Design responsibility]
Received QAS Inspection and Testing Reports from the contractor? Same as above
1
2
This document is intended to be used in conjunction with Quality Assurance Checklist for Project Management
and the Contractor Quality Assurance Checklists in implementing DEP’s above cited procedure.
PAGE 18 OF 42
1392 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT C
Owning Bureau Role
in BEDC Quality Assurance (QA) Checklist Obligations
1, 2 Owning Delegated Compl.
Bureau Role To (sign &
date)
Verified completion of all other QA specified in Chlorine Equipment Quality Same as above
Assurance Checklist and the comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan (when
specified)?
All Non-Conforming Reports (NCR) submitted for approval of the Disposition Same as above
Managed the QA submittals and records during the project? Same as above
Involved a representative of the Owner Bureau’s management in substantial Participate,
completion inspections? comment,
approve
Received Contractor and Consultant QA final certifications w/all Verify receipt
inspection/testing documentation (e.g., receipt QA, Certificates of
Conformance on Suitability for Chlorine Service for all chlorination
equipment, NCR corrective actions completed per NCR Disposition Plans,
ASME Code vessel submittals, pressure tests, calibration tests, other
installation testing, etc.) covering all construction work and indicating
constructed substantially in compliance with specs?
Transmitted final QA documentation (e.g., Quality Assurance Report, if Verify receipt
specified) and other RMP/PSM requirements for startup to the Bureau
operations (e.g., maintenance and operating procedures and PSI) for final
acceptance?
PAGE 19 OF 42
1393 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT D
Contractor Quality Assurance (QA) Checklist

Person To (sign &
date)
Establish a process to ensure the identification, control, and traceability of
quality affecting items used in construction and fabrication.
Obtain Certifications of Certificates of Conformance on Suitability for Chlorine
Service for all chlorination equipment from manufacturers.
Perform/document receipt inspection QA on all equipment on receipt, including:
> Shipping/packing documents and items themselves checked against POs/specs
to verify the proper material/equipment was received and they are suitable for
process application.
R e c e i p t
> All items clearly marked/ID’d, including useful life.

> Periodic checks on items in storage subject to deterioration.
> All other receipt QA on major chlorination equipment per Chlorine Equipment
QA Checklist.
Obtain ASME Code vessel submittals for all pressure vessels and all other QA
records from the contractor per Chlorine Equipment QA Checklist.
Document the Receipt QA (Att. E of DEP procedure QA for Design and
Construction of New & Modified RMP Regulated Chlorine Processes or equiv.).
Submit the Receipt QA records upon request and compile all QA records for
turnover at substantial completion.
Facilitate or complete fabrication QA inspection & testing as and when specified
in the DEP QAS Inspection and Testing Plan.
Fab / Preliminary Field Testing
Perform on-site fabrication/installation QA inspection & testing comparing the

final product (throughout construction) to the plans and specifications and per
Chlorine Equipment QA Checklist and manufacturer’s installation instructions
Inspect equipment installation, perform/document calibrations and instrument /
alarm tests per design specs and manufacturers instructions and make
preliminary field tests as soon as conditions permit of the equipment and
appliances furnished.
Complete final installation QA inspection/tests to confirm equipment/appliances
properly installed per specs/manufacturer's instructions, meet operating cycles
and are free from defects (e.g., overheating, overloading and undue vibration.
Perform all necessary corrective actions, adjustments and replacements in
preparation for placing the equipment into service.
Report critical installation QA activities as indicated in Chlorine Equipment QA
Checklist and manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Upon completion of the work, subject all equipment and appliances to final field
tests (e.g., piping pressure tests) witnessed by the Engineer, to prove that the
Final
fully assembled system and all equipment and appliances are properly installed
consistent with design specifications and the manufacturer's instructions and are
free from defects.
1
2
This document is intended to be used in conjunction with Quality Assurance Checklist for Project Management
and the Owner Bureau QA Checklists in implementing DEP’s above cited procedure.
PAGE 20 OF 42
1394 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT D
Contractor Quality Assurance (QA) Checklist
Person To (sign &
date)
All Non-Conforming Reports (NCR) submitted for approval of the Disposition
QA documentation shall include all required activities and demonstrate that the
test results meet any relevant standards (e.g., pressure loss on leak test).
Drawings of constructed or fabricated items shall reflect conditions during
construction and at final completion of the project.
Upon completion of the work, a final QA documentation submittal covering all
construction work and indicating constructed substantially in compliance with
specs. Includes all receipt inspection QA, Certificates of Conformance on
Suitability for Chlorine Service for all chlorination equipment, NCR corrective
actions completed per NCR Disposition Plans, ASME Code vessel submittals,
pressure tests, calibration tests, other fabrication and construction installation
testing and QA, as-built and other records of Risk Management Programs
documentation required by the specs (e.g., as-built drawings, operating and
maintenance procedures, etc.) shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer
and the facility representative (including, when specified, a final consolidated
Construction QA Report demonstrating completion of all QA specified in
Chlorine Equipment QA Checklist and the QA Plan).
Transmitted other final RMP/PSM requirements for startup (e.g., maintenance
and operating procedures and PSI) for final acceptance, when required.
PAGE 21 OF 42
1395 11/2017
__________1_______________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT E
Equipment Quality Assurance (QA) Checklist
of Minimum Applicable Standards and Certificates
Note: Must be used by the Design Engineer to verify that the requirements are in the specifications and by the
construction QA personnel to verify that documentation is received. Verify at minimum that equipment meets the
primary standards listed applicable to construction QA. “Certificates Required” are Certificates of Conformance on
Suitability for Chlorine Service for all chlorination equipment expected to normally be in contact with chlorine (not
ancillaries, ducts, etc.).
Equipment Primary Standards/Requirements Applicable to QA Certificate Required? In Spec? Rec’d?
Chlorinator ; Meets Chlorine Institute (CI) Pamphlet 6, Edition 15. ; Yes
Chlorine ; Meets the requirements of CI Pamphlet 9, Edition 6. ; Yes
Evaporator ; Certificate of compliance Form U-1A provided and has
ASME “L” stamp per ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VII, Division 1, Part UW-2.
Rupture Disks ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15, Sections 5.1 and 5.2. ; Yes
; ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Div. I, Part UG-127.
Pressure Safety ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 5.2. ; Yes
Relief Valves ; Stored in a vertical position per API 576.
(PSV)
Pressure ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Switches ; Meets CI Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1. contact)
Other Detectors, ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 6. ; Yes (if reg. Cl2
Switches and ; Meets CI Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1. contact; may be
Controls (e.g., covered in package
level, temp.) system cert.)
Electrical ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 6.
Enclosures ; Meets NEMA Pub. 250, “Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
Chlorine ; Rated to 800 psi. ; Yes
Pressure Gauge ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15.
(Liquid Cl2) ; Meets CI Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1.
Chlorine ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15. ; Yes
Pressure Gauge ; Meets CI Pamphlet 165, Ed. 1.
(Vapor Cl2)
Misc. ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Appurtenances: contact)
> Basket Strainer
Pressure ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Regulating contact)
Valves
Vacuum ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Regulating contact)
Valves
PAGE 22 OF 42
1396 11/2017
__________________________________________________________________________________________
2
ATTACHMENT E
Liquid ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 – Section 5.5, Section ; Yes
Expansion 10.6.
Chambers ; Meets CI Drawing 136.
; If using ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code Section
VIII, Division I Part UW-2, certificate of compliance
(Form U-2) provided and has ASME “L” stamp.
• W-L: welding meets lethal gas requirements
• S-L: fabricated using seamless pipe for lethal gas
• HT: whole vessel post weld heat-treated
• RT-1: complete vessel satisfies the full radiography
requirements (100%) of all welded joints for lethal
substances or design pressures exceeding 50 psi.
; For DOT Cylinder, verify stamp meeting 49 CFR 178.
; For Pipe, meets CI Pamphlet 6.
Pipe – Vacuum ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 9.
(to 1–½”) ; ASTM D3915, Sch. 80 PVC with Screwed Joints (CI
Pamphlet 6 refs D1784, but this is superseded by
D3915)
Pipe – Pressure ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 3.
(Class IV, to ; Meets ASTM A106, Sch.80 Carbon Steel Seamless
1–½”) ASME/ANSI B36.10; ASME/ ANSI B31.31
; Verify maximum spacing and integrity of pipe and
large valves hangers and supports.
Fittings ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 3.
(Class IV, to ; Meets ASTM A105 Class 3000 Forged Steel; ASME/
1–½”) ANSI B16.11
Flanges ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 3.
1–½”) ANSI B16.5
Ammonia-Type ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 3 (see Note 4,
Union (1000 psi; Table 3-1).
2-bolt Flanged ; Meets ASTM A105 Class 300 Forged Steel; ASME/
Union) ANSI B16.5
Unions ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 3.
1–½”) ANSI B16.5
Bolts ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 3.
(Class IV) ; Meets ASTM A193, Grade B7.
Nuts ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 3.
(Class IV) ; Meets ASTM A194, Grade 2H.
Gaskets ; Meets CI Pamphlet 95. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
(Class IV) contact)
Chlorine ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15” above. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Auxiliary ; Meets CI Pamphlet Drawing 113. contact)
Valves, Chlorine
Manifold Valves
PAGE 23 OF 42
1397 11/2017
__________3_______________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT E
Globe Valves- ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Threaded or ; Meets Forged API Class 800. contact)
Socket Welded
(Class IV; to 1 -
1/2”)
Globe Valves- ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Flanged or Butt- ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
Welded (Class
IV)
Unlined Ball ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Valves – ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
Threaded (Class
IV; to 1 – ½“)
Unlined Ball ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Valves – Flanged ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
(Class IV)
Unlined Plug ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Valves - ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
Threaded (Class
IV; to 1 – ½“
Unlined Plug ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Valves – Flanged ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
(Class IV)
High ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Performance ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
Butterfly Valves
(Class IV;
Unlined) –
Wafer or Lugged
High- ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Performance ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
Butterfly Valves
(Class IV;
unlined) –
Flanged
Single-Seated ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Segmented Ball ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
Valves – Wafer
(Class IV)
Single-Seated ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 4. ; Yes (if regular Cl2
Segmented Ball ; Meets Forged ANSI Classes 150 or 300. contact)
Valves – Flanged
(Class IV)
Chlorine ; Meets CI Pamphlet 6, Ed. 15 - Section 7. ; Yes
Flexible Lines - ; Meets ASTM B165, Cold Drawn, annealed.
Monel
Chlorine ; Installation per manufacturer’s instructions. ; Yes
Emergency ; Controls meet Local Building Code (and generally Int’l
Shutoff Valves Fire Code 2003 or latest ed., Section 3704.2.2.10.3).
PAGE 24 OF 42
1398 11/2017
___________________________________________________________________________________________
4
ATTACHMENT E
Chlorine ; Chlorine Institute Pamphlet 89, Ed. 3. ; Yes
Emergency ; Local Building Code (and generally International Fire
Scrubber Code 2003 or latest edition, Section 3704, or Uniform
Fire Code Article 80)
; Manufacturer certification of conformance with IFC
Section 3704.2.2.7.1 performance requirements or
more stringent DEP specifications.
Top Running, ; Installation QA in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR
Double Beam 1910.179, ASME B30.17c, manufacturer
Crane O&M/Installation Manual.
; Load Test performed and report provided.
SCBA ; Manufacturer’s Certificates of Conformance
w/NIOSH/MSHA.
Chlorine ; Meets CI Pamphlet 1, Ed. 6. ; Yes
Emergency Kit ; Appropriate emergency kit for container size, e.g.
Emergency Kit B for Chlorine Ton containers.
Chlorine Scales ; Manufacturer’s Specifications Only
Ventilation Fan ; Applicable NEMA Codes.
(Cl2 Storage
Room)
Ventilation Fan ; Applicable NEMA Codes.
(Chlorination
Room)
Ejector ; Manufacturer’s Specifications Only. ; Yes (may be a part
of Chlorinator
system certificate)
Windsock ; Manufacturer’s Specifications Only.
Employee ; Functional test and audibility in all areas in and around
Evacuation the chlorination process area confirmed.
Alarm ; Manufacturer’s Specifications Only
Atmospheric ; Meets CI Pamphlet 73, Ed. 7.
Monitoring
Equipment for
Cl2
PAGE 25 OF 42
1399 11/2017
_________________________________________________________________________________________
________
ATTACHMENT F
RECEIPT QA INSPECTION CHECKLIST
DEP Contract No.: Ordered by: Prime Contractor Subcontractor
Name of Contractor/Subcontractor:
Contractor PO Number:
Relevant Specification:
Description of Equipment or Materials Received (attach work summary from contract):
Yes No Verified that all items are clearly marked and identified.
Yes No Checked shipping and packing documents and the items themselves against POs and relevant
specifications and verified that the proper material/equipment was received.
Yes No Verified that the items are not damaged.
Yes No Verified that the useful-life of limited-life items are indicated on the product packaging.
Yes No Confirmed that access to these items is controlled from the point of receipt through storage and
installation.
Yes No Identified the equipment as major chlorination equipment and notified the Resident Engineer to
conduct independent quality assurance inspection.
Yes No Confirmed the receipt of Certificate of Conformance on Suitability for Chlorine Service for
chlorination and provided a copy to the Resident Engineer.
Yes No Determined if the item is subject to environmental deterioration in storage and, if yes:
Identified the following storage inspection frequency:
Identified the following storage requirements are met:
Special Storage and Handling Requirements.
Inspection Certification:
I certify that I conducted the required receipt inspection of the equipment and relevant documentation and that
the information presented on this inspection form is accurate and complete.
Signature: _____________________________ Title: ___________________________
Print Name: ____________________________ Date: ______________ Phone #: __

Follow-Up Corrective Action Required (if applicable) and Completion Documentation:
Completed By: Signature: Date:
PAGE 26 OF 42
1400 11/2017
________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT G
SAMPLE DESIGN / RE CONTRACT QA REQUIREMENTS
Quality Assurance (QA) Requirements to be Included in Design Contract RFPs:

The Design Engineer shall develop and submit a Quality Assurance Plan (QA Plan) to DEP
within 60 days of DEP’s approval of the 60% design to define the QA requirement for all
contractors and consultants from equipment ordering through receipt, installation and startup
and to obtain a consolidated implementation record. The Design Engineer shall address
DEP’s comments and resubmit the plan within 60 days of receiving DEP comments, until
approved by DEP. The final QA Plan shall be completed concurrent with the final design
specifications. The QA Plan would define:
• Required inspection and testing to be performed under the construction contracts.
• The type and frequency of testing.
• The type and frequency of inspection.
• The frequency and distribution of testing and inspection reports.
• The observations to be performed.
• The frequency and distribution of observation reports.
Design plans and specifications shall integrate all of the requirements given in Attachment A
(of the DEP procedure Quality Assurance for Design and Construction of New and Modified
RMP Regulated Chlorine Processes) under the “Design QA Requirement” column.
Design/specifications shall be reviewed against current applicable codes and standards listed
in the facility’s Process Safety Information documentation and an updated list of codes and
standards applicable to the process and equipment provided to DEP along with a summary of
changes to the current list.
The Design Engineer shall participate in design review meetings and address comments to
obtain the “owning” DEP Bureau (or Division) engineering and/or operations management
review and approval of the preliminary (60%) and final (100%) designs.
When requested by DEP, the Design Engineer shall participate in Hazard Reviews, and
Management of Change (MoC) reviews {and, for major changes, a Process Hazard Analysis
(PHA)} of new processes or process modifications at the preliminary design stage (60%) and,
if necessary, prior to startup. This will include design team participation and, at DEP’s
discretion, may also include services for Leading/Documenting the PHA.
Contract Quality Assurance (QA) Requirements to be Included in Construction

Management RFPs:
The Construction Manager/Resident Engineer shall confirm that the Contractors are
performing receipt inspection Quality Assurance (QA) as required in the construction
contract specifications and Quality Assurance Plan and shall directly perform and document
independent receipt QA on major chlorination equipment as indicated in Attachment A of
the DEP procedure Quality Assurance for Design and Construction of New and Modified
RMP Regulated Chlorine Processes.
The Construction Manager/Resident Engineer shall confirm that the Contractors are
performing required installation QA inspection and testing and shall directly observe and
report on critical installation QA activities as indicated in Attachment A of the DEP
PAGE 27 OF 42
1401 11/2017
________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT G
SAMPLE DESIGN / RE CONTRACT QA REQUIREMENTS
procedure Quality Assurance for Design and Construction of New and Modified RMP
Regulated Chlorine Processes.
The Construction Manager/Resident Engineer shall verify that the Contractors meet all other
QA and other RMP obligations and submit requisite documentation (see next section).
The Construction Manager/Resident Engineer shall involve a representative of the operating
Bureau’s management in substantial completion inspections and in verifying completion of
all required RMP items (MoC and PHA action item completion, turnover of QA information,
as-built drawings, etc.) and obtain their approval prior to substantial completion.
The Construction Manager/Resident Engineer shall manage the QA submittals and records
during the project, shall provide requisite copies to the DEP Contract Supervisor and DEP
operating Bureau RMP staff on request.
Prior to final acceptance and startup, the Construction Manager/Resident Engineer shall
submit a Quality Assurance Report to DEP summarizing the QA work and confirming that
all inspected work was completed substantially in compliance with the approved construction
documents. The report shall include a complete copy of all fabrication/construction QA
certifications and other QA inspection and testing documentation completed by all
Contractors, DEP personnel and Consultants performing QA functions during the
construction and startup. The Construction Manager/Resident Engineer shall address DEP’s
comments and resubmit the plan within 60 days of receiving DEP comments, until approved
by the DEP the Contract Supervisor and facility RMP Manager.
PAGE 28 OF 42
1402 11/2017
________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT H
SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT QA REQUIREMENTS
The following should be incorporated into RMP construction contract language.

Quality Program: Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain their own effective
project Contractor Quality Program to manage, control, document and assure that their work
complies with the requirements of the QA Plan and other contract documents. Contractor
shall submit the project Contractor Quality Program to DEP for approval. The Contractor
will address DEP’s comments and obtain DEP approval prior to starting construction.
The Contractor Quality Program shall include procedures, responsibilities and a clearly
assigned organization necessary to assure adequate control (inspection) and assure quality for
materials, workmanship, fabrication and operations covering both off-site fabrication and on-
site construction work. Contractors must assign a person whose function is to manage all
quality matters relating to the project and to audit the performance of other individuals who
may be doing inspection and testing and to ensure that they are performed in compliance
with all applicable standards and the contract documents. The Contractor would be required
to have personnel on site performing QA whenever QA activities are required by the QA Plan
or specifications during chlorination equipment and piping installation work.
The Contractor would be required to identify those responsible for the various types of
inspections and tests they are required to perform under the QA Plan. The quality assurance
personnel of a fabricator are permitted to be inspectors if they are qualified for the tasks they
perform (e.g., for code vessel certification by the authority having jurisdiction).
Receipt Quality Assurance: Contractor shall check all equipment and associated
manufacturer information upon receipt and verify that it conforms to the Purchase Order and
contract specifications and are suitable for the process application for which they will be
used. At minimum, the Contractor shall obtain Certifications of Certificates of Conformance
on Suitability for Chlorine Service for all chlorination equipment, shall obtain ASME Code
vessel submittals for all pressure vessels and perform all other receipt QA on major
chlorination equipment indicated in Attachment A of the DEP procedure Quality Assurance
for Design and Construction of New and Modified RMP Regulated Chlorine Processes.
Processes shall be established to ensure the identification, control, and traceability of quality
affecting items used in construction and fabrication. The Contractor shall document the
Receipt QA (using Attachment F of the DEP procedure Quality Assurance for Design and
Construction of New and Modified RMP Regulated Chlorine Processes or equivalent),
produce the Receipt QA records upon request and turn over a complete copy of these records
upon substantial completion.
Fabrication and Preliminary Field Testing: The Contractor shall perform fabrication and
installation QA inspection and testing comparing the final product (throughout construction)
to the requirements established in the design and construction plans and specifications and
shall report on critical installation QA activities as indicated in Attachment A of the DEP
procedure Quality Assurance for Design and Construction of New and Modified RMP
Regulated Chlorine Processes and manufacturer’s installation instructions. As soon as
conditions permit, the Contractor shall inspect the installation and make preliminary field
tests of the equipment and appliances furnished. It shall supply all labor, materials and
equipment for the inspection and testing. These tests shall determine whether or not the
equipment and appliances have been properly installed consistent with design specifications
PAGE 29 OF 42
1403 11/2017
________________________________________________________________________________________
ATTACHMENT H
SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT QA REQUIREMENTS
and the manufacturer's instructions, meet their operating cycles and are free from defects
such as overheating, overloading and undue vibration. The Contractor shall make all
necessary changes, adjustments and replacements at his own expense in preparation for
placing the equipment into service.
Final Field Testing: Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment
and appliances will be subject to final field tests, witnessed by the Engineer, to prove that the
fully assembled system and all equipment and appliances are properly installed consistent
with design specifications and the manufacturer's instructions and are free from defects.
Final Fabrication, As-Built and Installation QA Documents: Upon completion of the work
and prior to final payment, all fabrication and construction QA, as-built and other records of
Risk Management Programs documentation required by the specifications (e.g., as-built
drawings, operating procedures, maintenance procedures, etc.) shall be submitted for
approval to the Engineer and the facility representative. Drawings of constructed or
fabricated items shall reflect conditions during construction and at final completion of the
project. QA documentation shall include all required activities and demonstrate that the test
results meet any relevant standards (e.g., pressure loss on leak test).
PAGE 30 OF 42
1404 11/2017
ATTACHMENTS - DETAILED SPECIFICATION
01140 CONTRACT DEL-260 G, H, E
Attachment I
Non-Conformance Report
NCR – _____ – ___
Contract: Specification Section & Sub-section: DEP Assignment Code: P.O. to Vendor (Issue Date): Initial Issue Date:
Vendor: Material / Equipment Inspected:
Vendor Contact Name:
Sub-vendor (If Applicable): Vendor NCR No. (If Applicable): See Also DJ:
Sub-vendor Contact Name (If Applicable): DEP QA PM: Contact Date:
Description and Cause of Non-Conformance:
- NOTE: NYCDEP TO BE IMMEDIATELY CONTACTED PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF NCR -
Inspector’s Name (Print) Inspector’s Signature Date
Disposition (Check One Only):
Disposition determined by QA PM. Re-inspection required after corrective action.
Disposition to be proposed by Vendor and submitted to their Customer with this non-conformance Notice. Vendor to indicate item, condition and cause
of non-conformance, proposed disposition with technical justification, recommended re-inspection items, measure to avoid recurrence, and impact on
shipping schedule. Vendor is advised that this material or equipment may be subject to rejection and any work performed prior to resolution of the
non-conformance is at the Vendor’s own risk.
USE AS IS REPLACEMENT (As Applicable) YES PAGES

Disposition Plan (Check One Only): ATTACHMENT:
REPAIR REWORK OTHER (Describe Below): NO
- NOTE: DISPOSITION PLAN REQUIRES APPROVAL BY NYCDEP -
Prepared By (Vendor) Date Approved By (DEP QA PM) Date
YES PAGES
Release for Non-Conformance and Verification: ATTACHMENT:
NO
Inspector’s Signature Date DEP QA PM Signature Date
1405
PAGE 31 OF 42 11/2017
________________________________________________________________________________________
PAGE 32 OF 42
1406 11/2017
CONTRACT DEL-260 G, E, H
EXHIBIT C
New York City Environmental Protection

Bureau of Police & Security
Contractor Site Security Guidelines
Water Supply Sites
Effective August 16, 2016
1407
PAGE 33 OF 42 11/2017
Overview
This document details security guidelines that are often in addition to the Security Scope
of Work detailed in the contract. They are intended for DEP Project Manager, Resident
Engineer, and Contractor Personnel who work primarily at Water Supply Sites and
selected BWS Sites such as Hillview Reservoir, Jerome Park Reservoir, and Croton
Water Treatment Plant. Additional locations may fall under these guidelines at the
discretion of the Deputy Commissioner, Bureau of Police & Security (BPS) and/or his or
her authorized representative. Site Security Guidelines are subject to adjustment based on
changes in operations or increased threat levels.
Table of Contents
1.0 Pre-Construction (After Contract is Awarded)

2.0 Construction
3.0 Additional Responsibilities of SPOC(Security Point of Contact)
4.0 General Site Access
5.0 Other
6.0 Day Workers, Prospective Bidders, & Visitors
DEP Bureau of Police & Security Contact Information
DEP Police Eastview Precinct (If Work Location is East of Hudson)

Phone: 1-914-593-7500 or 1-888-426-7433
Fax: 1-914-345-1840
DEP Police Ashokan Precinct (If Work Location is West of Hudson)

Phone: 1-845-657-8433
Fax: 1-845-657-6145
DEP Police Hillview Precinct (If Work Location is Yonkers or In-City)

Phone: 1-914-663-9800
Fax: 1-914-663-9819
DEP Police Detective Bureau

Phone: 1-607-363-9000 (For Clearance Questions and/or if Work Location is
West of Hudson)
Phone: 1-914-593-7521 or 1-914-593-7500 (If Work Location is East of Hudson)
Security Division / Security Engineering Unit

Security Manager, Jeremy Larsen, Phone: 1-914-773-4415
1408
PAGE 34 OF 42 11/2017
Contractor each must appoint a Security Point of Contact (SPOC) to liaise with
DEP Police and Security Systems Engineering Division on all security-related
matters.
1.1.1. An alternate SPOC (ASPOC) must also be appointed by the Prime
Contractor and CM in the case of SPOC absence or unavailability.
1.1.2. On contracts with multiple prime contractors, the G-Contractor will
appoint the designated SPOC and ASPOC.
1.2. The SPOC’s responsibilities extend to all subcontractors, consultants, and sub-
consultants of the Prime Contractor and CM.
1.3. DEP Project Manager must notify the DEP Detective Bureau and appropriate
DEP Police Precinct Command Center based on location the names and contact
information of SPOC and ASPOC and expected contract duration. Updates must
be made of any changes. Subject line must include contract number and work
location(s)
1.4. All persons working under a DEP Contract or on DEP Property must pass a
security clearance by the DEP Police Detective Bureau.
1.5. No less than 10 days prior to the commencement of work, SPOC must submit a
Security Clearance Form (available from DEP Project Manager) to
SecurityClearance@dep.nyc.gov.
1.5.1. On the email subject line, list the contract number and main project
location, ex. CAT 210E – Eastview UV
1.6. Clearance Forms must either be typed or printed clearly and legibly.
1.6.1. Incomplete or illegible forms will not be processed.
1.7. Submissions to the Detective Bureau are to be from the SPOC, ASPOC, or the
DEP Project Manager only. Individual submissions will not be accepted.
1.7.1. The DEP Project Manager must be copied on all transmissions.
1.8. The DEP Detective Bureau will notify the SPOC and DEP Project Manager of all
workers who have been cleared. SPOC or DEP Project Manager will contact
DEP Detective Bureau to set up an appointment for the issuance of DEP Non-
Employee Identification Cards. Contact information for appointments are in
Security Clearance Information.
1.8.1. Workers who are not cleared will not be permitted on DEP Property.
1.8.2. Any additional or replacement workers must be submitted for security
clearance and issued DEP Non-Employee Identification Cards using the
same procedures set forth above.
1.8.3. Security Clearances are valid for one year from the date of issuance.
1.9. Identification Cards must be visibly worn while on site or at any other DEP
Facility.
1.9.1. Identification cards are valid for one year from the date of issuance.
1.9.2. Renewal of ID cards must be coordinated with the Detective Bureau after
passing a successful security re-clearance
Special Note on ID Cards:

1.9.3. ID Cards may only be used to access a location where the person has a
“job-related” reason for being on site. (see also Sections 3.4 & 4.1)
1.10. A security kick-off meeting is mandatory prior to the commencement of
work. The following must attend:
1.10.1. The Contractor SPOC 1409PAGE 35 OF 42 11/2017
1.10.2. The DEP Project Manager

1.10.3. The Resident Engineer
1.10.4. A representative from the DEP Division responsible for the facility or
contract location
1.10.5. The BPS Security Engineering Unit (SEU) Security Manager or his/her
authorized representative.
1.11. The BPS SEU Security Manager or his/her authorized representative(s)
will be the responsible party for BPS in meetings and for approving security
requirements.
1.12. Security-Related Engineering Issues are to be addressed to the BPS SEU
Director or his/her authorized representative(s).
1410
PAGE 36 OF 42 11/2017
2.0 Construction:
2.1. Nothing contained herein shall diminish in any way the responsibility of any
Contractor for safeguarding and protecting his own work, materials, tools and
equipment.
2.2. All security measures must be completed to the satisfaction of BPS SSE prior to
the start of work.
2.3. The contractor is required to report all suspicious, unusual, or dangerous
activities to DEP Police without delay to:
o Eastview Precinct (If Work Location is East of Hudson) at
 1-914-593-7500 or 1-888-426-7433
o Ashokan Precinct (If Work Location is West of Hudson) at
 1-845-657-8433
2.4. Emergencies must be reported immediately to:
o 911 and
o Eastview Precinct (If Work Location is East of Hudson) at
 1-914-593-7500 or 1-888-426-7433
o Ashokan Precinct (If Work Location is West of Hudson) at
 1-845-657-8433 or 1-845-657-6965
o Central number at location if site is at an existing facility.
2.5. If an unusual occurrence happens within the area of the construction site such as
theft, vandalism, civil disturbance, larceny, riots or terrorism or any crime within
the Penal Law of the State of New York, the contractor and / or its
representatives agree to inform without delay all official authorities including
DEP Police Eastview Precinct at 1-914-593-7500 or 1-888-426-7433 and to
cooperate fully in any official investigation.
2.6. If an accident, spill, or unusual hazard occurs within the area of the construction
site, the contractor and / or its representatives shall immediately inform DEP
Police Eastview Precinct at 1-914-593-7500 or 1-888-426-7433 and all official
authorities as required by law and to cooperate fully in any investigation.
2.7. The contractor, its representatives, and all subcontractors agree to cooperate with
the New York City Department of Investigation and the DEP Inspector General
in all matters within their jurisdiction and in accordance with Mayoral Order
16/78.
1411
PAGE 37 OF 42 11/2017
3.0 Additional Responsibilities of SPOC:
3.1. SPOC will be responsible for ensuring compliance with all DEP Police and
Security Directives and related facility policies by all contractor personnel. Non-
compliance on the part of contractor personnel may result in denial of future access
to the site, or a stop work order.
3.2. SPOC must submit the following project related information to DEP Police
Eastview Precinct (if work location is East of Hudson) or Ashokan Precinct (if
work location is West of Hudson) or by email prior to the first day of work.
Submissions must include the following:
a. Contract Number and Project Name
b. Name and contact information of Construction Security Point of
Contact and emergency contact list
c. Work Schedule
d. List of personnel accessing the site and company (include Security
Clearance Number)
e. List of all vehicles parked at site including make, color, model,
license #, and registered owner (include Security Clearance
Number)
3.3. SPOC should update list immediately to reflect any changes in personnel.
3.4. Identification Cards
3.4.1. All expired identification cards and/or those belonging to personnel who
no longer work at the site must be collected by SPOC and surrendered to
DEP Detective Bureau. This must be done even if ID Cards are not expired.
3.4.2. The SPOC will be responsible for ensuring compliance.
3.4.3. Names of those with outstanding ID Cards must be reported to the DEP
Police Detective Bureau.
3.5. Provide to related security booths, DEP Project Manager, and DEP Police
work location is West of Hudson) weekly lists of all personnel working at the
site. List should remain current to reflect any changes to staff.
3.6. Keys – A list of all those who have keys to contractor entrance gates must be
provided to DEP Project Manager and kept current to reflect any changes. The
SPOC is responsible for collecting keys from all personnel who no longer work
at the site.
3.7. Deliveries - provide the following information to via email or fax DEP Police
work location is West of Hudson) a Delivery Notification Form (available on
website or from BPS) at least a day in advance.
3.7.1. Prime Contractor SPOC is responsible for escorting deliveries and
coordinating with site security and DEP Police.
Special Note on Deliveries:

3.7.2. Driver of delivery vehicle must have valid driver license and vehicle
registration must be in order to access the site.
3.7.3. All vehicles are subject to search upon entering and/or exiting DEP-
controlled sites by DEP Police and/or onsite security.
3.7.4. DEP Police and/or site security reserve the right to deny access to or order
removed any vehicle from DEP Property.
1412
PAGE 38 OF 42 11/2017
4.0 General Site Access:
4.1. Governed by having a “job-related” reason to be there. Otherwise not permitted

and considered unauthorized access except in a formally scheduled event such as
a DEP hosted pre-bid site visit.
4.1.1. Violators face penalties including permanent denial of access to DEP
Sites.
4.2. Parking will be outside of work perimeter except for vehicles essential to
construction operations.
4.2.1. At some designated sites vehicles used in operations must be registered
with DEP Police using Vehicle Registration Forms (Available from DEP
Project Manager).
4.2.2. SPOC may also create spreadsheet of vehicles containing the information
requested on the form
4.2.3. Identification of sites requiring Vehicle Registration Forms will be made
in construction documents or pre-construction meeting
4.3. Keys - Distribution shall be limited:
4.3.1. Entrances to DEP Facilities – Will be opened and secured daily by DEP
Project Manager or his/her authorized DEP Representative. Facility keys
will not be given to Non-DEP Employees.
4.3.2. Entrance Gates – In certain cases as approved by DEP Police contractor
lock may be put on gate. Distribution of keys to that lock is restricted to
contractor supervisory personnel.
4.3.3. Construction Gates – Installed for the duration of construction. DEP
Police must be provided with keys.
4.3.4. Contractor must provide DEP Project Manager and BPS SUE Security
Manager with key control policy acceptable BPS SEU Security Manager and
list of all personnel with keys to the entrance gate. List shall be updated to
reflect changes in access authorizations.
4.4. Entrance Gates must remain closed and locked unless an authorized person
and/or vehicle is entering or exiting the site.
4.5. Deliveries are to be screened through DEP Police Eastview Precinct (if work
location is East of Hudson) or Ashokan Precinct (if work location is West of
Hudson) or Hillview Precinct (if work location is in Yonkers or In-City) prior to
entrance to the site. (See Item 3.7 under “Additional Responsibilities of SPOC.”)
1413
PAGE 39 OF 42 11/2017
5.0 Other:
5.1. No firearms are permitted on DEP Property even with legal permit.
5.1.1. No firearms are to be stored during working hours in vehicles belonging to
those working at DEP Sites.
5.2. If construction site is located on the property of an existing operating facility,
construction and contractor personnel must comply with current facility policies.
This includes, but is not limited to the areas of security, health & safety,
evacuations, participation in all drills, and other requirements.
5.3. Press Inquiries / Requests for Information – Do not speak to any news/media/ or
press person or any inquisitive citizen regarding any matter, including any matter
of security pertaining to DEP: Instead:
5.3.1. Refer to DEP Press Office at (718) 595-7867
5.3.2. Notify DEP Police Eastview Precinct (if EOH) or Ashokan Precinct (if
WOH)
1414
PAGE 40 OF 42 11/2017
6.0 Day Workers, Prospective Bidders, & Visitors:

(Applies only to those who are not part of the regular CM and/or contractors staff)
6.1. Day Workers (Forms available from DEP Project Manager)

6.1.1. Defined as persons working at a facility or project site on a day to day
basis and not part of the contractor or CM regular staff. An example would
be someone sent from the Union Hall for a particular job
6.1.2. All day workers must pass a security clearance from the DEP Detective
Bureau
6.1.3. Day Worker clearances are good for 30 days from the date of submission
6.1.4. Forms are to be submitted by email to appropriate DEP Police Command
Center based on work location by identified SPOC/ASPOC or DEP Project
Manager for East of Hudson projects (Eastview and Hillview). For West of
Hudson Projects all submittals should be sent to Eric Kight or his designee
for initial approval before forwarding to the Ashokan Precinct for final
approval. Individual submissions will not be accepted
6.1.5. Subject line must list contract number and work location(s)
6.1.6. All submitted forms must include a copy of current government-issued
photo identification of the day worker. Expired identification will not be
accepted
6.1.7. Police Precinct will note approval for successfully cleared day workers
and return via email to SPOC/ASPOC or DEP Project Manager
6.1.8. Copies of approved Day Worker Forms must be kept by worker,
SPOC/ASPOC, and security post where applicable
6.2. Prospective Bidders (Forms available from DEP Project Manager)

6.2.1. Required for site visits pre-construction and during construction of any
potential contractors or sub-contractors
6.2.2. Submit completed forms to Detective Bureau at
securityclearance@dep.nyc.gov. Submission of forms must come from the
DEP Project Manager of record only
6.2.3. No forms received after two days before the scheduled pre-bid meeting
and site visit will be accepted by the Detectives
6.2.5. Prospective bidders must bring current government-issued photo
identification to meeting and site visit and follow all site rules.
Videotaping and interior photography are prohibited of water supply
assets
6.2.6. Clearances for prospective bidders are valid for the day of the meeting and
site visit only
6.3. Visitors
6.3.1. Not permitted on DEP sites without prior permission from the
Commissioner or his/her appointed designee.
6.3.2. Requires advance submission of a Day Tour Form (available from DEP
Project Manager) to the appropriate DEP Police Command Center based
on location – submission of forms must come from the DEP Project
Manager of record
1415
PAGE 41 OF 42 11/2017
6.3.4. All submitted forms must include a copy of current government-issued

photo identification of visitor. Expired identification will not be
accepted
6.3.5. Police Precinct will note approval for successfully cleared day workers
and return via email to DEP Project Manager of record
6.3.6. Visitors must bring current government-issued photo identification
to meeting and site visit and follow all site rules. Videotaping and interior
photography are prohibited of water supply assets
6.3.7. Clearances for visitors are valid for the day of the visit only
Revised 08-16-16
1416
PAGE 42 OF 42 11/2017
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01241 VALUE ENGINEERING PROPOSALS
SECTION 01241
Value Engineering Proposals
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor is encouraged to and is authorized to develop, prepare and
submit to the Agency Chief Contracting Officer or his/her designee (the
“ACCO”), in writing, Value Engineering Proposals (VEPs) for modifying the
plans, Specifications or other requirements of the Contract for the sole purpose
of reducing the net cost of construction.
B. VEPs have true economic merit for a project when a net cost savings to the City
is realized after consideration of the City’s review and implementation costs,
plus related costs of other construction contracts that are impacted by the
Contractor’s VEP. VEPs shall not impair, in any manner, the essential functions
or characteristics of the project, including but not limited to service life,
economy of operation and ease of maintenance, desired appearance, design, and
safety standards.
1.02 CONSIDERATION OF VEPS

A. The provisions of this Section shall not be construed to require the City to
consider any VEP which may be submitted hereunder.
B. Proposed changes in the following will not be accepted as VEPs:
1. Water/wastewater treatment process
2. Plant or unit process performance characteristics and capacities
C. If a VEP submitted by the Contractor is similar to a change in the Contract
Documents under consideration by the City for the project at the time said VEP
is submitted, or if such a VEP is based upon or similar to Specifications, policy
or details adopted by the City after the advertisement for the Contract and prior
to conceptual discussion between the Contractor and the City, the City will not
accept such VEP and the City reserves the right to make such changes without
compensation to the Contractor under the provisions of this Section.
D. A VEP that requires a material change in Contract scope will not be considered
as an acceptable VEP.
1.03 THE ACCO IS SOLE JUDGE

A. The ACCO will be the sole judge of the acceptability of a VEP.
B. In determining the net cost savings to the City, the City reserves the right to
disregard the Contract bid prices if in the judgment of the ACCO, such prices
01241-1 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1417
do not represent a fair measure of the value of Work to be performed or to be

deleted.
1.04 PROSECUTION OF CONTRACT WORK

A. The Contractor shall continue to perform the Work in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract until an executed change order incorporating an
accepted VEP has been issued. If an executed change order has not been issued
by the date upon which the Contractor’s VEP specifies that a decision thereon
should be made, or such other date as the Contractor may subsequently have
specified in writing, such VEP shall be deemed rejected.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All approved VEPs shall deliver the same quality of product, finish, or
workmanship as originally specified under the Contract.
1.06 VEP REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Within 15 days after the date of submittal of the VEP, the ACCO shall notify
the Contractor of the status of the review of the VEP proposal. If the City
requires additional time to evaluate the Contractor’s VEP, the ACCO will notify
the Contractor of the additional review time required within such 15-day period.
B. If the VEP is not accepted by the ACCO, the ACCO will notify the Contractor
within 15 days after his or her determination the reasons for rejection. The
Contractor has the right to withdraw the VEP at any time during the review
process.
C. Any VEP may be accepted in whole or part at the ACCO’s discretion.
D. The City expressly reserves the right to adopt a VEP for use on other contracts
administered by the City when it determines that a proposal is suitable for
application to other contracts.
E. The accepted VEP shall be incorporated into the Contract pursuant to a change
order. The change order will include any changes in the quantities of unit bid
items and new agreed price items, as appropriate.
F. The ACCO will provide to the Contractor, along with the notification of the
acceptance of the VEP, an assessment of the City’s cost in order to finalize VEP
cost sharing and payment arrangements as defined in this Section. This will be
the used in determining the VEP change order amount.
1.07 VEP COST SHARING AND PAYMENT

A. VEP net cost savings and payment shall be determined as follows:
1. “Net Cost Savings”: means the total reduction in Contractor cost of
performance resulting from the acceptance of the VEP minus allowable
Contractor development and implementation costs.
01241-2 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1418
2. The City’s cost to review, design and implement the VEP shall be
determined by the ACCO and fifty (50%) percent of such cost shall be
deducted from the total Contract price as part of a VEP change order.
3. Payment for an accepted VEP shall be reflected in the adjusted total
Contract price per the following:
a. original Contract price for the Work;
b. less fifty (50%) percent of Net Cost Savings;
c. less fifty (50%) percent of the City’s Cost.
1.08 CONTRACT TIME

A. Acceptance of a VEP and performance of the Work thereunder shall not extend
the time for completion of the Contract unless specifically provided for in the
Contract change order implementing the VEP.
1.09 VEP DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Upon acceptance of the VEP, the ACCO will incorporate the VEP into the
Contract Documents. The cost to revise and update the Contract Documents
shall be included in the City’s Cost.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor’s VEP submittal shall include the following in order to be
considered for approval by the ACCO:
1. Cover letter proposing the VEP and written description.
2. Complete description of the difference between the existing Contract
requirements and those proposed, listing of advantages and
disadvantages associated with the VEP, and effect, if any, the VEP has
on the performance of the Work included in the Contract Documents.
3. Preliminary sketches.
4. List and analysis of the Contract requirements that must be changed if
the VEP is accepted, including proposed Specification requirements.
5. A separate, detailed cost estimate showing the affected portions of the
existing Contract requirements and the cost savings associated with the
VEP. The VEP cost estimate shall include an itemization of the
Contractor’s development and implementation costs along with all costs
attributable to Subcontractors. This cost estimate shall be correlated,
where required, with the original Detailed Estimate Breakdown
submitted by the Contractor.
6. Description and estimate of the costs the City may incur implementing
the VEP.
01241-3 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1419
7. Prediction of effect the VEP will have on the City’s Operations and
Maintenance (O&M) costs should the VEP be accepted.
8. Statement of time by which a change order must be issued to achieve
maximum value and cost reduction, noting any time impact on Contract
milestones and completion date. This statement shall be correlated with
where required, with the baseline construction schedule in use for
monitoring progress.
9. If the ACCO notifies the Contractor that additional information is
required to evaluate the VEP, such information must be provided in a
timely manner; otherwise, the VEP will be rejected.
B. The VEP shall be submitted to the ACCO for review and processing.
C. VEPs may be submitted at any time following the construction Contract Notice
to Proceed and up to 90 days prior to the latest accepted schedule date for
Substantial Completion.
1.11 CONDITIONS
A. The following conditions shall apply to any VEP accepted by the ACCO:
1. Bid prices may not be based on the anticipated approval of a VEP, and
if a VEP is rejected, the Contractor will be required to complete the
Contract in accordance with the plans and Specifications at the prices
bid.
2. Where a VEP has been approved and implemented by change order,
but subsequent modifications to the VEP are necessary in order to adjust
to unanticipated field or other conditions, any further change order(s) to
implement those subsequent modifications will provide for payment for
any additional Work at prices no higher than those in the Contractor’s
bid, as if such Work was being done in accordance with the original
Contract requirements.
3. In the event that the Engineer determines that unsatisfactory results are
being obtained as a result of Work performed pursuant to an
implemented VEP, he/she may reject all or any portion of such Work
and direct its removal, and require the Contractor to proceed in
accordance with the original Contract requirements. The change order
required to “reverse” the VEP shall not entitle the Contractor to
compensation for any Work performed under the failed VEP or for its
removal. Such rejection or limitation of reimbursement shall not
constitute the basis of any claim against the City
4. All terms and conditions of the Contract, including quality of the Work
and inspection shall apply to a VEP accepted by the ACCO, as if the
VEP was included originally.
01241-4 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1420
5. The Contractor shall have no claim against the City due to or arising
from the ACCO’s rejection of a VEP.
END OF SECTION
01241-5 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1421
01241-6 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1422
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01270 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SECTION 01270
Measurement and Payment
PART I GENERAL
A. Description of Lump Sum Contract Items in the total bid.
B. Allowances to be included in the total bid.
C. Unit Price Contract Items to be included in the total bid.
D. An index of the Articles in this Specification is presented hereinafter for the

convenience of the Contractor.
Article Title Page

01270-
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes .............................................................. 1

1.02 Payment ........................................................................... 1
1.03 Related Sections .............................................................. 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Lump Sum Contract Items .............................................. 2

2.02 Allowances ...................................................................... 2
2.03 Unit Price Contract Items ................................................ 7
1.02 PAYMENT
A. The total bid price shall include, as applicable, the following items in the bid
schedule of prices for each Contract.
1. Lump Sum Contract Items (LS).

2. Allowance Items (A).
3. Unit Price Items (UP).
B. Excluding allowances and unit price items, no separate payment will be made for
the Work specified in the Standard Construction Contract, General Conditions, and
Division 1 – General Requirements. The cost thereof shall be included in the lump
sum bid prices Items No. G-LS-1, E-LS-1 and H-LS-1 for Contracts DEL-260G
01270-1 11/2017
1423
General, DEL-260E Electrical and DEL-260H HVAC, respectively.
A. Detailed Specification 01355 – Hazardous Materials Control

B. Detailed Specification 01511 – Temporary Water and Sanitary Services
C. Detailed Specification 01520 – Temporary Construction Facilities
D. Detailed Specification 01740 – Cleaning and Site Maintenance
E. Detailed Specification 02316G – Excavation
F. Detailed Specification 0714E – Fluid Applied Waterproofing
G. Detailed Specification 16121E – Electrical Wires and Cables
H. Detailed Specification 16131E- Electrical Conduit System
I. Detailed Specification 16211E - Electrical Service Entrance
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMP SUM CONTRACT ITEMS
A. Lump sum contract items have been provided on the Schedule of Prices for the
Contracts as follows:
1. DEL-260G (General): Contract Item G-LS-1

2. DEL-260E (Electrical): Contract Item E-LS-1
3. DEL-260H (HVAC): Contract Item H-LS-1
B. Payment under the respective Contract Item No. G-LS-1, E-LS-1 or H-LS-1 will
constitute full compensation for all Work and costs as shown in the Contract
Documents to complete the Project, with the exception of Allowances and Unit
Prices.
C. Where the Detailed Specifications are silent on Payment for Work specified under
an individual specification Section, it is understood that Payment will be made as
part of the respective lump sum price bid under Contract Item No. G-LS-1, E-LS-1
or H-LS-1.
2.02 ALLOWANCES
A. The following Allowances are to be included in the total bid for each of the
respective Contracts. Descriptions of each Allowance are included in the sections
referenced. Payment for Work performed under these Allowance items shall be
made in accordance with Article 26 of the Standard Construction Contract. The
Contractor will be reimbursed for the amount paid from the Allowances, with no
provision for overhead and profit.
01270-2 11/2017
1424
B. Unexpended Allowances money will be deducted by the Engineer on the final

estimate from the total amount otherwise due the Contractor.
C. Contract DEL-260G General:
1. Contract Item No. G-A-1 –Unforeseen Existing Hazardous/Contaminated

Materials Testing, Remediation and Disposal.
a. Allowance for Unforeseen Existing Hazardous/Contaminated Materials

Testing, Remediation and Disposal, in the amount as indicated in the Bid
Schedule of Prices, as described below.
b. Contract Item G-A-1 is provided on the Schedule of Prices for payment

for testing, remediation and disposal of unforeseen (not shown on the
Contract Drawings or Detailed in the Contract Documents) existing
hazardous/contaminated materials. The scope of the Allowance, Work
performed, and payment for the remediation and disposal of the
unforeseen hazardous/contaminated materials shall be in accordance with
the requirements of Detailed Specification 01355 – Hazardous Materials
Control.
c. Payment for overruns and extra Work performed under this Allowance
item shall be made in accordance with Article 26 of the Standard
Construction Contract.
d. The Allowance shall also be used for the testing, remediation and
disposal of unforeseen existing hazardous/contaminated materials
encountered in the course of excavation, as specified in Detailed
Specification 02316G – Excavation.
2. Contract Item No. G-A-2 – Unanticipated Site or Building Conditions or

Interferences.
a. Allowance for additional Work caused by unanticipated Site or Building

conditions or interferences, in the amount as indicated in the Bid
b. Contract Item G-A-2 is provided on the Schedule of Prices for payment

for additional Work caused by unanticipated site or building conditions or
interferences. The scope of the Allowance, Work performed and
payment for additional Work shall only be authorized in writing by the
Engineer. No additional Work shall begin until written authorization is
received from the Engineer.
c. Payment for additional Work performed under this Allowance shall be

01270-3 11/2017
1425
made in accordance with Article 26 of the Standard Construction

Contract.
D. Contract DEL-260E Electrical:
1. Contract Item No. E-A-1 –Unforeseen Existing Hazardous / Contaminated


b. Contract Item E-A-1 is provided on the Schedule of Prices for payment

for remediation and disposal of unforeseen (not shown on the Contract
Drawings or Detailed in the Contract Documents) existing
performed, and payment for the testing, remediation and disposal of the
Control.
2. Contract Item No. E-A-2 – Unanticipated Site or Building Conditions or

Interferences.


for additional work caused by unanticipated site or building conditions or
interferences. The scope of the Allowance, work performed and payment
for additional work shall only be authorized in writing by the Engineer.
No additional work shall begin until written authorization is received
from the Engineer.
c. Payment for additional work performed under this Allowance shall be

made in accordance with Article 26 of the Standard Construction
Contract.
3. Contract Item E-A-3: Cleaning and Site Maintenance of the Resident

Engineer’s Parking Lot, Resident Engineer’s trailer and movable equipment,
01270-4 11/2017
1426
temporary services, temporary water and sanitary, consumable supplies, and

garbage disposal.
a. Description:
1) Under Contract Item E-A-3, the Contractor shall include the cost
for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals required for cleaning and maintenance of the
Resident Engineer’s parking lot, Resident Engineer’s trailer and
movable equipment, temporary services, temporary water and
sanitary, consumable supplies, and garbage disposal.
2) The Work shall be in accordance with Detailed Specifications

01511 – Temporary Water and Sanitary Services, 01520 –
Temporary Construction Facilities, and 01740 – Cleaning and
Site Maintenance.
b. Measurement for Payment:

1) The quantity of cleaning and Site maintenance to be measured
for payment under this Contract Item will be the actual months
of services and amount of consumable supplies provided.
c. Payment:
1) Payment for Work performed under this Allowance item shall
be made in accordance with Article 26 of the Standard
4. Contract Item No. E-A-4 – Electrical Manhole Inspection, Reporting, Repair

and Waterproofing.
a. Allowance for inspection, reporting, repair and waterproofing of

electrical manholes, in the amount as indicated in the Bid Schedule of
Prices, as described below.

for inspection, reporting and if applicable repair and waterproofing of
electrical manholes. When directed by the Engineer, electrical manholes
shall be inspected and a written condition assessment shall be submitted
to the Engineer. Upon written notification from the Engineer, manholes
shall be repaired and waterproofed in accordance with Specification
Section 07140E- Fluid Applied Waterproofing.
c. Payment for Work performed under this Allowance item shall be made in
accordance with Article 26 of the Standard Construction Contract.
5. Contract Item No. E-A-5 – Existing Electrical Medium Voltage Line

01270-5 11/2017
1427
Inspection and Testing.
a. Allowance for inspection and testing of existing electrical power lines, in

the amount as indicated in the Bid Schedule of Prices, as described
below.
for the inspection and testing of existing medium voltage electrical lines
in accordance with ANSI/NETA MTS-2015 as specified in Specification
Section 16211E- Electrical Service Entrance.
c. Payment for Work performed under this Allowance item shall be made in
accordance with Article 26 of the Standard Construction Contract.
E. Contract DEL-260H HVAC:
1. Contract Item No. H-A-1 –Unforeseen Existing Hazardous / Contaminated


b. Contract Item H-A-1 is provided on the Schedule of Prices for payment

for remediation and disposal of unforeseen (not shown on the Contract
Drawings or Detailed in the Contract Documents) existing
performed, and payment for the testing, remediation and disposal of the
Control.
2. Contract Item No. H-A-2 – Unanticipated Site or Building Conditions or

Interferences.

b. Contract Item H-A-2 is provided on the Schedule of Prices for payment

for additional Work caused by unanticipated Site or building conditions
or interferences. The scope of the Allowance, Work performed and
01270-6 11/2017
1428
payment for additional Work shall only be authorized in writing by the

Engineer. No additional Work shall begin until written authorization is
received from the Engineer.
shall be made in accordance with Article 26 of the Standard Construction
Contract.
2.03 Unit Price Contract Items
A. The following unit price Contract Items shall be included in the total bid of the
Contract. The Contractor shall write the proposed unit costs for each item and
calculate the bid price based on the estimated quantity included in the Schedule of
Prices.
B. Contract DEL-260E Electrical:
1. Contract Item E-UP-1: Additional Conduit:

a. Description:
1) Under Contract Items E-UP-1a thru E-UP-1h, the Contractor shall
furnish, install and test all conduit which may be required in
addition to that shown on the Contract Drawings, specified or
required under Contract Item E-LS-1, and as ordered in writing by
the Engineer.
2) Conduit shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings
and supports in accordance with the requirements of Specification
Section 16131- Electrical Conduit System.

1) The quantity of conduit measured for payment under this Contract
Item will be the actual length of additional conduit in linear feet
furnished and installed and tested as ordered in writing by the
Engineer.
2) The conduit measurement shall include three conduit bends and one
junction box per fifty linear feet of conduit, all required hangers,
supports and fittings.
c. Payment:
1) Payment for additional conduit, ordered in writing, will be made at
the Contract unit price bid per linear foot for Contract Items No. E-
UP-1a through E-UP-1h as follows:
a) E-UP-1a - Actual linear footage ¾-inch PVC coated rigid steel
conduit.
b) E-UP-1b - Actual linear footage 1-inch PVC coated rigid steel
conduit.
01270-7 11/2017
1429
c) E-UP-1c - Actual linear footage 1½-inch PVC coated rigid

steel conduit.
d) E-UP-1d - Actual linear footage 2-inch PVC coated rigid steel
conduit.
e) E-UP-1e - Actual linear footage 2½-inch PVC coated rigid
steel conduit.
f) E-UP-1f - Actual linear footage 3-inch PVC coated rigid steel
conduit.
g) E-UP-1g - Actual linear footage 3½-inch PVC coated rigid
steel conduit.
h) E-UP-1h - Actual linear footage 4-inch PVC coated rigid steel
conduit.
2. Contract Item E-UP-2- Additional Wire and Cable:

a. Description:
1) Under Contract Items E-UP-2a through E-UP-2k, the Contractor
shall furnish, install, terminate and test wire and cable which may
be required beyond that shown on the Contract Drawings, specified
or required under Contract Item E-LS-1, and as ordered in writing
by the Engineer.
2) The wire shall be furnished, installed, terminated and tested in
accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 16121E
– Electrical Wires and Cables.

1) The quantity of wire and cable measured for payment under this
Contract Item will be the actual length in linear feet of additional
wire and cable, furnished, installed, terminated and tested as
ordered in writing by the Engineer.
c. Payment:
1) Payment for additional wire and cable, ordered in writing, will be
made at the Contract unit price bid per linear foot for Contract Items
E-UP-2a thru E-UP-2k as follows:
a) E-UP-2a- Actual linear footage of 2/C #16 TSP cable.
b) E-UP-2b- Actual linear footage of #14 AWG wire.
c) E-UP-2c- Actual linear footage of #12 AWG wire.
d) E-UP-2d- Actual linear footage of #10 AWG wire.
e) E-UP-2e- Actual linear footage of #8 AWG wire.
f) E-UP-2f- Actual linear footage of #6 AWG wire.
g) E-UP-2g- Actual linear footage of #4 AWG wire.
h) E-UP-2h- Actual linear footage #1/0 AWG wire.
i) E-UP-2i- Actual linear footage of #4/0 AWG wire.
j) E-UP-2j- Actual linear footage of 500 KCMIL wire.
k) E-UP-2k- Actual linear footage of 600 KCMIL wire.
01270-8 11/2017
1430
END OF SECTION
01270-9 11/2017
1431
01270-10 11/2017
1432
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01291 – DETAILED ESTIMATE BREAKDOWN
SECTION 01291
Detailed Estimate Breakdown
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Preliminary Detailed Estimate Breakdown
B. Final Detailed Estimate Breakdown
C. Cross Reference Listing
D. Changes to the Detailed Estimate Breakdown
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work required under this
Section and each Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump sum price

A. Detailed Specification 01321 – Progress Schedule
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Detailed Estimate Breakdown: A breakdown of the (Contractor’s) lump sum
bid price for the Contract, or of lump sums bid for items of the Contract,
showing the various operations to be performed under the Contract and the
value of each of such operations, the total of such items to equal the lump sum
price bid. The Contractor shall also submit such other information relating to
the bid breakdown as directed by the Resident Engineer.
B. Logic and Duration Schedule: See Detailed Specification 01321 – Progress
Schedule for a definition of the term.
C. Work Result: Permanent or temporary aspect of a construction project achieved
in the production stage or by subsequent alteration, maintenance or demolition
processes, through the application of a particular skill or trade to construction
resources. (CSI, Section Format 2009)
1.05 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section describes the process whereby the Detailed Estimate Breakdown
(DEB) shall be developed in parallel and in coordination with the development
of the Logic and Duration Schedule in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01321 – Progress Schedule
01291-1 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1433
B. Partial payments, in accordance with Article 42 of the Standard Construction

Contract, will be determined from the Final Detailed Estimate Breakdown.
C. Preliminary Detailed Estimate Breakdown
1. The Contractor shall submit a preliminary DEB for the Engineer’s
approval within 15 days after the commencement date given in the
Notice to Proceed. The preliminary DEB shall include, as a minimum,
the proposed values estimated by the Contractor for the major work-
results of the Contract which shall be indicated in Table 1 – Preliminary
Detailed Estimate Breakdown attached to this Section.
2. The Contractor and Engineer shall meet and jointly review the
preliminary DEB and make adjustments in value allocations if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, these are necessary to establish fair and
reasonable allocation of values to the major work results spread over the
term of the Contract. Unbalanced allocations weighted towards the
commencement of the Contract term or a specific Contract item will not
be permitted. This review and any necessary revisions shall be
completed within 14 days from the date of the submittal.
D. Final Detailed Estimate Breakdown
1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a final DEB to the Engineer
within 90 days after the commencement date given in the Notice to
Proceed. The final DEB shall be based on the accepted preliminary
DEB for major work results and it must be in sufficient detail to
determine monthly progress payments related to the Work performed as
shown in the monthly progress schedule update. The Engineer shall be
the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details and description of the
values established. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a greater number
of items is required, the Contractor shall add the additional items to the
DEB as requested by the Engineer.
2. The minimum required detail of breakdown of the major work results
of this Contract is indicated in Table 2 – Final Detailed Estimate
Breakdown attached to this Section. This list is not intended to be an
exhaustive list of work to be performed or items to be installed. Greater
detail shall be provided if requested by the Engineer.
3. Approved change orders reflected in the Logic and Duration Schedule
shall each be incorporated into the DEB as a single unit identified by
the change order number. Depending on the magnitude and duration of
the change order work, the unit may require further breakdown for
payment as required by the Engineer.
E. Cross Reference Listing
01291-2 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1434
1. To assist in the correlation of the DEB and the Logic and Duration
Schedule, the Contractor shall provide a cross reference listing which
shall be furnished in two (2) parts. The first part shall list each
scheduled activity with the breakdown of the respective valued items
making up the total cost of the activity. The second part shall list the
valued item with the respective scheduled activity or activities that make
up the total cost indicated. These listings shall be updated and submitted
in conjunction with the Logic and Duration Schedule monthly
submittals as specified in Section 01321 – Progress Schedule.
F. Changes to the Detailed Estimate Breakdown
1. Changes to the Logic and Duration Schedule which add activities not
included in the original schedule, but included in the original scope of
Work (schedule omissions or errors) shall have values assigned in the
DEB as approved by the Engineer. Necessary revisions will incorporate
the Cross Reference Listing.
1.06 ATTACHMENTS
A. Table 1 – Preliminary Detailed Estimate Breakdown (Major Work Results)
B. Table 2 – Final Detailed Estimate Breakdown (Minimum Detail Required)
END OF SECTION
01291-3 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1435
01291-4 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1436
ATTACHMENTS DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01291
TABLE 1
PRELIMINARY DETAILED ESTIMATE BREAKDOWN
(Major Work Results)
I. ALL CONTRACTS DEL-260-G, E & H
1. General Requirements (Division 01)
II. CONTRACT DEL-260-G
1. Area/ Process/Location
a. Site Construction (Division 02)

b. Concrete (Division 3)
c. Masonry (Division 4)
d. Thermal and Moisture Protection (Division 7)
e. Specialties (Division 10)
III. CONTRACT DEL-260-H
a. Mechanical (Division 15)
IV. CONTRACT DEL-260-E
a. Electrical (Division 16)
V. UNIT PRICES & ALLOWANCES
*********
PAGE 1 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1437
ATTACHMENTS DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01291
PAGE 2 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1438
ATTACHMENTS – DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01291
TABLE 2
FINAL DETAILED ESTIMATE BREAKDOWN
(Minimum Detail Required for Contracts DEL-260-G, H, E)
I. ALL CONTRACTS DEL-260-G, E & H
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Site Supervision .....................................................................Div. 01

b. Field Offices/Temporary Facilities ........................................Div. 01
c. Temporary Construction ........................................................Div. 01
d. Job Equipment .......................................................................Div. 01
e. Fees and Permits ....................................................................Div. 01
f. Miscellaneous Requirements .................................................Div. 01
g. Project Closeout .....................................................................Div. 01
II. CONTRACT DEL-260G
1. AREA/PROCESS/LOCATION
a. Site Construction....................................................................Div. 02
i. Earthwork
ii. Site Demolition & Removals
iii. Plantings
iv. Site Barriers & Fencing
v. Selective Demolition
b. Concrete .................................................................................Div. 03
i. CIP Concrete
c. Masonry .................................................................................Div. 04
ii. Unit Masonry
d. Thermal & Moisture Protection .............................................Div. 07
i. Firestopping
e. Specialties ..............................................................................Div. 10
i. Fire Protection Specialties
III. CONTRACT DEL-260H
a. Mechanical .............................................................................Div. 15
i. HVAC
IV. CONTRACT DEL-260E
PAGE 3 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1439
a. Thermal and Moisture Protection ............................................Div. 7

i. Manhole Waterproofing
b. Electrical ................................................................................Div. 16
i. Electrical Demolition
ii. Circuitry
iii. Electrical Equipment
iv. Grounding
v. Miscellaneous Electrical
vi. Lighting Devices
V. UNIT PRICES & ALLOWANCES
1. G-A-1 Unforeseen Existing Hazardous/Contaminated Materials Testing,

Remediation and Disposal.
2. G-A-2 Unanticipated Site or Building Conditions or Interferences.
3. E-A-1 Unforeseen Existing Hazardous/Contaminated Materials Testing,
4. E-A-2 Unanticipated Site or Building Conditions or Interferences.
5. E-A-3 Cleaning and Site Maintenance of the Resident Engineer’s Parking Lot,
Resident’s Engineer Trailer and Movable Equipment, Temporary Services,
Temporary Water and Sanitary Services, Consumable Supplies and Garbage
Disposal.
6. E-A-4 Electrical Manhole Inspection, Reporting, Repair and Waterproofing.
7. E-A-5 Existing Electrical Medium Voltage Line Inspection and Testing.
8. E-UP-1 Additional Conduit.
9. E-UP-2 Additional Wire and Cable.
10. H-A-1 Unforeseen Existing Hazardous/Contaminated Materials Testing,
11. H-A-2 Unanticipated Site or Building Conditions or Interferences.
*********
PAGE 4 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 3/23/2016
1440
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01310 – PROJECT COORDINATION
SECTION 01310
Project Coordination
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Related Specifications
B. Contractor Cooperation
C. Coordination with Local Municipalities
1.02 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
A. Detailed Specification 01120 – Contract Summary
1.03 CONTRACT COOPERATION
A. The Contractors shall allow the City, the Engineer and other contractors or their
agents, to enter upon the Site for the purpose of constructing, maintaining,
removing, repairing, altering or replacing such equipment, materials, structures
which may be required to be installed at or in the Work. The Contractors shall
cooperate with all the aforesaid parties and shall allow reasonable provisions for the
prosecution of any other Work by the City, or others, to be done in connection with
the Work, or in connection with normal use of the facilities.
B. The Contractors shall cooperate fully with the City, the Engineer, and any other
Contractors employed on the Work or otherwise working at the Site, to effect proper
coordination and progress.
C. The Contractors are advised that, other construction contracts near or at the project
Site may be in progress on the starting date of this Contract or will be started while
this Contract is in progress. The Contractors shall cooperate with the contractors for
these other contracts as outlined in Article 18 of the General Conditions to ensure
that the Work under these other contracts is not impeded or interfered with. Any
disagreements with these other contractors shall be brought to the immediate
attention of the Engineer, whose judgment as to the resolution of the disagreement
shall be final, binding, and conclusive.
D. The Contractors are advised that they shall have shared use of Site and interior
access roads.
01310-1 11/2017
1441
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01310 – PROJECT COORDINATION
E. The Contractors shall coordinate its Work installed under this Contract and other
contracts for the satisfactory installation and operation of the facility.
F. The Contractors shall review installation procedures under other section and
Contracts and coordinate them with their Work specified in the Contract.
G. Each Contractor shall notify the other Prime Contractor in advance of the
installation of the Work included to provide them with sufficient time for
installation and coordination of interrelated items that are included in their
Contracts and that must be installed in conjunction with their Work.
1.03 COORDINATION WITH LOCAL MUNICIPALITIES
A. The Contractors shall coordinate with local municipalities as required for

performing the Work, obtaining any applicable local permits and observe local
holidays, festivities, road closures, and all other local events or ordinances requiring
coordination to perform the Work.
END OF SECTION
01310-2 11/2017
1442
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01311 - PROJECT PARTNERING
CONTRACTS DEL-260 G, H, E
SECTION 01311
Project Partnering
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Contractors shall participate in "project partnering" along with DEP and its
consultants (Engineer/ Construction Manager) for this project. Each Contractor
should also include its major subcontractors and suppliers in partnering so that
these participants may "buy-in" to the concept and work cooperatively with
other parties on the project.
B. Partnering is considered important to the overall success of this project by DEP,
its Engineer, and its construction manager. It is also important to this project
that the Contractors be equally concerned with quality, performance, budget,
and schedule and that they will endorse and adopt Partnering as an effective
tool for achieving these objectives.
C. Partnering will be effective only if all parties willingly and enthusiastically
enter into this cooperative arrangement which is supported by each entity at the
highest level in their organizations.
D. Section Includes:
1. Project partnering and goals;
2. Initial workshop and follow-up;
3. Partnering Facilitator and project charter.
1.02 PAYMENT
Section and the Contractors shall include all costs thereof in their lump sum
price bids for the Contracts.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
1. "Partnering" refers to the team-building required to create mutual trust
among the prime Contractors, Subcontractors, representatives of DEP
and its consulting firms, and other stakeholders in a construction project,
and respect for one another’s roles in the project and recognition of the
risks inherent in those roles, so that all members of the team
(participants) become partners in executing and completing the Work.
a. Unless otherwise specified, the Bureau of Engineering Design
& Construction (BEDC) will represent DEP in construction
projects.
01311-1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1443
b. The Operating Bureau is the DEP Bureau which operates and

maintains the existing or new facility.
c. The Engineer is the design consultant firm responsible for the
preparation of the Contract Drawings and Specifications for the
project.
d. The Construction Manager is the consultant firm hired by DEP
to manage the construction project.
2. The Partnering "Facilitator" is the mutually agreed upon professional
selected to initiate the Partnering effort and assist with the Partnering
workshops and other activities as specified herein and as required.
1.04 PROJECT PARTNERING & GOALS

A. To be successful, this project must achieve the following goals:
1. Construction meets the project performance standards as defined in the
Contract Drawings and Specifications;
2. Completion of the project on schedule;
3. Conformance to budgetary requirements and limitations.
B. Safety, profit, liability limitation, avoidance of litigation, reputation, good will,
and other factors are also of significant importance to participants involved in
the project.
C. Through Partnering, the parties will agree among themselves as to the primary
goals for the project and the methods that will be used to accomplish them. This
will require development of a trust relationship, not an adversarial one, among
these parties who will be working closely and cooperatively for the duration of
the project.
D. Commitment, communication and conflict resolution must be of highest
importance for this relationship to succeed. The parties mutually will develop a
communication framework and a procedure for addressing conflicts that may
arise during the performance of the Work.
1. Nothing in this Section shall change or modify any other provisions of
the Contract.
1.05 INITIAL WORKSHOP & FOLLOW-UP

A. Initial Workshop:
1. Partnering will include an initial workshop in which the basic
requirements for the Partnering relationship will be established. The
workshop will be held within 30 days of issuance of the Notice to
Proceed (NTP) at a time and date agreed upon by all parties at the Site
01311-2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1444
of the Work or a mutually agreed upon location. Attendees at the

Partnering workshop shall typically include:
a. Contractors Representatives:
i. Project Director;
ii. Project Manager;
iii. Superintendent.
b. DEP Representatives:
i. Assistant Commissioner(s);
ii. Director(s);
iii. Operating Bureau Chiefs;
iv. Portfolio Manager;
v. Accountable Manager.
c. Construction Manager Representatives:
ii. Construction Manager;
iii. Resident Engineer.
d. Design Engineer Representatives:
ii. Project Manager;
iii. Site Design Representative for design services during
construction (DSDC Liaison).
2. Quarterly half-day Partnering sessions shall be held throughout the
project in order to confirm the relationship and assure the Partnering
effort continues to be successful.
1.06 PARTNERING FACILITATOR & PROJECT CHARTER

A. The Contractor for Contract DEL-260E - Electrical shall employ a Partnering
Facilitator who will help establish and monitor the Partnering relationship. The
Contractor for Contract DEL-260E - Electrical shall pay all costs associated
with employing the Partnering Facilitator.
B. The Partnering Facilitator shall initiate the Partnering effort and conduct the
Partnering workshops. The Contractor for Contract DEL-260E - Electrical shall
pay all costs for facilities used to conduct the workshops.
C. Selection of the Facilitator
1. As soon as practicable after award of the Contract, the City and the
Contractors shall meet to discuss the establishment of the formal
Partnering process.
01311-3 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1445
2. The Contractor for Contract DEL-260E - Electrical shall propose up to

three (3) potential Facilitator candidates.
3. The City and the Contractors shall mutually select one (1) of the three
(3) candidates to be the Facilitator.
D. The Facilitator shall develop a project Charter with input from all parties. The
Charter shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Statement of goals and objectives for the construction project;
2. Identification of all project participants and descriptions of their roles in
the project;
3. The procedures for communicating both normal progress of Work and
any barriers to meeting project goals and objectives;
4. A process for resolving conflicts that may arise during the performance
of Work. This process is not intended nor shall it be deemed to affect or
replace the dispute resolution process set forth in Article 27 of the
Standard Construction Contract.

A. Qualifications
1. The Facilitator shall be trained in the recognized principles of Partnering
by an accredited institution such as the International Partnering Institute,
Associated General Contractors of New York State, or possess
equivalent qualifications as determined by DEP.
2. The Facilitator shall have the following professional experience and
qualifications:
a. At least five (5) years' experience in Partnering facilitation with
a demonstrated track record, including public sector
construction; and,
b. Skill set that includes some or all of the following; construction
management, negotiations, labor management mediation,
and/or human relations.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 30 days after the NTP, the Contractor for Contract DEL-260E -
Electrical shall provide the candidates’ full names and contact information and
the following information:
1. Resume showing certification or training;
2. Resume showing experience and qualifications;
3. Resume showing past facilitation participation.
01311-4 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1446

END OF SECTION
01311-5 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1447
01311-6 11/2017
1448 DEP 3/15/2016
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01312 – WEB-BASED PROJECT MANAGEMENT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
SECTION 01312
Web-based Project Management Information System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the requirements for the Contractor’s use of the DEP’s
enterprise web-based Project Management Information System (“PMIS” or
“the System”) to manage all project communications, workflows and document
submittals.
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any Work of the Section and
the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in the lump sum price bid for the
Contract.
B. There will be no licensing cost incurred by the Contractor. The DEP will
determine and provide the appropriate number of user registrations to the
Contractor to access and utilize the System.

A. Detailed Specification 01321 – Progress Schedule
B. Detailed Specification 01330 – Submittal Procedures
C. Detailed Specification 01335 – Records in Electronic Formats.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Use and Operation of the System:
1. The Contractor shall utilize the DEP’s web-based PMIS for electronic
submittal of all data and documents throughout the duration of the
Contract.
2. The System is required for use by all participants in the project including
DEP, the construction manager, Engineer, Contractor, and all other
users authorized by the DEP.
3. The System will operate primarily on an e-Builder, Inc. (www.e-
builder.net) platform that will be administered by DEP and the
construction manager. The joint use of this System will facilitate
electronic exchange of information, automation of key processes, and
overall management of the Contract.
01312-1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1449
INFORMATION SYSTEM
4. The System shall be the primary means of Project information

submission and management. When required by DEP or its
representatives, paper documents shall also be provided.
B. User Access Limitations and Data Ownership
1. DEP, the construction manager and the Engineer will control access to
the System by allowing access and assigning user profiles to authorized
Contractor and project personnel. User roles will define levels of access
to the System, and determine assigned role-based authorizations and
user privileges. Subcontractors and suppliers will be given access to the
System through the Contractor. Entry of information exchanged and
transferred between the Contractor and its Sub-contractors and suppliers
through the System shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Secure username and password will be required for controlled access to
the System for all authorized participants via a web URL address. The
Contractor shall designate its staff to be granted access to the System.
3. Data entered in a collaborative mode (entered with the intent to share as
determined by permissions and workflows within the System) by DEP
and its representatives and the Contractor will be owned by DEP.
C. Automated System Notification and Audit Log Tracking
1. Any review comments made (or the failure to make review comments)
by DEP and its representatives on Contractor-submitted documentation
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible
for managing, tracking, and documenting the Work to comply with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The City’s acceptance
through automated System notifications or audit logs extends only to
the fact that the documentation was submitted and does not constitute
substantive approval of the Contractor's submitted information.
D. Computer Requirements
1. The System will have a minimum bandwidth of 4MB/s download and
1MB/s upload. A faster connection is recommended (1.5MB per
concurrent user should be used as a planning factor) and may be used,
but uploading time considerations by the Contractor when uploading
pictures and files to the System shall be based on the bandwidth defined
herein.
2. Once implemented on the project, if the System does not meet its
minimum performance standards, as listed below, the Contractor shall
make the corrections necessary to its computers or network until the
standards are met.
01312-2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1450
INFORMATION SYSTEM
3. The required minimum PMIS performance standards, and the higher,

recommended levels of performance, are as follows:
a. File download speed
i. One (1) second per MB of data recommended (e.g. one
(1) 20MB file should download in less than 20 seconds)
ii. Five (5) seconds per MB of data minimum (e.g. one (1)
20MB file must download in less than 100 seconds)
b. File upload speed
i. One (1) second per MB of data recommended (e.g. one
(1) 20MB file should upload in less than 20 seconds)
ii. Five (5) seconds per MB of data minimum (e.g. one (1)
20MB file must upload in less than 100 seconds)
4. The Contractor shall use computer hardware and software that meets the
requirements of the System. Computers shall be less than three (3) years
old. As recommendations are modified by the System provider, the
System will be upgraded to meet those recommendations or better. Any
need for upgrading of the Contractor's computer systems will not be
justification for a cost or time modification to the Contract.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that its authorized System users have access
to the public internet from a computer system running a currently
supported Microsoft Windows operating system and Microsoft Internet
Explorer web browser. The connection to the internet should be high
speed (broadband) as described under “Computer Requirements,”
above. The Contractor shall ensure that anti-virus and anti-malware
software is installed and maintained on all computers given access to
PMIS.
E. Contractor Responsibilities
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the validity of its information
placed in the System and for the abilities of its personnel to use the
System. Accepted users shall be knowledgeable in the use of computers,
including internet browsers, email programs, CAD drawing
applications, and Adobe portable document format (PDF) document
conversion programs. The Contractor shall utilize the existing forms and
processes in the System to the maximum extent possible. If an additional
form is required that does not exist in the System, the Contractor shall
request approval to develop such form or for one (1) to be provided by
DEP. Adobe PDF documents will be created through electronic
conversion rather than optically scanned. The Contractor, in
coordination with the construction manager, is responsible for the
training of its personnel in the use of the System (beyond what is
provided by DEP) and of the other programs indicated above, as needed.
01312-3 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1451
INFORMATION SYSTEM
2. DEP owns the PMIS, and will provide initial training and rollout
services after Contract award. DEP will provide overall System
administration during the Contract period. The construction manager
will have a System administrator for the project with limited System
administration support responsibilities including ongoing training of the
Contractor team.
3. The Contractor shall provide a list of its key personnel designated for
access to the System for the City’s approval. The Contractor is
responsible for timely notifying the City and the Engineer of any
changes in personnel that require adding or removing authorized users
from the System. DEP reserves the right to perform a security check on
all potential users. The Contractor may be given the rights to provide
System access to additional personnel or Subcontractors. .
4. The System user license fees will be paid by DEP.
F. Connectivity
1. PMIS is a web-based environment and therefore subject to the inherent
speed and connectivity problems of the internet. The Contractor is
responsible for its own connectivity to the Internet. The System’s
response time is dependent on the equipment used to access it, including
processor speed, internet access speed, etc. and current traffic on the
internet. The City will not be liable for damages resulting from any
delays associated with the use of the System including, but not limited
to: slow response time, downtime periods, connectivity problems, or
loss of information. Moreover, such delay shall not be deemed a
sufficient basis for a time extension of or cost adjustment to the
Contract.
G. Training
1. DEP, through the System vendor or the System vendor’s qualified
representative, will provide on-site training in the use and functionality
of the System. Training sessions will be provided for employees of the
construction manager, Engineer, the City, and the Contractor. Each
training session will be for eight (8) hours duration. The Contractor shall
have two (2) qualified persons attend the training. One (1) refresher
training session will be provided upon request.

A. All Contractor representatives participating in workflows and PMIS processes
(e.g. RFIs, submittals, Non Conformance Reports, etc.) shall have a minimum
of three (3) years of experience in the use of Microsoft Word, Excel, and
Internet Explorer. The Contractor’s Document Control Specialist shall be
experienced and trained in the use of entering and monitoring documentation
into a web-based document management system, e.g., e-Builder, Meridian
01312-4 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1452
INFORMATION SYSTEM
Prolog, Oracle-Primavera Contract Manager, or an equivalent system. The

Document Control Specialist shall be knowledgeable of the status of all
Contract Documentation aspects of the Work throughout the term of the
Contract.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Within thirty days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall
submit for approval by the Engineer, a list of the Contractor's and its
Subcontractor’s key personnel who have been designated to have access to the
System. The list shall include descriptions of the designated individual’s roles
and responsibilities for this Project. The Contractor should also identify its
organization’s System administrator on the list.
B. The Contractor shall submit the name and qualifications of its designated
Document Control Specialist. Any change in the individual serving as
Document Control Specialist shall be submitted to and coordinated with the
construction manager.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SYSTEM UTILIZATION

A. The System shall be utilized in connection with all submittal preparation and
information management required under this Contract. Requirements
contained in this Paragraph 3.01 are in addition to the applicable submittal and
documentation requirements of other Sections of the Specifications, including
without limitation, Detailed Specification 01330 – Submittal Procedures and
Detailed Specification 01335 – Records in Electronic Formats.
B. All submittals detailed in design drawings and related Specifications shall be
submitted by the Contractor as CAD.dwg files and PDF files through the
System submittal workflow process.
C. Shop Drawing and design data documents shall be submitted as CAD.dwg files
and PDF files through the System submittal work flow process. Examples of
Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to:
1. Standard manufacturers’ installation drawings;
2. Drawings prepared to illustrate portions of the Work designed or
developed by the Contractor;
3. Steel fabrication, piece, and erection drawings.
D. Product catalog data and manufacturers’ instructions shall be submitted as PDF
files through the System submittal work flow process. The PDF files should be
01312-5 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1453
INFORMATION SYSTEM
the original, searchable PDF files from the manufacturer and not scanned files
which are not searchable. Examples of product data include, but are not limited
to:
1. Manufacturers’ printed literature;
2. Preprinted product specification data and installation instructions.
E. All correspondence and pre-construction administrative submittals shall be
submitted using the System. Examples of administrative submittals include, but
are not limited to:
1. Digging permits and notices for excavation;
2. Requests for Deviation (RFDs) for product substitutions;
3. List of contact personnel;
4. Notices for roadway interruption, Work outside regular hours, and
utility cut overs;
5. Requests for Information (RFIs);
6. Network Analysis Schedules and associated reports and updates;
7. Each schedule submittal specified in Detailed Specification 01321 –
Progress Schedule shall be submitted as a native backed-up file (.PRX
or XER) of the scheduling program being used. The schedule will also
be posted as a PDF file in the format specified in Detailed Specification
01321 – Progress Schedule.
8. Plans for safety, demolition, environmental protection, and similar
activities;
9. Quality control plan(s), testing plan and log, quality control reports,
production reports, quality control specialist reports, preparatory phase
checklist, initial phase checklist, field test reports, summary reports,
rework items list, etc.;
10. Meeting minutes for quality control meetings, progress meetings, pre-
installation meetings, etc;
11. Any general correspondence submitted.
F. Compliance submittals such as test reports, certificates, and manufacturer’s
field report submittals shall be submitted through the System as PDF
attachments. Examples of compliance submittals include, but are not limited to:
1. Field test reports;
2. Quality control certifications;
3. Manufacturers’ documentation and certifications for quality of products
and materials provided.
01312-6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1454
INFORMATION SYSTEM
G. Record submittals such as operation and maintenance data and closeout

submittals shall be submitted through the System as PDF documents during the
approval and review stage as specified, with a hard copy (paper) set of
documents submitted for final. Examples of record submittals include, but are
not limited to:
1. Operation and maintenance manuals: final documents shall be
submitted as specified;
2. As-built Drawings: final documents shall be submitted as specified;
3. Extra materials, spare stock, etc.: submittal forms shall indicate when
actual materials are to be submitted;
H. Financial submittals such as schedule of value, pay estimates and change order
request proposals shall be submitted through the System. Supporting material
for pay estimates and change order requests shall be submitted through the
System as PDF attachments. Upon acceptance of corrected “pencil copies” of
payment estimates, hard copies shall be submitted for processing. Examples of
financial submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Contractor’s schedule of values;
2. Contractor’s monthly progress payment requests
3. Contract change order proposals requested by the City.
END OF SECTION
01312-7 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1455
INFORMATION SYSTEM
01312-8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1456
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01321 – PROGRESS SCHEDULE
SECTION 01321
Progress Schedule
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. CPM and Project Schedule Software
2. Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
3. Activities and Activity Code Structure
4. Sequence and Interdependence of Work Activities
5. Project Calendars
6. Activity Labor and Resource Data
7. CPM Progress Meeting and Reports
8. Remedial Measures and Recovery Schedule
B. Wherever the words “the Contractor” are used, it shall be taken to mean “each
Contractor”. Where an individual Contractor is responsible for a particular item
of work, the Specifications shall specifically name that Contractor.
C. For convenience, an index of this Section is presented below:
Article Description Page

PART 1 GENERAL .......................................................................................1
1.01 Summary ........................................................................................1
1.02 Payment ........................................................................................2
1.03 Definitions........................................................................................2
1.04 CPM & Project Schedule Software..................................................4
1.05 Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) .................................................5
1.06 Activities ........................................................................................5
1.07 Activity Code Structure ...................................................................6
1.08 Sequence And Interdependence Of Work Activities .......................7
1.09 Project Calendars .............................................................................9
1.10 Activity Labor And Resource Data..................................................9
1.11 Quality Assurance ..........................................................................10
1.12 Submittals ......................................................................................11
1.13 Narrative Reports ...........................................................................14
1.14 Cpm Progress Meeting And Reports .............................................16
1.15 Remedial Measures And Recovery Schedule ................................19
1.16 Attachments ...................................................................................20
01321-1 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1457
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) ...........................................................20

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) .........................................................20
1.02 PAYMENT
A. The Contractor shall include the cost for furnishing the construction scheduling
services as described herein in its lump sum price bid for the Contract. The
Contractor for Contract DEL-260E must supply adequate funding to procure a
qualified CPM scheduling consultant for the duration of the Contract.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
Term Definition
Activity A representation of a discrete portion of the overall
scope of Work or an event through Duration and
description.
Baseline Construction The planned, detailed Critical Path Method (CPM)
Schedule schedule of activities, including all Logic, Durations,
Resource and Cost Loading, and showing the entire
scope of Work, which has been accepted by DEP.
Critical Path Method (CPM) A management technique used to plan and control a
project which combines all relevant information into a
single plan defining the sequence and Duration of
operations, and depicting the interrelationship of the
Work elements required to complete the project. The
critical path is defined as the longest sequence of
activities in a network which establishes the minimum
length of time for accomplishment of the end event of
the project.
Current Construction The most recently updated schedule that captures
Schedule progress to date and forecasts the Early Start/Early
Finish for each Activity and the remaining cash flow,
depicted with the open bar chart activity line with
corresponding schedule dates shown.
Data Date The date used as a starting point for scheduling
calculations. The Data Date is changed to the current
end of period date when a schedule is updated for
progress.
01321-2 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1458
Term Definition
Duration The amount of time, in workdays, an Activity will take
to perform once begun and continuously performed
until complete.
Early Finish The earliest estimated date an Activity is calculated to
be complete, based on the estimated performance of all
prior Activities to which the Activity is logically
connected in a progressive relationship.
Early Start The earliest estimated date an Activity is calculated to
begin, based on the estimated performance of all prior
Activities to which the Activity is logically connected
in a progressive relationship.
Float The calculated amount of time that the estimated start
or finish of an Activity can be delayed without
impacting the start or finish of other downstream
Activities logically connected in a progressive
relationship.
Fragnet Fragmentary network: a portion of the project schedule
detailing impacts of an event on specific activities in
the broader schedule.
Late Finish An estimate of the latest plausible date an Activity’s
completion can be postponed until without rendering
as unachievable the required completion of any
downstream milestones to which the Activity is
Logically connected to in a progressive relationship.
Late Start An estimate of the latest plausible date an Activity’s
start can be postponed until without rendering as
unachievable the required completion of any
downstream milestones to which the Activity is
Logically connected to in a progressive relationship.
Logic A direct progressive relationship between Activities
where one Activity’s performance restricts the
performance of another Activity
Original Duration The estimated amount of time, in workdays, an
Activity is expected to take to complete at the
beginning of a project as anticipated by the Contractor
based on its planned means and methods at time of bid
and documented in the baseline.
01321-3 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1459
Term Definition
Percent Complete The percentage of the scope of Work represented by an
Activity completed as of the Data Date calculated by
dividing the progress earned by the budgeted value.
Remaining Duration The amount of time, in workdays, the remaining scope
of Work represented by an Activity is expected to take
to complete at the current Data Date
Resource and Cost Loading Values assigned for estimated manpower, equipment
and/or materials necessary to complete the scope of
Work represented by a specific Activity.
Total Float The amount of time the start or finish of an Activity
can be delayed without affecting the project
completion date.
Work Breakdown Structure WBS is a deliverable-oriented decomposition of a
(WBS) project into smaller components. A WBS also
provides the necessary framework for detailed cost
estimating and control along with providing guidance
for schedule development and control.
1.04 CPM & PROJECT SCHEDULE SOFTWARE

A. The Contractor for the Electrical Contract to obtain a CPM scheduling
consultant to develop and maintain the update of the CPM schedule plan for the
work included under all applicable Prime Contracts (i.e., General, HVAC, and
Electrical Contracts). This consultant, along with the Contractors, is expected
to work closely with the Resident Engineer to deliver acceptable products
outlined in this Section.
B. Critical Path Method – The CPM type construction schedule will be used to
monitor Contract progress. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing
all information concerning the sequencing, Logic and Duration of all Activities
as well as providing the electronic schedule file produced in the Primavera
Project Management (.xer) format. Once the initial Baseline Construction
Schedule is accepted by the Engineer, the Electrical Contractor shall be
responsible for preparing and submitting monthly update information regarding
schedule Logic, physical Percent Complete, actual start and finish dates,
Duration changes, added and deleted Activities, change orders and related
reports and schedules, including the updated Primavera Project Management
(.xer) format electronic file.
01321-4 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1460
1.05 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE (WBS)

A. WBS is a deliverable-oriented decomposition of a project into smaller
components. A WBS also provides the necessary framework for detailed cost
estimating and control along with providing guidance for schedule development
and control. The WBS depicted in Exhibit 1, attached to this Section, reflects
the minimum structure needed for reporting and the Contractor is expected to
define and add additional lower levels as needed.
1.06 ACTIVITIES
A. Activities included in the CPM schedule shall be of sufficient detail to assure
adequate planning and execution of the Work, such that, in the judgment of the
Engineer, it provides an appropriate basis for forecasting, monitoring and
evaluating the progress of the Work.
1. Activities shall conform to the following requirements:
a. Subdivide the total scope of Contract Work into Activities of
Duration no longer than twenty working days each, except as
to non-construction activities (such as purchase of materials,
delivery of materials, delivery of equipment and concrete
curing) and any other Activities for which the Engineer may
approve longer Duration. The Duration of the Activities
representing the Engineer’s approval of items such as Shop
Drawing submittals, drawing submittals, requests for
manufacturer approval, requests for Subcontractor approval,
etc. shall not be less than twenty calendar days but may be
longer if the detail and complexity of the submittal warrant.
b. The construction time as determined by the CPM schedule
from Early Start to Late Finish for any sub-phase, phase or the
entire project shall not exceed the Contract time specified or
shown in the Contract Documents.
c. One day shall be the smallest time unit shown unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
d. Activity descriptions shall contain consistent terminology such
that the scope of Work represented is readily identifiable for
assessment of completion.
e. Activities labeled "start," "continue," or "complete," will not be
allowed. Lead and lags will be acceptable only if the
description accurately identifies such a restraint and if they are
realistic with respect to the scheduling and sequencing of the
Work and overall control of the project.
f. Show the following on each Activity, as directed by the
Engineer:
01321-5 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1461
i. Activity number consistent with Engineer’s provided

template and in accordance with Exhibit 2, attached to
this Section;
ii. Complete (self-explanatory) description of the Work
represented by the Activity stated in a verb, noun, and
location format.
iii. Duration in days and number of shifts;
iv. Labor hours required to accomplish scope represented by
the Activities. Labor hours are to include all direct labor,
by trade, required for Activities representing
construction.
v. Physical quantity of material to be installed (cubic yard
of concrete, linear feet of pipe, etc.) for items directed by
the Engineer and in accordance with this Section.
vi. Other Activity coding as directed by the Engineer to
define the Activity’s scope, constraints, responsibility or
other requirements.
vii. Completed coding and organization of data and schedule
information in accordance with the Activity Code
Structure requirements provided in this Section and
approved by the Engineer.
B. All Activities, with the exception of the NTP and Substantial Completion, shall
have a predecessor and successor. No open-ended Activities will be permitted.
C. The construction schedule shall contain Activities representing contractual and
non-contractual milestones as designated by the Engineer and detailed in
Exhibit 3, attached to this Section.
1.07 ACTIVITY CODE STRUCTURE

A. Activity codes proposed for scheduling Work progress under the Contract are
shown on Exhibit 4, attached to this Section.
B. Activity codes should be defined as project Activity codes, not global Activity
codes.
C. The Contractor shall break the Work into Activities in accordance with the
specified coding structure and in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The selection of Activities and the coding structure shall be
subject to the review and acceptance by the Engineer.
D. The coding shall follow the designation conventions outlined above and shall
include identification of subcontractors, suppliers/vendors and fabricators, and
other parties reporting to the Contractor.
01321-6 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1462
1. The Contractor is required to develop other Activity codes and values

needed to comply with the reporting requirements listed in this Section,
subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
E. The Engineer will provide the Contractor with a system of identification
numbers that shall be used for CPM schedule numbering system and project
coding. Additional coding required by the Contractor may be added to the
network to supplement that supplied by the Engineer.
F. Activity IDs will conform to the format detailed in Exhibit 2, attached to this
Section, or as directed by the Engineer.
1.08 SEQUENCE AND INTERDEPENDENCE OF WORK ACTIVITIES

A. The CPM schedule shall indicate the Logic of Activities. It shall include, but
not be limited to, the following items as appropriate to the Contract:
1. Contractor working drawing preparation and review by the Engineer;
2. Materials, Equipment, and Systems:
a. Vendor submittal/approval;
b. Shop drawing submittal/approval;
c. Release for fabrication;
d. Fabrication period;
e. Witness shop test;
f. Delivery;
g. Installation;
h. Preliminary test;
i. Final test;
j. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals
submittal/approval;
k. Equipment training plans and procedures submittal/approval;
l. Equipment training;
m. Systems training plans and procedures submittal/approval;
n. Systems training.
3. Shop and field performance tests and supervisory service Activities;
4. Mobilization and move-in;
5. Preparing and coordinating drawings;
6. Obtaining all required permits;
7. Inspections;
01321-7 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1463
8. Specific Work activities, such as, but not limited to:

a. Sitework;
b. Underground piping;
c. Electrical ductbanks;
d. Structural excavation;
e. Soil testing;
f. Backfill;
g. Placement of sheeting;
h. Pile driving;
i. Formwork erection;
j. Rebar placement;
k. Placing of concrete;
l. Stripping forms;
m. Concrete curing;
n. Installation of process piping and valves;
o. Electrical conduits and wiring;
p. Instrumentation and controls conduits and wiring;
q. Terminations;
r. Maintenance and exercising activities;
s. Other materials and plant equipment;
t. Cleanup.
9. Construction of all facilities outlined in the Contract Documents;
10. Subcontractors’ items of Work;
11. Time allowance for inclement weather per National Oceanographic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) information for local area;
12. Delivery, installation, and check-out/testing of City-supplied
equipment;
13. Punch lists;
14. Final cleanup;
15. Time allowance for checkout and startup;
16. Contract coordination with Other Contractors, substantial completion
and final completion dates and maintenance of existing operations;
01321-8 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1464
17. Indicate all coordination activities from related construction contracts;

18. Interruption and shut down requests of plant utilities to allow for new
connections;
19. Connection to all existing plant systems and equipment;
20. Preparation of final copies of Contractor working drawings;
21. Specific information required by or from the Engineer;
22. All temporary utilities and construction;
23. Required inspections by the Contractor or Engineer;
24. Submittal of Contract record drawings at project completion, or as
1.09 PROJECT CALENDARS

A. All Activities should have a project calendar assigned, not a global calendar.
This allows the calendars to easily travel with the project when exported and
more importantly, when imported.
B. Each calendar should also identify all other days considered non-work days,
including but not limited to observed holidays.
C. Each calendar should be adjusted for months beginning in the year of NTP and
lasting three years beyond the Contract completion date.
D. Each calendar should be named @-### _X, where @-### _ represents the
project and X summarizes the nature of the calendar. Typically, the number of
days per week and number of shifts per day are included as the balance of the
description. See examples in Exhibit 5, attached to this Section.
1.10 ACTIVITY LABOR AND RESOURCE DATA

A. The Contractor shall accurately labor load by craft or trade all Activities
requiring direct field labor. All labor loading shall be in hours. At the direction
of the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the City, the Contractor may be
required to include additional resource loading, such as, but not limited to,
major pieces of construction equipment, in order to track major critical
Activities and measure progress.
B. When required by the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the City, the
Contractor shall accurately quantity load specific Activities or groups of
Activities. The quantity amount shall equal the total quantity to be installed for
each specific Activity. Quantity loading may be required for major Activities
with Durations dependent on daily production, such as mass excavation – cubic
yards, piling – linear feet of piles, concrete formwork – square feet of forms,
concrete pours – cubic yards of concrete, piping installation – linear feet of pipe,
electrical duct banks – linear feet, electrical conduit and wire – linear feet,
terminations – number of terminations, etc.
01321-9 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1465
C. All resource loading shall be coded to the Contract identifier under a “root.”
Since resource loading cannot be project-specific, this root heading is needed
to keep the database segregated.

A. The Electrical Contractor shall retain a CPM scheduling consultant, or utilize
its own qualified CPM scheduler in lieu of a CPM consultant, to develop and
maintain the update of the CPM schedule plan for the Work for the duration of
the Contract. This consultant, along with the Contractor, is expected to work
closely with the Engineer to deliver acceptable work products as outlined in this
Section. It is the purpose of this Section to expand and further clarify the
requirements for the CPM schedule under Article 9 of the Standard
B. The Electrical Contractor must provide a CPM scheduler Qualifications of the
proposed scheduler and must be submitted for review and approval within seven
days of Notice to Proceed (NTP).
1. The Electrical Contractor may submit for approval to the Engineer a
written request to provide its own qualified CPM scheduler or a CPM
consultant. In the case of a Contractor scheduler, the Contractor is
responsible for performing all activities described in this Section as
being performed by the CPM consultant.
2. If, after approval, the Engineer determines that the Electrical
Contractor’s scheduler or scheduling consultant is unable to adequately
perform the CPM requirements of this Specification, the Engineer will
require the Electrical Contractor to provide a new qualified CPM
consultant at no additional cost to the City.
C. Upon NTP, the Project Prime Contractors shall meet with the CPM scheduling
consultant, at least weekly for the purpose of developing the information
required per this Specification. These meetings will be scheduled by the
Electrical Contractor. These meetings will continue until a minimum status of
“Accepted” has been achieved on the Baseline Schedule. These meetings will
be held in the Resident Engineer’s office. The purpose of these meetings is for
the three Contractors to coordinate their scheduling of work activities and to
ensure that schedules are complimentary and support the work sequencing
within given areas and to grant access to work areas as is necessary in order for
the work to proceed expeditiously.
D. All prime Contractors will be required to coordinate their scheduling activities
with the CPM scheduling consultant. The Contractors for Contracts DEL-260G,
and DEL-260H shall include the cost of the scheduling coordination activities
in its lump sum price bid item. If, in the judgment of the Resident Engineer, a
Contractor is deemed uncooperative in providing the required information to
the CPM scheduling consultant necessary to develop the Preliminary CPM,
01321-10 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1466
Baseline Schedule, or monthly schedule updates, then the Resident Engineer

may withhold partial payments or a portion thereof.
E. The monthly CPM schedule update payment item for any specific month will
not be earned until the Electrical Contractor submits the required monthly CPM
progress schedule. In the event the Electrical Contractor fails to submit such
schedule, liquidated damages will be assessed against the Electrical Contractor
in the amount fixed in Schedule A of the General Conditions, unless the
Engineer determines that the Electrical Contractor is not the cause for the delay
in submitting monthly updates or update information per Monthly Progress
Meeting and Reports described herein. The Electrical Contractor shall be
notified within one week of said delinquency that the liquidated damages are
being assessed against its Contract.
F. In view of the difficulty of adequately ascertaining the losses or damages that
DEP would suffer by reason of the Contractor’s failure to strictly comply in a
timely fashion with the requirements of this Section, the amount described
above is hereby fixed and agreed to as liquidated damages that the City will
suffer by reason of such failure to comply, and not as a penalty. The liquidated
damages described herein are in addition to liquidated damages that may be
imposed for delay in Substantial Completion of the Work under Article 15 of
the Standard Construction Contract, as shown on Schedule “A” of the General
Conditions, and any other liquidated damages provided for in the Contract
Documents.
G. Monthly Progress Meeting and Reports, including the use of Contractor Daily
Quality Control Reports, shall be used as the basis for updating progress
schedules.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. The qualifications of the CPM consultant shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval within seven (7) calendar days after the NTP. The Engineer will
respond to the submittal within seven (7) calendar days of submittal receipt.
B. The preliminary CPM Schedule shall be submitted fifteen (15) calendar days
after NTP in accordance with Article 9 in the Standard Construction Contract
and this Section. The preliminary CPM Schedule shall include:
1. All critical mobilization, project set-up, procurement, and construction
activities in each of the major Work areas required during the first 180
calendar days of Contract time after the NTP, including submittals and
permitting;
2. The balance of the Work depicted in summary activities by MLS
(milestone), AREA (area), SYS (system) and RESP (responsibility).
(See Activity Code Structures for MLS, AREA, SYS and RESP in
Exhibit A of this Section);
01321-11 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1467
3. All submittal and procurement activities for long lead items necessary
to meet all project milestones;
4. The project’s overall critical path and each milestone’s critical path.
5. An electronic copy of the schedule in Primavera Project Planner (.xer)
format.
C. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after submittal of the preliminary CPM
Schedule, the Engineer will notify the Electrical Contractor of the acceptance,
rejection, or acceptance with comments of the preliminary CPM Schedule. If
the preliminary CPM Schedule has been rejected, or accepted with comments,
the Contractor shall address all comments and re-submit within 14 calendar
days for review. The submittal process shall continue until the Engineer accepts
the preliminary CPM schedule with no comments.
D. The final, complete and detailed CPM Schedule required for submittal under
this Section shall be composed of two parts, with each part due as follows:
1. Part 1 -- Logic and Duration Schedule is due within sixty (60) calendar
days after NTP.
a. Submit an electronic copy of the schedule in Primavera Project
Planner (.xer) format, schedule reports, and the narrative report
as specified within this Section.
b. This schedule is at the final level of detail for each Activity,
containing the required relationships completely identified and
the Duration of each Activity correctly depicted and coded in
accordance with this Section.
c. This Baseline Construction Schedule shall identify all Contract
milestones.
i. If the schedule reflects completion of a milestone or
completion of Contract Work earlier than specified in the
General Conditions, this in no way revises or voids the
dates set forth in the Contract. The dates specified in the
Contract govern.
ii. Where the schedule reflects such an early completion
date, the schedule may be accepted by the Engineer with
the Contractor’s understanding that no claim for
additional Contract time or an increase in the Contract
price shall be made by the Contractor as the result of
failure to complete the Work by the earlier date shown on
the schedule.
d. This schedule shall show the overall schedule requirements as
set forth in Schedule “A” of the General Conditions being met.
01321-12 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1468
i. This detailed CPM Schedule shall not reflect any

Contract changes or delays that may have occurred
during the interim schedule development period.
ii. Any such changes and all progress through the time of
baseline schedule acceptance will be entered at the first
update after the schedule has been accepted.
2. Part 2 - Resource and Cost Loaded Schedule
a. At the direction of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the
City, a Resource and Cost Loaded Schedule is due within 30
calendar days after acceptance of the Logic and Duration
Schedule.
i. Submit an electronic copy of the schedule in Primavera
Project Planner (.xer) format, schedule reports and other
reports as specified in this Section.
ii. Each Activity shall be resource and cost loaded to permit
initial and monthly generation of a resource and cost
curve and to assess the progress of the Work.
iii. Cost loading of the schedule is required on a summary
level and is not required to the Activity level. The intent
of the cost loading is to facilitate forecasting, tracking,
and reporting of overall cash flow by major work areas or
systems, and Specifications. The summary level cost
loading requirements will be determined and agreed to by
the Engineer during the development of the project-
specific schedule coding developed for the Baseline
Logic and Duration Schedule and used to track the
construction progress.
E. Once the Logic and Duration Schedule is accepted by the Engineer, it shall become the
basis for future updates until acceptance of the Resource and Cost Loaded Schedule.
The Resource and Cost Loaded Schedule, once accepted, may only contain changes to
the Logic and Duration Baseline that are necessitated by resource issues identified
during the preparation of the Resource and Cost Loaded Schedule.
F. Once the Resource and Cost Loaded Schedule is accepted, it shall become the
Baseline Schedule of record and the basis for future updates. All subsequent
monthly updates shall be compared to the Baseline Schedule. In addition, each
current monthly update shall be compared to the last accepted update. Each
update shall be labeled by period with the Data Date and report date identified
on the hard copy and electronic file label.
G. After the acceptance of the Baseline Schedule required by this Section, no
changes shall be made to Logic, Duration, or description of Activities therein
without acceptance by the Engineer.
01321-13 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1469
H. The Contractor shall have no claim for damages by reason of the failure of the
Engineer to give timely acceptance or comments on any progress schedule
under this Section.
I. The monthly update schedule submittal to the Engineer shall include the
following:
1. An electronic copy of the schedule in Primavera Project Planner (.xer)
format, Data Date and monthly period clearly marked.
2. Electronic (.pdf) format copy of the CPM computer printouts in bar
chart form, including:
a. A comparison of the Baseline Schedule activities against
current update activities organized and summarized by
milestone, AREA, and DIV according to the requirements for
Activity codes in this Section, or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Each Activity shall have two bars with different
colors (one showing the current schedule and one showing the
Baseline Schedule).
b. A comparison of current activities against the prior month’s
activities organized and summarized by milestone, AREA, and
DIV according to the requirements for Activity codes in this
Section, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Each
Activity summary shall have two bars with different colors
(one showing the current schedule and one showing the prior
month’s update schedule).
c. A clear presentation of the specific detailed Activities making
up the critical path(s) for the project and for each milestone.
3. Electronic (.pdf) format copy of the Narrative Report as outlined in this
Section.
J. Comments made by the Engineer on the initial and monthly updated Current
Construction Schedule will not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. This review is only for general
conformance with the schedule concept of the project and general compliance
with the information given in the Contract Documents.
1.13 NARRATIVE REPORTS

A. Schedule Basis Narrative shall be submitted to the Engineer with each Baseline
submittal to memorialize assumptions made in development of the schedule:
1. A description of scope of the project and how the Work is represented
in the schedule activities;
2. A description of the overall sequence of major components of Work;
3. Planned work week;
01321-14 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1470
4. Description of the critical path in the proposed Work plan;

5. Basis of Activity Durations;
6. How weather will be accommodated in the schedule;
7. How, regulatory, operational or third party constraints are
accommodated in the schedule;
8. Description of key project coordination points or events;
9. Discussion of long lead items and basis of time frames for submittals;
10. Description of anticipated means and methods for large quantity
production activities;
11. Potential opportunities and risks and quantify the schedule reduction or
expansion;
12. Assumptions/exclusions made in the schedule.
B. Update Narrative Report shall be submitted to the Engineer each month with
the monthly update submission, to include the following:
1. The Contractor's transmittal letter;
2. Contract complete date status by milestone:
a. Ahead of schedule and number of calendar days;
b. Behind schedule and number of calendar days;
c. Calendar days lost/gained compared with the previous update.
3. Schedule change report organized by milestone and area listing each
Activity in the CPM schedule that has been/ will be:
a. Completed during this reporting period;
b. In progress during this reporting period;
c. Scheduled to be performed during the next reporting period.
4. Analysis, organized by milestone and area, of the critical and near
critical path/s describing:
a. The nature of the critical/near critical path;
b. Impact on other Activities, milestones and completion dates;
c. Risks and opportunities impacting the critical/near critical
paths.
5. List of current and anticipated delays by milestone:
a. Cause of the delay;
b. Corrective actions and schedule adjustments to correct the
delay;
01321-15 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1471
c. Impact of the delay on other Activities, milestones and

completion dates;
d. Weather delays – when applicable, the Contractor shall
describe how the impacts of weather conditions and constraints
were absorbed and accounted for in the schedule and
documentation showing they were beyond normal for the area
or those provided for in the baseline.
6. Changes in Activity description, Logic, or Duration shall be grouped
and organized in the report in a manner that communicates in detail the
rationale associated with each change and the impact upon construction
sequence, relationships and the critical path.
7. Added/deleted Activities and the rationale associated with each action;
8. Pending issues and status of other items:
a. Permits;
b. Contract modifications;
c. Change orders;
d. Long lead procurement items;
e. Other.
9. Out of Sequence Report describing the necessity of each Activity
relationship shown therein, as described within this Section;
10. Illogical Progress/Restraint Reports (if any);
11. Other project or scheduling concerns;
12. Electronic copy of the latest CPM schedule update file in Primavera
(.xer) format;
13. Primavera scheduling error report.
1.14 CPM PROGRESS MEETING AND REPORTS

A. Monthly, on a date established by the Engineer, a CPM Progress Meeting will
be held, at which time the schedule will be reviewed. The meeting shall be
attended by the Engineer, and the Contractor representatives for each Prime
Contract (Electrical, General and HVAC) and the scheduling consultant. Each
Contractor’s representative at the meetings shall have the competence and
authority to make any necessary decisions and their statement shall commit the
Contractors to the agreed procedures, sequencing of Work, coordination and
time schedules.
B. Prior to the meeting, the CPM scheduling consultant shall obtain, through any
required means including Site meetings, from each Contractor, the necessary
information to update the CPM schedule to reflect progress to date and to
01321-16 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1472
update/revise the schedule (plan) of the Work for the balance of the project. The
updated schedule and draft narrative report shall be furnished to the Engineer
at least 48 hours prior to the meeting and be distributed by the Electrical
Contractor in hard copy at the meeting for review.
To update the CPM schedule, the Contractor shall:
1. Enter actual start and completion dates for those activities started and/or
completed during the previous reporting period;
2. For activities in progress, indicate the Remaining Duration correlating
to an accurate forecasted completion date and physical percentage
complete to date (Percent Complete is to reflect the actual quantity of
Work completed, and is separate from any actual or Remaining
Duration calculation). Review, and revise as necessary, the network
logic for the Remaining Duration of the Work from the update to the
estimated completion date;
3. For activities not yet started, review, and revise as required, the
necessary Logic, the Durations of Work and the estimated start and
completion dates;
4. Enter, for each applicable Activity, actual installed quantities
information;
5. For identified construction change requests, Extra Work or change
orders, add the appropriate detailed schedule Activities upon submittal
of Form 1 for changes in the Work. The change order review and
registration Fragnet will be provided by the Engineer and shall include
the following Activities in sequence:
a. Submittal of Form 1 on the actual date submitted;
b. Contractor pricing of the identified change subsequent to
submittal of Form 1;
c. Pricing negotiations;
d. Comptroller review and registration; followed by;
e. Detailed submittal and construction Activities with correct
Activity coding as specified within this Section.
C. The total Duration to be initially added to any schedule update reflecting the
Activities from submittal of Form 1 to the registration of any specific change
order, shall be in accordance with the Fragnet provided by the Engineer and
shall be incorporated into the monthly schedule update following the submittal
of Form 1 for the change in Work. The forecasted construction Activities shall
be logically tied to the appropriate predecessor and successor base Contract
Activities and contain all of the required Logic, Duration, and Resource
Loading specified for the detailed CPM schedule Activities.
01321-17 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1473
D. In the event the Contractor begins performance in the field of identified Extra
Work during the update period, the monthly progress schedule update shall
reflect the actual start date of the Work, and any predecessor Logic ties or
restraints shall be broken in order to accurately forecast completion of the
identified Extra Work Activity. This will allow for accurate forecasting of the
successor Work Activities and completion milestones.
1. Annotate updated status information on the CPM schedule update in a
manner that will graphically depict the current status of the Work;
2. Should discrepancies regarding data/information accuracy be noted
during the review meeting or other discussions, the Engineer may direct
the Contractor to adjust the percentage completion, Remaining Duration
and actual dates to selected activities and re-issue the updated schedule
and reports.
E. Default progress data provided from the scheduling system shall not be allowed.
Actual start and finish dates and Remaining Durations of Activities shall not be
automatically updated by default mechanisms that may be included in CPM
scheduling software systems. Actual start and finish dates on the CPM schedule
shall match those dates provided from the Contractor’s Daily Quality Control
Reports. Failure of the Contractor to document the actual start and finish dates
on the Contractor Daily Quality Control Report for every in-progress or
completed Activity, and to ensure that the data contained on the Contractor
Daily Quality Control Reports is the sole basis for schedule updating, shall
result in the disapproval of the Contractor's submittal.
F. Activities that have reported progress without predecessor Activities being
completed (out-of-sequence progress) will not be allowed except on a case-by-
case basis with the approval of the Engineer. A written explanation for each
instance shall be included in the monthly submittal.
G. The Contractor shall not constrain the schedule with artificial Logic ties and or
constraint dates and or any other scheduling techniques that may distort the
Activity Float and Total Float associated with the critical path Activities and
the schedule in general.
H. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, the Contractor shall
submit monthly the proposed correlated sequence and estimated dates for
submission, approval and final submission activities for the following:
1. Working drawings submittals;
2. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals submittals;
3. Witness shop tests;
4. Delivery of materials and equipment to Site;
5. Final field tests;
6. Special tools and lubricant deliveries;
01321-18 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1474
7. Spare part deliveries;

8. Instructional services;
9. Permits;
10. Final record documents;
11. Startup and commissioning/testing;
12. Piping and equipment identification.
I. The above information shall be presented in an organized tabular format,
showing for each submittal item, organized by item:
1. Submission date (actual or forecast);
2. Approval date (actual or forecast);
3. Final submissions (actual or forecast);
4. Comments (actual or forecast).
J. Equipment/material procurement information shall be presented in an
organized tabular format, showing for each item, organized by item:
1. Drawing submittal date (actual or forecast);
2. Drawing approval date (actual or forecast);
3. Release for fabrication date (actual or forecast);
4. Witness shop test date (actual or forecast);
5. Delivery date (actual or forecast).
1.15 REMEDIAL MEASURES AND RECOVERY SCHEDULE

A. Delays to the Critical Path – Whenever it becomes apparent from the monthly
CPM schedule update that delays to the critical path have occurred due to action
or inaction of the Contractor, and as a result the Contract completion date will
not be met, the Contractor shall take some or all of the following actions at no
additional cost to the City, in addition to and apart from the other requirements
of this Section, as directed by the Engineer:
1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will
substantially eliminate the backlog of Work.
2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, or
working days per week; the amount of construction equipment; the
forms for concrete work; etc., or any combination of the foregoing to
substantially eliminate the backlog of Work.
3. Reschedule Activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of
accomplishment of Activities, and comply with the revised schedule.
01321-19 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1475
4. Submit to the Engineer for review a written statement of the steps the
Contractor intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to the schedule.
The Contractor shall promptly provide the necessary level of effort to
bring the Work back on schedule.
B. The Engineer may require the Contractor to add to its equipment and materials
or construction forces, as well as increase the working hours, if operations for
critical, less critical or non-critical activities fall behind the Contractor's
Baseline Schedule at any time during the construction period.
C. The Engineer may require the Contractor, at any time during the project and at
no additional cost to the City, to develop a more detailed schedule/Fragnet than
depicted in the detailed Baseline Schedule to provide a clearer understanding
of the effort needed to complete a specific area of Work or task.
D. Should the Contractor fall behind schedule, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to prepare a recovery schedule for Engineer review and acceptance.
The recovery schedule shall propose alternative methods, overtime, and other
means available to the Contractor to recover the schedule slippage incurred to
date.
1.16 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit 1 - Work Breakdown Structure
B. Exhibit 2 - Activity ID Format
C. Exhibit 3 – Schedule Milestones
D. Exhibit 4 – Proposed Activity Codes
E. Exhibit 5 – Project Calendars
END OF SECTION
01321-20 11/2017
DEP 1/13/2017
1476
ATTACHMENTS –DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01321
EXHIBIT 1 -- WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE
WBS Code WBS Name

DEL-260 – Shaft 18 DA Kensico Electrical and HV
DEL-260G Upgrades - General Contract
DEL-260G.CO General Contract
DEL-260G.CO.CO General Contract - Construction
DEL-260G.CO.CO.EXT Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility- Exterior
DEL-260G.CO.CO.EXT.STG Contractor Staging Area
DEL-260G.CO.CO.EXT.ESC Erosion Control
DEL-260G.CO.CO.EXT.LAN Grading and Landscaping
DEL-260G.CO.CO.EXT.GEN Generator and Transformer Concrete Pads
DEL-260G.CO.CO.BSM Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility- Basement
DEL-260G.CO.CO.BSM.CND Conduit Installation
DEL-260G.CO.CO.FFL Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - First Floor
DEL-260G.CO.CO.FFL.CSW Chlorine Storage Room –Window Preparation
DEL-260G.CO.CO.FFL.CRW Chlorinator Room General Work
DEL-260G.CO.CO.FFL.OFW Operating Floor General Work
DEL-260G.CO.CO.FFL.ELR Existing Electric Service Room - General Work
DEL-260G.CO.CO.FFL.FNR Fan Room General Work
DEL-260G.CO.CO.SNF Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Second Floor
DEL-260G.CO.CO.SNF.NER New Electric Room General Work
DEL-260G.CO.CO.SNF.MZN Mezzanine General Work
DEL-260E Upgrades - Electrical Contract
DEL-260E.CO Electrical Contract
DEL-260E.CO.CO Electrical Contract - Construction
DEL-260E.CO.CO.EXT Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Exterior
DEL-260E.CO.CO.EXT.STG Contractor Staging Area
DEL-260E.CO.CO.EXT.GEN Generator and Transformer
DEL-260E.CO.CO.BSM Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Basement
DEL-260E.CO.CO.BSM.CND Conduit Installation
DEL-260E.CO.CO.BSM.LIG Lighting Installation
DEL-260E.CO.CO.FFL Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - First Floor
DEL-260E.CO.CO.FFL.CSW Chlorine Storage Room –Circuits Removal
DEL-260E.CO.CO.FFL.PRW Pump Room Electrical Work
DEL-260E.CO.CO.FFL.OFW Operating Floor Electrical Work
DEL-260E.CO.CO.FFL.ELR Existing Electric Service Room - Electrical Work
DEL-260E.CO.CO.FFL.FNR Fan Room Electric Work
DEL-260E.CO.CO.SNF Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Second Floor
PAGE 1 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1477
DEL-260E.CO.CO.SNF.NER New Electric Room - Electric Work

DEL-260E.CO.CO.SNF.MZN Mezzanine Electrical Work
DEL-260E.CO.CO.CCH Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Cone Valve Chamber
DEL-260E.CO.CO.CCH.LGH Lights replacement
DEL-260E.CO.CO.MTP Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility – Meter Pit
DEL-260E.CO.CO.MTP.LGH Lights replacement
DEL-260H Upgrades – HVAC Contract
DEL-260H.CO HVAC Contract
DEL-260H.CO.CO HVAC Contract - Construction
DEL-260H.CO.CO.EXT Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Exterior
DEL-260H.CO.CO.EXT.STG Contractor Staging Area
DEL-260H.CO.CO.BSM Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Basement
DEL-260H.CO.CO.BSM.HWP Hot Water Piping and Pump Installation
DEL-260H.CO.CO.FFL Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - First Floor
DEL-260H.CO.CO.FFL.CSW Chlorine Storage Room – Louver Installation
DEL-260H.CO.CO.FFL.CRW Chlorinator Room – Louver Installation
DEL-260H.CO.CO.FFL.OFW Operating Floor – Louver Installation
DEL-260H.CO.CO.FFL.ELR Existing Electric Service Room - HVAC Work
DEL-260H.CO.CO.FFL.FNR Fan Room HVAC Work
DEL-260H.CO.CO.SNF Shaft 18 DA Kensico Facility - Second Floor
DEL-260H.CO.CO.SNF.NER New Electric Room - HVAC Work
*********
EXHIBIT 2 – ACTIVITY ID FORMAT
1. Activity ID format: Activity ID’s shall be preceded by the Contract identifier: DEL-
260G-…, DEL-260H - … , DEL-260E-…
2. Do not use the letters X or Z within the activity ID as these are reserved for DEP
use
3. For Activities added to the schedule during the project representing Contract
change order execution and Extra Work, the Contractor shall insert “CO” after the
Contract identifier and use the succeeding numbers to identify the change order
number.
*********
EXHIBIT 3 – SCHEDULE MILESTONES
1. NTP- DEL-260G, DEL-260H, or DEL-260E;

2. Mobilization- DEL-260G, DEL-260H, or DEL-260E;
PAGE 2 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1478
3. Construction Start (start of installation of permanent Work in the field – DEL-260G,

DEL-260H, or DEL-260E);
4. Project Specific milestones- DEL-260G, DEL-260H, or DEL-260E;
5. Substantial Completion- DEL-260G, DEL-260H, or DEL-260E;
6. Or other Milestones as directed by the Engineer.
*********
PAGE 3 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1479
EXHIBIT 4 -- PROPOSED ACTIVITY CODES
1. DEL-260 _RESP - Responsibility Code – The party contractually responsible for

the scheduled Activity. This Activity Code field should be defined as being four
digits in length.
VALUE SEQUENCE TITLE

DEP 1 Department of Environmental Protection
ENG 2 DEP’s Design Engineer
CCM 3 DEP’s Construction Manager
GEN 4 General Prime Contractor
ELE 5 Electrical Prime Contractor
HVC 6 HVAC Prime Contractor
2. DEL-260G_MLS - , DEL-260H_MLS - , DEL-260E_MLS - Milestone Code –

Milestones specified in the Contract. This Activity Code field should be defined as
being four digits in length.

M1 1 Notice To Proceed
M2 2 Exterior Complete
M3 3 Interior Complete
M4 4 Substantial Completion
3. DEL-260G _LOC - , DEL-260H _LOC - , DEL-260E _LOC - Location Code –

Project location specified in the Contract. This Activity Code field should be defined
as being four digits in length.

STGA 1 Staging Area
GENE 2 Exterior Generator
BASM 3 Basement
FSTF 4 First Floor
SCND 5 Second Floor
PAGE 4 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1480
4. DEL-260G _AREA - , DEL-260H _AREA - , DEL-260E _AREA - Area Code -

The specific area within the project Site where the Work is taking place. This
Activity Code field should be defined as being four digits in length.

CHSR 1 Chlorine Storage Room
CHLO 2 Chlorinator Room
MNFL 3 Main Room
EESR 4 Electric Service Room
FANR 5 Fan Room
NELR 6 Electric Room 2
MEZZ 7 Mezzanine
5. DEL-260G _OPER - , DEL-260H _OPER -, DEL-260E _OPER - Operation Code

- The operation or type of Work
Note: The operation codes listed are for example only. The specific
operation codes will be determined during the development of
the Baseline Logic and Duration schedule and will reflect the
Contractor’s anticipated means and methods. This Activity
Code field should be defined as being four digits in length.
01 1 General Requirements
02 2 Site Clearing
03 3 Site Earthwork
04 4 Utilities
05 5 Access Roads
06 6 Temp Facilities
07 7 Erosion Control
08 8 Concrete
09 9 Landscape
10 10 Drainage
11 11 Temp Power
12 12 Lighting
13 13 Dewatering
PAGE 5 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1481
14 14 Masonry
15 15 Metals
16 16 Wood and Plastics
17 17 Thermal and Moisture Protection
18 18 Doors and Windows
19 19 Finishes
20 20 Specialties
21 21 Equipment
22 22 Furnishings
23 23 Special Construction
24 24 Conveying Systems
25 25 Mechanical
26 26 Electrical
27 27 Instrumentation and Control
28 28 Site Restoration
29 29 Piping modifications
30 30 Electrical modifications
31 31 Maintenance Activities
6. DEL-260G_ADD -, DEL-260H_ADD -, DEL-260E_ADD - Activities Added –

Code for Activities added during the current schedule update period. This Activity
Code field should be defined as being four digits in length.
001 1 Activity Added in Update #01
Continued – to be updated by Contractor in each Progress Schedule
7. DEL-260G _CO# - , DEL-260H _CO# -, DEL-260E _CO# - Change Order

Number – Code for Activities added for Change Order work. This Activity Code
field should be defined as being four digits in length.
PAGE 6 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1482
G001 1 G001 – General Change Order No.1 Description
E001 2 E001 – Electrical Change Order No.1 Description
H001 3 H001 – HVAC Change Order No.1 Description
G002 4 G002 – General Change Order No.2 Description
E002 5 E002 – Electrical Change Order No.2 Description
H002 6 H002 – HVAC Change Order No.2 Description

8. DEL-260 _Point of Contact DEP Accountable Manager. This Activity Code field
should be defined as being seven digits in length.
TBD 1 TBD
9. DEL-260G _Key Milestones, DEL-260H _Key Milestones, DEL-260E _Key

Milestones Optional Field for DEP use. This Activity Code field should be defined
as being seven digits in length.
10. DEL-260G _Standard Milestones, DEL-260H _Standard Milestones, DEL-260E

_Standard Milestones Optional Field for DEP use. This Activity Code field should
be defined as being seven digits in length.
11. DEL-260G,_Temporary, DEL-260H,_Temporary, DEL-260E,_Temporary

Optional Field for DEP use. This Activity Code field should be defined as being
seven digits in length.
12. DEL-260G_Hide, DEL-260H_Hide, DEL-260E_Hide Optional Field for DEP use.

This Activity Code field should be defined as being seven digits in length.
13. In addition to the required Activity coding outlined above, the Engineer may direct
the Contractor to provide additional Activity coding, at no additional cost to the City,
in order to facilitate the management of the project and schedule. Additional Activity
coding may include:
a. SUBC – Code designating major subcontractors or vendors;
b. SYST – Code designating process or functional system;
c. TYPE – Code designating general type of Work;
PAGE 7 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1483
d. PHAS – Phase of Work in accordance with construction

phasing requirements.
*********
EXHIBIT 5 – PROJECT CALENDARS
1. DEL-260G_5D1S, DEL-260H_5D1S, DEL-260E_5D1S - 5 days per week

and one shift per day
and two shifts per day
and three shifts per day
and three shifts per day
5. DEL-260G_Planting, DEL-260H_Planting, DEL-260E_Planting - Contains
months warm enough for planting vegetation
6. DEL-260G_X-Xxx, DEL-260H_X-Xxx, DEL-260E_X-Xxx - Limited months
in calendar year (Xxx – Xxx) work can occur.
*********
PAGE 8 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 4/25/2016
1484
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01323 - JOB PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS
SECTION 01323
Job Photographs and Videos
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Pre-Construction Photographs and Videos
B. Construction Photographs and Videos
C. Post-Construction Photographs and Videos
D. Informational Video
1.02 PAYMENT
A. The cost of furnishing the goods and services described herein shall be included
in the lump sum price bid for Contract DEL-260E Electrical item E-LS-1.
B. In the event that fewer than the specified number of photographs is required,
the Contractor shall credit the City twenty dollars ($20.00) for each photograph
under the specified number.
C. Should more than the specified number of photographs be required, the
Contractor will be paid twenty dollars ($20.00) for each photograph provided
over the specified number requested in writing by the Engineer.
D. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any photograph that is not clear or
definitive. Any photograph so rejected shall be subtracted from the total
exposures before computations for payment or credit under this Section.

A. Detailed Specification 01335 -- Records in Electronic Formats

A. International Organization for Standardization
1. ISO 18902:2013 - Imaging Materials – Processed Imaging Materials –
Albums, Framing and Storage Materials.
2. ISO-IEC 13818-2 Information technology -- Generic coding of moving
pictures and associated audio information: Video -- Part 2.
3. IPTC/XMP (International Press Telecommunications Council's/Adobe
Extensible Metadata Platform) Standard
01323-1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1485
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. For the purposes of this Section, “Photograph” shall be defined as one (1)
camera exposure, which is approved by the Engineer for development into the
products specified herein. Photographs shall be understood as including prints
and DVDs as specified.
1.06 DESCRIPTION
A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, all work of this Section shall be performed
by the Electrical Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall engage the services of experienced professional
photographers and/or video recording firms, approved by the Engineer, to
document the progress of Work by taking color job Photographs, and videos.
The photographer shall take Photographs, and videos of the project before start
of construction work, during ongoing construction, and after completion of
construction as directed by the Engineer.
C. A designee of the Engineer will accompany the photographer for the taking of
all Photographs and videos.
D. Pre-Construction Photographs and Videos
1. The photographer, when directed by the Engineer, shall visit the site
prior to start of construction to take a total of 45 photographs and make
a 25 minute video showing existing conditions of the entire project site
and any adjacent areas which could possibly be disturbed during
construction.
E. Construction Photographs and Videos
1. The photographer, when directed by the Engineer, shall visit the site
during construction on a monthly basis unless the Engineer requests
different frequencies of the visits, to take a total of 100 photographs for
the project and to visit the site when directed by the Engineer to tape a
total of 2 hours of videos. Photographs taken and video minutes taped
shall be distributed evenly among the visits and visits shall be
distributed evenly over the course of the project, all subject to the
direction of the Engineer.
F. Post-Construction Photographs and Videos
1. The photographer, when directed by the Engineer, shall visit the site at
the completion of construction to take a total of 50 photographs and
make a 25 minute video showing the completed work, the entire project
site and any adjacent areas which were disturbed during construction.
G. Informational Video
01323-2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1486
1. The Contractor shall engage a professional video recording firm to

develop a finished 60 minute informational video as directed by the
Engineer.
2. The video shall developed by editing the videos made during the pre-
construction, construction and post-construction stages of the project, as
well as any additional taping needed to complete the documentation of
work at the project site.

A. Photographs shall be clear with proper exposure. New Photographs are to be
taken immediately if Photographs of an adequate quality cannot be achieved.
Photographs shall be of a quality to permit enlargements.
B. The professional photographer and professional video recording firm shall have
a minimum of three (3) years of experience with duties similar to those specified
herein. The qualifications of professional photographer and professional video
recording firm shall be subject to review by the Engineer.
C. All videos shall be made using professional-type video cameras and with
adequate lighting.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Resume of the professional photographer proposed for this work;
2. Resume and experience of the professional video recording firm
proposed for preparing the informational video;
3. Plot plans indicating the location and photo numbers of all Photographs.
4. One (1) set of all Photographs taken for the Engineer’s review and
approval for processing further.
5. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with updated images on a
monthly basis.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS
A. The file format for digital photographs shall be Tagged Image File Format
(TIFF).
B. Digital cameras shall produce records with true optical resolution. Images shall
not be resized or interpolated to a higher resolution from a lower resolution.
C. Photographic images shall be provided as 8 bit per channel RGB color images.
01323-3 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1487
D. Digital camera files shall be captured as 12 megapixel files or greater in size

with a minimum pixel array of 5,000 pixels by 3,500 pixels.
E. Three (3) color 8” x 10” (or 8-1/2” x 11”) glossy prints of each photograph shall
be produced. One set of digital images shall be furnished on a DVD+R along
with the glossy prints. All disks shall be have a label which includes project
information as well as the date and whether these are pre-construction,
construction, or post-construction photographs.
F. The prints shall have indelibly printed on their reverse side the information
listed below. The same information shall be printed on a sheet of paper in a
clear sleeve to be included in the binder holding the prints and DVD+R. The
information shall also be provided in an Excel spreadsheet that shall be included
on the DVD+R. Additionally, this information should be embedded in each
digital photo file using the IPTC/XMP (International Press
Telecommunications Council's/Adobe Extensible Metadata Platform)
Standard.
1. Project number
2. Project name
3. Contract number and description
4. Photo number
5. View and description, indicating:
a. Location of camera:
b. General description of what photograph represents
6. Whether this is a pre-construction, construction or post-construction
photograph
7. Date picture was taken
8. Name of photographer
9. Department of Environmental Protection witness
G. The Contractor shall transmit one (1) electronic copy of each photo to the
Engineer for use in preparing descriptions. The photos with descriptions will be
returned to the Contractor for printing and mounting.
H. The prints shall be suitably mounted and labeled in loose-leaf type binders
which have protective covers for the prints. The binders shall be equipped with
a pocket suitable for storing the DVD+Rs. The materials shall meet the
requirements of ISO 18902:2013 “Imaging materials - Processed Imaging
Materials – Albums, Framing and Storage Materials”.
01323-4 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1488
2.02 VIDEOS
A. Video recordings shall be ASTC format, 1080P (1920 x 1080) using MPEG-4
Program Stream encoding (ISO-IEC 14496-14 “Coding of audio-visual objects
-- Part 14: MP4 File Format”), delivered on flash drive or portable hard drive,
using professional video cameras with clear and succinct narrative. The
narrative material shall be developed in conjunction with the Construction
Manager, construction contractor, and Engineer.
1. All video recordings shall begin with a chapter index listing the contents
in detail and providing direct access to each chapter.
2. All video recordings must include on parallel tracks metadata (catalogue
information) to include the date and time of recording, the name of the
area being documented, the project name, direction of travel, the
viewing side, project number, project name, Contract number and
description, name of photographer and Department of Environmental
Protection witness. The date and time shall be on a track separate from
the rest of the metadata and, when displayed, shall appear in the upper
left hand corner of the picture. Time and date shall use the following
format:
Time: 08:35:15 (using 24-hour clock time)
Date: 09/18/2002 (date format MM/DD/YYYY)
3. The project number, project name, Contract number and description,
name of photographer and Department of Environmental Protection
witness, when displayed, shall appear on the lower half.
B. Video output from camera used must be capable of producing full HD
resolution (1920 x 1080). Geometric distortion should not exceed two (2)
percent of picture height at any point in picture area.
C. All recording shall be done with adequate lighting. Written authorization by the
Engineer to proceed with video documentation at any areas must be done with
consideration of existing environmental conditions. The designee of the
Engineer will accompany the photographer during all taping sessions.
D. During the recording period, all records shall be turned over to the Engineer for
review of the content and quality. Any portion of the recording deemed
unacceptable by the Engineer shall be re- recorded by the Contractor at no
additional expense to the City.
E. One copy of all acceptable recordings (flash drive or hard drive) shall be
furnished and shall be properly identified by container number, equipment,
location and project name. A record of the contents of each recording shall be
provided on a run sheet, identifying each chapter segment of the recording. The
run sheet shall be provided in paper copy as well as on the flash dive or hard
drive.
01323-5 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1489
2.03 INFORMATIONAL VIDEO

A. The informational video shall have titles and audio defining all aspects of work
activities. In consultation with the Engineer and the City, the video shall
develop the basic design criteria, explain each phase of excavation or
construction, extras or credits, safety highlights, concrete, steel and other
suppliers, disposal of materials, dewatering, control of groundwater, and other
such items.
B. Two copies of the acceptable informational video (flash drive or hard drive)
shall be furnished and shall be properly identified and labeled. Identifying
information furnished on the videos shall be the same as specified in Article
2.03 of this Detailed Specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 USE OF PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS

A. All photographs, prints, DVDs and videos resulting from the work under this
Contract shall become the exclusive property of the City upon their creation.
B. Neither the Contractor nor the photographer nor the video recording firm shall
retain any rights pertaining to the photographs, prints, CDs/DVDs and videos
nor shall they reproduce or otherwise publish or disseminate any of the
photographs, aerials, prints, CDs/DVDs, or videos taken under this Contract
without the prior written approval of DEP.
C. The photographs, prints, CDs/DVDs and videos will be considered “work made
for hire” under applicable provisions of the Copyright Act, and the City will be
the copyright owner thereof and of all aspects, elements and components
thereof in which copyright protection might subsist. To the extent that such
materials do not qualify as “work made for hire”, the Contractor hereby
irrevocably transfers, assigns and conveys exclusive copyright ownership in
and to such materials to the City, free and clear of any liens, claims or other
encumbrances. The agreements between the Contractor and the photographer
and videotaping firm shall contain a provision containing these requirements.
END OF SECTION
01323-6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1490
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01330 –SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01330
Submittal Procedures
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Submittal Categories
B. Schedule of Submittals
C. Letter of Transmittal
D. Contractor Responsibilities
E. Shop Drawings Submittal
F. Approval of Shop Drawings not a Waiver
G. Final Copy – Shop Drawings
1.02 PAYMENT

1. Section 01312 – Web-based Project Management Information
System
2. Section 01332 – Final Record Documents

A. The Specifications for Structural Steel (ASTM Des. A36)
B. The AISC Specification for Structural Steel for Buildings, current edition
C. The New York City Building Code (NYCBC).
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Submittals includes all types of drawings and other documents required to be
prepared or assembled and submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor before,
during, or after construction, such as, but not limited to, the following
“submittal categories”:
1. Certifications;
2. Construction Progress Photos and Videos;
3. Detailed Estimate Breakdowns;
01330-1 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1491
4. Final Record Documents;

5. Mock Ups;
6. Safety Data Sheets (SDS);
7. Operation / Maintenance Manuals;
8. Permits;
9. Plans or Procedures;
10. Product Data;
11. Reports;
12. Samples;
13. Shop Drawings;
14. Spare Parts;
15. Test Reports;
16. Warranties.
B. Shop Drawings – includes all drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and
other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or
for the Contractor and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate some portion of
the Work.
1.06 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. All Submittals including, but not limited to, Shop Drawings and
inquiries pertaining to engineering features or Specification and
Drawing interpretations, shall conform to the General Conditions and
the requirements of this Section and Section 01312 – Web-based Project
Management Information System.
2. Within 30 days from the work commencement date specified in the
Notice to Proceed (NTP), the Contractor shall prepare and submit for
the Engineer’s approval a Schedule of Submittals which it proposes to
follow, listing Section references, names of Submittals required, and the
dates on which the Contractor proposes to make the Submittals. No
other Submittals will be considered for review until the Schedule of
Submittals is received and approved by the Engineer.
3. Submittal shall be made as directed by the Engineer. All submittals shall
be in the English language with U.S. customary units of measurement
being used in all drawings and data.
4. The Contractor shall use the project web-based document management
system as directed by the Engineer and as described in Section 01312 –
01330-2 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1492
Web-based Project Management Information System, to submit all

documents.
5. Samples shall be shipped directly to the Engineer. A copy of the
transmittal with photographs (JPEG format) of the samples (minimum
three (3) angles per sample) shall be entered into the web-based Project
Management Information System.
B. Letter of Transmittal or Inquiry
1. A letter of transmittal shall accompany each submission. If data for
more than one (1) Section of the Specifications is being submitted, a
separate transmittal letter shall accompany the material being submitted
under each Section. Insofar as possible, letters of inquiry concerning
certain phases of the Contract shall also deal with only one (1) Section
of the Specifications.
2. At the beginning of each letter of transmittal and each letter of inquiry,
provide a reference heading indicating the following:
OWNER'S Name: NYC Department of Environmental Protection
Project Name: ________________________________________
Contract Number: _____________________________________
Transmittal Number: ___________________________________
Section and Item Number: ______________________________
3. If submittals show variation from the requirements of the Contract, the

Contractor shall make specific mention of such variation in the
Submittal package.
C. Contractor Responsibilities
1. The Contractor shall review all submittals made by its suppliers and
subcontractors before transmitting them to the Engineer to assure proper
coordination of the Work and to determine that each submittal is in
accordance with the requirements of this Section.
a. A note shall appear on the Shop Drawings indicating that the
Contractor has made this check. Shop Drawings not so checked
and noted will be returned to the Contractor without further
examination.
2. Approval of Submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of furnishing materials and equipment of proper
01330-3 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1493
dimension, size, quality, quantity, and all performance characteristics to

efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract
Documents. Approval shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for errors of any sort on the Submittals. Approval is intended only to
determine conformance with the information given in the Contract
Documents. The Contractor is also responsible for information that
pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to the technique of
construction and for the coordination of the Work of all trades.
3. Approval of any Submittal by the Engineer does not constitute a
representation that all details of the Submittal were found to conform to
D. Shop Drawing Submittals
1. The Contractor shall promptly prepare and submit Shop Drawings of all
parts of the Work as specified herein. Shop Drawings which are full size
shall be on “D” size, 22" x 34" ANSI standard drawing sheets. All Shop
Drawings shall be drawn to scale.
2. Shop Drawings shall be numbered consecutively and shall accurately
and distinctly present the following:
a. All shop and erection dimensions;
b. Arrangement and sectional views;
c. Necessary details, including complete information for making
connections between Work under this Contract and work under
other contracts;
d. Kinds of materials and finishes;
e. Parts list and description thereof.
3. Each Shop Drawing shall be dated and contain:
a. The name of the project and the Contract number;
b. The descriptive names of equipment or materials covered by
the drawing and the Contract item number or numbers under
which it is or they are required;
c. The locations or points at which the materials or equipment are
to be installed in the Work.
4. Shop Drawings for equipment requiring electrical and/or mechanical
connections shall show the units of equipment in the proposed position
for installation and the details of attachments and connections required,
with locations referred to each other and to the structure.
5. Whenever mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, tanks, pipe
sections, structural and architectural details and other related items are
01330-4 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1494
to be permanently installed in the structures or are of sufficient weight

and bulk to cause excessive stresses on the structural members and
frame while being hauled, rigged, hoisted, blocked and placed in final
positions, the Contractor shall submit, in advance of this work, to the
Engineer for approval, Shop Drawings showing the methods and
sequence of the positioning operations, the size and material of all skids,
blocks, falsework, runways, etc., the capacities of hand-operated and
electric hoists and chain blocks, the positions of the hoists on the
completed structural frame, temporary shores and supports, the
capacities of winches and their position of attachment and similar and
related rigging equipment required to effect the successful positioning
of the permanently installed mechanical and electrical equipment.
6. Mechanical and electrical equipment shall not be moved across the floor
of the structure without first covering the floor with timber of sufficient
size so that the applied loads will be transferred to floor beams and
girders of steel or concrete. If it is required to reduce bending stresses
or deflection, the beams and girders shall be provided with temporary
supports.
7. The Shop Drawings shall also show the loads at points of concentration,
the stresses in the structures due to these temporary loads, the size and
class of material of the temporary members and bracing installed or
placed to minimize excessive stresses in the completed structures and
computations to demonstrate that the temporary rigging equipment and
accessories will not damage or injure any portion of the completed
structure.
8. The approval by the Engineer of Shop Drawings for rigging and hoisting
electrical and mechanical equipment and related items in final position
will not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to ensure the safety
of the rigging operations, the equipment to be installed and its personnel
nor will it relieve the Contractor from its responsibility not to damage
completed structures, parts or members thereof or other installed
equipment. The Contractor shall make good, repair or replace any
damaged or injured items, structural, mechanical, electrical,
architectural or landscaping, promptly and effectively to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and at no extra cost to the City.
9. Supporting structures designed by Contractor. Supporting structures,
which the Contractor is required to design, shall be of sufficient strength
to safely withstand all stresses to which they may be subjected, within
permissible deflections, and shall meet the applicable requirements
under NYCBC, ASTM A36 and AISC Specifications for structural
steel.
01330-5 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1495
10. Engineer's assumed design data. All structural steel, concrete and
reinforcement indicated or specified to fully or partially support
equipment or appurtenances and the areas immediately adjacent thereto,
have been designed from data based on assumed average anticipated
clearances and loadings. The final structural design in these locations
will be based on definite data available only after the Engineer approves
the equipment and appurtenances to be installed. Therefore, no Shop
Drawings pertaining to such supporting steel or concrete structures shall
be submitted until the Contractor is furnished with full data relative to
the approved equipment and appurtenances.
11. Necessary major changes in framing will be covering by supplementary
or revised drawings which will be furnished to the Contractor. All
changes indicated or necessary to accommodate the equipment and
appurtenances shall be incorporated into the Shop Drawings submitted
for approval.
12. Shop Drawings for the work in paragraphs 9, 10, and 11 above shall be
prepared by or under the direction of a qualified licensed Professional
Engineer, currently registered in the State of New York, and shall bear
the imprint of their seal and signature.
E. Shop Drawings Approval
1. Shop Drawing submittals to the Engineer shall contain complete data on
the Work and full information on related matters.
2. In submitting Shop Drawings for approval, all associated drawings
relating to a complete assembly of various parts necessary for a unit
shall not be submitted until the assembly of drawings is complete so that
they may be checked in relation to the assembly proposed. Where errors,
deviations and/or omissions are discovered later, they shall be made
good by the Contractor irrespective of any approval by the Engineer.
3. With Submittals, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of all
departures from the Drawings and Specifications; otherwise, approval
of such Submittals will not constitute approval of the departure.
Approval of a Submittal will constitute approval of the subject matter
thereof only and not of any other structure, material or apparatus shown
or indicated.
4. Materials or equipment shall not be ordered nor shall any Work be done
by the Contractor before the materials, the equipment and the Shop
Drawings as herein required have been approved by the Engineer.
5. After the Engineer completes their review, the submittal will be marked
with one of the following notations:
• Furnish as Submitted;
• Furnish as Corrected;
01330-6 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1496
• Revise and Resubmit;

• Rejected;
• For Information Purposes Only.
a. If a submittal is acceptable, it will be marked "Furnish as
Submitted" or "Furnish as Corrected". If a submittal is
unacceptable, it will be marked "Revise and Resubmit" or
"Rejected."
b. Upon return of a Submittal marked "Furnish as Submitted" or
"Furnish as Corrected", the Contractor may order, ship or
fabricate the materials included on the Submittal, provided they
are in accordance with any corrections indicated. Upon return
of a Submittal marked "Furnish as Corrected", the Contractor
shall make the corrections indicated, and resubmit the Shop
Drawings to the Engineer for record purposes, unless otherwise
specified by the Engineer.
c. Upon return of a Submittal marked "Revise and Resubmit", the
Contractor shall make the corrections indicated, clearly noting
any revisions and repeat the initial approval procedure. The
"Rejected" notation is used to indicate material or equipment
that is not acceptable. Upon return of a Submittal so marked,
the Contractor shall repeat the initial approval procedure
utilizing acceptable material or equipment.
d. Shop Drawings or other Submittals not bearing the Engineer's
"Furnish as Submitted" or "Furnish as Corrected" notation shall
not be issued to subcontractors nor utilized for construction
purposes. No Work shall be performed or equipment installed
without a "Furnish as Submitted" or "Furnish as Corrected"
drawing or Submittal.
6. In the event the Contractor obtains the Engineer's approval for the use
of equipment other than that which is shown or specified in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall, at its own expense and using methods
approved by the Engineer, make all changes to the Work, including
structures, piping, and electrical equipment and controls that may be
necessary to accommodate this equipment.
7. Shop Drawings shall be submitted well in advance of the need for the
material or equipment for construction and with ample allowance for
time required to make delivery of material or equipment after the
Submittal covering such is approved. The Contractor shall assume the
risk for all materials or equipment which are fabricated or delivered
prior to the approval of Shop Drawings. No materials or equipment will
be permitted to be incorporated into the Work nor will such be included
01330-7 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1497
in monthly payment estimates until approval thereof has been obtained

in the specified manner.
8. The Engineer will review and process all Submittals promptly, but a
reasonable time should be allowed for this, for the drawings being
revised and resubmitted, and for time required to return the approved
drawings to the Contractor.
F. Approval of Submittals not a Waiver
1. The approval of a Submittal shall not constitute a waiver of any of the
requirements of the Contract nor shall the City be compelled to accept
any Work unless it passes all the tests and requirements of the Contract
Documents.
2. All deviations made during construction from final Shop Drawings
previously annotated by the Engineer "Furnish as Submitted", shall be
corrected on the Shop Drawings, and resubmitted to the Engineer
showing conditions as constructed.

A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted so that they can be approved within the first
three (3) submissions. Starting with the fourth submission, the Contractor
agrees to pay the City, in the form of a credit against its Contract, a sum fixed
in Schedule A of the General Conditions for each and every additional
submission until the drawing is approved. Since it is difficult to ascertain the
actual time spent in reviewing Shop Drawings and since this time varies among
Shop Drawings depending upon their difficulty and complexity, the amount
described in Schedule A of the General Conditions is hereby fixed and agreed
to as liquidated damages that the City will suffer by reason of such additional
submissions, and not as a penalty. The liquidated damages described herein are
in addition to liquidated damages that may be imposed for delay in Substantial
Completion of the Work under Article 15 of the Standard Construction
Contract, as shown on Schedule “A” of the General Conditions, and any other
liquidated damages provided for in the Contract Documents.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. All Submittals shall have identifying titles and bear the stamp of approval and
signature of the Contractor as evidence that they have been reviewed and
approved by the Contractor and that they conform to the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Submittals without this stamp of approval will not be
reviewed by the Engineer and will be returned to the Contractor. The stamp
shall contain the following minimum information completed in ink:
01330-8 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1498
Project Name:
Contract No.: _________________________________________
Contractor's Name:
Date:
Item:
Specification Section No.: ___ Section Title: ____________________
Page Nos.: __ ___ __Article No.:_______ Paragraph No.:__________
Contract Drawing No.: _________________ of
Location:
Submittal No.: ______________ Review Cycle No.:
Shop Drawing Reference No.:
Source company name:
Approved By:
B. Submittal Identification and Tracking: In order to identify and track each
submittal as a separate and unique item, the Contractor shall utilize a submittal
numbering system as follows:
1. Submittal Number: The Submittal Number shall be a separate and
unique number correlating to each individual Submittal that needs to be
tracked as a separate and unique item. The Submittal Number shall be a
two-part, eight-character, alpha/numeric number assigned by the
Contractor in the following manner:
a. The first part of the Submittal Number shall consist of six (6)
characters that pertain to the applicable specification section
(without spaces after ever two (2) numerical characters).
b. The second part of the Submittal Number shall consist of three
digits (the numbers 001 to 999) to number each separate and
unique submitted under each Section.
c. A dash shall separate the two parts of the Submittal Number.
d. As an example, the Submittal Number for the third submittal
under Section 09900 – Painting and Coating, would be
09900-003.
C. Review Cycle: The review cycle shall be identified by a three-digit number
indicating whether a Submittal is the initial submission (“000”) or a
resubmission of an earlier Submittal. The first resubmission, for example, will
be assigned “001”; the second resubmission will be assigned “002”; etc.
Liquidated damages will be assessed upon rejection of any Submittal identified
as “003” in the review cycle.
D. Submittals shall include appropriate references to Drawings and Specifications.
E. In submitting Shop Drawings for approval, all associated drawings relating to
a complete assembly of various parts necessary for a unit shall be included.
01330-9 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1499
Shop Drawings shall not be submitted until the full set of associated drawings
is complete, so that they may be checked in relation to the assembly proposed.
F. All items of electrical equipment constituting an operating system and any
mechanical units involved therein or necessary for the functioning of such
system shall be submitted at the same time and shall include clear diagrams
showing circuit functioning and necessary details for field construction.
G. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submissions will be marked “Rejected” and
returned to the Contractor without review, for resubmission.
H. Final Copy -- Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall furnish all “Final Copy
Shop Drawings” to the DEP as a condition precedent to obtaining the final
certificate under Article 45 of the Standard Construction Contract. Final Copy
Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01332 – Final
Record Documents.
END OF SECTION
01330-10 11/2017
DEP 4/21/2016
1500
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01332 -FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS
SECTION 01332
Final Record Documents
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the requirements for all final record documents.
1.02 PAYMENT

A. Detailed Specification 01291 – Detailed Estimate Breakdown
B. Detailed Specification 01323 – Job Photographs and Videos
C. Detailed Specification 01330 – Submittal Procedures
D. Detailed Specification 01333 – Records in Paper Formats
E. Detailed Specification 01334 – Records in Microfilm Formats
F. Detailed Specification 01335 – Records in Electronic Formats
G. Detailed Specification 01831 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Archive: In this Section, to Archive shall mean to furnish as a final record
document.
B. As-Built Drawings. The “As-Built Drawings” reflect the “as constructed” final
product. These drawings shall use the same title blocks and sheet numbers as
the original “Bid Set Drawings”, with the exception that an “AB” is prefixed
onto the original drawing number.
C. Final Copy Shop Drawing (FCSD): The Final Copy Shop Drawing means the
approved copy [Furnish as Submitted (FAS) or Furnish as Corrected (FAC)] of
the shop drawing as described in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures,
corrected to reflect any deviations made for the installed condition showing the
actual construction.
D. Conformed Drawings: The Conformed Drawings are the original Bid Set
Contract Drawings modified to incorporate the changes made by addenda to the
Invitation for Bids issued during the bid period.
01332-1 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1501
E. Conformed Set Contract: The Conformed Set of the Contract is the original
Bid Set Contract modified to incorporate the changes made by addenda to the
Invitation for Bids issued during the bid period.
F. Bid Set Drawings (aka Design Drawings): The Bid Set Drawings shall consist
of the original Contract Drawings issued by DEP with the solicitation for
Contract bids.
G. Bid Set Contract (including Addenda): The Bid Set Contract shall be the text of
the original Contract (excluding Drawings) issued by DEP with the solicitation
for Contract bids, including any Addenda issued during the bid period.
H. Change Orders: The Change Orders shall include registered change order forms
and the complete sets of attached text and/or drawings for all design and field
Change Orders.
I. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: When specified, Operations and
Maintenance Manuals (“O&M Manuals”) shall be prepared by the Contractor
in conformance with Detailed Specification 01831 - Operation and
Maintenance Manuals. Final copies of the O&M Manuals shall be submitted in
accordance with the requirements of this Section.
J. Key Documents: For purposes of this Section, Key Documents shall include,
but not be limited to, to the following items:
1. Signed copy of the Standard Construction Contract;
2. The Contractor’s bonds;
3. Signed and submitted Bid Schedule of Prices;
4. DEP Award Folder contents;
5. Contract Notice of Award letter;
6. Notice to Proceed Letter;
7. Approved Detailed Estimate Breakdown as described in Detailed
Specification 01291 – Detailed Estimate Breakdown;
8. Article 44 (Standard Construction Contract) Substantial Completion
Certificate;
9. Final evaluation;
10. Final extension of time (if applicable);
11. Claim settlements (if applicable);
12. Certificate of Occupancy;
13. Warranties;
14. Structure Survey (per Article 9 of the General Conditions);
15. Regulatory Transition Plan (where applicable).
01332-2 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1502
K. Additional Documents: These shall be any additional documents that the

Engineer directs to be furnished as a final record document in accordance with
the requirements of this Section.
L. Job Photographs and Videos: These are the photographs and videos furnished
in accordance with Detailed Specification 01323 – Job Photographs and
Videos.
1.05 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall submit the following final record documents in paper,
microfilm, and electronic formats according to the requirements of Table 1 –
Summary of Final Record Documents to be Furnished attached at the end of
this Section, and as defined above and specified below:
1. As-Built Drawings
2. Final Copy Shop Drawings;
3. Bid Set Drawings (aka Design Drawings);
4. Conformed Drawings;
5. Bid Set Contract (including Addenda);
6. Conformed Set Contract
7. Key Documents;
8. Change Orders (text and drawings);
9. O&M Manuals;
10. Additional Documents;
11. Job Photographs and Videos.
B. Submittal of these documents shall be a condition precedent to obtaining the
final certificate under Article 45 of the Standard Construction Contract.

A. Project records in paper, microfilm, and electronic formats shall be submitted
in conformance with the following specifications, as applicable:
1. All records in paper formats shall be produced in conformity with
Detailed Specification 01333 – Records in Paper Formats.
2. All records in microfilm format shall be produced in conformity with
Detailed Specification 01334 – Records in Microfilm Formats.
3. All records in electronic format shall be produced in conformity with
Detailed Specification 01335 – Records in Electronic Formats.
01332-3 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1503
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. As-Built Drawings
1. The Contractor is to create an As-Built Drawing Set by revising the
Conformed set of contract drawings electronically using AutoCAD. If
no Conformed set was created, then he shall use the original set of
Contract Drawings. When using the Conformed Set of Drawings, the
Contractor shall independently confirm that the changes made by the
Addenda to the original Bid Set of Drawings were correctly reflected in
the Conformed Set of Drawings. Files submitted in AutoCAD format
will be bound to include all related matter (e.g. base files, font files and
shapes). Each file shall be viewable and printable in its entirety without
recourse to external files.
2. The Contractor shall use the information compiled during construction
to create an As-Built Drawing Set. The Contractor shall document any
deviations, changes, etc. from the configurations shown on the original
Contract Drawings or revised drawings issued during the course of
executing the work including Change Orders, Design During
Construction (DSDC) memorandums, Requests for Information (RFIs),
Requests for Clarification (RFCs), etc. These deviations, changes, etc.
shall generally relate to topographic features, relocation of structures, or
locations of underground items such as pipelines, duct banks, manholes
or footings. Survey distances, coordinates and/or elevations shall be
included to accurately locate all such items. All deviations, changes, etc.
shown shall be field verified.
3. Contractor should have the electronic files of the contract drawings.
However, should the Contractor require an additional copy, the
Engineer will supply the Contract Drawings AutoCAD electronic files
on DVD-Rs upon written request, if such copies are available. The
AutoCAD files will consist of a bound set of drawings.
4. Drawing Size – The As-Built drawings are to be the same size as the
full size Contract Drawings (22-inches by 34-inches).
5. Generate the new As-Built drawing number as per the following steps:
a. The As-Built drawing number is the original contract drawing
number prefixed by an “AB” for As-Built.
i. Example: If the drawing number for a contract drawing is
36G-02S-14, the As-Built drawing number will be “AB-
36G-02S-14”.
b. If a new drawing is produced, its number can be added to the
end of the series. (i.e., if 14 is the last drawing in the series,
then the first new drawing becomes 15; the second new one
becomes 16, etc.)
01332-4 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1504
c. If a new drawing is inserted into the middle of a series, it is to

have a letter suffix starting with A (i.e., 02A, 02B, etc.)
i. Example: If the drawing number for a contract drawing is
36G-02S-02, the new, additional As-Built drawing will
be numbered “AB-36G-02S-02A”.
6. Designation – The designation “As-Built Drawing” is to be added to the
drawing. Using AutoCAD, insert the words “As-Built Drawing” above
the title box in the right hand corner of the drawing. (Do not include the
quotation marks in “As-Built Drawing” when marking the drawing.)
7. Modifying the Contract Drawings – Prior to submitting an As-Built
drawing made from a Contract Drawing for review and acceptance, the
Contractor is to create a “clean” finished copy of the drawing by
undertaking the following:
a. Remove all signatures and certifications from the Contract
Drawing
b. Remove all previous revisions and references from the revision
boxes
c. Remove the Professional Engineers seal, Engineer’s company
names, and any initials from the drawing title block
d. Modify all of the original title boxes to show the Contractor
information including the name of the Contractor and the date.
e. Remove all previous markings – notes, revision indicators,
balloons, submittal stamps, etc. – from the drawing.
8. Contractor’s Information – The Contractor’s name, address, contact
information and date (month and year) the project is completed is to be
added to the drawing. Place this information in the title block in the
space previously utilized for the Engineer’s name.
9. Adding Revisions – Items/areas changed are to be enclosed within a
cloud line. The revision cloud layer is to be a 0.024-inch line thickness.
10. The Contractor shall submit copies of the As-Built Drawings for review
and approval by the Engineer. These submittals shall show the
deviations and changes from the original design drawings by using red-
line mark-ups. The Contractor shall make modifications to the
submitted As-Builts as required by the Engineer. In the final, approved
set of As-Builts, the red lines shall be converted to black.
11. The final approved set of As-Builts shall have the following statement
on the cover sheet:
"These As-Built Drawings for Contract ###, as prepared by XYZ
Company, have been prepared as Record Copy Drawings.”
01332-5 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1505
The above statement shall be signed by the representative of the

Contractor. The signer shall be identified along with the Contractor.
B. Final Copy Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall furnish all Final Copy Shop Drawings (FCSDs) to
DEP.
a. The Final Copy Shop Drawing shall be the approved copy
(FAS or FAC) of the shop drawing, corrected to reflect any
deviations made for the installed condition showing the actual
construction.
2. In addition to submitting the complete set of Final Copy Shop Drawings
as a final item at the end of construction, the Contractor shall prepare
and submit Final Copy Shop Drawings for approval on a continual basis
during the performance of the Work when the particular item of work
for a Final Copy Shop Drawing has been completed. The Contractor
shall submit the FCSD within 30 days after the completion of the work
item.
3. The drawing revision boxes shall have all previous revisions and
references removed from the drawings. The revision boxes shall
indicate Final Copy Shop Drawing.
4. Each drawing shall bear the original submittal file number, without the
revision number, which shall be written in the lower right hand corner
of a drawing above the title box. The file number shall also have a
prefix, which identifies it a FCSD.
a. For example, if the file number for an approved shop drawing
is 16221-002, the FCSD will be numbered “FCSD-16221-
002”,
5. Supporting Documentation: Supporting documentation shall bear the
correlating Final Copy Shop Drawing file number so as to identify it.
All supporting documentation (e.g. catalog cuts, test results,
calculations, etc.) shall be submitted, together with the related FCSD so
as to maintain a complete set of all documents submitted with each
FCSD.
6. Submittal for Approval. Two paper prints of each FSCD full size where
applicable) shall be submitted for approval. The drawing shall be
checked by the Resident Engineer against the field records and a copy
shall either be stamped “Approved” or returned with comments for
correction and re-submittal by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
retain one approved set of the FCSDs for use in submitting the entire set
in paper, microfilm and electronic copies.
01332-6 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1506
C. Bid Set Contract

1. If the Contractor does not have a complete set of the original bid set of
the Contract and Addenda in the original PDF format (non-scanned), it
may request a set from the Engineer. Upon request, the bid set of
Contract and Addenda will be provided to the Contractor in PDF format
if possible. If a PDF format is not available, then a paper hard copy set
may be utilized. This may also be requested from the Engineer if
required and shall be provided if possible.
2. The Contractor shall Archive the entire set of Contract Documents,
except Drawings, as discussed below. This set shall include all the
sequential pages of the Contract Documents and shall include:
a. Front and Back Covers
b. Notice to Bidders
c. Invitation for Bids
d. Information for Bidders
e. Standard Construction Contract (unsigned)
f. Table of Contents
g. General Conditions
h. Schedule of Wage Rates
i. General Specifications
j. Detailed Specifications
k. Addenda
3. On a multiple contract project, the "G", and "H" Contractors shall only
Archive the respective Detailed Specifications for their work. These are
only required in the microfilm and electronic Archives. Paper version
of the bid set contract shall be produced by the “E” Contractor.
4. The signed (executed) parts of the Standard Construction Contract shall
be included by the Contractor as part of the Key Documents.
D. Bid Set - Drawings (aka Design Drawings).
1. The Bid Set of Drawings shall be Archived. If the Contractor does not
have a complete set of the original Bid Set of Drawings in the AutoCAD
format, the Contractor may request a set from the Engineer. If possible,
the Bid Set of Contract Drawings will be provided to the Contractor in
AutoCAD format, bound with their respective data sets.
E. Conformed Set Contract
1. The Conformed Set Contract shall be Archived.
01332-7 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1507
F. Conformed Drawings
1. The Conformed Drawings shall be Archived. If the Contractor does not
have a complete set of the Conformed Drawings in the AutoCAD
format, it may request a set from the Engineer. If possible, the
Conformed Drawings will be provided to the Contractor in AutoCAD
format, bound with their respective data sets.
G. Change Orders
1. All change orders (both field and design) produced during the
construction of the project shall be Archived.
H. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals
1. O&M Manuals should have been submitted and reviewed as part of the
shop drawings submission and review process in accordance with
Detailed Specification 01831 - Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
2. Final, approved copies of the O&M Manuals shall be furnished during
the progress of the work in accordance with Detailed Specification
01831 - Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Additional electronic
copies of each manual shall be submitted as part of the Final Record
Documents.
I. Key Documents
1. Key Documents produced during the construction of the project shall be
Archived. They shall consist generally of the items defined above.
J. Additional Documents
1. Any Additional Documents such as Soil Classification Reports,
Environmental Impact Statements, Site Assessments, Geotechnical
Reports, permits, RFI's. etc., shall also be Archived when directed by
DEP. If the Contractor does not have copies of any documents, they will
be provided by the Engineer, when possible, in electronic or paper
format.
K. Job Photographs and Videos
1. Job Photographs and Videos produced during the performance of the
Work shall be Archived.
L. Quantities
1. The quantities and formats to be furnished for each Final Record Document
shall be as shown in Table 1.
1.08 ATTACHMENTS
A. Table 1 – Summary of Final Record Documents to be Furnished
01332-8 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1508

END OF SECTION
01332-9 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1509
Table 1
Summary of Final Record Documents To Be Furnished
Microfilm
Microfilm Microfilm Microfilm
(35mm
(35mm (16mm first (16mm
Final Record Electronic first
Paper second generation second
Document Type (DVD-R sets) generation
generation silver- generation
silver-
diazo) gelatin) diazo)
gelatin)
4 sets (PDF/A &

As-Built Drawings 2 sets 1 set 1 set NA NA
AutoCAD)
Final Copy Shop 4 sets (PDF/A &

1 set 1 set 1 set NA NA
Drawings AutoCAD)
4 sets (PDF/A &

Conformed Drawings NA 1 set 1 set NA NA
AutoCAD)
4 sets (PDF/A &

Bid Set Drawings NA 1 set 1 set NA NA
AutoCAD)
Bid Set Contract

1 set 4 sets (PDF/A) NA NA 1 set 1 set
(including Addenda)
Conformed Contract NA 4 sets (PDF/A) NA NA 1 set 1 set
Change Orders (Text
4 sets (PDF/A )
& Drawings) (Design NA NA NA 1 set 1 set
& Field)
6 sets (PDF/A)*
O&M Manuals 4 sets * 2 compilation NA NA NA NA
sets*
Key Documents NA 4 sets (PDF/A) NA NA 1 set 1 set
Additional Documents NA 4 sets (PDF/A) NA NA 1 set 1 set
Job Photographs NA 2 sets (TIFF) NA NA NA NA
Job Videos NA 2 Sets (MPEG 2) NA NA NA NA
* Each paper copy of an O&M manual shall have a DVD-R copy of the Manual in a fitted
sleeve attached on the inside of the front cover of the binder for the Manual. These shall be
furnished to the Operating Bureau in accordance with the requirements Detailed Specification
01831 - Operation and Maintenance during the progress of the work. Two extra DVD-R's of
each manual or two compilation DVD-R be furnished as part of the Final Record Documents.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 1 OF 1 11/2017
DEP 4/26/2016 (NO CM)
1510
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01333 – RECORDS IN PAPER FORMATS
SECTION 01333
Records in Paper Formats
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Expected longevity of paper documents without significant deterioration
under normal use and storage conditions.
B. Properties of the paper and of the printing processes, and the tests required to
demonstrate these properties.
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work required under
this Section and the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump sum
price bid for the Contract.

A. Detailed Specification 01332 -- Final Record Documents
B. Detailed Specification 01831 -- Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. The Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the
following standards and guidelines or their latest available updates or
revisions:
a. ANSI/NISO Z39.48, Permanence of Paper for Publications
and Documents in Libraries and Archives. This standard is
accessible at http://www.niso.org.
b. Library of Congress - Preservation Photocopying.
c. National Archives and Records Administration Technical
Information Paper No. 5, Tape Pull Test.
d. National Archives and Records Administration -- Peel Test
Target.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
1. Small-Format Documents: 11 by 17 inches or smaller
2. Large-Format Documents: larger than 11 by 17 inches
01333-1 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1511
1.06 DESCRIPTION
A. Final Record Documents
1. For the Final Record Documents specified in Detailed Specification
01332 - Final Record Documents, the following directions shall apply.
a. Drawings
i. As specified in Detailed Specification 01332 - Final
Record Documents, provide full size, paper copies of the
Final Copy Shop Drawings and As-Built Drawings (if
required).
(a) Bid Set and Conformed Drawings are not required to
be furnished as paper copies but shall be furnished as part
of the electronic archives and microfilm.
ii. Paper copies are to be produced from the electronic
copies.
b. Bid Set - Contract
i. A single set of the Bid Contract in paper format shall be
provided by the Contractor, and it shall be identical to the
copy distributed for bid. They shall be furnished as bound
volumes.
ii. All Addenda shall be produced in paper format by the
Contractor. Each Addendum shall be bound separately
and include all attachments including sketches and
drawings. Drawings shall be attached using half-size
drawings (11” x 17”).
c. O&M Manuals
i. As required in Detailed Specification 01831 - Operation
and Maintenance Manuals, submit hard-bound copies and
electronic copies of each O&M Manual during the
progress of the work.
ii. No additional paper copies are required to be submitted
as part of the Final record Documents.
d. Key Documents
i. Key Documents, as defined in Detailed Specification
01332 - Final Record Documents, are not required to be
produced in paper format.
e. Change Orders
i. Change orders are not required to be produced in paper
format.
f. Job Photographs
01333-2 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1512
i. The job photographs are not required to be produced in

paper format for purpose of Final Record Documents.
g. Additional Documents
i. Additional Documents are not required to be produced in
paper format.

A. Properties of Paper
1. All paper used for documents covered by this Section shall conform to
the standards of ANSI/NISO Z39.48, as amended herein, for pH, tear
resistance, alkaline reserves and paper stock.
2. Paper Stock
a. Uncoated paper shall be used.
b. Uncoated paper shall not be less than 24 pounds basis weight.
B. Printing Processes
1. Small Format Documents, With Color Images and With Black and
White Images
a. Only electrophotographic printing shall be used. When color
electrophotographic printing is used, the process shall be
certified by the manufacturer of the printer as not soluble in
water, chemically stable, and resistant to fading, for a period of
not less than 50 years. All documents printed using a color
electrophotographic printer shall be accompanied by a
certification from the manufacturer of the printer that the
process is in compliance with this requirement.
2. Large-Format Documents, With Black and White Images
a. Only electrophotographic printing shall be used. DEP expects
that most large-format documents shall be printed in black and
white. Only documents where color is an essential information
component of the document may be printed in color, under the
provisions of Paragraph C’ below. An example of documents
where color may be an essential information component is a
topographic drawing produced from data in a Geographic
Information System.
3. Large-Format Documents, With Color Images and With Black and
White Images
a. Either electrophotographic or inkjet printing shall be used.
When inkjet printing is used, a formulation of ink shall be used
that is certified by the manufacturer of the printer as not
01333-3 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1513
soluble in water, chemically stable, and resistant to fading, for

a period of not less than 50 years. All documents printed using
an inkjet printer shall be accompanied by a certification from
the manufacturer of the inks that the inks are in compliance
with this requirement.
C. Testing
1. Test Method: All printing processes and materials used to produce the
documents covered by this Section shall be tested periodically to
ensure proper function, using the National Archives and Records
Administration Technical Information Paper No. 5, Tape Pull Test,
and Peel Test Target.
2. Test Frequency: All printing processes and materials used to produce
the documents covered by this Section shall be tested not less than
twice a day, once at the beginning of the work day, and once at the end
of the work day.
D. Inspections
1. DEP may carry out inspections of the production facilities without
notice.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Paper Certification: All documents covered by this Section shall be
accompanied by a certification from the manufacturer of the paper that it
complies with ANSI/NISO Z39.48.
B. Printing Test Certification: The organization that operates the printing
processes and materials used to produce the documents covered by this
Section shall submit the following documentation as proof that the tests have
been carried out:
1. An affidavit, signed by the supervisor responsible for the production
area, certifying that the tests have been performed in accordance with
the procedures described in the National Archives and Records
Administration Technical Information Paper No. 5, Tape Pull Test.
2. All of the Peel Test Targets actually used to perform the tests.
END OF SECTION
01333-4 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1514
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01334 – RECORDS IN MICROFILM FORMATS
SECTION 01334
Records in Microfilm Formats
PART 1 GENERAL

A. “Small-Format” records and “Large-Format” records
B. Standard requirements and information for microfilming
1.02 PAYMENT

A. Detailed Specification 01332 -- Final Record Documents
B. Detailed Specification 01335 -- Records in Electronic Formats

A. ANSI IT2.19 Photography - Density Measurements - Geometric
Conditions for Transmission Density
B. ANSI IT9.6 Photography - Photographic Films - Specifications for
Safety Film (formerly ANSI PH1.25)
C. ANSI PH1.19 Photographic Sheet Films - Designation of Emulsion
Side
D. ANSI PH1.33 Photography (Film) - 16mm, 35mm, 70mm, and
105mm Spools for Still-Picture Cameras – Dimensions
E. ANSI/AIIM MS8 Image Mark (blip) Used in Image Mark Retrieval
Systems
F. ANSI/AIIM MS14 Specifications for 16 and 35mm Roll Microfilm
G. ANSI/AIIM MS15 Dimensions and Operational Constraints for Single-
Core Cartridge for 16mm Processed Microfilm
H. ANSI/AIIM MS18 Splices for Image Film - Dimensions and Operational
Constraints
I. ANSI/AIIM MS23 Practice for Operational Procedures/Inspection and
Quality Control of First-Generation Silver-Gelatin
Microfilm of Documents
01334-1 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1515
J. ANSI/AIIM MS29 Cores and Spools for Recording Equipment –

Dimensions
K. ANSI/AIIM MS32 Microrecording of Engineering Source Documents on
35mm Microfilm
L. ANSI/AIIM MS34 Dimensions for Reels Used with Processed 16mm and
35mm Microfilm Not for Use in Automatic Threading
Equipment
M. ANSI/AIIM MS38 Microrecording of Engineering Graphics - Computer-
Output Microfilm
N. ANSI/AIIM MS39 Recommended Practice for Operational Procedures,
Quality Control and Inspection of Graphic Computer-
Output Microforms
O. ANSI/AIIM MS43 Practice for Operational Procedures/Inspection and
Quality Control of Duplicate Microforms of Documents
and from COM
P. ANSI/AIIM MS44 Recommended Practice for Quality Control of Image
Scanners
Q. ANSI/AIIM MS48 Recommended Practice for Microfilming Public
Records on Silver-Halide Film
R. ANSI/AIIM TR2 Glossary of Imaging Technology
S. ANSI/ISO 417 Imaging Media - Photography - Determination of
Residual Thiosulfate and Other Related Chemicals in
Processed Photographic Materials - Methods for Using
Iodine-Amylose, Methylene Blue and Silver Sulfide
(Also listed as ANSI/NAPM IT9.17)
T. ANSI/ISO 3334 Micrographics - ISO Resolution Test Chart No. 2 -
Description and Use (Also listed as ANSI/AIIM MS51)
U. ANSI/NAPM IT9.1 Imaging Media (Film) - Silver-Gelatin Type -
Specifications for Stability (formerly ANSIPH9.1)
V. ANSI/NAPM IT9.2 Imaging Media - Filing Enclosures and Storage
Containers for Photographic Processed Films, Plates
and Papers
W. ANSI/NAPM IT9.11 Imaging Media - Processed Safety Film - Storage
(formerly ANSI PH4.8)
X. Library of Congress Specifications for the Microfilming of Books and
Pamphlets in the Library of Congress
01334-2 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1516
1.05 DEFINITIONS
1. Archive: In this Section, to "Archive" shall mean to furnish as a final
record document.
2. “Small-Format” Records: Office files, manuals, etc. equal to or less than
11” x 17” for one page) to be filmed on 16mm roll microfilm.
3. “Large-Format” Records: Mostly architectural and engineering
drawings larger than 11” x 17” per sheet to be filmed on 35mm roll
microfilm.
1.06 DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements
1. The microfilm shall be produced by “computer-output microfilm”
(COM) recorders using digital files as the source of the records. As of
the issue date of this Specification, the typical COM device used to
produce 16mm roll microfilm is the Digital Archive Writer
manufactured by the Eastman Kodak Company (Rochester, NY). The
typical COM device used to produce 35mm roll microfilm is the line of
Electron Beam Recorders produced by Image Graphics Inc. (Shelton,
CT).
B. Records and Microfilm Pick-Up And Delivery
1. When required, the records to be microfilmed shall be picked-up from
the premises of DEP, the Contractor or the construction manager for the
project. The driver of the delivery vehicle, or other accredited
representative of the microfilming Subcontractor, will sign a document
acknowledging receipt of the records outlined in the transmittal list of
the shipment;
2. After filming, all copies of the records shall be returned to the premises
of DEP and the Contractor or construction manager. The microfilming
Subcontractor is not permitted to retain any copies of the records, in any
format;
3. The recipient (DEP, or the Contractor, or construction manager) shall
be notified, by phone, of pick-up or delivery at least 24 hours
beforehand;
4. Records transport shall be provided by the Subcontractor, using an
insured delivery vehicle. All pick-ups and deliveries shall be “Inside
Delivery”.

A. Microfilming Subcontractor Qualification
01334-3 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1517
1. The microfilming Subcontractor shall have, at the time of the job

execution, complete in-house capability and capacity (production
facility, staff, and equipment) to perform all the operations (file
conversion, filming, processing, quality control, duplicating, data entry,
packaging, etc.) as specified herein, for the production volume
anticipated. No operation or portion of an operation may be sub-
subcontracted;
2. DEP may conduct facility evaluations at any time during the
microfilming subcontract to ensure the maintenance of production and
quality control capabilities. Such inspections shall be carried out,
without notice, during regular business hours;
B. Facility Evaluation
1. Prior to the execution of microfilming work, DEP may choose, at its
sole option, to send a Facility Evaluation Team to perform a site visit
and survey. During this site visit and survey, the microfilming
Subcontractor will have the opportunity to make a formal presentation,
demonstrating to the satisfaction of the Facility Evaluation Team that it
is able to meet the performance requirements of this Specification;
2. Factors affecting a microfilming Subcontractor’s qualifications include,
but are not limited to, the following: technical qualifications,
experience, organization, material, equipment, facilities, personnel
resources and expertise, financial resources, a satisfactory record of
performance, and a satisfactory record of business integrity;
3. The microfilming Subcontractor must demonstrate, to DEP’s
satisfaction, an understanding of all the service requirements set forth in
the Contract. The facility evaluation will also address the following
issues;
a. File conversion;
b. COM recorder operation;
c. Film processing and archival performance;
d. Quality control;
e. Film duplication;
f. Data entry;
g. Production techniques;
h. Adequacy of records storage, handling, and preparation areas;
i. Applicable specifications and standards on hand;
j. General housekeeping and hardware maintenance;
k. Equipment, records tracking, and quality control logs in use;
01334-4 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1518
4. Transportation for the Facility Evaluation: Transportation for facility

evaluations beyond three hours’ drive from Flushing, NY, shall be
provided by the Contractor. The DEP Facility Evaluation Team will not
exceed four persons. Transportation may be, by mutual agreement, by
train, automobile, bus or air. The duration of the facility evaluation is
normally about two hours;
5. Cancellation: Existing microfilming Subcontractor approval is subject
to withdrawal for non-conformance with Specifications. The
microfilming Subcontractor shall be subject to a new facility evaluation
if it moves to a new location;
6. The Contractor must notify DEP, in writing, ninety days prior to
relocation of the microfilming Subcontractor’s production facility;
C. Liquidated Damages:
1. Loss of Records: For each record determined by DEP to have been lost
by the microfilming Subcontractor and not replaceable, liquidated
damages may be assessed against the Contractor in the amount fixed in
Schedule A of the General Conditions.
2. Re-filming: When required to re-film records or an entire roll of
microfilm (as required under Article 2.11, Quality Control), the
microfilming Subcontractor shall deliver the corrected or re-filmed
roll(s) of microfilm within ten business days of notification by DEP.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Information Letter: Upon DEP’s request, the Contractor shall submit an
information letter containing a list of the microfilming Subcontractor’s hardware,
software, and supplies. The letter will be considered valid for two calendar years,
and may be extended for a third year with a follow-up (update) letter of facility
configuration and/or staff changes. As a minimum, the letter shall include the
following information.
1. Hardware (number, manufacturer & model)
a. COM recorder(s);
b. Microfilm processor(s), silver gelatin;
c. Chemical stability test method;
d. Inspection equipment;
e. Duplicating equipment.
2. Supplies (manufacturer & product identification)
a. Microfilm stock;
b. Developer;
01334-5 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1519
c. Fixer (hypo);
d. Duplicating film.
B. Sample Microfilm
1. The microfilming Subcontractor may be required to produce a test
microform (roll film) of COM and duplicate film, in accordance with
the requirements of this Section, using records supplied by DEP, or the
Contractor, or DEP’s Construction Manager. The Contractor must
submit this sample to the Chief - BEDC Specifications Section for
inspection and approval;
2. If the test film is unacceptable, the microfilming Subcontractor is
required to produce one or more test films until the microfilming
Subcontractor produces a sample acceptable to DEP;
3. If the microfilming Subcontractor fails to produce an acceptable roll of
microfilm within five business days after receipt of DEP’s initial
request, DEP may require the Contractor to propose another
microfilming Subcontractor.
C. Activity Reports: The Contractor shall submit a written report of the activities
of its microfilming Subcontractor, on a monthly basis, to DEP, or the Resident
Engineer. The activity report shall consist of a summary list of projects
completed, showing for each project:
1. Project Description;
2. Final Record Type(s);
3. Number of images;
4. Number of rolls;
5. List of retakes and rolls of film re-filmed, showing for each roll the
record type, roll number, and nature of remedy (retake or re-film);
6. Number of diazo duplicate rolls;
7. Number of indexing keystrokes (when applicable);
8. Date all microfilm (first-generation and all duplicates) and records
returned to DEP, or the Contractor, or the Construction Manager.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOCUMENTS TO BE MICROFILMED

A. Record Types
1. For a description of the types of records to be microfilmed see Detailed
Specification 01332 - Final Record Documents;
01334-6 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1520
2. In general, the Contractor shall use the records in its possession. When
required, records will be supplied by DEP, or the construction manager;
3. The specific condition, format, and number of records is established by
a survey of samples of the records. The microfilming Subcontractor will
be offered the opportunity to inspect each record series prior to
microfilming;
4. Small-format records typically consist of reports, various sorts of
Contract records (such as Requests for Information, Bid and
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Drawing Log, Contract
Notices, Permits, Warranties, Bid Tabulations, Completed Bid Sheets,
Forms of Bonds, and Advertising Notices);
5. Large-Format records typically consist of architectural, engineering,
and topographical drawings (building and machinery plans, maps, etc.);
6. Electronic records will normally be produced in one of three file
formats: PDF for text records (with or without raster images), and
AutoCAD and PDF for drawings and uncompressed TIFF 6.0 for digital
photographs;
7. Files in formats other than TIFF will have to be converted to that format
for output to COM. This conversion may be performed by DEP, by the
Contractors by the Construction Manager, or by the microfilming
Subcontractor, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
Contract;
8. The microfilming Subcontractor and DEP, or the Contractor, or the
Construction Manager will establish, before the start of each
microfilming project, the acceptable file transfer medium or media.
B. Ownership of Records and Microfilm
1. The original records, and all microfilm produced, shall remain the
property of DEP;
2. If an entire roll of microfilm is determined defective and re-filming is
required, the original (defective) roll of film and all duplicates shall be
returned, to DEP;
3. Unless specifically requested in writing by DEP, no records shall be
destroyed by the microfilming Subcontractor.
C. Record Order
1. Records shall be maintained in existing logical record order before,
during and after filming;
2. The only exception to this requirement is when corrections are made to
record order to conform to the requirements of the indexing system.
Such corrections shall be made only with written permission from DEP.
01334-7 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1521
D. Records’ Condition
1. Potential problems with digital records include corrupt files, damaged
storage media, incorrect metadata, and invalid or obsolete file formats;
2. In record series covering long spans of time, the indexing system may
have changed repeatedly (it is not uncommon for drawings to include
multiple indexing systems).
2.02 DOCUMENT PREPARATION

A. The microfilming Subcontractor shall be responsible for making the record
camera-ready. Preparation work shall be executed on the microfilming
Subcontractor's premises.
B. Preparing the digital records for output to the COM device shall include (but is
not limited to):
1. Verifying that the records on hand match the list of records sent by DEP,
or the Contractor or Construction Manager;
2. Preparing a table of contents for each roll of film;
3. Ensuring the file is in the proper place in the output queue;
4. Verifying that CAD files have been properly converted to raster image
format (including conversion from color to black-and-white, and
appropriate thickening of very thin lines);
5. Verifying that every record can be written to the COM device;
6. Ensuring the number of microfilm images does not exceed the capacity
of the roll of film.
2.03 MICROFILMING
A. Final Format
1. Small-Format Records: 16mm roll microfilm, with a minimum of one
diazo duplicate of each roll;
2. Large-Format Records: 35mm roll microfilm, with a minimum of one
diazo duplicate of each roll.
B. COM Film
1. Small-Format Records: 16mm x 100ft, 5-mil thick, non-perforated
polyester, high contrast (gamma 3.0 to 4.0) panchromatic film in
accordance with ANSI/NAPM IT9.1;
2. Large-Format Records: 35mm x 100ft, 5-mil thick, non-perforated
polyester, high contrast (gamma 3.0 to 4.0) panchromatic film in
accordance with ANSI/NAPM IT9.1.
C. Reduction Ratio shall be in accordance with the following schedule:
01334-8 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1522
Records Size Reduction

Small-format records 32X
up to 18" wide X 24" long (A, B & C) 16X
18" to 24" wide X 24" to 36" long (D) 24X
24" to 36" wide X 36" to 48.4" long (E & F) 30X
24" to 36" wide but greater than 48" long (G, H & J) 30X multi-frame
greater than 36" wide but less than 48" wide (rotate 90°)
30X multi-frame
(K)
D. Image Orientation: Comic mode, simplex

E. Image Spacing: ANSI/AIIM MS32, Sections 5.1 (Records Image Area), 5.2
(Frame Area), and 5.3 (Frame Pitch [Spacing]), apply
F. Image Centering: ANSI/AIIM MS32, Section 5.4 (Centering), applies
G. Multiple-Sheet Drawings: ANSI/AIIM MS32, Section 5.8 (Document
Placement), applies
H. Background Density Range (camera film)
1. Background density applies to all images;
2. Preferred background density is 0.95, within a range of 0.85 to 1.15,
measured as visual diffuse transmission density, in accordance with
ANSI IT2.19;
3. At least 80% of all microfilm produced shall be within ± 0.05 standard
density units of the preferred background density.
I. Base-Plus-Fog (Dmin): Base-plus-fog shall not exceed 0.06, measured as
visual diffuse transmission density.
J. Resolution
1. The resolution requirements, by reduction ratio, are as follows:
a. At 30x, 5.6 chart pattern;
b. At 32x, 5.0 chart pattern.
2. The patterns shall be resolved on all five target positions. The direction
of lines in both groups in each of the test charts shall be distinguishable
(“line separation”), in accordance with ANSI/AIIM MS23. This
resolution requirement applies to the first-generation silver-gelatin film
and to all diazo duplicates produced from the first-generation silver-
gelatin microfilm, up to and including the fourth generation.
3. Test Charts: The microfilming Subcontractor shall employ the
resolution test target appropriate for the COM recorder (supplied by
01334-9 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1523
Eastman Kodak for their Digital Archive Writer, and by Image

Graphics, Inc. for their Electron Beam Recorders).
2.04 SEQUENCING OF FRAMES ON MICROFILM

A. The sequence of frames shall be as follows:
Blank leader, 2-meter (80-inch) minimum.
Frame 1 - “START” target (eye-legible);
Frame 2 - “ROLL # of #” with Final Record Item(s) description (e.g. As-
Builts, FCWDs, etc.) and Contract Number [eye-legible];
Frame 3 - All information shown on the roll side label (see sample at the
end of this Section), excluding identification of whether roll is
original or diazo copy;
Frame 4 - Microfilming Subcontractor name and address, date filmed,
reduction ratio, film manufacturer, type, emulsion number and
expiration date;
Frame 5 - Certification target signed by the camera operator;
Frame 6 - Resolution target (see Article 2.03(J)(3), Test Charts);
Frame 7 - Residual Thiosulfate test Certificate (ref. Article 2.03(J)(3), Test
Charts); a scanned copy of the Certificate that precedes the
filming date by no more than two weeks (one week preferred);
Frames 8 to…. - These frames shall contain:
a. The Metadata Table (as specified in Section 01332 -
Records in Electronic Format) for the Final Record
Document Item that follows (i.e. As-Builts or Final
Copy Shop Drawings or Bid Specifications, etc.)
b. If there are multiple rolls, the Metadata Table(s) should
be included on all rolls.
Frames … These frames shall follow the Metadata Table shall contain the
actual Final Record Documents Images (i.e. As-Builts or Final
Copy Shop Drawings or Bid Specifications, etc.);
a. Each record document image shall be sequentially-numbered;
b. The first image of the actual Record Document Item on the roll
shall start with number one (001) and the numbering shall
continue sequentially through the roll, without variation, to the
last image of the Record Item. If there are additional rolls, then
the sequential numbering shall continue on the next roll and not
be restarted. The sequential number shall be positioned in the
frame just below the center edge of the record.
01334-10 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1524
Following the last record image, the following shall be filmed.

1. Residual Thiosulfate Test Certificate, as described above;
2. Resolution target, as described above;
3. “ROLL...” number (eye-legible);
4. “END” target (eye-legible);
5. Blank leader, 2-meter (80-inch) minimum.
B. Retrieval order will be prescribed by DEP, the Contractor, or the Construction
Manager for each microfilming project;
C. Reel Breaks (division) will be prescribed by DEP, the Contractor, or the
Construction Manager for each microfilming project. As a general rule, folders,
chapters or sections or manuals, and similar collections of related records, shall
not be divided between two rolls of film;
D. Indexing:
1. Manual Indexing, Small-format Records (16mm)
a. Image mark (blips), two-level, in accordance with ANSI/AIIM
MS8, with sequentially-numbered image frames. The medium
blip shall mark the first frame of a folder, chapter, or other
document division; the small blip shall mark each page frame;
b. Each record document image shall be sequentially-numbered;
c. The first image of the record documents on the roll shall start
with number one (001) and the numbering shall continue
sequentially through the roll, without variation. The last frame
number on the roll shall be equal to the total number of record
document images on the roll. The sequential number shall be
positioned in the frame just below the center edge of the
record;
2. Manual Indexing, Large-Format Records (35mm)
a. Each record document image shall be sequentially-numbered;
b. The first record document image on the roll shall start with
number one (001) and the numbering shall continue
sequentially through the roll, without variation. If there are
additional rolls, then the sequential numbering shall continue
on the next roll and not be restarted;
c. The sequential number shall be positioned in the frame just
below the center edge of the record;
d. The numbers microfilmed shall be of adequate height so as to
be legible when viewed on a 20:1 viewer;
01334-11 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1525
2.05 SPLICING
A. Splices shall be in accordance with ANSI/AIIM MS18. Under no circumstances
shall a roll of film contain more than three splices.
B. Splicing shall not be used to insert technical targets (resolution or residual
thiosulfate test certificate) which have been omitted.
C. Only ultrasonic-weld splices shall be used; pressure-sensitive tape, cements
using acetic acid, and/or other chemicals injurious to the permanent-record
qualities of microfilm, shall not be used.
2.06 RETAKES
A. Retakes shall be filmed with full documentation (as though they were separate
rolls of film), and spliced into the film leader, leaving at least 50cm (20 inches)
of blank film before the original START target.
B. Defective images shall not be removed from the roll.
C. When any frame of a roll-shaped drawing (such as a map of an aqueduct right-
of-way) or any portion of a multi-sheet drawing is rejected, the entire drawing
shall be re-microfilmed.
D. The microfilming Subcontractor is cautioned to carefully check record integrity
before filming retakes, to ensure proper record order.
2.07 DUPLICATES
A. Number of duplicates shall be as specified in Table 1 of Section 01 78 39-
Project Record Documents.
B. Type: Diazo (silver, if required); see Exhibit C - Sample Diazo Film Table,
attached at the end of this Section.
C. Base: Polyester.
D. Size: 16mm (Small-Format records) or 35mm (Large-Format records) x 100ft,
4-mil thick.
E. Bar-Gamma Range: 1.10 to 1.49 (see Diazo Film Table, column 3).
F. Dmax Range: 1.50 to 1.80 (see Diazo Film Table, column 4).
G. Dmin Range: Burn-out density, plus 0.05 to 0.09. For example, a typical burn-
out density (see Diazo Film Table, column 9) of 0.05 should result in a Dmin
of 0.10 to 0.14.
H. Background Density, Visual Diffuse Transmission
1. Negative-appearing images: 1.10 (+0.20);
2. Positive-appearing images: 0.04 (+0.20).
01334-12 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1526
2.08 EMULSION ORIENTATION

A. Emulsion shall be identified and/or oriented as specified in ANSI/AIIM MS14.
2.09 PACKAGING
A. Silver-gelatin microfilm, both first-generation and any duplicates, shall be on
spools, in accordance with ANSI PH1.33. The spools shall be in closed plastic
containers, in accordance with ANSI/NAPM IT9.2, and shall fit into boxes
loosely, without binding or pressure.
B. Diazo Duplicate Microfilm
1. Reels: ANSI/AIIM MS34 (Figure 2, Style 1¾square/round spindle
hole, solid flange) in closed plastic containers. Film trailer shall be
secured to the reel hub with a Kodak/Recordak trailer holder (Kodak
catalogue number 149-1703), or equal.
C. Package marking will be prescribed by DEP, the Contractor, or the Construction
Manager for each microfilming project. See Exhibit B - Sample Label Layout,
2.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Workmanship of Camera Microfilm and Duplicates
1. Each frame of camera and duplicate microfilm shall be exposed and
processed so that every line and character visible on the original records
appears on the microfilm.
2. The film shall be free of scratches, holes in the emulsion or base, tears,
finger marks or any other defect that might adversely affect quality.
3. The microfilming Subcontractor shall inspect each roll of microfilm for
resolution, density, processing quality and general workmanship.
B. Film Processing and Testing
1. All silver-gelatin film processing shall be monitored for stability in
accordance with ANSI/NAPM IT9.1.
2. Processor
a. The processor(s) employed for this Contract shall be tested
once-weekly. Film which fails to meet stability standards shall
be entirely re-filmed.
b. Inasmuch as the stability of the film is monitored by sampling,
a test failure will require the re-filming of all microfilm in the
untested batches which preceded and followed the failed
sample.
3. Film Sample: A sample of clear film shall be subjected to the methylene
blue test, Procedure II (High-Range Thiosulfate), for residual thiosulfate
01334-13 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1527
ion, as outlined in ANSI/ISO 417, table 4: “Long-term microfilms”,

0.014g/m2.
4. Testing Organization: The test shall be performed by an independent
testing laboratory, such as Eastman Kodak Company, or MicroD
International, 14901 Judicial Road, Burnsville, MN 55306, or equal. A
microfilm service bureau does not qualify as an independent testing
laboratory.
5. Test Certificate: The original test certificates (not copies) shall be
mailed by the independent test laboratory directly to the Chief, BEDC
Specifications Section, 96-05 Horace Harding Expressway, Corona,
New York 11373.
C. Quality Control Inspection
1. If requested by the Engineer, the microfilming Subcontractor shall
submit to DEP, the Contractor, or the Construction Manager, for their
quality control inspection, the first-generation silver-gelatin microfilm,
prior to duplication.
D. Defective Images
1. Images that, upon inspection by DEP or the Construction Manager, do
not meet the requirements of this Section will be rejected as defective,
and must be re-filmed at the Contractor's expense.
2. If the number of defective images does not exceed two-tenths of a
percent (0.2%) of the total number of images on the roll, the defective
images may be filmed as retakes in accordance with Article 2.06,
Retakes. If the number of defective images exceeds two-tenths of a
percent (0.2%) of the total number of images on the roll, the entire roll
must be re-filmed.
E. Defective Rolls: Certain requirements (such as reduction ratio, background
density range, resolution, etc.) apply to the entire roll of microfilm. Should a
roll of microfilm fail to meet the requirements described in these, and similar,
paragraphs, the entire roll of microfilm will be rejected as defective, without
consideration of the number of defective images.
F. Roll Rejection: When an entire roll of film is rejected by DEP or the
Construction Manager, DEP or the Construction Manager may deface the film
by cutting off the leader immediately before the START target. All reject film
will be returned to DEP or the Construction Manager.
G. Rejection Period: DEP or the Construction Manager shall have six months after
receipt of the completed microfilm to review the microfilm for defects. Defects
discovered within this six-month period shall be re-filmed at the Contractor's
expense.
01334-14 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1528
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS TO BE MICROFILMED

A. See Section 01332- Final Record Documents, Table 1, for the required “Final
Record Documents” and the formats for their delivery.
B. Microfilm Format
1. For all As-Built Drawings (where required), Final Copy Shop
Drawings, Bid Set Drawings, Conformed Set of Drawings, and Survey
Drawings; make one original image of each drawing on 35mm film.
Make one copy – diazo duplicate (or silver gelatin duplicate if approved
by DEP) – of each original 35mm roll. The Final Copy Shop Drawings
shall include all supporting documentation as additional images
following the related drawing, irrespective of the size of the
document(s).
2. For Specifications, Key Documents, Change Orders, and Additional
Documents: these shall be Archived on 16mm film and with one copy
(diazo duplicate) made of all rolls.
a. Drawings that are part of a Change Order shall be Archived on
the 16 mm roll so that the Change Order file can be kept as one
complete record.
b. Color flow charts and electrical schematics larger than 11” x
17” shall be Archived on 35mm film.
3. Each set of microfilm rolls (original and copy) shall be numbered
sequentially and the labels shall read “1 of x”, “2 of x”, etc., where “x”
is the total number of rolls in the set. The labels for each set shall also
state whether it is the “Original” or the “Copy” set.
C. Metadata Tables: The Metadata Tables as specified in Section 01335 – Records
in Electronic Format shall also be microfilmed.
1. At the beginning of each Final Record Document type, the related
Metadata Table shall be inserted.
D. Each microfilm roll box shall have labels conforming to the samples shown in
Exhibit A – Sample Information/Certification Target, attached at the end of this
Section.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate with the DEP BEDC Specifications Section
prior to production of any microfilm. The Contractor shall furnish for approval
a detailed organizational plan outlining the procedure for production of the
microfilm and the organization of the documents on microfilm in conformance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
01334-15 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1529
3.02 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit A – Sample Information / Certification Target
B. Exhibit B – Sample Label Layout
C. Exhibit C – Sample Diazo Film Table
END OF SECTION
01334-16 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1530
ATTACHMENTS – STANDARDIZED DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01334 –
EXHIBIT A
SAMPLE INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION TARGET
FILE COPY OF THE RECORDS OF
The City of New York

Department of Environmental Protection (DEP)
[DEP’s current address]
This is to certify that the microphotographic images appearing on this roll of microfilm
are accurate reproductions of the above-named Department of Environmental
Protection (DEP) records, and were microfilmed from the best available records, in the
course of regular operations, following established DEP policy and procedures (the
Specification governing the microfilming of this record series is included at the
beginning of the first roll of each calendar year of the series).
OPERATOR INFORMATION
COM operator: ________________ starting date: ________________
ending date: ________________
COM DEVICE INFORMATION

reduction ratio: ________X exposure setting: ________________
make: _____________model: ______________serial number: _____________
FILM INFORMATION
manufacturer: _______________________type: ________________________
emulsion number: _____________________expiration date: ________________
PAGE 1 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1531
EXHIBIT B
SAMPLE LABEL LAYOUT
Typical roll edge label
CONTRACT ####
AS- BUILT DRAWINGS
Roll 1 of 3 (Silver Original)
Typical roll side label:
CONTRACT #####
(Contract title and descriptions given on the

front cover of the Contract Documents)
AS- BUILT DRAWINGS

Roll 1 of 3
Prepared by: (Insert Contractor ID or CM/DE ID)
Date (when prepared)
Film Type: Silver Original
Label contents are based on standard courier typeface, at 10 characters per inch
(monospaced), and labels 3-1/2 inches long. Microfilming Subcontractor may use a
proportional sans-serif typeface of equivalent legibility, in ten-point, eleven-point, or
twelve-point type sizes.
PAGE 2 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1532
ATTACHMENTS – STANDARDIZED DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01334 – CONTRACT DEL-260 G, H, E
EXHIBIT C
SAMPLE DIAZO FILM TABLE
(in bar-gamma order)
This table is not part of the Specification and is provided for information purposes only. The information shown herein is, without exception, compiled from the manufacturers'
specification sheets. A dash indicates that the manufacturer’s specification sheet does not provide the data. Diazo suppliers may change product characteristics without notice.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COMPANY PRODUCT BAR D COLOR PAPER DIAZO CONTRAST BURNOUT SEE
NUMBER GAMMA MAX PRINT DUPLICATE D NOTE
MEDIUM-LOW CONTRAST
REXAM 2724 1.0 1.25 BLACK — — — 0.04
REXAM 2751 1.30 BLUE — YES LOW
XIDEX/ANACOMP DHCF2 1.0 1.45 BLUE — — LOW 0.05
NOVAMEDIA BK2 1.1 1.50 BLACK — — MEDIUM 0.05 2
REXAM 2754 1.2 1.60 BLACK YES YES MEDIUM 0.05 3
FR CHEMICALS 2754 1.2 1.60 BLACK YES YES MEDIUM 0.05
REXAM 2758 1.1 1.70 BLUE-BLACK YES — MEDIUM 0.05 3
FR CHEMICALS 2758 1.1 1.70 BLUE-BLACK YES — MEDIUM 0.05
NOVAMEDIA BE8 1.2 1.70 BLUE — — HIGH 0.05 2
MEDIUM CONTRAST
REXAM 2753 1.40 1.85 BLUE YES YES HIGH 0.05 3
FR CHEMICALS 2753 1.40 1.85 BLUE YES YES HIGH 0.05
XIDEX/ANACOMP DMC 1.40 1.60 BLUE-BLACK YES — MEDIUM 0.05
XIDEX/ANACOMP DEM 2 1.40 1.60 BLACK YES YES MEDIUM 0.05
BELL & HOWELL BLACK 1.40 1.60 BLACK YES YES MEDIUM 0.05
BELL & HOWELL BLUE 1.40 1.60 BLUE YES — MEDIUM 0.05
XIDEX/ANACOMP DEM 1.40 1.70 BLACK YES — — 0.05
NOVAMEDIA BN4 1.45 1.60 BLUE-BLACK YES — MEDIUM 0.07 2
XIDEX/ANACOMP DBA 1.45 1.70 — YES YES — 0.05
HIGH CONTRAST
3M NRX1 1.70 1.80 BLUE-BLACK — — HIGH 0.1 1
XIDEX/ANACOMP DATAGARD 1.70 1.80 — YES NO — 0.05
XIDEX/ANACOMP DHCF 1.70 1.80 BLUE — — HIGH 0.05
XIDEX/ANACOMP DHC 1.70 1.90 BLUE-BLACK YES — HIGH 0.05
XIDEX/ANACOMP DEHF 1.70 1.90 BLACK YES YES HIGH 0.05
XIDEX/ANACOMP DEH 1.80 2.00 BLACK YES NO HIGH 0.05
NOTES (ref.: column 10): 1. 3M Company product NRZ-1 is a dry, heat-processed diazo film.
2. Meets ANSI IT9.5 for long-term preservation.
3. Rexam Graphics, formerly Graphics Technology International, formerly James River Graphics.
PAGE 3 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1533
PAGE 4 OF 4 11/2017
DEP 4/22/2016
1534
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01335 – RECORDS IN ELECTRONIC FORMATS
SECTION 01335
Records in Electronic Formats
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Specification describes the requirements for the electronic records for the
items specified in Detailed Specification 01332 - Final Record Documents.
B. This Specification does not cover digital objects which include a time base
correction code (e.g., analogue or digital video recordings, analogue or digital
audio recordings, instrumentation data feeds, etc.), or geo-coded objects
(produced by Geographic Information Systems-GIS).
1.02 PAYMENT

A. Detailed Specification 01332 - Final Record Documents;
B. Detailed Specification 01323 - Job Photographs and Videos;
C. Detailed Specification 01333 - Records in Paper Formats;
D. Detailed Specification 01334 - Records in Microfilm Formats

A. Adobe Reference Specification for Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), revision
6.0 (1992);
B. ANSI/AIIM MS44 – Recommended Practice for Quality Control of Image
Scanning;
C. ANSI/AIIM MS52 – Recommended Practice for the Requirements and
Characteristics of Original Documents Intended for
Optical Scanning;
D. ANSI/AIIM TR34 – Sampling Procedures for Inspection by Attributes of
Images in Electronic Image Management and
Micrographic Systems;
E. ISO/DIS 15009-1 -- Document management -- Electronic document file
format for long-term preservation -- Part 1: Use of PDF
1.4 (PDF/A-1).
01335-1 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1535
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Archive: In this Section, to Archive shall mean to furnish as a final record
document.
B. Metadata: Metadata is commonly defined as “data about data.” For the purposes
of this Section, Metadata refers to the “descriptive metadata” that describes the
content and form of the construction records known as Final Record Documents
(i.e. contract name, document date, construction phase, engineer of record, etc.)
and supports the discovery (searching) and identification of the resources.
C. Portable Document Format-Archival (PDF/A): A standard that identifies a
"profile" for electronic documents that ensures the documents can be
reproduced the exact same way in years to come. A key element to this
reproducibility is the requirement for PDF/A documents to be 100% self-
contained. All of the information necessary for displaying the document in the
same manner every time is embedded in the file. This includes, but is not limited
to, all content (text, raster images and vector graphics), fonts, and color
information. A PDF/A document is not permitted to be reliant on information
from external sources (e.g. font programs and hyperlinks).
1.06 DESCRIPTION
A. Source of Electronic Records
1. In preparing the electronic records, the Contractor shall make every
reasonable effort to obtain from the originator (e.g., the manufacturer)
documents in their original electronic format and incorporate these in
the records. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, electronic records
may be scanned from a paper version only when the Contractor cannot
obtain the electronic version from the originator (e.g., the
manufacturer).
B. Metadata
1. For each type of Final Record Document, a Metadata table shall be
prepared in Excel which will furnish the specified data for that
document. The data elements shall be furnished to the Contractor by
DEP prior to production of the Final Record Documents DVD-Rs.
C. File Compression, File Formats, and Quality Control
1. File compression is not permitted for any of the files in any format;
2. File formats acceptable to DEP are ISO 15009-1 Portable Document
Format-Archival (PDF/A); Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), version
6.0 (“II” format); AutoCAD. All files shall be delivered to DEP with
file names that use the default file extension for each of the above
formats.
3. Portable Document Format-Archival (PDF/A)
01335-2 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1536
a. Security Settings: records converted to PDF/A must have all

security settings deactivated (e.g., encryption, master
passwords, and/or permissions) prior to transfer to DEP.
Deactivating security settings ensures DEP’s ability to support
long term migration and preservation of the records;
b. Review of Special Features: Because of the complexities
associated with certain PDF features, DEP will review PDF/A
records containing special features on a case-by-case basis when
the records are scheduled. Examples of special features include
but are not limited to: digital signatures; links to other
documents, files or sites; embedded files (including multimedia
objects); form data; comments and/or annotations;
c. Fonts: electronic records that have been converted to PDF/A
from their native electronic formats must have all fonts
referenced in the record embedded within the PDF file to
guarantee the visual reproduction of all text as created. This
requirement is met by having, as a minimum, subsets of all
referenced fonts embedded within the PDF/A file. All fonts
embedded in PDF/A records must be publicly identified as
legally embeddable (i.e., font license permits embedding) in a
file for unlimited, universal viewing and printing;
d. Scanning Production Requirements: records converted from
scanned images also must adhere to the production requirements
described in Paragraph 6 below.
4. Tagged Image File Format (TIFF)
a. In the ‘II’ format (i.e., little-endian), byte order is always from
the least significant byte to the most significant byte;
b. The reference specifications for TIFF 6.0 can be found at
http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/tiff/index.html (as
of 08/2005).
5. Vector Drawings
a. Each vector drawing (produced by a Computer-Assisted Design
system—CAD) shall be delivered to DEP in two different file
formats: Native AutoCAD and Portable Document Format
(PDF/A);
b. Drawings will be “bound” to include all related matter, such as
base files, font files, and shapes. Each file shall be viewable and
printable, in its entirety, without recourse to external matter;
c. When reproduced in Computer Output Microfilm—COM (see
Detailed Specification 01334 - Records in Microfilm Format),
01335-3 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1537
drawings must be converted to a raster image file format. This

conversion shall be performed from the PDF/A version of the
drawing.
6. Text Files
a. The file format for all text files, whether converted from office
automation systems or scanned, is Portable Document Format-
Archival (PDF/A);
b. The quality of documents to be scanned shall be governed by
ANSI/AIIM MS52 "Recommended Practice for the
Requirements and Characteristics of Original Documents
Intended for Optical Scanning";
c. Quality Control in the scanning process shall follow the
practices established in ANSI/AIIM MS44 “Recommended
Practice for Quality Control of Image Scanning” and
ANSI/AIIM TR34 “Sampling Procedures for Inspection by
Attributes of Images in Electronic Image Management and
Micrographic Systems”. The sampling rates for each type of
Quality Control (visual and printed) shall be established by
written agreement with DEP. The sub-contractor producing
Final Record Documents shall supply a description of the
Quality Control inspection performed as part of the scanning
process and a report on the results of the last inspection
performed on the images and the date of that inspection;
d. Documents shall be scanned using equipment and scanning
parameters sufficient to ensure full reproduction of all
significant detail in the documents, such as (but not limited to)
curved lines and fill in drawings, color and tonal gradations in
photographic images, the smallest printed text, handwritten
notes, and signatures. Records may be scanned in bitonal (1-bit)
mode and 300 pixels per inch (ppi) or better only when the
records consist exclusively of clean printed type possessing high
inherent contrast (e.g., laser printed or typeset on a white
background). Records shall be scanned in gray scale (8-bit) and
300 pixels per inch (ppi) or better when the records consist of
textual documents of poor legibility because of low inherent
contrast, staining or fading (e.g., carbon copies, thermofax, or
documents with handwritten annotations or other markings), or
that contain halftone illustrations or photographs. Records shall
be scanned in color (24-bit RGB) and 300 pixels per inch (ppi)
or better when the records contain color information important
to interpretation or content.
01335-4 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1538
7. Digital Photographs
a. The file format for digital photographs is Tagged Image File
Format (TIF);
b. Photographic (raster) images shall may be produced directly by
digital cameras;
c. Digital cameras shall produce records with true optical
resolution. Images shall not be resized or interpolated to a higher
resolution from a lower resolution;
d. Photographic images shall be provided as continuous-tone (8-
bit) gray scale or color (24-bit or 48-bit RGB) raster images;
e. Digital camera files shall be captured as specified in Detailed
Specification 01323 - Job Photographs and Videos.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILE TRANSFER MEDIA

A. The current file transfer medium is a DVD-R. Alternative file transfer media
may be used, at the discretion of DEP. The DVD-Rs used for producing the
electronic Archives shall be:
1. MAM-A Mitsui Gold DVD-R with White Inkjet Printable Surface;
2. Or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL.
A. When creating DVD-Rs, the Contractor should organize the information in
separate DVD-R's as presented below. For each final record document, use as
many disks as needed to accommodate the materials. The multiple disks will be
further labeled to read “1 of x”. So, if three DVD-Rs are needed to
accommodate the material for a specific final record document, the DVD-Rs
will be labeled Disk 1 of 3, etc.
In general, separate DVD-R's shall be prepared for the following items:
1. As-Builts (when required);
2. Final Copy Shop Drawings;
3. Bid Set Drawings (aka Design Drawings);
4. Bid Set - Contract (including Addenda);
5. Conformed Drawings;
6. Conformed Contract;
7. Key Documents;
01335-5 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1539
8. Change Orders;
9. O&M Manuals;
10. Job Photographs;
11. Job Videos
12. Additional Documents.
For projects with smaller amount of Final Record Document files, some of the
above volumes can be combined.
B. The DVD-R label shall include:
1. The Project by number, facility, and description;
2. Contract Number and Title;
3. Description of the final record documents(s) included on the disc;
4. The total number of DVD-Rs for the final record document(s);
5. The date (month and year) of when the materials were archived;
6. The preparer of the final record document (i.e. Contractor or Consultant
CM);
7. For O&M Manuals, include the Equipment Item, the Manufacturer, and
the related Specification Section number;
An example of a DVD-R label is provided for guidance in Exhibit B, attached
at the end of this Section.
C. Files submitted in AutoCAD format shall be bound to include all related matter
(e.g. base files, font files and shapes) so that each file is viewable and printable
in its entirety without recourse to external files.
D. PDF files shall be 1200 dpi print quality.
3.02 METADATA
A. The Metadata Excel Table shall be included in the DVD of each Final Record
Document type and shall serve as an index for the files for of the record in the
DVD. Each file indexed in the Metadata Table shall be hyperlinked so that
clicking on the file name opens that file. The filenames given on the Metadata
Table must exactly match the files on the DVD to which they are hyperlinked.
B. The Metadata Excel tables shall be utilized as the Final Document Log.
Templates for the Metadata Excel table for each Final Record Document will
be provided by the DEP.
C. A sample Metadata Table will be provided by DEP.
01335-6 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1540
3.03 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit A – DVD-R Folder Structure
B. Exhibit B - Sampled DVD-R Label
END OF SECTION
01335-7 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1541
01335-8 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1542
EXHIBIT A
DVD-R Folder Structure
1. The DVD-R shall have a folder structure similar to the ones shown below.
a. For a DVD-R with one set of Final Record Documents
“ Contract #### – Bid Drawings (PDF Files)
(a) Metadata Table- Contract ##### – As-Built
Drawings - PDF.xls”
b. For a DVD-R with more than one set of Final Record Documents:
“ Contract #### – Bid Drawings (PDF)
(a) Contract ##### – Bid Drawings (PDF Files)
(b) Metadata Table- Contract ##### – As-Built
Drawings - PDF.xls”
“ Contract #### – Bid Drawings (AutoCAD)
(a) Contract #### – Bid Drawings (AutoCAD Files)
(b) Metadata Table- Contract ##### – As-Built
Drawings - AutoCAD.xls”
PAGE 1 OF 2 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1543
EXHIBIT B
Sample DVD-R Label
ProjectTitle
Project Title
CONTRACT
CONTRACT ##########
(Insert
(Insert Contract
Contract Title
Title and
and Description
Description
asasShown
Show onon Contract
Contract Book
Book Covers)
Covers)
Prepared by:
(Insert Contractor
ID or CM/DE ID)
Final Copy Shop Drawings

(PDF Files)
Disk 1 of 1
Date (when prepared)
PAGE 2 OF 2 11/2017
DEP - 3/28/2016
1544
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01355 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CONTROL
SECTION 01355
Hazardous Materials Control
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Known Hazardous Materials
B. Unforeseen Hazardous Materials
C. Hazardous Materials Investigation and Remediation
D. Hazardous Waste Management and Regulatory Compliance
E. Exhibit A – Standard Operating Procedure for Entry – Cone Valve
Chamber
1.02 PAYMENT
A. Payment for unforeseen hazardous material remediation and the related
costs of hazardous waste management and regulatory compliance will
be made from the allowance(s) as specified in Detailed Specification
01270 – Measurement and Payment.
B. Except for the allowance specified herein, no separate payment will be
made for performing any other Work required under this Section and the
Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump sum price bid for
the Contract.

A. Detailed Specification 01270 -- Measurement and Payment
B. Detailed Specification 01356 -- Environmental, Health and
Safety Requirements
C. Detailed Specification 13281 -- Asbestos Management
D. Detailed Specification 13282 -- Mercury Management
E. Detailed Specification 13283 -- Lead Management
F. Detailed Specification 13284 -- PCB Management

A. 29 CFR 1910 – OSHA General Industry Regulations;
B. 29 CFR 1926 – OSHA Construction Industry Regulations;
C. 6 NYCRR 370-375 – NYSDEC Hazardous Waste Regulations &
Environmental Remediation Program;
D. 49 CFR 171– USDOT Regulations, including General Information and
Definitions.
01355-1 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1545
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Competent Person: One who is capable of identifying existing and
predictable hazards in the work area or unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous
working conditions, and who has authority to take prompt corrective
measures (29 CFR 1926.32(f)).
B. Large Quantity Generator (LQG): A facility that generates (in a calendar
month) ≥1,000 kg of total hazardous waste or >1 kg of acute hazardous
waste or >100 kg of acute hazardous waste spill residue or soil, or at any
time stores hazardous and acute hazardous wastes in greater quantities
than 6,000 kg of hazardous waste, 1 kg acute hazardous waste, or 100
kg of acute hazardous waste spill residue or soil.
1.06 DESCRIPTION
A. Known Hazardous Materials
1. There are materials present within the designated work areas that
will require special handling and other safeguard measures in
order to minimize chemical exposure hazards to site workers and
to prevent environmental impacts to offsite areas. As applicable
to its Work, the Contractor shall incorporate these minimum
requirements into its Environmental, Health and Safety Plan
(EHASP) or other applicable submittal to ensure a safe and
healthful working environment. The Health and Safety Plan shall
be designed in accordance with Detailed Specification 01356 –
Environmental, Health and Safety Requirements.
a. Upon completion of any additional material sampling at
the project/work site(s), the Contractor’s EHASP shall
be updated as needed to incorporate new data generated
by analysis of the samples.
b. Each Contractor should shall share new data on
material’s analysis with other primer contractors under
this Contract.
2. The following are known hazardous materials in the work area
and are to be included in the Lump Sum Bid Items:
a. Asbestos was identified in the caulk around the door
frame(s) in the mezzanine. Although there was no
asbestos identified in the insulation around the door
frame, due to its proximity to the caulk, it is likely to be
impacted during the upgrades, therefore it is
recommended that this be handled as ACM.
b. Lead Containing Paint was identified within the red
paint in the generator room at 3.7% by weight as well as
in the light gray paint in the main room at 2.1% by
weight.
01355-2 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1546
c. PCB contamination was identified within the red paint

in the fan room with a reported concentration of 69
milligrams per kilogram (mg/kg) (Arochlor-1254) and
9.4 mg/kg(Arochlor-1260).
d. PCB contamination was identified within the light gray
paint in the main room with a reported concentration of
69 mg/kg (Arochlor-1254).
e. Based on DEP’s Legacy Program, black felt between
the concrete slabs on mezzanine floor contains Asbestos
and PCBs.
f. The Cone Valve Chamber may still contain detectable
levels of PCBs in paint and potential heavy metals,
including Mercury. The attached Exhibit A – Standard
Operating Procedure for Entry (SOP No. 8.6.2015) shall
be followed when entering the Cone Valve Chamber.
3. The Contractor shall not initiate or proceed with any Work in
areas associated with the contaminated, potentially hazardous, or
hazardous materials until these materials have been removed
from these areas or managed in accordance with the DEP Paint
Management Policy, the DEP Hazardous Waste Management
Policy, and the following Specifications:
a. Asbestos-containing material shall be handled in
accordance with Detailed Specification 13281 --
Asbestos Management
b. Mercury-containing material shall be handled in
accordance with Detailed Specification 13282 --
Mercury Management
c. Lead Containing paint shall be handled in accordance
with Detailed Specification 13283 -- Lead Management
d. PCB-containing material shall be handled in accordance
with Detailed Specification 13284 -- PCB Management
4. The Contractor shall attend an initial site inspection, a
coordination conference, and any other meetings to review
hazardous materials control issues in connection with the
progress of the Work. The initial site inspection and coordination
conference shall be as described below. Other meetings to
monitor hazardous materials control issues associated with the
Work, including any briefing of DEP personnel, including, but
not limited to, facility managers and supervisors, shall be
scheduled as necessary.
a. Initial Site Inspection: Within five (5) business days
after work commencement date in the Notice to
Proceed, or an agreed upon timeframe, the Contractor,
01355-3 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1547
the Engineer, and applicable DEP personnel shall

perform an initial site inspection to review all the work
areas that will be affected by contaminated, potentially
hazardous and hazardous materials.
i. Initial site inspection shall be organized by the
Contractor who shall contact DEP, and the
Engineer to determine the representatives that
should attend.
ii. A minimum of one representative from each party
shall be present for the inspection.
iii. Competent Persons shall lead the site inspection.
iv. Wipe sampling or sampling outside of the Work
to be performed may not be performed without
DEP approval.
v. A site inspection report shall be distributed by the
Contractor at the beginning of the site inspection.
The site inspection report shall include drawing(s)
and associated text that describes the work in
sufficient detail to aid in the site inspection.
vi. The Contractor shall note in the site inspection
report any special requirements that they have to
perform their work during the inspection.
vii. The Contractor shall prepare and distribute a
summary of the site inspection and any comments
noted during the inspection to all parties present at
the site inspection.
viii. In the event that the initial site inspection does not
satisfactorily identify the contaminated,
potentially hazardous, and hazardous materials
potentially affecting the Work, follow-up
inspection(s) shall be organized and held as
required.
b. Coordination Conference: Within five (5) days after
receipt of the submittals from the initial site inspection,
the Engineer will direct the Contractor to schedule and
organize a coordination conference. The coordination
conference shall be held at the Engineer’s field office,
and shall include DEP facility managers and supervisors
as relevant.
i. The coordination conference shall be led by the
Contractor.
ii. The Contractor shall prepare and distribute a
summary of the conference and any comments
noted during the conference to all parties present
at the conference.
01355-4 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1548
c. Coordination Plan: Within 14 days after the

coordination conference, the Contractor shall submit a
coordination plan for work affected by contaminated,
potentially hazardous, and hazardous materials,
incorporating all the Engineer’s comments, for the
Engineer’s approval.
d. Follow-up Conferences: Within 14 days of receiving the
coordination plan, the Engineer will review and notify
the Contractor of the approval of the coordination plan
or of required changes. In the event that the plan is not
approved, follow-up conference(s) shall be organized
and held as required to receive approval.
i. The follow-up conference dates shall be as
B. Unforeseen Hazardous Material
1. The project/work sites may contain unforeseen hazardous
materials. When a potentially hazardous material that was
previously unforeseen is discovered or an upgrade of its
Environmental, Health and Safety Plan is necessary for
managing unforeseen hazardous material, the Engineer will
direct the Contractor to engage the services of a hazardous
materials specialist to perform the necessary investigation,
develop a remediation plan, and perform the remediation work.
Additionally, the Engineer will direct the Contractor to update
its EHASP as necessary.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying previously
unknown and suspect hazardous materials as they are
encountered using approved techniques and analytical
methodologies. The Contractor shall submit a sampling plan to
the Engineer for acceptance prior to sample collection.
Indication of the presence of hazardous materials, including but
not limited to odorous or stained soils, sediment or liquids,
mercury sources and suspect asbestos containing materials must
be immediately reported to the Engineer. All work in the area
shall stop until otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3. In the event that hazardous material is detected, the Engineer will
provide the Contractor with a scope of work for the remediation
services and direct the Contractor to obtain cost proposals for
such work from at least three (3) hazardous material specialists
unless otherwise required by the DEP depending upon the
magnitude and timing of the work. The Contractor shall submit
the proposals, indicating which hazardous material specialist the
Contractor proposes to engage, to the Engineer within ten (10)
days of receiving the scope of remediation work. The Engineer
shall review the proposals and approve such selection or direct
01355-5 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1549
the Contractor to submit an alternative selection or obtain

additional proposals. Remediation work shall not commence
until the Contractor receives written notice from the Engineer to
proceed with the work. As directed by the Engineer, pre-
remediation inspections and coordination may also be required,
in a manner similar to the procedures for known hazardous
materials.
4. The Contractor shall not initiate or proceed with any other Work
in areas associated with contaminated, potentially hazardous, or
hazardous materials until these materials have been removed
from these areas or managed, in accordance with the following
detailed specifications:
a. Asbestos-containing material shall be handled in
accordance with General Specification 13281 --
Asbestos Management
b. Mercury-containing material shall be handled in
accordance with General Specification 13282 --
Mercury Management
c. Lead Containing paint shall be handled in accordance
with General Specification 13283 -- Lead Management
d. PCB-containing material shall be handled in accordance
with Detailed Specification 13284 -- PCB Management
5. Some of the remediation work may be critical to maintaining
construction schedules. When this occurs, the Engineer will
establish a time for completion.
C. Hazardous Waste Management and Regulatory Compliance
1. Hazardous Waste Contingency Plan and Hazardous Waste
Minimization Plan
a. If the location of the project is on a site which has a
Large Quantity Generator (LQG) status or subsequently
obtains LQG status during the course of the Work, then
the Contractor shall conform to the requirements of the
Hazardous Waste Contingency Plan and Hazardous
Waste Minimization Plan for that site.
2. Hazardous Waste Storage Compliance
a. The Contractor shall maintain compliance with
hazardous waste storage requirements at the worksite.
Storage areas and inspections of storage areas must
comply with the hazardous waste regulations detailed
within 6 NYCRR Parts 370 through 375.
01355-6 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1550
3. Waste Management Records

a. Disposal of wastes generated by remediation Work will
be based on the results of testing and shall be at a site
permitted to accept such waste by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or an
authorized state or local government agency. The
Contractor shall provide remediation waste profiles for
DEP signature as generator, permit documentation
required for the selected Treatment, Storage, or
Disposal Facility (TSDF) to receive these wastes, and
the transporter’s Part 364 Waste Transporter Permit(s)
required to transport wastes to the TSDF. The
Contractor will conduct due diligence of the TSDF,
including a list of violations received. The Contractor
shall also provide advance copies of the waste
manifest(s) for the Engineer’s review and approval. The
Contractor will keep and update a Hazardous Waste
Inventory Log and will document weekly inspections by
a Competent Person in the management of hazardous
waste.
b. The Contractor shall submit written evidence that
selected TSDF’s will accept or have accepted the wastes
generated during remediation. The Contractor shall also
submit copies of the completed manifest, signed and
dated by the initial transporter, in accordance with
federal and state requirements and with associated
documentation (e.g., Waste Profile and Hazardous
Waste Land Disposal Restrictions (LDR) Notification
and Certification Form). Copies of completed and
signed waste manifests from TSDF’s shall be provided
to the Engineer as soon as possible but no later than
thirty (30) days of waste shipment offsite.
4. Changes to Hazardous Waste Generator Status
a. The Contractor shall be aware that work activities may
result in a change to the worksite’s hazardous waste
generator status. Compliance with the revised generator
status is required.
5. Hazardous Waste Regulatory Program Fees and Taxes
a. The Contractor may be directed to pay the New York
State Department of Taxation and Finance for special
assessments on hazardous waste generated at the project
site or the NYSDEC regulatory program fees charged to
the facility operating at the site. When directed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall pay the amount indicated
within 48 hours of notification. The Contractor will be
01355-7 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1551
reimbursed for the amount paid, with no provision for

overhead and profit, from the allowance provided for
unforeseen hazardous materials remediation as specified
in Detailed Specification 01270 – Measurement and
Payment.

A. Remediation plans for unforeseen hazardous materials shall comply
with all applicable requirements of federal, state, and local hazardous
waste regulations and shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Identification of hazardous and regulated/non-hazardous wastes
associated with the Work.
2. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
3. Names and qualifications of each subcontractor that will be
testing, transporting, storing, and disposing of wastes. Include
the facility location and a 24-hour telephone contact number and
applicable transporter and TSDF permits, EPA Identification
Numbers, and insurance certificates.
4. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel
who will be responsible for on-site management of hazardous
wastes.
5. Detailed description of the containment and removal procedures.
6. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the
remediation work, to include cleaning, volume reduction, and
transport equipment.
7. Spill prevention and cleanup contingency measures to be
implemented.
8. Work plan for waste management, on-site storage, removal and
disposal.
9. Detailed schedule indicating the beginning and completion dates
for each activity and each work area, including time for clean up,
inspection, and monitoring activities.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Following items shall be submitted as described above for the
Engineer’s approval:
1. Site Inspection Report
2. Coordination Plan for Known Hazardous Materials. Also for
Unknown Hazardous Materials, when required.
3. Remediation Plan for Unforeseen Hazardous Materials, when
required.
01355-8 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1552
4. Three (3) cost proposals from hazardous materials specialists for

remedial action work, when required.
5. Written evidence of disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous
waste at an approved facility in accordance with the
requirements of this Section.
6. EHASP upgrades as needed in accordance with Detailed
Specification 01356 - Environmental, Health, and Safety
Requirements.
B. The Contractor, when requested by the Engineer, shall provide
additional copies of all reports and related materials as may be needed
for conferences with the Commissioner and other agencies having
jurisdiction.
1.09 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit A – Standard Operating Procedure for Entry – Cone Valve
Chamber
END OF SECTION
01355-9 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1553
01355-10 11/2017
DEP – 6/16/2017
1554
________________________________________________________________________________________
Bureau of Water Supply – Eastern Operations Directorate
NYC Department of Environmental Protection
EXHIBIT A
SOP No. 8.6.2015
Standard Operating Procedure for Entry
FACILITY NAME Shaft 18 DA Cone Valve Chamber
20 West Lake Drive

FACILITY ADDRESS
Valhalla, NY 10595
FACILITY Terence Murphy, P.E. - 914-328-7672 or 917-635-0381
CONTACT NUMBER Shaft 18 DA – System Operations - 914-948-1679
FACILITY
Terence Murphy, P.E.
MANAGER
 Poor Atmospheric Quality;
 PCB and Heavy Metal contaminants on surfaces, including
POTENTIAL
elevated levels of chromium, cadmium, lead, and mercury;
HAZARDS
 No permanent lighting – All power has been disconnected from
the chamber
No permanent lighting – any temporary lighting shall be used in
LIGHTING
accordance with OSHA 1910.305(a)(2)
FLOORING Concrete slab
OVERHEAD Concrete slab
PROCEDURE: Entry must be performed with a minimum of 2 people present

and a reliable means of communication to outside parties available.
Contact Terence Murphy, Regional Manager, at the above numbers and EHS Facility
Compliance representative for information regarding this facility.
1. Before entry is made, air monitoring (4-gas meter, PCM and Jerome Meter) shall be used.
Air monitoring shall be continuous while work is being performed in the chamber. A report
of contaminants found in the chamber indicate that surfaces within the chamber have
detectable levels of Aroclors (PCB’s) and heavy metals such as lead, mercury, cadmium and
chromium. If the work performed disturbs surfaces or dust that may contain these
containments, then wet method shall be used to control dust prior to commencement of work.
2. Disposable protective (Tyvek) coveralls, safety glasses, disposable booties, disposable gloves
(nitrile or latex) and a hard hat shall be worn at all times. A negative pressure respirator with
appropriate cartridges shall be carried with entrant in case elevated readings of mercury are
detected in which case the respirator shall be donned as per (3) below). Used PPE shall be
discarded in the “Used PPE” barrel located in the waste storage area of the SH18 building.
1|Page
1555
PAGE 1 OF 2 11/2017
____________________________________________________________________________________
Bureau of Water Supply – Eastern Operations Directorate
NYC Department of Environmental Protection
SOP No. 8.6.2015
3. Where Jerome Meter readings indicate that the mercury vapor levels are at or above the DEP
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) (TWA) of 0.050 mg/m3, but below 0.10 mg/m3:
 Employees meeting all applicable conditions of the DEP’s Respiratory Protection

Program may enter wearing half or full-face negative pressure respirators equipped
with mercury cartridges having an end-of-service-life indicator.
Where Jerome Meter readings indicate that the mercury vapor levels exceed 0.10 mg/m3:
 All personnel must immediately evacuate the area until levels return below the ceiling
level of 0.10 mg/m3.
2|Page
1556
PAGE 2 OF 2 11/2017
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01356 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01356
Environmental Health and Safety (EHS) Requirements
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements for the Contractor to provide its employees and those of its
subcontractors a safe and healthful work environment and for performing all
Work in compliance with all applicable environmental health and safety laws,
rules, and regulations.
1. The EHS performance of the Contractor and its subcontractors is the

responsibility of the Contractor. Since effective on-site management is
essential for EHS performance, the Contractor shall evaluate the
performance of its on-site EHS team on a continuous basis. Where
deficiencies are found, the Contractor shall take appropriate action
including removal of its personnel or its subcontractors’ personnel.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that each of its and subcontractors’

employees working on a DEP project site under the Contract are clearly
identifiable as a project contractor employee. This may include the use
of labeled safety vests or hard hats or other acceptable means in addition
to complying with the identification badge requirements of Article 37
of the Standard Construction Contract.
B. An index of the Articles in this specification is presented hereinafter for the

Article Title Page
01356-
PART 1 GENERAL .......................................................................................1
1.01 Section Includes ...............................................................................1
1.02 Payment ........................................................................................2
1.03 Reference Standards.........................................................................2
01356-1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1557
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
1.04 Definitions........................................................................................3
1.05 Description .......................................................................................4
1.06 Environmental Health and Safety Plan (EHASP) ............................7
1.07 Emergency Action Plan (EAP) ........................................................7
1.08 Spill Prevention Program (SPP).......................................................8
1.09 Quality Assurance ............................................................................9
1.10 Submittals ......................................................................................11
PART 2 PRODUCTS...................................................................................13
2.01 EHS Equipment .............................................................................13
2.02 Personal Protective Equipment ......................................................13
PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................14
3.01 EHS Staff Duties ............................................................................14
3.02 EPCRA and Related Hazardous Material Regulations ..................17
3.03 Visitors ......................................................................................18
3.04 Attachments ...................................................................................19
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work of this Section. The
Contractor shall include all costs for this work in its lump sum price bid for the
Contract.
A. The Contractor shall comply with all current federal, state, city and local EHS
laws, rules, and regulations, including all those that become effective during the
01356-2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1558
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
term of the Contract, related to ensuring health and safety of employees and to
the protection of property and the environment.
B. When working at New York City Department of Environmental Protection

(DEP) facilities and sites associated with the Work of this Contract, the
Contractor and its subcontractors shall fully comply with DEP’s EHS Policies
and Procedures and BEDC’s EHS Standards. If a provision of the DEP’s EHS
Policies and Procedures or BEDC’s EHS Standards conflicts or differs from
any federal, state, City or local regulation, the more stringent requirement shall
apply. Copies of the most recent version of the DEP’s EHS Policies and
Procedures and BEDC’s EHS Standards can be found in the DEP Knowledge
Reservoir of the BEDC web-based Project Management Information System
(PMIS).
C. The Contractor shall conform to the requirements of Exhibit A – Contract

Environmental, Health and Safety Requirements, attached at the end of this
Section. Bidders are advised of the pre-award submittal requirements specified
in Exhibit A. Failure to fulfill these submittal requirements may result in the
rejection of a bid as non-responsive.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. A “Competent Person” is one who is capable of identifying existing and

predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are
unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees or the environment, and who
has authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. A
Competent Person has stop work authority.
B. “EHS Resources” shall mean the Contractor’s EHS Professional(s) and its EHS
Site Representative (EHS Rep), as approved by the BEDC EHS unit. This
definition shall also apply to the subcontractors’ EHS Resources, where
required. This definition also includes any consultant or other EHS personnel
associated with the project. Such EHS personnel are subject to evaluation and
approval by BEDC EHS as set forth in this Section.
C. “Environmental Health & Safety Plan (EHASP)” shall mean the plan developed
in accordance with all applicable EHS rules and regulations and these
Specifications to identify and set forth policies and procedures to control the
health and safety concerns and environmental impacts known and unknown at
the site. This plan is not to be confused with the Health and Safety Plan that
may be required under 29 CFR 1910.120 for Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER).
01356-3 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1559
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
D. “Job Hazard Analysis” shall mean a tool used to document a process by which
the steps required to accomplish a work activity are outlined, the actual or
potential hazards for each step are identified, and measures for the elimination
or control of those hazards are developed.
E. “Incident” shall mean an event in which a person or persons are injured or made
ill, property or equipment is damaged, the environment is harmed, or an
environmental release occurs.
F. “Near Miss” shall mean an opportunity to improve environmental, health, and

safety performance based on a condition, behavior, or an event with potential
for more serious consequence.
G. “Qualified Individual” shall mean one who, by possession of a recognized

degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge,
training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his or her ability to
solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter, work or project.
1.05 DESCRIPTION
A. In performing the Work of this Contract, the Contractor shall at all times be in
compliance with all federal, state, City and local environmental, health and
safety laws, rules, and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the health and safety of its employees,
subcontractors, the public and all other persons at or around the work site. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of all construction
methods, materials, equipment and the safe and environmentally compliant
prosecution of the Work. Where possible, the Contractor shall implement Best
Management Practices to reduce injuries, accidents and environmental impacts.
C. The overall site management for EHS is performed by the Engineer in

coordination with the DEP Construction Manager. The Construction
Manager’s EHS staff/consultant and Contractor’s EHS staff shall work closely
with the Engineer’s designated EHS staff (i.e., coordinate to perform joint EHS
activities, including inspections, incident investigations, etc.). The Contractor
shall coordinate with the Engineer’s EHS designee with regard to any site rules
or site-specific requirements such as working hours, delivery times and
operations coordination and sequencing.
D. The Contractor shall perform and document its due diligence in determining
whether the subcontractors they hire to perform work under the Contract are
capable of performing to the EHS standards set forth in this Section. At a
minimum, the Contractor is required to perform an EHS evaluation of
01356-4 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1560
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
subcontractors prior to submitting them for DEP approval. The Contractor must
have a subcontractor EHS evaluation program that is at least as stringent as the
DEP Contractor Selection and Management Policy available in the BEDC web-
based PMIS. Poorly performing subcontractors will affect the Contractor’s
performance evaluations and ability to obtain future contracts with DEP.
E. DEP requires a drug and alcohol free, healthful, safe and secure work
environment. Contractor employees will report to work in an appropriate
mental and physical condition for work. DEP reserves the right to require any
Contractor or subcontractor employee to submit to drug testing when cause for
reasonable suspicion of a violation of this policy exists. Drug testing may occur
when: a) there is reasonable suspicion that an employee is under the influence
of alcohol or illegal drugs, or b) an employee has been in involved in an
Incident, or involved in an unsafe practice, or c) as required by BEDC EHS
Standards. The Contractor must prohibit any employee from being under the
influence of any illegal drug or alcohol while at work, on duty, or operating a
vehicle or construction equipment.
F. The Contractor shall implement an EHS Management Program which includes

qualified Safety Professionals (SPs) and Environmental Professionals (EPs),
collectively referred to as EHS Professionals, along with project management
staff, with appropriate competencies to provide EHS direction, guidance, and
oversight of all aspects of the performance of the Contract’s detailed scope of
work.
G. The Contractor shall ensure that its EHS Resources have appropriate authority
to execute their duties and responsibilities as set forth in this Section and under
the Contractor’s EHS Management Program.
H. The Contractor shall arrange for additional approved EHS Resources to be

available during EHS staff absences. The Contractor must inform the Engineer,
in writing, of anticipated absences.
I. Contractor EHS resources:
1. At a minimum, the Contractor shall provide the EHS Resources

described below. The Contractor is required as part of its EHS
Management Program to identify any EHS Resources necessary beyond
the listed minimums.
2. For all contracts that employ 100 or less employees on site at any time,
the Contractor shall have at least one full-time site EHS Rep. The
Contractor may submit a request in writing to the Engineer to waive the
requirement of a separate EHS Rep at each site and permit other
01356-5 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1561
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Contractor employees who are Qualified Individuals to monitor the

EHS activities of the employees and to assume all of the responsibilities
of the full-time site EHS Rep, if it can show that one EHS Rep can
effectively manage multiple sites. The EHS Rep shall have no other
duties except those related to EHS on the Contract, and shall not be the
project manager, engineer, superintendent or have any other title or
project role other than EHS Rep.
3. For all contracts that employ over 100 employees on site at any time,
the Contractor shall have at least two full time EHS Reps. These EHS
Reps shall have no other duties except those related to EHS on the
Contract, and shall not be project managers, engineers, superintendents
or have any other title or project role other than EHS Rep.
4. The Contractor may submit a request in writing to the Engineer to waive

the requirements of this section and permit other Contractor employees
who are Qualified Individuals to monitor the EHS activities of the
employees on site and to assume all of the responsibilities of the full-
time site EHS Rep.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that subcontractors that consistently employ

over 100 employees for more than two weeks at a time under the
Contract shall have one full-time site EHS Rep. This EHS Rep shall
have no other duties except those related to EHS on the Contract and
shall not be the project manager, engineer, superintendent or have any
other title or project role other than as the subcontractor’s EHS Rep.
6. If the Contract has more than one location, each location shall be treated
as a separate contract for purposes of determining the number(s) of
necessary EHS Reps in accordance with paragraphs 2 through 4 above.
7. The Contractor’s EHS staff shall be provided an appropriate office on

the job site to maintain and keep available EHS records, up-to-date
copies of all pertinent EHS laws, rules, regulations and governing
legislation, material safety data sheets, and the EHASP.
J. All site workers have the right to refuse unsafe work which is reasonably
believed to present imminent danger to their own safety or the safety of others,
the public or the environment, or to City property, without adverse
consequences.
K. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall stop work and initiate immediate
corrective action whenever a work procedure or a condition at the work site is
deemed unsafe by the EHS staff, DEP, Competent Persons, or the Engineer.
01356-6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1562
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
All Contractor and subcontractor employees working on site shall report any
unsafe or noncompliant work condition(s) immediately to the EHS staff,
Competent Persons, or Engineer. If a stop work order is issued to the Contractor
by the Engineer for unsatisfactory EHS performance, the Contractor shall not
make any claim against the City for any losses associated with the stop work
order.
L. The Contractor and all subcontractors are responsible for daily cleanup of their
immediate work areas per BEDC’s Housekeeping Standard. Construction scrap
and debris shall be removed daily during the course of construction, alterations
and repairs. Contractor refuse shall not be allowed to accumulate creating trip
hazards and blocking access routes and pathways. The Contractor shall
implement procedures to ensure a high standard of housekeeping. All waste
shall be disposed of in accordance with the appropriate regulations and
applicable Specifications.
M. The Contractor shall ensure that any sand, soil, plaster, cement, mortar or the
like is not deposited or washed into any drain or sewer unless specifically
authorized under required permits.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN (EHASP)
A. The Contractor shall have a written EHASP prepared and signed by the EHS
Professional in accordance with the BEDC EHASP Standard. The EHASP
must be signed by a principal or senior manager of the company and project
management staff. The EHASP shall be submitted to BEDC for review and
approval prior to the start of any work. Job Hazard Analyses (JHAs) will be
developed as the work progresses, in accordance with the BEDC JHA Standard,
and will supplement the Contractor’s EHASP.
1.07 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN (EAP)
A. The Contractor shall work with the Construction Manager and other
Contractors to develop a single cohesive construction EAP in accordance with
BEDC’s EAP Standard.
1. The Contractor is responsible to provide, or to supplement the facility’s

existing, emergency alarm/siren/annunciation system to ensure that all
Contractor personnel will be adequately notified of an alarm condition
or required/test evacuation.
2. The Contractor is responsible for evaluating and ensuring that all

identified emergency resources are adequate and appropriate for the
potential rescues/emergencies needed.
01356-7 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1563
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
1.08 SPILL PREVENTION PROGRAM (SPP)
A. The Contractor shall establish a Spill Prevention Program (SPP) for the
prevention of releases of petroleum, hazardous substances or other pollutants.
The SPP shall be included in the EHASP, and include awareness training for all
personnel on measures designed to reduce, minimize and eliminate the potential
for releases.
B. The Contractor shall establish sound work practices and implement appropriate
measures to achieve release prevention and control of releases when they do
occur.
C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall include within the SPP the following:
1. Proper materials handling, labeling and container storage inspection

practices for all products including hazardous and universal waste.
2. All petroleum products, hazardous substances, or chemicals must be

stored in designated areas and include secondary containment (with
capacity to contain 110% of largest container) for all closed containers
with a capacity greater than 5 gallons. Open containers of petroleum
products, hazardous substances, or chemicals must be stored on
secondary containment at all times.
3. Follow manufacturer recommended preventive Maintenance

Procedures (MPs) and where none exist, develop in-house equipment
specific MPs.
4. Inspection for and purging of residual materials in piping, tanks and

other equipment prior to disassembly, demolition and disposal.
5. Supervision of fuel and chemical deliveries. These deliveries shall only

be permitted during normal contract work hours or as otherwise
6. The SPP shall include a detailed summary of anticipated petroleum and

chemical storage. The information shall include capacity, contents,
description and secondary containment provided.
D. The Contractor shall bear sole responsibility for all costs and delays resulting
from any releases on the project which occur as a result of the work activities.
01356-8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1564
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Qualifications
1. The Contractor shall ensure that, at all times, its employees and those of
its Subcontractors working on this Contract have received OSHA 10-
Hour Construction training or OSHA 30-Hour training within the last
five years.
2. The EHS Professional(s) shall possess a combination of safety and

environmental skills as needed to manage the EHS hazards and issues
presented by the specific project. The EHS Professional may be one or
more persons meeting the individual qualifications for Safety and
Environmental Professionals as detailed below.
3. Safety Professional (SP): Persons recognized as a Safety Professional

shall, at a minimum, possess the following education and experience:
a. Certification as a Certified Safety Professional granted by the

Board of Certified Safety Professionals and five (5) years of
documented professional construction EHS management
experience; or
b. Certification as a Certified Industrial Hygienist granted by the

American Board of Industrial Hygiene and five (5) years of
documented professional construction EHS management
experience; or
c. A Bachelor of Science degree in safety, industrial hygiene,

occupational safety and health, environmental health and
science, or related field and ten (10) years of documented
professional construction EHS management experience.
d. All documented professional EHS management experience must

be in the types of construction and conditions expected to be
encountered on the site.
e. For projects that require hazardous waste remediation or

response, the SP is also required to have successfully completed
a forty-hour Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency
Response (HAZWOPER) training course.
01356-9 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1565
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
4. Environmental Professional (EP): Persons recognized as an

Environmental Professional shall, at a minimum, possess the following
education and experience:
a. A Bachelor’s degree in environmental science, environmental

engineering or other related engineering or science field and ten
(10) years of documented professional environmental field,
management and/or engineering experience. All documented
professional environmental experience must be in the types of
construction and conditions expected to be encountered on the
site.
b. The EP’s knowledge and experience should include, but not be

limited to, management and disposal of solid and hazardous
waste, universal waste, hazardous materials management,
chemical and petroleum bulk storage, used oil, chemical and
petroleum spill control plans, lead/mercury/PCB and asbestos
remediation and management, storm water and soil
management, and environmental permit management.
5. EHS Rep: Qualifications of the EHS Rep(s) shall include a minimum

of: ten years of relevant construction experience, five years of which
were exclusively in construction EHS management and successful
completion of the following training courses:
a. Four -hour BEDC EHS Standards;
b. Thirty- hour OSHA construction safety and health training;
c. For projects that require hazardous waste remediation or

response, forty hour HAZWOPER training;
d. Resource Conservation Recovery Act/DOT hazardous

waste/manifesting training
e. Permit- required confined space;
f. BEDC spill prevention and control;
g. Control of hazardous energy sources (lockout/tagout);
h. Excavation and Trenching training under required training

courses for Site EHS Rep.
01356-10 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1566
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
6. The EHS Professional and EHS Rep shall have extensive experience
with hazard identification, evaluation and controls, and be
knowledgeable of all applicable EHS requirements set forth by
governing laws, rules and regulations as well as Best Management
Practices. Where gaps in the training or experience are identified, DEP
may require additional experience or training for approval.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the EHASP to the draft Engineer for review and
approval within thirty business days from issuance of the Notice to Proceed. In
no case shall Work be allowed to commence without an approved EHASP.
1. Initial submission of the EHASP shall be provided as one hard copy and
one electronic copy (either Word or Acrobat format) to the Engineer.
2. The EHASP submittal shall be reviewed and comments shall be

provided to the Contractor upon completion of the review.
a. The Contractor shall work with the Engineer to address all

comments in order to obtain EHASP approval.
3. Upon receipt of final approval, the Contractor shall provide one hard
copy and one electronic copy (either Word or Acrobat format) of the
EHASP to the Engineer.
B. The EHASP shall be available to all of the Contractor’s employees working on

the Contract.
C. Review, acceptance and/or approval of the EHASP will not impose on any other
party responsibility for the EHASP, nor will it relieve the Contractor from any
of its EHS responsibilities.
D. The Contractor shall submit to BEDC EHS for approval, the names of the EHS
Professional and EHS Rep(s) to be employed. BEDC EHS may request and
conduct an interview of the candidates prior to approval. The Contractor shall
submit the resumes, copies of certifications, a signed certification of employee
training, along with other qualifications of the EHS Professional and EHS Rep.
The resumes shall include items such as: experience, education, EHS courses
completed, safety and environmental conferences attended, and certifications
achieved. Documentation and/or personal references confirming the
qualifications may also be required. The NYCDEP may reject persons
proposed as EHS Professionals or EHS Reps for failure to have adequate
01356-11 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1567
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
qualifications or for other cause at any point prior to and during the contract
period, as determined by the Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements of BEDC Incident and Near
Miss Reporting and Investigation Standard and shall immediately notify the
Engineer of all incidents involving employee injury and illness, and any other
work-related incidents or near misses, damage to equipment and structures, and
any releases or adverse impacts to the environment.
F. The Contractor must notify the Engineer and BEDC EHS immediately of any
regulatory inspections, notices of citations and penalties, Notices of Violation
(NOVs), or any other outside agency violations. In addition, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer a copy of all correspondence from OSHA,
NYSDEC, DOB or any other government regulatory agency, within one day of
receipt, which may include employee complaints, notices of citations and
penalties, environmental NOVs, etc. The Contractor must close out all NOVs
and provide documentation to the Engineer that the NOV is closed/corrected or
final payment will not be provided.
G. The Contractor will forward to the Engineer any risk control reports generated
by their insurance carrier or broker within one day or receipt.
H. Monthly Contractor EHS Report
1. The Contractor shall submit, on or before the 10th day of the month, a
summary report of EHS activity for the prior month, including, but not
limited to:
a. EHS metrics reported on the metrics reporting form provided as

part of the pre-construction package and as may be updated
throughout the life of the project.
b. Chemical Inventory with HTSL (Hazardous and Toxic

Substance List) and Subpart Z List.
c. Local Law 77 and DEP Bureau Environmental Compliance air

permits
d. Summary of audit data including trending and analysis along

with root cause and corrective actions/training identified.
e. Summary of the regulatory inspections, notices of citations and

penalties, NOVs, or any other outside agency violations (which
01356-12 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1568
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
occurred and were provided to BEDC in accordance with this

Section.
2. The Engineer shall review the report to verify that the Contractor is
effectively managing the EHS requirements under the contract. If the
Contractor has no, or limited work in a given month, they shall inform
the Engineer that no work was performed or submit the required
documentation for those days that work was performed.
I. Performance Evaluations
1. The Contractor, in conjunction with its subcontractors, shall be

evaluated semi-annually on their performance in implementing the work
of this contract in accordance with this Detailed Specification Section
and all related EHS specifications, rules, regulations, laws, policies and
procedures. The evaluations are based on the criteria established in
DEP’s Contractor Selection and Management Policy.
2. In conjunction with the Contractor evaluation form, the EHS

Professional and EHS Rep will be evaluated by BEDC EHS and shall
be included in the evaluations.
3. Any EHS Professional or EHS Rep who knowingly falsifies any data,
result, audit, document, etc. will be removed from the project and
precluded from further DEP Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EHS EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide the proper EHS and rescue equipment for all
employees, adequately maintained and readily available, for any foreseeable
contingency or situation under the Contract during the performance of the
Work.
B. All equipment shall be stored in protected areas and maintained and calibrated
as per the manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in the EHASP.
Where equipment is required to be inspected and or calibrated, documentation
shall be maintained and available for review.
2.02 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
All personnel employed by the Contractor and any visitors entering the job site
shall be required to wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE)
01356-13 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1569
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
required as specified in the EHASP and the BEDC EHS PPE Standard. The
Contractor shall continuously provide and maintain adequate PPE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EHS STAFF DUTIES
A. The Contractor’s EHS staff is responsible for overseeing and managing the
Contractor’s safe and environmentally compliant performance of all Work.
B. EHS Professionals’ duties shall be to initiate, review and implement measures

to ensure the health and safety of all Contractor employees, and to protect
property and the environment. Each EHS Professional is required to visit and
audit the site conditions in accordance with the Contractor’s EHS Management
Program or as directed by the Engineer.
C. The EHS Professional will be held accountable to adjust their workload to

enable them to properly perform all of their EHS responsibilities in accordance
with all requirements of this Section and all applicable regulations. DEP may
request that the Contractor remove the EHS Professional for not meeting the
D. The EHS Professional shall visit the site prior to developing the Contractor’s
EHASP. The EHS Professional will arrange a visit with the Engineer and
perform an inspection of the site to understand the full scope of Work to be
performed under the Contract. Contract Documents relevant to writing the
EHASP can be reviewed and obtained at this time. Facility/site specific
information must be provided, reviewed, and documented in accordance with
the BEDC EHS Site Orientation Standard.
E. The EHS Professional shall visit all work areas as frequently as necessary, but
no less frequently than monthly, to verify that EHS compliance is being
achieved. The EHS Professional shall review hazards, JHAs, and the foremen’s
and superintendent’s preparation and communication of JHAs to workers. The
EHS Professional shall review the project team’s compliance with and
adherence to EHS requirements, as well as their proactive approach and
planning for EHS.
F. The EHS Professional shall be available for consultation whenever necessary.

Prior to and after each visit, the EHS Professional shall sign the visitors’ log
maintained at the Engineer’s office.
G. The EHS Professional is expected to perform their inspection in concert with

the EHS Rep, during which time the EHS Professional will not only inspect the
01356-14 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1570
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
site, but shall also mentor and direct the EHS Rep. During the inspection, the
EHS Professional will evaluate the Contractor and each subcontractor working
under the Contract and clearly identify findings and who they are assigned to,
using the EHS Professional checklist provided in the EHASP. Any findings that
cannot be resolved immediately will be assigned to the EHS Rep for follow-up.
The EHS Professional is expected to communicate with the EHS Rep to ensure
all identified findings are closed out. The EHS Professional’s inspection shall
include programmatic issues such as adhering to the Contractor’s EHS
program, including, but not limited to, preparing and communicating JHAs and
proactively minimizing EHS risks.
H. The EHS Rep will coordinate with the EHS Professional when questions arise
requiring EHS Professional expertise. After each visit, the EHS Professional
shall prepare a report, including photographs (where necessary), acceptable to
the Engineer and BEDC EHS, detailing the findings. The report shall include
those hazards and violations discovered during the site visit and when and how
they were or will be closed out. Any EHS items not covered or documented by
the inspection checklist will be noted in the comments section of the checklist.
The report shall be submitted to the Engineer within one business day of the
site visit.
I. The EHS Rep shall be at the job site full time whenever work is in progress
during all shifts.
J. The EHS Professional’s and EHS Rep’s responsibilities are as follows:
1. The EHS Professional is responsible for directing the Contractor’s EHS

program, ensuring implementation by the Contractor and all
Subcontractors, and for directing and monitoring all activities of the
EHS Rep. If the EHS Rep is not enforcing the EHASP program, the
EHS Professional shall either recommend retraining or removal of the
EHS Rep from the project by submitting a letter to the Engineer and
Contractor.
2. The EHS Rep must review JHAs to verify that the work activity’s EHS
issues and hazards are accurately identified, addressed, and
communicated. JHAs shall be regularly communicated to affected
employees and must be made available in the areas where the affected
employees are working. The EHS Professional is responsible for
periodically reviewing JHAs to verify that they adequately reflect the
recognized hazards and controls of the tasks being performed. JHAs
shall be provided to the Engineer or BEDC EHS when requested.
01356-15 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1571
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
3. Both shall schedule and conduct EHS meetings and training programs
as required. A specific schedule of these meetings and an outline of
topics to be covered shall be provided with the EHASP. The Engineer
shall be advised in advance of the time and place of such meetings, and
DEP personnel shall be invited to attend the meetings.
4. All Contractor employees shall be instructed by the EHS Professional

and the Rep on the recognition of hazards, safe work practices and
environmental precautions, the contents of the EHASP, and the use of
environmental, personal protective and emergency equipment. Such
training shall be documented, recorded, and provided as part of the EHS
monthly report(s). EHS Reps and EHS Professionals will attend
regularly scheduled meetings held by the Engineer and BEDC EHS
including the EHS Pre-Construction Meeting.
5. Determine that operators of specific equipment are qualified by training,

certification and/or experience before they are allowed to operate such
equipment. Ensure documentation of licenses, certifications and
training by the approved agencies, which may include for example
OSHA, NYC DOB, NYC Fire Department, etc. are on site and current,
prior to start of Work.
6. Verify implementation of the BEDC Emergency Action Plan (EAP)

Standard.
7. Develop an effective site communication plan that includes, signage,

verbal and written communication of EHS issues and notices.
8. Post all appropriate notices regarding EHS regulations at site location(s)

which afford maximum exposure to all personnel at the job site.
9. Post appropriate instructions and warning signs in regard to all

hazardous areas or conditions which cannot be eliminated.
Identification of these areas shall be based on experience, site
surveillance, and severity of hazard. Such signs shall not be used in
place of appropriate workplace controls.
10. The EHS Rep is to conduct EHS inspections a minimum of twice a shift
to ensure that all machines, tools and equipment are in a safe operating
condition, and that all work areas are free of safety and environmental
hazards. Take necessary and immediate corrective actions, where
feasible, to eliminate all unsafe acts and/or conditions, and submit to the
Engineer each day a copy of their findings on the inspection check list
report forms established in the EHASP. Detailed checklists will be
01356-16 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1572
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
tailored to the EHS hazards and conditions on the site, and will include
a comments section to include findings not specifically listed on the
checklist.
11. Whenever DEP and its agents perform both announced and
unannounced inspections of the Contractor’s EHS performance, a
member of the Contractor’s on-site EHS team will make themselves
available during inspections performed by DEP or its representatives.
The EHS Professional will coordinate inspections with the Engineer and
DEP inspectors upon request. The Contractor shall take immediate
corrective action, where feasible, to eliminate of hazards identified by
the Engineer, DEP inspectors, or any other entity. The Contractor, if
requested, shall develop and implement a plan detailing corrective
actions necessary to mitigate the presence of noncompliant conditions
and actions following Incidents, citations, NOVs, or identification of
patterns of noncompliant conditions and acts.
12. Notify the Engineer and BEDC EHS immediately of all inspections by
regulatory agencies, and submit to the Engineer and BEDC EHS copies
of all EHS reports, citations, and NOVs from regulatory agencies and
insurance companies within one workday of receipt.
13. Implement an effective fire protection and prevention program at the job
site throughout all phases of the construction Work in accordance with
BEDC’s Fire Prevention Standard. The Contractor will ensure the
availability of fire protection and suppression equipment adequate to
control the degree of fire hazard encountered during construction.
14. Provide and document appropriate site-specific orientation to

Contractor employees, visitors, and subcontractors communicating
recognized hazards present at and surrounding the site(s) and facility in
accordance with BEDC’s Site Orientation Standard and DEP’s
Contractor Selection and Management Policy.
15. Perform all tasks and responsibilities as identified in the EHASP.
3.02 EPCRA AND RELATED HAZARDOUS MATERIAL REGULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall maintain a monthly inventory of hazardous substances or

extremely hazardous substances used or stored onsite in accordance with the
BEDC-provided chemical inventory form. Documentation shall be maintained
on site and available for review.
01356-17 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1573
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
B. The Contractor shall prepare and provide to the Engineer, a Right to Know
(RTK)/Emergency Planning and Community Right to Know Act (EPCRA)
Annual Chemical Inventory Form for all hazardous and extremely hazardous
substances that the Contractor used or stored that exceeded legal thresholds
during the previous calendar year. This shall be provided by February 1st of
each year.
C. The Contractor shall bear sole responsibility for complying with annual
reporting requirements. For facilities within the five boroughs, the New York
City Community RTK Law requires annual reporting of hazardous and
extremely hazardous substances from all facilities that stored or used hazardous
substances that met the applicable law’s thresholds. For facilities outside the
five boroughs of New York City, the Federal EPCRA requires annual reporting
of hazardous and extremely hazardous substances from all facilities that stored
or used hazardous substances that met the applicable law’s thresholds.
1. The Contractor is the “facility” during the construction phase and must
report on its hazardous substances if the applicable law’s thresholds are
met.
2. Annual reports are due March 1st of each calendar year.
3. In NYC, the Contractor must file using the NYC Facility Inventory
Form. Filing instructions can be found on the website
www.nyc.gov/dep/tier2filing. Within NYC there is a Right to Know
filing fee.
4. Outside of New York City, the Contractor must use the SARA Tier II
forms. Information for filing outside of NYC is found on the website
www.semo.state.ny.us/programs/SERC/tier2.cfm.
5. The Contractor is solely responsible for all required filing fees.
D. The Contractor must satisfy all EPCRA reporting requirements for the final year
of the Contract before completion will be accepted by DEP.
E. The Contractor must provide a copy of the filed annual report to the Engineer.
3.03 VISITORS
A. Allowing visitors and members of the public to tour an active construction site
is discouraged due to the potential exposures to hazardous conditions and
materials associated with construction work. However, where necessary,
approved and authorized visitors of the Contractor, subcontractors, or any other
01356-18 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1574
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
authorized agency, department, or other entity associated with the Contractor

shall sign in at both the DEP/Contractor Security Booth and the Visitors’ Log
maintained at the Contractor’s site office. Visitors are required to receive site
orientation training, comply with all provisions of the EHASP, wear proper and
appropriate PPE and be escorted at all times. All efforts should be made not to
schedule site tours/visits at the time of the scheduled evacuation drills. Visitors
must not be exposed to construction hazards without prior training to those
construction hazards.
3.04 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit A - Contractor’s Environmental, Health and Safety Requirements
END OF SECTION
01356-19 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1575
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01356-20 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1576
ATTACHMENTS 01356 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS
EXHIBIT A
CONTRACTOR’S ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
PAGE 1 OF 6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1577
ATTACHMENTS 01356 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS
PAGE 2 OF 6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1578
NEW YORK CITY

Policies and Procedures Manual Environmental, Health &
Safety
Revision: 1
Volume III Contractor Selection & Management Effective Date: 11/3/08
CONTRACTOR’S ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Scope
The Department of Environmental Protection (NYCDEP) has developed procedures to
ensure that contractors’ environmental, health and safety (EHS) records and programs
are evaluated when NYCDEP is selecting a contractor or approving a subcontractor.
These procedures also require that the contractors are properly prepared and trained to
safely complete the work and to adhere to all EHS laws, rules and regulations.
NYCDEP facilities are subject to requirements regarding qualification, supervision and
activities of contractors.
The intent of this section is to advise the Contractor of the EHS training and Contract
Award requirements for performing work at NYCDEP facilities as well as special
procedures applicable to locations where hazardous materials are stored and used.
1.2 Notification of Hazardous Materials in Work Area

Hazardous materials present in l include Asbestos Containing Material (ACM), Lead
Containing Paint, PCBs, and Heavy Metals including Mercury. The Contractor shall, at
all times, when working at these facilities, exercise necessary precautions to avoid
interaction with the hazardous materials feeds and/or storage systems and conform to
all directions and instructions provided by NYCDEP.
1.3 Pre-Award Requirements

Within five (5) business days of NYCDEP request, the apparent low bidder shall provide
the information specified herein; failure to provide the requested information may result
in a rejection of the bid.
1.3.1 The Contractor shall provide a written description of its EHS programs (and
associated training) and a certification that the Contractor’s program meets all
OSHA, USEPA, NYSDEC and New York City regulations, and that the
Contractor will abide by applicable NYCDEP policies and procedures, as
appropriate and as provided to the Contractor by NYCDEP. A NYCDEP form
(Attachment E of the NYCDEP Contractor Selection and Management
procedure) will be provided to the Contractor for this purpose. When requested
by NYCDEP, the Contractor shall submit a copy of its EHS and training
programs for review.
1.3.2 The Contractor shall provide its Worker’s Compensation Rating (i.e.,
Experience Modification Rating or EMR) and a list of all of its employees’ job-
related injuries and illnesses for at least the past three (3) years; worker’s
PAGE 3 OF 6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1579
NEW YORK CITY

Safety
Revision: 1
compensation claims shall be included. In addition, the Contractor shall

provide a list of all regulatory agencies (e.g., OSHA, NYSDEC, USEPA,
NYCDEP) notices of violations, fines and reportable releases of chemical or
petroleum products associated with the Contractor’s operations for, at a
minimum, the last three (3) years. The EMR shall be provided on the insurance
carrier’s letterhead (or equivalent insurance carrier communication) and the
remaining information shall be provided on the NYCDEP-provided form or the
Contractor’s letterhead signed by an officer of the company. The Contractor’s
EHS evaluations on DEP projects shall be reviewed. The EHS evaluation
process is described in DEP’s Contractor Selection and Management Policy.
A. If the Contractor’s EMR exceeds 1.0 the Contractor may be found to be

a non-responsive bidder and its bid may be rejected.
B. If the Contractor has received a serious, willful or repeated OSHA final
determination following the work-related death of an employee within
the past 3 years, the Contractor may be found to be a non-responsive
bidder and its bid may be rejected.
C. If the Contractor has received 3 or more repeat or willful OSHA final
determinations within the past 3 years, the Contractor may be found to
be a non-responsive bidder and its bid may be rejected.
D. If the Contractor has one or more Unsatisfactory six-month EHS
evaluations during the most recent six evaluation cycles on any contract
the Contractor may be found to be a non-responsive bidder and its bid
may be rejected.
E. If the Contractor has received two or more Marginal six-month EHS

evaluations during the most recent six evaluation cycles on any contract
the Contractor may be found to be a non-responsive bidder and its bid
may be rejected.
F. If the EHS and training program descriptions indicate that the

Contractor understands its regulatory requirements, has an EMR that is
at 1.0 or below, has no pattern or prior history of violations or releases,
and has certified that its programs and training comply with all
regulatory requirements; it may be awarded the contract.
1.3.3 For Joint Ventures the above information must be provided and will be
reviewed for both the Joint Venture and the individual Joint Venture partners.
PAGE 4 OF 6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1580
NEW YORK CITY

Safety
Revision: 1
1.3.4 The subcontractor approval process requires an information submittal that includes the
subcontractor EMR, program descriptions and certifications similar to those
required for the Contractor. The above review criteria may also apply to the
acceptance of Subcontractors performing a significant volume or aspect of the
project.
1.4 Pre-Construction Orientation

1.4.1 Prior to commencing any work at the facilities indicated in Detailed
Specification 01120 - (Multiple) Contract Summary, the Contractor shall be
required to attend an orientation. After attending the initial orientation, the
Contractor shall, in turn, provide an orientation to any of the Contractor’s
employees assigned to work at the facility. This training must also be provided
to subcontractors and lower tier contractors as well as any suppliers, contractor
visitors and field consultants who will be on-site without being accompanied
by a trained employee.
1.4.2 The Contractor shall receive and distribute to all workers who are to attend the
orientation a hazardous material and safe work practices information package.
If possible, it will be distributed at least two (2) days prior to the orientation.
The workers shall sign for the packages and indicate that they have reviewed
the contents prior to attending the orientation.
1.4.3 Prior to commencing any work at the facilities indicated in Detailed
Specification 01120 - (Multiple) Contract Summary, the Contractor shall certify
that it understands its obligations to train its employees and abide by applicable
DEP policies and procedures while it is working at DEP facilities.
1.4.4 If the Contractor or subcontractor needs to add additional or replacement
worker(s) to its crews, the new worker(s) must receive the hazardous materials
information package and attend the orientation for the facilities as described in
Sections 1.4.1 and 1.4.2.
1.5 Requirements During Work

1.5.1 The Contractor and subcontractors, and all of their employees shall, at all times
when working at the facilities, wear photo-identification badges. The badges
shall be provided only to employees who have received and reviewed the
hazardous material and safe work practices information package and have
attended the orientation. Personal protective equipment including steel-toed
work shoes, hardhat, etc. must be worn or carried by each on-site person at all
times.
PAGE 5 OF 6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1581
NEW YORK CITY

Safety
Revision: 1
1.5.2 The Contractor and subcontractors and all of their employees shall, upon
request, produce certificates, licenses and other documentation that laws or
regulations require them to obtain in order to conduct activities they are
performing (e.g., Asbestos Worker Certificate, FDNY Certificate of Fitness in
New York City).
1.5.3 The Contractor shall, at all times when working at the facilities, exercise all
necessary precautions to avoid interaction with the hazardous material feeds
and/or storage systems and conform to all directions and instructions provided
by the NYCDEP.
1.5.4 Contractor and subcontractor employees are restricted from entering all high-
hazard process areas, unless access is required to perform their work. In
coordination with the Contract Supervisor, the Contractor or subcontractor
employees entering such process areas must obtain permission from the on-duty
operator/Supervisor in person or by the telephone before entering and must
inform the on-duty operator/Supervisor in person or by telephone upon leaving
and follow all other facility access control procedures.
1.5.5 Any worker who fails to abide by the EHS requirements presented in the
hazardous material and safe work practices information package and/or at the
orientation shall, at the sole discretion of the NYCDEP, be denied access to the
facilities and shall be replaced by the Contractor, as directed by the NYCDEP.
1.5.6 The Contractor shall immediately inform the NYCDEP Contract Supervisor
and the facility’s Responsible Individual of all chemical or petroleum product
spills or releases, of any contract employee OSHA-reportable work place
injuries or illnesses, and of any notices of violation resulting from work
performed. Initial written reports shall be submitted by the next day. Refer to
other safety specifications for additional investigation and reporting
requirements.
1.5.7 NYCDEP will perform periodic evaluations of the contractor’s performance to
ensure compliance with all EHS laws and regulations and NYCDEP and facility
EHS requirements. The Contractor must correct non-compliance with any
applicable laws, regulations and NYCDEP and facility EHS requirements when
such non-compliance is communicated to it by NYCDEP. Failure to correct
such non-compliance in a timely manner or repeated violation of any EHS law,
regulation or NYCDEP/facility requirement, especially a violation about which
it received a prior notification, is grounds for stopping work until corrective
actions are completed. Such failures will also be considered when evaluating
the Contractor’s submittals for future work proposals.
PAGE 6 OF 6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1582
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01410 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01410
Regulatory Requirements
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Inspection by City, State and Federal Government
B. Work permits
C. Town of Mount Pleasant Building Department
D. Existing utilities
E. Drainage
F. Conformance to Industrial Code
G. Conformance to other codes and standards
H. No Advertising Sign
I. Non- Compliance
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any Work of this Section. The
Contractor shall include all costs for this Work in its lump sum price bid for the
Contract.
1.03 INSPECTION BY THE CITY, STATE AND FEDERAL GOVERNMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for inspection and access to the work at
all times, whenever it is in preparation and progress, for authorized representatives of
the City, local, State and Federal Governments, the latter three in the presence of the
Engineer.
1.04 WORK PERMITS
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Detailed Specifications, the Contractor shall obtain,
pay for, and comply with all necessary permits, licenses, approvals, certificates of
inspection, and controlled inspection reports, and shall give all notices and pay all legal
01410-1 11/2017
1583
fees to the City and local Departments in connection with the Work of this Contract.
B. All Work performed under the Contract shall conform to the rules and regulations of
the Bureau of Electrical Control, Department of Business Services, Department of
Buildings; the Building Laws of the City of New York and all other City, local, State
and Federal Departments having jurisdiction.
C. The Contractor is advised that all activities associated with this Work are to be
conducted in accordance with the permits for this project, including, but not limited to:
the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYSDEC) SPDES
Permit for Discharge of Stormwater from Construction Activities. The Contractor shall
comply in all respects with the requirements of these permits.
D. Upon completion of the various stages of construction, the Contractor shall schedule
inspections and obtain certificates of approval and/or acceptance from the various
agencies and Departments having jurisdiction and shall deliver these certificates to the
Engineer.
E. The necessary permits to be obtained by the Contractor include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYSDEC) State

Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (SPDES) permit No. GP-0-10-001, for
stormwater control during construction (with assistance of Engineer).
2. Building Permit (Town of Mount Pleasant).
3. Plumbing Permit (Town of Mount Pleasant).
4. Electrical Inspection (Town of Mount Pleasant).
F. The Contractor shall comply with the conditions and regulations of the permits that are
obtained by the City or its Engineer. These permits include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. NYCDEP State Environmental Quality Review and Environemtnal Assessment.
2. Town of Mount Pleasant Site Plan Approval.
3. NYCPDC Design Commission Approval.
4. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan.
1.05 TOWN OF MOUNT PLEASANT BUILDING DEPARTMENT
01410-2 11/2017
1584
A. The Contractor, as mandated by law, shall make application for a certificate of

electrical inspection to the Town of Mount Pleasant Building Department for electrical
Work furnished under this Contract. Proof of filing for the certificate shall be
submitted to the Engineer in the form of the pink copy of the job posting card issued by
the Bureau at the time of application. Such proof shall be submitted within fifteen (15)
days after the date upon which the Contractor is notified by the City to Commence
Work.
B. After completion of his Work, the Contractor shall notify the local office of the Town
of Mount Pleasant Building Department and Department of Buildings, by letter,
requesting that a final inspection be made.
C. Prior to final payment, there must be filed in the Office of the Comptroller of the City a
Certificate of Inspection signed by the Superintendent of the Town of Mount Pleasant
Building Department shall certify that:
1. All material and workmanship comply in every respect with the rules and
regulations of the Town of Mount Pleasant Building Department and the New
York City Electrical Code.
2. All materials and workmanship comply in every respect with the Contract
Documents approved by the Town of Mount Pleasant Building Department and
fulfill the intent thereof.
1.06 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. All subsurface utility and structure information shown on the Contract Drawings were
obtained from various plans and maps and field investigations, however they are not
guaranteed to be complete or accurate. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
locate all such necessary utilities or structures by digging test pits prior to the starting
construction. No separate payment will be made for test pits.
B. During progress of the Work, the Contractor shall protect from damage any existing
utilities or services within the work areas until, they have been re-routed, disconnected
or capped off.
1.07 DRAINAGE
A. The Contractor shall, as approved by the Engineer, provide and construct flumes,
berms, dams and all incidental and related facilities necessary to divert groundwater
and surface drainage, and to prevent any sediment from being conveyed into the
reservoir or water courses.
1.08 CONFORMANCE TO INDUSTRIAL CODE
01410-3 11/2017
1585
A. The Contractor's attention is directed to requirements of the Industrial Code of the State
of New York, Department of Labor, Board of Standard and Appeals, latest edition and
amendments or supplements thereto. All mechanical equipment with respect to
manufacture, fabrication, and safety devices for protection of personnel from electrical
parts and mechanically moving parts such as belts, shafts, couplings, and other
apparatus, appliances or equipment, all floors, stair surfaces, ladders, equipment, access
stairs and platforms, all exit enclosures, vertical openings and stairs, shall comply with
this code; and all provisions therein shall be deemed included in and required by these
Specifications and shall be detailed for approval and furnished without additional cost;
the price thereof considered to be included in the applicable prices bid for the various
Contract Items in the Contracts.
1.9 CONFORMANCE TO OTHER CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All Work under this Contract shall conform to the current applicable requirements of
the NYS Department of Transportation, the NYS Uniform Fire Prevention and Building
Code, the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, NEMA, OSHA,
UL, the Contract Documents and the documents specified elsewhere in the Detailed
Specifications.
1. The State of New York codes shall be followed in case of conflict. Latest edition
of all codes shall apply.
2. Petroleum storage shall conform to applicable state, county and local codes (Parts
612 through 614 in Title VI of the New York Code of Rules and Regulations;
Schoharie County Sanitary Code; Town of Gilboa Code).
3. Lifting operations and requirements for submittals for lifting plans shall conform
to Section 585-3.02 of the New York Standard Specifications, latest edition.
B. In case of conflict, the more stringent requirements of the latest edition of the codes
shall apply.
C. All materials and equipment submitted for approval by the Contractor shall have, at the
time of their submittal, a current Report of Material and Equipment Acceptance from
the New York City Department of Buildings, Materials and Equipment Acceptance
Division, indicating acceptance of the item submitted for approval for its specified use.
1.10 NO ADVERTISING SIGN
A. Contractor shall not display any advertising signs on or about the Site of the Work other
than those specified, without the written permission of the Engineer.
01410-4 11/2017
1586
1.11 NON-COMPLIANCE
A. All fees/penalties incurred by the Contractor, City, County, Town of Mount Pleasant,
Engineer or other such entity, resulting from non-compliance by the Contractor with
permits or approvals obtained by the Contractor, permits obtained by the City or
Engineer, conformance to the Industrial Code or conformance to other codes or
standards governing the performance of this Contract will be paid for by the Contractor
and deducted from the final payment.
END OF SECTION
01410-5 11/2017
1587
01410-6 11/2017
1588
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01415 – MISCELLANEOUS PROJECT
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01415
Miscellaneous Project Requirements
PART 1 GENERAL
A. General mechanical requirements.
B. Diagrammatic drawings.
C. Ratings approximate.
D. Schematic wiring diagrams.
E. Electric supply characteristics.
F. Electrical equipment, special requirements.
G. Uniform finishes.
H. ANSI/NSF 61 Certification.
I. Designated smoking areas.
1.02 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The general mechanical requirements contained herein shall be followed by the

Contractor furnishing mechanical equipment:
1. "Concealed" piping and ducts shall mean piping and ducts hidden from sight
in masonry or other construction, in floor fill, trenches, partitions, hung
ceilings, furred spaces, pipe shafts and in service tunnels not used for passage.
Where piping and ducts run in areas that have hung ceilings, such piping and
ducts shall be installed above the hung ceilings.
2. The Contract Drawings are in part diagrammatic and show the general
arrangement of the equipment, ducts and piping included in the Contract and
the approximate size and locations of the equipment. The Contractor shall
follow these Contract Drawings in laying out the Work and shall consult the
Contract Drawings of the other Contracts to familiarize himself with all
conditions affecting his Work and to verify the spaces in which it will be
installed.
01415-1 11/2017
1589
REQUIREMENTS
B. All gravity and pressure pipelines and appurtenant structures shall be field tested for
leakage after installation in accordance with the requirements contained in the
applicable General Specifications as supplemented by the Detailed Specifications.
C. Connections to existing piping shall be made to permit ready disconnections of

equipment with minimum disturbance of adjoining piping and equipment. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of all piping with the
associated equipment and under no circumstances will pipe springing be allowed.
1.03 DIAGRAMMATIC DRAWINGS
A. Various pipelines are shown on the Drawings in diagram form. Where such
pipelines are shown in diagram form, they shall be arranged clear of other pipelines,
equipment and walking areas, and shall be accessible for maintenance. Such
pipelines shall be fitted and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in
accordance with approved Shop Drawings. An adequate number of unions shall be
provided in main pipe and branch pipe runs to facilitate dismantling or removal of
pipeline sections without disturbing adjacent branch or connecting lines.
B. The final locations of valves, fittings and other such appurtenances included as a
part of diagrammed pipelines shall be as shown on approved Shop Drawings or as
determined in the field by the Engineer.
C. Diagrammed pipelines shall be furnished, fabricated, erected and otherwise installed

to lines, elevations, locations and dimensions as shown, specified or required for a
complete installation. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions shown on the
Drawings and shall take such field dimensions as may be necessary to properly
show on Shop Drawings and install all diagrammed pipelines.
D. In the vicinity of overhead roll-up doors and truck ways all pipe, conduit and
appurtenances shall be installed a minimum of 14'-0" above the finished grade or
floor elevation, and a minimum of 8'-0" above the finished grade or floor elevation
in all walking areas.
E. Electrical conduits and wiring are in part diagrammatic and show the general
arrangement and routing of conduits and wiring and the approximate size and
location of devices included in the Contract. The Contractor shall follow the intent
of these Contract Drawings in laying out the Work. The Contractor shall verify the
spaces allocated in which his Work will be installed.
1.04 RATINGS APPROXIMATE
A. The ratings of the devices shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate only
and are merely indicative of the probable power requirements insofar as they can be
determined in advance of the purchase of devices. The ratings of the devices
01415-2 11/2017
1590
REQUIREMENTS
furnished may be either increased or decreased according to the requirements of the

equipment furnished.
B. The Contractor shall verify the exact rating of each device before performing the
Work required under his Contract and modify the size of conduit, wiring and control
equipment accordingly.
1.05 SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS
A. Equipment furnished under the various Contract divisions will require

interconnecting wiring. The Contractor's Shop Drawings, furnished in accordance
with the General Specifications, shall include comprehensive schematic diagrams
showing wiring of each individual piece of equipment and all interconnecting
wiring. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer prior to
commencement of Work.
1.06 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS
A. The following systems will be available for operation of motor driven equipment
and electrical devices furnished under the Contract:
1. 480 Volts, 3 Phase, 3 Wire power for all equipment, motor control centers,
power panels and lighting transformers, except as listed hereinafter.
2. 208Y/120V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, grounded neutral power for single phase, 120
Volt operation of motors 1/3 horsepower or smaller, alarm circuits, and
various low power devices and control circuits and receptacle circuits.
1.07 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All electrical equipment and devices manufactured and furnished under the Contract
shall be of a type that have been in satisfactory operation for not less than three
years, except as provided in Article 5 of the General Conditions. Whenever similar
devices or appliances are furnished, they shall be of one manufacturer and
interchangeable within their ratings. If this is not feasible, the Contractor shall
submit a statement for each manufacturer supplying devices, certifying the
following:
1. That they recommends the use of the device or devices for the specific
function to be performed;
2. That they fully guarantees the satisfactory operation of the device or devices in
conjunction with the other elements of the equipment.
B. Whenever standard devices or devices of a named manufacturer do not exactly

01415-3 11/2017
1591
REQUIREMENTS
fulfill the specified conditions, they shall be modified or special devices shall be
furnished. All electrical devices furnished under the Contract shall be housed in
metal enclosures with provisions for threaded conduit connections. The enclosures
shall be designed to protect all electrical parts from local conditions.
C. The ratings of motors and devices given in various Detailed Specifications are
approximate only and merely indicate the probable power requirements insofar as
they can be determined in advance of the purchase of the equipment specified. The
ratings of the motors and other devices furnished may be either increased or
decreased according to the requirements of the equipment furnished and the
Contractor shall verify the exact rating of each item of equipment before performing
the Work required under this Contract.
D. Float switches, limit switches and other mechanically actuated electrical devices
shall consist of an approved electrical system housed in rugged metal enclosures.
They shall be adjustable without disturbing conduit connections. The switch
actuating mechanism shall be mechanically and structurally correct for the required
service and shall not subject the electrical parts to unnecessary stress or mechanical
shock. Operating shafts shall be bushed and stuffed in dust-tight cases. Switches
containing mercury shall not be permitted.
E. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise directed, furnish and assemble all special
lamps, indicating lamps, annunciator lamps and pilot lamps with all accessories.
F. Electrical equipment rated greater than 1,000 watts and lighting equipment greater
than 15 watts with an inductive reactance load component, shall have a power factor
of not less than 85 percent under rated load conditions. Electrical equipment with a
power factor less than 85 percent shall be corrected to at least 85 percent under
rated load conditions. Installed power factor corrective devices shall be switched
with utilization equipment.
G. Nameplates and warning signs shall be provided. Nameplates shall be 1/16 inch
thick laminated plastic, white with a black core for black engraved lettering, and
shall have beveled edges. They shall be provided for all controls on all power
control panels and cabinets, lighting cabinets and operating devices, marked and
positioned on the front panel as approved by the Engineer. Mounting shall be by
stainless steel screws through predrilled nameplate holes, one at each end of the
plate. The Contractor shall provide, as required or as directed, all warning signs
required for the safe operation of the equipment. Such warning signs shall be of
substantial material, porcelain enameled, of suitable thickness and as approved by
the Engineer. All components within electrical control panels, switchgear and
assemblies shall be identified with engraved stainless steel tags rigidly mounted at
or near the respective device.
H. Wire terminals on manufactured assemblies such as switchboards, bench boards,

01415-4 11/2017
1592
REQUIREMENTS
control panels, alarm boards, and motor control equipment shall consist of cup
terminals, pronged washers, compression type solderless connectors or pressure
type terminals furnished on devices.
I. All control and indication wires within switchboards, control centers and other
panels and cabinets shall be terminated on terminal blocks provided with marking
strips for wire designation. The manufacturer shall identify all wires on the marking
strips. All field wires will be terminated and identified by the Contractor.
J. Provision shall be made for wire and cables installed at the plant site to be
terminated by the Contractor with approved solderless copper alloy lugs. Lugs may
be of the compression type, clamp type or screw type with internal pressure bar, or
may be pressure-tool applied solderless connectors. Pressure tool applied solderless
connectors for wires 250 MCM or larger shall have long barrels to allow double
indentation. Where clamp type or screw type lugs are installed on wires 1/0 AWG
and larger, wire ends shall be filled with solder, contact surfaces of lugs shall be
tinned and heat shall be applied when the lugs are tightened.
K. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to consult with the manufacturer or his

representative to assure that the electrical items will have a shelf life of at least 10
years. Polychlorinated Biphenols (PCB) shall not be used in any equipment on this
project. Manufacturers shall have maintenance facilities in the New York City
metropolitan area.
L. All electrical equipment and Work shall be in accordance with the Electrical Code
of the City of New York. The Contractor shall submit proof to the Engineer of
application for an electrical inspection certificate for equipment furnished under this
Contract in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions.
1.08 UNIFORM FINISHES
A. A uniform finish shall be used for all hardware, metallic nameplates and similar
exposed metal parts used on any equipment or group of equipment and, as far as
possible, the same finish shall be used for all such equipment items.
1.9 ANSI/NSF 61 CERTIFICATION
A. Materials that come in contact with drinking water, drinking water treatment
chemicals, or both, shall be ANSI/NSF 61 Certified. Materials include, but are not
necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Pipe and related products including fittings, couplings, flexible and rigid
tubing, riser tubing, dip tubes, hoses, wall casings, drop pipes, screens, and
pipe related coatings.
01415-5 11/2017
1593
REQUIREMENTS
2. Barrier materials used to form a barrier proving containment of drinking water

or to prevent drinking water contact with another surface including,
but not necessarily limited to: storage tanks, coatings, paints, linings and
liners, bladders, diaphragms, and constituents of concrete and
concrete cement mortars such as Portland and blended hydraulic cements,
admixtures, sealers, and mold release agents.
3. Joining and sealing materials, fluxes, gaskets materials and lubricants
4. Process media including, but not necessarily limited to, those used for ion
exchange, adsorption, oxidation, aeration and filtration
5. Mechanical devices, components, and materials which are used in

treatment/distribution/transmission systems and are in contact with drinking
water intended for human ingestion, drinking water treatment chemicals, or
both.
6. Mechanical endpoint plumbing devices including, but not necessarily limited

to: single and double handle lavatory faucets, two hole and single hole bar
faucets, single and double handed kitchen faucets, hot and cold water
dispensers, drinking fountains, bubblers, and water coolers, glass fillers,
refrigerator ice makers, supply and stops and commercial kitchen devices.
1.10 DESIGNATED SMOKING AREAS
A. The Contractor shall establish designated smoking areas outdoors which are at least
thirty feet from construction activities and all flammable and combustible material.
The locations will be subject to the approval of the City and Engineer. These areas
must be clearly delineated with signage, equipped with fire extinguishers and
appropriate waste receptacles, and maintained. The areas will be relocated as needed
due to changes in construction activities.
There will be zero tolerance for any personnel found smoking outside of these
designated areas, and the Contractor shall remove any worker found smoking outside
of these designated areas. This shall be in a progressive disciplinary policy: first
offense, removal for the day; second offense, removal from the project. This policy
shall be included in the site specific Health and Safety Plan and communicated to all
Subcontractors and their personnel. Communication of this policy shall be
documented in a written tailboard talk, meeting minutes, or other communication.
All personnel must sign to indicate that they have read and understood the policy.
In those cases where evidence of discarded cigarette butts and other smoking
paraphernalia is found, the Engineer or City will issue findings against the Contractor
or Contractors working in that area. If Contractors do not clean up their areas daily,
01415-6 11/2017
1594
REQUIREMENTS
or there is a dispute about ownership, the Engineer will have the area immediately
cleaned and all Contractors will be charged accordingly.
END OF SECTION
01415-7 11/2017
1595
REQUIREMENTS
01415-8 11/2017
1596
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01420 -- REFERENCE STANDARDS
SECTION 01420
Reference Standards
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Use of Reference Standards
B. Schedule of References
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work of this Section and
the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump sum price bid for the
Contract.
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Detailed Specification 01410 – Regulatory Requirements

A. Most of the reference standards applicable to the project are listed in the
Specification describing the work to be performed.
B. A Schedule of References listing the names, acronyms, and contact information
for organizations that develop or publish the reference standards is also given
at the end of this Section.
1.05 DESCRIPTION
A. Use of Reference Standards:
1. Products or workmanship specified by the referenced standards shall
comply with the requirements of those standards, except where
requirements that are more rigid are specified or required by applicable
codes.
2. Referenced standards shall be current as of the time of bidding the
Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified.
3. The Contractor shall obtain copies of the referenced standards when
required by the Contract Documents.
B. Schedule of References
1. Whenever reference is made to the furnishing of materials or testing
thereof to conform to the standards of any technical society,
organization or body, it shall be construed to mean the latest standard,
01420 - 1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1597
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01420 -- REFERENCE STANDARDS
code, specifications or tentative specification adopted and published,

unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
2. When no reference is made to a code, standard or specification, the
standards of the ASTM or the IEEE shall govern. Where an item of
equipment is specified to be explosion- proof, it shall be so certified by
an independent agency recognized by the insurance industry, namely,
UL, FM, etc. In all cases, materials shall be of the quality and character
which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are best suited for the purpose for
which they are required.
3. Table 1 – Standards Developing Organizations/Publications, attached at
the end of this Section, includes, but is not limited to, organizations and
their acronyms whose publications may be referenced in the
Specifications.

A. To ensure proper use of reference standards in the preparation of shop drawings,
the Contractor shall employ qualified personnel with at least five years’
construction project experience, including the use of industry standards and
compliance with construction codes and regulations.
1.07 ATTACHMENTS
A. Table 1 – Standards Developing Organizations / Publications
END OF SECTION
01420 - 2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1598
TABLE 1
Standards Developing Organizations / Publications
AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND (THE) ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI) Publications Department
4301 North Fairfax Drive, Suite 425, P. O. Box 753
Attention: Publications Department Waldorf, Maryland 20601
Arlington, Virginia 22203 Phone: 301-645-0756
Phone: 703-524-8800 Fax: 301-843-0159
Fax: 703-528-3816 Internet: www.aluminum.org
Internet: www.ahrinet.org
AMERICAN NURSERY AND AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE

LANDSCAPE ASSOCIATION (ANLA) HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
1250 I Street, NW, Suite 500 OFFICIAL (AASHTO)
Washington, D.C. 20005 444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249
Phone: 888-227-4860 or 202-789-2900 Washington, D.C. 20001
Fax: 202-789-1893 Phone: 888-227-4860 or 202-624-5800
Internet: www.anla.org Fax: 202-624-5806
Internet: www.transportation.org
AMERICAN BEARING AMERICAN BUREAU OF SHIPPING

MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABS)
(ABMA) 16855 Northchase Drive
1200 19th Street, NW, Suite 300 Houston, Texas 77060
Washington, D.C. 20036-4303 Phone: 281-877-5800
Phone: 202-429-5155 Fax: 281-877-5803
Fax: 202-223-4579 Internet: www.eagle.org
Internet: www.americanbearings.com
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE

(ACI) ASSOCIATION (ACPA)
P. O. Box 9094 222 West Las Colinas Boulevard, Suite 691
Farmington Hills, Michigan 48333-9094 Irving, Texas 75039-5423
Phone: 810-848-3800 Phone: 800-290-2272 or 214-506-7216
Fax: 810-848-3801 Fax: 214-506-7682
Internet: www.aci.org Internet: www.concrete-pipe.org
AMERICAN GALVANIZERS AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION (AGA)

ASSOCIATION (AGA) 1515 Wilson Boulevard
6881 South Holly Circle, Suite 108 Arlington, Virginia 22209
Centennial, Colorado 80112 Phone: 703-841-8556
Phone: 720-554-0900 Fax: 703-841-8406
Internet: www.aga.org
Fax: 720-554-0909
Internet: www.galvanizeit.org
AMERICAN GEAR MANUFACTURERS AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL

ASSOCIATION (AGMA) CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
PAGE 1 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1599
1500 King Street, Suite 201 One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100
Alexandria, Virginia 22314-2730 Chicago, Illinois 60601-2001
Phone: 703-684-0211 Phone: 312-670-2400 or 800-644-2400
Fax: 703-684-0242 Fax: 312-670-2400
Internet: www.agma.org Internet: www.aiscweb.com
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS

INSTITUTE (AISI) INSTITUTE (ANSI)
Attention: Publication Orders 11 West 42nd Street
P. O. Box 4321 New York, New York 10036
Chestertown, Maryland 21690 Phone: 212-642-4900
Phone: 800-277-3850 Fax: 212-398-0023
Fax: 410-810-0910 Internet: www.ansi.org
Internet: www.aisi.org
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING,

(API) REFRIGERATING AND AIR-
1220 L Street, NW CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
Washington, D.C. 20005 1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Phone: 202-682-8375 Atlanta, Georgia 30329-2305
Fax: 202-962-4776 Phone: 800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400
Internet: www.api.org Fax: 404-321-5478
Internet: www.ashrae.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY

MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) ENGINEERING (ASSE)
221 Law Drive, Box 2300 P. O. Box 40362
Fairfield, New Jersey 07007-2900 Bay Village, Ohio 44140
Phone: 800-843-2763 Phone: 216-835-3040
Fax: 201-882-1717 Fax: 216-835-3488
Internet: www.asme.org Internet: www.asse-plumbing.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL

AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ENGINEERS (ASCE)
100 Barr Harbor Drive 1801 Alexander Bell Drive
West Conshohocken, Reston, Virginia 20190-4400
Pennsylvania 19428-2959 Phone: 800-548-2723
Phone: 610-832-9500 Fax: 703-295-6333
Fax: 610-832-9555 Internet: www.asce.org
Internet: www.astm.org
PAGE 2 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1600
AMERICAN WATER WORKS AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 550 NW LeJeune Road
6666 West Quincy Miami, Florida 33126
Denver, Colorado 80235 Phone: 305-443-9353
Phone: 800-926-7337 Fax: 305-443-7559
Fax: 303-795-1989 Internet: www.aws.org
Internet: www.awwa.org
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)

ASSOCIATION (AWPA) Research Park Drive
3246 Fall Creek Highway, Suite 1900 P. O. Box 14052
Grandbury, Texas 76049-7979 Lexington, Kentucky 40512-4052
Phone: 817-326-6300 Phone: 606-288-4960
Fax: 817-726-6306 Fax: 606-288-4999
Internet: www.awpa.com Internet: www.asphaltinstitute.org
ASSOCIATION FOR IRON AND STEEL BUREAU OF ELECTRICAL CONTROLS

TECHNOLOGY (AIST) (BEC)
186 Thorn Hill Road New York City – Buildings Department
Warrendale, Pennsylvania 15086-752 Bureau of Electrical Control
Tel: 724-814-3000 1 Centre Street Room 2208
Fax: 724-814-3001 New York, NY 10007
Internet: www.aist.org Phone: 212-669-8353
Internet: www.nyc.gov
BOARD OF STANDARDS & APPEALS BRICK INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (BIA)

(BS&A) 11490 Commerce Park Drive, Suite 308
City of New York Reston, Virginia 22091
Board of Standards and Appeals Phone: 703-620-0010
40 Rector Street 9th Floor Fax: 703-620-3928
New York, NY 10007 Internet: www.bia.org
Phone: 212-788-8500
Fax: 212-788-8769
Internet: www.nyc.gov
CALIFORNIA REDWOOD CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE

ASSOCIATION (CRA) (CISPI)
405 Enfrente Avenue, Suite 200 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419
Novato, California 94949 Chattanooga, Tennessee 37421
Phone: 415-382-0662 Phone: 615-892-0137
Fax: 415-382-8531 Fax: 615-892-0817
Internet: www.calredwood.org Internet: www.cispi.org
PAGE 3 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1601
THE CHLORINE INSTITUTE (CI) CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

2001 L Street, NW (CFR)
Washington, D.C. 20036 Order from: Government Printing Office
Phone: 202-775-2790 Washington, D.C. 20402
Fax: 202-223-7225 Phone: 202-512-1800
Internet: www.chlorineinstitute.org Fax: 202-275-7703
Internet: www.gpoaccess.gov
COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL

(CGA) INSTITUTE (CRSI)
1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004 933 North Plum Grove Road
Arlington, Virginia 22202-4102 Schaumburg, Illinois 60173-4758
Phone: 703-412-0900 Phone: 847-517-1200
Fax: 703-412-0128 Fax: 847-517-1206
Internet: www.cganet.com Internet: www.crsi.org
CONVEYOR EQUIPMENT CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)

MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION Order from: U.S. Army Engineer Waterways
(CEMA) Experiment Station
9384-D Forestwood Lane Attn: Technical Report Distribution Section,
Manassas, Virginia 22110 Services Branch, TIC
Phone: 703-330-7079 3909 Halls Ferry Road
Fax: 703-330-7984 Vicksburg, Mississippi 39180-6199
Internet: www.cemanet.org Phone: 601-634-2355
Fax: 601-634-2506
Internet: www.usace.army.mil
DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING

ASSOCIATION (DIPRA) AND RESEARCH (FM)
245 Riverchase Parkway East, Suite 0 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
Birmingham, Alabama 35244-1856 Norwood, Massachusetts 02062-9102
Phone: 205-988-9870 Phone: 617-255-4681
Fax: 205-988-9822 Fax: 617-255-4359
Internet: www.diprn.org Internet: www.factorymutual.com
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS) HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)

Order from: General Services 9 Sylvan Way, Suite 180
Administration, Federal Supply Service Parsippany, New Jersey 07054-3802
Bureau Phone: 201-267-9700
470 L'Enfant Plaza, SW Publication Hotline: 702-364-6206
Washington, D.C. 20407 Internet: www.pumps.org
Phone: 202-619-8925
Internet: http://pub.fss.gsa.gov/h1-pub.html
PAGE 4 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1602
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND

SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
(IESNA) 445 Hoes Lane, P. O. Box 1331
120 Wall Street, 17th Floor Piscataway, New Jersey 08855-1331
New York, New York 10005-4001 Phone: 800-678-4333
Phone: 212-248-5000 Fax: 908-981-9667
Fax: 212-248-5017 E-mail: Stds-mailst@ieee.org
Internet: www.iesna.org Internet: http//stdbbs.ieee.org
MANUFACTURERS METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS

STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF ASSOCIATION (MBMA)
THE VALVE AND FITTINGS 1300 Sumner Avenue
INDUSTRY (MSS) Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851
127 Park Street, NE Phone: 216-241-7333
Vienna, Virginia 22180-4602 Fax: 216-241-0105
Phone: 703-281-6613
Fax: 703-281-6671
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Military Specifications (MIL-SPECs)

ACCEPTANCE (MEA) Division, Dept. of Defensehttp://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
NYC Department of Buildings
Materials and Equipment Acceptance
Division
280 Broadway
New York, NY 10007
Phone: 212-566-5000
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF NATIONAL ELECTRICAL

ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION
MANUFACTURERS (NAAM) (NEMA)
8 S. Michigan Avenue, Suite 100 1300 N. 17th Street, Suite 1847
Chicago, Illinois 60603 Rosslyn, Virginia 22209
Phone: 312-782-4951 Phone: 703-841-3200
Fax: 202-457-8473
Internet: http//www.nema.org/
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION

(See National Fire Protection Association ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
Already on List) One Batterymarch Park
P. O. Box 9101
Quincy, Massachusetts 02269-9101
Phone: 800-344-3555
Fax: 800-593-6372
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
PAGE 5 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1603
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF NATIONAL READY-MIXED CONCRETE

STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)
(NIST) 900 Spring Street
100 Bureau Drive Silver Spring, Maryland 20910
Stop 1070 Phone: 301-587-1400
Gaitherburg, MD 20800-1070 Fax: 301-585-4219
inquiriers@nist.gov
Phone: 301-975-NIST
NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION

ASSOCIATION (NRCA) (NSF)
P. O. Box 809261 NSF International
Chicago, Illinois 60680-9261 P.O. Box 130140
Phone: 800-323-9545 789 N. Dixboro Road
Fax: 708-299-1183 Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140, USA
Telephone: (+1) 734-769-8010
Fax: (+1) 734-769-0109
NEW YORK CITY BUILDING CODE NEW YORK CITY ELECTRICAL CODE
(NYCBC) (NYCEC)
NYC Department of Buildings NYC Department of Buildings
280 Broadway 280 Broadway
New York, NY 10007 New York, NY 10007
Phone: 212-566-5000 Phone: 212-566-5000
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

ADMINISTRATION (OSHA) ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
U.S. Department of Labor 800 Roosevelt Road, Bldg C, Suite 20
Occupational Safety & Health Glen Ellyn, Illinois 60137
Administration Phone: 708-858-6540
200 Constitution Avenue Fax: 708-790-3095
Washington, D.C. 20210
Phone: 1-800-321-OSHA (6742)
PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE (PEI)

INSTITUTE (PCI) 4004 Hillsboro Pike, Suite 224B
175 West Jackson Boulevard Nashville, Tennessee 37215
Chicago, Illinois 60604-9773 Phone: 615-385-5357
Phone: 312-786-0300 Fax: 615-385-5463
Fax: 312-786-0353
SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE

CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ENGINEERS (SAE)
ASSOCIATION (SMACNA) SAE World Headquarters
P. O. Box 221230 400 Commonwealth Drive
Chantilly, Virginia 22022-1230 Warrendale, PA 15096-0001 USA
Phone: 703-803-2989 Phone: 1-724-776-4841; 1-877-606-7323
Fax: 703-803-3732
PAGE 6 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1604
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI) STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDO)

P. O. Box 9506 30200 Detroit Road
Canton, Ohio 44711 Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967
Phone: 216-493-7886 Phone: 216-899-0010
Fax: 216-493-7928 Fax: 216-892-1404
STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING STEEL TANK INSTITUTE (STI)

COUNCIL (SSPC) 570 Oakwood Road
40 24th Street, 6th Floor Lake Zurich, Illinois 60047
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222-4643 Phone: 708-438-0989 or 800-275-1300
Phone: 412-281-2331 Fax: 708-438-8766
Fax: 412-281-9992
Internet: www.sspc.org
STEEL WINDOW INSTITUTE (SWI) TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA (TCA)

1300 Sumner Avenue P. O. Box 1787
Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851 Clemson, South Carolina 29633-1787
Phone: 216-241-7333 Phone: 864-646-8453
Fax: 216-241-0105 Fax: 864-646-2821
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS

(UL) ASSOCIATION (WWPA)
333 Pfingstem Road Yeon Building
Northbrook, Illinois 60062-2096 522 SW 5th Avenue
Phone: 800-704-4050 Portland, Oregon 97204-2122
Fax: 847-509-6249 Phone: 503-224-3930
Internet: http://www.ul.com/ Fax: 503-224-3934
PAGE 7 OF 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1605
PAGE 8 OF 8 11/2017
1606 DEP 3/15/2016
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01430
APPROVAL OF PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS – NAMED OR EQUAL
SECTION 01430
Approval of Product Manufacturers – Named or Equal
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the requirements for the use of named Manufacturers of
materials and equipment and the requirements for the use of equivalent
materials and equipment.
1.02 PAYMENT
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. “Manufacturer” shall mean a company that manufactures, fabricates,
assembles, and/or integrates materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances, or other
fittings. Manufacturer shall not mean a distributor, sales representative, and/or
supplier.
B. “Named Manufacturer” shall mean any Manufacturer cited by company name
in the Specification Sections.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Approval of Manufacturers
1. All transactions with Manufacturers shall be through the Contractor.
2. Similar materials and equipment of one and the same kind, type or
classification that are used for identical purposes shall be made by the
same Manufacturer, except that multiple Manufacturers may be
approved for commodity items including, but not limited to, such items
as concrete, conduit and cable, at the discretion of the Engineer.
3. Approval of a proposed Manufacturer is conditional upon compliance
with the Specifications and Drawings as determined by the Engineer
during the subsequent review of the Contractor’s submitted Shop
Drawings.
4. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be
granted approval for one Manufacturer per item.
5. For items of significant import or requiring specialized manufacturing,
the Engineer may deny approval based on a determination that the
proposed Manufacturer:
01430-1 11/2017
DEP 12/16/2016
1607
a. Does not have a plant of sufficient capacity with a production

force and plant facilities of type and size suitable to produce
the specified equipment or material required;
b. Does not have an operating quality control department with an
experienced and qualified staff;
c. Has not successfully produced similar equipment or materials
for at least three (3) years; or
d. Has previously failed to adhere to product specifications,
scheduling, delivery requirements, or warranty obligations in
connection with City contracts and projects.
B. List of Named Manufacturers in the Bid Booklet
1. The bidder shall indicate on the form in the Bid Booklet (when included)
entitled “LIST OF EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS,”
which Manufacturer the bidder intends to use for each item of
equipment or material listed on that form, by either:
a. Writing in one of the Named Manufacturers specified in the
Specifications for that equipment or material, in which case the
indicated Manufacturer is not subject to approval by DEP and
shall be utilized for that item as part of the Work of the
Contract; or
b. As an alternative to selecting a Named Manufacturer, a
proposed “or equal” may be submitted for any of the items.
The proposed “or equal(s)” must be indicated in the designated
column on the form. The submittal of more than one
Manufacturer for each item of equipment/material will not be
permitted. No other requests for substitutions for these items
may be submitted during the Work of the Contract, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
c. The bidder shall certify its selection of Manufacturers by
signing the List of Equipment/Material Manufacturers form.
2. The procedure for review by the Engineer for the “or equal” items
proposed with a bid on the List of Equipment/Material Manufacturers
form shall be as follows:
a. Within 14 days following bid opening, the apparent low bidder
shall submit sufficient information to substantiate that the item
proposed is the equivalent of that of the Named Manufacturer.
b. Wherever:
i. information substantiating the request for approval of a
substitution is not submitted within said 14-day period, or
01430-2 11/2017
DEP 12/16/2016
1608
ii. the submission in support of proposed “or equal” material

or equipment has been judged to be unacceptable by the
Engineer,
then the bidder (if awarded the Contract) shall provide the
material or equipment of a Named Manufacturer as specified in
the Contract Documents and must submit, within seven
calendar days after notice, a revised List Of
Equipment/Material Manufacturers form identifying the
Manufacturer of the material or equipment to be provided. If
the Contractor fails to timely make this submission, the award
may be rescinded and the bid rejected as non-responsive.
c. No shop drawing submittals shall be made for a proposed “or
equal” item prior to written approval of the proposed “or
equal”.
C. Named Product Manufacturers Not on the List in the Bid Booklet
1. Whenever materials or equipment not included on the Bid Booklet List
of Equipment/Material Manufacturers are indicated in the Contract
Documents by referring to a particular Named Manufacturer, the
naming is intended to establish the type, function, and quality required.
Unless the Contract specifies an item as "Brand Name Only" with no
substitution of any “equal” allowed, then materials or equipment of
other Manufacturers may be approved, if sufficient information is
submitted to allow the Engineer to determine that the material or
equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that of the Named
Manufacturer.
2. For such materials or equipment, proposed “or equals” may be
submitted and reviewed as part of the Contractor’s shop drawing
approval process. The following shall apply to such determinations:
a. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to the type, function,
and quality of any proposed “or equal” and the Engineer's
decision shall be final.
b. The Engineer may require the Contractor to furnish additional
data about the proposed "or equal."
c. Approval by the Engineer of an “or equal” item shall not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for full compliance
with the Contract Documents.
d. The Contractor shall pay all costs of implementing approved
"or equal(s)”, including any redesign and changes to the Work
necessary to accommodate the substitution. These shall include
resulting costs incurred by other Contractors (if any) on the
project.
01430-3 11/2017
DEP 12/16/2016
1609
D. The following provisions shall apply to all requests to substitute

material/manufacturers:
1. The Contractor may be granted approval for one Manufacturer per item.
However, during the performance of Work, multiple Manufacturers
may be approved for certain commodity items at the sole discretion of
the Engineer, upon written request by the Contractor. The Contractor
must include a justification in the written request.
2. The Engineer will evaluate each proposed “or equal” within a
reasonable period of time.
3. No substituted item shall be ordered, installed, or utilized without the
Engineer's prior written approval of the proposed “or equal.”
4. The bidder’s or Contractor’s substantiating information shall address
the following factors, which will be considered by the Engineer in
evaluating a proposed “or equal.”
a. Whether it is equal in construction, function and efficiency to
that of the Manufacturer named in the Specifications.
b. Whether acceptance of the proposed “or equal” will cause
delay in the Contractor's achievement of Substantial
Completion.
c. Whether acceptance of the “or equal” for use in the Work will
require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adapt the
design to the proposed substitution.
d. Whether incorporation or use of the “or equal” in connection
with the Work is subject to payment of any ongoing license fee
or royalty.
e. The availability of maintenance, repair, and replacement
service. The proposed Manufacturer shall have a service
agency that is staffed by properly trained personnel and
maintains adequate spare parts, and is able to respond and
complete repairs within 24 hours.
f. An itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or
indirectly from approval of such “or equal,” including cost of
any required redesign and potential claims of other Contractors
affected by the resulting change.
g. Whether the proposed “or equal” item meets or exceeds the
requirements listed in the appropriate Specifications.
E. Changes Resulting From Approval of Proposed "Or Equal"
1. The Specifications and Drawings were prepared to accommodate the
equipment furnished by the Named Manufacturers and all motor
01430-4 11/2017
DEP 12/16/2016
1610
horsepower, connecting pipe sizes, equipment dimensions, etc., shown

are based on the best information available at the time of design.
2. If proposed "or equal" equipment is different in dimensions, horsepower
requirements, pipe connection sizes or other material characteristics
from that provided for in the Contract Documents, and such difference
is not the result of changes in design conditions or concept ordered by
the Engineer, then the Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing
of all properly sized connecting piping, motor starters, motor control
centers, and electrical wiring and connections, and all other Work
required to properly install the equipment in complete operating
condition.
3. Any necessary redesign resulting from any proposed “or equal” shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval, along with the submission of
substantiating information in support of the proposal.
4. The cost of all such revisions shall be considered to be included in the
bid price(s) on the Contractor’s Bid Schedule of Prices.
5. Without any increase in cost to the City, the Contractor shall be
responsible for and pay all costs in connection with any proposed “or
equal,” including, without limitation, inspections and testing of
equipment or materials submitted for review prior to the Contractor's
purchase thereof, whether or not the Engineer approves the proposed
“or equal.”
F. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for
damages by reason of the time taken by the Engineer in considering an “or
equal” proposed by the Contractor or by reason of the failure of the Engineer to
approve a substitution proposed by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
01430-5 11/2017
DEP 12/16/2016
1611
01430-6 11/2017
DEP 12/16/2016
1612
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01432 – CONTRACTOR’S WORK QUALITY
SECTION 01432
Contractor’s Work Quality
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Contractor’s Quality Assurance / Quality Control Requirements
B. Experience and Qualifications of Supply and Service Companies
C. Quality of Materials, Equipment and Work
D. Defective Work, Equipment or Materials
E. Welding Certification and Welding Inspection
F. Inspection and Testing of Concrete
G. Torquing Procedures
H. Leakage Tests
I. Contractor's Surveyor
J. Field Measurements
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work of this Section
and all costs thereof shall be included in the lump sum price bid for the
Contract, unless otherwise specified in the Detailed Specifications.
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. Experience and Qualifications of Supply and Service Companies: The
Contractor shall not enter into any subcontracts or agreements for the
furnishing of supplies or services without DEP approval as required under the
Standard Construction Contract.
B. Quality of Materials, Equipment and Work
1. All materials, fixtures, fittings, supplies, and equipment furnished
under this Contract shall be new, of standard first grade quality, of the
best workmanship, correctly designed, and be intended for the use for
which they are offered. Materials or equipment which, in the opinion
of the Engineer, are inferior or of a lower grade than indicated,
specified or required, or are obsolete, will not be accepted.
2. All Work of assembly, installation, and construction shall be done in a
neat, first class, and workmanlike manner. If the quality of the
material, fixtures, fittings, supplies, equipment or work required by the
Drawings does not agree with that required by the Specifications, the
01432-1 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1613
better quality shall be supplied. In asking for prices on, or placing

orders for, materials, fixtures, fittings, supplies, and equipment
intended for use or installation under this Contract, the Contractor
shall provide the manufacturer or dealer with such complete
information from these Specifications as may in any case be necessary.
In every case, it shall quote in full to each such manufacturer or dealer
the text of this subparagraph, as well as the text of such other portions
of the Specifications, as are appropriate.
3. At all times while work under this Contract is being performed, the
Engineer shall have access to all parts of the Contractor's or
manufacturers' plants or other locations where the forgings, plates,
materials, fixtures, fittings, supplies, or any other articles required
under this Contract are manufactured, assembled, tested, or inspected.
The Engineer shall be permitted to witness any or all of these
operations as the Engineer may deem necessary to determine that all
work is being performed in accordance with the Specifications and the
approved shop drawings. The cost, if any, of providing such access
shall be considered part of the normal expense of conducting business
and therefore non-reimbursable.
4. The Engineer shall be furnished with full facilities for inspecting all
Work and ascertaining that it is being done strictly in accordance with
the requirements of the Specifications, Drawings, and the intent of this
Contract.
5. The Contractor shall provide a suitable space for the Engineer and the
Engineer’s authorized representatives conveniently located near that
part of each plant where materials or equipment to be furnished under
this Contract are being manufactured, assembled, or shop tested. Each
space shall be furnished with facilities for the making and the keeping
of records and correspondence. The reasonable use of a photocopier,
telephone, and fax shall be provided, as required by the Engineer.
Long distance communications shall be made using DEP telephone
cards.
6. Inspection of the Work by the Engineer is made solely for the benefit
of the City. The inspection of the Work shall not relieve the Contractor
of any of its obligations to fulfill the Contract as herein prescribed, and
defective Work shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s sole
expense.
C. Defective Work, Equipment or Materials
1. Any defective or imperfect Work, equipment, or materials furnished
by the Contractor which is discovered before the Substantial
Completion of the Work, or during a warranty period, shall be
removed immediately even though it may have been overlooked by the
01432-2 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1614
Engineer and approved for payment. The Contractor shall repair such
defect, without compensation, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
2. Unsuitable materials and equipment may be rejected, notwithstanding
that such defective Work, materials and equipment may have been
previously overlooked by the Engineer and accepted or approved for
payment.
3. If any workmanship, materials or equipment shall be rejected by the
Engineer as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Specifications or
Drawings, the Contractor shall promptly replace such materials and
equipment with acceptable materials and equipment at no additional
cost to the City. Equipment or materials rejected by the Engineer shall
be tagged as such and shall be immediately removed from the site.
4. The Engineer may order tests of imperfect or damaged Work
equipment, or materials to determine the required functional capability
for possible acceptance, if there is no other reason for rejection. The
cost of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor, and the nature,
tester, extent and supervision of the tests will be as determined by the
Engineer. If the results of the tests indicate that the required functional
capability of the Work, equipment, or material was not impaired, the
Work, equipment or materials may be deemed acceptable, in the
discretion of the Engineer. If the results of such tests reveal that the
required functional capability of the questionable Work, equipment or
materials has been impaired, then such Work, equipment or materials
shall be deemed imperfect and shall be replaced. The Contractor may
elect to replace the imperfect Work, equipment or material in lieu of
performing the tests.
5. If, in the making of any test, it is ascertained by the Commissioner that
the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, the
Contractor will be notified thereof, and it will be directed to refrain
from delivering said material or equipment, or to promptly remove it
from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable material
without cost to the City. Upon rejection of any material or equipment
submitted as the equivalent of that specifically named in the Contract,
the Contractor shall immediately proceed to furnish the named
material or equipment.
D. Welding Certification and Welding Inspection
1. For work performed within NYC limits, all field welding required
under this Contract shall be performed by New York City certified
welders in accordance with the latest rules of the New York Board of
Standards and Appeals (BS & A) and the current provisions of the
New York Building Code. Additional certification requirements are as
follows:
01432-3 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1615
a. Certification for Welding – For all field- and shop-welding, the

following welding qualification provisions shall apply:
i. For all field welding, all required permits and safety plans
shall be in place and adhered to.
ii. For all shop welding: All welding shall be performed in
accordance with the relevant work-specific requirements
in the Specifications and Drawings.
iii. If existing certification is not approved or not submitted,
then the welders/welding shop/tack welders must be
qualified in accordance with the above procedures and
tests, as administered by an inspection agency approved
by the Engineer. All costs associated with the required
tests for certification and/or retests, if any, shall be borne
by the Contractor. The Division of Design Services of the
Bureau of Engineering Design and Construction shall be
given a notice of not less than five business days prior to
such tests and may elect to witness any or all of these
tests. All costs associated with witnessing these tests
shall born by the City
b. Any deviation from the above shall not be permitted without a
written waiver from the Engineer or his designee.
2. For work performed outside NYC limits, all welding, including
welder certification, shall be performed in accordance with the
requirements of AWS D1, ASME IX (and the applicable construction
code), or the New York State Construction Manual, as applicable and
as approved by the Engineer.
3. Welding inspection in New York City shall be in accordance with the
latest rules of the New York City Building Code. Additionally, for
welding inspection in New York City and outside of City limits the
following shall apply:
a. All welds shall be inspected visually in accordance with
Section V of the ASME Code;
b. All stainless steel partial penetration groove welds shall be
inspected and approved by means of Liquid Penetrant
Examination (PT) in accordance with Appendix 8 of Section
VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code. Any welds failing the
inspection shall be made good and re-inspected by PT;
c. All carbon steel partial penetration groove welds shall be
inspected and approved by means of Magnetic Particle
Examination (MT) in accordance with Appendix 6 of Section
VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Code. Any welds failing the
inspection shall be made good and re-inspected by MT;
01432-4 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1616
d. On full penetration welds, both the root pass and the final
weldment shall be inspected by means of MT or PT as
applicable;
e. Unless otherwise approved, inspection of welds shall be
conducted by an inspection agency approved by DEP;
f. Unless waived by the City, all full penetration welds shall be
inspected by Radiographic Examination (RT) in accordance
with ASME Code, Section VIII, Division I, Paragraph UW-51;
g. The Division of Design Services of the DEP Bureau of
Engineering Design and Construction may elect to witness any
or all of the welding inspection. Notice shall be given to the
Bureau not less than five (5) business days prior to any welding
and inspection of those items specifically designated by the
Engineer. All costs associated with the welding inspection by
the DEP inspectors and any additional testing required by DEP
shall be borne by the City.
E. Inspection and Testing of Concrete
1. Inspection and testing of concrete shall be in accordance with the
relevant work-specific requirements in the Contract.
F. Leakage Tests
1. All new pipelines and appurtenant structures and all new liquid
containing structures shall be field tested for leakage after installation
in accordance with the relevant work-specific requirements in the
Contract.
G. Contractor's Surveyor
1. The General Contractor shall retain the services of a licensed land
surveyor, registered in the State of New York, to perform survey work
including but not limited to establishing line and grade, in advance of
the construction; and to perform other surveying services for the work
included under the Contract. . The surveyor shall be subject to the
approval of the Commissioner. Survey drawings shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
2. The Contractor shall erect, install and maintain survey platforms,
targets, benchmarks and similar facilities to be used by the Engineer in
the performance of its inspection services; shall perform all survey
work required before, during and after construction; and shall comply
with the requirements specified under Article 9 - Surveys, of the
General Conditions.
H. Field Measurements
01432-5 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1617
1. The Contractor shall take all necessary measurements in the field to

determine the exact dimensions for all work and verify all pertinent
data and dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings.

A. The Contractor shall establish and execute a Quality Assurance/Quality
Control (QA/QC) plan for the services and equipment which will be supplied
under this Contract. The plan shall provide the Contractor with adequate
measures for verification and conformance to defined requirements by its
personnel and all subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and vendors. The
Engineer’s review and acceptance of the Contractor’s QA/QC plan shall not
relieve the Contractor from any of its obligation for the performance of the
Work. The Contractor’s assigned QA/QC personnel are subject to the
Engineer’s review and continued acceptance. No Work covered by the
QA/QC plan shall start until the Engineer’s written acceptance of the
Contractor’s QA/QC plan has been obtained.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 15 days after the commence work date given in the Notice to Proceed
(NTP), the Contractor shall provide its QA/QC plan to the Engineer for
approval. At a minimum, the plan should consist of the following quality
elements:
1. Responsibilities
2. Management and Production Instructions
3. Material Control
4. Marking and Material Identification
5. Set-Up and Operational Procedures
6. Non-Conformances
7. Painting
B. Additionally, when required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the
following information prior to his entering into a supply or service
subcontracts:
1. Contract number, supplies or services to be provided and a general
description of the proposed item(s), such as trade name, type, etc.
2. The name and address of the manufacturer or service company and the
location of the plant at which supplies will be manufactured and tested
as required, or at which the services will be performed.
3. Experimental and test data required to support the claimed
performance of the supplies.
01432-6 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1618
4. A description of the testing plant, including the hydraulic, electrical

and other facilities, in sufficient detail to show that the plant is
adequately equipped for performing the tests, if such testing is
required.
5. Any additional information that the Engineer may deem necessary in
order to determine the ability of the supply or service company to
produce the item as called for by the Specifications.
END OF SECTION
01432-7 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1619
01432-8 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
1620
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01433 – WITNESS SHOP TESTING AND QUALITY
ASSURANCE INSPECTION
SECTION 01433
Witness Shop Testing and Quality Assurance Inspection
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Witness Shop Tests
B. Quality Assurance Inspection
C. Inspection Expenses
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work of this Section and
all costs thereof shall be included in the lump sum price bid for the Contract.

A. Detailed Specification 01432 - Contractor's Work Quality
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Witness Shop Tests
1. See Table 1 - List of Equipment Scheduled for Witness Shop Testing,
2. Witness Shop Testing Procedures: Witness shop testing of equipment
shall be performed in accordance with the procedures described in
Article 12 of the General Conditions and in the Specifications for the
equipment listed in Table 1.
3. Advance Notice for Witness Shop Testing: The Contractor shall notify
the Engineer at least forty-five (45) calendar days in advance of all
scheduled witness shop tests, whether conducted within or outside the
continental United States.
4. City’s Right to Witness Shop Testing of Additional Items: In
accordance with General Conditions Article 12, the City reserves the
right to require witness shop tests for items that have not been
designated as such in the Contract Documents.
5. Contractor’s Presence during Witness Shop Testing: The Contractor
shall be present by a duly authorized representative at the manufacturing
and testing facilities during times of witness shop testing.
B. Quality Assurance (QA) Inspection
1. City’s Right to QA Inspection of Contract Items
01433- 1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1621
a. There are currently no items subject to Quality Assurance

Inspection for this Contract. However, the City reserves the
right, as may be deemed necessary, to perform QA inspections
for any item in the Contract Documents.
b. In the event that the City exercises its right to perform QA
inspection of any item, the City will issue a notice to the
Contractor that identifies the items and provide direction to the
Contractor to facilitate the inspections. This notice will be
followed by formal inspection instructions for the QA
inspection of each item.
c. The cost for QA inspection personnel designated by the
Engineer and the expenses incurred during their inspection
activities shall not be borne by the Contractor unless indicated
otherwise in the Detailed and/or General Specifications
Sections.
d. For all equipment, the Contractor shall be subject to all
requirements described for the manufacture of equipment in the
General Specifications and Detailed Specifications of the
Contract. Regardless of the level of QA inspection activities
required by the City, the Contractor shall be responsible to
submit, at a minimum, all documentation and samples that are
identified as being required in the applicable Divisions of the
General Specification and Detailed Specification.
2. In the event that the City exercises its right to perform QA inspection of
any item, the following are Requirements for Inspection of Equipment
Designated for QA Inspection by the City:
a. Contractor’s Responsibility to Facilitate QA Inspections
i. The Contractor is responsible for facilitating the
inspection process and shall coordinate the same by
contacting the Chief of the Division of Design Services
(DDS), DEP Bureau of Engineering Design and
Construction, 96-05 Horace Harding Expressway, 5th
Floor Low Rise, Corona, New York.
ii. For items designated by the Engineer to be inspected, the
following statement shall appear on the face of purchase
orders and shop drawings issued by the Contractor for
work to be incorporated in this Contract. The Contractor
shall also instruct the approved manufacturers or dealers
to place this statement on purchase orders and shop
drawings issued by them for such work.
(a) “This order is subject to inspection by the Bureau of
Engineering Design and Construction of the
01433- 2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1622
Department of Environmental Protection of the City

of New York; and shall not be processed until
inspection instructions have been issued by the
Engineer. Please contact the Chief of the Division
of Design Services, Bureau of Engineering Design
and Construction, 96-05 Horace Harding
Expressway, Corona, New York 11368.”
iii. For items designated for QA inspection, the Contractor
shall submit copies of each purchase order to the
Engineer when placed with the manufacturer or dealer.
Copies of preliminary/initial shop drawings, with detailed
assembly drawings and bill of materials, shall be
provided to the DDS as soon as they are available, or
have been sent to the Engineer for review. Upon receipt
of the purchase order and shop drawings, the DDS will
issue Inspection Instructions to the Contractor (a copy of
which will also be sent to the manufacturer/supplier.)
iv. For items designated by the City for QA inspection, the
Contractor shall not proceed with the work until the
inspection instructions have been issued. Once the receipt
of the inspection instructions has been acknowledged and
verified, the Contractor shall provide advance notice of
readiness for inspection at the required witness points. A
minimum notice of two (2) weeks shall be provided for
items of domestic manufacture and eight (8) weeks for
items of foreign manufacture. The Inspection Instructions
will indicate what specific phases of manufacture, quality
assurance inspections, and/or tests that the DDS
inspectors intend to witness.
v. The Contractor shall provide DDS with the approved
shop drawings as soon as possible after receiving
approval from the Engineer. The DDS reserves the right
to issue revisions/clarifications to the original Inspection
Instructions based on the approved drawings, and/or as
deemed necessary.
vi. The requirements for inspection are in addition to and
separate from any specified witness shop testing and shall
in no way affect procedures or requirements with respect
to the same.
vii. The Engineer may reject any item or material if
manufactured prior to inspection or where the
requirements specified in the Inspection Instructions are
not followed.
01433- 3 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1623
b. Selection of Inspection Agencies

i. The Engineer will select and designate all persons, firms
or corporations to make or witness each and every and all
inspections, tests or analyses, with or without reports
unless indicated otherwise in the Specifications.
c. Submittal of Certified Material Test Reports
i. When no direct test, inspection, or analysis of materials,
products or equipment is required to be performed at the
point of manufacture, and when the Engineer so requires,
the Contractor shall furnish authoritative evidence in the
form of Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs) that the
materials, products, or equipment to be used in the work
have been manufactured and tested in conformity with
the applicable material specification. The CMTRs shall
indicate the results of physical tests and chemical
analyses made directly on the same heat or heats from
which any and all materials are furnished under this
Contract. The costs of furnishing CMTRs and the results
of tests or analyses shall be borne by the Contractor and
shall be deemed to be included in the overall price bid for
the Contract.
ii. When materials or manufactured products comprise such
small quantities that it is not practicable to make physical
tests or chemical analyses directly on the materials or
products furnished, a certificate stating the results of such
tests or analyses of similar materials or products which
were concurrently produced may, at the discretion of the
Engineer, be considered as the basis for the acceptance of
such materials or manufactured products.
d. Contractor to Maintain Traceability during Stages of
Fabrication and Testing
i. The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain
traceability of most equipment components such as
castings, structural members, plate, forgings, piping,
machinings, etc., and all other articles required under this
Contract during all stages of fabrication and testing.
e. Contractor Responsible for all Tests
i. The chemical and physical tests, including the optional
tests, called for in the ASTM, federal and other
specifications cited in this Contract shall be made as
specified, unless otherwise approved.
01433- 4 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1624
f. Testing Compliance
i. Contractor’s testing personnel shall make the necessary
inspections and tests. The reports thereof shall be in such
form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance
with the Specifications and shall indicate all the analyses
and/or test data and interpreted results thereof.
g. Contractor to Provide Engineer with Advance Notice of
Sampling and Testing
i. The Engineer shall be informed in advance of all times of
sampling and testing, and shall witness these operations if
the Engineer so desires.
h. Testing Performed in Engineer’s Presence
i. When requested or specified, testing and examinations of
all kinds and any weighing required under Contract shall
be done in the presence of the Engineer during the normal
eight hour shift, unless otherwise approved, and adequate
advance notice of intent to schedule tests shall be given to
the Engineer.
i. Submittal of Samples of Materials for Testing
i. When required or requested by the Engineer, specified
samples of materials, equipment, and appliances,
identified in a manner acceptable to the Engineer shall be
submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
The samples shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of
the time when the materials are to be used so that
rejections thereof will not delay the approved
construction schedules. Approved samples will be labeled
and dated.
ii. As directed and specified below, the Contractor shall be
required to furnish and deliver to the DEP Bureau of
Engineering Design and Construction Quality Assurance
Chemical Laboratory located at 96-05 Horace Harding
Expressway, Corona, New York 11368-5107, or any
other designated location, samples of metals from
vendors plants engaged in the manufacture of mechanical
equipment and structural components.
iii. A minimum of two (2) unmachined material samples of
sufficient size shall be supplied from each material heat
lot for the components identified as requiring samples for
independent verification of both chemical and physical
test results. Material samples shall be provided in
accordance with the applicable material specifications
01433- 5 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1625
(ASTM, etc.) and shall be provided with unique product

markings in the form of a stamped-on heat number, etc.
that is traceable to the applicable CMTR.
iv. Samples shall be taken in the presence of the Engineer
and at the location point determined by the Engineer,
from material, equipment, or appliances at the work-site
or at the manufacturing or testing facilities of the
Contractor's vendors or Sub-vendors during the normal
eight-hour shift, unless otherwise approved.
v. Approved samples will be retained for record purposes at
a location designated by the Engineer.
j. Contractor to Provide Engineer with Calibrated Instruments
i. The Contractor shall provide, for use by the Engineer, all
measuring devices, instruments, and other appliances that
the Engineer may deem necessary to carry out the
designated inspection of the work. All such instruments
and devices shall be calibrated and shall bear the
calibration marks, stamps, or seals of an approved testing
body or agency with reference standards traceable to
those held by the National Institute of Standards and
Technology, or other approved standard. The Contractor
shall maintain all instruments and devices in good
working order and shall recalibrate them when so
directed by the Engineer. The cost, if any, of providing
and maintaining such equipment shall be considered part
of the normal expense of conducting business and
therefore non-reimbursable.
k. Contractor to Provide Utilities, Equipment, and Services to
Assist Testing
i. Electric power, instruments, gages, threaded fasteners,
bulkheads, blind flanges, gaskets, piping, equipment,
materials, tools, other appurtenances, services necessary
for the various specified shop and field tests, scales for
weighing, and assistance for measuring or weighing any
of the materials shall be provided by the Contractor.
l. Contractor’s Responsibility for Testing Laboratory
i. The Contractor shall provide the services of approved
testing laboratories to perform such physical and
chemical tests and such examinations as required, if the
manufacturer's testing facilities are not approved. In such
a case, the Contractor shall provide and prepare test
specimens and promptly submit reports of all tests.
01433- 6 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1626
m. Contractor’s Responsibility for Reports

i. The Engineer shall be provided with detailed daily and
weekly schedules of plant operations pertaining to work
on this contract, sufficiently in advance of such
operations, so that adequate preparation can be made for
inspecting the work. The sequence of operations for the
complete manufacturing process as well as periodic
production status reports shall also be provided. Any
work done without such sufficient advance notice to the
Engineer is subject to rejection.
n. Approval of Work Subject to Contractor’s Inspection Reports
i. Completion of all requests for the approval of completed
work shall be accompanied by the Contractor's own
inspection report of such work, submitted on the form or
forms previously approved and with the applicable
approved shop drawings. Any equipment part which has
been manufactured and/or assembled using uninspected
or unapproved parts or materials shall be disassembled,
as ordered by the Engineer, in order that he/she may
determine the acceptability of such parts or materials by
means of any tests or examinations he/she may require.
The cost of such ordered disassembly and subsequent
reassembly shall be borne by the Contractor.
o. Submittal of Reports
i. Six (6) copies of the reports shall be submitted and
authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the
Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any
material or equipment.
p. No Shipping before Inspection
i. The Contractor shall comply with the foregoing before
shipping any material.
ii. Upon completion of the designated QA inspection
activities at the facility where the inspection has
occurred, the Contractor shall obtain from the Engineer a
formal release from inspection indicating that no further
inspection is required prior to shipping.
C. Inspection Expenses
1. Witness Shop Testing
a. The cost of all scheduled witness shop test inspections shall be
included in each Contractor’s Lump Sum Bid for Contract Item
01433- 7 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1627
1. Scheduled witness shop tests are those required by the

various specification sections for materials and equipment.
b. For the equipment to be witness shop tested, whether of foreign
or domestic manufacture, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the costs for two (2) employees of the Engineer or City
including all transportation, food, lodging and miscellaneous
expenses for each witness shop test.
c. When witness shop tests not specifically called for in the
Detailed Specifications are required by the Engineer, any
additional costs resulting therefrom shall be paid by the change
order procedure.
1.05 ATTACHMENTS
A. Table 1 – List of Equipment Scheduled for Witness Shop Testing

END OF SECTION
01433- 8 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1628
TABLE 1
DEL-260E ELECTRICAL
LIST OF EQUIPMENT SCHEDULED FOR WITNESS SHOP TESTING
Specification Reference Equipment Scheduled for Witness

Section No. Section Title Shop Testing
16231E Standby Power Standby Generator
16271E Dry Type Transformers 13.8kV Dry Type transformer
16361 Medium Voltage Load Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
Interrupter Switchgear
16430E Low Voltage Switchgear Low voltage switchgears
16482 Motor Control Centers Motor Control Center
16496 Automatic Transfer Switches Automatic Transfer Switch
PAGE 1 OF 2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1629
PAGE 2 OF 2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
1630
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01511 - TEMPORARY WATER AND SANITARY
SERVICES
SECTION 01511
Temporary Water and Sanitary Services
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Temporary Sanitary Service
B. Temporary Water Service
1.02 PAYMENT
A. All costs associated with the work of this Section shall be included in the
Contract Allowance item E-A-3, as described in Detailed Specification 01270
– Measurement and Payment.
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. The Electrical Contractor (the “Contractor”) shall provide and maintain
temporary water and sanitary services for the use of Engineer’s and
Contractor’s personnel on the site. In addition, the Contractor shall provide all
water required to perform the Work of this Contract.
B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary water and sanitary
services at the site during construction in compliance with all applicable State,
City and local regulations.
C. The temporary sanitary services electrical power should be fed from the
Resident Engineer’s trailer power panel.
D. The Contractor shall remove temporary services at the completion of the Work.
1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY SERVICES

A. Toilet facilities, shall be furnished and installed for use by the Engineer’s and
Contractor’s personnel. Toilet fixtures shall be furnished, installed and
maintained in satisfactory operating condition. The Contractor shall keep the
temporary toilet fixtures in a clean and sanitary manner.
B. Enclosures for the toilet fixtures shall be erected and maintained in a clean and
sanitary manner.
C. Heating and lighting for the enclosures shall be furnished, installed and
maintained by the Contractor.
D. Restroom Trailer:
• Manufacturer: CALLAHEAD.
• Model: Neptune with 150 gallon potable water tank.
01511-1 11/2017
DEP 10/5/2016
1631
TEMPORARY WATER AND SANITARY SERVICES
• Description: Restroom trailer shall contain two private bathroom stalls

for women, one private stall plus three urinals for men, and two sinks.
Trailer’s exterior shall be equipped with outdoor lighting. Trailer’s
interior shall be equipped with lighting & heater.
• 150 gallon potable water tank shall be installed and connected to
restroom trailer to supply water for hand washing.
1.05 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICES:

A. The Contractor shall extend branch piping with outlets located so City water is
available by hoses with threaded connections. Temporary pipe insulation shall
be provided to prevent freezing.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing water meters and appropriate
backflow preventers where necessary to protect against contamination of the
City water supply.
C. The Contractor shall provide sufficient potable quality drinking water for all
persons employed by the Contractor at the project site.
END OF SECTION
01511-2 11/2017
DEP 10/5/2016
1632
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01513 – TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION 01513
Temporary Electrical System
PART 1 GENERAL

A. The temporary electrical system shall be furnished, installed, operated and
maintained in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the Contract
Drawings.
B. The temporary electrical system shall supply power and light as required for the
construction related activities. The temporary electrical system shall be
complete and shall include all auxiliary equipment necessary to support the
construction.
C. The following index of this Section is included for convenience:
Article Title Page
01513-
PART 1 GENERAL .......................................................................................1
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ....................................................................1
1.02 PAYMENT ......................................................................................2
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS ...................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .........................................................2
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................................2
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................3
1.07 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................4
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE ...............................................................4
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .................................4
PART 2 PRODUCTS.....................................................................................5
2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE CONNECTION ....................................5
2.02 RACEWAYS AND WIRING..........................................................5
2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES .......................................6
2.04 GROUNDING .................................................................................6
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................................................6
3.01 INSTALLATION ............................................................................6
3.02 OPERATION ...................................................................................7
01513-1 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1633
3.03 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................7

3.04 REMOVAL ......................................................................................7
1.02 PAYMENT
A. Payment for electrical energy charges for the temporary power for the
Engineer’s field office trailer and restroom trailer shall be made under
Allowance E-A-3 of the Electrical Contract, as specified in Section 01270 –
Measurement and Payment.
B. Except for the Allowance specified herein, all costs for the work under this
Section shall be included in the Lump Sum price bid for the Contract E-LS-1
of the Electrical Contract, as specified in Section 01270 – Measurement and
Payment, except as otherwise specified. However, any Contractor requiring the
use of the temporary electrical facilities before 7:00 A.M. or after 3:30 P.M.,
from Monday through Friday or at any time on Saturdays, Sundays or holidays
shall bear the cost of energizing and/or de-energizing the system, and if more
than one Contractor uses the system during such periods, prorate the costs
accordingly.

A. General Specification 16061 -- Grounding.
B. Detailed Specification 01270 – Measurement and Payment.
1.04 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

A. Temporary electrical system shall comply with the latest applicable provisions
and recommendations of the following:
1. Electrical Code of the City of New York.
2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
3. National Electrical Safety Code.
4. Local Codes
5. Local Utility Requirements
6. OSHA Regulations
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Electrical Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the Utility
and shall provide a temporary electrical service point connection. Connecting
lines and service supply shall be of sufficient capacity to supply all temporary
light and power required on the site.
B. Arrangements shall be made with the Utility immediately after notice to
commence work in accordance with these Specifications.
01513-2 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1634
C. The service shall have provisions for meter connections for each Contractor on
the worksite and the Engineer’s field office. The service shall be branched and
metered using circuit breakers or fused switches and meters.
1. The distribution from each meter to the Contractor’s field office and
shops at the site shall be the responsibility of each Contractor.
2. The distribution from one (1) meter to Engineer’s field office shall be
the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
3. The distribution from one (1) meter to the construction temporary light,
power, and security system shall be the responsibility of the Electrical
Contractor.
D. Each Contractor shall be responsible for making arrangements with the Utility
to have a sealed meter installed and for payment of same.
E. The energy charges for each Contractor’s field office and shop usage shall be
the responsibility of each Contractor.
F. Energy charges associated with the work areas power and lighting and the
security site lighting shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
Energy charges associated with the Engineer’s field office and restroom trailer
shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
G. Each Contractor requiring additional temporary power and light, beyond that
provided under by the Electrical Contractor as specified herein, shall arrange
with the utility for such additional temporary power and light and shall bear the
costs of all material and ancillary equipment necessary. Removal of such
additional temporary power and light shall be at the expense of each Contractor.
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all systems and circuits in accordance
with the Electrical Code of the City of New York, NFPA 70, the National
Electrical Safety Code, local codes, utility codes, and OSHA requirements.
B. The temporary electrical system shall be provided in accordance with the
following design requirements:
1. Each Contractor, restroom trailer, and the Engineer’s trailer shall have
a separate branch.
2. A separate branch shall supply the work area lighting, power, and
security. Receptacles (GFI type) shall be located throughout the work
area. Receptacle connected equipment shall be suitable for 120 volt
operation. Operating input shall not exceed 1500 volt-amperes.
Illumination levels shall be as required by OSHA.
3. Security site lighting circuits shall supply a system of security lighting
for the field office complex(s), Contractors’ staging areas, and all
01513-3 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1635
parking areas. Unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings, the

system shall be arranged to provide a minimum lighting intensity of 5
foot-candles in these areas.
4. A total of three (3) 200 amperes and three (3) 100 ampere meter pans
and fused disconnect switches rated for 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire
shall be furnished, installed and wired for the above.
5. See Detailed Specification 16020E – Temporary Electrical System for
schematic diagram for Temporary Electrical System Arrangement.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Contractor shall submit shop drawings, shop drawings and material
specifications for the approval of the Engineer and the utility in accordance with
the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. One line diagram representing the power distribution for the temporary
system.
2. Location plan indicating the major distribution equipment.
3. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts for the products proposed for use.
4. Panel loading, voltage drop, short circuit and other calculations, as
required.
5. Security lighting layout.

A. The temporary lighting system shall provide lighting for access to and egress
from the Work and for safe and expeditious construction within designated
enclosed areas of the structure or structures.
B. All temporary electrical system equipment and components shall be of recent
manufacture and of proper working order for the intended purpose.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain in proper working order and repair the
temporary electrical system.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall modify, extend, and relocate the temporary
electrical system components, as needed, to support construction activities
E. The Electrical Contractor shall remove the temporary electrical system when
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The temporary electrical equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in
accordance with these Specifications and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
01513-4 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1636
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE CONNECTION

A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a service entrance and distribution
center at the service point. Service entrance and distribution equipment shall be
in accordance with the following:
1. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 3R.
2. Meter pans shall be suitable for revenue meters furnished by the utility.
3. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type. Circuit breakers shall
be equipped with lockable handles.
4. Disconnect switches shall be fused type with current limiting fuses.
Disconnect switches shall be equipped with padlocking features.
5. All equipment shall be approved by the Utility.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall also provide the following other equipment at
the service point:
1. Eight foot high, steel chain link fence with gate shall enclose the service
entrance and distribution center. The fence shall be arranged so to
permit a minimum clearance distance of 6 feet between the fence and
the equipment.
2. The fence shall include baked enamel, 14 by 10 inch caution signs. The
signs shall read, “DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP – OUT”. The
signs shall be bolted to the fence on each side of the fence and on the
main gate.
3. A 4/0 AWG ground grid consisting of four ground rods, one at each
corner, shall be provided. Maximum ground resistance shall be 10
ohms. Grounding shall be in accordance with Article 2.04.
2.02 RACEWAYS AND WIRING

A. All conductors shall be 600 volt, enclosed in properly sized raceways or be
routed aerially using Type AC, MC or TC cable.
B. Conductors shall be provided for all devices, suitably sized for the intended
purpose. Conductors installed in raceways shall be single conductor type
THHN/THWN or equal to be approved by the Engineer and the utility. Armored
cable, Type AC, metal-clad cable, Type MC or power and control tray cable,
Type TC shall also be permitted.
C. Raceways where used shall be suitably sized for the conductors. Raceways
shall be rigid metallic type.
D. Aerially routed cables shall be messenger supported from solid wood poles or
other recognized means. Messenger shall be high strength galvanized steel.
01513-5 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1637
E. Poles shall have a class suitable for the installation in accordance with the
National Electrical Safety Code and the utility and shall be thirty feet length
minimum. Poles shall be guyed at angle or corner runs and when eccentrically
loaded.
2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES

A. Receptacles (GFI type) shall be grounded type, 120 volt, 20 ampere suitable for
hand tools such as drills, hammers and grinders.
B. Lighting lamps shall be LED equivalent to 100 watt installed in suitable lamp
holders. Security lighting lamps shall be LED equivalent to 400 watt high
pressure sodium installed within a floodlight type fixture suitable to illuminate
the intended area.
C. Switches, breakers and miscellaneous equipment shall be suitable for the
intended purpose, with voltage, current and short circuit interrupting ratings as
required for the circuits.
2.04 GROUNDING
A. The temporary systems shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements
of General Specification 16061 - Grounding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Temporary wiring systems shall be installed without interfering with the work
of other contractors.
B. The ground grid cable shall be installed in loop fashion completely around and
outside the service point fence. The fence and distribution equipment shall be
connected to the grid at a minimum of two locations.
C. The temporary lighting system shall be installed progressively in structures as
the designated areas are enclosed or as lighting becomes necessary because of
partial enclosure. Lamps shall be installed to provide an even distribution of
illumination over the work areas.
D. Receptacles shall be installed in such a manner so as to reach any point in the
work areas with an extension cord not to exceed 40 feet in length.
E. Security lighting shall be installed on poles to illuminate the staging and parking
areas.
F. Aerial conductors shall be installed at a minimum height of 14 feet above
finished grade. When conductors cannot be routed at the proper height or where
it will interfere with plant operations or construction activities, conductors shall
be provided in rigid steel conduit and installed underground.
01513-6 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1638
3.02 OPERATION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall keep the temporary power and lighting system
operational each working day from 7:00 A.M. to 3:30 P.M., from Monday to
Friday inclusive for the duration of the Contract. This requirement includes
provision of one electrician available on-call at all times for incidental
modifications of the temporary electrical system as directed by the Engineer or
to maintain the electrical equipment and power distribution systems at the Site.
Areas of the Work designated by the Engineer as requiring the use of the
temporary electrical system to function outside of the above hours shall be
energized continuously or as directed by the Engineer. These areas include
security lighting and the Engineer’s trailer complex.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
A. The temporary electrical system shall be maintained and repaired until it is no
longer required.
B. Lamps, fuses and other equipment shall be repaired and/or replaced, as
required.
3.04 REMOVAL
A. At the conclusion of the work, when directed by the Engineer, the temporary
system shall be removed by the Electrical Contractor in its entirety. The ground
surfaces and structures disturbed by the work shall be restored to their original
condition.
END OF SECTION
01513-7 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1639
01513-8 11/2017
DEP 5/4/2016
1640
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01520 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
FACILITIES
SECTION 01520
Temporary Construction Facilities
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Related Sections
B. Submittals
C. Allowance for Field Office
D. Engineer’s Field Office
E. Built-in Office Equipment
F. Security Systems for Engineer's Field Office
G. Movable Equipment
H. Utility Services
I. Office Location
J. Maintenance of Office
K. Disposition of office with equipment

A. Detailed Specification 01270 -- Measurement and Payment
B. Detailed Specification 01513 – Temporary Electrical System
1.03 ALLOWANCE FOR FIELD OFFICE

A. All costs associated with the work of this Section shall be included in the
Contract Allowance item E-A-3, as described in Detailed Specification 01270
– Measurement and Payment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Floor plan, square footage, location, and amenities of Engineer’s field trailer.
B. Data sheets for all electronic devices, movable equipment to be provided under
this section.
1.05 ENGINEER’S FIELD OFFICE

A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and maintain a rented trailer with
equipment as hereinafter specified. The trailer shall be placed at a location
determined by DEP, completely equipped and ready for the Engineer's use as a
field office within sixty (60) days after the Commissioner’s Notice to
Commence Work.
01520-1 11/2017
1641
FACILITIES
1. The Electrical Contractor shall obtain and pay for any necessary permits
for the office.
2. Services for the office shall be as hereinafter specified.
B. The office shall be at minimum 800 square feet of open space.
C. Materials
1. Exterior metal fully insulated walls and roof with a minimum of R-25
insulation.
2. Interior walls insulated with R-11 insulation for sound attenuation.
3. Ceiling height shall be 8’.
4. Completely weatherproofed and insulated.
5. Floor systems designed for 40 psf in addition to dead load.
6. Roof system designed for 35 psf in addition to dead load.
7. Exterior doors fully insulated (whole-unit U-factor less than 0.32,
greater than R-3.0) metal type with, aluminum thresholds, heavy duty
closers and vandal-proof locksets with keys meeting building code
requirements.
8. Low VOC Paints and sealants and floor coverings
9. Exterior walls and roof finished with a high SRI material, minimum
reflectivity of 0.65.
10. Interior doors solid wood with lock sets.
11. High-Performance Windows with a whole-unit U-factor less than 0.32
(greater than R-3.0)
12. Windows provided with adjustable blinds, operable sashes, screens,
storm sashes and all hardware such as that required for security.
13. Underside of trailers completely sealed and insulated with minimum of
R-19 insulation.
14. Resilient floor coverings with a minimum 20% recycled material
content.
15. Passive solar window awnings on South-facing and West-facing
windows.
D. HVAC
1. Ducted system with ducts concealed above the finish ceiling.
2. Sized to maintain the temperature in each room at 70 degrees Fahrenheit
(F) when the outside temperature is 0 degrees F and 75 degrees F when
the outside temperature is 100 degrees F.
3. Wall mounted heat/cool programmable thermostat.
01520-2 11/2017
1642
FACILITIES
4. Fire suppression system for all rooms.

E. Electrical
1. The Electrical system shall have capacity for all loads, and be an
armored cable system.
2. General interior lighting shall be light-emitting diodes with occupant or
sensors.
3. Emergency lights provided as required by code.
4. Receptacles provided as required by code.
5. Trailer and electrical system to be grounded.
6. Work shall be in accordance with Section 01513 – Temporary Electrical
System.
1.06 BUILT-IN OFFICE EQUIPMENT

A. The following items shall be within the office.
1. A wall type plan rack at least 42 inches wide.
2. One kitchenette unit consisting of a refrigerator as manufactured by the
Acme National Refrigeration Co., Inc., 19-26 Hazen Street, Astoria,
NY, Model No. RESY6y-30; or by the King Refrigerator Corp., 76-02
Woodhaven Blvd., Glendale, NY, Model No. K30Bs or equal. It shall
be installed where directed complete with electrical connections.
1.07 SECURITY SYSTEMS FOR ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE

A. The trailer shall be provided with an approved Fire, and Intrusion alarm system.
The alarm systems shall be connected via the telephone service in the trailer to
an approved central monitoring station so that continuous monitoring will be in
effect. The DEP will provide instructions and contact information for the
central monitoring station.
1. Fire System. In each of the smaller offices, heat detectors rated at 135oF
shall be located in the ceiling and as close to the middle of the room as
possible. The larger office(s) shall have a single unit that will detect both
heat and smoke. The fire system shall be wired directly to a central
control panel. Upon activation of the fire system, sirens with a steady
tone will sound the fire alert. All sirens will automatically shut down
and re-arm after fifteen minutes.
2. Intrusion Alarm System. Each opening (doors and windows) in the
entire office shall be protected so that if they are opened while the
system is activated, an alarm condition will result. Upon activation of
the intrusion system, sirens with a modulating tone will sound an alert.
All sirens will automatically shut down and re-arm after ten minutes.
01520-3 11/2017
1643
FACILITIES
a. A remote tamper proof turn off switch shall be installed on the

outside of the office at a location designated by the Engineer
so that the intrusion system can be shut down before entering
the field office. The remote turn off switch shall not affect the
fire system; turn off switches for these systems shall be located
as directed by DEP.
3. Control Equipment
a. All wiring shall be to be current standards being used in the
alarm industry and, where possible, all wires shall be hidden.
b. All contacts shall be recessed and moisture proof.
c. The single unit smoke and heat detectors shall be of a
photoelectric type that provide quick response to flaming and
smoldering fires and designed to permit easy entry of smoke
from any direction. The heat detector portion of this unit shall
be activated at 135oF. The combined unit will also have a LED
pulse located on the face of the unit to indicate that power is
on. NO RADIOACTIVE materials will be permitted in this
fire alarm sensor.
d. An 8-ohm siren will be provided. The siren will be installed
in a tamper proof steel siren box located on the exterior of the
office at least 10 feet above the top of the office roof.
i. The external siren shall be of 30-watt capacity with two
separate and distinct alarm signals for both warble and
continuous tone selections so as to differentiate between
fire and burglar alarm. It shall be Ademco Model No. 715
"Blaster" electronic siren in tamper proof cabinet or equal.
There shall be an amber strobe light attached on or
adjacent to the siren box, wired so that it is activated when
the siren is activated.
ii. The outside wiring shall be installed in protective seal
conduit.
e. Control panel shall be provided and installed in the field office.
The control panel shall be equipped with at least three
channels - one for fire, second for intrusion and third spare.
The control panel shall also have DC batteries that will supply
back-up power in the event that AC power is interrupted. Each
channel of the control panel will be wired directly to a digital
communicator. The control panel shall have one delay
entrance exit channel. The control panel and system shall be
a 12-volt system.
i. The control panel shall have indicating lights that indicate
the mode of the:
01520-4 11/2017
1644
FACILITIES
(a) Protective circuit

(b) Alarm memory
(c) AC power on
(d) Armed and a switch for bell/battery test and fire reset
f. The digital communicator shall be furnished and installed at a
location approved by DEP. It shall be of a type that will notify
the approved central station of the specific alarm condition
(fire or intrusion). The digital communicator will also inform
the approved central station of low power on the system. The
Electrical Contractor shall arrange through the telephone
company for the necessary interconnect equipment so that the
digital communicator may be connected to the telephone
service at the field office. The connection of the telephone
company shall have line seizure so that the outgoing signal
from the digital communicator cannot be interrupted. The
current standards used by approved central station regarding
"call back to verify" alarm conditions shall be employed.
i. The Electrical Contractor shall install a minimum of four
external floodlights to illuminate Engineer's office and
surrounding walkways. They shall be activated by a
photoelectric unit with a backup timer.
1.08 MOVEABLE EQUIPMENT

A. Office equipment and furnishings shall be provided. All furnishings and
equipment shall be new and unused. All furnished equipment shall be
periodically provided with consumable ancillary supplies such as: toner,
cartridges, paper and with maintenance / repair and servicing contracts for the
entire duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for a service
and repair contract with local representative of the dealer or manufacturer for
on-call, daily, on-Site service. The maintenance response time shall be not more
than 24 hours from the time of notification.
B. The following moveable equipment shall be furnished for the office:
1. As manufactured by the Hon Co., Newark, NJ, or the Cole Business
Furniture Co., 150 East 58th Street, New York, NY, or approved equal:
one (1) desk with lock, 72 inches by 36 inches, Style No. 7601 or No.
6195 respectively, black. Three (3) desks with locks, 42 inches by 30
inches, Style No. 8351 or 537 respectively. Four swivel chairs with
arms upholstered with black elastic vinyl, Style No. C26 or No.
9825NE. One (1) steno chair, black, Style No. 366 or No. 9810NE.
Three (3) side chairs, black, Style No. 046 or No. 9626 respectively.
One (1) book case 41 inches H x 34 inches W x 1'-5/8" D, Style No.
542A or No. 342 respectively. One (1) fireproof, 4-drawer legal size
filing cabinet with lock, Style No. 94CP or F49 respectively. Three (3)
01520-5 11/2017
1645
FACILITIES
metal filing cabinets with lock, four drawer legal size, Style No. 314CP
or No. 1904 respectively.
2. Five (5) waste paper baskets 15-1/4 inches x 11-1/4 inches x 20 inches
as manufactured by Rubbermaid, Model No. K6-2957-BK, or by
Lustrow, Division of Borden, Columbus, OH, Model No. B-W44, or
approved equal.
3. One (1) drafting table, 37-1/2 inches x 60 inches as manufactured by
Plan Hold, 17621 Von Karman Ave., Irvine, CA, Model No. 350T-60,
or by Anco Wood Specialties, Inc., 71-02 80th Street, New York, NY,
No. 602F, or approved equal.
4. Two (2) dry chemical fire extinguishers, UL listed 1A-10BC as
manufactured by Walter Kidde & Co., Inc., Belleville, NJ, Model No.
2-5/8 TPS-2, or by J.L. Industries, 4450 West 78th Street, Bloomington,
MN, Model No. Cosmic 2-1/2E, or approved equal.
5. Electric water cooler with water filter. Filter must be changed per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. One (1) all in one color LED Laser printer as manufactured by Xerox
Corp., Model No.6027/NI, or equal. The Electrical Contractor shall
maintain the machine for the duration of the Contract, providing all
ancillary supplies including Xerox quality paper.
7. One minimum 1,000W with turntable microwave oven from Sears or
equal
8. Specifications for Personal Laptop and Associated Software. Under this
Section, the Electrical Contractor shall supply one (1) complete laptop
system, with consumable supplies and software as specified below. The
computer systems shall be delivered to Field Office as determined by
the Bureau of Engineering Design & Construction (BEDC). At the
conclusion of the Contract, the computer system shall remain the
property of the Electrical Contractor. The Computer System shall be as
follows:
a. Intel Core i7-6600U Dual Core 2.6 GHz Processor, or
equivalent as approved by the Engineer with the following
features:
i. 16 GB (2x8GB) DDR4 2133 MHz RAM.
ii. 512 GB M.2 SATA Solid State Drive.
iii. LCD 23 inch color monitor
iv. Integrated Intel HD Graphics 53.
v. 14.0”—4-Cell Battery with 65 Watt Adapter
vi. Dell DW316 UltraSlim USB DVD/RW
vii. Dell E/Port Plus Advanced Replicator
01520-6 11/2017
1646
FACILITIES
b. Two (2)-outlet surge protector equal to SL Waber Data guard

Model DG315SA.
c. One (1) backup power supply with 30 minutes backup
capability.
d. Consumable Supplies:
i. Toner cartridges for printer, as required for duration of
Contract.
ii. One (1) plastic dust cover for printer.
iii. One (1) professional carrying case for laptop.
e. Software:
i. Symantec or MacAfee Antivirus.
ii. Microsoft Windows 10 or later version pre-installed with
manuals and CD.
iii. Microsoft Office 2016 or later version (Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, Access, etc.) - One (1) copy.
iv. Project management software.
v. Estimating Blue Book on CD with annual updating and
renewal for duration of project.
vi. One (1) copy of AUTOCAD, latest version
vii. One (1) Primavera Expedition, latest version.
f. The Electrical Contractor is advised to contact the Engineer
before making any commitment with any outside vendor in
connection with this purchase.
i. Service warranty for each computer system shall be
provided for the duration of Contract.
ii. Upgrades for software shall be provided for the duration
of Contract.
g. Maintenance and Support
i. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, at the Contractor's
expense for the duration of the Contract, a renewable
service contract for on-site maintenance of all hardware
and software.
ii. The maintenance response time for the hardware and
software shall be not more than twenty-four (24) hours
from the time of notification of a service related problem.
h. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish any item inadvertently
omitted in this Section of the Contract Specification that is
required to insure the proper operation of the personal
computer systems and software as specified above.
01520-7 11/2017
1647
FACILITIES
1.09 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Electrical Service
1. The Electrical Contractor shall provide sufficient capacity in the
temporary lighting and power system to furnish ample power for the
Resident Engineer's Office and temporary sanitary services.
2. The electrical installation shall conform to the requirements of the City
of New York Electrical Code and the Bureau of Electrical Control. The
Contractor shall pay all costs of supplying energy and maintaining
service.
B. Telephone Service
1. The Electrical Contractor shall pay all costs for installation of telephone
cable and supplying telephone service. Three two-line push button
telephones shall be installed.
2. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a high speed internet connection
for the computer provided under the Contract. Connection shall be
through a router, set by the Electrical Contractor, using direct CAT 5
cable or wireless.
3. Telephone service for the office shall be brought from the nearest
existing telephone manhole. The Electrical Contractor shall make its
own arrangements for service with the local telephone company
approved by the Engineer and shall conform to the telephone company’s
requirements.
4. Telephone service for the office shall include three (3) lines; two for
telephone and one for modem.
1.10 OFFICE LOCATION

A. The Electrical Contractor shall confine its construction activities to the Site as
shown on the Contract Drawings. Space will be made available on the Site for
construction staging and field offices for the Contractor. Space must be used
by the Contractor, as required in the Contract Documents or as directed by the
Engineer.
Maintenance of office
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and pay in full for telephone services
for all calls, heat, and daily janitor services, including mopping and vacuuming
for the office. It shall furnish, replace, and replenish electric light bulbs and
fluorescent tubes, and all else required to maintain the office in a clean and
satisfactory condition. The office floors shall be washed and waxed at least
once in every two (2) weeks.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall maintain and repair the office and its equipment
and services in a first class condition as stipulated to the satisfaction of the
Resident Engineer during the performance of the Work under this Contract and
01520-8 11/2017
1648
FACILITIES
for a period of thirty (30) days after the Contract is completed as evidenced by
the issuance of the Final Certificate.
D. The Contractor’s field offices shall present a clean and neat exterior appearance
and shall be in a state of good repair. Temporary construction facilities, which,
in the opinion of the Engineer, require exterior painting or maintenance, shall
be repaired or replaced at the Engineer’s direction.
1.11 DISPOSITION OF OFFICE WITH EQUIPMENT

A. At the completion of all Work as stipulated above, the trailer lease will be
terminated by the Electrical Contractor and all purchased equipment will be
turned over to DEP.

END OF SECTION
01520-9 11/2017
1649
FACILITIES
01520-10 11/2017
1650
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01550 – VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
SECTION 01550
Vehicular Access and Parking
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Maintenance of traffic
B. Site Access
C. Contractor employees parking area
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. During the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall provide all temporary
construction roads and walkways as required, and shall make ample provisions to
prevent interference with the continued maintenance of vehicular traffic on
roadways and shall indemnify and save harmless the City and the Engineer from
any expense whatsoever due to his operations over said roadways. Any roadways
damaged by a Contractor or the Subcontractors or materialmen shall be restored
to their original condition upon notification by the Engineer that such repairs are
required and such restoration of the roadway shall be at the responsible
Contractor's expense. Temporary construction roads and walkways shall be
removed, at the Contractor's expense, prior to acceptance of the Contract.
B. The Contractor shall stage deliveries such that no more than 50 peak hour vehicle
trip ends will be generated to the project site.
1.03 SITE ACCESS
A. Access to the sites shall be at locations designated by the Engineer and is subject
to change during the progress of the project.
B. The Contractor shall provide traffic control signage and flag persons as required
by agencies having authority and as necessary to ensure access to the sites for the
use of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers and other traffic required for the
expeditious completion of the Work.
1.04 CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES PARKING AREA
A. It is a material provision of this Contract that all personal vehicles of the
Contractor’s and any Subcontractors’ employees shall be parked in designated
Contractor Employees Parking Area(s) located on or off-site as designated by the
Engineer. Such Contractor Employees Parking Area(s) shall be adequately sized,
and shall be provided for and maintained by the Contractor at its sole expense.
Contractor agrees that the City shall have no obligation to assist in obtaining nor
to make available publicly-owned property for such purposes. It is a contractual
01550-1 11/2017
1651
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01550 – VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
requirement that the Contractor implement and enforce this policy, and that
Contractor take any necessary or appropriate actions to ensure compliance with
such parking policy by it and its Subcontractors’ employees. The Contractor
agrees to make appropriate efforts to encourage the use of public transportation
and the practice of car pooling by all such employees.
B. The Contractor shall issue parking badges or stickers to such employees for their
personal vehicles, in such form and with such associated documentation as the
Resident Engineer may approve, require or modify.
C. The parking badges or stickers shall be displayed in a prominent location upon
each employee’s vehicle, as may be approved, required or modified by the
Engineer.
D. The Contractor Employees Parking Area(s) shall be of a size and situated in
location(s) acceptable to the Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and efficient movement of
employees between the Contractor Employees Parking Area and the Contractor’s
work area.
END OF SECTION
01550-2 11/2017
1652
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01560 - TEMPORARY BARRIERS
AND ENCLOSURES
SECTION 01560
Temporary Barriers and Enclosures
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Payment
B. Barricades
B. Fencing
C. Pollution control
D. Protection of work, personnel and materials
1.02 PAYMENT
Contract.
1.03 BARRICADES
A. Roads, Parking Areas and Sidewalks:
1. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain as necessary for his work, strong
and suitable barricades, danger signs and warning lights along all roads, parking
areas and sidewalks, accessible to the public or City personnel.
2. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night.
3. Sufficient barricades shall be erected to keep vehicles from being driven on or

into work under construction.
B. Excavations:
1. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary

barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to persons,
and damage to property.
01560-1 11/2017
1653
AND ENCLOSURES
2. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and
other crossings for accommodating travel by pedestrians and workmen. Bridges
provided for access during construction shall be removed when no longer
required.
3. The length or size of excavation will be controlled by the particular surrounding

conditions, but shall always be confined to the limits prescribed by the City and
Engineer. If the excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic
at any point, the City and Engineer may require special construction procedures
such as limiting the length of the open trench, prohibiting stacking excavated
material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain open
overnight.
4. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public or City
personnel due to open trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, or
other obstacles which could be dangerous to the public or City personnel shall be
well lighted from sunset to sunrise.
C. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs and lights shall
continue until the City accepts the Work. The Contractor shall provide and maintain
other warning signs and barricades in other areas and around their respective work as
may be required for the safety of all those employed in the work, plant operating
personnel, or those visiting the Site.
1.04 FENCING
A. Protective Safety Fencing:
1. The Contractor shall provide and erect, when required or shown on the Contract
Drawings or directed by the Engineer, temporary project safety fencing at the
work site.
2. The safety fencing shall be a high visibility, orange colored, high density
polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 4 feet high, supported and
tightly secured to steel posts located on maximum 6-feet centers.
B. Fencing shall be maintained by the Contractor during the life of the Contract and, upon
completion and acceptance of the Work, shall become the property of the Contractor
and shall be removed from the work site.
1.05 POLLUTION CONTROL
01560-2 11/2017
1654
AND ENCLOSURES
A. The Contractor shall provide the methods, means and facilities required to prevent
contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances
from construction operations.
B. Equipment and personnel shall be provided by the Contractor to perform emergency

measures required to contain any spillages, and to remove contaminated water or soils
for off-site disposal. The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting all spillages
from his equipment and operation, including contaminated soil, water, and any other
contaminated media, and disposing it off-site. The Contractor is responsible for all
costs associated with Work with no additional cost to the City.
C. Special measures shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent harmful substances from
entering public waters, and to prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other
such substances to adjacent waterways or to sanitary or storm sewers.
D. The Contractor shall provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants to prevent
toxic concentrations of chemicals and to prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into
the atmosphere. See Detailed Specification 01140 – Work Restrictions for additional
emissions and fuel requirements.
E. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,
whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, or reactant of other classification,
must show approval of the EPA and other recognized certifying agencies. Use of all
such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with regulatory
requirements.
F. All Contractor equipment used during construction shall conform to all current federal,
state and local laws and regulations.
G. In the event that any type of fuel, lubricant, or any other material is spilled on board a
piece of on water equipment, or spilled in the reservoir, all Work must immediately
cease and the Engineer must be notified. All Work will remain ceased until the spill is
cleaned to the satisfaction of the Resident Engineer and City. The Contractor is
responsible for disposing of all contaminated materials at no additional cost. The
Contractor must provide documentation to the Resident Engineer proving that the
contaminated materials were disposed of in a proper manner.
1.06 PROTECTION OF WORK, PERSONNEL AND MATERIALS
A. During the progress of the Work and up to the date of final payment, the Contractor
shall be solely responsible for the care and protection of all Work, personnel,
equipment and materials covered by the Contract.
01560-3 11/2017
1655
AND ENCLOSURES
B. In order to prevent damage, injury or loss, actions taken by the Contractor shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
1. Store apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner

that will not interfere with the progress of the Work or the Work of any other
Contractor or utility service company.
2. Provide suitable storage facilities for all materials that are subject to injury by
exposure to weather, theft or breakage. Remove on water equipment from the
reservoir in the event of a major storm.
3. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the
safety of that portion of the Work.
4. Clean up frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by his
operations, to the end that at all times the site of the Work shall present a safe,
orderly and workmanlike appearance.
C. The Contractor shall protect the existing work and material from damage by his
workmen and shall be responsible for repairing any such damage at no additional cost
to the City.
END OF SECTION
01560-4 11/2017
1656
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01570 – TEMPORARY CONTROLS
SECTION 01570
Temporary Controls
PART 1 GENERAL
B. Related Documents
C. Payment
D. General Requirements
E. Submittals
F. Prohibited construction procedures
G. Stockpiling of materials
H. Dust, soil erosion and sedimentation control
I. Noise Control
J. Particulates
K. Notification of Non-Compliance
L. Rodent and Insect Control
M. Tree and Plant Protection
A. Detailed Specification 01330 – Submittal Procedures
B. Detailed Specification 01356 – Environmental Health and Safety Requirements
C. Detailed Specification 01410 – Regulatory Requirements
D. Detailed Specification 01560 – Temporary Barriers and Enclosures
E. Detailed Specification 02222G – Demolition and Removals
01570-1 11/2017
1657
F. Detailed Specification 02230G – Site Clearing
H. Detailed Specification 02371G – Dust, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Building Code of the City of New York.
B. New York City CEQR Technical Manual.
1.04 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any Work of this Section. The G
Contractor shall include all costs for this Work in its lump sum price bid G-LS-1
unless otherwise noted.
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required
to assure adequate environmental protection including implementation of all erosion
and sediment control measures shown in the Contract Drawings, the Stormwater
Pollution Prevention Plan, as directed by the Engineer, and specified herein.
B. In the performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with all applicable
Federal, State and Local laws and regulations and all permits related to the Work
concerning environmental protection, restoration and erosion and sediment control.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings as specified in Detailed Specification 01330 - Submittal

Procedures. The data submitted shall include the manufacturer's descriptive literature
and installation instructions for stockpile liner and cover materials.
B. Submit Environmental Plan describing proposed methods, schedules and materials

for implementing the environmental protection requirements.
1.07 PROHIBITED CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. The following construction procedures are prohibited:
1. Dumping or wasting of spoil material, silt-laden water, trees, bush and other
debris into the reservoir or any stream corridor, any surface waters or at
unspecified locations adjacent to the work area or at locations not approved by
the Engineer.
01570-2 11/2017
1658
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary or capricious operation of equipment.
3. Damaging vegetation adjacent to or outside of access roads or limited right-of-

way for the Work. All construction operations must be confined within the
Contractor's work limits as shown on the Contract Drawings and/or specified.
4. Open burning of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COVER FABRIC FOR NON-HAZARDOUS SOILS
A. The cover fabric for temporary stockpiles of non-hazardous excavated soil shall be a
composite material of woven polyethylene fabric and 1.5 mils of polyethylene film
laminated on both sides to form a monolithic sheet. The fabric shall be inert to
biological degradation and naturally encountered chemicals, alkalies, and acids. Its
permeability coefficient shall be less than 10-3 cm/sec. The terminal edges of the
fabric panels shall be secured to prevent uplift by wind.
2.02 LINER AND COVER FOR HAZARDOUS AND CONTAMINATED MATERIAL
A. Potentially hazardous wastes and contaminated wastes materials shall be stockpiled

separately for testing prior to off-site disposal.
B. These stockpiles shall be placed on a liner of 30 mil polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and
covered with a minimum 20 mil reinforced PVC liner at all times except during the
time the stockpile is being filled, emptied or sampled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 STOCKPILING OF MATERIAL
A. Staging and stockpile areas shall be as designated on the Contract Drawings. The
choice of alternate or additional stockpile areas shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall cover all temporary stockpiles of non-hazardous excavated soil
with an impermeable, woven polyethylene fabric, as specified in Article 2.01 of this
Detailed Specification.
3.02 DUST, SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall use necessary methods to prevent demolition waste from
contaminating stormwater runoff. Methods of preventing contamination shall
include construction of berms and dikes to direct stormwater runoff around the
work areas to the local drainage system.
01570-3 11/2017
1659
B. All catch basins and other stormwater inlets within or downhill of the project area
shall be surrounded by stone and block to filter the stormwater runoff.
C. The Contractor shall perform the Work under this Contract in compliance with
Appendices D and E from the New York State Department of Environmental
Conservation (NYSDEC), Division of Water, General Permit for Construction
Activities.
1. The Contractor shall comply with SPDES permit from the NYSDEC in
accordance with Detailed Specification 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
The Contractor shall implement the procedures, technologies and methods
described in the Appendices to ensure compliance with the terms and
conditions of the permit.
D. Stormwater runoff controls shall be inspected daily. Problems and deficiencies

shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer and corrected promptly.
E. See Detailed Specification 02371G – Dust, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation

Control for additional requirements.
3.03 NOISE CONTROL
A. All sound attenuation measures shall comply with local noise code regulations and
the following City noise code regulations. Compliance with the noise level
requirements specified herein above shall be understood as a material requirement of
this Contract.
1. Exterior Mechanical Equipment: The Building Code of the City of New

York, Title 27, Chapter 1, Subchapter 12, Subarticle 1208.3, Paragraph 27-
770, concerns windows of dwelling units facing mechanical equipment and
the noise output limitation for exterior mechanical equipment as measured
within the interior of the dwelling unit.
2. Ambient Noise Quality: The Building Code of the City of New York, Title
24, Chapter 2, Subchapter 6, concerns ambient noise quality criteria and
standards which indicates the maximum outdoor sound levels in specific
ambient noise quality zones for day-time and night-time standards.
B. Contractor's vehicles and equipment shall be operated and maintained so as to

minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to the
latest regulatory standards and in no case will noise levels be permitted which
interfere with the Work of the on-site personnel.
1. All construction equipment powered by an internal combustion engine shall be

equipped with a properly maintained muffler.
01570-4 11/2017
1660
2. Air powered equipment shall be fitted with pneumatic exhaust silencers.
3. Where specific noise attenuation methods and/or systems are specified, these
shall be considered minimum requirements, and the Contractor shall provide all
additional noise attenuation methods and/or systems necessary to comply with
the specified levels, regulations and standards, all at no additional cost to the
City. No separate payment will be made for said items, as costs for these shall
be understood as included in the lump sum price bid for Bid Item No. 1, G-LS-
1.
4. All construction equipment powered by an internal combustion engine shall be

equipped with a properly maintained exhaust muffler. Such equipment shall
include, but not be limited to, cranes, dump trucks, excavation equipment,
generators, and trucks removing soil, rock, or material of any kind from the site,
plus delivery vehicles.
5. Where operations by the Contractor are determined by the City to fail to comply
with the specified noise levels, regulations or standards, the Contractor shall
discontinue said operations immediately. Operations will be permitted to
resume only after the Contractor has submitted for the approval of the Engineer
a revised procedure for the performance of said operations in a manner that will
ensure compliance. All repairs shall be made at no increase to the Contract
price. In addition, the Contractor will have no claim for additional
compensation or Contract time if the Resident Engineer ceases operations due
to non-compliance with the specified noise levels.
6 The Contractor shall include in his Health and Safety Plan (HASP), to be
prepared as specified in Detailed Specification Section 01356 - Environmental
Health and Safety Requirements, the control measures he will employ to ensure
compliance with all specified noise requirements.
D. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the requirements of
Article 5 of the General Conditions and Detailed Specification 01330 - Submittal
Procedures. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Structural calculations verifying and certifying that all noise attenuation system
components comply with the requirements of the New York City Building
Code. The calculations shall be prepared, stamped and sealed by a Professional
Engineer registered in the State of New York.
2. Noise attenuation calculations demonstrating that the system satisfies the noise
attenuation requirements of the Contract.
E. Noise attenuation system materials may be made of concrete, wood or any suitable
materials, all as selected by the Contractor, which satisfy the Contract requirements.
01570-5 11/2017
1661
3.04 PARTICULATES
A. The Contractor shall perform the Work required in this Contract without causing
the concentrations of the particulate matters to exceed the following levels:
1. PM10 (inhalable particulates less than 10 µm in diameter):
a. 24-hour ambient PM10: 150 µg/m3

b. annual ambient PM10: 50 µg/m3
2. TSP (total suspended particulates):
a. 24-hour ambient TSP: 250 µg/m3

b. annual ambient TSP: 75 µg/m3
B. Compliance with the particulate level requirements shall be understood as a

material requirement of this Contract.
C. The Contractor shall implement measures to comply with all applicable OSHA
requirements. Additional and related requirements include:
1. Dust and dirt control in accordance with Detailed Specifications 02222G -

Demolition and Removals, and 02371G – Dust, Soil Erosion and
Sedimentation Control.
2. Such other monitoring as may be required by the Contractor’s Health and

Safety Plan (HASP), as specified in Detailed Specification 01356 –
Environmental Health and Safety Requirements.
D. The beds of dump trucks and trucks removing soil, rock, or material of any kind
from the work site or delivering raw materials to the work site shall be covered
with tarpaulins when loaded. The cover shall be secured to the truck so that no
contents of the bed may be seen when the bed is viewed from above. Bed of the
trucks shall be lined with a noise attenuation mat. Delivery vehicles are not
required to have noise attenuation mats.
E. Construction roads and, as needed, other areas within the limit of disturbance shall
be washed down with water as needed, but no less frequently than once daily, to
prevent the accumulation of and to suppress dust.
F. Soil and other potentially hazardous materials shall be removed from vehicles and
equipment leaving the work area, as specified in Detailed Specification 02371G -
Dust, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
01570-6 11/2017
1662
G. The Contractor shall take all additional measures needed to control objectionable
dust caused by his operations and the moving of his vehicles and equipment. The
use of chemicals for dust control, including calcium chloride, will not be
permitted.
H. The Contractor shall include in the Health and Safety Plan (HASP), to be prepared
by him as specified in Detailed Specification 01356 – Environmental Health and
Safety Requirements, the control measures he will employ to ensure compliance
with all specified particulate requirements.
3.05 NOTIFICATION OF NON-COMPLIANCE
A. The Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing of any non-compliance with the
provisions of this Section and the action to be taken. The Contractor shall, after
receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective action. Such notice, when
delivered to the Contractor or his authorized representative at the site of the work,
shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose.
1. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, an order stopping all or

part of the Work may be issued by the City until satisfactory corrective action
has been taken.
2. No part of the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the subject of
a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor,
unless it is later determined that the Contractor was in compliance with the
provisions of this Section.
B. Compliance with the provisions of this Section by Subcontractors shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor.
3.06 RODENT AND INSECT CONTROL
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary
to implement a Rodent and Insect Control Program for the following areas
specifically requested and authorized in writing by the Engineer:
1. Resident Engineers Trailer: On and around the Resident Engineer’s field office
complex and the Resident Engineer’s parking area.
B. All Work shall be performed by an exterminator licensed in the State of New York
and shall comply with all New York City, New York State Department of Health, and
local requirements for rodent and insect control. The exterminator shall only use
products approved by the USEPA for rodent and insect control.
01570-7 11/2017
1663
C. The Electrical Contractor shall perform one (1) full round of rodent and insect control
on and around the areas specified in Article 3.06.A above once every two months
from October through May and once every month from June through September, or
more frequently as directed by the Engineer..
3.07 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall employ such measures as are needed to protect from damage
trees and plants located in or adjacent to any areas of work. Trees shall be protected
as specified in the New York City Department of Parks and Recreation “Horticulture
I” Recommendations and Specifications (June 1986 or most recent version) and in
accordance with Department of Parks and Recreation instructions.
1. Stored materials and equipment shall be in cleared spaces, away from

all trees and shrubs, and confined to areas shown on the Contractor
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2. Temporary fences or barricades shall be installed as needed.
3. Within the limits of the Work, water trees and plants that are to remain,
in order to maintain their health during construction operations.
4. Where tree roots are exposed, the Contractor shall cover the roots with
burlap that shall be kept continuously wet. The roots shall be covered
with earth as soon as possible. The Contractor shall protect root systems
from mechanical damage and damage by erosion, flooding, runoff or
noxious materials in solution.
5. If branches or trunks are damaged, the Contractor shall prune the
branches or trunks immediately and protect the cut or damaged areas
with emulsified asphalt compounded specifically for horticultural use in
a manner approved by the Engineer.
6. All damaged trees and plants that die or suffer permanent injury shall
be removed when ordered by the Engineer and replaced by the
Contractor and at the Contractor’s expense with a specimen of equal or
better quality.
END OF SECTION
01570-8 11/2017
1664
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01583 – CONSTRUCTION SITE SIGNS
SECTION 01583
Construction Site Signs
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the requirements of the New York City Department of
Buildings (DOB) for uniform display of project and safety contact information
in the signage posted along construction fences and sidewalk sheds at
government-owned or government-funded project sites. Under Local Law
47/13, all miscellaneous construction signs – including City, Contractor and
311 contact information are consolidated in one simplified project information
panel. No other signage or permits, unless otherwise required by law, may be
posted.
1.02 PAYMENT
Section and the Electrical Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump
sum price bid E-LS-1.
B. No extra payment will be made for any update of contact information, including
the changes of names and offices on the project information panel, necessitated
by administrative changes during the course of the Project.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. New York City Local Law 47/13
B. Rules of the City of New York 3301-01 (RCNY 3301-01)
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. The Electrical Contractor shall procure and erect a project information panel at
the project site identifying the project. The panel shall be erected within
twenty-one (21) days from the date the Contractor is ordered to Commence
Work and shall be in accordance with the specifications and details included in
this Section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following for approval prior to fabrication of the project information
panel:
1. Detailed sketch showing all lettering, dimensions and colors
2. Detailed bill of materials indicating materials of construction for all
project sign components.
01583-1 11/2017
DEP 9/26/2016
1665
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PROJECT INFORMATION PANEL

A. The project information panel shall be constructed in accordance with RCNY
3301-1, including the following requirements and as shown on Figure 1
attached to this Section. The Engineer will provide project specific information.
1. The sign dimensions shall be in accordance with Figure 1.
B. Project information panels shall include the following information:
1. A rendering, elevation drawing, site plan, or zoning diagram of the
building exterior that does not contain logos or commercially
recognizable symbols;
2. A title line stating “Work in Progress:” and specifying the nature of the
project;
3. Anticipated project completion date;
4. Website address to contact for project information;
5. The corporate name and telephone number of the contractor;
6. The following statement, in both English and Spanish, “TO
ANONYMOUSLY REPORT UNSAFE CONDITIONS AT THIS
WORK SITE, CALL 311”;
7. When applicable, a copy of the primary project permits, with
accompanying text “To see other permits issued on this property, visit:
www.nyc.gov/buildings.” The permit shall be laminated or encased in a
plastic covering to protect it from the elements or shall be printed
directly onto the project information panel.
8. The name(s) of government official(s) shall be incorporated into the
panel in accordance with Figures 1.
C. The project information panel shall be constructed of ¾-inch thick plywood
panel of the following quality or equal as approved by the Engineer:
1. High density overlaid exterior type fir plywood panels, 5 ply, B-B grade
or better.
2. Each plywood panel shall be resin impregnated on both sides.
D. The content shall be written in the Calibri font or similar Sans Serif font style,
with letters a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) high, as measured by the upper case
character. Such letters shall be white, on a blue background, with such blue
color of a shade matching Pantone 296, or RGB 15, 43, 84, or CMYK 100, 88,
38, 35.
01583-2 11/2017
DEP 9/26/2016
1666
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. The project information panel shall be manufactured by one of the following:
1. Mineola Signs, Mineola, New York; http://mineolasigns.com/
2. Or approved equal
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Location: The project information panel shall be located in a prominent
position as determined by the Engineer.
B. Panel Supports: Adequate supports for the project information panel, including
the positioning and alignment of the sign, as determined by the Engineer, shall
be provided by the Contractor.
C. Maintenance: The project information panel shall be maintained by the
Contractor in good condition at all times for the duration of the Contract.
D. Removal of project information panel from Project Site: The Contractor shall
remove the project information panel and supports from the site when ordered
by the Engineer.
3.02 ATTACHMENTS
A. The following sketches are attached to this Section:
1. Figure 1 – Project Information Panel Layout (For Projects with Street
Frontage of 60 Feet or Greater)
2. Figure 2 – Project Information Panel Layout (For Projects with Street
Frontage of Less than 60 Feet)
END OF SECTION
01583-3 11/2017
DEP 9/26/2016
1667
01583-4 11/2017
DEP 9/26/2016
1668
FIGURE 1
PROJECT INFORMATION PANEL LAYOUT
(For Project Sites with Street Frontage of 60 Feet or Greater)
2’-4” 3’-8”
4’
PAGE 1 OF 2 11/2017
DEP 9/26/2016
1669
PAGE 2 OF 2 11/2017
DEP 9/26/2016
1670
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01651 - TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 01651
Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Payment
B. General Requirements
C. Delivery of Products
D. Handling of Products
E. Inspection of Items
F. Supporting Heavy Loads
G. City’s Hoisting Equipment
1.02 PAYMENT
Contract.
A. Contractor shall make all arrangements for transportation, delivery and handling of
equipment and materials required for prosecution and completion of the Work.
B. Working space within the facilities is limited. Equipment shall not be delivered to the
Site until it can be moved directly to its concrete foundation pad and placed thereon, or
to the area where it will be utilized.
C. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, the

Contractor shall move materials and equipment without any additional compensation.
1.04 DELIVERY OF PRODUCTS
A. The Contractor shall arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction

schedules and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation.
01651-1 11/2017
1671
B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the site and to
accommodate the following:
1. Work of other Contractors.
2. Limitations of storage space.
3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products.
C. Products shall not be delivered to the Site until related Shop Drawings, including the
manufacturer's recommended storage instructions, have been approved by the Engineer.
D. Products shall not be delivered to the Site until required storage facilities have been
provided.
E. Products shall be delivered to the Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled

containers. Engineer shall be informed of delivery of all equipment to be incorporated
in the Work.
F. Partial deliveries of component parts of equipment shall be clearly marked to identify

the equipment, to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly.
G. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure:

1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and approved
submittals.
2. Quantities are correct.
3. Containers and packages are intact, labels are legible.
4. Products are properly protected and undamaged.
1.05 HANDLING OF PRODUCTS
A. The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products by
methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.
B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring

or otherwise damaging products or surrounding surfaces.
C. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Handle products by methods to prevent bending or over-stressing.
E. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points.
F. Materials and equipment shall at all times be handled in a safe manner and as
recommended by manufacturer or supplier so that no damage will occur to them. Do
01651-2 11/2017
1672
not drop, roll or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable
materials handling equipment.
1.06 INSPECTION OF ITEMS
A. The Contractor shall inspect all items, including all boxes, crates and packages,
containing equipment and materials for damage that may have occurred during
shipment prior to its removal from the truck or other conveyance. Any damage shall be
reported immediately to the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall then carefully remove the equipment and materials from the truck
or trucks on which it is shipped. The equipment and materials shall then be transported
to the place of installation at the site. The Contractor shall be liable for loss or damage
to the equipment and materials that may occur while being unloaded, transported,
stored or installed.
C. All equipment that arrives at the Site during normal working hours shall be unloaded as
soon as practicable.
1.07 SUPPORTING HEAVY LOADS
A. The Contractor shall, in all cases where heavy loads are to be temporarily imposed on
existing slabs, assure himself of the slab's load-sustaining ability. Whenever heavy
loads are to be stored or temporarily imposed on slabs, the Contractor shall submit for
approval by the Engineer a plan of procedure prepared by a licensed Professional
Engineer, indicating a structural analysis of the slabs and methods of distributing loads,
and providing auxiliary support so that slabs and beams are not loaded in excess of
their design loadings.
1.08 CITY’S HOISTING EQUIPMENT
A. Existing cranes in the Shaft 18 Facility are property of the City and are available for the
Contractor's use. The Contractor shall perform an inspection of the hoisting equipment
prior and after the use of such, any necessary repairs will be the responsibility of the
Contractor
END OF SECTION
01651-3 11/2017
1673
01651-4 11/2017
1674
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01661 – PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 01661
Protection of Materials and Equipment
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Related Specifications.
B. Payment.
B. Storage of product.
C. Protection of materials and equipment.
A. Detailed Specification 01651 – Transportation and Handling of Materials and

Equipment.
1.03 PAYMENT
Contract.
1.04 STORAGE OF PRODUCT
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Handle and lift products only at designated lift points and by methods to avoid
soiling, disfigurement, bending, overstressing and damage.
C. Store products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items, with seals and
labels intact and legible, and in a manner to provide access for maintenance and
inspection.
D. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid, flat surfaces and prevent mixing with
foreign matter. Store fabricated products supported above the ground on skids or
blocking. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water.
E. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration with impervious sheet

covering and protect products from soiling and staining.
01661-1 11/2017
1675
EQUIPMENT
F. Store and protect products, which are subject to damage by the elements, in
weathertight, climate controlled enclosures and according to manufacturer's
instructions. Maintain temperature, ventilation, and humidity within ranges stated in
manufacturer's instructions.
G. Attach applicable manufacturer's service instructions labeled "STORAGE

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS ENCLOSED" to exterior of each stored product.
H. Inspect, maintain and service stored products on a regularly scheduled basis,

consistent with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Record inspection, maintenance and services performed and keep log available for
review by the City and Engineer.
1.05 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize extended storage periods of
materials and equipment at the Site by judiciously scheduling deliveries to coincide
with construction needs.
B. Storage of any mechanical or electrical equipment out of doors at any time is

absolutely prohibited regardless of the protection furnished.
C. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be coated, wrapped and otherwise
protected from snow, rain, drippings of any sort, dust, mud and condensed water
vapor, during shipment, storage, and installation and until placed in service.
D. All storage areas for motors and control panels shall be heated. Space heaters shall
be supplied, as needed or required, in all enclosures being utilized for storage of
motors. Motors equipped with space heaters shall be properly wired and the heaters
activated while the motors are in storage.
E. Should storage of mechanical and electrical equipment become necessary before it

can be stored at the Site, the Contractor shall provide storage in a weatherproof
warehouse.
F. Materials may be stored out of doors if supported above ground surface on wood
runners and protected with approved, effective and durable weathertight covers.
G. Provide separate, safe and suitable storage for hazardous and flammable materials.
H. All storage and protection of materials and equipment at the Site shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
01661-2 11/2017
1676
EQUIPMENT
I. The Contractor is responsible for managing and protecting any and all materials and
equipment that the Contractor stores within the Site and must be able to move such
materials and equipment during a City-Ordered Demobilization. The Contractor
shall have no claim for additional compensation or Contract time due to the
Contractor’s failure to protect and move materials and equipment during a City-
Ordered Demobilization.
END OF SECTION
01661-3 11/2017
1677
EQUIPMENT
01661-4 11/2017
1678
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01711 – MAINTENANCE OF OPERATIONS
AND CONSTRUCTION STAGING
SECTION 01711
Maintenance of Operations and Construction Staging
PART 1 GENERAL
B. Payment
C. Maintenance of Facility Operations.
D. General Criteria and Restrictions.
E. Construction Staging.
A. Detailed Specification 01120 - Contract Summary
B. Detailed Specification 01321 - Progress Schedule
1.03 PAYMENT
Contract.
1.04 MAINTENANCE OF FACILITY OPERATIONS
A. It is required as a part of this Contract that the Contractor conducts their Work in
a manner such that the City can keep Shaft 18 in continuous dependable operation
during construction.
B. Any temporary Work that may be required to maintain the existing facilities in
operation shall be furnished by the Contractor at the direction of the Engineer at
no extra cost to the City.
C. The Contractor shall keep the City and the Engineer informed of any Work which
has the potential to interfere with the operation of the existing facilities.
D. Unless otherwise permitted in the Contract Documents, or approved in writing by
01711-1 11/2017
1679
the City, no existing valves or equipment shall be operated by the Contractor.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the operation and maintenance of its own
equipment. Operation of Contractor-owned equipment connected to the City
water supply system will be subject to approval by the City.
F. The Engineer and City must receive sixty (60) days prior written notice of the
Contractor's intended schedule for Work which will interfere with the operation of
the existing facilities. The Critical Path Method schedule shall not serve as prior
notice.
1.05 GENERAL CRITERIA AND RESTRICTIONS
A. The following general criteria and restrictions shall apply except where otherwise
noted:
1. The times noted as days are meant to be consecutive calendar days

including normal working days, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and
holidays. For times noted in hours, the time is meant to be measured as
consecutive hours and not in terms of normal daily working hours.
2. The Chlorine Storage and the Chlorination Rooms are used by the City on
a daily basis. The City receives routine deliveries of chlorine gas
containers that must be unloaded and stored in the Chlorine Storage
Room. In addition, the City has to perform numerous chlorine gas
container replacements in the Chlorine Storage room and process
motoring activities in the Chlorination Room on a daily basis. The
Contractor shall perform the Work under this Contract without interfering
with the daily activities that the City performs in the work areas.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION STAGING
A. The Contractor shall perform the Work as shown on the Contract Drawings and
specified herein to meet the requirements of this Detailed Specification regarding
time of completion and maintenance of operations.
B. The Work shall be performed in accordance with the construction schedule as

submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
specified herein. The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive work schedule to
the Engineer to demonstrate that the schedules adhere to these requirements.
C. The Contractor shall coordinate with DEP Operations on the allowable time per
phasing stage. Equipment shall only be out of service for the minimum amount of
time needed to move the loads from the existing panels to the new panels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS – (NOT USED)

01711-2 11/2017
1680
END OF SECTION
01711-3 11/2017
1681
01711-4 11/2017
1682
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01721 - PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF
STRUCTURES
SECTION 01721
Protection and Restoration of Structures
PART 1 GENERAL
B. Payment
C. General Requirements
D. Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities
E. Underground Structures
F. Surface Structures
G. Underwater Structures
H. Protection of Underground, Surface and Underwater Structures
I. Protection of Installed Products and Landscaping
A. Detailed Specification 01651 - Transportation and Handling of Materials and

Equipment
1.03 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work of this Section. The
Contractor shall include all costs for this work in its lump sum price bid for the
Contract.
A. The Contractor shall execute the Work to prevent damage or injury to the existing
Structures and occupants thereof, which might result from work or other causes, and so
as not to interfere with the use and free and safe passage to and from Shaft 18 uptake
building.
01721-1 11/2017
1683
STRUCTURES
B. The Contractor shall erect and maintain barriers, lights, fences, and other required
protective devices in accordance with the Contract Documents and the NYC Building
Code, local codes and NYS Department of Transportation.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all precautions, providing all programs,
and taking all actions necessary to protect the Work and all public and private property
and facilities from damage, injury, loss or vandalism.
D. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the preservation of all public and
private property or facilities on or adjacent to the Site. If any direct or indirect damage
is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect or misconduct in the execution of
the Work by the Contractor, it shall be restored by the Contractor, at their expense, to a
condition equal to that existing before the damage was done. Where necessary to
protect the Work or materials from damage, the Contractor shall at their expense
provide suitable drainage and erect such temporary structures as are necessary to
protect the Work or materials from damage. The suspension of the Work or the
granting of an extension of time from any cause whatever shall not relieve the
Contractor of their responsibility for the Work and materials.
E. All structures and appurtenances shall be adequately supported and safeguarded against
all damage or injury in performance of Work under this Contract. Work under this
Contract includes, but is not limited to, excavation, backfilling, trucking and other
activities. The Contractor will be held responsible for any such damage or injury
resulting from their operations and shall repair such damage immediately and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall ascertain the location of underground pipelines, conduits and other
subsurface structures in those locations where the operation of their heavy construction
equipment might damage such structures. The Contractor shall either avoid such
locations or provide the necessary safeguards and repair any damage quickly at their
own expense.
G. The Contractor shall comply promptly with such safety regulations as may be
prescribed by the Engineer or the local authorities having jurisdiction and shall, when
so directed, properly correct any unsafe conditions created by, or unsafe practices on
the part of their employees. In the event of the Contractor's failure to comply, the
Engineer may take the necessary measures to correct the conditions or practices
complained of, and all costs thereof will be deducted from any monies due the
Contractor. Failure of the Engineer to direct the correction of unsafe conditions or
practices shall not relieve the Contractor of their responsibility hereunder.
H. In the event of any claims for damage or alleged damage to property as a result of Work
under this Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs in connection with
the settlement of or defense against such claims.
01721-2 11/2017
1684
STRUCTURES
I. Prior to commencement of Work in the vicinity of property adjacent to the work site,
the Contractor, at their own expense, shall take such surveys as may be necessary to
establish the existing condition of the property. Before final payment can be made, the
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all claims for damage have been
legally settled or sufficient funds to cover such claims have been placed in escrow, or
that an adequate bond to cover such claims has been obtained.
J. Contractor shall submit to the Resident Engineer a list of pre-existing damage to

existing property prior to construction or construction related activity. The list shall be
submitted to the resident Engineer sufficiently in advance to verify the surveyed
damage. The Resident Engineer may direct the Contractor to photograph pre-existing
damage listed at no additional cost. The list shall include but not be limited to the
following information:
1. Location of damage.
2. Nature of damage.
3. Extent of damage.
1.05 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The term existing utilities shall be deemed to refer to both publicly-owned and
privately-owned utilities such as, but not limited to electric power and lighting,
telephone, water, gas, storm drains, process lines, sanitary sewers and all appurtenant
structures.
B. Where existing utilities and structures are indicated on the Contract Drawings, it shall
be understood that all of the existing utilities and structures affecting the work may not
be shown and that the locations of those shown are approximate only. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the actual extent and exact location of
existing utilities and structures. In every instance, the Contractor shall notify the proper
authority having jurisdiction and obtain all necessary directions and approvals before
performing any work in the vicinity of existing utilities.
C. The Work shall be carried out in a manner to prevent disruption of existing services and
to avoid damage to the existing utilities. Temporary connections shall be provided, as
required, to insure no interruption of existing services. Any damage resulting from the
Work of this Contract shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at their own
expense in a manner approved by the Engineer and further subject to the requirements
of any authority having jurisdiction. Where it is required by the authority having
jurisdiction that they perform their own repairs or have them done by others, the
Contractor shall be responsible for all costs thereof.
01721-3 11/2017
1685
STRUCTURES
D. Where excavations by the Contractor require any utility lines or appurtenant structures
to be temporarily supported and otherwise protected during the construction Work,
such support and protection shall be provided by the Contractor. All such Work shall
be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and the respective authority
having jurisdiction over such Work. In the event the Contractor fails to provide proper
support or protection to any existing utility, the Engineer may, at this discretion, have
the respective authority to provide such support or protection as may be necessary to
ensure the safety of such utility, and the costs of such measures shall be paid by the
Contractor.
E. During the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall protect from injury any existing
utilities or services within the work area until, if required, they have been re-routed,
disconnected or capped off. Protection and re-routing shall conform to standards
established by the utilities, agencies and governing codes.
1.06 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
A. Underground structures are defined to include, but not be limited to, all sewer, water,
gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels
and other existing subsurface infrastructure located within or adjacent to the limits of
the Work.
B. Underground structures known to the Engineer are shown for the assistance of the
Contractor in accordance with the best information available, but is not guaranteed to
be correct or complete.
C. The Contractor shall explore ahead of their trenching and excavation Work and shall
uncover all obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location,
to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption to the services which such
structures provide. If the Contractor damages an underground structure, they shall
quickly restore it to original condition at their own expense.
D. Necessary changes in the location of the Work may be made by the Engineer, to avoid
unanticipated underground structures.
E. If the Contractor discovers utility facilities not identified in the Contract Documents or
in a position different from that shown in the Contract Documents, they shall
immediately notify the Engineer and the owner of the utility facility, in writing.
1.07 SURFACE STRUCTURES
01721-4 11/2017
1686
STRUCTURES
A. Surface structures are defined as all existing buildings, structures and other facilities
above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any
extension below the surface.
B. Surface structures include, but are not limited to, buildings, tanks, walls, bridges, roads,
dams, channels, open drainage, piping, poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks
and all other facilities that are visible above the ground surface.
1.08 UNDERWATER STRUCTURES
A. Underwater structures are defined as all structures below the water surface.
1.09 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND, SURFACE AND UNDERWATER

STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor shall sustain in their places and protect from direct or indirect injury all
underground, surface, and underwater structures located within or adjacent to the limits
of the Work. Such sustaining and supporting shall be done carefully and as required by
the party owning or controlling such structure. Before proceeding with the Work of
sustaining and supporting such structure, the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that
the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the party owning same.
B. The Contractor shall assume all risks attending the presence or proximity of all
underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all damage and expense for direct or indirect injury
caused by their Work to any structure. The Contractor shall repair immediately all
damage caused by their Work, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure.
C. The fact that any structure or facility is not shown on the Contract Drawings shall not
relieve the Contractor of their responsibility of protecting and preserving the structure
or facility.
D. All other existing surface facilities, including but not limited to, guard rails, posts,
guard cables signs, poles, markers, and curbs which are temporarily removed to
facilitate installation of the Work shall be replaced and restored to their original
condition after the protective and relocation work is no longer needed at the
Contractor's expense.
1.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS AND LANDSCAPING
A. Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations.

Remove protection facilities when no longer needed, prior to completion of Work.
B. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials and surfaces.

01721-5 11/2017
1687
STRUCTURES
C. Provide coverings to protect equipment and materials from damage.
D. Cover projections, wall corners, jambs, sills, soffits in areas used for traffic and passage
in subsequent work.
E. Provide protection of existing trees and landscaping to prevent damage from all
construction operations. No trees or shrubs shall be cut, felled or removed from the Site
except as designated in the Contract Documents. Remove protection facilities when no
longer needed, prior to completion of Work.
F. Prohibit traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscaped areas. Protect
landscaped areas and seeded areas from birds and animals.
END OF SECTION
01721-6 11/2017
1688
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01732 - INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
SECTION 01732
Installation of Equipment
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Concrete foundations, bases, dowels and anchor bolts
B. Sleeves, recesses, openings, chases and related concrete installation items
C. Supervision by manufacturers’ representatives
D. Workmanship
E. Clearance and safeguards
F. Alignment and leveling
G. Cutting and patching
H. Lubrication
I. Maintenance of installed equipment
J. Protection of installed equipment
1.02 PAYMENT
A. There will be no separate payment for performing any work required under this
Section and the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in the lump sum price
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. GENERAL
1. The Contractor shall have adequate resources on site, including labor,
materials, construction tools and equipment, to perform the Work of this
Section.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating, aligning and leveling
all equipment and shall employ a licensed surveyor to set all lines and
levels of equipment to the accuracy required.
3. Complete manufacturer's installation instructions, including permissible
tolerances, shall be furnished in duplicate with each unit of equipment
or set of identical units.
4. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop
drawings; inclusive of manufacturer's specifications, drawings and
tolerances; under the direct supervision of the required manufacturer's
01732-1 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1689
representative. In no instance shall the directions of the manufacturer's

representative contravene the Engineer's direction.
5. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the
foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the drawings
unless directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation.
6. As a condition precedent to acceptance of equipment installed and
operating, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written
certification, obtained from each company manufacturing equipment for
the Project that the equipment is installed and does operate in
accordance with the Specifications and manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Concrete Foundations, Bases, Dowels and Anchor Bolts
1. The General Contractor shall provide all reinforced concrete
foundations, bases, dowels and anchor bolts for all equipment and
piping furnished under its Contract and shall also provide all concrete
foundations and bases for equipment and piping furnished and
installed under the HVAC and Electrical Contracts. Anchor bolts with
related installation shop drawings shall be furnished by the HVAC and
Electrical Contractors for installation by the General Contractor at
least thirty days before concrete formwork is started at a given
location.
a. All reinforced concrete bases and supports shall be steel
reinforced and dowelled to floor slabs. Where possible, dowels
shall be in place before new floor slab concrete is placed.
2. Where not explicitly stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall utilize foundation bolt drawings or templates for the installation of
equipment requiring concrete bases.
3. Dowelling into existing work shall be provided under the General
Contract.
2. Anchor bolts penetrating into existing reinforced concrete work shall
be drilled in place, shall be of the expansion type, and shall have
sufficient length and configuration to resist the imposed loadings when
installed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the
manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Engineer.
Dowels and anchor bolts in existing concrete shall be installed using a
bonding agent approved by the Engineer.
3. All concrete bases for equipment shall be treated with an approved
sealer to prevent oil and grease from seeping into the concrete.
4. Installation of reinforced concrete bases and the installation of dowels
and anchor bolts into existing and new reinforced concrete work shall
01732-2 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1690
be in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's

recommendations, and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
C. Sleeves, Recesses, Openings, Chases and Related Concrete Installation Items
1. The General Contractor shall make provisions for sleeves, recesses,
openings, chases and related items for equipment and materials to be
installed under its Contract and the HVAC and Electrical Contracts
where shown, specified or required. The Contractors for the HVAC and
Electrical Contracts shall furnish all items including sleeves to be cast
in concrete and masonry and information for sleeves, recesses, openings
and chases at least thirty (30) calendar days before concrete formwork
or masonry work is started at a given location. The General Contractor
shall cooperate with the HVAC and Electrical Contractors to obtain a
satisfactory installation, and shall coordinate all such work so that the
schedule of construction will be maintained.
2. When the Contract requires the placing of conduits, saddles, boxes,
cabinets, sleeves, inserts, foundation bolts, anchors and other similar
work in floors or walls of buildings and structures, they shall be
promptly installed in conformity with the Contract Documents. The
Contractor who erects the floors and walls shall facilitate such work by
fully cooperating with the contractors responsible for installing such
appurtenances. The Contractor responsible for installing such work
shall arrange the work in strict conformity with the approved
construction schedule and avoid interferences with the work of other
contractors. When the manner in which such work is performed causes
delay, or when such appurtenances are not installed on time,
construction shall proceed as scheduled and all cutting and restoration
resulting from such conditions shall be at the expense of the installing
contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUT
A. Grout bed shall be a non-shrink grout, "Euco-N-S" by the Euclid Chemical
Company or "Masterflow 713" by Master Builders, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUPERVISION BY MANUFACTURERS' REPRESENTATIVES

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of qualified technical representatives
of the equipment manufacturers who shall adequately supervise the installation
and testing of all equipment furnished under this Contract and instruct the
01732-3 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1691
Contractor's personnel and City operating personnel on maintenance and

operation of its equipment.
1. The manufacturers' representatives shall devote, at a minimum, the
entire amount of time specified under the relevant specification sections
for the equipment. Any additional time required to achieve successful
installation and operation shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
2. The manufacturers' representatives shall sign in and out in a log for this
purpose kept by the Engineer on every occasion they are on the Site and
shall indicate time of arrival and departure.
3.02 EXAMINATION / PREPARATION

A. Concrete foundations for equipment shall be of approved design and shall be
adequate in size, suitable for the equipment erected thereon, properly
reinforced, and tied into floor slabs by means of reinforcing bars or dowels.
Foundation bolts of ample size and strength shall be provided and properly
positioned by means of suitable templates and secured during placement of
concrete. Foundations shall be built and bolts installed in accordance with the
manufacturers certified drawings.
B. Before mounting equipment on a foundation, the Contractor shall clean the top
surface; if necessary, rough it with a star chisel and clean again; and clean out
all foundation bolt sleeves.
1. The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of steel plate shims
about 2 inches wide and 4 inches long, and of a varying thickness from
1/8 to 1/2 inch. A combination of these shims shall be placed next to
each foundation bolt to bring the bottom of the bedplate or frame about
1/8 inch above the final setting. The equipment shall be lowered by
changing the combination of shims. Using brass shim stock of various
thicknesses, continue to level the equipment a little at a time and in
rotation until it is at the correct elevation in both directions.
2. When the equipment is level, the Contractor shall tighten down on the
foundation bolts a little at a time, in rotation, to make certain the
equipment remains level and does not shift on the shims. A preliminary
alignment check shall be made before grout is placed.
C. Equipment shall be set, aligned and assembled in conformance with
manufacturer's instructions. Runout tolerances by dial indicator method of
alignment shall be plus or minus 0.002 inches or as directed by the
manufacturer, whichever is more stringent.
D. All blocking, wedges, shims, filling pieces, or other materials required for the
proper support and leveling of equipment during installation shall be furnished
by the Contractor. All temporary supports shall be removed, except steel shims,
which may be left in place with the approval of the Engineer. Any grinding
01732-4 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1692
necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be done at the
expense of the Contractor.
E. Each piece of equipment or supporting base, bearing on concrete foundations,
shall be bedded in grout. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 1-1/2 inch
thick grouting under the entire base plate supporting each pump, motor drive
unit and other equipment.
F. When motors are shipped separately from driven equipment, the motors shall
be received, stored, meggered once a month, and the reports submitted to the
Engineer. Space heaters shall be supplied in all enclosures being utilized for
storage of motors. After driven equipment is set, the motors shall be set,
mounted, shimmed, mill righted, coupled and connected complete.
G. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly before and after
installation to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal welding
and to prevent "flat-spotting" of bearings.
H. Anchor and expansion bolts shall be furnished by the Contractor as specified
and required by this Contract Documents.
I. At threaded connections, a molybdenum disulphide anti-seize compound shall
be applied to all threads in mechanical connections such as bolts, studs, cap
screws, tubing, etc., unless otherwise indicated.
3.03 WORKMANSHIP
A. The following erection specifications are not intended to be all-inclusive, but
only to cover some of the important practices. In all cases, only the best
methods known to the trades are to be employed.
B. Only those mechanics skilled in the handling, setting, alignment, leveling and
adjustment of the type of equipment supplied shall be employed in the work.
C. An oil bath heater shall always be used to expand couplings, gears, etc. They
shall not be forced or driven on equipment shafts, nor shall they be subjected to
an open flame or torch.
D. Wedging will not be permitted. Only the least number of flat shims are to be
used in leveling equipment (shims are to be clean and free of slag). All shims,
filling pieces, keys packing, red or white lead grout, or other materials necessary
to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the
Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so.
Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be
done at the expense of the Contractor.
E. Proper tools shall be used in the assembly of equipment and materials to prevent
marring the surface of shafts, nuts or other parts.
01732-5 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1693
F. Connections requiring gaskets shall be tightened evenly all around to ensure

uniform stress over the entire gasket area.
G. No equipment and materials shall be altered or repaired, and no burning or
welding will be permitted on any parts having machined surfaces, except by
written permission of the Engineer.
H. No rigging shall be done from any structure without the permission of the
Engineer, and the Contractor shall be completely responsible for any damage
to the structure due to its operations.
I. Only such equipment and materials as will not damage the structure or
equipment and materials shall be used on the work.
J. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with
associated piping and, under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be
allowed.
K. Misaligned holes shall be reamed, as excessive driving of bolts or keys will not
be permitted.
L. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary plugs in lubrication holes
to prevent entry of foreign material.
3.04 CLEARANCES AND SAFEGUARDS

A. All devices, equipment and systems furnished under this Contract shall be
fabricated and installed so that adequate clearances are provided for operation,
maintenance, repair and replacement. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
review the Contract Drawings and ensure that adequate clearances are available
and to notify the Engineer in the event that such clearances cannot be obtained.
B. The construction arrangement, assembly locations and guarding of all
equipment shall conform to the latest ANSI safety practices, the New York
State Industrial Code and all standards specified in the Specifications.
3.05 ALIGNMENT AND LEVELING

A. All couplings shall be aligned while the equipment is free from all external
loads.
B. Both angular and parallel alignment shall be checked, and the degree of
misalignment shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer.
C. Dial indicators shall be used for the checking of angular and parallel alignment.
During rotation of the held couplings in performance of this test, they shall be
maintained in the same relative position, and the dial indicator readings shall be
taken at the same place on the circumference of the coupling.
D. Misalignment shall not exceed the manufacturer's tolerances.
01732-6 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1694
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Whenever it becomes necessary to cut existing work, the location and size of
cut and method of cutting shall be as approved by the Engineer and adjacent
work shall not be damaged. On completion of the cutting, all affected areas
shall be restored satisfactorily by skilled workers.
3.07 LUBRICATION
A. All lubrication shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the
lubricant specifications and directions furnished by the manufacturer. The
Contractor shall furnish the lubricants for the equipment until it is accepted.
B. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently
as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance.
New lubricants shall be put into the equipment at the time of acceptance.
3.08 MAINTENANCE OF INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. During the period between installation and Final Acceptance, the Contractor
shall maintain all equipment in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
instructions as approved by the Engineer.
3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall provide protection of installed products, as required, to
prevent damage and remove protection devices/facilities, when no longer
needed, prior to completion of work.
B. Projections such as wall corners, jambs, sills and soffits of openings, shall be
covered in areas used for traffic and for passage of products in subsequent work.
C. Equipment for which shop finish paint is required shall be protected in the shop
and during transportation and installation to prevent injury and abrasion. Such
equipment shall be scheduled for installation when a building is considered
enclosed and as late as possible in the construction schedule. However,
maintenance of schedules may require the installation of such equipment in
unheated areas and in areas where masonry work, concrete finishing, steel
erection, painting, and other work will be in progress.
1. Shop finished work shall be protected during and after installation by
waterproof wrappings sealed to prevent condensation on surfaces.
Wrappings shall be sufficient to protect surfaces from damage by
drippings from masonry and painting work, and additional covering or
sheathing shall be provided to protect equipment from contact damage
that might result from work in progress in adjacent areas.
01732-7 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1695
2. Prior to final completion, wrappings and coverings shall be removed,

equipment shall be cleaned and all scratches and abrasions shall be
refinished.
END OF SECTION
01732-8 11/2017
DEP 6/30/2016
1696
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01733 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE
MANAGEMENT
SECTION 01733
Construction Waste Management
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Construction Waste Management.
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any work required under
this Section and the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump
sum price bid for the Contract.

A. Detailed Specification 01355 – Hazardous Materials Control
B. Detailed Specification 01740 – Cleaning and Site Maintenance

A. 6 NYCRR Part 364: Waste Transporter Permits
B. 6 NYCRR Subpart 374-3: Standards for Universal Waste
C. 49 CFR Parts 171 – 180: Hazardous Materials Regulations
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Hazardous Waste - A solid, liquid or gaseous waste that meets any of the
following criteria, unless excluded by 6 NYCRR 370 or 371:
1. Exhibits one or more hazardous waste characteristics listed in 6
NYCRR 371.3 (i.e., corrosivity, ignitability, reactivity and toxicity);
2. Is listed in 6 NYCRR 371.4 as a hazardous waste;
3. Is a mixture of a solid waste and a hazardous waste unless the
hazardous waste is listed in 6 NYCRR 371.4 solely because it
exhibits one or more of the characteristics of hazardous waste
identified in section 371.3 and the resultant mixture no longer
exhibits any characteristic of hazardous waste identified in section
371.3 (6 NYCRR371.1(d)(1)(ii)(‘c’)). Mixing may require a 6
NYCRR 373 permit.
B. Universal Waste as defined by:
1. 40 CFR Part 273: Standards for Universal Waste Management;
2. 6 NYCRR Subpart 374-3: Standards for Universal Waste;
01733-1 11/2017
DEP 6/17/2017
1697
MANAGEMENT
3. 6 NYCRR 373-3.10: Interim Status Standards For Owners and

Operators Of Hazardous Waste Facilities, Tank Systems;
4. Use of Enforcement Discretion for Discarded Mercury-Containing
Equipment, NYS DEC Commissioners Policy (CP-39);
5. Mercury Added Consumer Products Law (Chapter 145 Laws of
New York 2004 and Chapter 676 Laws of New York 2005);
6. 49 CFR Part 172: Hazardous Materials Regulations.
C. Electronic Waste as defined by:
1. 40 CFR Parts 260 – 272;
2. 6 NYCRR Part 370: Hazardous Waste Management System –
General
3. 6 NYCRR Part 371: Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste;
4. 6 NYCRR Part 372: Standards Applicable to Generators of
Hazardous Waste;
5. The Federal CRT Rule [Federal Register: July 28, 2006 (Volume
71, Number 145)];
6. The Federal Circuit Board Rule [Federal Register: May 26, 1998
(Volume 63, Number 100)];
7. Environmental Conservation Law Article 27 Title 26 – Electronic
Equipment Recycling and Reuse.
1.06 DESCRIPTION
1. Construction Waste Materials: The list of construction waste
materials shall include, but not be limited to, the following
materials:
a. Cardboard
b. Clean dimensional wood
c. Demolition debris
d. Concrete
e. Bricks
f. Concrete masonry units (CMU)
g. Asphalt
h. Metals from rebar, sheetrock studs, framing, etc.
i. Steel sheet piling
j. Steel pipe piles
01733-2 11/2017
DEP 6/17/2017
1698
MANAGEMENT
k. Structural steel
l. Paints, solvents, and other hazardous fluids
m. Glass
n. Roofing
o. Wood pallets
p. Fencing materials
q. Mercury containing light bulbs from the Contractor’s office
r. Recyclable office wastes such as paper and toner and ink
cartridges that should be recycled.
B. Construction Waste Management
1. Each Contractor shall use construction and demolition methods and
processes to ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due
to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or
other factors. Where feasible, as many of the materials from the
generated waste shall be salvaged, reused, or recycled.
2. When encountered as part of its Work for sites within New York
City, the Contractor shall dispose of construction waste by recycling
methods in accordance with the NYC Recycling Law: Local Law 19
(1989) and Local Law 87 (1992), and NYC’s Commercial
Recycling Regulations: Rules Governing the Recycling of Private
Carter-Collected Waste (September 1993). Under these laws and
rules, waste materials to be recycled shall include concrete, metals,
and rock. In addition, the Contractor shall also arrange for recycling
of untreated wood (scrap wood, pallets, etc.), green wood (stumps
and tree parts), asphalt, brick and concrete block. All material to be
recycled shall be separated from normal refuse, per New York City
Department of Sanitation (DOS) Rules. Normal refuse and material
not required to be recycled shall be disposed of by the Contractor as
specified and in accordance with all applicable federal, state and
local laws, rules and regulations.
3. When encountered as part of its work for sites outside New York
City, the Contractor shall dispose of construction and demolition
waste by recycling methods in accordance with all relevant State,
County and local codes, laws and regulations.
4. All hazardous waste, universal waste, and used oil must be separated
and stored in their own dedicated storage areas and managed in
compliance with NYSDEC Hazardous Waste, Universal Waste and
Used Oil Regulations, USDOT Hazardous Material Transportation
Regulations found in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations,
and in accordance with NYCDEP Hazardous Waste Management,
01733-3 11/2017
DEP 6/17/2017
1699
MANAGEMENT
Universal Waste Management, and Used Oil Policies and

Procedures.
C. Handling And Storage
1. The Contractor shall designate separate receiving/storage areas for
delivered materials and equipment in order to minimize waste due
to excessive materials mishandling, misapplication, weather and
other damage.
2. The requirements herein shall supersede any conflicting statements
wherever they may appear in the Contract Documents.

A. Regulatory Requirements: The Contractor shall meet all applicable
regulatory requirements on the management on-site, transportation, and
recycling or disposal of all construction waste materials generated during
construction.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall prepare and submit a Construction Waste
Management Plan for review and approval by the Resident Engineer within
15 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and prior to the removal of any
construction waste or demolition materials from the Project site.
B. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall contain the following:
1. Analysis of the proposed construction waste to be generated,
including types and quantities of each, during prosecution of the
Work.
2. A description of the means by which any construction waste
materials listed above will be appropriately segregated and not
mixed in order to prevent cross-contamination as well as a
description of the means to be employed in recycling the above
materials consistent with requirements of the New York City
Department of Sanitation.
3. A list of waste transporters, transfer stations, disposal facilities and
recyclers with addresses, phone numbers, and permits which the
Contractor intends to utilize during the Project for the purpose of
complying with the Construction Waste Management Plan. The
Construction Waste Management Plan shall list where the non-
recyclable materials will be disposed.
4. A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable and
non-recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated
and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials
01733-4 11/2017
DEP 6/17/2017
1700
MANAGEMENT
will be collected by a waste transporter and removed from the site)

and destination of such materials.
5. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall specifically note
the proper method of disposal for anticipated hazardous wastes or
potentially hazardous wastes such as resins, epoxies, waterproofing
agents, waste paints, solvents, and other hazardous fluids, expended
55 gallon drums, concrete curing compounds, etc. The Construction
Waste Management Plan shall state that the hazardous waste
transporter must hold a current New York State Part 364 Waste
Transporter Permit in accordance with NYCRR Part 364. The
permit must authorize the transporter to take the hazardous waste to
the Transportation, Storage and Disposal Facility (TSDF) identified
in the permit. The Construction Waste Management Plan must state
that the hazardous waste will be transported in compliance with
USDOT Hazardous Materials Transportation regulations in Title 49
of the CFR. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall
comply with the hazardous waste management requirements of
Detailed Specification 01355 – Hazardous Materials Control, and
shall be updated as needed to coordinate with site remediation plans
developed under the Contract.
6. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall specifically
identify the proper method of handling of universal wastes (e.g.,
mercury containing bulbs, batteries). Universal wastes must be
managed in compliance with 6 NYCRR Part 374-3 and with
USDOT Hazardous Materials Transportation regulations in Tile 49
of the CFR.
7. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall specifically note
the proper method of disposal of anticipated non-hazardous waste
such as oily rags. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall
state the transporter must hold a current New York State Part 364
Waste Transporter Permit to transport the waste to a TSDF that
accepts non-hazardous waste.
8. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall include the method
of recycling office materials such as clean white paper, mixed paper,
toner cartridges for laser printers, copiers and fax machines. Each
item shall be recycled in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
9. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall include the
coordination of product deliveries to designated prepared areas in
order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored
materials and the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets,
55-gallon drums, etc., where economically feasible.
01733-5 11/2017
DEP 6/17/2017
1701
MANAGEMENT
END OF SECTION
01733-6 11/2017
DEP 6/17/2017
1702
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01740 CLEANING AND SITE MAINTENANCE
SECTION 01740
Cleaning and Site Maintenance
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
B. Scheduling of Cleaning Operations
C. Cleaning Materials
D. Site Maintenance Requirements
E. Snow and Ice Removal
F. Disposal of Waste Materials
G. Final Cleaning

A. Detailed Specification 01270 - Measurement and Payment
B. Detailed Specification 01733 - Construction Waste Management
1.03 PAYMENT
A. Payment for electrical energy charges for the temporary power for the
Engineer’s field office trailer and restroom trailer shall be made under
Allowance E-A-3 of the Electrical Contract, as specified in Section 01270 –
B. Allowance for the Collection and Disposal of Debris and Rubbish and for
Maintenance of the Site.
1. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all labor, expendable materials
and/or supplies, and equipment to collect and dispose of all debris and
rubbish generated by all Contractors in the work area, not including
each Contractor’s staging and storage areas. The Engineer may require
additional site cleaning services beyond what is described herein. Such
cleaning shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor when ordered
in writing by the Resident Engineer.
01740-1 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1703
2. Payment for the Work performed under this Allowance item shall be
made as specified in Detailed Specification 01270 – Measurement and
Payment.
3. The Electrical Contractor shall include this Allowance in his bid as
specified in Detailed Specification 01270 -- Measurement and
Payment, for this work.
4. No separate payment will be made to the Contractors for the Final
Cleaning work called for herein under Article 3.04; the costs thereof
shall be included in the lump sum bid price for each Contract.
C. Allowance for Snow and Ice Removal
1. The Electrical Contractor shall include an Allowance in his bid, as
specified in Detailed Specification 01270 -- Measurement and
Payment, for Snow and Ice Removal work. Payment for the Work
performed under this Allowance item shall be made as specified in
Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment.

A. Under the Allowance item, the Electrical Contractor shall collect and dispose
of all debris and rubbish resulting from the work of all the Contractors, not
including each Contractor’s staging and storage areas. Cleaning shall be
performed daily and trash removal shall be performed weekly, or more
frequently, as directed by the Engineer, whenever the debris and rubbish
interferes with the Work under any Contract, plant operations or presents a
fire hazard and as noted below.
B. Specifically excluded is any material or debris resulting from the demolition
work specified, shown or required as part of the work for each respective
Contractor. Such material shall be disposed of by the Contractor responsible
for the demolition work.
C. Cleaning work shall be coordinated by the Contractors with the work
specified under Section 01733 - Construction Waste Management.
1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. In addition to the requirements herein, each Contractor shall maintain the
cleanliness of the work areas and surrounding premises within the work limits
so as to comply with federal, state, and local fire and safety laws, ordinances,
codes and regulations.
01740-2 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1704
B. The Contractors shall comply with all federal, state and local anti-pollution
laws, ordinances, codes and regulations when disposing of waste materials,
debris, rubbish, snow and ice.
1.06 SCHEDULING OF CLEANING OPERATIONS

A. The Contractors shall schedule trash removal and cleaning operations at
intervals as directed by the Engineer.
1. So that dust, wash water or other contaminants generated during
construction do not damage or mar painted or finished surfaces.
2. To prevent accumulation of dust, dirt, debris, rubbish and waste
materials on or within the work site or on the premises surrounding the
work site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Each Contractor shall use only cleaning materials recommended by
manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
B. Each type of cleaning material shall be used on only those surfaces
recommended by the cleaning material manufacturer.
C. Use only cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or
property.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Each Contractor shall keep their staging and storage areas free of
accumulations of dirt, dust, waste materials, debris and rubbish.
B. Each Contractor shall keep dust generating areas wetted down.
C. Each Contractor shall provide suitable containers in sufficient quantity for
storage of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
D. Each Contractor shall dispose of waste materials and surplus materials off site
at a regulatory-approved disposal site at intervals as needed.
3.02 SNOW AND ICE REMOVAL

A. The Electrical Contractor shall remove snow and ice from the following areas:
01740-3 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1705
1. The sidewalks and parking areas associated with the Engineers field
office.
2. All construction access roads.
3. Any Plant walkways which cannot be accessed by the Plant's snow
removal equipment due to construction activities.
4. Any additional areas designated by the Engineer.
5. Snow and ice removal shall be before 7:00 AM whenever there is a
snowfall storm and before 7:00 AM on the day following the
termination of the snowfall storm.
6. In addition, when directed by the Engineer, snow and/or ice removal
shall be started immediately (within one (1) hour of directive to
proceed) by the Contractor.
7. The Electrical Contractor shall haul the removed snow and ice for
disposal as per the applicable local requirements.
8. Spreading of Salt and Sand
a. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools,
equipment, and materials necessary to provide the following
services specifically requested and authorized in writing by the
Engineer:
b. Spread calcium chloride over all areas of the Resident
Engineer’s parking lot and spread sand on the steps and
platforms at the entrances to the Resident Engineer’s field
office.
c. Salt and sand shall be spread prior to a snowstorm.
d. Upon termination of a snowstorm, the Electrical Contractor
shall remove all sand from the steps and platforms at the
entrances to the Engineer’s field office.
e. Disposal of sand shall be the responsibility of the Electrical
Contractor.
3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Contractors shall not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the work
site.
B. Contractors shall not dispose of volatile or hazardous wastes such as mineral
spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains or on the ground.
01740-4 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1706
C. Contractors shall not discharge wastes into waterways.
3.04 FINAL CLEANING

A. At the completion of the Work, each Contractor shall remove all rubbish from
and about the site of the Work, and all temporary structures, construction
signs, tools, scaffolding, materials, supplies and equipment which it or any of
its Subcontractors may have used in the performance of the Work. Contractor
shall broom clean paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
B. Each Contractor shall thoroughly clean in its work areas all materials,
equipment and structures; all marred surfaces shall be touched up to match
adjacent surfaces; dirty filters and burned-out lights replaced as required; all
glass surfaces cleaned and floors cleaned and polished so as to leave work in a
clean and new appearing condition.
C. Each Contractor shall remove spatter, grease, stains, fingerprints, dirt, dust,
labels, tags, packing materials and other foreign items or substances from
interior and exterior surfaces, equipment, signs and lettering in its respective
work areas.
D. Each Contractor shall clean and restore all equipment and material
nameplates, labels and other identification markings in its respective work
areas.
END OF SECTION
01740-5 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1707
NO TEXT FOR THIS PAGE
01740-6 11/2017
DEP 9/24/2015
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1708
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01750 - SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE
MATERIALS
SECTION 01750
Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Spare parts and maintenance materials
B. Inventory, storage and delivery of spare parts
1.02 PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for performing any Work of this Section and
the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its Lump Sum price bid for the
Contract.

A. Section 01661 - Protection of Materials and Equipment.
1.04 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish spare parts and maintenance materials as specified in the individual
Detailed Specifications of each Contract.
B. Provide data for each distinct part in paper and electronic format.
C. Attach bar-code tag (sticker), transmitted by the Engineer, to each distinct part.
D. All parts and materials required under the Detailed Specifications of this
contract shall be turned over to the City in as-new condition and shall be
furnished in manufacturers' unopened cartons, boxes, crates or other protective
covering suitable for preventing corrosion or deterioration for the maximum
length of storage which may be normally anticipated. They shall be clearly
marked and identified
E. Schedule delivery of all parts from this contract over a reasonable period of
time in coordination with City Plant personnel and the Engineer. Parts and
materials shall be delivered to the City upon Substantial Completion of the
Work or when the City assumes beneficial occupancy or as directed by the City
or the Engineer. Contractor shall then place them in permanent storage rooms
or areas approved by the City.
F. Provide a letter of transmittal for each parts shipment for all contracts including
the following:
1. Date of letter and transfer of parts and materials.
01750-1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1709
MATERIALS
2. Contract title and number.

3. Contractor's name and address.
4. A complete inventory of the parts and materials, listing the applicable
Specification Section and equipment item for each.
5. A place for the City to sign and confirm receipt of the parts and
materials.
6. Plant personnel reserve the right to inspect each part upon delivery for
adherence to approved submittals and condition and reject any part or
parts in accordance with said inspection.
G. Each Contractor shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to parts and
materials required under its Contract until they are accepted by the City.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The DEL- 260 G, H and E Contractors shall prepare a list of all spare parts and
requisite data to be inventoried and stored under Paragraph 3.01 of this
Specification in a format provided by the Engineer. The spare parts data shall
be submitted in paper and electronic format. The electronic format shall be a
spreadsheet that allows data to be uploaded into a commercial database system
owned by the City.
B. The spare parts data shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 120 days prior
to delivery of spare parts to the storage location.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INVENTORY, STORAGE AND DELIVERY OF SPARE PARTS

A. The DEL-260-E Contractor shall provide the following services related to the
inventory and storage of spare parts provided under Contracts DEL-260 G, H
and E.
1. Data for each distinct part, per approved submittals, shall be entered into
an existing computer database provided by the City and as directed by
the Engineer. Data shall include, but not necessarily be limited to,
contract number, Specification Section number, description of
equipment for which part is being provided, equipment number (per
DEP numbering system), manufacturer of part, manufacturer’s part
number, supplier/vendor for part, unit price of part, quantity required to
be delivered. No parts will be accepted unless all parts data have been
first entered into the database and barcodes are applied. Reference
Spare Parts Schedule at the end of this Section.
01750-2 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1710
MATERIALS
2. Submit a schedule of intended dates of parts delivery. Parts delivery

shall require a minimum notice of 7 days.
3. Attach bar-code stickers, provided by the Engineer, to each approved
part prior to delivery. The sticker for any given part shall be affixed to
shipment packaging for that part. If additional stickers are required for
split deliveries or re-delivery of rejected parts they shall be provided by
the Engineer.
4. During construction, store parts in buildings or trailers with floor, roof
and closed sides and in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations. Protect from weather, condensation and humidity.
5. Plant personnel reserve the right to inspect each part upon delivery for
adherence to approved submittals and condition and reject any part or
parts in accordance with said inspection. Packaging shall be opened by
the Contractor to allow such inspection. Plant personnel reserve the
right to reject any part or parts per such inspection. Any parts rejected
shall be taken back by Contractor and a new part resubmitted.
6. Accepted delivered parts shall be placed in the storeroom by the
Contractor at the location directed by City Plant personnel. All spare
parts provided under Contract DEL-260G, DEL-260H or DEL-260E
shall be identified by contract number, assigned a bar-code sticker,
assigned a storeroom and location as directed by the City, delivered,
shelved, and logged into the shelf or bin via the existing database.
B. All items tagged and staged for pickup and delivery shall be organized in
containers and protected in accordance with Section 01661 - Protection of
Materials and Equipment.
C. At the designated warehouse location, spare parts shall be placed in the assigned
location as directed by the City. If the assigned location is inappropriate, an
alternate storage location shall be used, as designated by the City.
D. Upon placement of each item in a storage location, the item bar-code sticker or
tag shall be scanned or and entered into the database used by DEP’s Operating
Bureau.
3.02 ATTACHMENTS
A. Spare Parts Schedule Form.
END OF SECTION
01750-3 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1711
ATTACHMENTS - DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01750 - CONTRACTS DEL-260 G, H, E
SPARE PARTS SCHEDULE
CONTRACT ____________ SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION ________________________________________
EQUIPMENT SPEC. SEC __________________TRANS # ____________________________REVIEW # ___________

PART MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER VENDOR VENDOR COMPONENT COMPONENT QUANTITY ON
DESCRIPTION NAME PART NO. NAME PART NO. Y/N? SERIAL # ORDER (PER SPEC)
PAGE 1 OF 1 11/2017
DEP 3/15/2016
MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
1712
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01781 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SECTION 01781
Project Closeout
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Related Sections
B. Payment
C. Items To Be Completed
D. Final Record Documents
E. Special Tools and Appliances
F. Maintenance and Guaranty
A. Detailed Specification 01332 – Final Record Documents
1.03 PAYMENT
Contract.
1.04 ITEMS TO BE COMPLETED
A. As construction of the project enters the final stages of completion, the Contractor
shall, in concert with accomplishing the requirements set forth in the Contract
Documents, attend to or have already completed the following items as they apply to
his Contract:
1. Correcting or replacing defective work, including completion of items previously

overlooked or work which remains incomplete, all as evidenced by the Engineer's
"Punch" Lists.
2. Attend to any other items listed herein or brought to the Contractor's attention by
the Engineer.
01781-1 11/2017
1713
B. Before the Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued, the

Contractor shall complete all final grading, planting, and installation of long term
erosion control measures as specified in the Specifications.
C. In addition, and before the Certificate of Substantial Completion will be issued, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer certain records, certifications, etc., which are
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. A partial list of such items appears
below, but it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to submit all items which are
required by the Contract Documents:
1. Test results of project components.
2. One set of neatly marked-up Record Drawings showing as-built changes and
additions to the Work under his Contract.
3. Any special guarantees or bonds.
D. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that required certificates and
information under Article 1.03C., above, must actually be submitted earlier in
accordance with other Sections of the Specifications.
1.05 FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Upon completion of the Work and as a condition precedent to final acceptance, the
Contractor shall provide all labor and material required to furnish Final Record
Documents in accordance with the requirements of Detailed Specification 01332 –
Final Record Documents. The submittal must be approved by the Engineer. If the
Contractor chooses to use a Consultant to perform this Work, the choice of Consultant
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
B. Failure to perform this Work as specified above and in Detailed Specification 01332 –
Final Record Documents will result in a deduction from the final payment to the
Contractor. The amount of the deduction will be equal to the actual cost incurred by
the City to perform this Work.
1.06 SPECIAL TOOLS AND APPLIANCES
A. Special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain or repair
the Work furnished under this Contract shall be provided in accordance with Article 12
of the General Conditions, applicable General Specifications and the Detailed
Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of special tools and appliances to be
furnished, for approval by the Engineer, as a part of the Shop Drawing submittal.
01781-2 11/2017
1714
C. Special tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly
labeled and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys.
1.07 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTY
A. The Contractor must promptly repair, replace, restore or rebuild, as the Commissioner
may determine, any Work provided under this Contract in which defects of equipment,
materials or workmanship may appear or to which damage may occur because of such
defects, during the 1-year maintenance and guaranty period subsequent to the date of
final acceptance, except where longer periods of maintenance and guaranty are
provided for in the Detailed Specifications.
END OF SECTION
01781-3 11/2017
1715
01781-4 11/2017
1716
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01811 – PRELIMINARY AND FINAL FIELD TESTS
SECTION 01811
Preliminary and Final Field Tests
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Field Test Schedule & Updates
B. System Test Procedures
C. Contractor Responsibilities
D. Preliminary Field Tests of Equipment
E. Preliminary Field Tests of Systems
F. Final Field Tests of Equipment
G. Final Field Tests of Systems
1.02 PAYMENT
Section and the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in the lump sum price

A. Detailed Specification 01321 - Progress Schedule
B. Detailed Specification 01432 - Contractor's Work Quality
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. “System”: A System for purposes of testing is defined as consisting of the
component equipment, valves, piping, instrumentation, controls, ducts,
accessories, etc., which are required for the proper functioning of each piece of
equipment and the System as a whole. The purpose of the System testing is to
demonstrate the capability of the equipment, interconnections and accessories
to perform as specified.
1.05 DESCRIPTION
A. All field tests, including equipment and Systems tests, shall be performed in
accordance with the requirements of the Specifications and this Section. The
requirements contained herein shall apply, whether or not this Section is
specifically referenced elsewhere in the Detailed Specifications.
B. Field tests shall include preliminary and final field tests of equipment and
Systems.
01811-1 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1717
1. Preliminary field tests of equipment and Systems shall be made with

water and air in lieu of the wastewater components and chemicals for
which the equipment and Systems are designed.
2. Final field tests of equipment and Systems shall utilize the wastewater,
wastewater components, chemicals and air for which the equipment and
Systems are designed.
3. All tests shall be performed in strict compliance with applicable
manufacturer's and Engineer's instructions.
C. For a successful test of equipment or System, the equipment or System shall
operate trouble free for the continuous period of time, as specified below. If
there are any interruptions in operation during the test, the test shall be repeated
until the equipment or System operates trouble free for the specified time
period.
D. System Test Procedures
1. The following are to be considered a part of all System test procedures:
a. Variable capacity equipment shall be operated over the full
capacity range of the maximum, minimum and at least three (3)
intermediate points for a minimum of 30 minutes at each point.
b. Multiple equipment groupings are to be operated both singly
and together up to the maximum capacity of the System.
c. Headered and cross-connected groups of units are to be
operated using all connecting combinations.
d. All equipment items, including standby units are to be tested.
It may be necessary to repeat System tests at maximum
condition to insure that standby units are included in System
tests.
e. Each operating unit shall be run for at least one hour alone
(equipment field test) and for four hours as a System at
maximum capacity after reaching stable operating conditions.
f. All equipment, interconnecting piping and accessories are to be
checked for leakage and specified rate performance capability.
Instrumentation and controls shall be tested as part of the
equipment.
E. Contractor Responsibilities
1. For preliminary field tests of equipment and Systems, the Contractor
shall furnish all labor, lubricants, fuel, power, water, materials, plant and
instrument air, instruments and equipment required for the tests.
01811-2 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1718
2. For final field tests of equipment and Systems, the Contractor shall
furnish all labor, lubricants, materials, fuel, power, materials,
instruments and equipment required for the tests.
3. All testing shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the
Engineer, DEP Operations personnel and, when applicable,
representatives of the Town of Mount Pleasant. Preliminary field
testing of equipment and Systems and final field testing of equipment
and Systems shall be performed within the time periods designated in
the preliminary construction schedule (CPM) during regular weekday
daytime working hours.
F. Coordination
1. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the field testing activities
with the HVAC and General Contractors in order to ensure the
availability of their equipment for field tests. A Contractor furnishing
equipment under one Contract that is required for testing in a System
furnished by another Contractor shall coordinate with the other
Contractor to ensure that its equipment is available for testing with the
System. All such requirements for coordination shall be indicated in the
preliminary and final field activity schedules specified herein.
2. The Contractor for the equipment to be tested (General or HVAC) shall
be responsible for coordinating with the Electrical Contractor for
furnishing power required to perform its field tests.
3. Each Contractor shall study the requirements of these Contracts insofar
as they affect its work, or insofar as its work may affect that of the
related Contractors. Coordination with the other Contractors will be
required in order to perform the field tests. Any Contractor having
equipment installed under its Contract and tested as part of a System
furnished by another Contractor shall assist in the testing procedure.

A. Nothing stated herein shall affect the requirements contained in Detailed
Specification 01432 - Contractors Work Quality; or the specific pressure testing
requirements for piping Systems specified in the General and Detailed
Specifications. Such tests shall be performed at the scheduled time, prior to
backfilling, encasement or enclosure, if applicable. However, checking the
Systems for leakage at the pressures developed, particularly for leakage of the
visible type, shall be performed as part of the tests included herein.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit a preliminary and final field test schedule to the
Engineer within 120 days after the date for commencing work in the Notice to
01811-3 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1719
Proceed. The test schedule shall be updated every 2 months or sooner if

necessary, until completion of the required testing. The field test schedule shall
itemize all key tasks in chronological order, based on the Construction CPM
Schedule specified in Detailed Specification 01321 – Progress Schedule, to
meet all the requirements of this Section. All preliminary and final field testing
to be conducted shall be organized and scheduled in accordance with the
approved test procedure.
B. The field test schedule shall include proposed test dates, preliminary or final
field test, equipment or System being tested, specification references,
equipment identification numbers, and indication of whether the test procedure
has been submitted for approval and approval status.
C. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing 30 days prior to any testing.
The Contractor shall not proceed with any testing until the test procedure has
been approved by the Engineer.
D. Before each test commences, the Contractor shall submit a detailed test
procedure and manpower schedule to the Engineer for approval. In addition,
other Contractors for equipment required to be field tested as part of a System
shall furnish detailed test procedures for their equipment and assist in the testing
of the System.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY FIELD TESTS OF EQUIPMENT

A. Each item of equipment shall be field tested with water and air and shall operate
trouble free in accordance with the procedures prescribed in the General and
Detailed Specifications, Preliminary tests shall demonstrate that equipment and
appliances were properly installed, meet their specified operating cycles, and
are free from defects such as overheating, overloading and undue vibration.
B. A successful test shall consist of at least one continuous hour of trouble free
operation unless a longer period is so specified in the General or Detailed
Specifications.
3.02 PRELIMINARY FIELD TESTS OF SYSTEMS

A. The Systems shall be tested by operating the Systems equipment together as a
unit with all related piping, valves, electrical controls and mechanical
operations.
B. The tests shall prove that all equipment and appurtenances of each System are
properly installed, free from defects, meet their specified operating cycles and
characteristics when operating as part of the System.
01811-4 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1720
C. Systems with automatic control Systems shall be operated continuously by the

automatic control System for four continuous hours, or longer if so specified in
the General or Detailed Specifications.
D. To satisfy the requirements for preliminary testing of equipment and Systems,
the Contractor shall submit data per the approved test procedure and receive
approval from the Engineer.
3.03 FINAL FIELD TESTS OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. The following requirements shall be met prior to the final field testing of
equipment and Systems:
1. All required operating instructions, maintenance manuals, bulletins, and
Shop Drawings shall be approved and distributed unless otherwise
specifically allowed by the Engineer.
2. All spare parts shall be delivered unless otherwise specifically allowed
by the Engineer
3. The equipment and Systems shall be inspected, operated, successfully
tested, and adjusted by the manufacturer’s representative in the presence
of the Engineer and representatives of the City. All instruction sessions
for operating personnel shall also be completed unless otherwise
specifically allowed by the Engineer. All instrumentation shall be field
calibrated and previously tested.
4. After completion of Item 3 above, the equipment or System shall then
be given a final field test.
B. Equipment and Systems shall be subject to final field tests in accordance with
the procedures prescribed in the Detailed and General Specifications and
approved test procedure for each test and as supplemented herein.
C. Equipment shall be given a running test, at its rated capacity, of normal (start-
and-stop) operation and during such test shall demonstrate its ability to operate
without vibration or overheating, and shall prove without question its fitness for
services in accordance with the approved Test Procedure. Unless otherwise
specified, final field tests of equipment which will be operating continually
shall be given a minimum running test of three continuous 8-hour tests for each
unit. Other equipment shall be given a running test for a minimum period of
four continuous hours, or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. For final field
tests of equipment and Systems to be deemed successful, they shall be run
continuously and trouble – free in accordance with the approved test procedure
for each test, and data shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials needed to supply all water
or other media needed for final field testing.
E. After completion of final System and equipment tests, the equipment and
Systems shall be operated by the City for a two-week period under normal
01811-5 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1721
operating conditions. The Contractor shall schedule and have delivered

sufficient training and instruction to DEP personnel to ensure that during the
two week test the equipment and Systems will be operated properly and safely.
Should the equipment and Systems function normally during this period, the
equipment and Systems shall have successfully passed the final field tests and
will be accepted for additional testing and/or operation by the City. The
Contractor shall warrant and guarantee that all equipment shall function
satisfactorily for a period of one year from Substantial Completion.
3.04 SYSTEMS
A. The following equipment groupings shall be tested together as Systems, in
accordance with the General and Detailed Specifications:
1. Electrical Systems:
a. Electric wires & cables, MV load interrupter switch, MV
transformer, MV sectionalizing cabinet, Dry type transformers,
Standby generator, Low voltage switchgear, Panelboards,
Electrical control equipment, Motor control center and
Automatic transfer switch.
2. HVAC Systems:
a. HVAC Monitoring and Control System (HMCS): The HMCS
shall be tested together with all equipment that is being
controlled by the HMCS. Also included in the System testing
is all equipment that is interlocked with the HMCS.
b. Chlorine Storage Room and Chlorinator Room Ventilation
System: This System is comprised of HV-1, EF-1, EF-2,
ventilation System chlorine detection panel, associated
dampers, valves, ductwork, piping and controls.
c. Electric Service Room Heating and Ventilation System: This
System is comprised of SF-1, EF-3, EUH-1, associated
dampers, ductwork and controls.
d. Electric Room 2 Heating and Ventilation System: This System
is comprised of EF-4, EUH-2, associated dampers, and
controls.
e. Hydronic System (provides heating hot water to HV-1): This
System is comprised of HWP-1, HV-1 hot water coil,
associated piping, valves and controls. Existing gas fired hot
water boiler and existing zone pumps shall be included in the
System testing to confirm that work associated with draining,
refilling, and air purging have not affected the operation of the
System and that hot water is restored through each zone
without air binding.
01811-6 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1722
END OF SECTION
01811-7 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1723
01811-8 11/2017
DEP 4/26/16
1724
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01821 – EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TRAINING
SECTION 01821
Equipment Start-Up and Training
PART 1 GENERAL
B. Payment
C. General Requirements
D. Start-up Services and Initial Operation
E. Training of Personnel
F. Videorecording of Training
G. Lesson Plans
H. Training Aids
I. Qualifications of Factory Trained and Certified Manufacturer’s Representatives
A. Detailed Specification 01330 - Submittal Procedures
B. Detailed Specification 01335 – Records in Electronic Formats
C. Detailed Specification 01711 - Maintenance of Operations and Construction

Sequencing
D. Detailed Specification 01831 - Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals
1.03 PAYMENT
Contract.
01821-1 11/2017
1725
A. The Contractor shall include, in the price bid, the cost to provide the services of a
factory trained and certified manufacturer’s representatives of all the equipment
furnished under its Contract, who shall provide the following services, at a
minimum:
1. On-site startup and inspection services for each equipment as indicated in

Schedule 01821-1 – Minimum Installation, Inspection, Testing and Initial
Operation Manufacturer Services.
2. Supervise and assist in the installation of the equipment to ensure proper

installation.
3. Check the installation and make all necessary adjustments of the

equipment prior to placing the equipment in service.
4. Supervise the preliminary and final equipment and system field test work
as specified herein. Additional testing supervision resulting from the
failure to meet the specified performance requirements shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
B. The Contractor shall submit an itemized list and a schedule of manufacturer’s

services.
C. Each Contractor shall provide the services of a factory trained and certified
manufacturer’s representatives for the training of an adequate number of City
operation and maintenance personnel. This service shall consist of the training or
the amount of training time recommended by the manufacturer or the training
indicated in Schedule 01821-2, whichever is greater, for each type of equipment.
One (1) day of training is defined to be a minimum of eight (8) hours on-site.
Any additional time required to achieve a satisfactory level of training shall be at
the Contractor’s expense.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate all equipment start-up services and training with
the City, the Engineer and the manufacturer.
E. Minimum Manufacturer service requirements for equipment during Installation

and Inspection, Preliminary and/or Final Field Tests and Initial Operating period
are detailed in Schedule 01821-1 Installation, Inspection, Testing and Initial
Operation Manufacturer Services. Any additional time required during
Installation and Inspection, Preliminary and/or Final Field Tests and Startup &
Initial Operating periods shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
F. Minimum Manufacturer service requirements for equipment during training are

detailed in Schedule 01821-2 Training Services. Any additional time required
during Training Services shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
01821-2 11/2017
1726
1.05 START-UP SERVICES AND INITIAL OPERATION
A. Equipment start-up and initial operating period shall begin after satisfactory
completion of the preliminary and final field tests of equipment and preliminary
field test of systems, during each stage of construction and prior to completion of
construction. Equipment start-up and initial operating period shall be completed
when the manufacturer and Engineer have mutually agreed that the equipment is
in suitable condition for continuous operation.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained and certified
manufacturer’s representatives to assist in the start-up and initial operation of the
equipment. The manufacturer’s representatives shall devote, at a minimum, the
full time specified under the Detailed Specifications for start-up and initial
operation. Any additional time required to achieve successful operation shall be
at the expense of the Contractor. One day of assistance by a manufacturer’s
representative shall be defined as a minimum of eight (8) hours on-site.
1.06 TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
A. The City shall identify and make available the applicable personnel to be trained
in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. The City's personnel shall
operate all equipment.
B. The training shall consist of classroom and field instructions and shall follow the
approved lesson plans as described herein. Field instructions shall include
“Hands On” demonstration of the equipment operation and maintenance as
covered in the classroom instructions and in the operation and maintenance
manuals. Field instructions shall also identify all items required for equipment
operation and maintenance. All tools and spare parts required for hands on
demonstrations shall be supplied by each Contractor.
C. All training shall take place at the work site at a place specified by the City and
shall be conducted by factory trained and certified manufacturer’s representatives.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate the manufacturer’s representative training

services with the City and the Engineer, providing a minimum of fourteen (14)
days prior notice of the training and subject to the approval of the Engineer and
the City.
E. The Contractor shall deliver all training material to the Engineer and the City with
a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior to the scheduled training.
1.07 VIDEORECORDING OF TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide a factory trained and certified manufacturer’s

representative for a minimum number of days as indicated in Schedule 01821-2,
01821-3 11/2017
1727
for each item of equipment specified unless otherwise specified in the Detailed
Specifications, to prepare training scripts and to participate in video recording of
training.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, the training scripts for
video recording. After final approval by the Engineer, the Contractor with the
certified manufacturer’s representative shall conduct video recording of the
classroom and field training sessions. The Contractor shall edit the videorecorded
material to remove dead air time, conversations, remarks and non-pertinent
material to the training. The Contractor shall then submit, for approval by the
Engineer, the unedited and edited videorecorded training sessions to ensure no
important material is lost.
C. Videorecorded training sessions shall include title of the session, date, location,
trainer name, equipment covered and manufacturer, and shall incorporate any
visuals (i.e. drawings, slides, etc.) and/or other training aids used during personnel
training.
D. The Contractor shall provide the City with one (1) unedited and one (1) edited
copy of the videorecorded training in a mini-DV digital format. In addition, the
Contractor shall provide four (4) copies of the edited material in DVD format.
The Contractor shall deliver the copies within six weeks after the scheduled
training session. The City shall have the right to permanent ownership and use of
the copies.
E. The videorecorded training shall be considered “work made for hire” under
applicable provisions of the Copyright Act, and the City shall be the copyright
owner thereof and of all aspects, elements and components thereof in which
copyright protection might subsist. To the extent that such materials do not
qualify as “work made for hire”, the Contractor hereby irrevocably transfers,
assigns and conveys exclusive copyright ownership in and to such materials to the
City, free and clear of any liens, claims or other encumbrances. The agreement
between the Contractor and the person video recording shall contain a provision
containing these requirements.
F. As an alternative to video recording of training at the work site, the manufacturer

may submit, for approval by the Engineer and the City, prerecorded
videorecorded training sessions covering the equipment supplied. Prerecorded
video material may be combined with site-specific videorecorded training in order
to meet the requirements of the lesson plans. Approval of such videorecorded
training sessions shall be contingent upon their content meeting the lesson plan
requirement of this Section. The site-specific videorecorded training shall be
subject to the provisions of paragraph 1.06.E. The City shall have the right to
permanent ownership and unlimited license to reproduce and use for internal
training purposes this material.
01821-4 11/2017
1728
1.08 LESSON PLANS
A. The Contractor shall submit the equipment manufacturer's lesson plans, which
shall include specific information about each item of equipment. Lesson plans
shall include but not be limited to the following information and meet the
following requirements:
1. The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer, the equipment
manufacturer's lesson plans in no less than sixty (60) days prior to the date
that the training is to take place. Lesson plans shall be approved before
scheduling the training.
2. Lesson plans shall indicate the training audience that the instruction is to
address and estimated duration of each segment of the training. The
training audience refers to City’s operation and maintenance personnel.
3. Lesson plans shall indicate when training aids are used or referred to
during the course of instruction.
4. Lesson plans shall include “Hands On” demonstrations, as described

herein.
5. Lesson plans shall include but not be limited to the following topic areas:
Training Session Overview, Detailed Equipment Description, Equipment
Operation, Equipment Monitoring, Troubleshooting, Safety and
Housekeeping, O&M Manual Use, Preventive Maintenance Requirements,
Maintenance Inspection Program, Maintenance Troubleshooting,
Equipment Disassembly and Assembly, Equipment Calibration, and an
Assessment of Training Effectiveness.
B. Training Session Overview: The training session overview shall:
1. Assess prior knowledge of trainees.
2. Describe the goal of the training session in detail.
3. Determine what information the personnel being trained would like to take
away from the session.
C. Detailed Equipment Description: All equipment components shall be described in

detail in the following manner:
1. Purpose and function of equipment and auxiliary equipment and systems.
2. Identify and describe in detail each component’s function.
01821-5 11/2017
1729
3. Where applicable, group related components into subsystems. Describe

subsystem functions and their interaction with other subsystems.
4. Physical arrangement of equipment components and electrical supply.
5. General function of controls, including automatic and manual operation,

interlocks, and shutdowns.
D. Equipment Operation: Training for equipment operation shall consist of the

following:
1. A description of the equipment’s fundamental operating principals.
2. A description of unit and component parts, including controls, accessories,

and appurtenances with regard to:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Complete nomenclature.
3. A discussion and hands on demonstration of the equipment operating

procedures, which shall include:
a. Operating requirement for equipment to perform satisfactorily.
b. Typical operating characteristics.
c. Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instruction.
d. Test procedures and results of factory tests where required.
e. Use of controls.
f. Regulation, control, stopping, and emergency instructions.
g. Description of operation sequence, where applicable.
h. Shutdown instructions for both short and extended durations.
i. Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable.
j. Safety considerations and precautions. All safety considerations
and procedures pertinent to the equipment or system provided shall
be identified and described in detail (i.e., lockout procedures,
protection from moving parts, etc.).
k. Special operating instructions.
E. Equipment Monitoring: Training shall include a discussion of important

equipment monitoring procedures, including the following:
1. Recommended routine instrument readings and operational checking.
2. Early warning signs of developing operational or equipment problems.
3. Procedures for handling non-routine problems such as alarms, power

failures, component failures, etc.
F. Troubleshooting: Training for troubleshooting shall include the following:

01821-6 11/2017
1730
1. Provide recommended troubleshooting procedures.
2. A discussion of component-specific troubleshooting checklists.
3. A description of applicable equipment testing and diagnostic procedures to

facilitate troubleshooting.
4. A description of a clear and organized troubleshooting matrix for each

item or system.
G. Safety and Housekeeping: Training for the Safety and Housekeeping shall include
the following:
1. Safety features of the equipment.
2. Safe practices.
3. Identify and describe in detail, equipment safety features and control

interlocks.
4. Housekeeping practices.
H. Description of the use of the equipment manufacturer's O&M Manual in regards

to operation.
I. Preventive Maintenance Requirements: Training for preventive maintenance shall

include the following:
1. Maintenance needs for equipment.
2. Identification of procedure to satisfy maintenance need (relate to

equipment manufacturer's O&M Manual, which should have detailed
descriptions of maintenance procedures).
3. Outline or summary of procedures.
4. Recommended schedule for performing preventive maintenance.
5. Preventive maintenance record forms (if available).
6. Detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be

greased or oiled, recommended type, grade, and temperature range of
lubricants, and frequency of lubrication.
7. Detailed cleaning procedures and the recommended frequency.

01821-7 11/2017
1731
8. A “Hands On” demonstration of typical preventive maintenance

procedures.
J. Maintenance Inspection Program: Training for the maintenance inspection

program shall include the following:
1. Parts, components and areas of equipment to inspect for routine preventive

maintenance.
2. Recommended frequency of inspection.
3. Inspection procedures.
4. Problem identification.
5. Provide a list of recommended spare parts, ordering information, and

provide a “Hands On” demonstration for the installation of spare parts.
K. Maintenance Troubleshooting: Training for maintenance troubleshooting shall

1. Sections in O&M Manual detailing troubleshooting procedures.
2. Summarize troubleshooting procedures.
3. Testing equipment used in troubleshooting.

a. Demonstration of use of specialized testing equipment if supplied
with equipment.
b. Other testing equipment.
4. Tests used to verify troubleshooting findings.
L. Equipment Disassembly and Assembly for Corrective Maintenance: Training for

equipment disassembly and assembly for corrective maintenance shall include the
following:
1. Summarize disassembly and assembly procedures.
2. Provide a “Hands On” demonstration of disassembly and assembly

procedures.
3. O&M Manual coverage of subject.
4. Testing to verify success of corrective maintenance.
01821-8 11/2017
1732
M. Equipment Calibration procedures shall be discussed and demonstrated and shall

include:
1. Calibration needs and tolerances.
2. Calibration equipment required.
3. O&M Manual listing of calibration ranges, tolerances and settings.
4. A “Hands On” equipment calibration demonstration.
N. Assessment of Training Effectiveness: A post training assessment shall be

conducted to assess the effectiveness of the training.
1.09 TRAINING AIDS
A. Training aids shall be used as an integral part of the training program. Training
aids shall include text and/or pictorial handouts specific to the equipment
supplied. Handouts shall be legible and printed on good quality stock. Handouts
shall be submitted when lesson plans are submitted.
B. Additional training aids shall be used for maximum training effectiveness and
shall include the following as appropriate:
1. Audio-visual aids, for example, films, video recordings, slides, overhead

transparencies, posters, blueprints, diagrams, and catalog cuts.
2. Models and samples, for example, cutaways, spare parts, tools, miniature
models, equipment assemblies, and damaged parts.
C. The use of additional training aids shall be identified in the lesson plans, and a
description of the additional training aids shall be given.
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS OF FACTORY TRAINED AND CERTIFIED

MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES
A. The Contractor shall submit the qualifications of their proposed factory trained
and certified manufacturer’s representatives for approval by the Engineer sixty
(60) days prior to the date of proposed training. The documentation shall include
the experience of the manufacturer’s representative in operation and maintenance
of the equipment and a summary of training experience.
B. Only those manufacturers’ representatives whose qualifications have been

approved by the Engineer shall conduct training.
01821-9 11/2017
1733
1.11 ATTACHMENTS
A. Schedule 01821-1 – Minimum Installation, Inspection, Testing and Initial

Operation Manufacturer Services
B. Schedule 01821-2 – Minimum Training Services
END OF SECTION
01821-10 11/2017
1734
ATTACHMENTS - DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01821 CONTRACT DEL-260 G, H, E
Schedule 01821-1 – Minimum Installation, Inspection, Testing and Initial Operation Manufacturer Services
Type of Service
Equipment Installation & Preliminary and/or Final Startup & Initial
Total # of
Spec # Equipment Inspection Field Tests* Operating Period
Days
# of Duration Total # of Duration Total # of Duration Total
Visits (days) Days Visits (days) Days Visits (days) Days
13862H Non-Metallic Ductwork 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 2
15060H Hangers and Supports 1 1 1 2 2 4 0 0 0 5
15185H Hydronic Pumps 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 2
15515H Piping and Motorized Valve 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 2
Heating and Ventilating
15720H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Units
15761H Electric Heaters 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 2
Ductwork and Duct
15810H 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 2
Accessories
15830H Fans 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
HVAC Monitoring and
15950H 1 5 5 5 1 5 2 1 2 12
Control System
16061E Grounding 0 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 0 4
16121E Electrical Wires and Cables 0 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 0 4
16131E Electrical Conduit System 0 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 0 4
16221E Electrical Motors 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 1 2 10
16221G Electrical Motors 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 1 2 10
16231E Standby Power 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 1 2 10
16271E Dry Type Transformer 0 0 0 4 1 4 2 1 2 6
Power Distribution System
16292E 0 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 0 4
Coordination
Medium Voltage Load
16361E 0 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 0 4
Interrupter Switch
16430E Low Voltage Switchgear 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 2 4 12
16442E Electric Control Equipment 0 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 0 4
16482E Motor Control center 4 1 4 2 2 4 2 1 2 10
Lighting Fixtures and
16511E 0 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 0 4
Devices
16496E Automatic Transfer 1 3 3 1 2 2 1 1 1 6
PAGE 1 OF 4 11/2017
1735
ATTACHMENTS - DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01821 CONTRACT DEL-260 G, H, E
Schedule 01821-1 – Minimum Installation, Inspection, Testing and Initial Operation Manufacturer Services
Type of Service
Equipment Installation & Preliminary and/or Final Startup & Initial
Total # of
Spec # Equipment Inspection Field Tests* Operating Period
Days
# of Duration Total # of Duration Total # of Duration Total
Visits (days) Days Visits (days) Days Visits (days) Days
Switches
TOTALS 36 70 15 121
* Totals do not include requirements cited elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
PAGE 2 OF 4 11/2017
1736
ATTACHMENTS - DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01821 –
SCHEDULE 01821-2 – MINIMUM TRAINING SERVICES
Type of Service
Training
Spec # Equipment
Duration
# of Visits Total Days
(days)
13862H Non-Metallic Ductwork 1 1 1
15185H Hydronic Pumps 1 1 1
15515H Motorized Valves 1 1 1
15720H Heating and Ventilating Units 1 1 1
15761H Electric Heaters 1 1 1
15810H Ductwork and Duct Accessories 1 1 1
15830H Fans 1 1 1
HVAC Monitoring and Control
15950H 1 2 2
System
16231E Standby Power System 1 1 1
16430E Low Voltage Switchgear 1 2 2
Medium Voltage Load Interrupter
16444E 1 2 2
Switch
16482E Motor Control center 1 2 2
16496E Automatic Transfer Switches 1 2 2
16511E Lighting Fixtures and Devices 1 1 1
TOTAL 19
*Totals do not include requirements cited elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
PAGE 3 OF 4 11/2017
1737
ATTACHMENTS - DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01821 –
PAGE 4 OF 4 11/2017
1738
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 01831 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUALS
SECTION 01831
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Operation and Maintenance (O&M)Manual Requirements
B. Manual Publication and Format Requirements
C. Submittals
A. The Contractor shall prepare, submit and obtain the Engineer’s approval, as designated
by “Furnish as Submitted” of an Manual for each item of equipment supplied under
this Contract. Approval is a prerequisite for continuing payments for equipment
furnished by the Contractor, providing instructional services and equipment start-up.
B. Each Manual shall be prepared especially for each installation and shall include all
pertinent and legible instructions, technical bulletins and other printed matter required
to provide fully accurate and comprehensive information for the safe and proper
operation, maintenance and repair of the equipment item.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS REQUIREMENTS
A. The O&M Manuals shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Nameplate data of equipment installed.
2. One (1) copy of each warranty, bond and service contract.
3. On a separate page, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of the three (3)
nearest suppliers and manufacturers, including local source (if applicable), of
supplies and replacement parts.
4. Catalogs, diagrams, schematics, drawings, instruction bulletins and manuals

marked by underlining, checking, the use of arrows or the obliteration or removal
of extraneous data, so as to pertain only to the specific equipment item for which
the manual is supplied.
5. Complete electrical schematics and wiring diagrams. Complete wiring between
01831-1 11/2017
1739
MANUALS
terminal points must be shown. Computerized diagrams are not acceptable.
6. Drawings, diagrams and illustrations shall be black on white, and clearly legible.
Up to 11” x 17” shall be bound into the manual. Larger size documents shall be
folded and inserted into clear plastic pockets or envelops bound into the manual
and marked as to contents.
B. Reference to features and elements of equipment, such as operational limits of time,

speed, pressure, temperature, etc. shall be clear, complete and compatible with
authoritative published engineering reference documents. All functional components,
electrical systems, equipment, etc. shall be shown on diagrams and discussed in the text
so as to identify their proper system relationship. Operation, service, trouble-shooting,
checkout and in-line and bench repair procedures, identifying specific system
characteristics of the equipment shall be provided. The information shall include
recommended procedures and frequencies for preventive maintenance such as
inspection, adjustment, lubrication, calibration and cleaning.
C. Equipment parts shall be identified by manufacturer’s part number and located with
relation to other components of the equipment utilizing “exploded” type drawings for
clarity, if required. Complete parts lists shall be included, which indicate the part
number, the part description, applicable serial and model numbers, current unit prices
and the name, address and telephone number of the nearest equipment manufacturer’s
representative and nearest service and spare parts warehouse. Complete instructions for
the ordering of all replaceable parts shall be noted in this section of the Manual.
Recommendations as to spare parts and spare inventory levels shall be made. Where
pertinent, lead time and shelf life values and preservation, packaging and labeling
methods shall be also recommended.
D. All copyrighted material used in the Manual or in any operation required in the
performance of the Contract will be preceded by the Contractor obtaining the copyright
holder’s written permission to use such material. The Contractor shall hold the City
and the Engineer free of any legal responsibility for its use.
1.04 MANUAL PUBLICATION AND FORMAT REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall provide each O&M Manual in paper and electronic form.
B. For the paper form each O&M Manual shall meet the following requirements:
1. The O&M Manual shall be bound in a durable, permanent, hard cover binder of
one (1) (more if required) volume. Binders shall be of the three-ring type or three
post type and shall not be overfilled. Covers shall be oil, moisture and wear
resistant. The content of the manual shall be printed on 8-1/2 by 11 inches 30
pound (minimum) paper and biding holes shall be reinforced with plastic, cloth or
01831-2 11/2017
1740
MANUALS
metal.
2. All contents shall be original quality copies. That is, the material shall either be
original manufacturer printed or typed materials or xerographic copies that are
indistinguishable from the original. O&M Manuals that contain copies that are not
clear, not completely legible, off-center, skewed, or where text or drawings are cut
by the binding holes shall be subjected to disapproval. Pages that contain approval
or date stamps, comments, or other markings that cover any portion of text or
drawing are unacceptable. Electronically transmitted facsimile (fax) copies are also
unacceptable.
3. Each volume shall have a complete index of the O&M Manual's contents
organized into sections or categories of information such as operating instructions,
preventive maintenance, drawings, and parts list. Dividers and indexes tabs shall
be used to separate sections. The index shall indicate the title of each section and a
complete listing of the contents of each section in order of presentation within the
section. Applicable equipment item numbers, as shown in the Contract
Documents shall be prominently included at their appropriate location in the index.
The title of the Manual shall be securely affixed to the binder in two places: the
front cover and the binder back edge. The title shall identify the Project by number
and name, location of the Site, state the volume is an O&M Manual, generally
classify the equipment and state the manufacturer's name and equipment model
number.
C. For the electronic form each O&M Manual shall be scanned into separate Adobe
Acrobat “PDF” files using a minimum scan resolution of 300 dpi (dots per inch) not to
exceed 400 dpi. The file name of each scanned O&M Manual file shall be the
corresponding equipment number with a pdf extension. Each O&M Manual shall
consist of multiple files arranged as per the index with search capability and shall
include all the information, drawings and content of the Manual paper form.
D. Intermediate submittals, for approval by the Engineer, of the paper form of the Manual
need not be hard bound.
E. After an O&M Manual submittal receives final approval status, signified by the
annotation “Furnish as Submitted”, the Contractor shall furnish five (5) paper copies and
six (6) electronic copies of the Manual on a CD-ROM in Adobe PDF format to the
Engineer. In preparing the electronic copies of the O&M Manuals, the Contractor shall
make every reasonable effort to obtain from the originator (i.e., manufacturer) the
documents in their original electronic format and incorporate these in the Manuals.
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, documents shall be scanned from a paper
version only when the Contractor cannot obtain the electronic version from the
originator (i.e., manufacturer).
F. The following encapsulated schematics and diagrams shall be furnished:
01831-3 11/2017
1741
MANUALS
1. One (1) electrical schematic to be mounted in electrical panels.
G. The City shall have the right to permanent ownership and unlimited license to reproduce
and use, for internal purposes, the approved O&M Manual.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer for approval shall consist of three (3)
complete sets of each O&M Manual and three (3) copies of an itemized listing providing
cross reference identification between the Specification sections of the Contract
Documents, the approved Shop Drawings, and the O&M Manual submittal.
B. A transmittal will be returned to the Contractor indicating the status of the Manual and
will include a tabulation of any pages being returned with review comments and noting
any extra pages required to clarify or amplify the comments. Copies of only the pages
containing comments and any additional pages needed to clarify or amplify the
comments will be attached to the transmittal. The status of the Manual will be noted on
the front page of the Manual, which will also be attached to the transmittal, and will be
stamped either, “Furnish as Submitted”; “Furnish as Corrected”, when the Manual
submittal substantially conforms to the requirements of this Section and requires minor
corrections; or “Revise and Resubmit”, when the Manual submittal is considered
inadequate, inaccurate or lacking essential information.
C. The Contractor shall rectify all submittals annotated “Furnish as Corrected” or “Revise
and Resubmit” within 15 days of receipt of such notice by replacing pages or adding
additional data, as required. The Manual's Index of Contents and the itemized, cross-
referenced listing shall be revised to reflect all revisions or additions made. Then, three
copies of the revised material shall be resubmitted to the Engineer for approval.
D. When the status of the Manual is stamped “Rejected”, a transmittal to the Contractor
will return the copies of the Manual intact with the reason for the rejection stated. The
Manual will be stamped "Rejected" when the submittal is considered illegible, or does
not contain a complete index of contents and/or an itemized list of cross references, or is
so incomplete and lacking in required documentation as to preclude a meaningful review
by the Engineer. Within fifteen (15) days of receipt of such notice the Contractor shall
revise the Manual and resubmit to the Engineer for approval.
E. After the O&M Manual receives final approval the Contractor shall submit, for approval
by the Engineer, the electronic form which will be reviewed for conformation to the
requirements of this Section. A transmittal with review comments and stamped either,
“Furnish as Submitted”; “Furnish as Corrected” or “Revise and Resubmit” will be
returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall rectify all submittals annotated “Furnish
as Corrected” or “Revise and Resubmit” within fifteen (15) days of receipt of such
notice. The revised material shall be resubmitted to the Engineer for approval.
01831-4 11/2017
1742
MANUALS
END OF SECTION
01831-5 11/2017
1743
MANUALS
01831-6 11/2017
1744
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02105G – SOIL SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 02105G
Soil Sampling and Analysis
NOTE: All Work for this Section shall be in accordance with the requirements of General
Specification 02105 – Soil Sampling and Analysis except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Replace Paragraph 1.02.A with the following:
A. There shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section; all costs shall be
included in the lump sum price bid for Contract Item G-LS-1, as described in
Detailed Specification 01270 – Measurement and Payment.

Delete 1.03.A and renumber 1.03.B as 1.03.A, 1.03.C as 1.03.B, and 1.03.D as 1.03.C
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Replace Paragraph 1.11.C with the following:
C. Disposal of Decontamination Solutions: Collect all decontamination solution and

dispose of it through a licensed chemical waste disposal service if it is unsuitable
for treatment on-site by incorporation into existing on-site treatment processes.
Insert Paragraph 1.11 D
D. Soil samples were taken in the proposed work area on March 24 and 25, 2016.
Laboratory analytical results for these soil samples indicated that there were no
results identified with concentrations that exceed RCRA and NYSDEC regulatory
standards.
END OF SECTION
02105G-1 11/2017
1745
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02105 – SOIL SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
02105G-2 10/2017
1746
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02222G – DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02222G
Demolition and Removals
Specification 02222 - Demolition and Removals except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
included in the lump sum price bid for Contract Item G-LS-1, as described in Detailed
Specification 01270 – Measurement and Payment.
END OF SECTION
02222G-1 11/2017
1747
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02222G – DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
02222G-2 11/2017
1748
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02230G – SITE CLEARING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02230G
Site Clearing
Specification 02230 – Site Clearing except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
02230G-1 11/2017
1749
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02230G – SITE CLEARING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
02230G-2 11/2017
1750
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02316G – EXCAVATION
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 02316G
Excavation
Specification 02316 - Excavation except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Replace section with the following:
A. General Specification 02105 - Soil Sampling and Analysis
B. General Specification 02230 - Site Clearing
C. General Specification 02250 - Shoring and Underpinning
D. General Specification 02317 - Backfilling
E. General Specification 02371 - Dust, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation

Control
F. General Specification 02821 - Metal Fence
G. General Specification 02920 - Soil Mixes
H. General Specification 05120 - Structural Steel
1.05 DEFINITIONS
Replace Paragraph 1.05.D with the following:
D. Excavated Material: All material regardless of its nature, except rock or boulders that
have been excavated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
02316G-1 11/2017
1751
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02316G – EXCAVATION
CONTRACT DEL-260G
Delete Paragraph 3.01.A.
Renumber Paragraphs 3.01.B through L as 3.01.A through K.
END OF SECTION
02316G-2 11/2017
1752
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02317G – BACKFILLING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02317G
Backfilling
Specification 02317 - Backfilling except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
02317G-1 11/2017
1753
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02317G – BACKFILLING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
02317G-2 11/2017
1754
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02371G – DUST, SOIL EROSION AND
SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02371G
Dust, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control
Specification 02371 – Dust, Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control except as
modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
Delete 1.02.C and renumber 1.02.D with 1.02.C, and 1.02.E with 1.02.D
1.03 PAYMENT
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Delete Paragraph 1.08.D.
END OF SECTION
02371G-1 11/2017
1755
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02371G – DUST, SOIL EROSION AND
SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
02371G-2 11/2017
1756
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02481G – FOOTINGS, FOUNDATION PIERS AND
FOUNDATION WALLS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02481G
Footings, Foundation Piers and Foundation Walls
Specification 02481 – Footings, Foundation Piers and Foundation Walls except as
modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
Replace Section with the following:
A. General Specification 02316 - Excavation
B. General Specification 02317 - Backfilling
C. General Specification 03100 - Concrete Formwork
D. General Specification 03210 - Reinforcing Steel
E. General Specification 03290 - Joints in Concrete
F. General Specification 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 3 EXECUTION
Replace Paragraph 3.01 with the following:
A. Clearing and grubbing, stripping and excavation shall be performed in accordance

with the requirements of General Specifications 02316 – Excavation
A. Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent

sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation.
02481G-1 11/2017
1757
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02481G – FOOTINGS, FOUNDATION PIERS AND
FOUNDATION WALLS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
END OF SECTION
02481G-2 11/2017
1758
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02505G - LEAKAGE TESTS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02505G
Leakage Tests
Specification 02505 – Leakage Tests except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
02505G-1 11/2017
1759
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02505G - LEAKAGE TESTS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
02505G-2 11/2017
1760
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02741G - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02741G
Asphaltic Concrete Pavements
Specification 02741 – Asphaltic Concrete Pavements except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
02741G-1 11/2017
1761
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02741G - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
02741G-2 11/2017
1762
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02771G – CONCRETE CURBS, HEADERS AND
SIDEWALKS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 02771G
Concrete Curbs, Headers and Sidewalks
Specification 02771 – Concrete Curbs, Headers and Sidewalks except as modified
herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.03.A with the following:
END OF SECTION
02771G-1 11/2017
1763
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02771G – CONCRETE CURBS, HEADERS AND
SIDEWALKS
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
02771G-2 11/2017
1764
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02910G – PLANTING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 02910G
Planting
Specification 02910 – Planting except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
02910G-1 11/2017
1765
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02910G – PLANTING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
02910G-2 11/2017
1766
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02920G – SOIL MIXES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 02920G
Soil Mixes
Specification 02920 – Soil Mixes except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
02920G-1 11/2017
1767
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02920G – SOIL MIXES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
02920G-2 11/2017
1768
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03100G – CONCRETE FORMWORK
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 03100G
Concrete Formwork
Specification 03100 – Concrete Formwork except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
Replace paragraph 1.04.I with the following:
I. U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standards:
1. PS-1-74 for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
2. PS-20-70 The American Softwood Lumber Standard.
Add the following after paragraph 1.04.J:
K. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB): Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 LUMBER
Add the following after paragraph 2.02.B
C. Provide lumber free of material defects that would deform the finished concrete
product.
2.03 PLYWOOD
Add the following after paragraph 2.03.C:
D. Use Class 2 only on surfaces not exposed to view.

03100G-1 11/2017
1769
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03100G – CONCRETE FORMWORK
CONTRACT DEL-260G
2.05 FORM TIES:
Add the following after paragraph 2.05.E:
F. Provide factory fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties.
G. Provide snap-off metal ties with ends that break at least 1-1/2-inches from the face of
the wall.
H. Removable ties that leave holes larger than 7/8-inches are not permitted.
I. Form ties fabricated on the Site and wire ties or flat bands are not acceptable.
J. Wood spacers are not permitted within the pour.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Revise paragraph 3.01.B as follows:
B. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces, unless shown on the
Contract Drawings.
3.02 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
Add the following after paragraph 3.02.Q:
R. Provide offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads,

anchorages and inserts, and such other features as required. Use selected materials as
needed to comply with above requirements.
S. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces.
T. Earth Forms: Earth forms not permitted in the Project.
END OF SECTION
03100G-2 11/2017
1770
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03210G – REINFORCING STEEL
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 03210G
Reinforcing Steel
Specification 03210 – Reinforcing Steel except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
Replace paragraph 1.02.B and C with the following:
B. General Specification 03100 - Concrete Formwork
C. General Specification 04200 – Unit Masonry
1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.03.B.2 with the following:
2. There shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section; all costs shall be
included in the lump sum price bid for Contract G-LS-1, as described in Detailed
Specification 01270 - Measurement and Payment.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
Add the following after paragraph 1.07.A.5:
6. Two copies of test results conducted in accordance with the American Society for
Testing and Materials Specifications. Testing requirements may be waived,
based upon certified copies of mill test reports.
Add the following after paragraph 1.08.F:
G. Protection: Protect in-place reinforcing from excessive construction traffic and other
work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.06 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

03210G-1 11/2017
1771
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03210G – REINFORCING STEEL
CONTRACT DEL-260G
2. On exterior exposed work, no ties or spacers will be permitted to remain within

¾ inches of the finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION
03210G-2 11/2017
1772
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03290G – JOINTS IN CONCRETE
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 03290G
Joints in Concrete
Specification 03290 – Joints In Concrete except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
Add the following to paragraph 2.02.A.4:
Type IV only shall be used unless otherwise noted herein or on Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
03290G-1 11/2017
1773
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03290G – JOINTS IN CONCRETE
CONTRACT DEL-260G
03290G-2 11/2017
1774
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03300G – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 03300G
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Specification 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.04 REFERENCES
Add the following after Paragraph 1.04.D.36:
37. ASTM C 156 - Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
38. ASTM C 1751 - Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types.)
Add the following after Paragraph 1.06.A.6:
7. Where concrete strengths are specified in Contract Drawings, use those values in
lieu of strengths shown in Table 1.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
Add the following after Paragraph 1.07.E:
F. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s descriptive product data and current

Specifications covering named manufactured products herein. Include installation
instructions.
03300G-1 11/2017
1775
CONTRACT DEL-260G
G. Design Mix: Prior to production of concrete, submit for approval proposed mix
designs for each concrete class, including lightweight concrete, cellular concrete,
concrete for Consolidated Edison structures, and for each change of ingredients and
ingredient sources and admixtures. Mix designs shall be based on requirements of
ACI 318, ACI 301 and other relevant ACI standards. Make adjustments to the
proposed mix designs as directed by the Engineer. Such adjustments shall be at no
additional cost to the City.
H. Certificates for Concrete: Furnish to the Engineer and local authorities requiring same,
certificates originated by the batch mixing plant certifying ready mixed concrete, as
manufactured and delivered, to be in conformance with ASTM C 94.
I. Certificates for Aggregate: Furnish to the Engineer a certificate obtained from the
aggregate producer certifying that the entire quantity of aggregate shipped for this
project is in conformance with the requirements of NYSDOT Standard Specifications.
J. Delivery Tickets: A delivery ticket shall accompany each load of concrete from the
patch plant.
1. Tickets must be signed by the Contractor’s representative, noted as to time and

place of pour and kept in a record at the Site. Make such records available for
inspection upon request by the Engineer.
2. Information presented on the ticket shall include the tabulation covered by ASTM
C 94, 16.1.1 through 16.2.8, as well as any additional information the local codes
may require.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Replace Paragraph 2.02.A.1 with the following:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II; or blended hydraulic cement, ASTM C
595, Type 1P (MS); or Type I, Normal. Only one brand and manufacturer of
approved cement shall be used for concrete.
2.04 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES
Add the following after Paragraph 2.04.I:
J. The use of Calcium Chloride is not permitted for concrete pavement.
K. Air Entraining: Air-entrain all concrete. Total air content of concrete shall be as
follows:
03300G-2 11/2017
1776
CONTRACT DEL-260G
L.
Maximum-size coarse Air content
Aggregate, In. Percent by volume
1-1/2 5 +/- 1
3/4 or 1 6 +/- 1
3/8 or 1/2 7-1/2 +/- 1
M. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Use a product conforming to

requirements of ASTM C 494 Type A and that is free of chloride.
N. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: Use a product conforming to

requirements of ASTM C 494 E and that is free of chloride.
2.06 PROPORTIONING AND MIX DESIGN
Replace Paragraph 2.06.G with the following:
G. Unit weight of lightweight concrete shall not exceed 115 pounds per cubic foot.
Add the following after Paragraph 2.06.H.9:
10. All concrete mix designs shall be based on New York City Building Code
Method II, unless noted otherwise in Contract Documents.
2.09 CURING AND PROTECTION MATERIALS
Add the following after Paragraph 2.09.F:
G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Material conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1, free of

wax or other adhesive bond breaking ingredients.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Euclid Chemical Company; Kurez Formula E-100.
b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure.
c. Or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING
Add the following after Paragraph 3.02.D.3:
4. The required slump of concrete mix shall be controlled by adding high-range

water-reducing admixtures (super plasticizers) to the mix.
Replace Paragraph 3.02.E.4.d with the following:

03300G-3 11/2017
1777
CONTRACT DEL-260G
d. Increase the slump of concrete entering the pump as required to maintain the
specified slump at the point of placement. The change in slump shall be
achieved by the following requirements of Article 3.02.F of General
Specifications and this Detailed Specification.
3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
Add the following after Paragraph 3.04.A.1:
2. In general, conduct concrete placement work in accordance with ACI 304 and
such additional requirements as specified herein.
Add the following after Paragraph 3.04.B.2:
3. Handle concrete from mixer to final deposit rapidly by methods which will
prevent segregation or loss of ingredients to maintain required quality of
concrete.
4. Do not convey concrete through aluminum or aluminum alloy.
5. Do not place concrete by pumps or other similar devices without prior written
approval of Engineer.
Add the following after Paragraph 3.04.C.8:
9. Do not allow concrete to drop vertically more than four feet.

10. Deposit concrete in approximately horizontal layers.
11. Do not allow concrete to flow laterally more than three feet.
12. Do not subject concrete to procedures which will cause segregation.
13. Do not place concrete in forms containing standing water.
14. Do not bend reinforcement out of position when placing concrete.
Add the following after Paragraph 3.04.H:
I. Preparation:
1. Prepare formwork in advance and remove snow, ice, water and debris from
within forms. Formwork as specified in Detailed Specification 03100 – Concrete
Formwork.
2. Pre-position reinforcement in advance of concrete pours. Provide concrete
reinforcement as specified in Detailed Specification 03210G – Reinforcing Steel.
3. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
J. Consolidation:
03300G-4 11/2017
1778
CONTRACT DEL-260G
1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading, rodding or other manual methods

approved by the Engineer. Work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items
and into corners: eliminate all air of stone pockets and other causes of
honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness.
2. Use vibration equipment of internal type and not the type attached to forms and
reinforcement.
3. Use vibrators capable of transmitting vibration to concrete in frequencies
sufficient to provide satisfactory consolidation.
4. Do not leave vibrators in one spot long enough to cause segregation. Remove
concrete segregated by vibrator operation.
5. Do not use vibrators to spread concrete.
6. Have sufficient reserve vibration equipment to guard against shutdown of work
occasioned by failure of equipment in operation.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Add the following after Paragraph 3.07.C:
D. Concrete Quality
1. The Contractor shall use Class A – 4,000 psi concrete for all concrete work
2. Selection of Proportions for NORMAL WEIGHT Concrete: ACI 211.1.
3. Proportions of Ingredients: Establish proportions, including water cement ratio on
the basis of field experience, with the materials specified herein.
4. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum water cement ration of 0.50.
5. Classes of Concrete:
a. Class A: 4,000 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days; 564 pounds
per cubic yard minimum cement content.
3.08 CONCRETE REPAIRS
Add the following after Paragraph 3.08.E:
F. Form Tie Repairs: Following form removal repair holes vacated by removable
components of form ties in accordance with the following:
1. Hammer-pack holes with stiff mortar of same mix and ingredients as used in
surrounding concrete. Prepare mortar no more than 30 minutes prior to use.
2. Render mortar patch work inconspicuous. Keep mortar patches damp and cure in
accordance with requirements for curing and protection.
END OF SECTION
03300G-5 11/2017
1779
CONTRACT DEL-260G
03300G-6 11/2017
1780
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03350G – CONCRETE FINISHES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 03350G
Concrete Finishes
Specification 03350 – Concrete Finishes except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Add the following after Paragraph 1.05.A:
B. The mock-up wall panel shall be structural lightweight concrete, 12 inches thick.
Reinforcing shall be stainless bars, #4@12” on center (o.c.), each way, each face.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FINISHES ON FORMED CONCRETE SURFACES
A. After removal of forms, the finishes described below shall be applied in accordance
with Article 3.05 - Concrete Finish Schedule. All surfaces shall receive at least a
Type I finish. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability of all concrete
finish work.
1. Type I - Rough or Board Form Finish: All fins, burrs and other projections left by
the forms shall be removed. All holes left by removal of ties, and all other holes,
depressions, or voids shall be filled solid with cement grout after first being
thoroughly wetted. Honeycombs shall be chipped back to solid concrete as
directed, prior to patching with cement grout. Holes shall be filled with a small
tool that will permit packing the hole solidly with cement grout. Cement grout
shall consist of one part cement to three parts sand, and the amount of mixing
water shall be as little as consistent with the requirements of handling and
placing. Color of cement grout shall match the adjacent wall surface. The
03350G-1 11/2017
1781
CONTRACT DEL-260G
surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all stains or discolorations that will

interfere with the final finish.
2. Type II - Smooth Form Finish: Concrete shall be cast against forms constructed
of plywood not less than 5/8 inch thick, or of boards lined with tempered
hardboard not less than 3/16 inch thick, or other approved materials. Form
material shall not have torn grain, worn edges, patches of holes from previous
use, or other defects which would impair the texture of the concrete surface.
Form material shall utilize sheets as large as practicable in an orderly and
symmetric configuration. Other aspects of the finish shall conform to the
requirements of the rough form finish.
3. Type III - Grout Cleaned: Where this finish is required, it shall be applied after
completion of Type II finish. After the concrete has been predampened, a slurry
consisting of one part cement (including an appropriate quantity of white cement
in order to produce a color matching the surrounding concrete) and 1-1/2 parts
sand passing the No. 30 sieve, by damp loose volume, shall be spread over the
surface with clean burlap pads or sponge rubber floats and scrubbed into the
surface using a rotary motion. Any surplus material shall be removed by scraping
and then rubbing with clean burlap. The finish shall be kept damp for at least 36
hours after application.
4. Type IV - Smooth Rubbed: Where this finish is required, it shall be applied after
the completion of the Type II finish no later than one day following form
removal. Nor rubbing shall be done before the concrete is thoroughly hardened
and the mortar used for patching is firmly set. A smooth, uniform surface shall
be obtained by wetting the surface and rubbing it with a carborundum stone to
eliminate irregularities. Unless the nature of the irregularities requires it, the
general surface of the concrete shall not be cut into. Corners and edges shall be
slightly rounded by the use of the carborundum stone. Brush finishing or
painting with grout or neat cement will not be permitted.
5. Type V - Textured: Use textured forms or textured form liners of plastic, wood,
or sheet metal. Secure liner panels in forms by cementing or stapling, not by
methods which will permit impressions of nail heads, screw heads, washers, or
the like to be imparted to the surface of the concrete. Seal edges of textured
panels to each other or to divider strips to prevent bleeding of cement paste. Use
a sealant that will not stain the concrete surface.
6. Type VI - Aggregate transfer: Produce aggregate transfer and other special
finished that duplicate mock-ups or sample panels prepared in advance and
accepted.
7. Type VII - Exposed Aggregate: Expose aggregate using one of the following
methods. Provide a concrete surface that will duplicate a mock-up or a sample
panel prepared in advance and accepted.
a. For a scrubbed finish, cast concrete against form faces which have been
coated with a chemical retarder used in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Wet the partially hardened concrete surface thoroughly
and scrub with fiber or wire brushes, using water freely until the surface
03350G-2 11/2017
1782
CONTRACT DEL-260G
mortar is removed and the aggregate is uniformly exposed. Then rinse the
surface with clear water. If portions of the surface have become too hard to
permit uniform aggregate exposure, use dilute hydrochloric acid (one part
commercial muriatic acid diluted with 4 to 10 parts water) to remove the
excess surface mortar after the concrete is at least 2 weeks old. Remove the
acid from the finished surface with clean water within 15 minutes after
application.
b. For a blast finish, sandblast or waterblast the concrete surface to a degree
sufficient to expose fine aggregates with occasional exposure of coarse
aggregate, and to produce a uniform color with a maximum reveal of 1/16
inch unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents. All surfaces
with the same specified blast finish shall be done at approximately the same
time after placing co concrete. Use stainless steel or plastic reinforcement
supports and spacers near concrete surfaces to be blasted. Protect adjacent
materials and inserts during blasting operations.
c. For a tooled finish, dress the thoroughly cured concrete surface with electric,
air, or hand tools to a uniform texture removing surface mortar as specified
in the Contract Documents. Then provide the surface with a hand tooled,
rough or fine pointed, crandalled, or bush-hammered surface texture, as
specified by Contract Documents.
8. Type VIII - Applied: When finishes of stucco, cementitious coatings, or similar
troweled materials are required or permitted, prepare the surface of the concrete
to ensure permanent adhesion of the finish. If the concrete is less than 24 hours
old, roughen it with a heavy wire brush or scoring too. If the concrete is older,
roughen the surface mechanically or by acid etching. After roughening, wash the
surface free of all dust, acid, chemical retarder, and other foreign material before
any final finish is applied.
END OF SECTION
03350G-3 11/2017
1783
CONTRACT DEL-260G
03350G-4 11/2017
1784
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03600G – GROUT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 03600G
Grout
Specification 03600 – Grout except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
03600G-1 11/2017
1785
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03600G – GROUT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
03600G-2 11/2017
1786
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03931G – CONCRETE REHABILITATION
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 03931G
Concrete Rehabilitation
Specification 03931 – Concrete Rehabilitation except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
Add the following after Paragraph 1.01.B.2:
3. Concrete rehabilitation work for this project shall include concrete structural crack
repair and concrete spall repair.
Replace the Section 1.03.B with the following:
B. Payment:
1. There shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section; all costs shall be
PART 3 EXECUTION
Add the following after Paragraph 3.12:
3.13 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Repair areas shall be saw-cut to a 1” depth around the perimeter of each repair area
prior to the removal of deteriorated concrete.
B. All loose and disintegrated concrete shall be removed from areas to be repaired in such
a manner and to such an extent as to expose a sound concrete surface. Once sound
concrete (concrete beneath the deteriorated concrete) is reached, Contractor shall also
remove a minimum of ¼ inch of the sound, non-deteriorated concrete. Remaining
concrete shall be brush cleaned and roughened by sandblasting.. The work shall be
done in such a manner as not to damage the concrete that is to remain.
C. Only pneumatic or hand tools shall be used in the removal of the disintegrated material
and in preparation and shaping the areas to be repaired. The weight of the tools used
for concrete removal shall not exceed 30 pounds.
03931G-1 11/2017
1787
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03931G – CONCRETE REHABILITATION
CONTRACT DEL-260G
D. Hand shipping methods shall be used to remove concrete adjacent to exposed

reinforcing steel. Care shall be taken so as not to damage or debond the reinforcement
steel, or to shatter the concrete beyond the area to be repaired.
E. Where corroded reinforcing bars are uncovered, those bars shall be cleaned by
sandblasting, waterblasting, or wire brushing. Where the bond between existing
concrete and reinforcing steel has been destroyed, or where the steel is exposed, the
concrete adjacent to the bar shall be removed to provide ½” clearance around the bar.
END OF SECTION
03931G-2 11/2017
1788
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 04051G – MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 04051G
Mortar and Masonry Grout
Specification 04051 – Mortar and Masonry Grout except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Replace paragraph 2.01.A. with the following:
A. Acceptable manufacturers
1. Lehigh Cement Co., Irving, TX
2. The Sakrete Co., Calverton, NY
2.03 MIXES
A. Mortar: Provide mortar that conforms to the requirements of ASTM C270, except
as modified herein, and of the type and color to match existing adjacent wall.
1. Provide a cement-lime mortar. Masonry cement mortars are not acceptable.
2. Calcium chlorides are not permitted.
3. Admixtures shall not be used unless specifically directed.
4. Masonry Pointing, provide mortar that conforms to the requirements of
ASTM C270, and of the type and color to match existing condition.
Replace paragraph 2.03.B with the following:
04051G-1 11/2017
1789
CONTRACT DEL-260G
B. Grout:
1. Fine Grout: Fine grout shall be used for filling spaces with
openings less than 2 inches.
a. Provide the following proportions by volume:
1) Portland Cement: 1 part.
2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: 0 to 1/10 part.
3) Aggregate Ratio (measured in a damp loose condition):

Sand; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the
sum of the volumes of cementitious materials.
b. Mix grout to have a slump of 10-inches plus or minus 1-inch, at

time of placement.
2. Coarse Grout: Course grout shall be used for filling spaces with
openings greater than 2 inches.
3) Fine Aggregate Ratio (measured in a damp loose

condition): Sand; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3
times the sum of the volumes of cementitious materials.
4) Coarse Aggregate Ratio: Not less than 1 and not more

than 2 times the sum of the volumes of cementitious
materials.

time of placement.
3. Grout Fill Around Reinforcement in Masonry Lintels: Portland cement,

sand, gravel and water, to be proportioned as required to provide a 28-day
minimum compressive strength of 3000 pounds per square inch.
Add the following after paragraph 2.03.B:
C. Fire-Resistant Mortar:
1. Standard: UL Design Numbers 0901 through 0914.
04051G-2 11/2017
1790
CONTRACT DEL-260G
2. Use 1 part Portland cement, 3 parts clean sand, and 15 percent hydrated
lime (by cement volume).
D. Mortar for All Locations. Comply with ASTM C270, Table 2, except limit
materials to those specified herein. Do not substitute ASTM C91 masonry cement
for ASTM C150 portland cement without an approved Shop Drawing and a
complete chemical analysis of the material and its properties. Limit cement-to-
lime ratio by volume as follows:
1. Type M:
2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: 1/4 part.
3) Aggregate Ratio (measured in damp loose condition):

Not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of
the volumes of cementitious materials.
b. Properties:
1) Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C270: 2500

pounds per square inch.
2) Minimum Water Retention, ASTM C270: 75 percent.
3) Maximum Air Content, ASTM C270: 12 percent.
2. Type S:
2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Over 1/4 to 1/2 maximum.

b. Properties:
1) Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C 270: 1800


04051G-3 11/2017
1791
CONTRACT DEL-260G
3. Type N:
2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Over 1/2 to 1 1/4
maximum.
b. Properties:
1) Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C270: 750 pounds
per square inch.
2.04 MIXING
Replace paragraph 2.04.C.2.a. with the following:
a. 32 to 50 degrees F: Mixing water and sand shall be heated to produce

mortar temperature between 50 and 120 degrees F. Temperatures of
mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing.
Replace paragraph 2.04.C.2.b. with the following:
b. Below 32 degrees F: Masonry shall not be installed.
END OF SECTION
04051G-4 11/2017
1792
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 04200G – UNIT MASONRY
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 04200G
Unit Masonry
Specification 04200 – Unit Masonry except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
1.05 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
I. Brick size, texture, color and bond run will match adjacent wall. Mortar joint size,
finish, color and strike type will match adjacent wall. This includes all masonry
repair and new walls.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Belden Brick Co., Canton, OH
2. Old Castle, Red Bank, NJ
3. Approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
Replace paragraph 2.02.B. with the following:
B. Structural Glazed Brick: Structural glazed brick shall meet the requirements of
ASTM C126 for finish properties and shall conform to ASTM C216 Grade SW
Type FBX for durability. Structural glazed brick shall meet UL requirements for
04200G-1 11/2017
1793
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 04200G – UNIT MASONRY
CONTRACT DEL-260G
zero flame spread and zero smoke developed. Face dimensions and custom colors
shall match existing adjacent material.
Replace paragraph 2.02.D with the following:
D. Glazed Structural Tile: Glazed structural facing tile shall be of Selected Size
Quality (Grade SS ground ends) in size to match existing, and shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM C126, Type I. Glazed structural tile walls and
partitions shall be provided with bullnose shapes for external corners, sills, and
jambs, and shall have coved base courses.
Replace paragraph 2.02.N. with the following:
N. Weep Vents: Weep vents shall be provided where shown, and shall be an offset
T-shaped vent injection molded from flexible polyvinyl chloride. The vents shall
be provided in a custom size and color to match existing brick and mortar.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Replace paragraph 3.01.C.1 with the following:
1. Bond: New brickwork should be laid the same way as existing brickwork on the
adjacent wall.
END OF SECTION
04200G-2 11/2017
1794
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05061G- STAINLESS STEEL WORK
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05061G
Stainless Steel Work
Specification 05061 – Stainless Steel Work except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.03 with the following:
END OF SECTION
05061G-1 11/2017
1795
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05061G- STAINLESS STEEL WORK
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05061G-2 11/2017
1796
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05081G– GALVANIZING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 05081G
Galvanizing
Specification 05081-Galvanizing except as modified herein.
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
05081G-1 11/2017
1797
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05081G– GALVANIZING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
05081G-2 11/2017
1798
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05091G- WELDING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05091G
Welding
Specification 05091-Welding except as modified herein.
1.03 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
05091G-1 11/2017
1799
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05091G- WELDING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05091G-2 11/2017
1800
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05092G – METAL FASTENING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05092G
Metal Fastening
Specification 05092 - Metal Fastening except as modified herein.
Add the following after paragraph 1.06 – DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
1.07 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
05092G-1 11/2017
1801
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05092G – METAL FASTENING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05092G-2 11/2017
1802
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05120G- STRUCTURAL STEEL
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05120G
Structural Steel
Specification 05120-Structural Steel except as modified herein.
Replace the Section 1.03 with the following:
END OF SECTION
05120G-1 11/2017
1803
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05120G- STRUCTURAL STEEL
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05120G-2 11/2017
1804
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05501G- METAL FABRICATIONS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05501G
Metal Fabrications
Specification 05501-Metal Fabrications except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
Replace Article 1.02.F with the following:
F. General Specification 05524 – Aluminum Pipe Railing
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Replace paragraph 2.02.D and E. with the following:

D. Aluminum platform grating shall be designed for the loads as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
E. Handrails shall be as specified under General Specification 05524 – Aluminum Pipe
Railing and shall be coordinated with stair, ship ladder and platform fabrication.
Handrail attachment to stairs, ship ladders and platform shall be in accordance with
the details shown on the Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
05501G-1 11/2017
1805
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05501G- METAL FABRICATIONS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05501G-2 11/2017
1806
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05524G- ALUMINUM PIPE RAILING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05524G
Aluminum Pipe Railing
Specification 05524-Aluminum Pipe Railing except as modified herein.
1.03 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
05524G-1 11/2017
1807
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05524G- ALUMINUM PIPE RAILING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05524G-2 11/2017
1808
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05533G -ALUMINUM FLOOR GRATINGS
AND CHECKERED PLATES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05533G
Aluminum Floor Gratings and Checkered Plates
Specification 05533-Aluminum Floor Gratings and Checkered Plates except as
modified herein.
1.03 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
05533G-1 11/2017
1809
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05533G -ALUMINUM FLOOR GRATINGS
AND CHECKERED PLATES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05533G-2 11/2017
1810
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05561G – MISCELLANEOUS METAL CASTINGS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 05561
Miscellaneous Metal Castings
NOTE: All work for this Section shall be in accordance with the requirements of General
Specification 05561-Miscellaneous Metal Castings except as modified herein.
1.03 PAYMENT
A. There shall be no separate payment for the work of this Section; all costs shall be
END OF SECTION
05561-1 11/2017
1811
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05561G – MISCELLANEOUS METAL CASTINGS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
05561-2 11/2017
1812
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 06100G – ROUGH CARPENTRY
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 06100G
Rough Carpentry
Specification 06100 – Rough Carpentry except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
06100G-1 11/2017
1813
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 06100G – ROUGH CARPENTRY
CONTRACT DEL-260G
06100G-2 11/2017
1814
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07811G – CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 07811G
Cementitious Fireproofing
Specification 07811 – Cementitious Fireproofing except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
B. Reinforcing mesh shall be provided where required by U.L. Designs as specified

in the Contract Drawings. Type and size of mesh shall be as required by the
specified U.L. Design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Cementitious fireproofing shall be installed in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with U.L. Designs as specified in
the Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
07811G-1 11/2017
1815
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07811G – CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
07811G-2 11/2017
1816
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07900G – CAULKING AND SEALANTS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 07900G
Caulking and Sealants
Specification 07900 – Caulking and Sealants except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
07900G-1 11/2017
1817
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07900G – CAULKING AND SEALANTS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
07900G-2 11/2017
1818
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 08110G – STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 08110G
Steel Doors and Frames
GENERAL SPECIFICATION 08110 - GALVANIZED STEEL FRAMES AND DOORS

shall be renamed GENERAL SPECIFICATION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.
Specification 08110 – Steel Doors and Frames except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 STAINLESS STEEL DOORS
7. Louvers in doors
a. Louvers in fireproof doors shall be constructed of No. 18 gauge stainless
steel and shall be equipped with a fusible link and automatic mechanism
as approved by the New York City Building Department Bureau of
Standards and Appeals and finished to match face of door.
b. Louvers in non-fireproof doors shall be non-vision louver constructed of

No. 18 gauge stainless steel and finished to match face of door.
END OF SECTION
08110G-1 11/2017
1819
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 08110G – STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
08110G-2 11/2017
1820
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 08710G – FINISH HARDWARE
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 08710G
Finish Hardware
Specification 08710 – Finish Hardware except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.02.A with the Following
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 MATERIALS
Add the following after paragraph in 2.02.U – Stops:
V. Surface Mounted Electromagnetic Lock

1. 8371- 8 Series Minimag Electromagnetic Lock by RCI (Rutherford Controls,
DORMA America, Reamstown, PA) or approved equal with all accessories for
proper mounting on specified doors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.06 SCHEDULES
Replace Article 3.06.A with the following Hardware Schedule:
(This space was left blank intentionally)
08710G-1 11/2017
1821
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 08710G – FINISH HARDWARE
CONTRACT DEL-260G
Set No. Item Description Remarks
(1) top hinge H180

Hinges (1) middle hinge M190
(1) bottom hinge H147
Mortice Lock w/ Level
Handle Schlage Series L9000-03N Classroom lock
HW-1
Overhead Surface
Closer LCN 4041 DEL MC
Mounted
Threshold Zero No. 655A For interior use
Silencers (3) Silencers
Stops Glynn-Johnson GJ FIX Floor mounted stops
Existing to remain. Add

additional hinge to upper
Hinges section of modified door. Match existing.
Electrified Vertical Rod To be Connected to
Panic Device Von Duprin EL 9848L SS RX existing alarm system.
Overhead Surface
HW-2
Mounted Door Closer
Closer LCN 4041 DEL MC with Swing Limits
Threshold Zero No. 566A
Weather Stripping Zero No. 119W
Include all hardware for
Elector Magnetic Lock RCI 8371 proper installation.
(2) top Hinge H180

Hinges (4) middle hinges M190
(2) Bottom Hinge H147
HW-3
Overhead Surface
Closer (2) LCN 4041 DEL MC Mounted
For interior use. Full
Threshold Zero No. 655A length for double door.
Silencer (6) Silencers
Stops (2) Glynn-Johnson GJ FIX Floor mounted stops
Mullion Stainless Steel, #4 finish Removable
END OF SECTION
08710G-2 11/2017
1822
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 09740G – CONCRETE TOPPING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
SECTION 09740G
Concrete Topping
Specification 09740 – Concrete Topping except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.05.E.2 with the following:
2. All material provided under this Section shall comply with the General
Specifications.
END OF SECTION
09740G-1 11/2017
1823
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 09740G – CONCRETE TOPPING
CONTRACT DEL-260 G
09740G-2 11/2017
1824
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 09900G – PAINTING
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 09900G
Painting
Specification 09900 – Painting except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
1.09 PAINTING REQUIREMENTS
Replace paragraph in 1.09.B. with the following:
B. Manufacturer's Standard Finished Items: The following items shall be furnished with
the manufacturer's standard prime and finish coats applied in the shop: pumps,
motors, gears, gear housings, air compressors, wall fans, temperature control and
instrument panels, process air blowers, engines, filters, strainers, air dryers, meters,
gas boosters, gas turbines, generators, panelboards, transformers, boilers, condensing
units, water chillers, cooling towers, condensers, heat exchangers, humidifiers, air
handling units, sound attenuators, air conditioning and dehumidification units,
convector cabinets, unit heaters, enclosures for finned tube radiators, cabinet heaters,
boilers, wood seats, lockers, metal toilet partitions, metal urinal screens, aluminum
fascia, motor control centers, aluminum light standards, and hoisting equipment.
Steel reinforcing bars for concrete shall be coated in accordance with the Contract
Drawings. When powder coatings are required by the Contract Drawings, the
powder coatings shall be in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer of
the item.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.03 MATERIALS
Add the following at the end of the table in paragraph 2.03.B:
09900G-1 11/2017
1825
CONTRACT DEL-260G
CLASSIFICATION OF PAINTS
Dry Film
Paint Volume
Product Name and Number Thickness
Group Solids %
Mils per Coat
Sherwin Williams (Cleveland, OH): FIRETEX
69% 40.0*
FX5120
O
Carboline (St. Louis, MO): A/D Firefilm III 65% 30.0*
* Required DFT for specific fire rating is dependent on steel section and size. Consult
Representative.
This space has been left blank intentionally
09900G-1 11/2017
1826
CONTRACT DEL-260G
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.04 MATERIAL PAINTING SCHEDULE
Add the following at the end of the table in paragraph 3.04.A:
MATERIAL PAINTING SCHEDULE

Paint Groups (O)
Tn: Tnemec, Cb: Carboline, SW: Sherwin Williams, IP: International paint, PPG: PPG/Amercoat
Materials and Conditions Finish Coats
Prime Coat
1st 2nd 3rd
Paint Manufacturer SW SW SW SW
Fire Rated Steel and Iron - Structural
and Miscellaneous Uses:
Interior (Indoors) shop primed, field Waterbased Acrolon 100
Kem Bond HS O* O*
finished Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy
* Refer to UL N636 Beam Design for application thickness. Consult Sherwin-Williams Representative.
END OF SECTION
09900G-3 11/2017
1827
CONTRACT DEL-260G
09900G-4 11/2017
1828
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10200G – LOUVERS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 10200G
Louvers
Specification 10200 – Louvers except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Drainable Fixed Louver

1. Individual louver shall be Airolite, Penn Ventolator, or approved equal, type
6776; fixed 43 degree, 6" deep drainable storm-proof blade of the following
characteristics:
a. Frames and blades shall be stainless steel 316 alloy .064" thick.
b. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or
incompatible with materials joined.
1) Use types, gages and lengths to suit unit installation
conditions.
2) Use Philips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
c. Anchors and inserts of type, size and material required for type of
loading and installation indicated. Use Type 316 stainless steel
anchors and inserts for exterior installation and elsewhere as required
for corrosion resistance.
d. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic).
10200G-1 11/2017
1829
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10200G – LOUVERS
CONTRACT DEL-260G
2. Manufacturer to submit test data on 4 feet x 4 feet louver units. Test data
shall show the following results at 948 fpm free area velocity.
Maximum Pressure Maximum Water

Minimum Free Area Drop Penetration
8.15 sq. ft 0.18 in 0.005 oz.
0.76 m .0450 kPa 1.53 g
B. Fixed Louver
1. Individual louver shall be Airolite, Penn Ventolator or approved equal, type
6096; fixed 43 degree, 6" deep stationary blade of the following
characteristics:
conditions.

7.57 sq. ft 0.15 in 0.005 oz.
0.70 m .038 kPa 1.53 g
END OF SECTION
10200G-2 11/2017
1830
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10400G– IDENTIFYING DEVICES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 10400G
Identifying Devices
Specification 10400 – Identifying Devices except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL

B. Identifying devices shall be provided where shown on the Contract Drawings or

as required for a complete installation.
1.02 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Add the following after paragraph 2.01.3.a
b. Or approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS
I. Metal Letters and Numbers (Exterior)

1. Provide metal letters and numbers to match existing in building or adjacent
DEP structure for name, material, size, style, stroke, depth and finish.
2. Form letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat
faces, sharp corners, and precisely-formed lines and profiles, free from pits,
scale, sand holes or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of the characters
and tap to receive threaded mounting studs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.03 IDENTIFYING DEVICE LOCATION

10400G-1 11/2017
1831
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10400G– IDENTIFYING DEVICES
CONTRACT DEL-260G
A. Identifying devices shall be installed where shown on the Contract Drawings and
where directed by DEP.
END OF SECTION
10400G-2 11/2017
1832
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10521G – FIRE EXTINGUISHER
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 10521G
Fire Extinguisher
NOTE: All Work for this Section shall be in accordance with the requirements of
General Specification 10521 – Fire Extinguisher except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
Add paragraph 1.04 with the following:
1.04 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER
A. Refer to the Contract Drawings for a Fire Extinguisher Schedule.
END OF SECTION
10521G-1 11/2017
1833
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10521G – FIRE EXTINGUISHER
CONTRACT DEL-260G
10521G-2 11/2017
1834
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13281G – ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 13281G
ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
Specification 13281 – Asbestos Management except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
A. Except for abatement of unforeseen ACM and related Work payable under the
allowance, as described in Section 01355– Hazardous Materials Control, no
separate payment will be made for performing any Work required under this
Section and the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump sum price bid
for Contract Item G-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification 01270 –
END OF SECTION
13281G-1 11/2017
1835
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13281G – ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
13281G-2 11/2017
1836
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13282G – MERCURY MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 13282G
Mercury Management
Specification 13282 – Mercury Management except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
A. Except for unforeseen mercury-containing materials and related Work payable

under the allowance, as described in Section 01355 – Hazardous Materials
Control, no separate payment will be made for performing any Work required
under this Section and the Contractor shall include all costs thereof in its lump
sum price bid for Contract Item G-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification
END OF SECTION
13282G-1 11/2017
1837
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13282G – MERCURY MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
13282G-2 11/2017
1838
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13283G - LEAD MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 13283G
Lead Management
Specification 13283 – Lead Management except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
A. A.Except for unforeseen lead-containing materials and related work eligible for
payment under allowance, as described in Section 01355– Hazardous Materials
Control, no separate payment will be made for performing any work required
sum price bid for Contract Item G-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification
END OF SECTION
13283G-1 11/2017
1839
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13283G - LEAD MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
13283G-2 11/2017
1840
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13284G - PCB MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
SECTION 13284G
PCB Management
Specification 13284 – PCB Management except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
A. Except for unforeseen PCB-containing materials and related work eligible for
payment under allowance, as described in Section 01355 – Hazardous Materials
Controls, no separate payment will be made for performing any work of this
for Contract Item G-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification 01270 –
END OF SECTION
13284G-1 11/2017
1841
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13284G - PCB MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260G
13284G-2 11/2017
1842
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02222H – DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 02222H
Demolition and Removals
Specification 02222 - Demolition and Removals except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
included in the lump sum price bid for Contract Item H-LS-1, as described in Detailed
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
Delete 1.06.A.5 in its entirety and replace with the following:

5. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to control dust. Dust shall be
prevented from rising by wetting demolished masonry, concrete, plaster and
similar debris. Unaltered portions of the existing buildings affected by the
operations under this Section shall be protected by dustproof partitions and
other adequate means.
Delete 1.06.B in its entirety and replace with the following:
B. Permits: Obtain all permits from all appropriate regulatory agencies required for
closing or obstructing streets and sidewalks. Obtain all air permits as required for
demolition including a Demolition Permit from the Department of Buildings and a
DEP Registration for Demolition from the Department of Environmental Protection,
Bureau of Environmental Compliance.
02222H-1 11/2017
1843
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 02222H – DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
Delete 3.01.C in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable
methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the
lowest practical level. Comply with all governing regulations pertaining to
environmental protection.
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions
such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
2. Clean adjacent structures, facilities, and improvements of dust, dirt, and
debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to conditions
existing prior to the start of the Work.
3. The use of calcium chloride for dust control will not be allowed.
Delete 3.01.L(6) in its entirety.
Delete 3.01.N in its entirety.
Delete 3.01.P in its entirety and replace with the following:
P Dust Control: The Contractor is responsible for controlling visible dust caused by
demolition activities.
END OF SECTION
02222H-2 11/2017
1844
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03600H – GROUT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 03600H
Grout
Specification 03600 – Grout except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
included in the Allowance price bid for Contract Item H-LS-1, as described in
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.05 CURING MATERIAL
Replace Paragraph 2.05 A with the following:
A. Curing material for cement grout shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for
prepackaged grouts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GROUT USES
Replace Paragraph 3.01 B in its entirety with the following:
B. New concrete surfaces to receive cement grout shall be cleaned of all dirt and
grease and oil-like films.
1. Existing concrete surfaces shall likewise be cleaned of all similar
contamination and debris, for protection of cement grout.
END OF SECTION
03600H-1 11/2017
1845
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 03600H – GROUT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
03600H-2 11/2017
1846
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 04051H – MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 04051H
Mortar and Masonry Grout
Specification 04051 – Mortar and Masonry Grout except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Replace paragraph 1.01.B:
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals, as shown,
specified and required to complete all Work as shown on the Contract Drawings or
specified herein. .
1.02 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
1. Lehigh Cement Company, Allentown, PA.
2. The Sakrete Company, Cincinnati, OH.
2.03 MIXES
A. Mortar: Provide mortar that conforms to the requirements of ASTM C270, except
as modified herein, and of the type and color to match existing adjacent wall.
1. Provide a cement-lime mortar; masonry cement mortars are not acceptable.
04051H-1 11/2017
1847
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Calcium chlorides are not permitted.

3. Admixtures shall not be used unless specifically herein.
4. Masonry Pointing, provide mortar that conforms to the requirements of
ASTM C270, and of the type and color to match existing condition.
B. Grout:
1. Fine Grout: Fine grout shall be used for filling spaces with openings
less than 2 inches.
3) Aggregate Ratio (measured in a damp loose condition):

Sand; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the
sum of the volumes of cementitious materials.

time of placement.
2. Coarse Grout: Course grout shall be used for filling spaces with
openings greater than 2 inches.
3) Fine Aggregate Ratio (measured in a damp loose

condition): Sand; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3
times the sum of the volumes of cementitious materials.
4) Coarse Aggregate Ratio: Not less than 1 and not more

than 2 times the sum of the volumes of cementitious
materials.

time of placement.
3. Grout Fill Around Reinforcement in Masonry Lintels: Portland cement,

sand, gravel and water to be proportioned as required to provide a 28-day
04051H-2 11/2017
1848
CONTRACT DEL-260H
minimum compressive strength of 3000 pounds per square inch.
Add the following after paragraph 2.03.B:
C. Fire-Resistant Mortar:
1. Standard: UL Design Numbers 0901 through 0914.
2. Use 1 part Portland cement, 3 parts clean sand, and 15 percent hydrated
lime (by cement volume).
D. Mortar for All Locations. Comply with ASTM C270, Table 2, except limit
materials to those specified herein. Do not substitute ASTM C91 masonry cement
for ASTM C150 Portland cement without an approved Working Drawing and a
complete chemical analysis of the material and its properties. Limit cement-to-
lime ratio by volume as follows:
1. Type M:
2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: 1/4 part.

b. Properties:
1) Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C270: 2500

2. Type S:
2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Over 1/4 to 1/2 part

maximum.

04051H-3 11/2017
1849
CONTRACT DEL-260H
b. Properties:
1) Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C 270: 1800

3. Type N:
2) Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Over 1/2 to 1 1/4 part
maximum.
b. Properties:
1) Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C270: 750 pounds
per square inch.
2.04 MIXING
Replace paragraph 2.04.C.2.a. with the following:
a. 32 to 50 degrees F: Mixing water and sand shall be heated to produce

mortar temperature between 50 and 120 degrees F. Temperatures of
mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing.
Replace paragraph 2.04.C.2.b. with the following:
b. Below 32 degrees F: Masonry shall not be installed.
END OF SECTION
04051H-4 11/2017
1850
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 04200H – UNIT MASONRY
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 04200H
Unit Masonry
Specification 04200 – Unit Masonry except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals, as
shown, specified and required to complete all Work as shown on the Contract
Drawings or specified herein.
1.02 PAYMENT
included in the lump sum price bid for Contract Item H-LS-1, as described in
Remove 1.03.C in its entirety.
1.05 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
I. Brick size, texture, color and bond run will match adjacent wall. Mortar joint size,
finish, color and strike type will match adjacent wall. This includes all masonry
repair and new walls.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
04200H-1 11/2017
1851
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 04200H – UNIT MASONRY
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Belden Brick Company, Canton, OH.

2. Old Castle, Red Bank, NJ.
2.02 MATERIALS
B. Structural Glazed Brick: Structural glazed brick shall meet the requirements of
ASTM C126 for finish properties and shall conform to ASTM C216 Grade SW
Type FBX for durability. Structural glazed brick shall meet UL requirements for
zero flame spread and zero smoke developed. Face dimensions and custom colors
to match exist adjacent material.
Replace paragraph 2.02.D with the following:
D. Glazed Structural Tile: Glazed structural facing tile shall be of Selected Size
Quality (Grade SS ground ends) in size to match existing, and shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM C126, Type I. Glazed structural tile walls and
partitions shall be provided with bullnose shapes for external corners, sills, and
jambs, and shall have coved base courses.
Replace paragraph 2.02.N. with the following:
N. Weep Vents: Weep vents shall be provided where shown, and shall be an offset
T-shaped vent injection molded from flexible polyvinyl chloride. The vents shall
be provided in a custom size and color to match brick and mortar to match
existing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
1. Bond: Brickwork shall match existing adjacent wall.
END OF SECTION
04200H-2 11/2017
1852
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05081H- GALVANIZING
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 05081H
Galvanizing
Specification 05081-Galvanizing except as modified herein.
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
05081H-1 11/2017
1853
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05081H- GALVANIZING
CONTRACT DEL-260H
05081H-2 11/2017
1854
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05091H- WELDING
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 05091H
Welding
Specification 05091-Welding except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
Delete 1.04J in its entirety.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTS
Delete 3.03C and replace with the following:
A. Welds shall receive non-destructive testing and in accordance with the

requirements of AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code and NYBC.
END OF SECTION
05091H-1 11/2017
1855
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05091H- WELDING
CONTRACT DEL-260H
05091H-2 11/2017
1856
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05092H – METAL FASTENING
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 05092H
Metal Fastening
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 05092H - Metal Fastening replaces General

Specification 05092 - Metal Fastening in its entirety. All Work for this Section
shall fully conform to the requirements specified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide
all metal fastening in accordance with the Contract Drawings and these
Specifications.
B. The following index of this Section is included for convenience:
Article Title Page

05092-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ..........................................................................1
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS .........................................................................2
1.03 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.04 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE .....................................................................3
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .......................................3
1.07 PAYMENT ............................................................................................3
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................3
2.01 ANCHOR BOLTS .................................................................................3
2.02 BOLTS ...................................................................................................4
2.03 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS ................................................................4
2.04 CONCRETE ANCHORS ......................................................................4
2.05 CONCRETE INSERTS .........................................................................6
2.06 MASONRY ANCHORS .......................................................................7
2.07 WELDS ..................................................................................................7
2.08 EYEBOLTS ...........................................................................................7
2.09 TITANIUM BOLTS AND ANCHORS ................................................8
PART 3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................8
3.01 EXAMINATION ...................................................................................8
3.02 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................8
3.03 WELDING .............................................................................................9
3.04 INSPECTION ........................................................................................9
05092H-1 11/2017
1857
CONTRACT DEL-260H

A. General Specification 05081 - Galvanizing.
B. General Specification 05091 - Welding.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile
Strength.
C. ASTM A325 - Structural Steel Bolts, Steel Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
D. ASTM A489 - Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.
E. ASTM A490 - Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi, Minimum
Tensile Strength.
F. ASTM A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
G. ASTM B348 - Titanium and Titanium Alloy Bars and Billets.
H. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
I. ASTM E120 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Titanium and
Titanium Alloys.
J. ASTM F467 - Nonferrous Nuts for General Use.
K. ASTM F593 - Stainless Steel Bolts; Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
L. ASTM F594 - Stainless Steel Nuts.
M. ANSI/AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code B Stainless Steel.
N. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
O. ANSI/AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
P. New York City Building Code (NYBC).
Q. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
R. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (AISC).
S. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts (AISC).
T. Aluminum Association - Specifications for Aluminum Structures.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and material Specifications for
approval by the Engineer. Submittal shall include, but not be limited, to:
05092H-2 03/2017
1858
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Shop Drawings providing the manufacturer, current catalog, fastener type,

certification of the fastener's material and capacity and installation
requirements.
2. Copy of valid AWS certification for each person who is to perform field
welding.
3. Certified weld inspection reports, when required.
4. Certified test reports for chemical analysis of titanium bolts, washers and
nuts in accordance with ASTM E120.
A. Fasteners not manufactured in the United States shall be tested and certification
provided with respect to specified quality and strength standards. Certifications of
origin shall be submitted for all U.S. fasteners supplied on the project. Fasteners to
be tested shall be randomly selected by the Engineer in the field.
B. All steel welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance with AWS
D1.1. All aluminum welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance
with AWS D1.2. Certifications of field welders shall be submitted prior to
performing any field welds.
C. Fasteners and concrete anchors will be inspected in accordance with Article 3.04.
D. The City may engage an independent testing agency to perform testing of welded
connections and to prepare test reports in accordance with AWS. Inadequate welds
shall be corrected or redone and retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or
an acceptable independent testing laboratory, at no additional cost to the City.
E. Manufacturer’s load tables and certified performance tests for titanium bolts shall
be provided.
A. Materials stored outdoors shall be supported above ground surfaces and protected
with approved effective and durable covers.
1.07 PAYMENT
A. There shall be no separate payment for the Work in this Section, all costs shall be
included in the Lump Sum price bid for Contract Item H-LS-1, as specified in
Section 01270 - Measurement and Payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Anchor bolts for miscellaneous framing and architectural elements attachments
shall conform to ASTM A36 or ASTM A307 Grade A except where stainless steel
or other approved anchor bolts are shown on the Contract Drawings. Anchor bolts
05092H-3 11/2017
1859
CONTRACT DEL-260H
shall be of the size and configuration shown on the Contract Drawings and shall be
supplied with hexagonal nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM A563 Grade A.
B. Anchor bolts for equipment attachment shall be of stainless steel Type 316 with
nitronic 60 stainless steel nuts and locknuts.
C. Where anchor bolts are used to anchor galvanized steel or are otherwise specified
to be galvanized, they shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A307
and General Specification 05081 - Galvanizing.
D. Pipe sleeves around anchor bolts shall be of the size and configuration shown on
E. Material for anchor bolts submerged in salt water or corrosive liquids for which
stainless steel Type 316 is not suitable shall be as indicated in the specification
herein.
2.02 BOLTS
A. Bolts, nuts and washers for miscellaneous framing and for attachment of
architectural elements shall conform to ASTM A325.
B. Where bolts are used to connect galvanized steel or are otherwise specified to be
galvanized, bolts, nuts, and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
General Specification 05081 - Galvanizing.
2.03 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS
A. Stainless steel bolts shall conform to ASTM F593. Unless otherwise specified,
fasteners for aluminum members shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Fasteners for
stainless steel members shall be of matching grade.
B. Stainless steel bolts shall have hexagonal heads with a raised letter or symbol on
the bolts indicating the manufacturer, and shall be supplied with hexagonal nuts
meeting the requirements of ASTM F594. Nuts shall be of the same alloy as the
bolts and shall have a raised letter or symbol indicating the manufacturer.
C. Nuts for stainless steel bolts for elements which are indicated on the Contract
Drawings to be removable shall be made of nitronic 60 alloy.
D. Material for bolts submerged in salt water or corrosive liquids for which stainless
steel Type 316 is not suitable shall be as indicated in the specification herein.
2.04 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Concrete anchors shall be one of the types listed below as indicated on the Contract
Drawings. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete anchors which are submerged, or
which are subject to vibration from equipment such as pumps and generators, shall
be injected, adhesive anchors. The determination of anchors equivalent to those
listed below shall be on the basis of test data performed by a commercial testing
laboratory. There are two categories used:
1. Expansion anchors shall be wedge, sleeve, or drop-in mechanical anchors.
05092H-4 03/2017
1860
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Adhesive anchors shall be two part injection type.

3. Where anchor type is not indicated on the Contract Drawings, the wedge
expansion anchor shall be used.
B. Expansion anchors shall be:
1. Kwik Bolt II as manufactured by Hilti Inc., Plano, TX.
2. Trubolt Wedge Anchor as manufactured by ITW Ramset/Redhead,
Michigan City, IN.
3. Power-Stud as manufactured by Powers/Rawl, New Rochelle, NY.
C. Expansion anchors shall be embedded to the depths shown on the Contract
Drawings. If no embedment depth is given, the standard embedment depth as
recommended by the manufacturer shall be used.
D. Sleeve or drop-in anchors shall be as manufactured by:
1. Hilti Inc., Plano, TX.
2. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Michigan City, IN.
3. Powers/Rawl, New Rochelle, NY.
E. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods or bolts anchored with an adhesive
system into hardened concrete or grout-filled masonry. The adhesive system shall
use a two-component adhesive mix and shall be injected with a static mixing nozzle
following manufacturer's instructions. The embedment depth of the rod/bolt shall
provide a minimum allowable bond strength that is equal to the allowable tensile
capacity of the rod/bolt (see Table 1) unless noted otherwise on the Contract
Drawings. The adhesive system shall be:
1. "Epcon System Ceramic 6" as manufactured by ITW Ramset/Redhead,
Michigan City, IN.
2. "HIT HY-150 Injection Adhesive Anchor System" as manufactured by Hilti
Inc., Plano, TX.
3. Powerfast by Powers/Rawl, New Rochelle, NY.
F. Concrete anchors shall be of Stainless Steel Type 304 unless noted otherwise.
Concrete anchors for stainless steel attachments shall be of matching grade.
G. Material for concrete anchors submerged in salt water or other corrosive liquids for
which stainless steel Type 316 is not suitable shall be as indicated in the Detailed
Specifications.
05092H-5 11/2017
1861
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Table 1
Allowable Tensile Capacity (Kips) for Standard Manufacturer
Embedment
Concrete Anchors
Concrete Anchors with Injection
Size Wedge Type Adhesive System
3/8" 1.3 2.1
1/2" 2.4 3.8
5/8" 3.3 5.9
3/4" 4.8 8.4
7/8" 5.6 11.0
1" 7.1 15.0
2.05 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Wedge Type Inserts:
1. For attachment of shelf angles or brick relieving angles to the reinforced
concrete beams or concrete encased steel beams, the concrete inserts shall
be wedge type inserts. The inserts shall have an askew head bolt to produce
an automatic tightening action when a load is placed on the bolt.
2. The wedge inserts shall be of malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized. The
askew bolt and the horseshoe shim plates shall be of stainless steel Type
304. The type of insert and size of bolts shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
3. The wedge inserts shall be:
a. As manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY.
b. Or approved equal.
B. Anchor Channel Inserts: for the top attachment of the masonry wall panels to steel
encased or concrete structures, the inserts shall be:
1. Anchor channel as manufactured by:
a. Halfen Anchoring Systems, Tampa, FL.
2. The anchor channel shall be made from channel profiles with "I" anchors
shop welded to the back of channels. Anchor channels shall be furnished
with the head bolts, channel nuts, etc., for a complete installation. All
material shall be stainless steel type 304.
3. The type and series of the anchor channel shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
05092H-6 03/2017
1862
CONTRACT DEL-260H
4. Anchor channels can be used for other attachments if detailed on the

Contract Drawings.
2.06 MASONRY ANCHORS
A. Masonry anchors shall be injection adhesive anchors with screen tube for fastening
to hollow block, clay tiles and brick with holes (see Table 2).
B. The adhesive system shall be:
1. "Hit HY-20", as manufactured by Hilti Inc., Plano, TX.
2. "Epcon System Ceramic 6" as manufactured by ITW Ramset/Redhead,
Michigan City, IN.
3. Powerfast by Powers/Rawl, New Rochelle, NY.
C. Masonry anchors shall be of stainless steel type 304 unless noted otherwise.
Masonry anchors for stainless steel attachments shall be of the matching grade.
Table 2
Allowable Tensile Masonry (lbs) in Hollow Concrete Block
Masonry Anchors with Injection
Size Adhesive System
1/4" 255
5/16" 370
3/8" 525
1/2" 525
2.07 WELDS
A. Electrodes for welding carbon steel shall comply with ASTM A36.
B. Electrodes for welding aluminum shall comply with the Aluminum Association
Specifications and AWS D1.2.
C. Electrodes for welding stainless steel and other metals shall comply with AWS
A5.4.
2.08 EYEBOLTS
A. Eyebolts shall be of the size indicated on the Contract Drawings and shall conform
to ASTM A489 unless noted otherwise.
B. Carbon steel eyebolts shall be galvanized in accordance with General Specification
05081 - Galvanizing.
05092H-7 11/2017
1863
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2.09 TITANIUM BOLTS AND ANCHORS

A. Titanium bolts, washers, nuts and anchors shall be provided in, over, and adjacent
to containment areas for ferric chloride and sodium hypochlorite, unless indicated
otherwise on the Contract Drawings.
B. Bolts and anchors shall be of the size indicated on the Contract Drawings. Bolts,
anchors washers and nuts and shall conform to ASTM B348, Grade 2.
C. Minimum mechanical and physical properties:
1. Tensile Strength 50,000 psi
2. Yield Strength 40,000 psi
3. Elongation in 4" dia. 20%
4. Modulus of Elasticity 14.9x106 psi
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The Contractor shall field verify all dimensions and condition of the materials to be
connected, review the Drawings and report any discrepancies to the Engineer for
clarification prior to starting fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor Bolts and Concrete Anchors:
1. Anchor bolts shall be installed in accordance with AISC "Code of Standard
Practice" by setting in concrete while it is being placed and positioned by
means of a rigidly held template.
2. The installation of concrete anchors shall be done in strict conformance with
the manufacturer's field demonstration and recommendations.
3. The holes drilled for adhesive anchors shall be cleaned by use of a fiber
bristle brush and dry compressed air. The anchors shall be supported in the
correct position until the adhesive sets and gains enough strength to prevent
any dislocation. Adhesive anchors shall not be tightened or loaded until the
adhesive has fully cured as recommended by the manufacturer.
4. No concrete anchor shall be installed before base concrete has attained
specified 28-day strength.
5. Concrete anchors shall not be used in place of anchor bolts without
Engineer's approval.
B. Bolts:
1. All steel bolts shall be installed in conformance with ASTM A325.
05092H-8 03/2017
1864
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Unless otherwise specified, where aluminum and steel members are

connected together they shall be fastened with Type 304 stainless steel bolts
and isolated with micarta, nylon, rubber, or approved equal.
C. Concrete Inserts: Provide concrete inserts where shown on the Contract Drawings.
Inserts shall be firmly held in position in the forms and sealed from intrusion of
concrete mortar during concrete placement.
D. Titanium Bolts
1. All bolts shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. Titanium anchors shall be installed in accordance with AISC “Code of
Standard Practice” by setting in concrete while it is being placed and
positioned by means of a rigidly held plate.
3.03 WELDING
A. Welding shall comply with the requirements of General Specifications 05091 -
Welding.
3.04 INSPECTION
A. At least 25 percent of the concrete anchors required to be installed shall be proof
tested to 1.33 times the allowable load specified by the manufacturer of the system.
B. Welding inspection shall be done in accordance with the requirements of General
Specifications 05091 - Welding.
C. Inspection of titanium bolted connections shall conform to the requirements of
AISC “Code of Standard Practice.”
END OF SECTION
05092H-9 11/2017
1865
CONTRACT DEL-260H
05092H-10 03/2017
1866
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05501H – METAL FABRICATIONS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 05501H
Metal Fabrications
Specification 05501-Metal Fabrications except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Delete 1.03.B in its entirety.
Delete 1.03.C in its entirety.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Delete 2.01A in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. Structural steel shapes shall be fabricated in accordance with the details shown on
the Contract Drawings and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36
unless otherwise indicated. All steel shall be galvanized in accordance with the
requirements of General Specification 05081 - Galvanizing, and shop painted in
accordance with General Specification 09900 - Painting.
Delete 2.01C in its entirety and replace with the following:
C. Stainless steel shapes and plate shall be Type 316 stainless steel for bolted
constructions and 316L for welded construction as detailed on the Contract
Drawings. Shapes shall conform to ASTM A276. Stainless steel plates shall
conform to ASTM A480 and ASTM A666.
Delete 2.02 ACCESS STAIRS, SHIP LADDERS AND PLATFORMS in its entirety and
replace with N/A.
05501H-1 11/2017
1867
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 05501H – METAL FABRICATIONS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Delete 2.03 FLOOR ACCESS HATCHES in its entirety and replace with N/A.
Delete 2.04.B in its entirety and replace with the following:
B. Materials and fabrication shall conform with ASTM A36. All galvanizing shall
be done after fabrication and shall conform to the requirements of General
Specification 05081 - Galvanizing.
Delete 2.07 CAST IRON MANHOLES STEPS in its entirety.
Delete 2.08 VERTICAL LADDERS in its entirety.
Delete 2.09 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM in its entirety.
Delete 2.10 STAIR NOSINGS in its entirety.
Delete 2.11 STEEL BOLLARDS in its entirety.
END OF SECTION
05501H-2 11/2017
1868
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07900H – CAULKING AND SEALANTS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 07900
Caulking and Sealants
Specification 07900 – Caulking and Sealants except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 MATERIALS
Add 2.02E:
E. Firestop Sealants and Other Firestopping System Components:

1. Provide penetration and joint firestopping that is produced and installed to
resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of
smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire resistance rating of
construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible
with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating
items if any.
a. Provide from selection of firestop manufacturer’s recommended
silicone rubber fire-stop systems based on construction condition and
fire resistance rating.
b. In corrosive environment which may contain chlorine gas provide
non-shrink mortar type fire-stop system as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration fire-
stopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on
testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
a. Fire-resistance-rated walls include smoke-barrier wall and fire
partitions.
07900H-1 11/2017
1869
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07900H – CAULKING AND SEALANTS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
b. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.
3. Provide multiple component systems coordinated to meet actual conditions
encountered in the Work and as recommended by fire-stop manufacturer.
4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
a. Mortar:
1) 3M, Inc., St. Paul, MN, 3M Fire Barrier Mortar
2) Specified Technologies Inc., Somerville, NJ, Series SSM
Firestop Mortar
3) RectorSeal, Houston, TX, Metacaulk Fire Rated Mortar
4) Or approved equal.
b. Sealant:
1) 3M, Inc., St. Paul, MN, 3M Fire Barrier Silicone Sealant 2000
2) Specified Technologies Inc., Somerville, NJ, SIL300 Silicone
Firestop Sealant
3) RectorSeal, Houston, TX, Metacaulk 835+ Silicone
Firestopping Sealant
END OF SECTION
07900H-2 11/2017
1870
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 09900H – PAINTING
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 09900H
Painting
Specification 09900 – Painting except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
1.09 PAINTING REQUIREMENTS
Replace paragraph in 1.09.B. with the following:
B. Manufacturer's Standard Finished Items: The following items shall be furnished with
the manufacturer's standard prime and finish coats applied in the shop: pumps,
motors, gears, gear housings, air compressors, wall fans, temperature control and
instrument panels, process air blowers, engines, filters, strainers, air dryers, meters,
gas boosters, gas turbines, generators, panelboards, transformers, boilers, condensing
units, water chillers, cooling towers, condensers, heat exchangers, humidifiers, air
handling units, sound attenuators, air conditioning and dehumidification units,
convector cabinets, unit heaters, enclosures for finned tube radiators, cabinet heaters,
boilers, wood seats, lockers, metal toilet partitions, metal urinal screens, aluminum
fascia, motor control centers, aluminum light standards, and hoisting equipment.
Steel reinforcing bars for concrete shall be coated in accordance with the Contract
Drawings. When powder coatings are required by the specification herein, the
powder coatings shall be in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer of
the item.
09900H-1 11/2017
1871
CONTRACT DEL-260H
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.03 MATERIALS
Add the following at the end of the table in 2.03.B:
CLASSIFICATION OF PAINTS
Dry Film
Paint Volume Thickness
Product Name and Number
Group Solids % Mils per
Coat
Sherwin Williams (Cleveland, OH): FIRETEX
69% 40.0*
FX5120
O
Carboline (St. Louis, MO): A/D Firefilm III 65% 30.0*
* Required DFT for specific fire rating is dependent on steel section and size. Consult
Representative.
09900H-2 11/2017
1872
CONTRACT DEL-260H
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.04 MATERIAL PAINTING SCHEDULE
Add this table to the end of Paragraph 3.04.A:
MATERIAL PAINTING SCHEDULE

Paint Groups (O)
Tn: Tnemec, Cb: Carboline, SW: Sherwin Williams, IP: International paint, PPG: PPG/Amercoat
Materials and Conditions Finish Coats
Prime Coat
1st 2nd 3rd
Paint Manufacturer SW SW SW SW
Fire Rated Steel and Iron - Structural and
Miscellaneous Uses:
Interior (Indoors) shop primed, field Waterbased Acrolon 100
Kem Bond HS O* O*
finished Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy
* Refer to UL N636 Beam Design for application thickness. Consult Sherwin-Williams Representative.
END OF SECTION
09900H-3 11/2017
1873
CONTRACT DEL-260H
09900H-4 11/2017
1874
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10200H – LOUVERS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 10200H
Louvers
Specification 10200 – Louvers except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Drainable Fixed Louver

1. Individual louver shall be Airolite (Schofield, WI) louver type 6776; fixed 43
degree, 6" deep drainable storm-proof blade of the following characteristics:
conditions.
10200H-1 11/2017
1875
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 10200H – LOUVERS
CONTRACT DEL-260H

8.15 sq. ft 0.18 in 0.005 oz
0.76 m .0450 kPa 1.53 g
B. Fixed Louver
1. Individual louver shall be Airolite (Schofield, WI) louver type 6096; fixed 43
degree, 6" deep stationary blade of the following characteristics:
conditions.

7.57 sq. ft 0.15 in 0.005 oz
0.70 m .038 kPa 1.53 g
END OF SECTION
10200H-2 11/2017
1876
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13281H – ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 13281H
ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT

included in the Allowance price bid for Contract Item H-A-1, as described in
END OF SECTION
13281H-1 11/2017
1877
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13281H – ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
13281H-2 11/2017
1878
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13282H – MERCURY MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 13282H
Mercury Management
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
13282H-1 11/2017
1879
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13282H – MERCURY MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
13282H-2 11/2017
1880
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13283H - LEAD MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 13283H
Lead Management
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
13283H-1 11/2017
1881
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13283H - LEAD MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
13283H-2 11/2017
1882
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13284H - PCB MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 13284H
PCB Management
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
for Contract Item H-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification 01270 –
END OF SECTION
13284H-1 11/2017
1883
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13284H - PCB MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260H
13284H-2 11/2017
1884
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13862H – NON-METALLIC DUCTWORK
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 13862H
Non-Metallic Ductwork
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 13862H - Non-Metallic Ductwork replaces General

Specification 13862 – Non-Metallic Ductwork in its entirety. All Work for this
Section shall fully conform to the requirements specified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as
shown, specified and required to furnish and install all non-metallic ductwork
complete with auxiliary equipment and accessories as shown, specified and/or
required for proper operation.
B. The following index of this Section is presented for convenience.
Article Title Page

13862-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................3
1.07 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................5
1.08 FABRICATION .....................................................................................5
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................5
2.01 MATERIALS .........................................................................................5
2.02 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK AND
ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................................6
2.03 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS ......................................12
2.04 MOTORIZED DAMPERS ..................................................................12
PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................13
3.01 INSTALLATION ................................................................................13
3.02 FIELD TESTING.................................................................................15
3.03 ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................16
3.04 BALANCING ......................................................................................16
3.05 CLEANING .........................................................................................16
3.06 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE .........................16
A. General Specification 15060 - Hangers and Supports
13862H-1 11/2017
1885
CONTRACT DEL-260H
B. General Specification 15810 - Ductwork and Duct Accessories

C. General Specification 15951 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
1.03 PAYMENT
A. There shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section, all costs shall be
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of
the following, except as otherwise shown or specified.
1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE).
2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA).
a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
b. Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual.
c. Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
3. ASTM C581-655 - Tentative Method of Test for Chemical
Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass Fiber Reinforced
Structures.
4. ASTM D2310 - Classification for Machine-Made Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin Pipe.
5. ASTM D2563 - Classifying Visual Defects In Glass Reinforced
Plastic Laminate Parts.
6. ASTM D2583 - Test for Indentation Hardness of Plastics by
Means of a Barcol Impressor.
7. ASTM D2996 - Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting
Resin Pipe.
8. ASTM D 3982 - Contact Molded Fiberglass Duct and Hoods.
9. ASTM D4024 - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Flanges, Spec.
For,
10. ASTM D4097 - Contact Molded Glass Fiber Reinforced
Thermoset Chemical Resistant Tank.
11. ASTM E2016 - Standard Specification for Industrial Woven
Wire Cloth
12. PS15-69 - Custom Contact Molded Reinforced-Polyester Chemical
Resistant Process Equipment. Standards of Society of the Plastic Industry.
13. UL 555 - Fire Dampers.
13862H-2 11/2017
1886
CONTRACT DEL-260H
B. Contractor shall provide certification that all stainless steel accessories including
screws, hangers, supports, etc. for FRP ductwork are Type 316 stainless steel.
C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements where required prior to installation
to ensure proper fitting of Work.
D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the version in effect at the
time of bid opening shall apply.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings, and material Specifications for the
approval of the Engineer. Submittals shall be provided, but not be limited to:
1. 1/4-inch scale duct layouts.
2. Dimensions.
3. Details of construction.
4. Details of installation, hanger details and spacing.
5. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, Specifications and engineering data
including, but not limited to:
a. Ductwork.
b. Registers, grilles and diffusers.
c. Fire Dampers (UL Listed):
1) Closing mechanisms.
2) Fusible link operating temperature.
3) Installation details.
4) Access Doors.
d. Flexible connections.
e. Duct sealants.
6. Air outlet schedule indicating room name and location of each outlet. Cross
reference contract designation and manufacturer's model number or name.
7. Specifications for FRP resins and reinforcing material used.
8. Specifications for fire-retardant epoxy FRP ductwork coating and
reinforcing material used.
9. Specification of FRP ductwork laminate construction including schedule of
duct sizes indicating weight per foot, wall thickness and all other data
required for indicating conformance to FRP round duct schedule. Submit
procedures for hand layup of duct joints.
10. Submit FRP rectangular duct schedule with sizes, thickness, vacuum
pressure, weight per foot pressure, spans, joint type, and flange data.
13862H-3 11/2017
1887
CONTRACT DEL-260H
11. Other technical data related to the specified material and equipment as
requested by Engineer.
B. Test Reports: Submit the following test reports for approval where required.
1. UL Label, Fire Dampers.
2. Volume Damper leakage tests from an AMCA approved testing laboratory.
C. Submit a letter stating that the proposed resins proposed in the fabrication of the
FRP ductwork will give satisfactory performance under the specified service
conditions or a corrosion resistance chart indicating same.
D. Manufacturer's certified literature indicating compliance with proposed pressure
and vacuum classification and wheel loading classification indicated below.
E. Tabulation in check list forms to indicate compliance with ASTM D 2563 Table I,
Level II visual acceptance levels.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Contractor shall engage a single firm, with undivided responsibility for
performance and other requirements and components of the ductwork. The
firm will show successful experience in the fabrication of ductwork systems
of scope and type similar to the required Work.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Contractor shall have at least five (5) years’ experience in the installation of
the Work specified. He shall employ only tradesmen with specific skills
and experience in this type of Work.
2. Contractor shall have undivided responsibility as a single firm for
performance and other requirements for the installation of the Work
specified herein.
C. The Contractor shall comply with applicable provisions of regulatory agencies
below and any others having jurisdiction and shall obtain and pay for all required
permits, fees and inspections.
1. Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated.
2. National Fire Protection Association.
3. National Electrical Code.
4. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances.
a. Building Code of the City of New York.
b. Code of New York State.
13862H-4 11/2017
1888
CONTRACT DEL-260H

A. All Work shall be constructed and installed properly in accordance with the
recommendations given in the latest edition of the Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards
and Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual as listed in Article 1.04.
B. All ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated on the Contract
Drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints, and
shall not be decreased at any point to avoid obstructions. No piping, conduit or
structural Work shall be installed in or through any ductwork. All ductwork shall
be run as close as possible to structural members, walls and ceilings. Ductwork
shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings, subject to such modifications as may
be necessary to suit field conditions to clear any obstruction or conflicts with other
equipment.
C. All ductwork shall be securely hung and anchored to the building structure. Unless
otherwise shown or specified, hangers for ducts shall conform with the
recommendations given in the SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction
Manual and SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Ducts shall be supported on
trapeze hangers with angles or rods. Use of strap hangers and straps is prohibited.
D. Resin cure for all FRP ductwork shall be checked by Barcol hardness and acetone
tests. Hardness shall be within 90 percent of resin manufacturer's Specification.
Barcol test shall be required for inside and outside surfaces of all fiberglass
fabrications in accordance with ASTM D2583.
E. Prior to final inspection, all surfaces shall be made clean by brushing, wiping, or
with a compressed-air blast to remove all loose foreign materials.
F. TheContractor shall perform a thorough inspection of each piece of ductwork will
be conducted upon arrival at construction site to inspect for damage incurred in
transit. Any damage shall be immediately repaired by respective equipment
manufacturer’s personnel (not a sales representative).
G. Where existing walls, floors or roofs must be penetrated, Contractor shall neatly
cut the required openings and patch the existing Work to provide a neat and finished
appearance.
1.08 FABRICATION
A. FRP ductwork and accessories shall be fabricated in a heated and well ventilated
structure protected from weather and temperature extremes (minimum 50 F).
Entire fabrication, curing and assembly process of any piece of FRP equipment
shall be indoors. Contractor shall submit an affidavit certifying that all FRP
equipment shall be fabricated, cured and assembled as described in this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Non-Metallic Ductwork:
13862H-5 11/2017
1889
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. FRP (fiber reinforced plastic) Ductwork: Provide where specified or

indicated on plans. All air outlets, hardware and fasteners shall be Type
316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.
B. Sleeves: Where ductwork passes through masonry walls, partitions or floors
provide minimum 16 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel.
C. Access Doors:
1. Type: Gasketed cam lock covers.
2. Materials: FRP.
3. Unless otherwise specified access doors shall be:
a. 12-by-6 inch for ducts sizes 12 inches and smaller.
b. 12-by-12 inch for ducts size 14 inches.
c. 21-by-14 inch for ducts between 14 and 36 inches.
d. 25-by-17 inch for ducts between 36 and 60 inches.
e. (2) 25-by-17 inch doors for ducts larger than 61 inches.
4. Access doors for fire dampers shall be stenciled "FIRE DAMPER
ACCESS" with minimum 1/2-inch high letters.
2.02 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK AND
ACCESSORIES
A. The fiberglass reinforced plastic duct system comply with the following minimum
conditions:
1. Air Temperature, degrees F: -10 to 120.
2. Corrosion resistance to chlorine.
3. Pressure Ratings:
a. Vacuum Service: Minimum -4 inches Water Gage, minimum.
b. Pressure Service: 4 inches Water Gage, minimum.
B. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork shall be of filament wound or hand
lay-up construction. FRP ductwork shall be of flame retardant material inside and
outside in accordance with NFPA-91. All ducts shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. FRP Duct Construction: Duct shall meet the applicable requirements of ASTM D
2310, Type 1, Grade 1 or 2, with Class "E" liner, 20 mills minimum thickness, and
be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 2996. Flanges and bolt drilling
circles and diameters shall conform to NBS PS 15-69 except that flanges shall be a
minimum of 0.75-inches thick. Ductwork shall be fabricated of vinylester resin as
specified below. All interior and exterior surfaces of ducts, dampers and FRP
accessories shall be coated with a minimum 90 percent resin, 5 percent antimony
13862H-6 11/2017
1890
CONTRACT DEL-260H
trioxide and nexus veil reinforcement. Exterior surfaces located outdoors shall be
factory-painted in accordance with Article 2.05.
D. Laminates shall consist of a 10 to 20 mil chemical resistant liner with a synthetic
surfacing veil embedded in a resin rich surface. The corrosion barrier shall be a
minimum of 100 mils and include no less than two (2) layers of 1-1/2 ounce mat
with 25% glass and 75% resin content. The structural layer shall be of sufficient
thickness to meet the minimum thickness requirements specified. The exterior
surface layer shall be resin rich apertured nexus veil not less than 20 mils thick.
Outside finish shall have a paraffinated pigmented gel coat finish with an ultra
violet inhibitor. The composition specified for the inner surface and interior layer
is intended to achieve optimum chemical resistance.
E. Resins used in the laminate shall be premium corrosion resistant and fire retardant
brominated bispenol-A vinylester resins as manufactured by:
1. Dow Chemical Company, Derakane – Midland, MI.
2. Reichhold Chemicals, Dion 9300 FR – Research Triangle Park, NC.
3. Ashland Chemical Company, Hetron FR992 – Lexington, KY.
4. AOC Vipel K022, Collierville, TN
F. Antimony trioxide shall be provided in the percentage recommended by the resin

manufacture in order to achieve a Class I fire retardant laminate. Antimony trioxide
may be omitted where the resin formulation does not require additional additives
to achieve a Class I fire retardant laminate. Resin data submitted shall include fire
retardant supporting information. Synthetic surfacing veil shall be Nexus 100-10
(apertured) for the corrosion liner and Nexus 100-00 (non-apertured) for the
exterior surface) as manufactured by PFG.
G. All cut edges shall be sealed with a resin coating of the same resin as used in the
fabrication. The resin shall contain paraffin.
H. Manufacturer: Provide products as manufactured by one of the following:
1. International Reinforced Plastics, Denmark, SC.
2. Southeastern Fiberglass Products Inc., Bamberg, SC.
3. Viron International, Temple, TX.
I. All FRP ductwork installed within the interior of any building shall be additionally
protected with a two component catalytic epoxy intumescent fire-retardant coating.
1. Reference: United States Military Specification, Mil-C-46081A.
13862H-7 11/2017
1891
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Surface Preparation: All mold release agents and other foreign matter shall
be completely removed. All glossy surfaces shall be brush-blasted or
sanded and cleaned.
3. Manufacturer: Provide products as manufactured by one of the following:
a. Flame Control Coatings, Incorporated, Flame Control No. 46081
Thermal Insulating (Intumescent) Epoxy Paint, Niagara Falls, NY.
4. Laminate must be fully cured before application of fire-retardant coating.
5. Apply first coating minimum 8-10 mil (wet) over duct.
6. Immediately apply one layer of C-Veil onto wet coating. Brush or roll C-
Veil to remove any creases and to completely wet C-Veil.
7. Apply second layer of intumescent coating at 8-10 mil (wet) minimum
thickness. Dry thickness of two coats plus C-Veil shall be not less than 10
mils.
8. Apply additional coats as required to ensure that C-Veil is completely
immersed in the epoxy coating and completely wetted and that the total dry
thickness will be greater than 10 mils. There shall be no exposed or dry C-
Veil.
9. The flame spread rating of the fire-retardant coating shall not exceed 25 and
the smoke developed rating shall not exceed 50. The manufacturer shall
submit test data indicating that the fire retardant system does not exceed
listed ratings and has been tested by Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
10. Color shall be light gray.
J. Fittings and Joints: All fittings such as elbows, laterals, tees, and reducers shall be
of the same resin, equal or superior in strength to the adjacent duct section and shall
have the same internal diameter as the adjacent duct. Round duct joints shall be
butt-wrapped or bell and spigot joints as shown or required. Bell and spigot joints
shall be sealed with a standard butt joint overlay as per PS 15-69. All interior
surfaces of joint to be coated with a paraffinated resin-rich gel coat.
K. Total width of overlay for butt-wrap joints shall be not less than 6 inches for
diameters between 8 and 30 inches and not less than 10 inches for diameters 31
inches and larger.
L. Standard Elbows:
1. Standard elbow centerline radius shall be equal to 1-1/2 times the diameter.
2. Standard elbows up to 24-inch diameter shall be smooth radius molded
elbows. Standard elbows 25-inch diameter and greater may be mitered
sections as specified below.
3. 0° to 44° elbows shall contain one (1) mitered joint and two (2) sections.
45° to 80° elbows shall have a minimum of two (2) mitered joints and three
13862H-8 11/2017
1892
CONTRACT DEL-260H
(3) sections. Elbows greater than 80° shall have a minimum of four (4)
mitered joints and five (5) sections.
4. All square elbows shall have FRP or Type 316 stainless steel single
thickness turning valves with streamlined leading edges.
M. Maximum allowable deflection for any size ductwork shall be 1/2-inch between
supports and for any side of duct under worst case operating conditions.
N. Tolerances:
1. Out-of-roundness of duct shall be limited to ±1/8-inch or ±1 percent of duct
inside diameter, whichever is greater for duct sizes 8-inch diameter and
greater.
2. Length of all flange pipe sections shall not vary more than ±1/8-inch at 70
F.
3. All unflanged ducts shall be square on the ends in relation to the pipe axis
and ±1/8-inch up to and including 24-inch diameter and ±3/16-inch for all
diameters greater than 24-inch.
4. Fittings: The tolerance on angles of all fittings shall be ±1 degree, up to and
including 24-inch diameter and ±1/2 degree for 30-inch diameter and above.
5. Flanges:
a. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the duct within 1/2
degree.
b. Flange faces shall be flat to within ± 1/32-inch, up to and including
18-inch diameter and flat within ± 1/16-inch for 20-inch diameter
and larger.
c. Provide custom filler pieces as required to mate flanges squarely.
O. Contractor shall submit wall thickness calculations for review. Calculations shall
1. Wall thickness determination shall be based on the structural fiberglass
reinforced wall only.
2. Wall thickness shall have a safety factor of 4 to 1 for pressure and vacuum
service.
3. Wall thickness shall be suitable for use up to 120 F in pressure service and
vacuum service.
4. Wall thickness shall be based on a 0.50-inch maximum deflection between
supports and for any side of duct under worst case operating conditions.
5. Where ductwork is located outdoors, wall thickness shall be based on the
following occurring simultaneously:
a. Wind Load: 25 pounds per square foot.
13862H-9 11/2017
1893
CONTRACT DEL-260H
b. Rectangular duct may be reinforced with fiberglass angles,

channels, tees or tubes as required to meet required pressure/vacuum
service.
P. All connections to expansion joints, butterfly dampers, tanks, or other equipment
shall be flanged. Gaskets shall be EPDM or Butyl and bolts, nuts and washers shall
be Type 316 stainless steel. Flanges shall be hand laid up to PS 15-69 thickness,
except that minimum thickness shall be 3/4-inch. The flange shall be hand laid-up
anchored to a waxed table to achieve the flatness tolerance outlined within this
Section. The face shall be textured for use with full face gaskets, 1/8-inch minimum
thickness. Pipe flange drilling shall be NBS PS 16-69. All FRP duct and pipe
flange bolt holes shall be back spot faced for a washer seat. All flange bolts shall
be torqued to values as recommended by manufacturer.
Q. Hangers and Supports:
1. All ductwork shall be securely hung and anchored to the building structure.
Unless otherwise shown or specified, hangers and stiffeners for ducts shall
conform with the recommendations given in the SMACNA Thermoset FRP
Duct Construction Manual and SMACNA seismic restraint manual. Ducts
shall be supported on trapeze hangers with angles or rods. Use of strap
hangers and straps is prohibited.
2. All ductwork shall be supported from trapeze type hangers. Hanger rods
shall be minimum 3/8. A pair of rods shall be provided at each duct support
point. Maximum hanger spacing shall be 8 feet except where noted
otherwise or where shorter spacing is required per ASTM D 3982
3. All hangers, rods, supports, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and appurtenances
shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Hanger Construction and installation shall conform to SMACNA
Standards, except as specified. No sheet metal duct hangers or straps will
be allowed.
5. Support shall be furnished at each fitting.
6. Conform to all requirements of General Specification 15060 - Hangers and
Supports.
R. There shall be not less than a 1/4-inch buildup of FRP over the duct at each support.
Each support shall be furnished with a 1/8-inch thick teflon sheet to shield the duct
from the support.
S. Square or rectangular FRP ductwork shall be constructed of the same materials and
conform to the same standards as specified above for round FRP ductwork. All
square elbows shall have FRP or Type 316 stainless steel single thickness turning
vanes.
T. Furnish flexible connectors for every 100 linear feet of run and wherever ductwork
crosses an expansion joint as a minimum or as shown on the Drawings with anchors
and guides. Flexible connectors shall be W-design units constructed of EPDM or
13862H-10 11/2017
1894
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Butyl 3/16-inch thick, reinforced with a strong synthetic asbestos-free fabric

suitable for corrosive service. Expansion service flexible connectiors shall be
designed to allow 1-inch of contraction and 3.8-inches of expansion. Working
length or flange to flange length shall be a minimum of 12-inches. Ends shall be
flanged, with flanges conforming to NBS PS 15-69. Corners on rectangular
expansion joints shall be molded and free of patches or splices. The flexible
connectors shall be suitable for outdoor service and temperature ranges from -65°F
up to 300°F, and pressure to 5 psig. Specially fabricated split 3/8-inch thick Type
316 stainless steel retaining back-up bars shall be supplied to prevent damage to
the EPDM rubber flanges when Type 316 stainless steel bolts are tightened.
1. Manufacturer: Provide products as manufactured by one of the following:
a. Holz Rubber Company, Lodi, CA.
b. Pathway Bellows Incorporated, Darlyn 1100, Oak Ridge, TN.
c. Mercer Rubber Company, Hauppauge, NY.
d. Or approved equal.
U. Rectangular Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Dampers:
1. Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings manually operated
opposed-blade dampers. Dampers shall be fabricated from materials similar
to those specified for FRP ductwork. Type 316 stainless steel may be used
as an option to FRP material for dampers.
2. Rating Conditions:
a. Velocity Through Damper: 4000 fpm maximum.
b. Pressure Rating: 15 inches water column.
c. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 7.5 cfm per square foot at 15-inch
w.g. pressure.
3. Materials:
a. Bearings: Teflon.
b. Blade: FRP, airfoil shape, 4 inches wide blades.
c. Frame: FRP channel.
d. Shafts: 3/4" Type 316 stainless steel, full length of damper size as
shown on the Drawings.
e. Finish: FRP.
f. Handle (manual damper): Type 316 stainless steel.
g. Pins: Type 316 stainless steel.
h. Bushings: Teflon.
i. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.
13862H-11 11/2017
1895
CONTRACT DEL-260H
j. Angles: FRP.
k. Ends: Flanged with bolt holes drilled. Flange thickness shall not
vary more than 1/16 inch.
l. Blade, Shaft and Jamb Seals: EPDM suitable for use in a hydrogen
sulfide atmosphere.
4. Dimensions: As shown on the Drawings.
5. Leakage test and performance data from an AMCA approved testing
laboratory shall be submitted.
6. Manufacturers: Provide products as manufactured by one of the following:
a. Swartwout, Phillips Industries, Model 1108AF, Kansas City, MO
V. Sleeves shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Install round duct sleeves and mechanical
link seals for round duct as required.
W. Conform to General Specification 15810 - Ductwork and Duct Accessories (in
Type 316 stainless steel construction) for fire dampers, bird screen and other
accessories.
2.03 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
A. As specified in General Specification 15810 - Ductwork and Duct Accessories (in
Type 316 stainless steel construction).
2.04 MOTORIZED DAMPERS
A. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, motorized spring return FRP
dampers.
B. Motorized dampers shall be as specified above for rectangular dampers except that
a factory installed motorized actuator shall be provided in lieu of a hand operator.
C. Motorized actuator shall be factory mounted and tested at the damper manufacturer.
Actuator torque shall be verified with the damper manufacturer.
D. Electric motor actuators shall be provided for all electrically operated dampers and
shall be furnished complete with accessories as specified.
E. Actuators shall be rated for NEMA 4X.
F. Each electric motor operator shall be capable of providing not less than 1.5 times
the required operator torque for opening and closing of the damper. Responsibility
for correct actuator sizing shall be that of the damper manufacturer.
G. Motor operation cycle time from full open to full close shall be set for 15 seconds.
H. The operator shall be furnished with a hand wheel for manual operation.
I. The operator gear reducer shall be provided with four limit switches and two torque
switches. Two limit switches shall indicate full open and two shall indicate full
closed positions. Limit switches shall be field adjustable. Switches shall be
13862H-12 11/2017
1896
CONTRACT DEL-260H
equipped with SPDT contacts. Limit switches and torque switches shall be supplied
in the enclosure furnished and mounted on the operators.
J. The electric motor shall be designed for actuator service, Class B insulation,
squirrel cage construction, with thermal overloads, and suitable for operation on
120 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz power.
K. Circuitry and devices shall be furnished with the operator to provide damper
position and indication for remote control and monitoring through the automatic
temperature control system. Terminal strips shall accept #12 gauge wire size.
Provide additional terminal strips for remote signals.
L. Provide limit switches and position indicators for interlocking and monitoring.
1. Provide position indicating signals as follows:
a. Damper completely opened.
b. Damper completely closed.
c. Damper stopped at any intermediate position.
M. The actuator gearing shall be heat treated alloy steel and designed to withstand the
stall torque developed by the actuator.
N. All external fasteners shall be type 316 stainless steel.
O. The actuator shall be lubricated at the time of manufacture and not require any field
lubrication.
P. Manufacturer: Provide motorized dampers of one of the following:
1. Raymond Control Systems (RCS), Houston, TX.
2. Rotork, Milwaukee, WI.
3. Limitorque, Irving, TX.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Turning vanes shall be installed in all miter elbows to permit air to make the abrupt
turns with a minimum of turbulence. The turning vanes shall be quiet and free from
vibration when the system is in operation. Turning vanes shall be single thickness
type. Vanes shall be installed in all short radius elbows in accordance with
SMACNA standards and Industrial Duct Construction standards. Duct clean out
doors shall be provided at each elbow with turning vanes.
B. Manual volume dampers larger than 11 inches in any dimension shall be opposed
blade type. The damper blades shall be operated by a lockable dial regulator and
may be set in any position. The dial regulators shall be marked so that the "open"
and "shut" positions are clearly identified. The dial regulators on insulated
13862H-13 11/2017
1897
CONTRACT DEL-260H
ductwork shall be mounted on an elevated platform which will finish flush with the
surface of the insulation. Manual volume dampers shall be located at accessible
points and wherever possible some distance from a duct transition or fitting. Care
shall be taken during installation to make certain that sheet metal fasteners do not
protrude into the duct and interfere with damper operation. Dampers shall be
provided in each branch duct take off and in both ducts downstream of each trunk
duct split. Manual volume dampers shall be FRP construction. Splitter type
dampers shall not be installed.
C. Duct access doors shall be provided within working distance of, and on the fusible
link side of all fire dampers, adjacent to volume dampers, on the linkage side of
automatic dampers and at all other apparatus requiring service or inspection in the
duct system. The doors shall be rigid and airtight, and provided with EPDM
gaskets, hinges and sash locks. Whenever space requirements are such that a
hinged access door is impractical, a screw fastened lift-out door shall be provided
instead.
D. Test openings shall be installed in the ductwork to facilitate air testing, adjusting
and balancing where directed by the Contractor. The openings shall be sealed by a
screw cap and gasket.
E. Flexible connectors for preventing the transmission of vibrations through the
ductwork to the structure shall be installed between the ductwork and all air moving
equipment and at the building joints. Flexible connectors shall be neoprene-
impregnated fabric collars with cemented seams fastened with straps and bolts of
the same material as the ductwork. Flexible connectors shall not be painted or used
to correct misalignment.
F. The fire damper shall be secured to a stainless steel collar with 1/4" diameter
stainless steel nuts and bolts with maximum spacing of 12 inches on center and a
minimum of two fastenings per side beginning two inches from the corners of the
collar. The collars shall be at least the same gauge as the ductwork to which it is
attached. Regardless of the duct gauge, collars shall not be lighter than 24 gauge
316 stainless steel. Retaining angles shall be installed on four sides of the collar
and on both sides of the protected opening with a minimum of one inch overlap on
the wall or floor. The 316 stainless steel angles shall be a minimum of 1 1/2" x 1
1/2" x 1/8" and shall be fastened to the collar only; do not fasten angles to the wall
or floor.
G. The angles shall be fastened to the collar with 1/4" diameter stainless steel nuts and
bolts with a maximum spacing of 6 inches on center and a minimum of two
fastenings per side beginning two inches from the corners of the collar. Where gas
tight seals are required, the angles shall be fastened to the collar with a continuous
weld and a sealant shall be installed between the angle and the wall or floor.
Collars, angles and hardware used with stainless steel fire dampers shall be Type
316 stainless steel. Clearance for expansion is required between the collar and the
opening on the top and on each vertical side. The clearance shall be 1/8 inch per
lineal foot of sleeve with clearance on the sides distributed equally and all vertical
clearance on the top. The retaining angles shall be increased in size to provide the
13862H-14 11/2017
1898
CONTRACT DEL-260H
minimum overlap of one inch on the wall or floor. The ductwork shall be connected
to the collar sides of the collar. The distance from the wall or floor to the breakaway
connection shall not exceed 6 inches.
H. Contractor shall furnish and install sleeves for registers, grilles, and dampers
mounted in the masonry, concrete plenums or shafts. Sleeves shall be 16 gage Type
316 stainless steel.
I. After the installation is completed, the Contractor shall seal all joints air tight.
Sealants and tape shall have a flame spread not greater than 25 and a smoke
developed rating of not over 50.
J. All screens shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Bird screen shall conform to ASTM
E2016, Type 1, Class 1, 2 x 2 mesh (0.031 inch diameter stainless steel wires).
Frame shall be removable Type 316 stainless steel construction.
K. All ductwork shall conform accurately to the dimensions shown, the ducts shall be
straight and smooth inside with joints neatly finished; ductwork shall be installed
so as to preclude the possibility of vibration under all operating conditions.
L. Elbows shall have a minimum centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the width of the duct.
Turning vanes shall be provided at all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be double
wall and shall be quiet and free from vibration when the system is in operation.
M. Provide flexible connectors at inlet and discharge of air handling equipment.
N. Provide volume dampers where indicated on the Drawings and as required to
facilitate accurate volume control. The duct of the damper shall be reinforced to
prevent vibration. Volume dampers specified with air devices shall be installed in
addition to those shown on the Drawings.
O. Fire dampers shall be provided and installed where indicated on the Drawings and
where required by U.L. and authorities having jurisdiction, and shall be approved
by local building codes and in accordance with the requirements of the NFPA.
P. Provide access doors for all dampers for inspection and maintenance.
Q. Install all ductwork and accessories to provide a system free from buckling,
warping, breathing or vibration.
R. All expansion joints in ducts at building expansion joints shall be suitably supported
at each end by support guides within 12 inches of joint.
S. All ducts at flexible connectors with air handling equipment, and fans shall be
supported at free end within 12 inches of flexible connector.
T. Provisions shall be made for supporting all ductwork, dampers, and other ductwork
accessories, where necessary.
U. All ductwork shall arrive on site fully fabricated, not in two halves for field
fabricated.
3.02 FIELD TESTING
A. Preliminary and final field test shall be performed for all equipment provided under
13862H-15 11/2017
1899
CONTRACT DEL-260H
this Specification, as specified in Article 13 of the General Conditions and Detailed

Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT
A. Set volume control devices for approximate positions in preparation for final testing
and balancing.
B. Install fusible links in fire dampers and verify that dampers are in open position.
C. Start fan system and check for excessive leaks and vibration and correct.
3.04 BALANCING
A. Systems shall be completely tested, adjusted and balanced. A complete balancing
procedure shall be submitted for approval. All equipment and connections required
to balance the systems shall be provided.
B. All duct systems shall be balanced in accordance with General Specification 15951
- Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. Test and balance air volume within 5 percent
of specified capacity.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove all loose materials and obstructions from interior of ducts.
B. Remove debris and waste materials resulting from installation.
3.06 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE
A. Schedule of Non-Metal Duct Construction Standards:
1. Non-metallic ductwork shall be constructed as specified herein.
2. All accessories, including but not limited to, turning vanes, air turning
devices, manual volume dampers, motor operated control dampers, fire
dampers, access doors, etc. shall be suitable for the pressure classification
given above.
3. All supports, angles, clamps, hangers and hardware shall be Type 316
stainless steel.
B. Ductwork Material Schedule: Ductwork materials shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
13862H-16 11/2017
1900
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15060H – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15060H
Hangers and Supports
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15060H – Hangers and Supports replaces General
Specification 15060 – Hangers and Supports in its entirety. All Work for this Section shall
fully conform to the requirements specified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall provide all hangers, supporting devices and appurtenances shown,
specified or required for pipes, fittings, valves and other in-line equipment.
B. Included in this classification are rod hangers; clevis hangers, spring hangers; stanchion,
roller and pipe pole supports and saddle stands; supports of structural steel; concrete
saddles, concrete anchor blocks and bases, and all necessary guides, restraints, fastening
devices, anchor bolts, pipe anchors and appurtenances.
C. Contractor shall provide all temporary pipe supports required during construction.
D. Contractor shall design all piping support systems in accordance with the requirements of
this Section unless otherwise shown or specified.
E. The following index of this Section is included for convenience:
Article Title Page

15060-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................3
1.06 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................5
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................6
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................6
2.02 MATERIALS .........................................................................................6
2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ..............................................................7
2.04 ACCESSORIES .....................................................................................8
2.05 PIPE INSULATION PROTECTION ..................................................10
2.06 PIPE ANCHORS AND BRACES .......................................................10
2.07 INSPECTION ......................................................................................10
2.08 GALVANIZING ..................................................................................10
PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................11
15060H-1 11/2017
1901
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3.01 GENERAL ...........................................................................................11

3.02 SPACING OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ....................................11
3.03 PAINTING AND COATING ..............................................................12
3.04 TESTING .............................................................................................12
A. Detailed Specification 03600 - Grout
B. Detailed Specification 05081 - Galvanizing
C. Detailed Specification 05501 - Metal Fabrications
1.03 PAYMENT
A. There shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section; all costs shall be included
in the Lump Sum price bid for Contract Item H-LS-1, as specified in Section 01270 –
1.04 REFERENCES
A. The Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry:
1. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture.
2. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
3. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation
Practices.
4. MSS SP-90 - Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports.
B. Federal Specification, FS W-H-171 - Hangers and Support, Pipe.
C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-203 - Pipe Hanger Equipment.
D. ASTM A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
E. ASTM A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
F. ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel
Bars and Shapes.
G. ASTM A283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile
Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars.
H. ASTM A778 - Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubular Products.
I. ASME - B31.1 - Power Piping.
J. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association.
K. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
15060H-2 11/2017
1902
CONTRACT DEL-260H

A. Contractor shall provide hangers and supports of sufficient strength to maintain the
pipelines and appurtenances in proper position and alignment under all operating
conditions.
B. Contractor shall provide the services of a New York State registered professional engineer
to design the supports for all pipelines and appurtenances, for all weights, forces and
applied pressures. The pipe support designer shall have a minimum of five (5) years’
experience in the design of pipe supports and shall have completed at least five (5)
successful pipe support projects of equal complexity as the systems specified. In the design
of hangers, supports and anchors, unless otherwise shown or specified, pipe pressures shall
be the maximum test pressures specified for pipelines carrying gases and twice the
maximum test pressures specified for pipelines carrying liquids.
1. Pipe support design shall include load and movement calculations.
2. The following loads shall be included in pipe support design and pipe stress
analysis:
a. Gravity Force, including weight of pipeline and appurtenances, contents,
insulation, etc.
b. Thermal Expansion Force developed by the restraint of free end
displacement of the piping.
c. Hydrostatic Forces developed by internal pressure during operation of the
piping system.
d. Loading due to expansion joint reaction forces.
e. Seismic forces, as required by the New York City Building Code.
3. Supports, guides and anchors for flexible couplings and expansion joints shall be
in accordance with the coupling and joint manufacturer's specification and the
standards of the Expansion Joints Manufacturers Association.
4. Wherever possible, pipe supports shall be designed using manufacturer's standard
catalog products.
5. Hangers and supports for piping systems subject to thermal expansion and
contraction, or to similar movements imposed by other sources, shall be designed
to provide flexibility, and pipe stress analysis shall be provided.
6. Where resonance with imposed vibration and/or shock occurs during operation,
suitable dampeners, restraints, anchors, etc. shall be added to remove those effects.
7. Occasional load calculations and pipe stress analysis shall be provided where
required by the specification herein and applicable building codes andstandards.
Occasional loads include:
a. Seismic forces.
b. Pressure waves produced by sudden changes in fluid momentum,
commonly referred to as water hammer.
15060H-3 11/2017
1903
CONTRACT DEL-260H
c. Wind, snow or ice loads.

d. Safety valve thrust loads
8. Stressers in hangers, rods and brackets shall be in accordance with Table 2 of MSS-
SP-58.
C. All hangers and supports shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASME B31.1,
MSS SP-58, SP-59, SP-69 and SP-90, except as modified herein, and be of standard
manufacture wherever possible, and best suited for the service required.
D. Unless otherwise approved, all hangers, supports and concrete inserts shall be listed with
Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc.
E. General Requirements:
1. Pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in a manner to
prevent any stress being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have
indicated that piping loads should not be transmitted to their equipment, the
Contractor shall submit certification that piping loads are alternately and adequately
supported.
2. Where practicable, piping shall be run in groups and parallel to building walls. A
minimum clearance of one inch shall be provided between pipe and other work.
3. Hangers or supports shall be provided at all locations where piping changes
direction.
4. Hangers and supports shall be capable of adjustment after placement of piping.
5. Types of hangers and supports shall be kept to a minimum.
6. Suspended or supported ductile iron pipe shall have a hanger or support adjacent to
each hub or flanged end.
7. Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor and between floors by stays or
braces to prevent rattling and vibration.
8. Hanger rods shall be straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap or perforated bar
hangers shall not be used. Hangers shall not be suspended from piping.
9. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be prevented by use of copper plated,
rubber or vinyl coated hangers or supports.
10. Hangers and supports shall provide for expansion and contraction throughout the
full operating temperature range.
11. Any required pipe supports, for which the supports called for in this Section are
not applicable, shall be fabricated or constructed from standard steel shapes,
concrete and anchor hardware, and shall be subject to the approval of Engineer.
12. Where hanger or support spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing,
structural steel channels shall be attached to joists or ribs, and the pipes suspended
therefrom.
15060H-4 11/2017
1904
CONTRACT DEL-260H
13. All points of adjustment for pipe and duct hanger rods shall be locked securely in
place using double-nutting. Double-nutting means two nuts torqued directly
against each other under each point of adjustment in addition to a third nut on top
of the bracket. Damaging threads or tack welding as a method of locking
adjustment is not permitted.
14. All threaded assemblies shall be double nutted or provided with pinned nuts.
Alternately, tack welding of bolted assemblies may be acceptable unless provisions
for vertical adjustment is required.
15. At all flexible couplings, supports shall be placed on each side and as close to the
coupling as possible. Supports shall be the guide type which prevent axial
movement from resulting in pipe deflection and misalignment.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings for approval of the Engineer. Submittals shall
include, but not be limited to:
1. Name and qualifications of the support and hanger engineer.
2. Detailed Shop Drawings showing all hangers and supports for each piping system.
Shop Drawings shall show location, installation, material, loads, forces, stresses
and deflections of all hangers and supports. Reaction forces imparted to structures
to which hangers and supports are attached shall be shown.
3. Manufacturer's catalogs and engineering data on all hangers and supports.
4. Load ratings.
5. Materials.
6. Installation details.
7. All drawings and specified or required design calculations, signed and sealed by a
New York State registered professional engineer.
B. Contractor shall provide detailed drawings of each pipe support. Each drawing shall
contain enough information to verify the pipe support design and to allow the manufacture
of the device. At a minimum, the Contractor shall submit:
1. Scaled details of the device with dimensions.
2. A table of applied forces and moments.
3. A complete bill of materials.
4. An isometric showing the applied forces and moments.
5. Detailed connections to existing structure.
6. Shop and field welds.
C. Each submittal shall have the following:
1. A unique identification number and revision level.
15060H-5 11/2017
1905
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Stamp of a New York State registered professional engineer experienced in pipe

support design as specified in Article 1.05B.
A. Equipment and materials shall be delivered to the site to insure uninterrupted progress of
the Work. Pipe hanger inserts which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete shall be
delivered in ample time not to delay the Work.
B. Equipment and materials shall be stored to permit easy access for inspection and
identification, and shall be kept in covered storage off the ground, using pallets, platforms
or other supports. They shall be protected from condensation, corrosion and deterioration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Provide products of one of the following:
1. T&L Metal Fabricators, Inc – IL.
2. Carpenter and Paterson – Woburn, MA.
B. Each type of hanger and support shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Materials for hangers and supports of metallic construction shall conform to ASME B31.1
and to the following standards:
1. Structural Steel, ASTM A 36 and A 283.
2. Iron Castings, ASTM A 48 (Class No. 35).
3. Stainless Steel, ASTM A 276.
a. Type 316 stainless steel for non-welded items.
b. Type 316L stainless steel for welded or fabricated items.
c. Tensile Strength 70,000 psi minimum.
d. Yield Strength 25,000 psi minimum.
e. Elongation in 2 inches 35%.
f. Reduction of area 45%.
4. Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube, ASTM A 778, Type 316L stainless steel.
B. Pipe supports, hangers, brackets, guides, restraints, rods, bolts and shall be Type 316
stainless steel in Corrosive Areas and galvanized steel in non-corrosive areas. Concrete
inserts shall be of malleable iron with galvanized finish. Where steel is used herein, it shall
refer to Type 316 stainless steel for corrosive areas and galvanized steel for non-corrosive
areas.
15060H-6 11/2017
1906
CONTRACT DEL-260H
C. Pipe rolls, including stands and bases, shall be of cast iron, hot-dipped galvanized
conforming to ASTM A123 for non-corrosive areas and Type 316 stainless steel for
corrosive areas.
D. Only new materials shall be provided.
E. Hangers and supports shall conform to MSS-SP-58, Table 2.
F. Expansion anchors for use in existing concrete structure shall be made of Type 316
stainless steel.
2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and supports where shown shall be in accordance with the Contract Drawings.
Hangers and supports not shown shall comply with MSS SP-58.
B. All hangers and supports shall allow minimum 3-inches of vertical adjustment.
C. Hangers and Supports shall be of the following types:
1. Hangers for Single Pipes:
a. Single pipes shall be supported by hangers suspended by rods from
structural steel members, inserts in concrete ceilings and beams, bottom of
trapeze hangers and wall mounted steel angle brackets. The strength of the
rod shall be based on its root diameter.
b. Except for piping subject to thermal expansion and contraction or as
otherwise specified in the Detailed Specifications, pipe hangers shall be
adjustable clevis type MSS SP-58 Type-1.
c. Piping subject to thermal expansion and contraction shall be supported on
rollers.
2. Hangers or Supports for Multiple Pipes:
a. Multiple pipes, running parallel in the same horizontal plane, and adjacent
to each other, shall be suspended by trapeze type hangers or supported on
wall brackets. Trapeze hangers shall consist of channel sections supported
from threaded rods or attached to concrete walls, columns or structural steel
support members.
b. Except as otherwise specified herein, pipe anchors used for attaching pipe
to trapeze or multiple pipe wall brackets, shall be anchor or pipe chains as
required.
3. Supports for Single Pipe:
a. Single pipes located in a horizontal plane close to the floor shall be
supported by one of the methods specified herein or as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
b. Pipes shall be supported by adjustable stanchions, pipe saddle or roll
supports with "U" bolts. Stanchions shall provide at least 4-inches
adjustment and be flanged-mounted to floor.
15060H-7 11/2017
1907
CONTRACT DEL-260H
c. Stanchions and saddle stands shall be of galvanized steel.

4. Wall Supported Pipes: Single or multiple pipes located adjacent to walls, columns
or other structural members, and an excessive distance from ceilings or underside
of beams, shall be supported using stainless steel wall brackets, MSS SP-58 Type
32 or 33. Where pipes rest on top of bracket pipe supports, attachments shall meet
the requirements specified under Paragraph 2.b above.
5. Supports for Base Elbows: Where pipes change direction from horizontal to
vertical through a bend, a welded or cast base anchor, support shall be installed at
the bend to carry the load.
6. Supports for Vertical Pipes: Pipe riser clamps shall be used to support all vertical
pipes extending through floor slabs. Riser clamps shall be MSS SP-58 Type 42 or
8. Insulation shall be removed from insulated pipes prior to installing riser clamps.
7. Supports for Pipelines with Thermal Expansion:

a. Pipe rolls for single rod hangers: Steel frame construction, steel roller and
steel roller rod provided with threaded nuts. Vertical adjustment permitted
for pipe sizes 6 inches or less unless otherwise approved.
b. Pipe rolls for double rod hangers: Steel roller, steel roller rod, threaded
sockets which permit vertical adjustment.
8. Supports for Copper & Brass Pipes: All copper and brass pipe supports shall be
specifically manufactured for use with copper & brass pipe. Hangers shall be
provided with a copper finish.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods:
1. Material shall be Type 316 stainless steel in corrosive areas and galvanized steel in
non-corrosive areas. Maximum allowable working stress shall be 5,800 psi,
calculated based on the root diameter.
2. Rods shall have a square head nut on top and running thread on bottom end.
3. Hanger rods for single pipe hangers shall be sized in accordance with the following
schedule:
Hanger Rod Diameter

(Minimum)
Maximum
Pipe Size Single Rod Double Rod Load Per
(inches) (inches) (inches) Hanger (lbs)
3/4 to 1-1/2, incl 3/8 3/8 300
2 3/8 3/8 325
15060H-8 11/2017
1908
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Hanger Rod Diameter

(Minimum)
Maximum
Pipe Size Single Rod Double Rod Load Per
(inches) (inches) (inches) Hanger (lbs)
2-1/2 1/2 3/8 350
3 1/2 3/8 400
3-1/2 1/2 3/8 450
4 5/8 1/2 850
5 5/8 1/2 950
6 3/4 5/8 1075
8 *7/8 5/8 1350
10 *7/8 5/8 1750
12 *7/8 3/4 2200
14 *1 7/8 2500
16 *1 7/8 3075
18 *1 7/8 3700
20 *1-1/4 1 4425
24 *1-1/4 1 6050
* Single rods may be used only if approved by the Engineer. If not approved,
double rods shall be used.
a. Hanger loads shall be calculated based on the weight of pipe filled with
water plus 50 pounds per foot of dead load.
B. Concrete Inserts, Attachment Plates and Clamps:
1. Hanger rods up to 7/8-inch diameter shall be attached to new concrete structures
using concrete inserts MSS SP-58, Type 18. Inserts shall be malleable iron with
galvanized finish. The use of steel inserts is prohibited. Design of the inserts shall
permit the rods to be adjusted laterally in one plane and to lock the rod nut or head
to the body. The inserts shall be provided with openings or recesses to receive
reinforcing rods. To facilitate installation, slots shall be provided in the exposed
flanges of the insert. Inserts shall be rated to safely carry the maximum load which
can be supported by the hanger rod.
2. Hanger rods shall be attached to existing concrete structures using stainless steel
expansion anchors as specified in General Specification 05501 - Metal
Fabrications.
15060H-9 11/2017
1909
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3. Steel beam clamps shall be malleable iron and conform to MSS SP-58 Type 28 or
29 for wide flange or I-beams, and Type 20 for channel sections or where it is
necessary to locate the hanger rod off the beam centerline.
4. Steel U-shape beam attachments welded to the underside of beams, and welded
steel brackets fastened to structural steel columns, shall be subject to specific
approval of the Structural Steel and Pipe Supports Shop Drawings.
2.05 PIPE INSULATION PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall furnish steel protection saddles on all supports for insulated pipe.
1. For pipe sizes less than 12 inches in diameter, provide saddles of No. 14 U.S. gauge
stainless steel curved 180 degrees for use with roller hangers or structural trapeze
hangers and of No. 16 U.S. gauge stainless steel curved 120 degrees for use in clevis
hangers. Saddles shall be at least 12-inches long. Saddle gripping side edges shall
be turned up at least to the thickness of insulation.
B. Before placing the saddles, saddles shall be filled with either insulating cement or high
density insulation cut to fit. For vapor barrier insulation, the barrier must be maintained;
contact between hanger and support and bare pipe will not be permitted.
2.06 PIPE ANCHORS AND BRACES
A. Anchors and sway braces shall be provided when required to hold the pipelines and
equipment in position or alignment. Pipe anchors and braces for rigid fastening to the
structures shall be attached to steel anchor plates and Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts
set into the forms when placing concrete of new structures. Brackets and braces shall be
attached to existing concrete structures with through bolts or expansion anchors.
B. Anchors, guides and restraints shall be provided for the proper operation of pipeline
expansion joints.
C. Anchors shall be provided with steel straps on piping, except where anchors form an
integral part of pipe fittings and couplings or where an anchor of special design is required
or shown on the Contract Drawings.
D. All pipe anchors, guides and restraints shall be designed to conform to ASME B31.1.
2.07 INSPECTION
A. The City may elect to conduct shop inspections. The inspections may include but not be
limited to: mechanical and chemical testing, material sampling, material certifications,
traceability of parts, blasting and painting, visual and dimensional inspection, and free iron
contamination check on stainless steel parts.
2.08 GALVANIZING
A. Galvanizing shall conform to General Specification 05081 - Galvanizing, except that
malleable iron and concrete inserts shall be galvanized in conformance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
15060H-10 11/2017
1910
CONTRACT DEL-260H
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Hangers, supports, and accessories shall be located within maximum span lengths specified
to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by concentrated loadings.
B. Hangers or supports shall be provided at all locations where piping changes direction.
C. Hangers and supports shall be located to prevent vibration or swaying and to provide for
expansion and contraction.
D. Hangers’ rods shall be straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap or perforated bar hangers
shall not be used. Hangers shall not be suspended from piping.
E. Concrete embedded items shall be installed before concrete placement.
F. Embedded items shall be fastened securely to prevent movement during concrete
placement.
G. Hanger and support units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
H. Hangers and supports shall be adjusted and grout placed as specified in General
Specification 03600 – Grout to bring pipelines to specified elevations.
3.02 SPACING OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Supports and Hangers for Horizontal Pipes:
1. Supports and hangers for all piping shall be placed no farther apart than described
below, unless otherwise shown or specified:
a. Ductile Iron, Steel and Stainless Steel Pipe:
1) Maximum spacing in accordance with Table 3 of MSS-SP-69. The
designer should check the capacity of the steel or building structure
to which the hanger or support is attached, and adjust the maximum
spacing accordingly.
2) In addition, ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum of two supports
per length and shall have a hanger or support adjacent to each end.
b. Tubing less than 1-inch diameter: In accordance with best piping practice
and ASME B31.1 and as approved by the Engineer.
2. Additional supports shall be placed immediately adjacent to any change in piping
direction, at equipment, and on both sides of valves, expansion joints and couplings.
B. Supports for Vertical Piping:
1. Riser clamp shall be placed under hub, fitting or coupling with approved solid
bearing on steel sleeve.
2. Where riser clamps are used with plastic piping they shall be modified so as not to
exert any compressive forces on the pipe.
15060H-11 11/2017
1911
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3. Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor and between floors by stays or
braces to prevent rattling and vibration. Maximum spacing shall not exceed 25 feet.
4. Base elbows or welded equivalent shall be provided at vertical piping bases.
5. Top support shall have a horizontal connection, and provide for pipe expansion.
3.03 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Surfaces of hangers and supports in contact with aluminum, brass, plastic and copper
pipelines or pipeline equipment shall be protected with an approved plastic coating to
prevent abrasion. Touch-up shall be provided in the field, as required. Coating shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be free from
spots and brush marks, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.04 TESTING
A. Preliminary and final field test shall be performed for all equipment provided under this
Specification, as specified in Article 13 of the General Conditions and Detailed
B. All pipe support and restraining systems shall be installed and secured prior to the testing
or activation of the pipeline on which they are installed.
C. All pipe support systems shall be tested. After installation, each pipe support system shall
be tested in conjunction with the respective piping pressure tests. Tests shall include
cycling the piping system to duplicate operating conditions. If any part of the pipe support
system proves to be defective or inadequate, as evidenced by vibration or excessive
movement, it shall be repaired or augmented at no additional cost to the City.
END OF SECTION
15060H-12 11/2017
1912
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15076H – PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15076H
Piping and Equipment Identification
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15076H – Piping and Equipment Identification

replaces General Specification 15076 – Piping and Equipment Identification
in its entirety. All Work for this Section shall fully conform to the
requirements specified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install all components of the system for identification of piping,
ductwork and equipment. The system includes the placing of identification
signs and direction-of-flow arrows on all visible piping and ductwork, and the
placing of nameplates on equipment as shown on the Contractor's Shop
Drawings submitted under the related Sections for equipment, piping and
valves, and ductwork as required for a complete job.
B. The following index of this Section is included for convenience:
Article Title Page

15076-
PART 1 GENERAL .........................................................................................................1
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ......................................................................................1
1.02 RELATED SECTION .......................................................................................2
1.03 PAYMENT ........................................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ..................................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS .....................................2
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................3
PART 2 PRODUCTS.......................................................................................................3
2.01 MATERIALS .....................................................................................................3
2.02 DIMENSIONS OF SIGNS AND TAGS ...........................................................3
2.03 LETTERING OF SIGNS ...................................................................................4
2.04 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE .............................................................................4
2.05 COLORS 5
2.06 LEGEND FOR PIPE IDENTIFICATION SIGNS ............................................6
2.07 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS..................................................................6
2.08 ARROWS 7
2.09 NAMEPLATES .................................................................................................7
2.10 ADDITIONAL SIGNS AND NAMEPLATES .................................................8
2.11 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION .........................................................................8
PART 3 EXECUTION .....................................................................................................8
3.01 LOCATION .......................................................................................................8
15076-1 11/2017
1913
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3.02 MOUNTING ......................................................................................................9
1.02 RELATED SECTION

A. Detailed Specification 09900 - Painting
1.03 PAYMENT
A. There shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section; all costs shall
be included in the Lump Sum price bid for Contract Item H-LS-1, as specified
in Section 01270 – Measurement and Payment.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss
B. ASTM D543 - Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of
Plastics to Chemical Reagents
C. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of
Plastics
D. ASTM D646 - Standard Test Method for Grammage of Paper and
Paperboard (Mass per Unit Area)
E. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting
Materials
F. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
G. ASTM D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific
Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement
H. ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat,
Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight
(Gardner Impact)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and material Specifications for the
approval of the Engineer. Submittals shall include but not be limited to:
1. Signs, nameplates and other labeling and identification devices
proposed for use with Specifications and other data required to
demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS
A. Provide the specified items from firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of
identification devices of types and sizes required, with at least five (5) years'
experience in manufacturing signs.
B. The manufacturer shall guarantee the sign, in writing, against color fading,
chipping, corroding or any other manufacturing defects for a period of ten (10)
years.
15076-2 11/2017
1914
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H

A. General: Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in
Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Construct fiberglass reinforced plastic identification signs and nameplates of 70
mils thick fiberglass reinforced plastic conforming to ASTM D709.
B. Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic process with a blemish free, low gloss
surface of superior permanence and durability in the colors selected. Provide
each identification sign and nameplate in two colors and with the legend
specified. Provide the backside of the sign in black or some other uniform
color.
C. Provide lettering made by permanent embedment of subsurface printed
graphics in the material so as to produce a clear, legible sign. Do not place
lettering, symbols or markings containing the name of the manufacturer on the
signs. The contract number and year of the Contract as given on the Contract
Drawings may be placed in small lettering on the front of the sign, if approved
by the Engineer.
D. Provide signs for piping and valve identification with two 3/8 inch diameter
grommet-protected holes located on the long side center line, the center of the
hole to be ½ inch from the edge. Provide nameplates for equipment with four
3/8 inch diameter grommet-protected holes, the center of the hole located ½
inch away from the edges. Provide all holes with suitable brass or stainless
steel grommets.
E. Construct all signs and nameplates in conformity with ASTM D523, D638,
D646, D790, D792 and D5420.
2.02 DIMENSIONS OF SIGNS AND TAGS
A. Provide identification signs and nameplates rectangular in shape and of the
dimensions specified below. A dimensioned tolerance of plus or minus 1/16
inch is permissible.
Space left blank intentionally
15076-3 11/2017
1915
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Sign Dimensions
TYPE OF SIGN (Width x Length)
PIPE IDENTIFICATION -
1. Outside diameter of pipe
(including pipe insulation):
a. 4 inches and larger
3-1/2 X 12 INCHES
b. less than 4 inches 1-1/2 x 7 inches
VALVE IDENTIFICATION -
1. Valve tags 2 inches diameter
2. Operating stands for valves 1-1/2 x 7 inches
NAMEPLATES -
1. Equipment and Ductwork 3-1/2 x 12 inches
2.03 LETTERING OF SIGNS

A. Perform all lettering and numbering on identification signs and nameplates in
block style in size and spacing to suit the size of sign, as approved by the
Engineer.
B. Unless otherwise approved, limit the legend on pipe identification signs to one
line and to a total of 12 letters and spaces, and the legend on equipment and
ductwork nameplates to two lines and a maximum of 35 letters and spaces.
C. Submit samples of the lettering to be used for fiberglass reinforced plastic signs
to the Engineer for approval before manufacturing begins. Such samples must
show the height, width and spacing of letters and numbers for any three (3)
legends of ten or more letters and spaces as listed in Article 2.06.
2.04 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
A. Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic signs resistant to abrasion, impact,
corrosion, and the following acids, alkalis, salts and solvents in accordance with
ASTM D543:
1. 10% citric acid
2. 5% acetic acid
3. 3-30% sulfuric acid
4. 10% ammonium hydroxide
5. 10% sodium chloride
6. Turpentine
7. Mineral spirits
15076-4 11/2017
1916
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
8. Heptane
9. Kerosene
10. Ethyl alcohol
11. Ethyl acetate
12. Transformer oil
13. Heavy duty detergents
14. Water
B. Submit certification on acid resistance to the Engineer prior to installation.
2.05 COLORS
A. Code pipeline signs, equipment and ductwork in basic colors.
B. Provide brilliant colors, distinctive shades matching as closely as possible
(without custom color blending) the following basic colors as specified by the
Munsell Color System (MN):
Table Of Standard Colors

Color Munsell Number
White MN - N8.8/
Yellow MN - 4Y7.5/12.8
Orange MN - 0.5 YR 4.6/12.2
Red MN - 7R 3.6/12.7
Brown MN - 2.5 YR 4.2/4.3
Gray MN - 2.5PB 5.8/1.7
*Charcoal MN - 6B 5/0.4
Black MN - N1/
Blue MN - 3PB 3.3/7.4
Green MN - 8G 4.4/6.2
* Provide color "Charcoal" for paints equivalent to MN - N 3.75.
C. Provide identification signs for pipelines of all sizes, mechanical equipment,
and ductwork in the color combinations specified below under "General Color
Code".
15076-5 11/2017
1917
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
GENERAL COLOR CODE
COLORS
Service Line Letters Background
22. HEATING, VENTILATING
AND CONDITIONING AIR Green Charcoal
(Equipment And Ductwork)
D. Identification signs for miscellaneous services not included in the General

Color
Code shall be black letters on a white background.
2.06 LEGEND FOR PIPE IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Provide identification signs with the following words or abbreviations in color
combinations shown to identify the pipe line service:
Pipe Identification Signs

Color Code
LEGEND Service Lettering Background
H.W. RETURN Hot water return Blue Orange
H.W. SUPPLY Hot water supply Blue Orange
* Where shown, specified or required, the legend for blowoff, drain, metering,
sump, vent and similar lines shall also include the equipment,
structure or identification number to which the service applies.
2.07 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Furnish and attach valve and damper identification tags on all valves, dampers
and controls.
B. Provide round fiberglass reinforced plastic discs tags, approximately 2 inches
in diameter, made in conformity with the requirements of Article 2.01. Provide
tags with one 1/8 inch grommet protected hole at the top for fastening to the
unit body using 1/16 inch diameter cable and splices or pins as approved.
Provide grommets, cable splices and pins of stainless steel or other approved
corrosion resistant material.
C. Provide numbering code for the identification tags in conformity with the Basic
Code as specified by the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the plant.
Assign identification numbers subject to the approval of the Engineer and in
conformity with the entire piping, ductwork and equipment identification
15076-6 11/2017
1918
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
system. Provide identification code for each valve, damper and control without
duplication. Provide lettering on identification tags not less than 5/16 inch high
and limited to two lines. Lettering in correct color combination; stenciled or
painted numbers and lettering will not be accepted.
2.08 ARROWS
A. Make direction-of-flow arrows for attachment to pipe and ductwork
identification signs from No. 16 U.S. gauge Type 316L stainless steel, the full
width of the sign. Make the arrow head with a tapered point, about 90 degrees
at the apex, extending one half of the sign width from the sign edge and one
half of the sign width extending under the sign. Finish all edges of the arrow.
Make point with a radius of 1/4 inch for the 3-1/2 inch wide sign and a radius
of 3/16 inch for the 1-1/2 inch wide sign. Punch detents on the arrows to prevent
twisting of the point. Drill one hole in the arrow in alignment with the hole in
the pipe identification sign so that both sign and arrow can be mounted with the
same screw and bracket.
B. Submit sample direction-of-flow arrows for both sizes of pipe identification
signs to the Engineer for approval before installation.
2.09 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates for equipment in the same color combination as the medium
they service. Legends for nameplates must follow the terminology shown.
Provide numbering system as described in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
B. The following is a representative list, not necessarily complete, of nameplate
legends with appropriate color combinations to which the equipment
identification number must be added:
NAMEPLATES
Legend Color Code
First Line (1) Second Line (2) Lettering Background
AIR HANDLING UNIT UNIT ** White Charcoal
EXHAUST FAN ** White Charcoal
SUPPLY FAN ** White Charcoal
PUMP – HEATING HW ** White Charcoal
(1)
Nominal limit of 18 letters, numerals and spaces.
(2)
Nominal limit of 17 letters, numerals and spaces.
15076-7 11/2017
1919
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
NAMEPLATES
Legend Color Code
First Line (1) Second Line (2) Lettering Background
*Where equipment is mounted on roofs or where exposed to the public view, such as in lobby or
office areas, the color will be selected by the Architect.
**The legend on these nameplates also includes the appropriate six-digit numeral
and letter designation for such equipment and structures as specified
by the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
2.10 ADDITIONAL SIGNS AND NAMEPLATES

A. In addition to the legends specified above, the Engineer may order the
Contractor to furnish and install additional identification signs, arrows and
nameplates at no additional cost to the City. Such additional signs may be
requested near completion of the Work and will be limited to no more than five
(5) signs for each of the five types specified in Article 2.02. Conform legends
and color combinations for additional signs to the requirements specified.
2.11 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION
Pipeline Identification
ABBR. Process/Service Line Fed. Std. 595B Color
HWR Hot Water Return (heating) Orange 12215
HWS Hot Water Supply (heating) Orange 11400
HVACEX HVAC Exhaust Gray 14158
HVACS HVAC Supply Gray 14056
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LOCATION
A. Locate identification signs for piping and ductwork along straight line runs at
intervals of not more than 30 feet, near valves, branches and junction points and
where pipes and ductwork pass through walls or ceilings. Place direction-of-
flow arrows as shown or required. Place all identification signs so as to be
easily visible from operating locations. Locate nameplates on equipment at
readily visible levels in such positions relative to the equipment so as to prevent
damage to the nameplate.
15076-8 11/2017
1920
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3.02 MOUNTING
A. Mount identification signs and arrows parallel and tangent to the pipe and
ductwork by fastening with screws, plastic or fiber washers, threaded brackets
and banding straps and seals. Provide screws and brackets of stainless steel
with 5/16 - 18 American Standard Coarse Threads; provide No. 25 U.S. gauge
Type 316 stainless steel, 3/4 inch wide bands.
B. Where pipe and ductwork is insulated, use care in mounting the signs so to
prevent the banding straps from crushing the insulation.
C. Provide mounting assembly "Steelbinder" strapping unit as manufactured by:
1. A.J. Gerrard & Co., Des Plaines, Illinois,
2. Independent Metal Strap Co., Inc., Roslyn, N.Y.
D. Mount nameplates in a manner specifically approved by the Engineer after the
installation of equipment. Submit details of the method of fastening to the
Engineer for approval. Provide fastening of Type 316 stainless steel
construction.
E. Mount valve and damper identification signs with approved stainless steel
brackets or approved stainless steel strapping in such a fashion that sharp
corners or edges on signs, brackets, bolts, chain or strapping will not constitute
a hazard to personnel operating the valves. Since it is impractical to detail each
means of attachment in the Detailed Specifications or on the Contract
Drawings, each type of attachment shall be approved on a case-by-case basis.
Submit for approval sketches of each type proposed.
F. Do not attach identification tags or signs to handwheels. Use of flange bolts or
bonnet bolts as a means of attachment of brackets will receive consideration.
Provide all attachment devices and bolting of Type 304 stainless steel.
END OF SECTION
15076-9 11/2017
1921
IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
15076-10 11/2017
1922
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15081H - PIPING INSULATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15081H
Piping Insulation
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15081H - Piping Insulation replaces General

Specification 15081 – Piping Insulation in its entirety. All Work for this Section
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes insulation and jacketing requirements for piping systems,
including piping, valves and accessories. The Contractor shall provide all labor,
materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified or required to furnish and
install the piping insulation work.
B. The following index of this Section is included for convenience.
Article Title Page

15081-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................2
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS .........................3
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................3
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................3
2.02 FLAME/SMOKE RATINGS.................................................................4
2.03 BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE .....................................................4
2.04 MATERIALS .........................................................................................4
PART 3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................5
3.01 INSPECTION ........................................................................................5
3.02 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................5
3.03 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR .....................................................7
3.04 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT ...............................................7
3.05 PAINTING AND CLEANING..............................................................7
3.06 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE ...................................7

A. Detailed Specification 15060 - Hangers and Supports
15081H-1 11/2017
1923
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal
Insulating Cement
B. ASTM C 240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass
Insulation Block
C. ASTM C 411 - Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of
High-Temperature Thermal Insulation
D. ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible
Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
E. ASTM C 552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal
Insulation
F. ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
G. ASTM C 1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance
Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
H. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials -
Sponge or Expanded Rubber
I. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials
J. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials
K. Building Code of the City of New York
L. Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State
M. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and all submittals for the
approval of the Engineer. Submittals shall include, but not be limited, to:
1. Product Data: insulation and related materials. Submit the manufacturer’s
technical product data, insulation materials, densities, fire ratings, flame-
spread ratings, smoke-developed ratings material safety data sheets and
installation instructions for each type of piping insulation and related
materials. Submit a schedule showing the manufacturer’s product number,
k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each piping system
requiring insulation.
15081H-2 11/2017
1924
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Stainless Steel Jacketing: Submit the manufacturer’s technical data for

jacketing and related materials.
3. Installation Drawings: Complete assembly, layout and installation drawings
with clearly marked dimensions.
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide insulation from firms regularly engaged in
manufacture of piping insulation products, of the types and sizes required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than three (3)
years.
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Use a single firm with at least five (5) years’ successful
installation experience on projects with insulations similar to that required for this
Project.
A. General: Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in
Contract Documents and as follows:
1. Labeling: Deliver the insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and
coatings to the Site in containers with the manufacturer’s stamp or label,
affixed showing the fire hazard indexes of products.
2. Protection: Protect the insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and
mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation. Remove
damaged materials from the Project Site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The insulations used may be as manufactured by:
1. Style A Insulation:
a. Owens Corning
b. Johns Manville
2. Stainless Steel Jacketing:
a. Childers Product Company.
b. RPR Products, Inc.
3. Thermal Hanger Shields:
a. Pipe Shields Inc.
b. Buckaroos Inc.
15081H-3 11/2017
1925
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2.02 FLAME/SMOKE RATINGS

A. Piping insulation shall have a composite (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers,
mastics and adhesives) flame-spread index of 25 or lessand smoke-developed index
of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. Any treatments of
jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. The use of
water-soluble treatments shall be prohibited.
2.03 BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE
A. Piping insulation products shall comply with the Building Code of New York State
and with the Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Style A Insulation - Molded Fiberglass Pipe Insulation
1. Style A insulation shall be heavy-duty, bonded fibrous glass sectional pipe
insulation with a thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.26 BTU per hour per
square foot per degree F per inch thickness at 50 degrees F mean
temperature and not exceeding 0.3 BTU per hour per square foot per degree
F per inch thickness at 200 degrees F mean temperature. Insulation shall be
provided with factory-applied vapor retarder. The vapor retarder shall be
an ASJ (all-service jacket) type meeting the requirements of ASTM C 1136
Type 1 and consisting of laminated white kraft paper, reinforcing scrim and
foil. The insulation shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 547, Type 1.
Insulation shall be rated for use at temperatures up to 850 degrees F.
2. Joints and Seams: Provide joints and seams meeting one of the following
requirements
a. Field cemented joints: All joints and seams shall be sealed with
approved adhesive, and the joints covered with joint sealing tape at
least 3 inches in width, permanently adhered.
b. Sealing strips: All longitudinal joints shall be sealed with integral
adhesive sealing strip, and butt joints shall be covered with 3-inch
width of vapor barrier butt joint strip tape.
3. Fittings, flanges and valves: Provide insulation meeting one of the
following requirements
a. Fittings, flanges and valves shall be insulated with fiber glass
molded or segmented insulation, and wrapped with joint sealing tape
of matching color.
b. Alternatively, fittings, flanges and valves may be insulated with
factory cut glass blanket.
B. Stainless Steel Jacketing
1. Stainless steel jacketing shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, not
less than 0.016-inch thick. It shall have a modified Pittsburgh Z-lock on the
longitudinal seam. Jacketing shall be provided with an integrally bonded
15081H-4 11/2017
1926
CONTRACT DEL-260H
moisture barrier. Adjacent sections shall butt together and shall be secured
with a weather-proof butt strap. Jacketing shall be secured with 3/4-inch
wide, 0.015-inch thick stainless steel bands at a maximum spacing of twelve
inches. All edges of strapping shall be factory deburred. All insulated
fittings shall be finished in the same manner, using 0.024-inch thick type
316 stainless steel preformed fitting covers and fabricated covers made from
the same material for valves, flanges, tees, in-line accessories, and other
pipeline appurtenances. Type 316 stainless steel end caps shall be provided
at the ends of the pipelines.
C. Accessories
1. Provide staples, bands, wires and cement as recommended by the insulation
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for the applications indicated.
2. Provide adhesives, sealers, and protective finishes as recommended by the
insulation manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for the applications
indicated.
D. Thermal Hanger Shields
1. Provide insulated pipe protectors consisting of a 360-degree high density,
100 psi, waterproofed calcium silicate inserts encased in 360-degree sheet
metal.
2. Provide the thickness of the insulation insert to be the same as the adjoining
pipe insulation, and sheet metal gauge in accordance with the
3. Pipe hangers and supports provided in conjunction with the thermal hanger
shields shall meet the requirements of General Specification 15060 -
Hangers and Supports.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which piping insulation is to be
installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable for insulation installation, as determined by the
Engineer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install piping insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and approved Shop Drawings, and as specified in Contract
Documents. Install piping insulation products in accordance with the Building
Code of New York State. Install all products in accordance with the recognized
industry practices so that insulation serves its intended purpose. Insulated thermal
hangers shields shall be installed at all support points, except where otherwise
indicated.
B. Piping Insulation:
15081H-5 11/2017
1927
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Order of Installation: Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to the

installation of heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance tests. Piping
shall be field tested and approved by the Engineer prior to installation of
insulation.
2. Cleaning and Drying: Pipe surfaces shall be cleaned and dried prior to
insulating.
3. Insulation Surfaces: Install the insulation materials with smooth, even and
flush adjoining surfaces. Butt insulation joints firmly together to form a
complete and tight fit over the surfaces to be covered. Insulate each
continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single
cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each
other.
4. Vapor Barrier: Maintain integrity of the vapor-barrier jackets on pipe
insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. Vapor barrier
materials shall be applied to form a complete, unbroken vapor seal over the
entire insulated piping system.
5. Insulating Fittings: Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping
system with an equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as
applied to the adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job
fabricated units except where a specific form or type is indicated.
a. Unless indicated otherwise, piping insulation shall be extended
without interruption through interior walls, floors and similar piping
penetrations. Annular spaces between pipe and pipe sleeves shall
be thoroughly packed with fibrous glass blanket and caulked with
mastic so as to be soundproof and vermin-tight. Provide fibrous
glass blanket with properties equivalent to the insulation Style
installed on the piping.
b. Do not extend insulation through walls or floors that are fire rated
or are required to be gas-tight.
6. Pipe Hangers:
a. Abut pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts.
b. For hot pipes, apply a 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band over
the butt joints.
7. Removable Items: Install removable insulation sections on the following:
a. Devices that require access for maintenance of equipment
b. Items that can be removed, such as unions, screwed joints, flanges,
strainers, etc.
C. Stainless Steel Jacketing: Provide stainless steel jacketing over all insulated piping
systems. Install jacketing in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
and approved Shop Drawings.
15081H-6 11/2017
1928
CONTRACT DEL-260H
D. All jacket openings - such as at overlaps of jackets with thermal hanger shields,
around valve stems and similar projections - shall be sealed with nonhardening,
waterproof, clear or white sealing compound so that upon completion the insulation
is essentially watertight.
3.03 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR
A. Repair sections of existing piping insulation that are damaged during construction.
Use insulation of same thickness as the existing insulation. Install a new jacket
lapping and sealer over the existing insulation. If existing insulation is painted,
paint new insulation to match the existing surface color. If existing insulation is
jacketed, replace damaged jacketing with new jacket.
3.04 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Protection: Insulation shall be protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical
damage before, during and after installation. Follow methods which are required
for protection of the insulation work during the remainder of construction period,
to avoid damage and deterioration.
B. Replacement: Any insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of the
Work shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced, including units with vapor barrier
damage and moisture saturated units.
3.05 PAINTING AND CLEANING
A. Piping insulation shall not be painted except where otherwise noted for existing
insulation repair.
B. The Contractor shall remove all debris, waste materials and loose foreign matter
resulting from installation.
3.06 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Hot Water Piping Systems (to 250 Degrees F)
1. Style:
a. Insulation shall be Style A for pipe sizes up to and including 30-
inch.
2. Jacketing:
a. Stainless Steel.
3. Thickness: The Contractor shall provide the following minimum
thicknesses for the purpose of reducing heat loss and preventing injury to
workers:
a. Insulation shall be 1-1/2-inches thick for pipe sizes up to and
including 1-1/2-inches.
b. Insulation shall be 2-inch thick for pipe sizes larger than 1-1/2-
inches.
15081H-7 11/2017
1929
CONTRACT DEL-260H
4. Install on the following:

a. Hot water supply and return piping systems
END OF SECTION
15081H-8 11/2017
1930
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15185 – HYDRONIC PUMPS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15185
Hydronic Pumps
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15185 – Hydronic Pumps has been prepared
specifically for the Work of this Contract. There is no corresponding General
Specifications 15185 – Hydronic Pumps.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall furnish, install, test and place in satisfactory operation Hydronic
Pumps.
B. The following index of this Specification is included for convenience.
Article Title Page

15185-
PART 1 GENERAL ..............................................................................................1
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES........................................................................... 1
1.02 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................. 2
1.04 REFERENCES ....................................................................................... 2
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..................................................................... 2
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 2
1.07 SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................... 2
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS .......................... 4
1.09 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES ......................... 4
1.10 ANCHOR BOLTS.................................................................................. 5
1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ........................................................ 5
1.12 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE ........................................ 5
1.13 PAINTING ............................................................................................. 6
1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ....................................... 6
1.15 SHOP TESTS ......................................................................................... 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................6
2.01 PUMP MANUFACTURERS ................................................................. 6
2.02 PUMPS ................................................................................................... 7
PART 3 EXECUTION ..........................................................................................8
3.01 INSTALLATION ................................................................................... 8
3.02 FIELD TESTING ................................................................................... 8
3.03 START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 8
3.04 CLEANING ............................................................................................ 8
15185-1 11/2017
1931
CONTRACT DEL-260H

A. Detailed Specification 15076 – Piping and Equipment Identification
B. Detailed Specification 16010 – General Electrical Requirements
C. Detailed Specification 16221 – Electric Motors
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

A. The pumping systems provided under this Specification shall include pumps,
anchorage, and all related equipment specified, shown on the Drawings, or needed
for a complete installation.
A. Refer to the equipment schedules on the Contract Drawings.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings for the approval of the Engineer.
Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Working Drawings.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
3. List of Spare Parts, Special Tools and Supplies.
4. Reports of Certified and Witnessed Shop Tests.
5. Reports and Field Tests.
6. Reports of Manufacturer’s Representative Site Visits.
B. Working Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Equipment specifications and data sheets, with identification of all materials
used and methods of fabrication.
2. Complete assembly, layout, installation and Shop Drawings, with clearly
marked dimensions.
15185-2 11/2017
1932
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3. Equipment cross-section drawings.

4. Manufacturer’s deliver, storage, and handling requirements.
5. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
6. Weights of equipment component parts, assembled weights of equipment,
and total shipping weight. As applicable, include dynamic loads and weight
when full.
7. Comprehensive schematic diagrams showing the wiring for each electrical or
electromechanical equipment item, as well as interconnecting and point-to-
point field wiring diagrams. Point-to-point field wiring diagrams shall
comply with Article 2.01 of Detailed Specification 16010 – General
Electrical Requirements.
8. Certification of manufacturing facility.
9. Painting details.
10. Equipment nameplate data.
11. Submittals specified in Detailed Specification 16221 – Electric Motors.
12. Evidence of manufacturer experience and of the successful operation in other
facilities of equipment similar to that proposed for this project, as specified
here and in Article 5 of the General Conditions.
C. Operation and maintenance manuals shall conform to the requirements of Detailed
Specification 01831 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
D. Spare parts lists shall indicate sizes, quantities and part number of the items to be
furnished. Terms such as “1 lot of packing material” shall not be acceptable.
E. Reports of certified and witnessed shop tests shall be submitted as specified herein
and in Article 12 of the General Conditions. No equipment shall be shipped from its
place of manufacture before the certified and witnessed shop test reports have been
1. Prior notification of shop tests shall be submitted for all equipment, shall be
as specified in Article 12 of the General Conditions, and shall include, but not
limited to, as description of the proposed testing facilities and procedures.
F. Reports of field tests shall be submitted as specified herein, in Article 13 of the
General Conditions, and in Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final
Field Tests.
1. Prior notification of field tests shall be submitted as specified herein, in
Article 13 of the General Conditions, and in Detailed Specification 01811 –
Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
15185-3 11/2017
1933
CONTRACT DEL-260H
G. Reports of manufacturer’s representative Site visits shall be submitted as specified

herein and in applicable provisions of Division 1 – General Requirements.
H. Other applicable information, as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
I. Additional information as summarized below:
1. Pump and performance curves.
A. In addition to the requirements for the approval of materials and manufacturers
specified in Article 5 of the General Conditions, the following provisions shall
pertain to the Work under this Specification:
1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications
a. The Contractor shall provide evidence to the Engineer that the
manufacturer has a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the
design, manufacture, and supervision of installation of equipment of
the type required under this Specification.
b. The Contractor shall provide evidence to the Engineer that equipment
which was designed and manufactured by the manufacturer, and
which is similar to the equipment required under this Specification,
has been in continuous and successful operation in at least five (5)
separate facilities for the past five (5) years.
1.09 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES
A. The Contractor shall provide spare parts for the equipment provided under this
Specification, as specified herein and in Detailed Specification 01781 – Project
Closeout.
1. The spare parts provided shall include:
a. One (1) pump and motor.
b. Spare parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer for two (2)
years of normal equipment operation (but not including spare parts
already listed below).
2. The spare parts specified above shall be understood as required for each unit
provided under this Specification.
B. The Contractor shall provide such special tools and appliances as may be needed to
adjust, operate maintain, or repair the equipment furnished under this Specification,
as specified in Article 12 of the General Conditions and in Detailed Specification
01781 – Project Closeout.
C. The Contractor shall furnish such oil, grease, and any special lubricants as are
15185-4 11/2017
1934
CONTRACT DEL-260H
necessary for the proper operation of the equipment provided under this
Specification, as specified in Detailed Specification 01781 – Project Closeout.
1. The oil, grease, and special lubricants furnished shall be sufficient for the
required operation of the equipment prior to its final acceptance, and for the
operation of the equipment during the maintenance and guaranty period
specified in Article 24 of the Standard Construction Contract.
2. The oil, grease, and special lubricants furnished under this Specification
shall, wherever possible, be standardized and consolidated with those
furnished other Specifications, as specified in Detailed Specification 01781 –
Project Closeout.
1.10 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts (and related hardware, including, but not limited
to, nuts and washers) shall be included in the supply of the equipment provided under
this Specification, and shall be installed by the Contractor in accordance with the
equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall provide corrosion-resistant nameplates, securely affixed in a
conspicuous place, on each item of equipment. Nameplates shall conform to the
requirements of Detailed Specification 15076 – Piping and Equipment Identification,
and shall bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark and such other information as is
specified or deemed necessary by the manufacturer to complete the identification.
Nameplate numbering shall be as specified or shown on the Contract Drawings. The
Engineer may change or supplement such numbering at the time of or at any time
before the approval of Shop Drawings.
1.12 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified manufacturer’s representative
to: assist in the installation of the equipment; check the installation before the
equipment is placed into operation; assist in the performance of field tests; assist in
the start-up of the equipment; and train the maintenance staff in the care, operation,
and maintenance of the equipment. The services provided shall be in accordance
with the requirements of Article 12 of the General Conditions and Detailed
Specification 01732 – Installation of Equipment, Detailed Specification 01811 –
Preliminary and Final Field Tests, and Detailed Specification 01821 – Equipment
Start-Up and Training.
B. The Engineer reserves the right to require that any unused person-days from any visit
be applied to any other specified visit.
C. Person-days shall be understood only as days spent on site, not in transit.
D. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the manufacturer’s representative shall
15185-5 11/2017
1935
CONTRACT DEL-260H
be a direct employee of the equipment manufacturer, with at least three (3) years’
experience in the installation, testing, and start-up of equipment of the type provided
under this Specification. The manufacturer’s sales and marketing personnel will not
be accepted as manufacturer’s representatives.
E. The manufacturer’s representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer
each day they are at the Site.
F. Reports: The Contractor shall submit a report from the manufacturer for each visit to
the Site of the manufacturer’s representative. The report shall provide complete
information regarding the visit, including, but not limited to, dates, times, subject
equipment, tasks performed, persons contacted, problems corrected, test results,
training provided, and other pertinent information.
G. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall provide the services of person(s)
authorized by the manufacturer to witness the unloading at the Site of the equipment
provided under this Specification, and to ascertain the condition of said equipment.
Manufacturers’ sales and marketing personnel may be accepted as authorized
person(s) to perform these specific tasks. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a report, completed by the authorized person(s) and certified by the
equipment manufacturer, documenting the findings of the authorized person(s).
1.13 PAINTING
A. Factory painted with the manufacturer’s standard painting system.
1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall deliver, store, and handle the equipment and materials provided
under this Specification as specified in Detailed Specification 01651 – Transportation
and Handling of Materials and Equipment and Detailed Specification 01661 –
Protection of Materials and Equipment.
1.15 SHOP TESTS
A. In addition to Preliminary and Final Field Tests required in Detailed Specification
01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests, the Contractor shall provide the following
tests:
1. No additional tests required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PUMP MANUFACTURERS
A. Equipment/Materials provided under this Specification shall be manufactured
(including all standard equipment, unless otherwise specified) by:
1. Bell & Gossett, Division of ITT, Morton Grove, IL - Series 60
15185-6 11/2017
1936
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Weinman, Division of Crane Pumps and Systems, Piqua, OH

3. Armstrong Pumps, North Tonawanda, NY
2.02 PUMPS
A. Horizontal, permanently lubricated, specifically designed and guaranteed for quite
operation. Suitable for 225 °F operation at 175 psig working pressure. The pump
shall be single stage, vertical split-case design, in cast iron bronze fitted construction.
The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping
connections.
B. The pump shall be composed of three separable components: a motor, bearing
assembly and pump end. The motor shaft shall be connected to the pump shaft via a
replaceable flexible coupler.
C. The pumps shall have a solid SAE 1144 steel shaft supported by two sealed ball
bearings. A non-ferrous shaft sleeve shall be employed to completely cover the
wetted area under the seal.
D. Pump shall be equipped with an internally flushed mechanical seal assembly. Seal
assembly shall have a brass housing, Buna bellows and seat gasket, stainless steel
spring, and be of a carbon ceramic design with the carbon face rotating against a
stationary ceramic face.
E. Bearing assembly shaft shall connect to a cast bronze impeller. Impeller shall be
both hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a
locking cap screw or nut.
F. A flexible-type coupling shall be employed between the pump and motor.
G. Pump shall be designed to allow for true back pull-out access to the pump’s working
components for ease of maintenance.
H. Pump volute shall be of cast iron design with flanged connections. Volute shall
include gauge ports at nozzles, and vent and drain ports.
I. To ensure alignment, the motor shall be mounted to the bearing assembly via a bolted
motor bracket assembly, and a rubber motor mount will be used to assist in aligning
the motor shaft with the pump shaft.
J. Motors through 1 HP shall be resilient mounted. Motors over 1.5 HP shall be rigid
mounted. Motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and shall be
completely maintenance free. Motors shall be non-overloading at any point on the
pump curve and shall meet NEMA specifications. Motors shall be provided in
accordance with Detailed Specification 16221 – Electric Motors.
K. Pump shall be of a maintainable design and for ease of maintenance shall use
15185-7 11/2017
1937
CONTRACT DEL-260H
machine fit parts, not press fit components.

L. Each pump shall be factory tested and name-plated before shipment
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Examine equipment at time of delivery for damaged or missing components.
B. Do not install defective components, Contractor shall not proceed with installation
until all items found defective have been corrected or replaced.
C. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
D. Install equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for safe
operation and maintenance.
3.02 FIELD TESTING
3.03 START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Check all controls, interlocks and power connections.
B. Demonstrate equipment performance.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Cleaning and site maintenance shall be performed for all equipment provided under
this Specification, as specified in Detailed Specification 01740 - Cleaning and Site
Maintenance.
B. Clean dirt and marks and other debris from equipment.
C. Remove debris and waste material resulting from installation.
END OF SECTION
15185-8 11/2017
1938
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15515 - PIPING, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15515
Piping, Valves and Accessories
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15515 – Piping, Valves and Accessories has been
prepared specifically for the Work of this Contract. There is no corresponding
General Specifications 15515 – Piping, Valves and Accessories.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall furnish, install, test and place in satisfactory operation piping, valves
and accessories for HVAC systems.
B. Coordination:
1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the
installation of items that must be installed concurrent with or before the
installation of piping, valves and accessories pursuant to this Section.
C. The following index of this Specification is included for convenience.
Article Title Page

PART 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................. 1
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES.............................................................................. 1
1.02 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 2
1.03 PAYMENT ................................................................................................ 2
1.04 REFERENCES .......................................................................................... 2
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 3
1.06 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................... 4
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS ............................. 6
1.08 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES ............................ 6
1.09 ANCHOR BOLTS..................................................................................... 7
1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ........................................................... 7
1.11 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE ........................................... 7
1.12 PAINTING ................................................................................................ 7
1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .......................................... 7
1.14 SHOP TESTS ............................................................................................ 8
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................... 8
2.01 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 8
2.02 PIPING ...................................................................................................... 9
2.03 VALVES ................................................................................................. 11
2.04 ACCESSORIES ...................................................................................... 18
2.05 EXPANSION JOINTS, GUIDES AND ANCHORES ........................... 23
2.06 DRIP PANS ............................................................................................. 23
15515-1 11/2017
1939
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2.07 HARDWARE .......................................................................................... 23

2.08 MATERIAL SCHEDULES .................................................................... 24
PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................................................... 24
3.01 INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 24
3.02 FIELD TESTING .................................................................................... 28
3.03 START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................................... 29
3.04 CLEANING ............................................................................................. 29
3.05 PROTECTION OF EXECUTED WORK ............................................... 30

A. Detailed Specification 05091 - Welding.
B. Detailed Specification 15076 – Piping and Equipment Identification
C. Detailed Specification 16010 – General Electrical Requirements
D. Detailed Specification 16221 – Electric Motors
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) / American National Standards
Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI B16.1 – Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
2. ANSI B16.3 – Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300
3. ANSI B16.9 – Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings
4. ANSI B16.10 – Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves
5. ANSI B16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
6. ANSI B16.21 – Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets For Pipe Flanges
7. ANSI B16.24 – Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
8. ANSI B36.10 – Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
9. ANSI B40.1 – Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element
10. ASME/ANSI 16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint. Pressure Fittings
11. ASME/ANSI 16.22 – Copper Fitting, Copper Pipe
15515-2 11/2017
1940
CONTRACT DEL-260H
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A53/A53M – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
2. ASTM A126 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
3. ASTM B32 – Standard Specification for Solder Metal
4. ASTM B62 – Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings
5. ASTM B88 – Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
6. ASTM B283 – Standard Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die
Forgings (Hot-Pressed)
7. ASTM B813 – Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
8. ASTM B828 – Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
9. ASTM D1330 – Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets
C. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS):
1. MSS SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
2. MSS SP-70 Cast iron gate valves , flanged and threaded ends
3. MSS SP-67 Butterfly valves
4. MSS SP-71 Cast iron swing check valves, flanged and threaded ends
5. MSS SP-85 Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
D. Military/Federal Specs (MIL):
1. MIL-V-18826 Valves, Globe, and Angle; Cast Iron
2. MIL-V- 18436 Valves, Check: Bronze, Cast-Iron, and Steel Body
A. The piping, valves, and accessories provided under this Specification shall include
heating hot water associated with the heating and ventilating system and all related
equipment specified, shown on the Contract Drawings, or needed for a complete
installation.
15515-3 11/2017
1941
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings for the approval of the Engineer.
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
C. Working Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
marked dimensions.
when full.
electro-mechanical equipment item, as well as interconnecting and point-to-
point field wiring diagrams. Point-to point field wiring diagrams shall
8. Certification of manufacturing facility.
9. Certification of welders, pipefitters, and other workmen.
10. Painting details.
12. Document for instrumentation and control equipment as specified herein.
15515-4 11/2017
1942
CONTRACT DEL-260H

here and in Article 5 of the General Conditions.
D. Operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals shall conform to the requirements of
Detailed Specification 01831 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
E. Spare parts lists shall indicate sizes, quantities and part number of the items to be
F. Reports of certified and witnessed shop tests shall be submitted as specified herein
and in Article 12 of the General Conditions. No equipment shall be shipped from its
place of manufacture before the certified and witnessed shop test reports have been
1. Prior notification of shop tests shall be submitted for all equipment, shall be
as specified in Article 12 of the General Conditions, and shall include, but not
limited to, as description of the proposed testing facilities and procedures.
G. Reports of field tests shall be submitted as specified herein, in Article 13 of the
General Conditions, and in Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final
Field Tests.
1. Prior notification of field tests shall be submitted as specified herein, in
Article 13 of the General Conditions, and in Detailed Specification 01811 –
Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
H. Reports of manufacturer’s representative Site visits shall be submitted as specified
I. Other applicable information, as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
J. Additional information as summarized below:
1. 1/4-inch scale layouts, dimensioned to show length of runs, sizes, support
spacing and expansion provisions.
2. Details of installation, including supports, expansion joints, guides and
anchors.
3. Materials schedule: Submit schedule with materials of construction, sizes,
thickness, design pressure, weight per foot, maximum span, joint type and
flange data.
4. Record Drawings: During progress of the Work keep an up-to-date set of the
Drawings showing field and Shop Drawing modifications. Immediately upon
completion of the Work, submit Computer Aided Design and Drafting
(CADD) drawings showing the actual in place installation of all piping and
equipment installed under this Specification at a scale satisfactory to the City.
The drawings shall show all piping on plans and in sections, with all
15515-5 11/2017
1943
CONTRACT DEL-260H
reference dimensions and elevations required for complete Record Drawings

of the systems. Two (2) hard copies shall also be furnished. The prints and
electronic copies of the CADD files shall be furnished no later than thirty
(30) days after completion of the Contract and prior to final payment.
2. Installer’s Qualifications:
a. Engage a single installer regularly engaged in piping installation and
with experience in the installation of the types of materials required;
and who agrees to only use workers with specific skill and experience
in this type of Work. Submit name and qualifications to Engineer.
b. Engage a single installer for the entire piping system with undivided
responsibility for performance and other requirements.
A. The Contractor shall provide such special tools and appliances as may be needed to
as specified in Article 12 of the General conditions and in Detailed Specification
B. The Contractor shall furnish such oil, grease, and any special lubricants as are
15515-6 11/2017
1944
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Project Closeout.
1.09 ANCHOR BOLTS
requirements of Detailed Specification 15076 – Piping and Equipment Identification,
and shall bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark and such other information as is
specified or deemed necessary by the manufacturer to complete the identification.
Nameplate numbering shall be as specified or shown on the Drawings: the Engineer
may change or supplement such numbering at the time of or at any time before the
approval of Shop Drawings.
and maintenance of the equipment.
B. The services provided shall be in accordance with the requirements of Article 12 of
the General Conditions and Detailed Specification 01732 – Installation of
Equipment, Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests, and
Detailed Specification 01821 – Equipment Start-up and Training.
1.12 PAINTING
A. Equipment shall be factory painted with the manufacturer’s standard painting system
except where otherwise noted below.
15515-7 11/2017
1945
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.14 SHOP TESTS

tests:
1. No additional tests required
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The Contract Documents show the general arrangement and extent of the Work to be
completed. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined as
the Work progresses. The exact location of all parts of the Work must be governed
by the general building plans and the actual building conditions.
B. The Contract Drawings show an indication of the arrangement of equipment and
piping and is as nearly correct as can be determined in advance of the actual
construction of the Work. Equipment, piping and appurtenances found to interfere
with the construction of the building, plumbing apparatus and piping, electrical
wiring or other obstructions, etc., must be changed in location to clear such
obstructions.
C. The connections shown to the various units are intended as an indication only. The
actual connections at the time of installation to be made and arranged to suit the
requirements of each case and adequately provide for expansion and circulation and
minimize the amount of space required for the same.
D. The Drawings show the general arrangement of all systems. Should local conditions
necessitate rearrangement of one (1) or more of the systems, the Contractor, before
proceeding with the Work, shall prepare and submit complete drawings showing all
details of the proposed rearrangement for written approval.
E. The Contract Drawings do not necessarily show all the offsets, fittings, accessories
and details which may be required. Contractor shall examine and be familiar with all
Contract Drawings and the specifications of the E and G DEL-260 contracts which
may affect the installation of the Work under this Contract. The Contractor shall
furnish all items or perform all work required to complete the systems/HVAC Work
if not explicitly provided or performed under the other DEL-260 contracts.
15515-8 11/2017
1946
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2.02 PIPING
A. Copper Tube:
1. Tube:
a. Reference: ASTM B88.
b. Aboveground:
1) Type: K.
2) Temper: Hard drawn.
c. Below ground:
1) Type: K.
2) Temper: Hard drawn.
2. Fittings:
a. Solder:
b. Type:
1) Cast copper alloy conforming to the requirements of
ASME/ANSI 16.18.
2) Wrought copper or copper alloy conforming to the
requirements of ASME/ANSI 16.22.
c. Flanged:
1) Reference: ANSI B16.24, 150 lb. class.
2) Type: Cast copper alloy.
3) Gaskets:
a) Reference: ASTM D 1330, Grade 1.
b) Type: Non-asbestos, compressed carbon fiber
gasketing with SBR binder, 1/8-inch thick
manufactured by Garlock Gasket Co., Series HTC
9800, or equal.
3. Joints:
a. Soldered using alloys containing less than 0.2 percent lead (Pb) as
listed in ASTM B32. Soldering flux shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM B 813. Joint preparation and operations shall
be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM B 828.
15515-9 11/2017
1947
CONTRACT DEL-260H
B. Steel Pipe:
1. Pipe:
a. Reference, ANSI B36.10 and ASTM A 53/A 53M.
b. Type: Seamless steel pipe.
c. Weight: Schedule 40.
d. Finish: Black.
e. End Finish: Plain.
2. Fittings:
a. Threaded:
1) Reference: ANSI B16.3.
2) Type: Malleable iron.
b. Flanged:
1) Reference: ANSI B16.1, Class 125 or ANSI B16.5,
Class 150.
2) Gaskets:
a) Reference: ASTM D 1330, Grade 1.
b) Type: Non-asbestos, compressed carbon fiber
gasketing with SBR binder, 1/8-inch thick
manufactured by Garlock Gasket Co., Series HTC
9800, or equal.
c. Welded:
1) Reference: ANSI B16.9.
2) Type: Butt welded.
C. Unions:
1. Copper Tube:
a. Manufacturers: Provide products of one (1) of the following:
1) Mueller Industries, Inc.
2) Nibco, Inc.
15515-10 11/2017
1948
CONTRACT DEL-260H
b. Type: Ground joint, copper alloy.

c. Reference: ANSI B16.18.
d. Adaptors: Thread to sweat, where required.
2. Steel Pipe: Use flanges, as previously specified.
3. Dielectric Unions:
1) EPCO Sales, Incorporated.
2) Watts Regulator Company
b. Type: Dielectric insulating type.
c. Pressure Ratings:
1) Soldered Unions: 150 psig.
2) Dielectric Unions: 250 psig.
3) Flange Unions: 175 psig.
d. Temperature Rating: 210 degrees F at 250 psi water.
2.03 VALVES
A. General:
1. All valves shall have a minimum design pressure rating of 125 psi and
capable of a test pressure of 200 psi. Valves shall have flanged or threaded
ends.
2. Cast-iron parts of valves shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 126.
3. Flanged ends shall be flat-faced and have bolt circle and bolt patterns
conforming to ANSI B16.1, Class 125, unless otherwise specified.
4. All castings shall be clean and sound, without defects of any kind and no
plugging, welding or repairing of defects will be permitted.
5. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal.
6. Gaskets shall be full face and made of natural or synthetic elastomers in
conformance with ANSI B16.21 and suitable for the service characteristics,
chemical compatibility and temperature.
7. Type 316 stainless steel shall be used for parts of valves where no definite
15515-11 11/2017
1949
CONTRACT DEL-260H
material is specified.
8. Operation of levers and gates shall be designed so that the effort required to
operate the handwheel, lever or chain shall not exceed forty (40) pounds
applied at the extremity of the wheel or lever. The handwheels on valves
fourteen (14) inches and smaller shall not be less than eight (8) inches in
diameter.
9. Except where noted otherwise, all interior and exposed valves shall be
handwheel or lever operated.
10. All operators shall turn counter clockwise to open. Operators shall have the
open direction clearly and permanently marked. All valve operators shall be
provided with the valve by the valve manufacturer. Contractor, through the
valve manufacturer, shall be solely responsible for the selection of the proper
operator to confirm to the operating conditions specified herein. Field
calibration and testing of the operators and valves to ensure a proper
installation and an operating system shall be the responsibility of Contractor.
11. All raised face flanges, in conformance with ANSI B16.5, Class 150, shall be
milled flat.
B. Manufacturers: Provide products of one (1) of the following, except where indicated
otherwise:
1. Stockham Valves and Fitting Company, Cullman, AL.
2. Lunkenheimer Company, Cincinnati, OH.
3. Crane, Stamford, CT.
C. Bronze Body Ball Valves:
1. Reference: ASTM B 283.
2. Type: Two-piece body with standard port opening.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Brass.
b. Ball: Brass with hard chrome plated finish.
c. Stem: Brass.
d. Stem Packing: PTFE.
e. O-Rings: Viton.
f. Seats: PTFE.
15515-12 11/2017
1950
CONTRACT DEL-260H
4. Non-blow out stem design.

5. Pressure Rating: Class 125, 400 psi WOG.
D. Bronze Body Globe Valves:
1. Reference: ANSI B16.18, ASTM B 62, MSS SP 80, Type 2.
2. Type: Inside screw rising stem, union bonnet.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Bronze.
b. Disc: Teflon.
c. Bonnet: Bronze.
d. Packing: Acrylic and novaloid fibers with Teflon non-asbestos.
E. Bronze Body Check Valves:
1. Reference: ANSI B16.18, ASTM B62, MSS SP 80, Type 3.
2. Type: Horizontal swing, regrinding type, wye pattern.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Bronze.
b. Disc, Seat Ring: Bronze.
c. Cap: Screw-in type.
F. Bronze Body Strainers:
1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one (1) of the following:
a. Mueller Steam Specialties.
b. Armstrong Machine Works.
2. Type: Wye self-cleaning strainer.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Cast bronze with machined seat and self-aligning screen.
b. Cap: Straight threaded gasketed cap.
15515-13 11/2017
1951
CONTRACT DEL-260H
4. Screens:
a. Sizes 2-inch and smaller: 20-mesh, stainless steel with 0.031-inch
diameter openings.
b. Sizes 2-1/2-inch: Perforated stainless steel with 0.063-inch diameter
openings.
G. Iron Body Gate Valves:
1. Reference: ANSI B16.1, ANSI B16.10, ASTM A 126 Class B, MSS P 70,
Type 1.
2. Type: Outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Iron.
b. Disc: Bronze.
c. Bonnet: Bolt-on type.
d. Seat: Renewable bronze seat ring.
e. Packing: Acrylic and novaloid fibers Teflon impregnated, non-
asbestos.
H. Iron Body Butterfly Valves:
1. Reference: ASTM A 126 Class B, MSS SP 67.
2. Type: Wafer body, lever operated, bubble tight shutoff.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Cast-Iron.
b. Disc: Ductile Iron.
c. Handle: Malleable iron.
d. Seat Sleeve: Viton.
4. Lever shall have a ten position indicator plate.
I. Iron Body Globe Valves:
15515-14 11/2017
1952
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Reference: ANSI B16.1, ANSI B16.10, ASTM A 126 Class B, MSS SP 85,
Type 1, Military Specification MIL-V-18826.
2. Type: Outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Iron.
b. Disc: Renewable bronze disc.
c. Bonnet: Bolt-on type.
d. Seat: Renewable bronze seat ring.
e. Packing: Acrylic and novaloid fibers with Teflon, non-asbestos.
J. Iron Body Check Valves:
1. Reference: ANSI B16.1, ANSI B16.10, ASTM A 126 Class B, MSS SP 71,
Type 1, Military Specification MIL-V-18436.
2. Type: Horizontal swing.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Iron.
b. Disc, Seat Ring: Bronze.
c. Cap: Bolt-on type.
4. Rating: Class 125, 200 psi WOG.
K. Cast-Iron Strainers:
a. Mueller Steam Specialties, St. Paul, NC.
b. Armstrong Machine Works, Three Rivers, MI.
2. Type: Wye self-cleaning strainer.
3. Construction:
a. Body: Iron body with tapered seats in both the body and cover flange
for secure screen retention.
b. Cap: Bolted cap with gasket.
15515-15 11/2017
1953
CONTRACT DEL-260H
4. Screens: Heavy-gauge perforated stainless steel.

a. Sizes 4-Inch and Smaller: 0.063-inch diameter perforations.
b. Sizes 5-Inch and Larger: 0.125-inch diameter perforations.
L. Triple Duty Valve:
a. Bell & Gossett, Division of ITT, Morton Grove, IL.
b. Taco, Cranston, RI.
2. Type: Calibrated adjustment type with the following:
a. Valve Characteristics.
b. Regulation of pump discharge flow.
c. Positive shut-off.
d. Prevention of backflow with non-slam feature.
3. Construction: Cast-iron body:
a. Body: Heavy-duty cast-iron.
b. Seat: Brass.
c. Disc: Bronze with EPDM seat insert, spring loaded soft seat.
d. Stem: Stainless steel and brass, back-seating type.
e. Spring: Stainless steel.
f. Packing: Teflon-graphite.
4. Style: Straight pattern.
5. Features:
a. Brass readout valves.
b. Repacking under full system pressure.
6. Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi.
7. Maximum Working Temperature: 250 degrees F.
M. Balancing Valves:
15515-16 11/2017
1954
CONTRACT DEL-260H

a. Armstrong Pumps Company, North Tonawanda, NY.
b. Tour and Andersson, Division of IMI PLC, Dallas, TX.
2. Units 2-Inches and Smaller:
a. Functions: Precise flow measurement, precise flow balancing,
positive shut-off with no drip seat and Teflon disc, and drain
connection with protective cap.
b. Type: Globe style combination balancing cock and flow sensor.
c. Construction: Bronze copper alloy.
d. Four (4) 360 degree adjustment turns of handwheel.
e. Hidden memory feature with tamper-proof balancing setting.
f. Maximum Working Pressure: 250 psi.
g. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
h. Provisions for connecting to a portable differential pressure meter.
3. Units 2-1/2-inch and Larger:
a. Functions: Precise flow measurement, precise flow balancing, and
positive shut-off with no drip seat and Teflon disc.
b. Type: Globe style combination balancing cock and flow sensor.
c. Construction: Cast-iron.
d. Eight (8), twelve (12), or sixteen (16), 360 degree adjustment turns of
handwheel for valve sizes 2-1/2-inches through 6-inch, 8-inches
through 10-inch, and 16-inch, respectively.
e. Hidden memory feature with precision tamper-proof balancing
setting.
f. Maximum Working Pressure: 250 psi.
g. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
h. Provisions for connecting to a portable differential pressure meter.
N. Three-Way Control Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
15515-17 11/2017
1955
CONTRACT DEL-260H
a. Belimo, Series CCV control valve with AF24 actuator

2. Characterized Control Valves:
a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Nickel-plated forged brass body rated at no less
than 400 psi, stainless steel ball and blowout proof stem, female NPT
end fittings, with a dual EPDM O-ring packing design, fiberglass
reinforced Teflon seats, and a TEFZEL flow characterizing disc.
b. Close-Off Pressure Rating: 100 PSI.
c. The actuator shall be the same manufacturer as the valve, integrally
mounted to the valve at the factory with a single screw on a four-way
DIN mounting-base.
3. Motorized Actuators:
a. Size for torque required for valve close off at 100 percent of total
system (pump) head differential pressure.
b. Coupling: Directly couple end mount to stem, shaft, or ISO-style
direct-coupled mounting pad.
c. Mounting: Actuators shall be capable of being mechanically and
electrically paralleled to increase torque if required.
d. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing
circuitry without the use of end switches to deactivate the actuator at
the end of rotation.
e. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism.
f. Power Requirements: Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V
dc.
g. Temperature Rating: -22 to +122ºF.
h. Housing: Minimum requirement NEMA type 2 mounted in any
orientation.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Air Vents:
1. Type: Automatic high capacity float operated air vent.
1) Bell & Gossett, Division of ITT, Morton Grove, IL, Model
107A.
15515-18 11/2017
1956
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2) Armstrong International, Three Rivers, MI, Model AV-13.

b. Construction:
1) Body and Bonnet: Cast-iron.
2) Internal Components: Stainless steel, brass, and EPDM.
c. Minimum Venting Capacity: 50 SCFM at 100 psig.
d. Maximum Operating Pressure: 150 psi.
e. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
f. Connection: 3/4-inch NPT inlet with 3/8-inch NPT outlet.
g. Provide adaptor for tubing where required.
2. Type: Automatic Air Vent:
a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one (1) of the following:
1) Spirax/Sarco, Inc., Blythewood, SC, Model AE30CV.
2) Armstrong International, Three Rivers, MI., Model 21-AR.
b. Construction:
1) Body and Cap: Brass or cast-iron.
2) Float: Plastic or stainless steel.
3) Valve: Viton rubber.
4) Valve Seat: Stainless steel.
5) Bracket and Lever Assembly: Stainless steel.
6) Check Valve: Stainless steel.
c. Minimum Venting Capacity: Five SCFM at 100 psig.
d. Maximum Operating Pressure: 116 psi.
f. Connection: 1/2-inch FPT inlet / 1/4-inch NPT outlet.
g. Provide adaptor for tubing, where required.
B. Relief Valves:
15515-19 11/2017
1957
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Materials:
a. Body: Cast-Iron.
b. Diaphragm and Seat: EPDM.
c. Internal Wetted Parts: Brass.
d. Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig.
f. ASME labeled for relieving pressure.
g. Low blow down differential.
h. Fluid shall not be permitted to discharge into the spring chamber.
i. Manufacturers: Provide products of one (1) of the following:
1) Bell & Gosset, Division of ITT, Morton Grove, IL
C. Thermometers:
a. H.O. Trerice Company.
b. Weksler Instrument Company.
2. Range:
a. 30 degrees F to 240 degrees F temperature range in maximum
increments of 2 degrees F for hot water systems.
3. Type: Adjustable Angle Column Type Thermometer.
a. Construction:
1) Case: Nine-inch smooth die cast aluminum.
2) Window: Clear acrylic plastic or glass held in place with
stainless steel cap.
3) Tube: Lens front red appearing mercury tubing.
4) Scale: White background with black figures and markings.
5) Stem: Brass with union connections.
15515-20 11/2017
1958
CONTRACT DEL-260H
6) Well: Insertion well with brass separable socket.

7) Neck: 2-1/2-inch extension neck.
8) Accuracy: Within one scale division.
4. Plastic type casing is not acceptable.
D. Pressure Gages:
a. H.O. Trerice Company.
b. Weksler Instrument Company.
2. Reference: ANSI B40.1 for Grade AA gages.
3. Range: Pressure range shall be selected:
a. 0 to 15 psig in maximum increments of 0.1 psig.
b. 0 to 30 psig in maximum increments of 0.2 psig.
c. 0 to 60 psig in maximum increments of 0.5 psig.
4. Type: Direct mounted, dial type, dry pressure gage.
a. Construction:
1) Case: 4-1/2-inch cast aluminum with black finish.
2) Ring: Friction type-stainless steel.
3) Window: Glass or clear acrylic plastic.
4) Dial: White with black markings and graduations.
5) Pointer: Micrometer type with black finish.
6) Movement: Stainless steel rotary type.
7) Bourdon Tube/Socket: Phosphor bronze tube, silver brazed to
forged brass socket and tip, 1/4-inch NPT.
8) Accuracy: ANSI B 40.1, Grade 2A; 1/2 percent of scale
range.
b. Isolation Valve:
1) Type: Needle valve.
15515-21 11/2017
1959
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2) Construction: Brass body, seat, stem, and tee handle.

3) Packing: Teflon.
4) Maximum Operating Pressure: 2,000 psi.
5) Maximum Operating Temperature: 300 degrees F.
c. Gage cock isolation valve is not acceptable.
E. Link Seals: Provide mechanical seals with adjusting bolts suitable for 20 psi working
pressure where shown or specified.
a. Thunderline Corporation.
b. Calpico, Inc.
2. Materials: Mechanical seals through walls or floors; two (2) independent
mechanical seal assemblies required for each penetration.
a. Pressure Plate: Low carbon steel, zinc galvanized plated.
b. Bolt and Nut: Low carbon steel zinc galvanized.
c. Sealing Element: Silicone rubber.
d. Three-hour fire rating.
F. Flexible Connections:
a. Flexonics.
b. Anamet, Inc.
2. Type: Flexible connections for piping 2-1/2-inches and smaller:
a. Construction:
1) Hose: Stainless steel.
2) Braid: Stainless steel.
b. Pressure Ratings: 300 psig working pressure at 250 degrees F
temperature.
c. End Connections: Screwed ends welded to hose braid ends. Provide
15515-22 11/2017
1960
CONTRACT DEL-260H
stainless steel to copper tube adaptors.

3. Type: Flexible connections for piping three (3) inches and larger:
a. Construction:
1) Hose: Stainless steel.
2) Braid: Stainless steel.
b. Minimum Pressure Ratings: 150 psig working pressure at 250 degrees
F temperature.
c. End Connections: Flanged, welded to hose and braid ends.
2.05 EXPANSION JOINTS, GUIDES AND ANCHORES
A. Contractor shall provide a system of expansion joints, alignment guides, anchors, and
appurtenances as required to absorb thermal expansion within the piping system.
B. Expansion joints, alignment guides, and anchors are not shown. Contractor shall
provide the services of the expansion joint manufacturer to design a system of
expansion compensation for all piping systems.
C. Pipe anchors shall be spaced to divide pipe into sections. Anchors shall be located at
valves, changes in direction of piping, and major branch connections as required to
control stresses in piping due to expansion. Anchors shall be of a type recommended
by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Anchors shall be made of
structural materials of heavy cross section and securely fastened directly or indirectly
to the building construction.
D. Contractor shall include 1/4-scale drawings of the entire piping system with all
expansion joints, alignment guides, anchors and appurtenances required for proper
control of piping forces. The drawings shall include all forces acting on the piping
system and the corresponding reactions of the compensation and anchor devices
provided. The drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Registered Professional
Engineer licensed in the State of New York. A letter signed and sealed by the
Registered Professional Engineer indicating that the expansion compensation system
has been properly designed shall be included.
2.06 DRIP PANS
A. Provide aluminum drip pans under all water piping installed over electrical
equipment and motors. Route drainage to nearest approved floor drain, gutter, or
other drainage system with 3/4-inch pipe. All construction shall be liquid tight. Pitch
the drain pan uniformly toward the drainpipe at a slope not less than 1/8-inch per
lineal foot.
2.07 HARDWARE
15515-23 11/2017
1961
CONTRACT DEL-260H
A. All bolts, nuts, washers and other fastening hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel
construction.
B. Hardware shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
for type and size.
2.08 MATERIAL SCHEDULES
A. Piping:
1. Use types of pipe and fittings as specified below, unless otherwise specified
or shown.
2. All piping 2-1/2-inches and smaller run within the interior and exterior of a
building shall be copper.
3. All piping 3-inches and larger run within the interior and exterior of a
building shall be welded steel.
4. Use “wrought copper” fittings for copper tubing.
5. Use “butt welded” fittings for welded steel pipe connections.
B. Valves:
1. All valves for copper tubing shall be bronze or brass bodied, unless otherwise
specified.
2. All valves for steel piping shall be iron bodied, unless otherwise specified.
3. All valves 2-1/2-inches and smaller shall be of the sweat or screwed end type.
Adaptors for screwed or sweat connections shall be provided as required.
4. All valves 3-inches and larger shall be of the flanged end type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Examine equipment at time of delivery for damaged or missing components.
2. Do not proceed with installation of equipment until all items found defective
upon examination have been corrected.
3. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
4. Install equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for
safe operation and maintenance.
15515-24 11/2017
1962
CONTRACT DEL-260H
5. Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, materials, and equipment necessary
for installation of the piping system. All piping shall be installed in
accordance with the Contract Documents in a neat workmanlike manner and
shall be set for accurate line and elevation. All piping shall be thoroughly
cleaned before installation, and care shall be taken to keep the piping clean
throughout the installation.
6. Before setting wall sleeves, pipes, castings and pipes to be cast-in-place,
Contractor shall coordinate with the Contract Drawings and Figures, which
may have a direct bearing on the pipe locations. Contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper location of the pipes and
appurtenances during the construction with all trades.
7. Piping shall be attached to pumps, valves, equipment, etc., in accordance with
the respective manufacturer’s recommendations.
8. For piping assembled with threaded, solvent cemented, welded or soldered
joints, liberal use of unions shall be made. Unions shall be provided close to
main pieces of equipment and in branch lines to allow dismantling of piping
without disturbing main pipe lines or adjacent branch lines. A minimum of
one union per straight run of pipe between fittings and/or valves with
multiple lengths of pipe shall be used. Unions shall be placed downstream of
the shutoff or isolating valves. Where flanges are installed, unions shall be
omitted.
9. All changes in directions or elevations shall be made with fittings.
10. Piping shall not run above motor control centers, control panels or other
electrical equipment, unless directed by the Engineer, in writing. Piping
which must run above electrical equipment shall be provided with suitable
drip pans.
11. Piping shall be installed free of traps and with sufficient slope so that all of
the various piping systems may be drained to one or several points. In the
event that it is impossible to drain to a common point due to structural
obstructions and finished ceiling heights, furnish and install all additional
drain valves that may be required to completely drain piping systems.
Location of all drain valves shall be approved by Engineer prior to
installation.
12. Install all items as shown, specified, and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
13. Request instructions from Engineer, in writing, when there is a conflict
between the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents.
14. Present conflicts between piping systems or equipment or structures to
Engineer who shall determine corrective measures to be taken.
15515-25 11/2017
1963
CONTRACT DEL-260H
15. Do not modify structures to facilitate installation of piping, unless specifically

approved by Engineer.
16. Installation shall conform to requirements of all local and state codes.
17. Properly plug or cap the open ends of all piping at the end of each day’s
Work or other stopping point through construction. Equipment shall be
tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical
damage.
B. Joints:
1. Flanged Joints:
a. Shall be made up with full-face gaskets, as specified.
b. Shall have the flange faces bearing uniformly on the gaskets.
c. Shall have the flanges drawn together uniformly until the joint is
tight.
d. No washers shall be permitted for the bolt and nut assemblies.
e. The length of the bolts shall be uniform and in accordance with the
standards specified herein. The bolt's maximum projection beyond the
end of the nut shall be 0.25-inch nor shall the bolt fall short of the end
of the nut.
C. Welded Joints:
1. Welding shall be performed under this Specification, as specified in Detailed
Specification 05091 - Welding.
D. Threaded Joints:
1. All threads shall be clean, machine cut and all pipes shall be reamed before
erection.
2. Taps and dies shall be cleaned, sharpened and in good condition.
3. All threaded joints shall be made tight with sealing compound suitable for the
application.
4. Once set up, a joint shall not be backed off unless the joint is broken, the
threads cleaned, and new sealing compound is applied.
E. Valves:
1. All valves shall be manually opened and closed before installation to check
their operation, and the interior of the valves shall be cleaned. Joints shall be
made as specified.
15515-26 11/2017
1964
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Install the valves so that they can be conveniently operated. Do not place
operators at angles other than parallel to the floors or walls.
3. Valves shall be supported as integral components of the piping systems.
4. Valve supports shall anchor the valves against an unbalanced force in either
direction. The magnitude of the force shall be based on a pressure equal to
twice the maximum working pressure with a maximum allowable stress of
1/2 of the support's yield strength.
F. Piping Layout in Building:
1. Slope piping up in direction of flow.
2. Water shall circulate freely with no evidence of trapping or air binding.
3. Runouts to units above the main shall be taken off top of main and pitch up to
units.
4. Runouts to units below the main shall be taken off bottom of main and pitch
to units.
5. Low points of piping shall have ball drain valves.
6. Threaded end unions or bolted end flange connections shall be provided for
removal of each piece of equipment or device without major dismantling.
7. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction of piping.
8. Provide flexible connectors for each pipe passing through building expansion
joints.
9. Do not block openings or passageways with piping.
10. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to installation to ensure
proper fitting of the Work.
11. Install straight runs true to building line.
12. Install vertical pipe truly plumb in all directions.
13. Install piping parallel or perpendicular to building walls. Piping at odd angles
and 45 degrees runs across corners will not be accepted.
14. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer, provide temporary caps or plugs
over all pipe openings at the end of each day, or when otherwise required or
directed by the Engineer to prevent foreign material from entering the piping
systems.
G. Pressure gage ranges shall be selected for proper sensitivity, so that the dial indicator
points to the approximate center of the dial in normal operation.
15515-27 11/2017
1965
CONTRACT DEL-260H
H. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of water lines and where shown.
I. Provide nipple, 3/4-inch ball valve and short nipple with capped hose connection for
each hydronic strainer blow down.
J. Install fine mesh start-up screens in all strainers and replace with final stainless steel
screens after 30 days of pump operation.
K. Provide all supporting steel, brackets, etc. as required to support all equipment in an
approved manner.
L. Hard pipe all drain lines, relief valve drain lines, and air vents to nearest floor drain.
M. All thermometers shall be legible from a standing position on the floor.
N. Escutcheon plates shall be provided for all exposed piping penetrations.
O. Provide sleeves and mechanical seals where pipes pass through wall, roof and floor
slabs.
P. All connections between ferrous and non-ferrous piping materials shall be made with
dielectric couplings.
Q. Care shall be taken so as not to leave tool marks or abrasions on plated, polished or
soft metal piping.
R. Wherever changes in sizes of piping occur, changes shall be made with concentric
reducing fittings. The use of bushings is not permitted, unless otherwise shown.
S. Provide shutoff valves to each piece of equipment furnished.
3.02 FIELD TESTING
A. Preliminary and final field tests shall be performed for all equipment provided under
B. Field Tests:
1. Contractor shall provide all necessary labor and equipment required for the
field tests specified below including, but not limited to, air compressor,
gauges, conduit caps, temporary pipe and connections. Contractor shall
provide water for all testing and may use only water from an approved
source. Contractor shall also furnish and install all means and apparatus
required for getting the water into the pipeline and testing; including pumps,
gauges, and meters, plugs, caps, temporary blow-off piping and bypass
piping, etc., complete with any necessary reaction blocking to prevent pipe
movement during the testing. All pipelines shall be flushed clean and tested
in such lengths or sections as agreed upon between the Engineer and
Contractor. Contractor shall provide the Engineer reasonable notice of the
15515-28 11/2017
1966
CONTRACT DEL-260H
time when he intends to test portions of the pipelines. The Engineer reserves
the right to request additional testing of any section or portion of a pipeline.
2. After flushing, all pipelines shall be hydrostatically tested to one and one half
times the maximum system design pressure, but not less than 50 psi.
Equipment not capable of being tested at the indicated pressure shall be
isolated and protected.
3. The piping shall be filled with water for a period of not less than eight hours,
then subject to the indicated test pressure. During the pressure test, there
shall be no leakage. All air shall be purged from the line before pressure
testing. The duration of the hydrostatic test shall be eight hours.
4. Any leaks or defective pipe disclosed by the hydrostatic test shall be
corrected by Contractor and the test repeated until passed.
C. Inspection:
1. Examine areas to receive piping and accessories for:
2. Defects that adversely affect execution and quality of the Work.
3. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances.
4. Start the Work only when conditions are satisfactory.
5. The Engineer reserves the right to reject or authorize replacement of piping
and accessories found to be defective or deviated from allowable tolerances.
A. Check all controls, interlocks and power connections.
B. Demonstrate equipment performance.
C. While system is operable, balance all equipment and valves to achieve design
conditions.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Cleaning and Site maintenance shall be performed for all equipment provided under
this Specification, as specified in Detailed Specification 01740 - Cleaning and Site
Maintenance.
B. Contractor shall provide all necessary labor and equipment required for flushing and
cleaning. Contractor shall provide water for all flushing and may use only water
from an approved source. Contractor shall also furnish and install all means and
apparatus necessary for getting the water into the pipeline and flushing including
pumps, gauges, meters, temporary blow off piping, bypass piping, etc., complete with
all required reaction blocking to prevent pipe movement during the procedure.
15515-29 11/2017
1967
CONTRACT DEL-260H
C. Before placing the hydronic piping system into service, Contractor shall thoroughly
clean all piping systems by thoroughly flushing with water and chemical cleaner. All
debris which may have entered the pipe during the construction period shall be
removed. If obstructions remain after cleaning, Contractor shall correct to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Pipelines shall be flushed at a rate of at least 2.5 feet per
second for duration suitable to the Engineer.
D. Cleaning methods and procedures shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of
the cleaning agents and chemicals used. Chemical cleaning agents shall be as
manufactured by Oakite, Nalco, Dearborn, or approved equal.
E. After the cleaning period, empty all dirt pockets and clean all strainers.
F. Remove all dirt, rust, dust and any other obsturciton from hydronic piping systems
after installation.
G. Remove and dispose of all debris and waste from the Site resulting from installation.
3.05 PROTECTION OF EXECUTED WORK
A. Water Treatment:
1. The Contractor shall engage a suitable water treatment consultant such as
Drew Water Services, Nalco Chemical, or Betz or approved equal, to provide
a supervised water treatment program for a period of one year from the date
of initial treatment. Services shall include the following:
a. Provide all equipment and chemicals such as corrosion inhibitor,
descaler, and propylene glycol for freeze protection required for the
water treatment program.
b. Conduct test analysis of the system water.
c. Furnish trained personnel to supervise initial fill and instruct
designated Owner’s personnel in maintaining proper concentration
through water analysis and chemical dosage.
2. The water treatment consultant shall provide monthly visits to the facilities
for the purpose of running tests on samples of treated water, review the
performance of the treatment program and make written recommendations for
any changes in chemical dosages that may be needed. The consultant shall
submit a full written report describing the initial condition of the water and
the recommended corrective action taken after each monthly facility visit.
The report shall be submitted within a week of testing.
END OF SECTION
15515-30 11/2017
1968
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15720H – HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15720H
Heating and Ventilating Units
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15720H – Heating and Ventilating Units replaces
General Specification 15720 – Heating and Ventilating Units in its entirety. All
Work for this Section shall fully conform to the requirements specified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to
furnish and install all heating and ventilating units with the requirements specified
herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein.
B. The equipment shall be furnished complete with all accessories, special tools, spare
parts, base attachments, mountings, anchor bolts and other appurtenances as
specified or as may be required for a satisfactory installation.
C. All heating and ventilating units shall be furnished in accordance with the schedule
shown on the Contract Drawings.
D. The following index of this Section is presented for convenience:
Article Title Page

15720-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................2
1.07 SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLIES .........................................................4
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................4
2.01 HEATING AND VENTILATING UNIT ..............................................4
2.02 MOTORS .............................................................................................10
PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................11
3.01 INSTALLATION ................................................................................11
3.02 IDENTIFICATION..............................................................................11
3.03 TESTING .............................................................................................11
3.04 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................11
A. Detailed Specification 15951 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
B. Detailed Specification 16221 - Electric Motors
15720H-1 11/2017
1969
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Equipment shall comply with the latest applicable provisions and recommendations
of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified.
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
2. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
3. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
4. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ACRI)
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
6. National Electrical Code (NEC)
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE)
8. Applicable Federal, State and local laws and/or ordinances
B. Where conflict arises between the requirements of the local codes and the
requirements of the above reference standards, the more stringent requirements
shall prevail.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
1. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals.
2. Final Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals.
3. Spare Parts List.
4. Special Tools List.
5. Reports of Certified Shop Tests.
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Equipment Identification
Number and Specification section.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Shop Drawings shall include but not be limited to:
a. Equipment specifications and data sheets identifying all materials
b. Complete assembly, layout, installation and foundation drawings
15720H-2 11/2017
1970
CONTRACT DEL-260H
c. Fan performance curve indicating the operating point.

d. Internal static pressure including drop thru heating coil, unit
mounted accessories and 0.3" for filter dirt shall not exceed the
difference between the total and external static pressures.
e. Motor nameplate data as specified in Detailed Specification
16221 - Electric Motors.
f. Copies of the manufacturer’s specifications type, size, performance
characteristics, efficiency installation instructions, detailed
drawings for vibration isolators.
g. Details of coating.
h. Weights of all components parts, assembled weight of units and
approximate total shipping weight.
i. Example equipment nameplate data sheet.
j. Interconnecting wiring diagrams.
k. List of recommended lubricants.
l. Color charts for selection by the Engineer.
2. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all
information and data listed herein and all additional information required
for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract
Documents.
3. Partial, incomplete or illegible submissions will be returned to the
Contractor without review for resubmittal.
D. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals

1. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in
accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Contract
Documents.
2. Two copies of a preliminary O&M manual shall be included in the shop
drawing submittal. Without inclusion of these manuals, the submittal will
be considered incomplete and will be returned without review.
E. Lubricants
1. The manufacturer shall submit a list with a minimum of four manufacturer’s
standard lubricants which may be used interchangeably for each type of
lubricant required.
A. The equipment covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard
equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns.
Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best
15720H-3 11/2017
1971
CONTRACT DEL-260H
practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on
B. All components of the Heating and Ventilating System be provided by one
manufacturer who shall match all components and provide equipment which
functions together as a system.
1.07 SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLIES
A. Furnish all special tools necessary to dissemble, service, repair and adjust the
equipment.
B. The following spare parts shall be furnished with each unit:
1. Two (2) sets of belts.
2. Two (2) sets of complete change of filters.
3. One (1) quart of touch-up paint.
C. Furnish all additional spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturers.
D. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal shall indicate specific
sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1
lot of packing material" are not acceptable.
E. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts
inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate
number.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HEATING AND VENTILATING UNIT
A. General:
1. Heating and ventilating unit shall be industrial-grade custom equipment
conforming to the requirements and conditions listed under this Section.
Commercial grade units are not acceptable.
2. Heating and ventilating unit shall be specifically designed for the
performance and service conditions specified in these Detailed
Specifications.
3. Heating and ventilating unit shall be anchored to the building structure.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Engineered Air, De Soto, KS
2. Temtrol Inc, Okarche, OK.
3. Govenair, Oklahoma City, OK.
C. Material and Construction:
15720H-4 11/2017
1972
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Units shall be complete with inlet damper, angled filters, horizontal tube
integral face and bypass heating coils, fan section and discharge module as
required. All parts of the equipment herein shall be amply proportioned for
all stresses that may occur during fabrication, shipment, erection and
continuous operation. All corresponding parts shall be interchangeable and
all parts subject to wear shall be standard pattern and easily replaceable.
Adequate lubrication shall be provided for bearings and lubrication points
shall be readily accessible.
2. Casing:
a. Unit casing shall be of minimum 16 gauge satin coat galvanized
sheet metal. All surfaces shall be cleaned with a degreasing solvent
to remove oil and metal oxides and finished with one coat of a two
component epoxy primer. Exterior surfaces shall also include a
polyurethane top coat.
b. All walls, roofs and floors shall be of formed construction, with at
least two breaks at each joint. Joints shall be secured by sheet metal
screws or pop rivets. Wall and floor joints shall be broken in for
rigidity. All joints shall be caulked with a water resistant sealant.
c. The following components shall be provided with a 22 gauge solid
galvanized metal liner over insulated areas:
1) Fan Sections
2) Coil Sections
3) Filter Sections
4) Access Sections
5) Underside of Unit (where visible)
d. Units shall be provided with access doors to the following
components: fans and motors; filters; dampers and operators; access
plenums. Access doors shall be large enough for easy access.
Contractor shall use hinged access doors when maintenance of
internal components is needed. Removing screwed wall panels for
access is not feasible and is not permitted under this contract.
e. Provide hinged access doors in welded steel frames. Doors shall be
fully lined with closed cell bulb gasket and Leverlok handles,
operable from both sides.
f. Casings shall be supported on structural channel supports, designed
and welded for low deflections. Integral lifting lugs shall be
provided for hoisting.
g. All units shall be internally insulated with 2-inch thick nominal 3
lb./cu.ft. density acoustic insulation.
15720H-5 11/2017
1973
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3. Coils:
a. Coils shall be 5/8" O.D. constructed of copper tube, aluminum fin,
and copper headers with Schedule 40 steel pipe connectors.
b. Fins constructed of aluminum or copper shall be rippled for
maximum heat transfer and shall be mechanically bonded to the
tubes by mechanical expansion of the tubes. The coils shall have a
galvanized steel casing. All coils shall be factory tested with air at
300 psig while immersed in an illuminated water tank.
c. Headers with Schedule 40 steel pipe connections utilize male
National Pipe Thread (N.P.T.) up to 4-inch connections.
d. Provide an insulated header cover to conceal exposed headers.
e. Provide integral face and bypass coil-damper units arranged with
vertical tubes. The units shall consist of alternate vertical coil and
bypass sections in galvanized steel casings of not less than 18 ga.
Coil and bypass sections shall be balanced to provide equal air
pressure drop at each extreme of operation. Maximum header length
of a single section shall be 64 inches.
f. Multiple row coils shall be of staggered tube design circuited to
optimize capacity with minimum pressure drop.
g. Opposed blade dampers shall be provided on both face and bypass
channels on the entering airside. In addition, provide a single blade
damper on the leaving airside of the coil channel to eliminate coil
wiping. Blades shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel welded to
steel damper rods operating in oil impregnated bronze bushings.
Bushings shall be installed at no more than 48-inches on center.
Opposed blade dampers shall interlock on closing and require no
sealing gaskets. Damper linkage shall be non-adjustable to prevent
slippage and subsequent air leakage.
4. Filter Sections and Filters:

a. The filter section shall be complete with filters. Holding frames
shall be installed and individually sealed to prevent leakage around
frames. Filter banks shall be reinforced with vertical structural
members to assure rigidity.
b. Filters shall be removable.
c. Air filters shall be medium efficiency, pleated, 2-inch thick
disposable type. Each filter shall consist of a non-woven cotton and
synthetic fabric media, media support grid and enclosing frame. The
filter shall be Underwriters' Laboratories Class 2 listed.
15720H-6 11/2017
1974
CONTRACT DEL-260H
d. Filter media shall be of a non-woven cotton fabric type. The filter

media shall have an average efficiency of 25-30 percent and an
average resistance of 90-92 percent in accordance with ASHRAE
Test Standard 52-76.
e. The effective filter media shall be not less than 4.6 square feet of
media per 1.0 square foot of filter face area and shall contain not less
than 15 pleats per linear foot. Initial resistance at 500 fpm approach
velocity shall not exceed .28 inch w.g.
f. The media support shall be a Type 316 stainless steel welded wire
grid with an effective open area of not less than 96 percent. The
welded wire grid shall be bonded to the filter media to eliminate the
possibility of media oscillation and media pull away. The media
support grid shall be formed in such a manner that it forms a radial
pleat design, allowing total use of filter media.
g. The enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid, heavy-duty, high
wet-strength beverage board, with diagonal support members
bonded to the air entering and air exiting side of each pleat, to ensure
pleat stability. The inside periphery of the enclosing frame shall be
bonded to the filter pack, thus eliminating the possibility of air
bypass.
h. The frames shall be pre-drilled for convenient assembly into banks.
They shall be installed to provide service from the dirty air side. The
frames shall be equipped with factory-installed butyl gaskets.
i. The frames shall be made of 16 gauge galvanized steel, 2-13/16 inch
in depth. They shall be equipped with integral spring type latches
to securely hold the filter against the gaskets.
j. Unit manufacturer shall provide a Magnehelic gauge to indicate the
operating pressure drop of the filter.
5. Fan and Drives:
a. Airfoil BI fans shall be plenum type configuration. Thrust restraint
isolators shall be provided parallel to the shaft center line when
required to minimize axial movement and bending movements of
the blower assembly(ies). Drive side bearings on plenum fans shall
be adapter style to ensure even clamping of the bearing sleeve to the
shaft.
b. Provide Type 304 stainless steel inlet screen and open wire mesh
protective discharge screen. Removable screens at access doors are
not acceptable.
c. Fan ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA
Standard 210 and licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Rating seal
for Air Performance. Only AMCA certified fans will be accepted.
15720H-7 11/2017
1975
CONTRACT DEL-260H
d. Fans shall have a sharply rising pressure characteristic extending

throughout the operating range to assure quiet and stable operation
under all conditions from wide open to closed off. Fan brake
horsepower shall be equal to or less than the BHP specified in the
schedule at the listed static pressure and CFM.
e. Fan manufacturer shall provide sound power level ratings for fans
tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standards. Sound power
ratings shall be in decibels (reference 10-12 watts) in eight octave
bands.
f. Shafts are to be ASTM A-108 steel, grade 1045, precision turned,
ground and polished. The shafts’ first critical speed shall be at least
125 percent of the fan’s maximum operating speed for each fan
class. The drive end of the fan shaft shall be counter sunk for
tachometer readings.
g. All fan surfaces are to be thoroughly cleaned prior to painting using
a combination of washing and hand and power tool cleaning as
required. After cleaning, all surfaces are to be coated with an
industrial grade alkyd enamel. Surfaces of bolted components not
accessible after assembly shall be coated with an industrial grade
alkyd enamel. Surfaces of bolted components not accessible after
assembly shall be coated and allowed to dry prior to final assembly.
Coating with primer only will not be acceptable.
h. All fans shall receive a final inspection by a qualified inspector prior
to shipment. Inspection to include: fan description and accessories,
balance, welding, dimensions, bearings, duct and base connection
points, paint finish and overall workmanship.
i. Operating fan brake horsepowers shown on the schedule shall not
be exceeded.
j. The fan drive shall be multiple cog, non-static V-belts sized at 1.5
times the fan motor horsepower. All sheaves shall be fixed. The
fan sheaves shall be single pitch with tapered split and keyed hub.
The fan drive guard shall be in accordance with OSHA
requirements, with tachometer opening provisions for measuring the
fan speed without removing the guard. The guard shall be split for
adjustment and belt change.
k. The fan and motor shall be provided with housed spring vibration
isolation for a minimum of 90 percent isolation efficiency. An
integral adjustable motor base shall be provided.
l. Fan bearings shall be split pillow-block design. All bearings shall
be designed for a minimum L-50 life of 100,000 hours when rated
at the maximum operating speed. The beltguard shall be a two-piece
15720H-8 11/2017
1976
CONTRACT DEL-260H
split design for easy removal and convenient maintenance and

service.
m. The unit manufacturer shall provide a flexible connection between
the fan and the unit discharge. Thrust arrestors shall be provided on
fan assemblies as required.
n. The discharge sections shall be complete with aerodynamically
designed framed discharge openings in order to reduce overall
system static pressures and the associated operating costs. Openings
shall conform to the size and configuration of the ductwork.
6. Dampers
a. Dampers shall be low leakage, opposed blade design. Leakage rate
shall not exceed 3 CFM per square foot at 4" static pressure and
2000 FPM.
b. Damper frames shall be made of extruded aluminum. Damper
blades shall be extruded aluminum airfoil shape for extra strength to
withstand high velocities and static pressures. Dampers shall be
provided with stainless steel blade end seals and neoprene blade
edge seals to keep leakage to a minimum.
7. Service Lights and Outlets:
a. Units shall be provided with a lighting system. Lighting system
shall include NEMA 4X vaportight incandescent marine type light
fixtures in each section and a centrally located NEMA 4X switch
located on the unit exterior.
b. Units shall be provided with service outlets. Service outlets shall
include two (2) 115V NEMA 4X ground-fault-circuit-interrupter
(GFCI) type centrally located on the unit exterior.
c. Lighting and service outlets shall be independently wired from a
dedicated 120-volt circuit provided to the unit. A warning label
shall be provided to indicate that the service outlets and lights are
“live” with the unit’s main disconnect switch in the OFF position.
D. Control Panel:
1. Units shall be factory wired and tested, and shall be UL certified. Prewired
unit shall bear an approved label with all the necessary identification marks,
electrical data, and any necessary cautions as required by the National
Electrical Code.
2. Local unit-mounted NEMA 4X control panel.
3. All wiring inside the unit shall be type THHN. All wiring located inside
the air stream shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit.
4. Panels shall be provided with automatically controlled closed loop
ventilation fans or closed loop air conditioners with filtered air louvers if
15720H-9 11/2017
1977
CONTRACT DEL-260H
required to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum

operating temperature rating of the components inside the enclosure.
5. Provide a system of motor controls, including all necessary terminal blocks,
starters, motor circuit protector, motor contactors, motor overload
protection, grounding lugs, control transformers, auxiliary contactors and
terminals for the connection of external control devices or relays.
6. Unit shall be completely factory wired with the necessary operating safety
controls, heating system controls, contactors and terminal blocks for power
and control wiring.
7. Control voltage shall be 120 voltage alternating current (VAC) maximum.
8. Unit shall be provided with a terminal block for field installation of controls.
Isolation relays shall be factory installed. All controllable functions and
devices including but not limited to those listed below shall be factory wired
to the terminal block for control and status via the building Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) system:
a. Fan start.
b. Fan stop.
c. Fan status (energized or de-energized).
d. Fan motor overload.
e. Face and bypass damper control (modulating).
f. Intake damper control (two position).
g. Damper status (opened, closed)
h. Dirty filter.
9. All wiring shall be color-coded.
10. A circuit diagram of the approved electrical drawing shall be provided with
the unit.
11. All electrical components shall bear the UL label.
12. All internal wiring shall be tagged and labeled.
13. Unit shall be designed for two-point power connection for the following:
a. Power for the unit.
b. Power for the lighting and service outlets.
All necessary power transformers shall be factory provided and installed.
2.02 MOTORS
A. Motors shall be of the totally enclosed fan cooled type.
15720H-10 11/2017
1978
CONTRACT DEL-260H
B. All motors shall be of the high premium energy efficient type. Motors rated greater
than 1,000 watts shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 90-75 requirements for a power
factor not less than 95 percent.
C. Motors shall be selected so that the maximum break horsepower required at any
point on the performance curve does not exceed the nominal motor horsepower;
operation in the service factor is not acceptable. Motors shall be mounted
externally on an adjustable base.
D. The drive shall be of the static-resistant, V-belt type with adjustable sheave.
E. For motors less than or equal to 10 Hp, the belts shall be selected for 120 percent
of the rated load at design conditions. For motors greater than 10 Hp the belts shall
be selected for 150 percent of the rated load at design conditions.
F. A removable belt guard with openings to allow for tachometer readings at both
drive and fan shafts shall be provided.
G. Motors shall comply with the requirements of Detailed Specification 16221 -
Electric Motors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Heating and ventilation units shall be installed, connected and placed in satisfactory
working order in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and details,
approved Shop Drawings, and the Contract Drawings.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each unit of equipment shall be identified with the equipment item numbers given
on the Contract Drawings. A corrosion-resistant tag or nameplate, securely affixed
in a conspicuous place on each unit shall give the equipment item number,
manufacturer's name or trademark and such other information as the manufacturer
may consider necessary, or as specified, to complete identification.
3.03 TESTING
A. Preliminary and final field tests shall be performed for all equipment provided
under this Specification, as specified in Article 13 of the General Conditions and
Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
B. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of this Contract.
C. Motor tests in accordance with Detailed Specification 16221 - Electric Motors.
Field tests shall be performed in accordance with General Specification 15951 -
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
3.04 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's technical
representative who shall adequately supervise the installation and testing of all
15720H-11 11/2017
1979
CONTRACT DEL-260H
equipment furnished under this Contract. The services of the manufacturer's

representative shall be provided as described below:
1. First visit shall be for instructing the Contractor in the proper equipment
installation, and assisting in installing equipment. Minimum number of
hours on site: 8 hours.
2. Second visit shall be for checking completed installation, start-up of system;
and performing field testing. Minimum number of hours on site: 8 hours.
B. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation
beyond the specified period shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The
manufacturer's representative shall sign in and out the office of the Resident
representative on each day he is at the project.
C. Training
1. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide training for City personnel
in accordance with the requirements of this Contract. The Contractor shall
include in his request from the manufacturer, a certification that the
manufacturer has been advised of the stringent requirements for training,
and that the costs associated with said training submittals and training have
been included in the manufacturer’s pricing.
END OF SECTION
15720H-12 11/2017
1980
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15761H – HEATERS, ELECTRIC
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15761H
Heaters, Electric
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15761H – Heaters, Electric replaces General Specifi-
cation 15761 – Heaters, Electric in its entirety. All Work for this Section shall fully
conform to the requirements specified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
shown, specified and required to furnish and install all electric heaters complete
with auxiliary equipment and accessories as shown, specified and/or required for
proper operation.
B. Schedule: Units shall be furnished in accordance with the equipment data schedules
as shown on the Contract Drawings.
C. The following index of this Section is presented for convenience:
Article Title Page

15761-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................2
1.07 SPARE PARTS......................................................................................3
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................3
2.01 UNIT HEATERS ...................................................................................3
2.02 CONTROL ACCESSORIES .................................................................4
PART 3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................5
3.01 INSPECTION ........................................................................................5
3.02 FIELD TESTING...................................................................................5
3.03 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................5
3.04 CLEANING ...........................................................................................5
3.05 ADJUSTMENTS ...................................................................................5
15761H-1 11/2017
1981
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. General requirements of
this Contract shall supersede the Standards in case of conflict:
1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA)
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE)
3. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA)
B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and material specifications for the approval
of the Engineer. Submittals shall include, but not be limited, to the following:
1. Dimensions.
2. Capacities.
3. Materials of construction.
4. Finishes, standard and custom color chart for Engineer's approval.
5. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, Specifications and engineering data.
6. Documentation from the factory substantiating painting systems in
accordance with the Specifications. Include types applied and dry film
thicknesses.
B. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals:
1. The Contractor shall submit O&M manuals in accordance with the
procedures and requirements of this Contract.
2. Two copies of a preliminary O&M manual shall be included in the Shop
Drawings submittal. Without inclusion of these manuals, the submittal will
be considered incomplete and will be returned without review.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
B. Contractor’s Qualifications:
15761H-2 11/2017
1982
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Contractor shall have at least 5 years’ experience in the installation of the

Work specified. The Contractor shall only use workers for the Work with
the specific skills and experience in this type of Work.
performance and other requirements for the installation of equipment
specified herein.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of
regulatory agencies below and others having jurisdiction.
1. Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated (UL).
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
3. National Electrical Code (NEC).
a. New York City Building Code.
b. Fire Code of New York State.
c. Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State.
D. UL Listing: All heaters and appurtenances shall be UL listed.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide one quart of touch-up paint for each type of heater.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 UNIT HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
a. Chromalox, Pittsburgh, PA - Type LUH.
b. Industrial Engineering and Equipment Company (INDEECO), St.
Louis, MO - Series IUH.
B. Details or Construction:
1. Casing:
a. Material: Minimum 18-gauge steel.
b. Finish: Phosphate undercoated and finished with polyester powder
coat.
2. Louvers: Individually adjustable louvers for up, down and perpendicular
air flow.
15761H-3 11/2017
1983
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3. Fintube Heating Elements: Corrosion resistant steel fins brazed to a tubular

element.
4. Fan Motor:
a. Enclosure: Totally-enclosed-fan-cooled.
b. Bearings: Permanently lubricated.
c. Overload Protection: Integral thermal cutout.
5. Fans:
a. Type: Broad blade, axial flow.
b. Construction: Aluminum.
c. Dynamically balanced.
d. Mounting: Resilient mounted.
6. Features:
a. Heaters drawing more than 48 amps shall have sub-divided circuits
with individual fuse protection.
b. Integral 120 volt control transformer.
c. Heavy duty magnetic contactors.
d. Thermal cutout with automatic reset.
e. Universal wall swivel bracket.
7. Capacity as shown on the equipment data schedules in the Contract Draw-
ings.
2.02 CONTROL ACCESSORIES

A. Space Thermostat:
1. Application: For use with corrosive and non-corrosive type unit heaters
specified above.
2. Sealed Noryl case.
3. Shielded nickel-plated sensing bulb attached directly to thermostat enclo-
sure.
4. Thermostat Setpoint Range: 40°F to 100°F.
5. Adjustable setpoints through dial on face on thermostat.
6. 120 Vac.
7. Contacts shall have proper ampere rating for intended use.
8. Rating: NEMA 4X.
9. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following
15761H-4 11/2017
1984
CONTRACT DEL-260H
a. Chromalox, Pittsburgh, PA - Model WCRT-100.

b. PECO, Clackamas, OR, T115.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect units for damage prior to installation and correct as necessary.
3.02 FIELD TESTING
A. Preliminary and final field tests shall be performed for all equipment provided un-
der this Specification, as specified in Article 13 of the General Conditions and De-
tailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Unit heaters shall be installed, connected and placed in satisfactory working order
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and details, and the Contract
Drawings.
B. Each unit of equipment shall be identified with the equipment item numbers given
on the Contract Drawings. A corrosion resistant tag or nameplate, securely affixed
in a conspicuous place on each unit shall give the equipment item number,
manufacturer’s name or trademark and such other information as the manufacturer
may consider necessary, or as specified, to complete identification.
C. Install cabinets level and plumb.
D. Install units in accordance with details on the Contract Drawings and approved
Shop Drawings.
E. Coordinate with ceiling grid for ceiling recessed units installation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean tar, cement or other dirt from units.
B. Remove debris and other waste material resulting from installation.
3.05 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of Detailed Specification 15951 - Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing.
B. Set air deflectors for proper air delivery.
C. Check room thermostat and wiring connections to heater.
END OF SECTION
15761H-5 11/2017
1985
CONTRACT DEL-260H
15761H-6 11/2017
1986
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15810H – DUCTWORK AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15810H
Ductwork and Duct Accessories
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15810H – Ductwork and Duct Accessories replaces
General Specification 15810 – Ductwork and Duct Accessories in its entirety. All
PART 1 GENERAL
shown, specified and required to furnish and install all ductwork complete with
auxiliary equipment and accessories as shown, specified and/or required for proper
operation.
B. The following index of this Section is presented for convenience:
Article Title Page

15810-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................3
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................4
2.01 MATERIALS .........................................................................................4
2.02 METAL DUCTWORK..........................................................................4
2.03 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES .............................................................5
2.04 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS ........................................8
PART 3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................9
3.01 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................9
3.02 FIELD TESTING.................................................................................12
3.03 ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................12
3.04 BALANCING ......................................................................................12
3.05 CLEANING .........................................................................................12
3.06 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE .........................12

A. General Specification 13862 - Non-Metallic Ductwork.
B. General Specification 15060 - Hangers and Supports.
15810H-1 11/2017
1987
CONTRACT DEL-260H
C. Detail Specification 15950 - HVAC Monitoring and Control System.

D. Detailed Specification 15951 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. General requirements of
this Contract shall supersede the standards in case of conflict:
Engineers (ASHRAE).
2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA).
a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
b. Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
3. ASTM A 774 - As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel
Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures.
4. ASTM A 778 - Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubular Products.
5. NFPA 91 - Blowers and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor
Removal or Conveying.
6. UL 555 - Fire Dampers.
7. UL 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
8. UL 214 - Tests for Flame Propagation of Fabrics and Films.
9. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation
Systems.
B. Contractor shall provide certification that all stainless steel accessories including
screws, hangers, supports, etc. for stainless steel are Type 316 stainless steel.
C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements where required prior to installation
D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the
15810H-2 11/2017
1988
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.05 SUBMITTALS
of the Engineer. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to:
1. 1/4-inch scale duct layouts.
2. Dimensions.
3. Details of construction.
4. Details of installation, hanger details and spacing.
5. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications and Engineering data.
6. Registers, grilles and diffusers.
7. Fire Dampers (UL Listed):
a. Closing mechanisms.
b. Fusible link operating temperature.
c. Installation details.
d. Access Doors.
8. Flexible connections.
9. Other technical data related to the specified material and equipment as
requested by Engineer.
10. Duct sealants.
11. Air outlet schedule indicating room name and location of each outlet. Cross
reference Contract designation and manufacturer's model number or name.
B. Test Reports: Submit the following test reports for approval where required.
1. UL Label, Fire Dampers.
2. Volume Damper leakage tests from an AMCA approved testing laboratory.

A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Contractor shall have at least 5 years' experience in the installation of the
Work specified. He shall employ only tradesmen with specific skills and
experience in this type of Work.
specified herein.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of
1. Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated (UL)
15810H-3 11/2017
1989
CONTRACT DEL-260H

3. National Electrical Code.
4. Local and State Building Codes and Ordinances:
a. New York City Building Code.
5. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits, fees and
inspections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Metal Ductwork:
1. Galvanized Steel (G90 Coating): Only where specified herein or indicated
on Contract Drawings.
a. Air devices for galvanized ductwork shall be aluminum.
2.02 METAL DUCTWORK

A. General:
1. All Work shall be constructed and installed properly in accordance with the
recommendations given in the latest edition of the Sheet Metal & Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct
Construction Standards and Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction
Standards. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the
Schedule of Duct Construction Standards listed on the last page of this
section. The transverse duct connections shall be bolted and gasketed
connections made with mechanical connectors as manufactured by:
a. Duct Mate Industries, Charleroi, PA, Model 35.
2. Gasket shall be butyl and cleats shall be galvanized steel.
3. All ducts shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated on the
Contract Drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly
finished joints, and shall not be decreased at any point to avoid obstructions.
No piping, conduit or structural work shall be installed in or through any
ductwork. All ductwork shall be run as close as possible to structural
members, walls and ceilings. Ductwork shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings, subject to such modifications as may be necessary to suit field
conditions to clear any obstruction or conflicts with other equipment.
15810H-4 11/2017
1990
CONTRACT DEL-260H
4. Where existing walls, floors or roofs must be penetrated, Contractor shall

neatly cut the required openings and patch the existing work to provide a
neat and finished appearance.
5. Galvanized steel curbs to prevent water leakage shall be provided around
all floor openings. Where concrete curbs are not indicated on the Contract
Drawings, provide curbs fabricated of 4" x 4" x 1/4" thick angles with
welded corners. The curb shall be set in a mastic compound and securely
fastened to the floor to provide a watertight installation. Curbs associated
with stainless steel ductwork shall be fabricated of Type 316 stainless steel.
2.03 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Hangers and Supports:
1. All ductwork shall be securely hung and anchored to the building structure.
Unless otherwise shown or specified, hangers and stiffeners for ducts shall
conform to the recommendations given in the SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction standards and SMACNA seismic restraint manual. Ducts
shall be supported on trapeze hangers with angles or rods. Use of strap
hangers and straps is prohibited.
2. All ductwork shall be supported from trapeze type hangers. Hanger rods
shall be minimum 3/8 inch for all ducts with half perimeter up to 72 inches,
and ½ inch diameter for all ducts with half perimeter larger than 72 inches.
A pair of rods shall be provided at each duct support point. Maximum
hanger spacing shall be 8 feet for ducts with half perimeter up to 72 inches
and 6 feet for ducts with half perimeter larger than 72 inches.
3. All hangers, rods, supports, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and appurtenances
shall be galvanized steel.
4. Hanger construction and installation shall conform to SMACNA Standards,
except as specified. No sheet metal duct hangers or straps will be allowed.
5. Support shall be furnished at each fitting.
6. Conform to all requirements of General Specification 15060 - Hangers and
Supports.
B. Sleeves: Where ductwork passes through masonry walls, partitions or floors
provide minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel Caulk airtight with fire resistant
sealant between sleeve and ductwork.
C. Volume Dampers (Rectangular Ductwork):
1. Galvanized Steel Ductwork:
a. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following:
1) Ruskin, Grandview, MO - Model CD60
2) American Warming and Ventilating, Holland, OH
15810H-5 11/2017
1991
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3) Arrow Louvers and Dampers, Wyalusing, PA

4) Louvers and Dampers, Wyalusing, PA
b. Reference: AMCA licensed.
c. Material: Galvanized steel.
d. Frame: 16 gauge hat channel.
e. Blades: Airfoil shape, double skin equivalent to 16 gauge, opposed
blades.
f. Linkage: Concealed in frame outside the air stream.
g. Axles: ½ - inch hex galvanized steel.
h. Bearings: Stainless steel sleeve.
i. Seals:
1) Jamb: Flexible metal compressible type.
j. Performance (based on 48-inch damper width):
1) Maximum System Pressure: 6.2-inches water gauge (wg)
2) Maximum Velocity: 4000 FPM
3) Leakage: 2 cfm per square foot at 1-inch wg.
4) Certification: Manufacturer shall provide certified test data.
k. Provide outside handle, quadrant with 2-inch standoff and approved
position indicator with locking device.
D. Motorized Dampers:
1. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2. Motorized dampers shall be as specified above for rectangular dampers
except that a motorized actuator shall be provided in lieu of a hand operator.
3. Motorized actuators shall be provided in accordance with Detailed
Specification Section 15950 – HVAC Monitoring and Control System.
4. Motorized dampers shall be furnished complete with all accessories as
required for proper operation.
E. Fire Dampers (Dynamic Type):
1. Fire Dampers:
a. Fusible Link Fire dampers shall be installed where indicated on the
Contract Drawings and where required by local codes. Fire dampers
shall be of the multi-blade designed for use with dynamic systems.
Fire dampers shall be suitable for installation in the vertical or
horizontal position and out of the wall or floor. The dampers shall
15810H-6 11/2017
1992
CONTRACT DEL-260H
conform to all requirements of the latest edition of the National Fire

Code NFPA 90A and shall have a 1-1/2 hour standard fire protection
rating in accordance with UL555, "Standard for Fire Dampers." Fire
dampers installed in Type 316 stainless steel, aluminum, and
fiberglass ductwork shall be fabricated of Type 316 stainless. Fire
dampers installed in galvanized steel ductwork shall be fabricated
of galvanized steel. All fusible links shall be UL rated at 165°F.
b. Rectangular fire dampers mounted in floors shall Ruskin Model
DFD35/OW, Grandview, MO, or approved equal.
c. Rectangular fire dampers mounted in walls shall be Ruskin Model
DIBD2, Grandview, MO, or approved equal.
d. Provide twelve (12) spare fusible links.
2. Reference: NFPA 90A, UL 555, SMACNA and local building codes.
3. Label:
a. All fire dampers shall have UL Label attached for out of wall or
floor mounting arrangement.
b. Label shall have a fire rating of minimum 1-1/2 hours for fire
separations (walls, floors and partitions) rated at 2 hours.
c. All fire dampers shall be dynamic.
d. Each fire damper proposed shall be rated to close against maximum
design airflow at its installed against 4 in. w.g. maximum pressure
across the closed damper.
4. Factory installed thermally insulated sleeve.
5. Provide firestopping at fire separations where fire dampers are installed.
6. Provide an access door in duct at each fire damper located in duct.
F. Sheet Metal Safing: Provide aluminum sheet metal safing to close off and seal
airtight all unused areas behind louvers. Insulation shall be 2 inch thick fiberglass,
permanently attached to sheet metal.
G. Access Doors:
1. Reference: SMACNA Standards.
2. Type: Gasketed cam lock covers.
3. Materials: Same as duct.
4. Unless otherwise specified access doors shall be:
a. 12-by-6 inches for ducts sizes 12-inches and smaller.
b. 12-by-12-inches for ducts size 14-inches.
c. 21-by-14-inches for ducts between 14 and 36 inches.
15810H-7 11/2017
1993
CONTRACT DEL-260H
d. 25-by-17 inches for ducts between 36 and 60 inches.

e. Two (2) 25-by-17 inch doors for ducts larger than 61 inches.
5. Access doors for fire dampers shall be stenciled "FIRE DAMPER
ACCESS" with minimum ½-inch high letters.
H. Flexible Connections:
1. Reference: SMACNA Standards for pressure classification of 3 inches
water gage.
2. Material (unless otherwise specified):
a. Minimum 1/16-inch thick, 6-inch wide reinforced butyl or EPDM
sheeting.
b. 16 gauge, 3-inch wide galvanized steel strip for galvanized steel
ductwork. Type 316 stainless steel for stainless steel ductwork.
c. 0.080 thick 3-inch wide aluminum strip for aluminum ductwork.
I. Turning Vanes:
1. Reference: SMACNA.
2. Construction: Same Material as ductwork.
3. Vanes: Double thickness.
J. Hardware:
1. All fastening devices used for aluminum, stainless steel, and FRP ductwork
shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
2. All gasketing material shall be butyl.
K. Bird Screens and Frames: Bird screens shall conform to ASTM E 437, Type I, Class
1, 2 by 2 mesh, 0.031 inch diameter wire. Frames shall be removable type.
Construction shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
2.04 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

A. Manufacturer: Provide equipment as manufactured by one of the following:
1. AJ Manufacturing Company, Kansas City, MO.
2. Titus, Piano, TX.
3. Anemostat, Carson, CA.
B. General:
1. Performance shall be certified according to ASHRAE 70. Inlets and outlets
shall be sound rated and certified according to ASHRAE 70.
C. Exhaust grilles shall be manufactured by:
15810H-8 11/2017
1994
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. AJ Manufacturing Co. Model SS550H, Kansas City, MO.

Registers shall be complete with fixed vertical face bars, set straight exhaust grilles
shall be of Type 316 stainless steel construction.
D. Supply Air Drum Louvers:
Supply air drum louvers shall have a felt seal around the rotating drum to
prevent leakage. The louver shall be adjustable to direct the air stream at
any angle up to 30 degree from the louver centerline either by rotating the
drum or by adjusting the position of the pivoted vanes. Drum louvers shall
be:
1. Krueger Series DPL, Richardson, TX.
Materials:
a. Type 316 stainless steel construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Turning vanes shall be installed in all miter elbows to permit air to make the abrupt
turns with a minimum of turbulence. The turning vanes shall be quiet and free from
vibration when the system is in operation. Turning vanes shall be single thickness
type. Vanes shall be installed in all short radius elbows in accordance with
SMACNA standards and Industrial Duct Construction standards. Manual volume
dampers larger than 11" in any dimension shall be opposed blade type. The damper
blades shall be operated by a lockable dial regulator and may be set in any position.
The dial regulators shall be marked so that the "open" and "shut" positions are
clearly identified. The dial regulators on insulated ductwork shall be mounted on
an elevated platform which will finish flush with the surface of the insulation.
Manual volume dampers shall be located at accessible points and wherever possible
some distance from a duct transition or fitting. The Contractor shall take care that
sheet metal fasteners do not protrude into the duct and interfere with damper
operation when securing it to ductwork. Dampers shall be provided in each branch
duct take off and in both ducts downstream of each trunk duct split. Manual volume
dampers material of construction shall be the same as the ductwork.
B. Splitter type dampers shall not be installed.
C. Duct access doors shall be provided within working distance of, and on the fusible
link side of all fire dampers, adjacent to volume dampers, on the linkage side of
automatic dampers and at all other apparatus requiring service or inspection in the
duct system. The doors shall be rigid and airtight, and provided with neoprene
gaskets, hinges and sash locks. Whenever space requirements are such that a
15810H-9 11/2017
1995
CONTRACT DEL-260H
hinged access door is impractical, a screw fastened lift-out door shall be provided
instead.
D. Access doors in finished work such as walls, plaster, wood paneling and in
suspended ceilings which do not have removable panels, shall be provided for all
concealed valves, controls, test openings, duct access doors, and at all other
locations requiring service, inspection or adjustment of a concealed item. The
Contractor shall submit details of construction and material to the Engineer for
review. In general, the access doors shall match the appearance of the finished
work in which they are installed and shall be of sufficient size to permit service,
inspection or adjustment of the concealed item.
E. Flexible connections for preventing the transmission of vibrations through the
ductwork to the structure shall be installed between the ductwork and all air moving
equipment and at the building joints. Flexible connections shall be neoprene-
impregnated fabric collars with cemented seams fastened with straps and bolts of
the same material as the ductwork. Flexible connections shall not be painted or
used to correct misalignment.
F. The fire damper shall be secured to a stainless steel collar with ¼" diameter stainless
steel nuts and bolts with maximum spacing of 12 inches on center and a minimum
of two fastenings per side beginning two inches from the corners of the collar. The
collars shall be at least the same gauge as the ductwork to which it is attached,
except that regardless of the duct gauge, collars shall not be lighter than 24 gauge
galvanized steel.
G. Retaining angles shall be installed on four sides of the collar and on both sides of
the protected opening with a minimum of one inch overlap on the wall or floor.
The galvanized steel angles shall be a minimum of 1½" x 1½" x 1/8" and shall be
fastened to the collar only. In no case shall angles be fastened to the wall or floor.
H. The angles shall be fastened to the collar with ¼" diameter stainless steel nuts and
bolts with a maximum spacing of 6 inches on center and a minimum of two
fastenings per side beginning two inches from the corners of the collar. Where gas
tight seals are required, the angles shall be fastened to the collar with a continuous
weld and a sealant shall be installed between the angle and the wall or floor.
Collars, angles and hardware used with stainless steel fire dampers shall be Type
316 stainless steel. Clearance for expansion is required between the collar and the
opening on the top and on each vertical side. The clearance shall be 1/8 inch per
lineal foot of sleeve with clearance on the sides distributed equally and all vertical
clearance on the top. The retaining angles shall be increased in size to provide the
minimum overlap of one inch on the wall or floor. The ductwork shall be connected
to the collar on each side of the wall or floor with a breakaway connection on all
four sides of the collar. The distance from the wall or floor to the breakaway
connection shall not exceed 6 inches.
I. Contractor shall furnish and install sleeves for registers, grilles, and dampers
mounted in the masonry, concrete plenums or shafts. Sleeves shall be 16 gage
galvanized steel.
15810H-10 11/2017
1996
CONTRACT DEL-260H
J. After the installation is completed, the Contractor shall seal all joints air tight.
Sealants and tape shall have a flame spread not greater than 25 and a smoke
developed rating of not over 50.
K. Safing shall be provided to seal off remaining portions of shafts and louvers which
are not covered by the plenums or equipment attached to the shaft or louver. Safing
shall consist of a two inch thick rigid fiberglass board type insulation sandwiched
between two 16 gauge minimum sheets. Insulation shall be secured to the sheets
with adhesive. All edges of the panels shall be provided with a 16 gauge minimum
channel secured in place with sheet metal screws six inches on centers. Insulated
sandwich panels shall be removable type with maximum space of 18 inches, and
supported on 3 x 3 x ¼" angle. Provide intermediate supports. The sheets, channels
and hardware used for the safing shall be 316 stainless steel. The Contractor shall
submit details of construction to the Engineer for review.
L. All ductwork shall conform accurately to the dimensions shown, the ducts shall be
straight and smooth inside with joints neatly finished; ductwork shall be installed
so as to preclude the possibility of vibration under all operating conditions.
M. Seal all joints as per SMACNA Standards.
N. Elbows shall have a minimum centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the width of the duct.
Turning vanes shall be provided at all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be single
wall and shall be quiet and free from vibration when the system is in operation.
O. Provide flexible connections at inlet and discharge of air handling equipment.
P. Provide volume dampers where indicated on the Contract Drawings and as required
to facilitate accurate volume control. The duct of the damper shall be reinforced to
prevent vibration. Volume dampers specified with air devices shall be installed in
addition to those shown on the Contract Drawings.
Q. Fire dampers shall be provided and installed where indicated on the Contract
Drawings and where required by UL and authorities having jurisdiction, and shall
be approved by local building codes and in accordance with the requirements of the
NFPA.
R. Provide access doors for all dampers for inspection and maintenance.
S. Install all ductwork and accessories to provide a system free from buckling,
warping, breathing or vibration.
T. All expansion joints in ducts at building expansion joints shall be suitably supported
at each end by support guides within 12 inches of joint.
U. All ducts at flexible connections with air handling equipment, and fans shall be
supported at free end within 12 inches of flexible connection.
V. Provisions shall be made for supporting all ductwork, dampers, and other ductwork
accessories, where necessary.
W. Coordinate all air outlets for compatibility with ceiling system.
15810H-11 11/2017
1997
CONTRACT DEL-260H
X. All ductwork shall arrive on Site fully fabricated, not in two halves for field
fabricated.
3.02 FIELD TESTING

3.03 ADJUSTMENT
A. Set volume control devices for approximate positions in preparation for final testing
and balancing.
B. Install fusible links in fire dampers and verify that dampers are in open position.
C. Start fan system and check for excessive leaks and vibration and correct.
3.04 BALANCING
A. Systems shall be completely tested, adjusted and balanced by a qualified engineer.
A complete balancing procedure shall be submitted for approval. All equipment
and connections required to balance the systems shall be provided.
B. All duct systems shall be balanced as specified in General Specification 15951 -
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove all loose materials and obstructions from interior of ducts.
B. Remove debris and waste materials resulting from installation.
3.06 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE

A. Ductwork shall be constructed 2 gauges heavier than required for the pressure
classification listed below.
B. Schedule of Metal Duct Construction Standards:
Schedule of Duct Construction Standards

Construction
Service Pressure Classification Standards
All ductwork on fan SMACNA HVAC Duct
2" W.G. POS.
discharge side Construction Standards
All ductwork on fan SMACNA HVAC Duct
2" W.G. NEG.
suction side Construction Standards
15810H-12 11/2017
1998
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Notes:
a. All accessories, including but not limited to, turning vanes, air
turning devices, manual volume dampers, motor operated control
dampers, fire dampers, access doors, supports, angles, clamps,
hangers and hardware, shall be suitable for the pressure
classification given above.
C. Ductwork Material Schedule:
1. As shown on the Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
15810H-13 11/2017
1999
CONTRACT DEL-260H
15810H-14 11/2017
2000
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15815H – DUCT INSULATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15815H
DUCT INSULATION
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15815H - Duct Insulation replaces General

Specification 15815 – Duct Insulation in its entirety. All Work for this Section
PART 1 GENERAL
shown, specified and required to furnish and install all duct insulation complete
with auxiliary equipment and accessories as shown, specified and/or required for
proper operation.
Article Title Page

15815-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................1
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................2
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS ...............................................................................4
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................4
2.01 MATERIALS .........................................................................................4
PART 3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................5
3.01 INSPECTION ........................................................................................5
3.02 PREPARATION ....................................................................................5
3.03 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................5
3.04 CLEANING ...........................................................................................5
3.05 SCHEDULES ........................................................................................5
A. General Specification 09900 - Painting
B. General Specification 15076 - Piping and Equipment Identification
1.03 PAYMENT
15815H-1 11/2017
2001
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.04 REFERENCES
the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. General Requirements of
this Contract shall supersede the standards in case of conflict:
Engineers (ASHRAE)
2. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
3. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
4. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
5. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems
6. ASTM C 449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal
Insulating and Finishing Cement
7. ASTM C 534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
8. ASTM C 547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
9. ASTM C 552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
10. ASTM C 553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
11. ASTM C 612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation
12. ASTM C 647 - Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating
Finishes for Thermal Insulation
13. ASTM C 916 - Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation
14. ASTM C 920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants
15. ASTM C 1126 - Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid
Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements where required prior to installation
C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the
1.05 SUBMITTALS
of the Engineer. Submittals shall include, but not be limited, to:
15815H-2 11/2017
2002
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval manufacturer's catalog literature,

specifications and illustrations with the following information:
a. Thermal properties
b. Physical properties
c. Fire hazard ratings
d. Facing information
e. Installation instructions
f. Jointing recommendations for butt joints and longitudinal seams
A. Contractor's Qualifications:
1. Contractor shall have at least 5 years' experience in the installation of the
Work specified. He shall employ only tradesmen with specific skills and
experience in this type of Work.
specified herein.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of
1. Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated (UL).
a. New York City Building Code
c. Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State.
C. General: Insulation systems including covering, mastics, adhesives, sealers and
facings shall have the following Fire Hazard Classifications in accordance with
ASTM E 84:
1. Flame spread, 25 maximum.
2. Smoke developed, 50 maximum.
D. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests and inspections at factory.
1. Flame Spread
2. Smoke Developed
E. Manufacturer's Markings:
15815H-3 11/2017
2003
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Every package or standard container of covering, adhesive and coating

delivered to the work site for use shall be stamped or labeled with
manufacturer's name.
2. Exposed side of insulation shall be legibly labeled by the manufacturer to
show thickness, type and manufacturer.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Sequencing: Obtain the Engineer's approval of insulation, adhesives, coatings and
method of installation before installing any insulation.
B. All duct leaks shall be sealed prior to installation of external insulation to prevent
billowing and damage to insulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: Provide insulation of one of the following:
1. Owens Corning, Toledo, OH.
2. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA.
3. Schuller International, Inc. (Johns-Manville), Denver, CO.
B. Exposed Ductwork Insulation (Rigid): All exposed ductwork as listed under
Paragraph 3.05 - Schedules, shall be insulated with glass fiber board having a
density of not less than 3.0 lbs./cu.ft., and a thermal conductivity of not more than
0.23 BTU-inch/hour square feet °F at 75°F mean temperature. The insulation shall
be:
1. Johns-Manville No. 814 Spin.
2. Certain Teed Corporation Industrial Board
C. The insulation shall be impaled over pins welded to the duct surface on 12" centers.
The pins shall be coated with vapor barrier adhesive, and the insulation shall then
be secured with caps over the pins. All joints and breaks in the vapor barrier shall
be sealed with 3" wide strips of the vapor barrier facing. All insulation shall be
reinforced with corner bead. The facing shall be AP consisting of white kraft paper
bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with fiberglass yarn.
D. Adhesives and Accessories:
1. Lagging Adhesive: Lagging adhesives shall be nonflammable and fire-
resistant and shall have flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 25/50
when measured in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Contact Adhesive: Adhesive may be dispersed in a nonhalogenated organic
solvent with a low flash point (flash pint less than minus 25°F when tested
15815H-4 11/2017
2004
CONTRACT DEL-260H
in accordance with ASM D 3278) or dispersed in a nonflammable organic

solvent which shall not have a fire point below 200°F. The adhesive shall
be nonflammable and fire resistant.
3. Caulking: Caulking shall be in accordance with ASTM C 920.
4. Corner Angles: Nominal 0.016 inch type 316 stainless steel 1 x 1 inch with
factory applied kraft backing and adhesive.
5. Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape: Fibrous glass cloth and glass tape shall
have flame spread and smoke developed ratings of no greater than 25/50
when measured in accordance with ASTM E 84.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Ensure that all surfaces are clean and dry before applying insulation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that ductwork has been inspected and released for application of insulation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation so as to make surfaces smooth, even and substantially flush with
adjacent duct insulation.
B. Follow manufacturer's application instructions for all materials used.
C. Thickness of rigid insulation shall be greater than the seams or angles of ductwork
to which it is applied.
D. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings.
E. Insulation shall terminate at fire dampers and flexible connections.
F. Field Painting shall comply with the requirements of Detailed Specification 09900
- Painting.
G. Identification markers and labels shall be in conformance with Detailed
Specification 15076 - Piping and Equipment Identification.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove all debris, waste materials and loose foreign matter resulting from
installation.
3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Thermal Insulation - Rigid:
1. All ductwork connected to HV-1 including the outside air intake plenum as
2. All ductwork connected to SF-1 including the outside air intake plenum as
15815H-5 11/2017
2005
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3. All ductwork connect to EF-3 including the exhaust plenum as shown on

B. Insulation Thickness: All ductwork insulation shall be 2 inches thick.
END OF SECTION
15815H-6 11/2017
2006
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15830H - FANS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15830H
Fans
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15830H - Fans replaces General Specification 15830 –
Fans in its entirety. All Work for this Section shall fully conform to the
requirements specified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals to
furnish and install all fans in accordance with the requirements specified herein as
shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein.
B. The equipment shall be furnished complete with all accessories, special tools, spare
parts, base attachments, mountings, anchor bolts and other appurtenances as
specified or as may be required for a satisfactory installation.
C. All fans shall be furnished in accordance with the schedule shown on the Contract
Drawings.
D. The following index of this Section is presented for convenience:
Article Title Page

15830-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.03 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.04 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.05 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................2
1.07 SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLIES .........................................................3
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................4
2.01 FANS - CONDITION OF SERVICE AND DESIGN DATA...............4
2.02 FIBERGLASS VANEAXIAL FANS ....................................................5
2.03 STEEL VANEAXIAL FANS ................................................................6
2.04 WALL PROPELLER FANS .................................................................7
PART 3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................8
3.01 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................8
3.02 IDENTIFICATION................................................................................8
3.03 TESTING ...............................................................................................8
3.04 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE .......................................8
15830H-1 11/2017
2007
CONTRACT DEL-260H

B. Detailed Specification 16221 - Electric Motors
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Equipment shall comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except as otherwise shown or specified.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
National Electric Code (NEC)
Applicable Federal, State and local laws and/or ordinances
B. Where conflict arises between the local codes and the requirements of the National
Electrical Code, The National Fire Code, NEMA, ASTM, etc., the more stringent
requirements shall prevail.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include, but not be limited, to the following:
1. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals
2. Final Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals
3. Spare Parts List
4. Special Tools List
5. Reports of Certified Shop Tests
6. AMCA Approval for Fan Ratings
The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings for the approval of the Engineer. Shop
Drawings shall include but not be limited to:
a. Equipment specifications and data sheets identifying all materials
b. Complete assembly, layout, installation and foundation drawings
15830H-2 11/2017
2008
CONTRACT DEL-260H
c. Fan performance curve indicating the operating point.

d. Details of corrosion resistance coating.
e. Motor nameplate data as specified in General Specification 16221 -
Electric Motors.
f. Detailed Specifications and data sheets for all accessories such as
dampers, damper operators disconnect switches, vibration isolators
etc.
g. Example equipment nameplate data sheet.
h. Interconnecting wiring diagrams.
i. List of recommended lubricants.
B. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals
The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals in
accordance with the procedures and requirements of this Contract. Two copies of a
preliminary O&M manual shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal.
Without inclusion of these manuals, the submittal will be considered incomplete
and will be returned without review.
C. Lubricants: The manufacturer shall submit a list with a minimum of four (4)
manufacturers’ standard lubricants which may be used interchangeably for each
type of lubricant required. .
A. The equipment covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard
equipment of proven performance from reputable manufacturers. Equipment shall
be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the
trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
B. All components of the fans be provided by the Contractor through one vendor. The
Contractor shall have the sole responsibility of matching all components and
providing equipment which functions together as a system.
1.07 SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLIES
A. Furnish all special tools necessary to disassemble, service, repair and adjust the
equipment.
B. The following spare parts shall be furnished for up to every four (4) same size of
fan:
1. Two (2) sets of belts for each belt driven fan
C. Furnish all additional spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturers.
D. Spare parts lists, included with the Shop Drawing submittal shall indicate specific
sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1
lot of packing material" are not acceptable.
15830H-3 11/2017
2009
CONTRACT DEL-260H
E. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts

inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate
number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same
parts number.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FANS - CONDITION OF SERVICE AND DESIGN DATA
A. Fans shall be as specified below and shown on the Contract Drawings. The
Contractor shall include, as part of this Work, all supports required. The fans shall
be installed where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. Performance data for all fans shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with
the "Standard Test Code for Centrifugal and Axial Fans" as adopted by the Air
Movement and Control Association (AMCA) and shall be licensed to bear the
AMCA certified rating seal for both sound and air performance. All fans shall be
selected from performance curves and not from rating tables. A copy of the curve,
indicating the operating point, shall be submitted for each proposed fan.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, motors shall be of the totally enclosed premium
efficiency type. Motors shall not be selected for operation in the service factor
range/zone. The maximum brake horsepower required at any point on the
performance curve shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the motor.
D. Motors 1/3 HP and less shall be suitable for use with 115V, single phase, 60 Hz
electric service. Motors 1/2 HP or larger shall be for use with 460V, three phase,
60 Hz electric service, unless otherwise indicated. Two-speed motors shall be two
winding type. Motors shall comply with the requirements of General Specification
16221 - Electric Motors.
E. All fans and damper operators shall each be provided with individual externally
mounted disconnect switches. All enclosures shall be NEMA 4X-stainless steel
unless otherwise specified.
F. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the speed at which the unit
is scheduled to operate. Fans with corrosion resistant coatings shall be balanced
after being coated.
G. The fans shall be either direct connected or V-belt drive as indicated on the
schedule. For motors less than or equal to 10 HP, the V-belt drive shall be selected
for 120 percent of rated capacity. For motors larger than 10 HP, the V-belt drive
shall be selected for 150 percent of rated capacity. All V-belt drives shall be
provided with adjustable sheaves. Exposed V-belt drives shall have removable belt
guards with openings to allow for tachometer readings at both drive and fan shafts.
Guards shall be so constructed as to allow visual inspection of the belts without
removing the guard.
H. All fan bearings shall be selected for a minimum L-50 life of 100,000 hours at
maximum operating speed.
15830H-4 11/2017
2010
CONTRACT DEL-260H
I. All fan motors shall be provided with high premium energy efficient totally
enclosed fan cooled type. All shafts shall be sized so the first critical speed is at
least 20 percent over the maximum operating speed. Close tolerance shall be
maintained along the length of the shaft.
J. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer’s nameplate containing the
model number and individual serial number for future identification.
K. Fan manufacturer shall provide sound power ratings in the eight octave bands.
Sound power levels shall be based on AMCA Standard 301. Sound power ratings
shall be in decibels, referenced to 10-12 watts.
2.02 FIBERGLASS VANEAXIAL FANS

A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
1. Hartzell Fan, Inc.
2. MK Plastics, Montreal, Quebec
B. Construction:
1. Belt drive.
2. The resin used on fiberglass axial flow fans shall be Ashland Hetron 693 or
approved equal which is a polyester resin with 3% antimony oxide added to
achieve a Class I flame spread rate of below 25 per ASTM E84 tunnel test
standards and NFPA Code 91 for blower and exhaust systems, which is
OSHA approved. Fan construction shall conform to ASTM Standard
D4167 for fiber reinforced plastic fans and blowers.
3. Fiberglass propellers, fan housings, and components shall be capable of
being used in temperatures up to 200° F. The propeller shall be airfoil
design, 6 blade one piece construction. The propeller shall be solid
fiberglass with an aluminum insert molded into the hub for secure
attachment to the shaft. The airfoil propeller shall not have an aerodynamic
stall characteristic. Fan housings shall be constructed of solid fiberglass
including the flanges which have drilled mounting holes. Motor mountings
are steel plate coated with resin and mounted on the drum exterior with glass
mat, cloth and resin. The encapsulated assembly base, Type 316 stainless
steel riser bolts and epoxy coated motor base provide support for the motor.
All other hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Fan shafts shall be ground and polished Type 316 stainless steel. Bearings
shall be located in a sealed drive compartment to prevent corrosive element
entry. Bearings shall be heavy duty, self-aligning, and shall have extended
lube tubes and be able to be repeatedly lubricated for continuous service.
Variable pitch sheaves shall be standard on fans up through and including
15830H-5 11/2017
2011
CONTRACT DEL-260H
10 HP and belts sized for continuous service. Fans shall be designed for
mounting in any position from horizontal to vertical.
5. The fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced at the factory prior to
shipping. Fans shall be balanced to the American National Standards
Institute, Std. S2.19-1989 “Balance Quality of Rotating Rigid Bodies”,
Grade G6.3. Fans shall be manufactured in accordance with the fan
manufacturer's standard quality assurance procedures. Fan performance
shall be based on tests conducted in an AMCA accredited test laboratory
and in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 for air performance and
AMCA Standard 300 for sound. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA
Certified Air Performance Rating Seal.
C. Accessories:
1. FRP Mounting feet
2. Companion flanges
3. Lifting lugs
4. Motor cover and belt guard
5. Access Door - For inspection of the propeller and fan bearings
2.03 STEEL VANEAXIAL FANS

1. Hartzell, Piqua, OH
2. New York Blower Company, Willowbrook, IL
3. Aerovent, Minneapolis, MN
B. Construction:
1. Belt drive.
2. The duct axial propeller shall be an airfoil design, 6 bladed, one piece
construction cast of 319 aluminum alloy in compliance with Federal
Specification QQ-A-601E and ASTM B26. Propellers shall be retained on
the motor shaft with a split taper bushing.
3. Fan housing shall be minimum 12 gauge rolled commercial quality, carbon
steel, continuously welded in compliance with AWS D1.1 standard and
include a guide vane section. Standard surface coating system shall be
phosphatized surface preparation with an industrial grade air dry enamel
paint. All flanges have slotted mounting holes. Rigid motor mounts
provide support for the motor. Fans shall be suitable for up to 200° F.
4. Fan shafts shall be ground and polished carbon steel. Bearings shall be
located in a drive compartment on the negative pressure side of the
15830H-6 11/2017
2012
CONTRACT DEL-260H
propeller. Bearings shall be heavy duty, self aligning, ball or roller type;
depending on fan size, motor horsepower and performance. Bearings shall
have extended lube tubes and be able to be repeatedly lubricated for
continuous service. Variable pitch drive sheaves shall be standard on fans
up through and including 10 HP. Belts shall be "V" type, heat, oil, and static
resistant and sized for continuous service.
manufacturer’s standard quality assurance procedures. Fan performance
shall be based on tests conducted in an AMCA accredited test laboratory in
accordance with the latest revision of AMCA Standard 210 for air
performance and AMCA Standard 300 for sound. Fans shall be licensed to
bear the AMCA Certified Air Performance Rating Seal.
C. Accessories:
1. Mounting feet
2. Companion flanges
3. Lifting lugs
4. Motor cover and belt guard
5. Access Door - For inspection of the propeller and fan bearings.
2.04 WALL PROPELLER FANS

1. Hartzell, Piqua, OH
2. New York Blower Company, Willowbrook, IL
3. Aerovent, Minneapolis, MN
B. Construction:
1. Direct drive.
2. The fan propeller shall be an airfoil design, one piece construction cast of
319 aluminum alloy in compliance with Federal Specification QQ-A-601E
and ASTM B26. Propellers shall be retained on the motor shaft with a split
taper bushing.
3. Solid rolled rod motor mounts shall provide support for the motor. Steel
motor base and solid steel support rods shall be oversized to provide
structurally rugged construction.
15830H-7 11/2017
2013
CONTRACT DEL-260H
4. The propeller shall be mounted in a high efficiency air seal fan orifice with
smaller diameter of the ring overlapping the propeller tips.
manufacturer’s standard quality assurance procedures. Fan performance
shall be based on tests conducted in an AMCA accredited test laboratory in
accordance with the latest revision of AMCA Standard 210 for air
performance and AMCA Standard 300 for sound. Fans shall be licensed to
bear the AMCA Certified Air Performance Rating Seal.
C. Accessories:
1. Inlet guard.
2. Mounting angle flange.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The fans shall be installed, connected and placed in proper working order in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and details and the Contract
Drawings.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each unit of equipment shall be identified with the equipment item numbers given
on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. A corrosion resistant tag
or nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each unit shall give the
equipment item number, manufacturer’s name or trademark and such other
information as the manufacturer may consider necessary, or as specified, for
complete identification.
3.03 TESTING
A. Preliminary and final field tests shall be performed for all equipment provided
under this Specification, as specified in Article 13 of the General Conditions and
Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
B. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Motor tests in accordance with General Specification 16221 -
Electrical Motors.
C. Field tests shall be performed in accordance with General Specification 15951 -
A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's technical
representative who shall adequately supervise the installation and testing of all
15830H-8 11/2017
2014
CONTRACT DEL-260H
equipment furnished under this Contract. The services of the manufacturer's

representative shall be provided for a period for 1 year.
B. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall
be at the expense of the Contractor. The manufacturer's representative shall sign in
and out at the office of the Resident Engineer each day he is at the project.
C. Training:
The manufacturer’s representative shall provide training for City personnel. The
Contractor shall include in his request from the manufacturer, a certification that
the manufacturer has been advised of the stringent requirements for training, and
that the costs associated with said training submittals and training have been
included in the manufacturer’s pricing.
END OF SECTION
15830H-9 11/2017
2015
CONTRACT DEL-260H
15830H-10 11/2017
2016
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15950 – HVAC MONITORING AND CONTROL
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15950
HVAC Monitoring and Control
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15950 – HVAC Monitoring and Control has been
General Specifications 15950 – HVAC Monitoring and Control.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall furnish, install, test and place in satisfactory operation an open
architecture HVAC monitoring and control system (HMCS as specified herein.
B. Contractor is required to load, configure, develop, test, document and place into
satisfactory operation all software associated with the HMCS and all its ancillary
devices as described herein, required by other Specifications as shown and as
necessary to provide a properly operating and integrated system.
C. The system configuration shall be as specified herein and as described in the
Sequence of Operations in Part 3, below. Some variations in the configuration may
be permitted as long as functional constraints as intended for the various components
of the system are met. Hardware requirements are specified in this Specification.
Software requirements for the HMCS and for interfacing with the plant control
system and other microprocessor based equipment are specified herein.
D. The Contract Documents illustrate and describe the overall functional and operational
requirements. Contractor is responsible for tagging, integrating, and verifying the
functionality of all system components.
E. The Work also includes:
1. Automatic Temperature Control Panels (ATC).
2. Power and control wiring and conduit: The wiring and conduit to be
provided under this Specification shall include the following:
a. All wiring and conduit from the ATC panel to sensors, controllers,
switches, dampers, valves, HVAC equipment panels, ventilation
system chlorine detection panel and alarm station.
b. All wiring and conduit from the ventilation system chlorine detection
panel to chlorine gas sensors.
c. All wiring and conduit between HVAC equipment panels and
associated field devices.
d. Any other HVAC device requiring control.
e. Conduit layouts for these wiring requirements are not shown.
15950-1 11/2017
2017
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Contractor shall determine the requirements based upon the

arrangement of the components being furnished.
3. Motorized dampers and motorized valves, including linkage kits and other
accessories.
4. Sensors, controllers, thermostats, mounting accessories, junction boxes, face
plates, wall plates, covers, mounting hardware as required.
5. Transformers.
6. Power disconnects switches.
7. Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs).
8. Other control devices and appurtenances, as required.
F. Items Furnished Under the Electrical Work:
1. All 3 phase power wiring and conduit.
2. 120 volt, single phase power wiring and conduit for the following:
a. Power to ATC panel.
b. Power to ventilation system chlorine detection panel.
3. Disconnects.
4. Control and status wiring and conduit from motor starters to ATC panel.
Motor starters for supply fans and exhaust fans except where packaged
with HVAC equipment.
G. The following index of this Specification is included for convenience:
Article Title Page

15950-
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ................................................................................................................. 1
1.02 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................. 3
1.03 PAYMENT....................................................................................................................................... 3
1.04 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 4
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................... 4
1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 4
1.07 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................ 5
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS ....................................................... 7
1.09 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND SUPPLIES...................................................... 8
1.10 ANCHOR BOLTS ......................................................................................................................... 9
1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................... 9
15950-2 11/2017
2018
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1.12 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE ....................................................................... 9

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING.....................................................................11
1.14 SHOP TESTS ................................................................................................................................12
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..............................................................................................................................12
2.01 MANUFACTURERS .................................................................................................................12
2.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................................12
2.03 SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES ..............................................................................19
2.04 DAMPER ACTUATORS..........................................................................................................19
2.05 MOTORIZED DAMPERS........................................................................................................20
2.06 MOTORIZED VALVES ..........................................................................................................20
2.07 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES ..............................................................................................20
2.08 CONTROL RELAYS .................................................................................................................26
2.09 SELECTOR SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS AND INDICATIONG LIGHTS ........27
2.10 STROBE AND HORN ...............................................................................................................29
2.11 VENTILATION SYSTEM CHLORINE GAS DETECTION SYSTEM ....................29
2.12 CONDUIT AND WIRE .............................................................................................................31
2.13 LABELING ....................................................................................................................................31
2.14 MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................................................31
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................31
3.01 INSTALLATION .........................................................................................................................31
3.02 FIELD TESTING .........................................................................................................................32
3.03 START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT.........................................................................................32
3.04 CLEANING ...................................................................................................................................33
3.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS ............................................................................................33

A. Detailed Specification 13862 – Non-Metallic Ductwork
B. Detailed Specification 15515 – Piping, Valves and Accessories
C. Detailed Specification 15810 – Ductwork and Accessories
D. Detailed Specification 16010 – General Electrical Requirements
E. Detailed Specification 16076 – Labeling and Identification
F. Detailed Specification 16121 – Electric Wires and Cables
G. Detailed Specification 16131 – Electric Conduit System
H. Detailed Specification 16221 – Electric Motors
1.03 PAYMENT
15950-3 11/2017
2019
CONTRACT DEL-260H

1.04 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B. National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 79 – Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. UL 873 – Standard for Safety Temperature-Indicating and -Regulating
Equipment
A. The HMCS provided under this Specification shall include all related equipment
specified, shown on the Drawings, or needed for a complete installation and required
to communicate with all equipment described.
A. The HMCS shall be based on an industry standard open architecture technology.
Individual devices must interpolate as certified by an independent organization. The
HMCS shall have several levels of operator interface to include full Microsoft
Windows-compliant graphical user interface capable of utilizing a common database
for monitoring and programming of all system controllers and devices.
B. The HMCS shall be a LonMark compliant system utilizing a high speed peer-to-peer
network of interoperable Direct Digital Controls (DDC), Human Machine Interface
(HMI), and electronic interfaces and actuation devices, as shown and as described
herein.
C. The HMCS shall be comprised of a network of various independent digital
controllers together with HMI, as specified, to provide centralized access and facility
wide control functions. Each controller shall be capable of standalone operation and
communication with other controllers.
D. Systems requiring additional software to enable a standard Web browser to be
resident on the client machine are not acceptable.
E. The HMCS shall be designed to monitor, store, display and log HVAC system,
equipment operating information and alarms, and perform various HVAC control
functions.
F. The HMCS shall contain products of a single manufacturer, when possible, and
15950-4 11/2017
2020
CONTRACT DEL-260H
consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All equipment shall
be of modular construction and capable of field expansion through the installation of
plug-in circuit cards and additional cabinets, as necessary. Design all logic and
control loops to be fail safe.
G. All components shall be designed to return automatically to accurate measurement
within fifteen (15) seconds upon restoration of power after a power failure or when
transferred to standby power supply.
H. Surge protection shall be provided for all instruments and all other control system
components, which could be damaged by electrical surges.
I. All relays with interconnections to field devices shall be wired through terminal
blocks. Terminals as part of the relay base are not an acceptable alternative.
J. All panel mounted instruments, switches, and other devices shall be selected and
grouped for functionality and arranged to present a neat coordinated appearance.
Similar type front of panel mounted devices shall be of the same manufacturer and
model line.
K. All components furnished, including field and panel instruments, shall be tagged with
the item number and nomenclature indicated as shown and/or approved Shop
Drawings.
L. Ranges and scales shall be coordinated to suit equipment actually furnished.
M. Field-mounted devices shall be protected from exposure to freezing temperatures.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
2. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals.
B. Working Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
15950-5 11/2017
2021
CONTRACT DEL-260H
marked dimensions.
when full.
electro-mechanical equipment item, as well as interconnecting and point-to-
point field wiring diagrams. Point-to point field wiring diagrams shall
herein and in Article 5 of the General Conditions.
C. Operation and maintenance manuals shall conform to the requirements of Detailed
D. Spare parts lists shall indicate sizes, quantities and part number of the items to be
E. Reports of field tests shall be submitted as specified herein and in accordance with
Article 13 of the General Conditions and Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary
and Final Field Tests.
1. Prior notification of field tests shall be submitted as specified herein and in
accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions and Detailed
F. Reports of manufacturer’s representative Site visits shall be submitted as specified
G. Other applicable information, as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
H. Additional information as summarized below:
1. Sequence of Operations, as described in Section 3.05.
2. Record Drawings and Documentation:
15950-6 11/2017
2022
CONTRACT DEL-260H
a. Contractor and Supplier shall revise all system drawings, submittals

and software documentation to reflect as-built conditions in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
b. Half-size black line prints of wiring diagrams and any program or
configuration printouts applicable to each control panel shall be
placed inside a clear plastic envelope and stored in a suitable print
pocket or container inside each control panel.
B. The HMCS shall be furnished by a single Supplier who shall assume unit
responsibility for providing a complete and integrated system.
1. Supplier’s Qualifications
a. Shall be a financially sound firm having at least five (5) years’
continuous experience in designing, implementing, supplying and
supporting control systems at similar facilities which are comparable
to the HMCS in terms of hardware, software, cost and complexity.
b. Shall have manufactured and supported standard lines of digital
processing and control equipment and application software
continuously for the last five years.
c. Shall have in existence an experienced Engineering and technical
staff capable of designing, implementing, supplying and supporting
the HMCS and handling the HMCS submittal and training
requirements.
d. Shall provide system hardware components and software packages of
fully developed, field proven standardized designs and therefore shall
15950-7 11/2017
2023
CONTRACT DEL-260H
furnish a system which is not a highly unique, custom one-of-a-kind

system.
e. Shall have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in software
configuration, hardware application, programming, and data highway
systems.
f. Shall provide standard course offerings in general control applications
and in operation, programming and maintenance of the control system
and equipment at a facility specifically utilized for training purposes.
The facility shall have been in operation continuously for the last two
(2) years.
g. Shall have a demonstrated record of prompt response to field failures.
h. Shall have a documented program of failure analysis.
i. Shall utilize a UL approved panel shop.
j. Shall have a technical support center within a 50 mile radius of
project Site. Shall have the capability to provide on-Site service
within a two (2) hour period.
C. All equipment, components and materials required shall be furnished by the single
supplier who shall assume the responsibility for adequacy, performance and
configuration of all items.
D. The supplier shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other
submittals for all components furnished under this Specification.
E. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions
and shall be integrated into the overall equipment assembly by the supplier.
A. The Contractor shall provide spare parts, including but not limited to, for the
equipment provided under this Specification, as specified herein and in Detailed
Specification 01781 – Project Closeout.
1. The spare parts provided shall include:
a. Twelve (12) ATC panel pilot light bulbs.
2. The spare parts specified above shall be understood as required for each unit
provided under this Specification.
B. The Contractor shall provide such special tools and appliances as may be needed to
as specified in Article 12 of the General conditions and in Detailed Specification
15950-8 11/2017
2024
CONTRACT DEL-260H
C. The Contractor shall furnish such oil, grease, and any special lubricants as are
Project Closeout.
1.10 ANCHOR BOLTS
requirements of Detailed Specification 16076 – Labeling and Identification and shall
bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark and such other information as is specified
or deemed necessary by the manufacturer to complete the identification. Nameplate
numbering shall be as specified or shown on the Drawings: the Engineer may change
or supplement such numbering at the time of or at any time before the approval of
Shop Drawings.
and maintenance of the equipment.
B. The services provided shall be in accordance with the requirements of Article 12 of
the General Conditions and Detailed Specification 01732 – Installation of
Equipment, Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests, and
Detailed Specification 01821 – Equipment Start-up and Training.
C. The Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer’s representative at such
times and for such durations of time as needed to perform the required tasks, as
specified in the Detailed Specifications listed in this Article. At a minimum, the
15950-9 11/2017
2025
CONTRACT DEL-260H
services of the manufacturer’s representative shall be provided as indicated below.

The number of visits and person-days per visit indicated below refers to the total
required services for the lot of equipment provided under this Specification.
1. Installation 1 visits of 1 person-days per visit.
2. Field Testing 1 visits of 1 person-days per visit.
3. Start-up 1 visits of 1 person-days per visit.
4. Training 1 visits of 1 person-days per visit.
D. The Engineer reserves the right to require that any unused person-days from any visit
be applied to any other specified visit.
E. Person-days shall be understood only as days spent on-Site (not in transit).
F. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the manufacturer’s representative shall
be a direct employee of the equipment manufacturer, with at least three (3) years’
experience in the installation, testing, and start-up of equipment of the type provided
under this Specification. The manufacturer’s sales and marketing personnel will not
be accepted as manufacturer’s representative for this purpose.
G. The manufacturer’s representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer
each day they are at the Site.
H. Reports: The Contractor shall submit a report from the manufacturer for each visit to
the Site of the manufacturer’s representative. The report shall provide complete
information regarding the visit, including, but not limited to, dates, times, subject
equipment, tasks performed, persons contacted, problems corrected, test results,
training provided, and other pertinent information.
I. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall provide the services of person(s)
authorized by the manufacturer to witness the unloading at the Site of the equipment
provided under this Specification, and to ascertain the condition of said equipment.
Manufacturers’ sales and marketing personnel may be accepted as authorized
person(s) to perform these specific tasks. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a report, completed by the authorized person(s) and certified by the
equipment manufacturer, documenting the findings of the authorized person(s).
J. The following additional tasks shall be provided:
1. Manufacturer’s Services After Construction
a. Service shall be provided by a factory-trained and certified
manufacturer’s representative for the guaranty period specified in
Article 24. The manufacturer shall maintain all equipment furnished
under HMCS during the first year of operation.
b. Service provided shall include the following:
15950-10 11/2017
2026
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1) Quarterly Service: Service intervals shall be quarterly for a

minimum of one (1) day of eight (8) hours each, on-Site, each
day per quarter. The service duration shall be increased, as
necessary by HMCS supplier, taking into consideration the
system service requirements and system size. Contractor shall
indicate the service duration and service scope. Prior to the
visits, the HMCS supplier shall contact DEP and inquire as to
problems encountered with the system. Service visits shall be
scheduled at times agreeable to the City at least one (1) week
in advance. The quarterly service shall include, but not
limited to the following:
a) Provide manufacturer’s recommended maintenance.
b) Check all controls, components and recalibrate/adjust as
necessary.
c) Perform necessary cleaning and service that is scheduled on
a quarterly basis in accordance with the approved
Operations and Maintenance Manual. Provide all
expendable materials, as necessary.
d) Review and provide recommendations concerning City’s
operations.
e) Replace or repair defective controls and components.
f) Inspect control panels. Test panel indication lights and
replace defective lights.
g) Provide a detailed field report to the City.
2) Technical Support: Technical support shall be provided between the
hours of 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday
when requested by the City. Technical support shall
include, but not limited to the following:
a) Telephone Technical Support: Four (4) hours per day.
b) On-Site Visits: If resolution of a problem is not
achieved via the Telephone Technical Support, an on-
Site visit and field report shall be required. Forty (40)
hours on-Site support.
15950-11 11/2017
2027
CONTRACT DEL-260H

1.14 SHOP TESTS
tests:
1. No additional shop tests required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials provided under this
Specification shall be manufactured by:
1. Schneider Electric, IA Series
2. Siemens, Washington D.C.
3. Johnson Controls, Milwaukee, WI
2.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. General:
1. Descriptions contained hereinafter are for guidance and to explain the
functions desired. They do not describe or specify all components required to
interface equipment. All parts and equipment necessary to meet functional
and operational requirements shall be provided.
2. All components of the ATC system shall be rugged industrial grade and
installed within NEMA 4X enclosures:
3. Components located in corrosive areas shall be provided with enclosures
constructed of materials suitable chlorine atmospheres. Suitable exposed
materials shall be epoxy or Teflon coated aluminum or other similar materials
approved by the Engineer. Uncoated steel and galvanized steel are not
suitable materials for exposure in corrosive areas.
4. Commercial sensors and field devices shall not be acceptable.
B. Power Supplies:
1. All electrically powered monitoring equipment, control equipment and
devices shall be suitable for operation on 115 volt ±10 percent, 60 Hz ±2 Hz
power. The Contractor shall provide a suitable regulator or transformer if a
different voltage or closer regulation is required.
15950-12 11/2017
2028
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2. Appropriate power supplies shall be furnished by Contractor for all two-wire

transmitters, loops for monitoring discrete inputs and all necessary outputs.
Power supplies shall be mounted in panels.
3. Design all power supplies for a minimum of 130 percent of the maximum
simultaneous current draw.
4. A power on-off switch or an air circuit breaker shall be furnished for each
item requiring electrical power.
C. Signal Requirements:
1. The control system shall be designed to use 4 to 20 mADC or 0 to 10 VDC
analog signals, unless otherwise specified.
2. Signals shall be isolated from ground.
3. Signals shall not have a transient DC voltage exceeding 300 volts over one
millisecond nor a DC component over 300 volts.
4. The system design shall be adequate to provide proper protection against
electrical interferences.
D. Environmental Conditions:
1. The control system shall be designed and constructed for continuous
operation under all temperature and humidity conditions at locations in which
the devices are located.
E. Spare Controllers:
1. Provide sufficient spare controllers within each ATC panel in order to
provide an additional ten (10) percent of the panels’ inputs/outputs. These
inputs/outputs shall be designated as spares.
F. Network:
1. Provide a high speed, peer-to-peer, networked, stand alone, distributed
control system. This specification requires the incorporation of LonWorks
Technologies using Free Topology Transceivers (FTT-10), and specific
conformance to the LonMark Interoperability Association's v3.0 (or latest)
Physical and Logical Layer guidelines in all unitary, terminal unit and other
control system devices.
2. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet
network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for
maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise
information systems and providing support for multiple Network Controllers
(NC’s) and HMI’s. The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall utilize
Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), Address
15950-13 11/2017
2029
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Resolution Protocol (ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) operating at

10 or 100 Mbps.
3. LonTalk communications protocol shall be used on the communication
network between controllers and other LonWorks devices.
4. The building level local area network shall employ industry standard open
protocol devices manufactured to LonMark compliant standards. The use of
devices supporting the LonMark profiles will be used where applicable.
G. Network Management:
1. Network management shall include the following services: device
installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance,
and network variable binding.
2. Network Management Software shall be based on a graphical object-oriented
software system that provides an intuitive interface for network design and
installation to integrate LonWorks capabilities into Windows based
applications. The LonWorks Network Management shall include all software
modules necessary to provide complete network management, installation
and maintenance.
3. The Network Management software shall permit the individual network
nodes to be configured. This tool shall manage a database of all system
controllers by type and revision, and shall provide a software mechanism for
identifying each controller on the network. This tool shall also be capable of
defining network data connections between system controllers, known as
"binding". The network configuration tool shall also be capable of performing
the above stated functions for third party LonMark devices that may be added
to the network. The LonWorks network database shall be an integral part of
the network and available at all times.
H. Human Machine Interface:
Provide an LCD alphanumeric screen display located within the ATC panel
to interface with the DDC system. The HMI shall be programmable and
connected directly to the LonWorks network. Provide status, alarm, override,
and set point change as applicable. User access shall be pass code protected.
I. Programming:
1. Provide a Visio-based graphical object oriented programming tool running on
Microsoft Windows to program system controllers. This tool will
communicate by direct connection or dial-up modem connection. In addition
this tool will provide an intuitive routine to create data sharing links between
all system controllers and third party devices on the LonWorks network. The
following functions shall be supported:
15950-14 11/2017
2030
CONTRACT DEL-260H
a. On-line and off-line editing of controller databases:

1) The graphical programming tool shall provide for on-line and
off-line editing of the LonWorks Programmable Controller
databases and provide for the off-line editing of the LonMark
Controller databases.
b. Download of Controller Databases:
1) The graphical programming tool shall provide functionality to
download the controller databases and LonMark profiles as
necessary.
c. Library of Standard LonMark Profile Applications:
1) A library of standard Lon Mark profiles shall be available for
download to the controllers. Additionally there will be a
library of pre-engineered validated control applications
available for download to the controllers.
d. Diagnostics Mode:
1) Provide real-time display of controller values in a flow
diagram of control sequence.
J. Controllers:
1. Application Specific Controllers (ASC):
a. Single board construction comprising processor board with
programmable, nonvolatile, RAM/EEPROM memory for custom
control and unitary applications. ASC firmware shall support all
mandatory and all optional LonMark Standard Network Variables
(SNVT) for their LonMark profile as documented by the LonMark
Interoperability Association. ASC shall be based on the Echelon
Neuron 3150 microprocessor working with the ASC standalone
control program.
b. Standalone mode control functions shall operate regardless of
network status.
c. Peer-to-peer primary network level communications with automatic
communications loss detection shall be installed to maintain normal
control functionality regardless of available network communications.
d. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
e. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
f. Appropriate LonMark profiles for specific unitary applications.
15950-15 11/2017
2031
CONTRACT DEL-260H
g. Support for all mandatory and optional LonMark SNVT for their
LonMark profile as documented by the LonMark Interoperability
Association.
h. Internal customizable safeties and limits to prevent third party
LonMark tools from providing improper and unrealistic inputs to
ASC.
i. Local operator interfaces port located on ASC and ASC sensor for
download from or upload to portable workstation. All Lon bus
devices shall be accessible from either port.
j. Communication: ASC shall communicate with the system at a baud
rate of not less than 78.8K baud using LonTalk communications
protocol (EIA 709.1).
k. ASC units monitor or control each input/output point, process
information, and provide a minimum of fifty (50) expressions for
customized HVAC control including mathematical equations,
Boolean logic, PID control loops with anti-windup, sequencers,
timers, interlocks, thermostats, counters, interlocks, compare, limit,
and alarms.
l. ASC unit setpoints shall be digital display with dual setpoint limits
(integral hard limits, which the user cannot exceed above and below,
and independent soft limits, which are hidden from the user). All
digital setpoints shall be network retentive after power outages and
after replacement of sensor.
K. Performance
1. The system shall conform to the following performance standards:
a. Object Command: The maximum time between the command of a
binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be
less than five (5) seconds. Analog objects should start to adjust
within five (5) seconds.
b. Object Scan: All changes of state and change of analog values will be
transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or
displayed at a controller or HMI will have been current within
previous sixty (60) seconds.
c. Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when an object
goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the HMI shall not exceed
twenty (20) seconds.
d. Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications
shall be capable of running as often as once every five (5) seconds.
15950-16 11/2017
2032
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times

consistent with the mechanical process under control.
e. Performance: Digital controllers shall be able to execute PID control
loops at a selectable frequency of at least once per second. The
controller shall scan and update the process value and output
generated by this calculation at this same frequency.
f. Multiple Alarm Annunciation: All workstations on the network must
receive alarms within five (5) seconds of each other.
g. Reporting Accuracy: The system shall report all values with an end-
to-end accuracy as listed in Table 1, below.
h. Stability of Control: Control loops shall maintain measured variable
at set point within the tolerances listed in Table 2, below.
(This space was intentionally left blank)
15950-17 11/2017
2033
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Table 1: Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable Reported Accuracy
Space Temperature: ±1 degree F

Ducted Air: ±1 degree F
Outside Air: ±2 degree F
Dew Point: ±3 degree F
Water Temperature: ±1 degree F
Relative Humidity: ±5 percent relative humidity
Water Flow: ±5 percent of full scale
Airflow (terminal): ±10 percent of reading (refer to Note 1)
Airflow (measuring stations): ±5 percent of full scale
Air Pressure (ducts): ±0.1-inches of water gauge
Air Pressure (space): ±0.01-inches of water gauge
Water Pressure: ±2 percent of full scale (refer to Note 2)
Electrical: (A, V, W, Power factor) 5 percent of reading (refer to Note 3)
Note 1: (10 percent to 100 percent of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10 percent).
Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure.
Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters.
Table 2: Control Stability and Accuracy
Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium
Air Pressure: 0.2-inches of water gauge 0 to 6-inches of water gauge

0.01-inches of water gauge -0.1 to 0.1-inches of water gauge
Airflow: ± 5 percent of full scale
Temperature: ±1.0 degrees F
Humidity: ±5 percent relative humidity
Fluid Pressure: ±1.5 psi 1 to 150 psi
±1.0-inches of water gauge 0 to 50-inches of water gauge differential
15950-18 11/2017
2034
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2.03 SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES

A. Provide all sensors and control devices required to provide the Sequence of
Operations described under Section 3.05, below, constructed and rated for the
location in which they are installed.
B. Provide rugged industrial grade sensors and transmitters from one of the following
manufacturers:
1. Foxboro, Palatine, IL.
2. Rosemont, St. Louis, MO.
C. Commercial sensors and transmitters are not acceptable.
2.04 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Type: Electric, Direct Coupled (over the shaft):
1. V-bolt and V-shaped cradle shaft attachment.
2. Electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to
actuator throughout the rotation of actuator.
3. Spring return actuators shall be capable of either clockwise or
counterclockwise spring return operation by changing mounting orientation.
4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mADC control
input and provide a 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mADC operating range.
Proportional control through a pulse width modulating signal is acceptable.
Proportional control through floating (Tri-state) control is not acceptable.
Actuators shall be capable of providing 2 to 10 VDC position feedback
signals.
5. 24 VAC/VDC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require
more than 10 VA for AC or more than 8 watts for DC applications.
Actuators operating on 120 VAC power shall not require more than 10 VA.
6. Modulating actuators shall have an external, built in switch to allow the
reversing of direction of rotation.
7. External manual gear release with manual crank to allow manual positioning
of shaft.
8. Factory-mounted electrical cable and conduit fitting for connection to
junction box.
9. Conforming to UL 873.
15950-19 11/2017
2035
CONTRACT DEL-260H
10. Actuator shall be provided with sufficient torque to open and close the
device. Provide a minimum torque of 133-in-lb.
11. 120VAC or 24VDC.
12. NEMA Type 2 housing.
13. Accessories:
a. Linkage kit.
b. Mounting bracket.
c. Auxiliary switches for monitoring damper position.
d. NEMA Type 4X enclosure.
a. Belimo, Danbury, CT.
2.05 MOTORIZED DAMPERS
A. Refer to Detailed Specification 13862 - Non-Metallic Ductwork for fiberglass
reinforced plastic motorized dampers.
B. Refer to Detailed Specification 15810 - Ductwork and Accessories for metal
motorized dampers.
2.06 MOTORIZED VALVES
A. Refer to Detailed Specification 15515 - Piping, Valves and Accessories for
motorized valves.
2.07 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. General Construction Requirements
1. Contractor shall provide all electrical components and devices, support
hardware, fasteners, and interconnecting wiring required to make the control
panels and/or enclosures complete and operational.
2. Contractor shall locate and install all devices and components so that
connections can be easily made and that there is ample room for servicing
each item.
3. Components for installation on panel exterior shall be submitted for approval.
4. Contractor shall adequately support and restrain all devices and components
mounted on or within the panel to prevent any movement.
15950-20 11/2017
2036
CONTRACT DEL-260H
5. All wiring to panel connections from field instruments, devices, and other
panels shall be terminated at master numbered terminal strips, unless
otherwise specified.
6. Contractor shall provide copper grounding studs for all panel equipment.
7. Contractor shall provide the following convenience accessories inside of each
control panel:
a. One (1) 120 VAC, 20A duplex, grounding type receptacle.
8. No device shall be mounted less than thirty-six (36) inches above the
operating floor level, unless otherwise specified.
B. Identification:
1. Contractor shall provide laminated plastic nameplates for identification of
panels and components mounted thereon as follows:
a. Nameplates shall be of 3/32-inch thick laminated phenolic type with
white matte finish surface and black letter engraving.
b. Panel identification nameplates to have 1/2-inch high letter
engravings.
c. Panel mounted component (e.g., control devices, indicating lights,
selector switches, etc.) identification nameplates to have 1/4-inch
high letter engravings.
d. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel face with two (2) stainless
steel self-tapping screws.
e. Nameplate engravings shall include the instrument or equipment tag
number and descriptive title.
f. Tag all internally mounted instruments in accordance with the
following requirements:
1) The identifying tag number shall be permanently etched or
embossed onto a stainless steel tag which shall be fastened to
the device housing with stainless steel rivets or self-tapping
screws of appropriate size.
2) Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished,
tags shall be permanently attached to the device by a circlet of
1/16-inch diameter stainless steel wire rope.
3) Identification tag shall be installed so that the numbers are
easily visible to service personnel.
4) Front of panel mounted instruments shall have the tag
15950-21 11/2017
2037
CONTRACT DEL-260H
attached to rear of device.

g. Tagging of the following items shall be accomplished with the use of
adhesive plastic labels manufactured by Brady USA, Inc. or approved
equal.
1) Tag all electrical devices mounted within control panels and
enclosures.
2) Numerically tag all terminal blocks.
3) Color code and numerically tag wiring at each end.
C. Panels and Enclosures:
1. General:
a. Panels and enclosures shall meet the NEMA requirements for the type
specified.
b. Sizes shown on Contract Drawings are estimates. Contractor shall
furnish panels and enclosures amply sized to house all equipment,
instruments, front panel mounted devices, power supplies, power
distribution panels, wiring, and other components installed within.
2. General Construction Features:
a. Fabricate enclosures using minimum 14-gauge steel for wall-mounted
enclosures. Steel shall be free of pitting and surface blemishes.
b. Contractor shall continuously weld all exterior seams and grind
smooth. Also, surface grind completely remove corrosion, burrs,
sharp edges and mill scale.
c. Reinforce sheet steel with steel angles where necessary to adequately
support equipment and ensure rigidity and to preclude resonant
vibrations.
d. Panel shall be flat within 1/16-inch over a 24-inch by 24-inch area or
flat within 1/8-inch for a larger surface. Flatness shall be checked by
using a 72-inch long straight edge. Non-flatness shall be gradual, in
one direction only, and shall not consist of obvious depressions or a
series of wavy sections.
e. Panel shall use pan type construction for doors.
f. Doors shall be mounted with full length heavy-duty piano hinges with
stainless steel hinge pins.
g. Contractor shall provide oil-resistant gasket completely around each
door or opening.
15950-22 11/2017
2038
CONTRACT DEL-260H
h. Contractor shall provide handle-operated, oil-tight, key-lockable 3-

point stainless steel latching system with rollers on latch-rods for easy
door closing.
i. Contractor shall use stainless steel fasteners throughout.
j. Contractor shall provide steel print pocket with white enamel finish.
k. Contractor shall provide enclosure mounting supports as required for
wall mounting.
l. Contractor shall provide all holes and cutouts for installation of
conduit and equipment. All conduit and piping openings and all
conduits shall be sealed watertight.
m. Contractor shall completely clean all interior and exterior surfaces so
they are free of corrosive residue, oil, grease and dirt.
n. One (1) coat of primer shall be applied to all interior and exterior
surfaces immediately after corrosion protection has been applied.
Exterior surfaces shall then be given sufficient coats of primer
surfacer, applied with sanding and cleaned between coats, to achieve
a Grade 1 finish (super smooth; completely free of imperfections) on
the finish coat.
o. All interior surfaces shall be painted with two (2) coats of semi-gloss
white polyurethane enamel.
p. All exterior surfaces shall be painted with a minimum of three (3)
finish coats of polyurethane enamel to produce a Grade 1 finish
(super smooth; completely free of imperfections). The Engineer shall
select the paint color from a complete selection of standard and
custom color charts furnished by the manufacturer.
q. Primer and finish paint shall be compatible and shall be a low VOC,
high solids polyurethane enamel, such as:
1) Hi-Solids Polyurethane B65 W300 Series as manufactured by
Sherwin-Williams, Inc.
r. Provide one (1) extra quart of touch-up paint for each exterior finish
color.
3. Control panels located in the electrical room service shall be NEMA 12 rated.
4. Control panels located in all other areas shall be NEMA 4X rated:
5. Electrical Systems:
15950-23 11/2017
2039
CONTRACT DEL-260H
a. Control of Environment:
1) Panels shall be furnished with adequately sized, automatically
controlled 120 VAC strip heaters to maintain temperature 10
degrees F above ambient temperature for condensation
prevention inside panels.
2) Panels shall be provided with automatically controlled closed
loop ventilation fans or closed loop air conditioners with
filtered air louvers if required to maintain temperature inside
each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature
rating of the components inside the enclosure.
b. Internal Power Distribution:
1) Panels shall be provided with an internal 120 VAC power
distribution panel with number of circuits and separate circuit
breakers sized as required to distribute power to the panel
components. Distribution panel shall contain two spare
breakers minimum.
c. Wiring:
1) Internal wiring shall be Type MTW stranded copper wire with
thermoplastic insulation rated for 600 V at 85 degrees C for
single conductors, color coded and labeled with wire
identification.
2) For DC panel signal wiring, use No. 18 minimum AWG
shielded.
3) For AC power wiring, use No. 12 minimum AWG. For AC
signal and control wiring, use No. 16 minimum AWG. For
wiring carrying more than 15 Amps, use sizes required by
NEC and NFPA 79 Standards.
4) Low voltage signal wiring and shielded wiring shall be
separated from power and control wiring by a minimum of six
(6) inches.
5) Parallel runs of wire shall be grouped or bundled using
covered troughs. Maximum bundle size to be one (1) inch.
Troughs shall have forty (40) percent spare capacity.
6) Wire troughs along horizontal or vertical routes shall be
installed to present a neat appearance. Angled runs are not
acceptable.
7) Contractor shall adequately support and restrain all wiring
15950-24 11/2017
2040
CONTRACT DEL-260H
runs to prevent sagging or other movement.

8) Contractor shall terminate all field wiring using forked,
insulated, crimp-on connectors (soldered type not acceptable)
at 600 V rated barrier type terminal strips with screwed
connections and permanently affixed numeric identifiers
beside each connection. Numeric identifiers shall be self-
stick plastic tape strips with permanent type, machine printed
numbers. For DC field signal wiring, terminal strips shall be
capable of handling No. 12 wiring (minimum).
Manufacturers: Provide products of one (1) of the following:
a) Phoenix Contact, Middletown, PA.
b) Entrelec Swartwout, Avon, MA.
c) Allen Bradley, Milwaukee, WI.
d) Or approved equal.
9) All wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed
from any one device, power will not be disrupted to any other
device.
10) For internal component to component wiring only,
compression type terminal blocks are acceptable.
11) Contractor shall provide spare terminals equal in number to
twenty (20) percent of the terminals used for each type of
wiring (e.g., DC signal and AC power).
12) Contractor shall provide a separate terminal for grounding
each shielded cable.
13) Contractor shall use separate 5/16-inch diameter copper
grounding studs for instrument signal cable shields and AC
power.
14) Where wires pass through panel walls, Contractor shall
provide suitable bushings to prevent cutting or abrading of
insulation.
15) When DC power and/or low voltage AC power is required,
Contractor shall provide and install the necessary power
supplies and transformers in the panel.
16) Contractor shall provide circuit breakers to protect each
circuit, with no more than six (6) instruments on a single
circuit.
15950-25 11/2017
2041
CONTRACT DEL-260H
17) Contractor shall provide complete wiring diagram showing

"as-built" circuitry. Diagram shall be enclosed in transparent
plastic and placed in easily accessible pocket built into panel
door.
d. Surge Protection:
1) General: Surge protection shall be provided to protect the
electronic instrumentation system from surges propagating
along the signal and power supply lines. The protection
systems shall be such that the protection level shall not
interfere with normal operation, but shall be not be higher
than the instrument surge withstand level, maintenance-free
and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in suitable
metallic cases, properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge
protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground and,
where practical, each ground wire run individually and
insulated from each other. These protectors shall be mounted
within the instrument enclosure or a separate junction box
(compatible with the area designation) coupled to the
enclosure.
2) Manufacturers: Provide products of one (1) of the following:
a) Phoenix Contact, Middletown, PA.
b) Joslyn, Elizabethtown, NC.
c) Or approved equal.
6. Common push-to-test circuitry shall be provided for each panel to
simultaneously test all indicating lights, horn, and strobe on the panel using a
single pushbutton.
7. Common push-to-acknowledge circuitry shall be provided for each panel to
silence the panel alarm horn. The strobe and alarm pilot lights shall remain
energized until the alarm is cleared.
2.08 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Type: General purpose, plug-in type rated for continuous duty.
B. Coil Voltages: 24 VDC or 120 VAC, as required.
C. Contacts:
1. Silver cadmium oxide rated not less than five amperes resistive at 120 VAC
or 28 VDC continuous.
2. For switching low energy circuits (less than 200 mADC) fine silver, gold
15950-26 11/2017
2042
CONTRACT DEL-260H
flashed contacts rated not less than three amperes resistive at 120 VAC or 28
VDC continuous shall be provided.
D. Relays to have clear plastic dust cover.
E. Relays to be UL recognized.
F. Manufacturers: Provide products of one (1) of the following:
1. IDEC, Sunnyvale, CA.
2. Potter & Brumfield, Princeton, IN.
3. Allen-Bradley, Milwaukee, WI.
2.09 SELECTOR SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS AND INDICATING LIGHTS
A. General:
1. Selector switches, pushbuttons and indicating lights shall all be provided by
Allen-Bradley or approved equal and shall be of the same series or model
type.
2. Type: Heavy-duty, oil-tight.
3. Provide legend plate for indication of switch, pushbutton or light function
(e.g. “OPEN/CLOSED”, “HAND/OFF/AUTOMATIC”).
4. Mounting: Contractor shall mount flush on control panel front, unless
otherwise noted.
5. NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted.
B. Selector Switches:
1. Type: Provide selector switches with number of positions as required to
perform intended functions, as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified
in the sequence of operation in section 3.05.
2. Contacts:
a. Provide number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform
intended functions specified but not less than one single pole, double
throw contact.
b. Type: Double break, silver contacts with movable contact blade
providing scrubbing action.
c. Rating: Selector switches shall be compatible with other devices and
the type of power, AC or DC current, that are simultaneously
15950-27 11/2017
2043
CONTRACT DEL-260H
operated by the switch contacts, but not less than ten (10) amperes
resistive at 120 VAC or DC continuous.
d. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
C. Pushbuttons:
1. Type: Provide momentary, dual type pushbuttons as required to perform
intended functions specified and shown.
2. Contacts: Comply with the requirements specified above for selector
switches.
D. Indicating Lights:
1. Type: Compact, integral transformer type.
2. Lamps: Six-volt, long life (20,000 hours minimum).
3. Indicating lights shall be provided with labeled escutcheon plates identifying
the light function (e.g. “RUN”, “STOP”, “ALARM”, “POWER”).
E. Button and Lens Colors:
1. Green for indication of closed, off (ready), stopped.
2. Red for indication of open, on, running.
3. Amber for indication of equipment malfunction, trouble and alarms (e.g.
motor overload, etc.).
4. Blue for indication of electrical control power on.
F. Rotary Cam Switches:
1. Provide rotary cam switches with number of positions and poles as required
to perform the required signal switching function as shown on the Contract
Drawings and as specified in Section 3.05.
2. Contacts:
a. Gold-flashed contacts housed in mechanical contact blocks with
number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform intended
functions.
b. Contact Rating: Compatible with AC or DC through-put current of
signals and devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts,
but not less than twenty (20) amperes at 600 VAC or 250 VDC
continuous.
c. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.
15950-28 11/2017
2044
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2.10 STROBE AND HORN

A. General: Strobe light with horn shall be a pulsating, illuminating, multi-tone audible
device used to indicate alarm at automatic temperature control panels.
B. Service:
1. Corrosive and Non-Corrosive Areas: NEMA 4X construction.
C. Required Features:
1. Power Required: 120 VAC, 60 Hz.
2. Strobe Light: Minimum 250 candlepower; 360 degree pattern.
3. Flashing Mechanism: 72 to 75 flashes per minute.
4. Base Materials of Construction: Polycarbonate
5. Color: Amber/Red/Blue.
6. Base Materials of Construction: Aluminum
7. Mounting: Top of Panel. Provide appropriate brackets and appurtenances.
8. Decibel Output: One hundred (100) at ten (10) feet minimum with manual
volume control.
9. NEMA 4X rated.
D. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one (1) of the:
1. 400 ST/350 as manufactured by Federal Signal, Oak Brook, IL.
2.11 VENTILATION SYSTEM CHLORINE GAS DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: Provide products of:
1. ATI, Series B14 system w/ B12 sensor/transmitters, Collegeville, PA
(manufacture substitution not permissible)
B. Chlorine Gas Detection System:
1. A four-point gas detector shall be supplied for monitoring the concentration
of chlorine gas within the Chlorine Storage Room and Chlorinator Room
ventilation exhaust ductwork. The system shall consist of a NEMA 4X alarm
module and chlorine gas sensor/transmitters.
2. The alarm module shall consist of a NEMA 4X enclosure containing four
modular receivers and two power supplies. The enclosure shall contain a
hinged window to allow access to controls without tools and shall be suitable
15950-29 11/2017
2045
CONTRACT DEL-260H
for wall or surface mounting.

3. Each receiver module shall provide a high-intensity digital LED display of
gas concentration, plus alarm indicator LEDs for Caution, Warning, Alarm,
and Trouble. Three programmable alarm setpoints shall be provided for
warning personnel of differing levels of leakage. Gas leak alarms shall be
indicated by flashing LED indicators on the alarm receiver.
4. The concentration of the gas shall be displayed directly in PPM or percent
units. Three alarm relays shall be provided for external alarming functions.
Each alarm relay shall be independently assignable to either the caution,
warning, or high alarm setpoint, and shall also be programmable for latching
and/or fail-safe operation. In addition, a separate Trouble alarm shall be
provided on each receiver to indicate the loss of signal from the
sensor/transmitter, or to alarm the loss of sensitivity of the gas sensor. Each
receiver shall provide an isolated 4-20 mA output signal proportional to gas
concentration, and shall also contain remote reset input terminals to allow
alarm acknowledgment from a remote location.
5. Two-wire sensor/transmitters shall provide the measurement function for the
system. The chlorine sensors shall be set to alarm at 0.5 PPM.
6. The power supply in the receiver module shall be a modular design providing
DC power to up to two receiver modules. A third DC output shall be
provided to float charge a standby battery system to provide battery backup to
the entire detection system in the event of power failure. The power supply
shall be capable of operation from any voltage from 85-250 volts, AC or DC,
without adjustment, and shall also contain a power failure relay for remote
power failure indication. Battery backup is not required.
7. Contacts for interfacing with the ATC system.
C. Chlorine Gas Transmitters:
1. Each gas transmitter shall consist of a NEMA 4X transmitter enclosure with a
close coupled gas sensor. The sensor/transmitter shall be a loop powered two-
wire transmitter with a 4-20 mA analog output signal proportional to the gas
concentration.
2. The gas transmitter shall measure gas concentrations in the ductwork using
electrochemical diffusion sensor technology and shall electrically connect to
the transmitter PC board via plug-in connector. Calibration shall be by zero
and span potentiometers located on the transmitter PC board. For purposes of
calibration, test loops for voltmeter connection shall be located on the
transmitter PC board. Output shall be 4-20 mA analog loop powered, 12 to
30 VDC.
D. Configuration:
15950-30 11/2017
2046
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Each of the four alarm module output contacts shall be wired together and
any of the alarm outputs will trigger a common chlorine sensor contact used
to interface with the ATC system.
2. Each of the alarm module output contacts shall be adjusted to be non-latching
to allow the system to automatically reset upon gas detection levels dropping
below the detection setpoint.
3. Audible alarming shall be provided external to the panel as described in the
ventilation alarm panel sequence of operations in Section 3.05, below.
2.12 CONDUIT AND WIRE
A. Electric wires and cables shall be provided under this Specification in accordance
with the requirements of Detailed Specification 16121 – Electric Wires and Cables
except where otherwise noted.
B. Electric conduit shall be provided under this Specification in accordance with the
requirements of Detailed Specification 16131 – Electric Conduit System except
where otherwise noted.
2.13 LABELING
A. Labeling of equipment shall be provided under this Specification in accordance with
the requirements of Detailed Specification 16076 – Labeling and Identification.
2.14 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Provide any additional controls and appurtenances as required to provide proper
equipment control.
B. Provide all mounting accessories, as required.
C. Tubing, static pressure tips, mounting hardware, fasteners, and appurtenances shall
be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall examine equipment at time of delivery for damaged or missing
components.
B. Do not proceed with installation of equipment until all damaged items found have
been replaced or missing items have been provided.
C. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
D. Install equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for safe
operation and maintenance.
15950-31 11/2017
2047
CONTRACT DEL-260H
E. Wall sensors shall be installed at least five (5) feet above the finished floor. Wall
plates and mounting hardware shall be provided as required for a complete
installation.
F. Where sensors are located on exterior walls, Contractor shall provide an insulated
mounting sub-base.
G. Where sensors are located outdoors, Contractor shall provide sunshield enclosures.
H. Furnish and install all mounting accessories, junction boxes, wall boxes and wall
plates as required for installation of all devices.
I. All Work described in this Specification shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and
calibrated by electricians, technicians and mechanics qualified for the Work.
J. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper operation and installation of all control
systems herein specified. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all
interfaces with other equipment and contractors to achieve the required control
operation.
3.02 FIELD TESTING
A. Preliminary and final field tests shall be performed for all equipment provided under
B. Additional requirements for the final field testing of the equipment provided under
this Specification are as follows:
1. Integrated System Field Test:
a. Following checkout of the HMCS, Contractor, under the supervision
of the HMCS Supplier, shall perform an integrated system test to
verify that all components and programmed software are operating
properly as a fully integrated system and that the intended monitoring
and control functions are fully implemented and operational.
b. Contractor shall perform all Sequence of Operations in the presence
of the Engineer.
c. The HMCS, including all field sensors/transducers and instruments,
shall be fully operational and shall run trouble-free for a successful
test. Any defects or problems found during the integrated system test
shall be immediately corrected by Contractor and the system retested
to demonstrate proper operation.
A. Contractor, under the supervision of the HMCS supplier, and other component
suppliers, as applicable, shall perform the following:
15950-32 11/2017
2048
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Check and approve the installation of all HMCS components and all cable
and wiring connections between the system components prior to placing the
system into operation.
2. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of
all instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and
testing of final control actions. When there are future operational functions
included in the Work, they should be included in the system checkout. All
problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in
start-up of the system.
B. Contractor and the HMCS supplier shall be responsible for initial operation of the
HCMS and shall make all necessary modifications or replacements to ensure that the
HMCS functions in the manner intended by these Specifications.
C. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer certified calibration reports for field
instruments and devices and panel mounted devices upon completion of calibration.
D. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an installation inspection report certifying
that all system components have been installed correctly and are operating in the
manner intended. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of
Contractor and the HMCS supplier.
3.04 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall perform cleaning and site maintenance for all equipment
provided under this Specification, as specified in Detailed Specification 01740 -
Cleaning and Site Maintenance.
B. Clean dirt and marks and other debris from equipment.
C. Remove debris and waste material resulting from installation.
3.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
A. General:
1. ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC” (O-O-A) selector switches shall start the unit when
in the “ON” position, stop the unit when in the “OFF” position, and perform
a specified operation through the direct digital controls (DDC) when in the
“AUTOMATIC” position.
2. Safety devices shall be hardwired, interlocked to operate in “ON” and
“AUTOMATIC” positions.
3. Safety sequences shall override other automatic control sequences.
4. Reset schedules and set points shown in Sequence of Operations are for
initial programming and start-up, during system check out the reset schedules
and set points shall be fine-tuned to obtain desired comfort and energy
15950-33 11/2017
2049
CONTRACT DEL-260H
savings results. The Engineer reserves the right to make set point changes
based on installed operating conditions, at no additional cost to the City.
5. Automatic control functions that switch equipment on and off must be
programmed with dead bands or time delays to prevent short cycling of
equipment.
6. Hardwire relay logic shown on the drawings for the “ON” position is
provided so that units can provide fan control if the DDC microprocessors
should fail. In order to operate the fan in this mode, motorized dampers are
required to be positioned accordingly before the fan can be energized to
prevent dead-heading the fan. The hardwire relay logic shown on the
Contract Drawings is generic and may need to be modified accordingly
depending on number of dampers and damper logic requirements. Where
additional damper logic descriptions are required to convey hardwire
requirements, “ON” position logic may be included within the sequence of
operations and is understood to be hardwired without the use of DDC
microprocessors.
7. ATC Panels:
a. All controllers, relays, and other devices required to provide the
Sequence of Operations shall be housed within the ATC panel, except
where otherwise noted.
b. O-O-A selector switches and indicating lights shall be mounted on
the panel face.
c. Indicating lights shall be provided for each piece of equipment
controlled from the ATC panel and include the following, where
applicable:
1) Run.
2) Stop.
3) Motor Overload Alarm.
4) Low Temperature Alarm.
5) Dirty Filter.
6) Fail
a) Equipment indexed to run that has not been energized.
b) Broken belt drive
7) Ventilation System On.
8) Ventilation System Off.
15950-34 11/2017
2050
CONTRACT DEL-260H
9) Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorine Storage Room ventilation exhaust)

10) Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorinator Room ventilation exhaust)
11) Chlorine scrubber system activated
8. Strobe and Horn: A strobe and horn shall be provided at the ATC panel. The
strobe and horn shall be energized whenever the equipment is in alarm for the
following:
a. Motor Overload.
b. Low Temperature.
c. Fail
1) Equipment indexed to run that has not been energized.
2) Broken drive belt.
d. Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorine Storage Room ventilation exhaust)
e. Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorinator Room ventilation exhaust)
f. Chlorine scrubber system activated
9. Dampers are two positions, unless otherwise noted by “(modulating)” next to
the damper mark number.
10. Motorized dampers and valves shall be provided with sufficient torque to
open and close the devices. As a result, more than one actuator may be
required even though one actuator is shown on the Contract Drawings.
11. Provide a filter differential pressure switch/gage for measuring the air flow
resistance through filters at all filter sections. The device shall indicate
differential pressure at the filter section and provide pressure signal inputs
into the ATC. Dirty filter set point shall be per the filter manufacturer’s
recommendation.
12. Each 120V damper shall be provided with a dedicated disconnect switch
mounted within the ATC panel.
13. Where equipment is provided with modulating return and modulating outside
air dampers that operate relative to one another, Contractor shall provide
independent damper actuators. Contractor shall provide a range controller for
each damper to compensate for non-linear control characteristics. Dampers
shall be electronically linked. Mechanically linked dampers are not
acceptable.
14. Provide current sensing relays to monitor broken drive belts in belt -driven
equipment.
15950-35 11/2017
2051
CONTRACT DEL-260H
15. Provide discrete alarm contacts in the ATC panel for future connection for
the following:
a. Common alarm (any alarm condition except those alarms described
below)
b. Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorine Storage Room ventilation exhaust)
c. Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorinator Room ventilation exhaust)
d. Chlorine scrubber system activated
B. Equipment Operating Descriptions:
1. Heating and Ventilating Unit (HV-1) (Chlorine Storage and Chlorinator
Rooms):
a. HV-1 shall be indexed ON/OFF by a START/STOP pushbutton at the
ATC panel. HV-1 supply fan shall be energized to provide
continuous ventilation to the space.
b. When HV-1 is indexed to START, MD-HV1-1, MD-HV1-2, MD-
EF1-1, and MD-EF2-1 shall open and then the unit supply fan shall
be energized. When HV-1 is indexed to STOP, the unit supply fan
shall be de-energized and the dampers shall close.
c. The unit manufacturer shall wire following to the factory installed
unit control panel or remote interface, monitoring and control by the
ATC system:
1) Fan start.
2) Fan stop.
3) Fan status (energized or de-energized).
4) Fan motor overload.
5) Face and bypass damper control (modulating).
6) Intake damper control (two position).
7) Damper status (opened, closed).
8) Dirty filter.
d. Heating and Ventilating Mode:

1) Heating shall be automatic through the HMCS and initiated when
15950-36 11/2017
2052
CONTRACT DEL-260H
the outside air temperature sensor is below 65° F

2) When outside the air temperature sensor value is below 40° F,
VH-HV1-1 shall provide fixed control to ensure full flow to the
hot water coil. The discharge air temperature sensor shall
modulate the coil face and bypass damper to maintain a
discharge air temperature set point of 65° F.
3) When outside air temperature sensor value is above 40° F, the
coil face and bypass damper shall be in the face position to allow
full air flow through the coil. Discharge air temperature sensor
shall modulate VH-HV1-1 to maintain a discharge air
temperature set point of 65° F.
4) HV-1 provides air and exixting convectors shall provide heat to
the Chlorine Storage Room and Chlorinator Room to maintain a
temperature of 65°F in these rooms. This temperature is
required based on process needs.
e. Ventilating Mode:
1) Ventilating mode shall be automatic through the HMCS and
initiated when the outside air temperature is above 65° F.
2) Coil face and bypass damper shall be in the bypass mode so that
there is no air flow through the coil.
3) VH-HV1-1 shall be in the bypass mode so that hot water cannot
enter the coil.
f. HV-1 shall be de-energized under any of the following conditions:
1) Ventilation system chlorine detection panel in alarm.
2) Chlorine scrubber system activated.
3) Ventilation emergency stop switch activated.
g. A freezestat shall de-energize the supply fan then close outside air
damper MD-HV1-1, close supply air damper MD-HV1-2, and
position the coil face and bypass damper to bypass if the discharge air
temperature is less than 40°F. The alarm shall require reset at the
ATC panel.
h. A current sensing relay shall monitor the motor current and provide a
broken drive belt alarm at the ATC panel when a no load motor
current is detected.
2. Exhaust Fan (EF-1) (Chlorine Storage Room):
15950-37 11/2017
2053
CONTRACT DEL-260H
a. EF-1 shall be indexed ON/OFF/AUTO by an O-O-A switch at the

ATC panel. In the AUTO position, the fan shall be energized and de-
energized through a software interlock with HV-1.
b. When EF-1 is indexed to operate (ON or AUTO), MD-EF1-1 shall
open and then the fan shall be energized. When EF-1 is indexed to
stop, the fan shall be de-energized and MD-EF1-1 shall close.
c. In the ON and AUTO positions, EF-1 shall be de-energized under the
following conditions:
d. A current sensing relay shall monitor the motor current and provide a
broken drive belt alarm at the ATC panel when a no-load motor
3. Exhaust Fan (EF-2) (Chlorinator Room):
energized through a software interlock with HV-1.
b. When EF-2 is indexed to operate, MD-EF2-1 shall open and then the
fan shall be energized. When EF-2 is indexed to stop, the fan shall be
de-energized and MD-EF2-1 shall close.
c. In the ON and AUTO positions, EF-2 shall be de-energized under the
following conditions:
4. Ventilation System Alarm Station (Main Room):
a. Ventilation system alarm station panel shall be located as shown on
the Contract Drawings to provide ventilation and gas detection
system status. The panel shall be interlocked with the ventilation
system (HV-1, EF-1 and EF-2) and the chlorine gas detection system.
When the ventilation system is active, a green indicating light shall
15950-38 11/2017
2054
CONTRACT DEL-260H
be illuminated. When the ventilation system is inactive, a red

indicating light shall be illuminated.
b. Provide discrete alarm lights and energize the strobe and horn at the
panel for the following:
1) ATC panel common alarm (any alarm condition except those
alarms described below)
2) Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorine Storage Room ventilation exhaust)
3) Chlorine gas alarm (Chlorinator Room ventilation exhaust)
4) Chlorine scrubber system activated
c. Push-to-test circuitry shall be provided at the panel to simultaneously
test all indicating lights, horn, and strobe using a single pushbutton.
d. Alarm silence circuitry shall be provided at the panel to silence the
horn. The strobe light shall remain illuminated until the alarm is
cleared.
5. Supply Fan in Electric Service Room (SF-1):
a. SF-1 shall be indexed ON/OFF/AUTO by an O-O-A switch at the
energized based on the relative temperature of the space and outdoor
air temperature.
b. The HMCS system shall compare the space temperature and outdoor
air temperature through the space temperature sensor and the outdoor
air temperature sensor. Do the following when the outdoor air
temperature is 80°F or greater:
1) When the space temperature is greater than 5°F above the
outdoor temperature, the fan shall be indexed ON.
2) When the space temperature is 100°F, the fan shall be indexed
ON.
c. When SF-1 is indexed to operate, MD-SF1-1 and MD-EF-3 shall
open and the fan shall be energized. When SF-1 is indexed to stop,
the fan shall be de-energized and the dampers shall close.
6. Exhaust Fan in Electric Service Room (EF-3):
15950-39 11/2017
2055
CONTRACT DEL-260H
energized through a software interlock with SF-1.
b. When EF-3 is indexed to operate, MD-EF3-1 shall open and then the
de-energized then the dampers shall close.
c. A current sensing relay shall monitor the motor current and provide a
7. Exhaust Fan EF-4 (Electric Room 2):
energized based on the relative temperature of the space and outdoor
air temperature.
b. The HMCS system shall compare the space temperature and outdoor
air temperature through the space temperature sensor and the outdoor
air temperature sensor and do the following when the outdoor air
temperature is 80°F or greater:
c. When the space temperature is greater than 5°F above the outdoor
temperature, the fan shall be indexed ON.
1) When the space temperature is 100°F, the fan shall be indexed
ON.
d. When EF-4 is indexed to operate, MD-EF4-1 shall open and then the
de-energized and the dampers shall close.
8. Hot Water Pump (HWP-1) (Basement):
a. HWP-1 shall be indexed ON/OFF/AUTO by an O-O-A switch at the
ATC panel. In the AUTO position, the pump shall be energized and
de-energized through the outdoor air temperature sensor at 65°F.
b. A current sensing relay shall monitor the motor current and provide
run indication on the ATC panel.
9. Electric Unit Heaters (EUH):
a. EUH shall be energized and de-energized through its associated space
thermostat set at 55° F.
END OF SECTION
15950-40 11/2017
2056
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 15951H – TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 15951H
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 15951H – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing replaces
General Specification 15951 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing in its entirety. All
PART 1 GENERAL
shown, specified and required to perform testing, adjusting and balancing of all
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems as specified or required for
proper operation.
1. All new equipment.
2. Existing zone flow and return header balancing valve differential pressure
data prior to beginning piping work associated with the existing boiler.
3. Final flow and return header balancing valve differential pressure data after
completing piping work associated with the existing boiler.
Article Title Page

15951-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.02 PAYMENT ............................................................................................2
1.03 REFERENCES ......................................................................................2
1.04 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................2
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS ...............................................................................3
1.07 CORRECTIVE ADJUSTMENTS .........................................................3
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................3
2.01 INSTRUMENTS: GENERAL ..............................................................3
2.02 AIR BALANCE INSTRUMENTS ........................................................4
2.03 WATER BALANCE INSTRUMENTS ................................................4
2.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASURING INSTRUMENTS ...........4
2.05 BALANCING SHEAVES AND BELTS ..............................................4
PART 3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................4
3.01 GENERAL .............................................................................................4
3.02 INSPECTION ........................................................................................4
3.03 TESTING OF PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND DUCT ............................5
15951H-1 11/2017
2057
CONTRACT DEL-260H
3.04 BALANCING AND ADJUSTING .......................................................6

3.05 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS .................................................8
3.06 MARKING OF SETTING.....................................................................8
3.07 IDENTIFICATION OF TEST PORTS .................................................8
1.02 PAYMENT
1.03 REFERENCES
the following except as shown or specified:
1. ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers, Inc.), Systems Volume, Latest Edition.
2. Test, adjust and balance systems in accord with:
a. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards for
Total System Balance, Latest Edition.
b. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): Standards for
Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems, Latest
Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and material specifications for the approval of the
Engineer. Submittals shall include, but not be limited, to:
A. Data Sheets:
1. Submit samples of data sheets on each item of equipment for approval.
2. Submit data sheets on each item of testing equipment required.
3. Include name of device, manufacturer's name, model number, latest date of
calibration, and correction factors.
B. Report Forms:
1. Submit specimen copies of report forms for Engineer's approval.
2. Forms shall be 8-1/2 by 11-inch paper for looseleaf binding, with blanks for
listing of the required test ratings and for certification of report.
3. Reports shall be on the organizations approved forms imprinted with the
company's name.
4. Certified report outlining procedure used to balance the system and the
types of measuring devices used.
C. Test results shall be submitted on approved forms in a typed format.
D. Submit certified copies of required test reports to the Engineer for approval.
15951H-2 11/2017
2058
CONTRACT DEL-260H

A. Balancers Qualifications:
1. Submit work experience or resume of proposed biographical data on
employee who will directly supervise the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Work.
2. Submit proof of certification by National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(NEBB), Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), or Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA), or
demonstrate that the standards and experience required for certification are
possessed, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. Submit a record of at least 5 years' experience in the testing and balancing
contracting industry, engaged in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
work.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Heating, ventilating, air conditioning equipment shall be completely installed and
in continuous operation as required to accomplish the test, adjust and balance work
specified.
B. Reports shall be certified by the testing engineer that the methods used and the
results achieved are as specified.
1.07 CORRECTIVE ADJUSTMENTS
A. Should corrective measures caused by faulty installation require retesting, adjusting
and balancing, such work shall be performed at no additional expense to the City.
B. Inspections:
1. Fan Belt Deflection: No less than 1/4-inch or more than a 1/2-inch.
2. Finned Coils: Plate type fins shall be combed out with a fin comb for
appropriate fin spacing. Helical fins shall be straightened with blunt bladed
instrument.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INSTRUMENTS: GENERAL
A. Contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation, tools, ladders, etc. to
complete all air and hydronic balancing tests and adjustments.
B. Instrumentation shall be in accordance with NEBB, AABC, or SMACNA
requirements and shall be calibrated to the accuracy standards demanded by these
organizations.
C. Flow-measuring hoods (manufactured, not fabricated) shall be acceptable for
measurement of ceiling diffuser performance only.
D. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for safe keeping of all instrumentation
during the course of work.
15951H-3 11/2017
2059
CONTRACT DEL-260H
2.02 AIR BALANCE INSTRUMENTS

A. Provide instrumentation and equipment required to perform air balance tests of
HVAC equipment, ducts, etc.
2.03 WATER BALANCE INSTRUMENTS
A. Provide as all instrumentation and equipment as required to perform water balance
tests of the HVAC equipment, piping, etc.
2.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
A. Provide all instrumentation and equipment as required to measure all facets of the
complete HVAC systems performance
2.05 BALANCING SHEAVES AND BELTS
A. Balancing sheaves and belts shall be provided for all belt driven equipment.
B. Sheaves and belts shall be provided to match construction and duty provided by the
equipment manufacturer.
C. Equipment sheaves and belts replaced or not required to achieve balancing shall be
submitted to the City as spare parts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. All testing, adjusting, and balancing of air and hydronic systems shall be performed
in compliance with the standard procedure manual published by the testing,
adjusting, and balancing organization affiliated with the Contractor. Contractor
shall submit one copy of the standard procedure manual to the Engineer for his
records.
B. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the protection and safeguarding of his
work and shall provide every protection against accidents, injury, and damage to
persons and property.
C. Contractor shall keep dust, dirt, and debris to an absolute minimum and reinstall all
removed ceiling components to their original positions at the end of each day.
D. Contractor shall be fully responsible for removal and reinstallation of ceiling
system and replacement of any component damaged.
E. Contractor shall install additional access panels at no extra cost to the City, as is
required to gain access to equipment concealed above ceilings, behind walls, or any
other concealed space.
F. Air systems shall be tested, adjusted, and balanced with clean filters.
G. Hydronic systems shall be tested, adjusted, and balanced with clean strainers.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall conform to the requirements of this Contract Equipment
Check:
15951H-4 11/2017
2060
CONTRACT DEL-260H
1. Verify proper overload heater sizes.

2. Verify function of safety and operating controls.
3. Verify proper operation of equipment.
4. Report on inspection, observation and checking procedures.
3.03 TESTING OF PIPING, EQUIPMENT AND DUCT
A. The Contractor shall be bound by this Section to test and adjust all systems and
accessories covered under this Contract. The Contractor shall also comply with the
requirements of testing as outlined in the individual sections. Furthermore, he shall
operate and maintain these systems for certain periods of time as specified herein,
and shall leave them in good working order. The Contractor shall provide all
necessary equipment and labor for this Work.
B. All piping systems shall be thoroughly cleaned by flushing with water, disinfected,
and tested by the Contractor for tightness. Prior to testing all other piping systems,
the Contractor shall submit a test procedure for each system to the Engineer for
review. Pipe lines shall be flushed at a rate of at least 2.5 feet per second for a
duration of minimum one hour. The units and control valves shall be isolated
before flushing. The pipe line shall be flushed again after opening the valves at the
units. In general, piping shall be tested hydrostatically at 1-1/2 times the maximum
design pressure for which the system is intended, but not less than 100 psi. The
line shall be filled with water for a period of not less than 6 hours, then subject to
the indicated test pressure. Duration of test pressure shall be four (4) hours. During
the pressure test there shall be no leakage. All air shall be purged from the line
before pressure testing. Any leak shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer and the system retested until all such piping shows tight.
C. All ductwork systems including air outlets shall be tested, adjusted and balanced
for within limits of the required airflows as indicated on the Contract Drawings and
specified in this Section.
D. After all final tests have been performed on all equipment and on all sub-systems
installed under this Contract, including the testing of all controls specified in other
Sections, and after the results from all such testing have been accepted, the
Contractor shall test the overall system by demonstrating its ability to respond
properly to normal changes in controlled parameters, as well as to system upsets.
To facilitate this, he shall make available a minimum of two men, thoroughly
familiar with the systems and equipment installed under this Contract, for a
minimum of two (2) days to test the system by changing controlled parameters and
generating system upsets as directed by the Engineer, and demonstrating that the
sequential action appropriate to the particular change or upset occurs automatically.
Where actual change or upset is not feasible, the Contractor shall simulate the
change or the upset. Controlled parameter changes shall include, but not
necessarily be limited to, any change in temperature, pressure, flow rate, fluid level,
load, etc., which should result in an automatic change in the position of a control
valve or control damper, in the output rate of a piece of equipment, in the normal
15951H-5 11/2017
2061
CONTRACT DEL-260H
start-up or shutdown of equipment, etc. The change in the state of the controlled
device or equipment shall be shown to result in a corrective action on the controlled
parameter. Upsets include, but are not limited to, any condition which should cause
annunciation of an alarm, safety shutdown of equipment, startup of standby
equipment, closing of fusible-link devices, lifting of relief valves, etc. The
Contractor shall immediately restore to its original state any safety device, the state
of which has been changed by its having been tested.
E. The Contractor shall immediately correct any system deficiency that should come
to light during testing.
F. After the overall system testing has been completed, and after all final adjustments
have been made, the Contractor shall operate and maintain all new systems and
equipment, site-wide, associated therewith, for a period of thirty consecutive days.
During this period all normal maintenance (filter replacements, strainer cleaning,
periodic checks of safety devices, datalogging, etc.) shall be performed by the
Contractor. If, during this period, any work beyond routine maintenance of
equipment and materials installed under this Contract, should be required to
maintain proper operation of the overall system, the elapsed time shall be forfeited,
and a new thirty (30)-day period shall commence following the completion of the
corrective action.
3.04 BALANCING AND ADJUSTING
A. In addition to any other reference to balancing and adjusting specified elsewhere in
these Section, the Contractor shall be bound by this portion of the Section to
balance, adjust and leave in good working order all systems and accessories covered
under this Contract.
B. The Contractor shall procure the services of an independent balancing and testing
agency which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air
conditioning systems to balance, test and adjust all systems installed under this
Section.
C. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer at least two weeks in advance of the date
scheduled for balancing to commence; at the Engineer's discretion, the balancing
shall be conducted in the Engineer's presence.
D. At least three (3) months prior to the commencement of balancing, the Contractor
shall forward a detailed explanation of the balancing procedure to the Engineer for
review. In general, the method shall conform to those specified by the NEBB,
AABC or SMACNA.
E. All piping systems shall be balanced under this Section to provide the flows
indicted on the Contract Drawings or in this Section.
F. Before beginning to balance the air systems the Contractor shall check, in the
presence of the Engineer, all filters and coils for cleanliness, dampers (automatic,
volume and fire) for correct position, all fans for proper rotation, and temperature
controls for minimum completeness to allow for proper balancing. If any of the
above or other conditions are found which would not allow for proper balancing
15951H-6 11/2017
2062
CONTRACT DEL-260H
the Contractor shall take the necessary corrective actions, at his own expense,
before balancing begins.
G. All heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems shall be balanced by the
Contractor by adjustment of dampers, fan sheaves, apparatus and air outlets to
provide the air quantities indicated on the Contract Drawings. If necessary,
adjustments of air outlets shall be made to eliminate drafts.
H. Balancing for all air systems shall be accomplished in a manner to first minimize
throttling losses, then fan speed shall be adjusted to meet design conditions. All air
outlets and fans shall be balanced within 5 percent of the design capacity.
I. Balancing for all hydronic systems shall be accomplished in a manner that results
in the balancing having a minimum pressure required to provide an accurate flow
measurement and not excessively high. (Inadequate pressure drop renders flow
readings inaccurate; excessive pressure drop imposes needless additional head on
the pumps). Balancing for all hydronic systems shall be accomplished in a manner
to first minimize throttling losses.
J. Pump flows shall be balanced within 5 percent of the specified capacity.
K. After the systems have been balanced, the Contractor shall submit and certify to the
City, a list containing the following minimum equipment:
1. Room served.
2. Size, quantity and model of air outlet or equipment.
3. Type of air outlet or equipment.
4. Air flow indicated on Contract Drawings.
5. Air flow measured.
6. GPM indicated on Contract Drawings.
7. GPM measured.
8. Coil entering and leaving water temperatures.
9. Fan cfm indicated on the Contract Drawings.
10. Fan cfm measured.
11. Fan motor running amps.
12. Coil entering and leaving water pressure.
13. Filter differential pressure.
14. Boiler entering and leaving water temperature.
15. Existing heating zone entering and leaving water temperature as measured
at the supply and return header.
16. Static pressure profile of all air handling unit sections.
17. Pump entering and leaving water pressure.
15951H-7 11/2017
2063
CONTRACT DEL-260H
18. Outside air temperature.

L. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer two Days in advance of the start-up of the
systems. To be ready for start-up, the equipment must be "off", and the system
must be filled, purged, balanced and tested.
M. The Contractor shall start heating and/or cooling equipment. Once system design
temperature has been reached, and system is in equilibrium, again record the
information requested above.
N. The Contractor shall submit all recorded data to Engineer for review.
O. The Contractor shall adjust any or all equipment which, in the City's opinion, is not
set within acceptable limits of ±5 percent.
3.05 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set and adjust
automatically operated devices to achieve required sequence of operations.
B. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration and list those
controls requiring adjustment by control system installer.
3.06 MARKING OF SETTING
A. Following approval of testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) Verification Report,
the setting of all HVAC adjustment devices including valves, and manual dampers
shall be permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be
restored if disturbed at any time.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION OF TEST PORTS
A. The TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location points of
duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the identification shall be
made on the exterior side of the insulation. All penetrations through ductwork and
ductwork insulation shall be sealed to prevent air leakage or to maintain integrity
of vapor barrier.
END OF SECTION
15951H-8 11/2017
2064
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16010H – GENERAL ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 16010H
General Electrical Requirements
Specification 16010 – General Electrical Requirements except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Replace Paragraph 1.03 A. with the following
END OF SECTION
16010H-1 11/2017
2065
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16010H – GENERAL ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
16010H-2 11/2017
2066
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16076H – LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 16076H
Labeling and Identification
Specification 16076 – Labeling and Identification except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Replace Paragraph 1.03 A. with the following:
END OF SECTION
16076H-1 11/2017
2067
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16076H – LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260H
16076H-2 11/2017
2068
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16121H – ELECTRIC WIRES AND CABLES
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 16121H
Electric Wires and Cables
Specification 16121 – Electric Wire and Cables except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Replace Paragraph 1.02. A. with the following
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Electric wires and cables shall comply with the latest applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following:
2. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
4. ASTM B5 – High Conductivity Tough-Pitch Copper Refinery Shapes.
5. ASTM B8 – Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-hard
or Soft.
6. ASTM D69 – Test Methods for Friction Tape
7. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
8. UL Standard No. 44 – Wires and Cables, Rubber-Insulated. (Standard for
Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables)
9. UL Standard No. 83 – Wires and Cables, Thermoplastic-Insulated.
10. UL Standard 486A – Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors.UL 1072 – Medium Voltage Power Cables.
11. AEIC CS6-96 – Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Shielded Power Cable.
12. NETA – International Electrical Testing Association.
13. IEEE 48 – Test Procedures and Requirements for High Voltage Alternating-
Current Cable Terminations.
14. Consolidated Edison Company for electric wires and cables.
16121H-1 11/2017
2069
CONTRACT DEL-260H
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 300 VOLT INSULATED CABLE
Replace Paragraph 2.01 B.1 with the following:
1. Conductors shall be stranded, copper, No. 16 AWG minimum size. All

conductors shall be polyethylene insulated and twisted in pairs with an
aluminum-mylar shield overlapped.
2.02 600 VOLT INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE
1. Conductors shall be stranded, copper, single conductor cable conforming to

ASTM B8 and No. 12 AWG minimum size.
Replace Paragraph 2.02 C.1 with the following:
1. Conductors shall be stranded, tinned coated copper conforming to ASTM B8, No.
12 AWG minimum size.
Add following after Paragraph 2.05.D
E. Stress Cones: Provide a Class 3 indoor stress cone conforming to IEEE Std. 48 for
15kV, designed to accept cable insulation diameters from .495-inches to 1.875-
inches with cable shield device and grounding devices for a No. 2 copper ground
wire.
.
F. SECTIONALIZING CABINET
1. Provide 15kV sectionalizing cabinet with 200A 15kV junctions. Cabinet shall be
manufactured with min 12 gauge steel and stainless steel hardware.
2. Furnish 15kV sectionalizing cabinet as manufactured by Cooper Industries,

Houston, TX, SecTER Cabinet type Catalogue No. SEC 36623F2152SoG, or
approved equal.
G. DEADBREAK ELBOW CONNECTORS

1. All medium voltage existing and new cables shall be connected to transformers,
switching cabinets and junctions with deadbreak elbow connectors. Deadbreak
connectors shall comply with IEEE 386 standards.
2. Furnish 200A 15kV deadbreak elbow connectors fully shielded and insulated
plug-in termination type molded using high quality peroxide-cured EPDM
16121H-2 11/2017
2070
CONTRACT DEL-260H
insulation as manufactured by Cooper Industries, Houston, TX, or approved

equal.
H. FEEDTHROUGH INSERTS
1. Provide 200A 15kV rotatable feedthrough inserts to provide dual bushing from
single bushing well. Feedthrough insert shall comply with IEEE 386 standards.
2. Furnish Feedthrough insert by Cooper Industries, Houston, TX, or approved
equal.
Delete paragraph 2.06.B.1.

Add following after Paragraph 2.06.
2.07 CABLE FIREPROOFING
A. All medium voltage cables installed in manholes shall be fireproofed as specified

below.
B. The fire and arc proofing tape shall consist of a flexible conformable unsupported
intumescent elastomer. The tape shall be not less than .030 inches thick and be
capable of over 100 percent elongation. The tape shall be non-corrosive to metallic
cable sheaths and compatible with synthetic cable jackets (i.e. semi-conducting URD
type, polyethylene, P.V.C., etc.). It shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support
combustion. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, salt water, gases
and sewage.
C. The wrapped tape shall be secured by a band, consisting of two layers (the second
wrapped directly over the first) of glass cloth electrical tape. The completed
installation of single half-lapped layer of arc and fireproofing tape shall be capable of
withstanding a high current (60 Hz) fault arc temperature of 13,000 degrees K for 70
cycles.
D. Fire and arc proofing tape shall conform to Scotch 77, as manufactured by the 3M
Company, St. Paul, MN or approved equal
E. Glass cloth electrical tape shall conform to Scotch 69, as manufactured by the 3M
Company, St. Paul, MN.

A. The Contractor shall provide acceptance testing of the medium voltage wire and
cable. The Contractor shall provide acceptance testing of medium voltage cables
accessories and equipment. The acceptance testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer
and certified by the Contractor. Acceptance testing shall be performed specified in
Section 3.05B through F.
16121H-3 11/2017
2071
CONTRACT DEL-260H
END OF SECTION
16121H-4 11/2017
2072
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16131H – ELECTRIC CONDUIT SYSTEM
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 16131H
Electric Conduit System
Specification 16131 – Electric Conduit System except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
included in the lump sum price bid for Contract Item E-LS-1, as described in Detailed
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
Replace Paragraph 2.02 B. with the following:
B. The electric conduit system shall be designed, constructed and installed suitable for
earthquake regulations in accordance with the seismic requirements of the City of
New York Building Code, the Uniform Building Code for Zone 2A application and
local and state building codes.
2.02 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
Delete Paragraph 2.03 B
Replace Paragraph 2.03 C. with the following:
C. Flexible conduit used in all areas shall include a steel core with a liquid-tight,
polyvinyl chloride cover and shall include a built-in copper ground for sizes 3/4-inch
through 1-1/4 inch.
2.03 OUTLET BOXES AND FITTINGS
B. For all areas, conduit fittings and outlet bodies shall be cast gray iron alloy, cast
malleable iron bodies and covers. All units shall be gasketed, watertight, and threaded
with five full threads and shall have rust-proofing in accordance with the requirements
16131H-1 11/2017
2073
CONTRACT DEL-260H
of Paragraph 2.06. Fittings and bodies installed on PVC coated conduits shall also
include interior and exterior coatings equivalent to the conduit.
Replace Paragraph 2.04 D. with the following:
D. For concealed areas, pressed steel boxes of the proper size and depths for the
application shall be provided. Boxes shall be rated NEMA 12, not less than No. 14
U.S. Standard Gauge (0.078 inch). The conduit openings shall be provided with oil
resistant gaskets. Conduits shall be fastened to these boxes with grounding bushings
and hub. All unused outlets or holes shall be left sealed.
Replace Paragraph 2.04 F. with the following:
F. For all conduit runs, connections to boxes and fittings shall be made through threaded
holes. Where necessary, unions may be used. Unions in hazardous locations shall be
Crouse Hinds type UNF, UNL, UNY conduit fittings or equal to be approved by the
Engineer. Unions in non-hazardous areas shall be Universal or Erickson conduit
couplings or equal to be approved by the Engineer.
Replace Paragraph 2.04 H. with the following:
H. All boxes installed for concealed conduit, shall be provided with extension rings or
plaster rings and covers as required. For finished areas stainless 302/304. satin
beveled steel cover and device plates for surface mounted boxes shall be used. For
other areas galvanized ferrous and galvanized cast ferrous metal cover and device
plates with neoprene gaskets shall be used.
2.04 CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
Replace Paragraph 2.05.E.1 with the following:
1. Conduit hubs shall be threaded, insulated throat type with bonding screw
grounding bushing.
Replace Paragraph 2.05.F with the following:
F. Conduit Bushings:
1. Conduit bushings shall be insulated, grounding type with lay-in-lug connection.

A Hub shall be provided for each bushing.
2.05 TERMINAL, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
Delete Paragraph 2.06 B.
16131H-2 11/2017
2074
CONTRACT DEL-260H
Replace Paragraph 2.06 C. with the following:
C. Boxes and accessories shall conform to the following area classifications:
1. For corrosive locations boxes shall be corrosion resistant, NEMA Type 4X.
Except for chlorine areas, boxes shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel
material with sealed seams. Boxes in chlorine areas shall be constructed of non-
metallic FRP materials and shall be explosion proof NEMA Type 7.
2. Refer to the NEMA room designations on contract drawings for additional detail
on box and accessory ratings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
G. All underground conduits shall be encased in reinforced concrete. See Specification

16133 - Underground Ducts, Ducts In Concrete and Contract Drawings for additional
information.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
Replace Paragraph 3.02 O. with the following:
O. Where conduit enter or leave equipment located within electrical, control, chlorine,
scrubber or other corrosive areas and rooms, the conduit shall be sealed and packed
with duct seal compound.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS
F. Conduit connections in concealed locations shall terminate at enclosures with

grounding bushings and hub. Terminations shall include grounding bushings and hub
at each location. All conduit shall be bonded to the safety ground.
END OF SECTION
16131H-3 11/2017
2075
CONTRACT DEL-260H
16131H-4 11/2017
2076
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16221H – ELECTRIC MOTORS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
SECTION 16221H
Electric Motors
Specification 16221 – Electric Motors except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Delete 1.03A and replace with the following:

END OF SECTION
16221H-1 11/2017
2077
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16221H – ELECTRIC MOTORS
CONTRACT DEL-260H
16221H-2 11/2017
2078
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07140E – FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 07140E
Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
NOTE: All Work for this Section shall be in accordance with the requirements of
General Specification 07140 – Fluid-Applied Waterproofing except as modified
herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 RELATED SECTION
A. None
1.03 PAYMENT
included in the Allowance bid for Contract Item E-A-5, as described in Detailed
Delete paragraph 1.03.B
Delete paragraph 1.05.A.1.a and b
Delete paragraph 1.05.A.2.b
Delete paragraph 1.06.A.2
Delete paragraph 1.06.G
END OF SECTION
07140E-1 11/2017
2079
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 07140E – FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
CONTRACT DEL-260E
07140E-2 11/2017
2080
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13281E – ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 13281E
ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
A. Except for abatement of unforeseen ACM and related Work payable under the
allowance, as described in Section 01355– Hazardous Materials Control, no
separate payment will be made for performing any Work required under this
for Contract Item E-LS-1, as described in Detail Specification 01270 –
END OF SECTION
13281E-1 11/2017
2081
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13281E – ASBESTOS MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
13281E-2 11/2017
2082
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13282E – MERCURY MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 13282E
Mercury Management
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
A. Except for unforeseen mercury-containing materials and related Work payable

under the allowance, as described in Section 01355 – Hazardous Materials
Control, no separate payment will be made for performing any Work required
sum price bid for Contract Item E-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification
END OF SECTION
13282E-1 11/2017
2083
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13282E – MERCURY MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
13282E-2 11/2017
2084
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13283E - LEAD MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 13283G
Lead Management
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
A. A.Except for unforeseen lead-containing materials and related work eligible for
payment under allowance, as described in Section 01355– Hazardous Materials
Control, no separate payment will be made for performing any work required
sum price bid for Contract Item E-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification
END OF SECTION
13283E-1 11/2017
2085
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13283E - LEAD MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
13283E-2 11/2017
2086
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13284E - PCB MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 13284E
PCB Management
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
for Contract Item E-LS-1, as described in Detailed Specification 01270 –
END OF SECTION
13284E-1 11/2017
2087
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 13284E - PCB MANAGEMENT
CONTRACT DEL-260E
13284E-2 11/2017
2088
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16010E – GENERAL ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16010E
General Electrical Requirements
Specification 16010 – General Electrical Requirements except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Replace Paragraph 1.03 A. with the following
END OF SECTION
16010E-1 11/2017
2089
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16010E – GENERAL ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16010E-2 11/2017
2090
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16020E – TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16020E
Temporary Electrical System
Specification 16020 – Temporary Electrical System except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT

5. See attached Sketch D-1.01A.3 for Temporary Electrical System
Arrangement Schematic Diagram.
Add following after Paragraph 1.06 B.5:
6. Provide 400kW 480Y/277V diesel fuel standby portable generator to maintain

continuous power supply for facility operations. Portable generator shall have
double wall fuel tank. The Contractor shall provide all fuel necessary for phasing
operations.
7. Provide 800A 480/277V 3PH. 4W generator connection cabinet for connection to

existing electrical distribution equipment. Berthold Electric CO, Chicago, IL
catalogue no. W-08-5-C-M.or approved equal.
8. The Contractor shall provide all portable cables necessary to connect portable
generator to existing distribution equipment.
9. The Contractor shall provide a start signal circuit from the existing ATS to
portable generator.
10. The Contractor shall provide a 120V branch circuit for generator
jacket heater.
Replace Sketch D-1.06B.5 with Sketch D-1.01A.3 on next page

16020E-1 11/2017
2091
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16020E – TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CONTRACT DEL-260E
END OF SECTION
16020E-2 11/2017
2092
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16035E – DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16035E
Demolition, Electrical
Specification 16035 – Demolition Electrical except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
16035E-1 11/2017
2093
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16035E – DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16035E-2 11/2017
2094
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16061E – GROUNDING
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16061E
Grounding
Specification 16061 – Grounding except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 GROUND RODS
Add the following after Paragraph 2.02.C:
D. Provide UL Listed Steel, H-20 rated Heavy Duty High Traffic Area Test/Inspection
Wells at all ground rod locations.
END OF SECTION
16061E-1 11/2017
2095
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16061E – GROUNDING
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16061E-2 11/2017
2096
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16071E – SUPPORTING DEVICES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16071E
Supporting Devices
Specification 16071 – Supporting Devices except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Add following after Paragraph 1.03.A with the following:
B. General Specification 15060 - Hanger and Supports
1. Equipment assemblies such as secondary unit substations, switchgear, motor

control centers and panelboards shall be certified to meet seismic requirements in
accordance with the requirements specified in the applicable sections of the
General and Detailed Specifications and in accordance with local and state
building codes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 CHANNELS, FITTINGS AND BRACKETS
Replace Paragraph 2.02.E. with the following:
E. All channels, fittings, brackets and related hardware shall be steel and have a hot-dip
galvanized finish according to ASTM A123.
16071E-1 011/2017
2097
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16071E – SUPPORTING DEVICES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Add the following after Paragraph 3.01.G:
H. Threaded Rods shall be double nutted on the ends.
END OF SECTION
16071E-2 011/2017
2098
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16076E – LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16076E
Labeling and Identification
Specification 16076 – Labeling and Identification except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
END OF SECTION
16076E-1 11/2017
2099
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16076E – LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16076E-2 11/2017
2100
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16121E – ELECTRIC WIRES AND CABLES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16121E
Electric Wires and Cables
Specification 16121 – Electric Wire and Cables except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Replace Paragraph 1.02. A. with the following
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Electric wires and cables shall comply with the latest applicable provisions and
2. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
4. ASTM B5 – High Conductivity Tough-Pitch Copper Refinery Shapes.
5. ASTM B8 – Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-hard
or Soft.
6. ASTM D69 – Test Methods for Friction Tape
7. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
8. Underwriter’ Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. UL Standard No. 44 – Wires and Cables, Rubber-Insulated. (Standard for
Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables)
b. UL Standard No. 83 – Wires and Cables, Thermoplastic-Insulated.
c. UL Standard 486A – Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with
Copper Conductors
d. UL 510 - Insulating Tapes
e. UL 1072 – Medium Voltage Power Cables
9. AEIC CS6-96 – Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Shielded Power Cable.

10. NETA – International Electrical Testing Association.
11. IEEE 48 – Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating- Current Cable
Terminations 2.5kV through 765kV.
12. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA):
16121E-1 11/2017
2101
CONTRACT DEL-260E
a. NEMA WC8 Standard for Ethylene Propylene Rubber.

b. NEMA WC26 Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard.
13. Consolidated Edison Company for electric wires and cables.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 300 VOLT INSULATED CABLE
1. Conductors shall be stranded, copper, No. 16 AWG minimum size. All

conductors shall be polyethylene insulated and twisted in pairs with an
aluminum-mylar shield overlapped.
2.02 600 VOLT INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE
1. Conductors shall be stranded, copper, single conductor cable conforming to

ASTM B8 and No. 12 AWG minimum size.
Replace Paragraph 2.02 C.1 with the following:
1. Conductors shall be stranded, tinned coated copper conforming to ASTM B8, No.
12 AWG minimum size.
Add following after Paragraph 2.05.D
E. STRESS CONES
1. Provide a Class 3 indoor stress cone conforming to IEEE Std. 48 for 15kV,
designed to accept cable insulation diameters from .495-inches to 1.875- inches
with cable shield device and grounding devices for a No. 2 copper ground wire.
. F. SECTIONALIZING CABINET
1. Provide 15kV sectionalizing cabinet with 200A 15k V junctions. Cabinet shall be
manufacturer with min 12 gauge steel and stainless steel hardware.
2. Furnish battleship grey colored 15kV sectionalizing cabinet as manufactured by

Cooper Industries, Houston, TX, SecTER Cabinet type Catalogue No. SEC
36623F2152SoG or approved equal.
G. DEADBREAK ELBOW CONNECTORS

1. All medium voltage existing and new cables shall be connected to transformers,
switching cabinets and junctions with deadbreak elbow connectors. Deadbreak
connectors shall comply with IEEE 386 standards.
16121E-2 11/2017
2102
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2. Furnish 200A 15kV deadbreak elbow connectors fully shielded and insulated
plug-in termination type molded using high quality peroxide-cured EPDM
insulation as manufactured by Cooper Industries, Houston, TX or approved
equal.
H. FEEDTHRU INSERTS
1. Provide 200A 15kV rotatable feedthrough inserts to provide dual bushing from
single bushing well. Feedthru insert shall comply with IEEE 386 standards.
2. Furnish Feedthrough insert by Cooper Industries, Houston, TX or approved
equal.
Add following after Paragraph 2.06.
2.07 CABLE FIREPROOFING
A. All medium voltage cables installed in manholes shall be fireproofed as specified

below.
B. The fire and arc proofing tape shall consist of a flexible conformable unsupported
intumescent elastomer. The tape shall be not less than .030 inches thick and be
capable of over 100 percent elongation. The tape shall be non-corrosive to metallic
cable sheaths and compatible with synthetic cable jackets (i.e. semi-conducting URD
type, polyethylene, P.V.C., etc.). It shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support
combustion. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, salt water, gases
and sewage.
C. The wrapped tape shall be secured by a band, consisting of two layers (the second
wrapped directly over the first) of glass cloth electrical tape. The completed
installation of single half-lapped layer of arc and fireproofing tape shall be capable of
withstanding a high current (60 Hz) fault arc temperature of 13,000 degrees K for 70
cycles.
D. Fire and arc proofing tape shall conform to Scotch 77 as manufactured by the 3M
Company, Maplewood, MN or approved equal. Glass cloth electrical tape shall
conform to Scotch 69 as manufactured by the 3M Company, Maplewood, MN or
approved equal

A. The Contractor shall provide acceptance testing of the medium voltage wire and
cable. The Contractor shall provide acceptance testing of medium voltage cables
accessories and equipment. The acceptance testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer
and certified by the Contractor. Acceptance testing shall be performed as specified in
Section 3.05B thru F, below.
16121E-3 11/2017
2103
CONTRACT DEL-260E
END OF SECTION
16121E-4 11/2017
2104
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16131E – ELECTRIC CONDUIT SYSTEM
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16131E
Electric Conduit System
Specification 16131 – Electric Conduit System except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
D. Conduits, elbows and coupling shall include a PVC coating for all areas. Refer to the
NEMA room designations on Contract Drawings for use of non PVC RGS coated
conduit.
2.02 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
B. The electric conduit system shall be designed, constructed and installed suitable for
earthquake regulations in accordance with the seismic requirements of the City of
2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
Delete Paragraph 2.03 B. Rename paragraphs C through F as paragraphs B through E.
Replace existing Paragraph 2.03 C. with the following:
B. Flexible conduit used in all areas shall include a steel core with a liquid-tight,
polyvinyl chloride cover and shall include a built-in copper ground for sizes 3/4-inch
through 1-1/4 inch.
16131E-1 11/2017
2105
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2.04 OUTLET BOXES AND FITTINGS
B. For all areas, conduit fittings and outlet bodies shall be cast gray iron alloy, cast
malleable iron bodies and covers. All units shall be gasketed, watertight, and threaded
with five full threads and shall have rust-proofing in accordance with the requirements
of Article 2.06. Fittings and bodies installed on PVC coated conduits shall also
include interior and exterior coatings equivalent to the conduit.
D. For concealed areas, pressed steel boxes of the proper size and depths for the
application shall be provided. Boxes shall be rated NEMA 12, not less than No. 14
U.S. Standard Gauge (0.078 inch). The conduit openings shall be provided with oil
resistant gaskets. Conduits shall be fastened to these boxes with grounding bushings
and hub. All unused outlets or holes shall be left sealed.
F. For all conduit runs, connections to boxes and fittings shall be made through threaded
holes. Where necessary, unions may be used. Unions in hazardous locations shall be
by Crouse Hinds, or approved equal, type UNF, UNL, UNY conduit fittings or equal
to be approved by the Engineer.
Replace Paragraph 2.04 G. with the following:
G. Unions in non-hazardous areas shall be Universal or Erickson conduit couplings or

equal to be approved by the Engineer.
Replace Paragraph 2.04 H. with the following:
H. All boxes installed for concealed conduit, shall be provided with extension rings or
plaster rings and covers as required. For finished areas stainless 302/304 satin
beveled steel cover and device plates for surface mounted boxes shall be used. For
other areas galvanized ferrous and galvanized cast ferrous metal cover and device
plates with neoprene gaskets shall be used.
2.05 CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
Replace Paragraph 2.05.E.1 with the following:
1. Conduit hubs shall be threaded, insulated throat type with bonding screw
grounding bushing.
Replace Paragraph 2.05.F with the following:

16131E-2 11/2017
2106
CONTRACT DEL-260E
F. Conduit Bushings:
1. Conduit bushings shall be insulated, grounding type with lay-in-lug connection.

A Hub shall be provided for each bushing.
2.06 TERMINAL, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
Delete Paragraph 2.06 B. Rename paragraphs C through H as paragraphs B through G.
Replace existing Paragraph 2.06 C. with the following:
B. Boxes and accessories shall conform to the following area classifications:
1. For corrosive locations boxes shall be corrosion resistant, NEMA Type 4X.
Except for chlorine areas, boxes shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel
material with sealed seams. Boxes in chlorine areas shall be constructed of non-
metallic FRP materials and shall be explosion proof NEMA Type 7.
2. Refer to the NEMA room designations on Contract Drawings for additional detail
on box and accessory ratings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
G. All underground conduits shall be encased in reinforced concrete. See Specification

16133 - Underground Ducts - Ducts in Concrete and Contract Drawings for additional
information.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
Replace Paragraph 3.02 O. with the following:
O. Where conduit enter or leave equipment located within electrical, control, chlorine,
scrubber or other corrosive areas and rooms, the conduit shall be sealed and packed
with duct seal compound.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS
F. All conduit connections in concealed locations shall terminate at enclosures with

grounding bushings and hub. Terminations shall include grounding bushings and hub
at each location. All conduit shall be bonded to the safety ground.
16131E-3 11/2017
2107
CONTRACT DEL-260E
END OF SECTION
16131E-4 11/2017
2108
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16133E – UNDERGROUND DUCTS, DUCTS IN
CONCRETE
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16133E
Underground Ducts, Ducts in Concrete
Specification 16133 – Underground Ducts, Ducts in Concrete except as modified
herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
Replace paragraph 1.01 B. with the following:
A. Underground ducts shall be concrete encased at locations indicated on the Contract

Drawings. The Contractor shall provide reinforced concrete encasement for the duct
system where indicated.
1.03 PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.03 A. with the following:
1.05 SUBMITTALS

4. Field Test Report shall be submitted.
Add the following after paragraph 1.06:
A. All electrical work to be performed under this Section shall be accomplished using
personnel trained and skilled in the craft. All electrical work shall be performed by
personnel licensed in the authority having jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
16133E-1 11/2017
2109
CONCRETE
CONTRACT DEL-260E
A. Steel conduit for ducts shall be in accordance with the requirements of General
Specification 16131 - Electric Conduit System, except PVC coating of conduit is not
required. Rigid steel conduit shall be used for all systems throughout the underground
system. The use of non-metallic conduit and fittings as specified in Article 2.02 shall
not be permitted.
Replace Article 2.02. in its entirety with the following:
The use of non-metallic conduit and fittings shall not be permitted.
2.06 REINFORCED CONCRETE
Add the following after existing paragraph 2.06.A:
B. Refer to Contract Drawings for additional detail on reinforcing the concrete for duct
banks.
2.07 EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION FITTINGS
Replace existing paragraph 2.07 A. with the following:
A. Expansion and deflection fittings shall be provided at the structural joints of the
underground duct system.
2.08 CONDUIT BUSHINGS
Replace existing paragraph 2.08 A. with the following:
A. Conduit Grounding bushings shall be provided for the termination of conduits at each
manhole.
Replace existing paragraph 2.08 B. with the following:
B. Conduit Grounding bushings shall be in accordance with General Specification 16131

– Electric Conduit System.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
I. Terminate the duct bank conduits at building and manhole walls using insulated
grounding bushings in accordance with the details shown on the Contract Drawings.
Where duct banks turn upward for continuation above grade, a transition shall be
16133E-2 11/2017
2110
CONCRETE
CONTRACT DEL-260E
made from rigid steel conduit to PVC coated rigid steel conduits if required for the
area.
Replace paragraph 3.01.N with the following:
N. Provide field testing of the duct bank system. The testing shall include conduit
cleaning and ground testing. The field testing shall be in accordance with the General
Specification 16131 - Electric Conduit System.
Replace paragraph 3.01.Q with the following:
Q. Install an expansion and deflection fitting on each conduit at each of the structural
expansion joints. Joints shall be located as defined by the criteria noted on the
Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
16133E-3 11/2017
2111
CONCRETE
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16133E-4 11/2017
2112
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16134E – ELECTRIC MANHOLES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16134E
Electric Manholes
Specification 16134 – Electric Manholes except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
A. All electrical work to be performed under this Section shall be accomplished using
personnel licensed in Westchester County, New York.
Add the following after paragraph 3.01.G:
H. All electrical work to be performed under this Section shall be accomplished using
personnel licensed in the Town of Mount Pleasant, New York.
END OF SECTION
16134E-1 11/2017
2113
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16134E – ELECTRIC MANHOLES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16134E-2 11/2017
2114
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16211E – ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16211E
Electrical Service Entrance
Specification 16121 – Electrical Service Entrance except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
B. The electrical service entrance equipment required under this section shall
include overhead and underground primary service, outdoor pad mounted
cast coil transformers and low voltage type service equipment suitable for
delivering electric energy from the Consolidated Edison Company (Con
Edison) to the wiring system of the Shaft 18 facility.
Replace paragraph 1.01 C with the following:
C. The electrical service entrance equipment required under this section shall also
include coordination with Con Edison, installation of primary service
overhead and underground facilities, poles, medium and low voltage
terminations and appurtenances indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Add the following after paragraph 1.02.C:
D. Detailed Specification 16121 - Electric Wires and Cables
E. Detailed Specification 16361 - Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Load

Interrupter Switchgear
1.03 PAYMENT
B. The Contractor shall pay to Con Edison all costs associated with the service.
16211E-1 11/2017
2115
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1.04 REFERENCES
6. ANSI Standard C57.12, General Requirements for Distribution, Power and

Regulating Transformers.
7. ANSI Standard C57.12.51, Ventilated Dry-Type Power Transformers.
8. ANSI Standard C57.12.91, Test Code for Dry-Type Power Transformers.
9. ANSI Standard C57.94, Installation and Maintenance of Dry-Type Power
Transformers.
10. NETA, International Testing Association.
11. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
12. State and Local Building Codes
Replace paragraph 1.06.A.3 with the following:
3. The service entrance equipment shall be designed and built in accordance with
the latest applicable editions of ANSI/IEEE, NEMA, UL, the Electrical Code of
the City of New York and the latest applicable requirements of Con Edison.
7. Permits: Obtain all permits required to commence Work and, upon completion of
the Work, obtain and deliver to Engineer a Certificate of Inspection and approval
from the State Board of Fire Underwriters or other authority having jurisdiction.
Add the following after paragraph 1.06.A:
B. Electric Utility Requirements:

1. Comply with Con Edison standards for the new electric service. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to obtain from Con Edison all applicable
requirements regarding the electric service work.
2. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the electric

service work with Con Edison. Con Edison shall inspect the electric service work
during and after construction.
3. The costs of all necessary arrangements and coordination with Con Edison shall
be included for payment in the lump sum price bid for the Work under this
Contract.
16211E-2 11/2017
2116
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1.07 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
Replace paragraph 1.07.1 with the following:
A. The service entrance equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed suitable
for earthquake regulations in accordance with the seismic requirements of the City of
A. Service entrance equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in accordance with
the Detailed Specifications, the manufacturer’s instructions and the following:
1. Equipment shall be inspected for shipping damage or loose parts when received.
Evidence of water which may have entered equipment during transit shall be
checked.
2. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery and installation of pad-mounted

transformer with Con Edison. The Contractor shall include in his bid all of the
costs associated with receiving, transporting and rigging the transformer from the
City’s property line to the final location at the Shaft 18 building as shown on the
contract drawings.
3. Equipment shall be lifted, rolled or jacked into locations shown on the Contract
Drawings.
4. Equipment shall be stored in a clean, dry location in which a uniform temperature

is maintained. Equipment shall be protected with coverings and maintain air
circulation.
5. When dampness or condensation may be encountered, heaters shall be provided

for equipment to prevent moisture damage.
1.09 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. The Contractor shall examine the Site and existing facilities in order to compare
them with the Contract Drawings and Specifications with respect to the
conditions of the premises, location of and connection to existing facilities and
any obstructions which may be encountered.
16211E-3 11/2017
2117
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2. The Contractor is cautioned to perform their Work with due regard to safety and
in a manner that will not interfere with existing equipment or in any way cause
interruption of any of the functions of the facility.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
Delete paragraph 2.02.A.3. Renumber paragraphs 4 through 6 as 3 through 5.
1. The service entrance equipment bus bars shall be tin-plated copper, supported
with high impact, non-tracking insulating material. The bus joints shall be
secured with Belleville type washers and shall be braced for the mechanical
forces exerted during short circuit conditions. Bus bar sizes shall be based upon a
maximum temperature rise of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient in
accordance with UL and NEMA standards.
Replace paragraph 2.02 C.2 with the following:
2. The service entrance equipment shall be adequately braced for the maximum
available short circuit current fault condition.
Replace paragraph 2.02.E. with the following:
E. Main Service Disconnect:
1. The main service disconnects shall be circuit breaker molded case type.
2. Molded case circuit breakers shall be in accordance with the requirements of

General Specification 16430 - Low Voltage Switchgear.
3. The service entrance main service disconnects shall include microprocessor type
bus metering in accordance with the requirements of General
Specification 16430 - Low Voltage Switchgear.
2.04 SHOP TESTS
Replace paragraph 2.04 A.3.c with the following:
c. Continuity test shall be performed on power and communications wiring.
16211E-4 11/2017
2118
CONTRACT DEL-260E
Add the following after paragraph 2.04 A.3:
4. Transformer shop tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and the City
representative and include the following:
a. Resistance measurements of all windings shall be performed on the rated
voltage connection.
b. Ratio test on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections shall be
performed.
c. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection shall be
performed.
d. No load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection shall be
performed.
e. Excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection shall be
performed.
f. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection
shall be performed.
g. Applied potential tests shall be performed.
h. Induced potential test shall be performed.
i. High potential test shall be performed.
j. Temperature rise test at Ambien Air (AA) rating shall be performed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.04 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
2. Insulation-resistance tests shall be performed on each bus section, and on each

transformer and circuit breaker, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
Add the following after paragraph 3.04 C.5:
6. Communications and metering wiring performance test shall be performed.
3.05 EXISTING SERVICE CONDUCTORS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the utility for shut down of the service. Dewater
and clean existing manholes prior testing the service conductors. Submit detailed
schedule noting duration for utility shutdown, dewatering and cleaning manholes and
inspecting and testing service conductors to the City and Engineer 45 days prior
commencing with actual Work.
16211E-5 11/2017
2119
CONTRACT DEL-260E
B. Inspect and test existing medium voltage service conductors in all the existing
manholes from Columbus Avenue up to Shaft-18 facility building. Testing shall be
performed in accordance ANSI/NETA MTS-2015 Maintenance Testing Specification.
All tests and values for wire and cable shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and NETA, MTS Maintenance Testing Specification. The
Contractor shall provide a testing report. The report shall be in accordance with
NETA, MTS Maintenance Testing Specification.
C. Existing manholes shall be dewatered and cleaned prior to testing service conductors.
D. Submit detailed assessment report to the City and Engineer for approval.
E. The Contractor shall notify the City two (2) weeks prior to the date Work to be
performed.
END OF SECTION
16211E-6 11/2017
2120
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16221E – ELECTRIC MOTORS
CONTRACT DEL-260 E
SECTION 16221E
Electric Motors
Specification 16221 – Electric Motors except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Delete 1.03A and replace with the following:

included in the Lump Sum price bid for Contract Item E-LS-1, as specified in Section
END OF SECTION
16221E-1 11/2017
2121
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16221 – ELECTRIC MOTORS
CONTRACT DEL-260 E
16221-2 11/2017
2122
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16231 – STANDBY POWER
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16231E
Standby Power
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 16231E Standby Generator replaces General

Specification 16231 – Standby Power in its entirety. All Work for this Section
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide, install and acceptance test a complete and operable
Gas-Fueled Electric Generator Set, including all labor, materials, equipment and
incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install standby power.
Equipment shall be new, factory tested and delivered ready for installation.
B. Standby power required under this section shall be from natural gas-fueled
generator set. The generator set shall include all appurtenances for a complete
functioning standby power generating system. The Contractor and the generator
supplier shall coordinate with the G Contractor and Con Edison for a complete
and operable system.
C. The following index of this Section is presented for convenience:
Article Title Page

16231-
PART 1 GENERAL .............................................................................................1
1.01 Section Includes .....................................................................................1
1.02 Related Sections .....................................................................................2
1.03 Payment..................................................................................................2
1.04 References ..............................................................................................3
1.05 Design Requirements .............................................................................3
1.06 Submittals ..............................................................................................4
1.07 Quality Assurance ..................................................................................5
1.08 Delivery, Storage And Handling............................................................6
1.09 Service And Maintenance Agreement ...................................................7
1.10 Spare Parts .............................................................................................7
PART 2 PRODUCTS...........................................................................................8
2.01 Manufacturers ........................................................................................8
2.02 Generator Set .........................................................................................8
2.03 Engine ....................................................................................................9
2.04 Alternator .............................................................................................11
16231E-1 11/2017
2123
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2.05 Air Supply/Exhaust System .................................................................12

2.06 Starting System ....................................................................................13
2.07 Fuel System ..........................................................................................14
2.08 Control Panel .......................................................................................14
2.09 Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................17
2.10 Painting ................................................................................................18
2.11 Enclosure..............................................................................................18
2.12 Shop Tests ............................................................................................19
2.13 Portable Genenerator Connection Cabinet...........................................20
PART 3 EXECUTION .......................................................................................21

3.01 Installation............................................................................................21
3.02 Field Tests ............................................................................................22
3.03 Manufacturer's Field Services ..............................................................22
3.04 Acceptance Testing ..............................................................................23
3.05 Manufacturer's Certification ................................................................24
3.06 Training ................................................................................................24
3.07 Warranty ..............................................................................................24
A. General Specification 01651 - Transportation and Handling of

Materials
B. General Specification 16076 - Labeling and Identification
C. General Specification 16442 - Electric Control Equipment - Low

Voltage A.C. Motors and Devices
D. Detailed Specification 01433 - Witness Shop Testing and Quality

Assurance Inspection
E. Detailed Specification 01821 - Equipment Startup and Training
F. Detailed Specification 01750 - Spare parts & Maintenance Materials
1.03 PAYMENT
included in the lump sum price bid for Contract Item E-LS-1, as described in
16231E-2 11/2017
2124
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Standby power shall comply with the latest applicable provisions and
2. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
3. NFPA 37 - Standard for Installation and use of Stationary
Combustible Engine and Gas Turbines.
4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
5. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems.
6. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
7. NEMA MG2 - Safety Standard for Construction and
Guide for
Selection, Installation and Use of Motors and
Generators.
8. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
9. ISO STD 8528 - Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines
10. ISO STD 3046 - Performance Standard for Reciprocating
Internal Combustion Engines.
11. UL 142 - Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and
Combustible Liquids.
12. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
13. EGSA - Electrical Generating Systems
Association
14. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code
15. UL 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies
16. UL 1236 - Battery Chargers
A. The generator sets shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with the latest
applicable editions of NFPA, NEMA and NGSA.
16231E-3 11/2017
2125
CONTRACT DEL-260E
B. The generator sets shall operate at 1800 rpm, 60 hertz from natural gas and be
equipped with all necessary accessories.
C. The generator sets shall be rated for continuous 24-hour per day operation for the
duration of any normal utility outage up to a maximum of 30 days.
D. The generator sets telephone influence factor shall be less than 50 in accordance
with NEMA MG1-22.43.
E. The KW, KVA, power factor, voltage and number of phases of the Standby
generator shall be as specified.
F. The generator sets shall have suitable motor starting capability to limit the voltage
dip to less than 20 percent when starting operational facility process and lighting
loads.
G. The generator sets shall have identifying nameplates in accordance with the
requirements of General Specification 16076 - Labeling and Identification.
Alternator nameplates shall also be in accordance with NEMA MG1.
H. The generator sets shall be designed for outdoor installations.
I. The generator shall comply with the applicable requirements of 40 CFR 60
Subpart JJJJ – Standards of Performance for Stationary Spark-Ignition Internal
Combustion Engines.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and material specifications for the
approval of the Engineer. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Manufacturer's technical information which shall include:
a. Standard published curves of standby generator rating. Special or
maximum ratings are not acceptable.
b. Calculations confirming motor starting capability.
c. Published data of the generator line and machine constants.
d. Published data of fuel and oil consumption estimates, based on
engine manufacturer's data.
e. Published manufacturer’s estimated data of cooling and
combustion air flow requirements, plus heat rejection of the engine
and generator when operating at full load.
f. Proof of compliance with all local, federal as well as EPA codes
with respect to noise control and exhaust emissions.
16231E-4 11/2017
2126
CONTRACT DEL-260E
g. Complete installation drawings with wiring diagrams and

interconnections.
h. Complete generator enclosure details, including equipment
arrangement drawings and specifications.
i. Manufacturers literature, specifications, engineering data and
installation instructions necessary to fully describe standby
generator and all appurtenances and to substantiate compliance
with the specified requirements.
2. Description of shop and field testing methods, procedures and apparatus
with calibration dates shall be submitted. Testing methods and procedures
shall be submitted at least 45 days in advance prior to conformation of
witness testing dates and actual testing.
3. Qualifications of proposed testing firm to perform acceptance testing shall
be submitted. Submit firm experience records at least 45 days in advance
to actual testing, five recent references with phone numbers shall be
submitted.
B. Certificates of Compliance: Data and results of witness tests accompanied by a
certificate of authenticity sworn to before a notary public by an officer of the
manufacturing company. Upon approval, release for shipment to site shall
proceed.
C. Reports:
1. Shop test and field test reports shall be submitted.
2. Manufacturer's site visit and acceptance testing reports shall be submitted.
D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the
Detailed Specifications 01831 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
A. General:
1. Each generator set shall be of current manufacture from a firm regularly
engaged in the production of such equipment. The firm shall have
experience in designing, supplying and supporting standby generators sets.
2. Each generator set shall be factory assembled and tested to determine that
it is free from electrical or mechanical defects and to assure that it meets
design specifications.
3. Each generator set shall be adequately guarded both physically and
electrically for protection of operating personnel.
16231E-5 11/2017
2127
CONTRACT DEL-260E
4. All materials, equipment and parts comprising each generator set shall be
new, of current manufacturer and of the highest grade. All components
shall be covered by the manufacturer’s standard warranty on new
machines.
5. The generator set manufacturer shall have complete parts and service
facilities and ensure the availability of a manufacturer-trained technicians
on a 24-hour basis. Services shall be readily available so to avoid long
periods of interruption or require extensive spare parts inventory.
6. The generator set manufacturer shall use a shop test facility that has
recently calibrated testing apparatus and qualified, experienced
technicians, for all factory tests. Calibration of testing apparatus shall be
within one year.
7. All test equipment and instrument calibration shall be in accordance with
the latest edition of the accuracy standard of the U.S. National Institute of
Standards and Technology and the NETA maintenance testing
specification.
B. Field Tests:
1. The generator set shall be field tested. Field testing shall be performed in
accordance with the requirements specified under Article 3.02.
2. The services of the generator set manufacturer shall be retained for field
service. Field service shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified under Article 3.03.
3. Retain the service of an independent testing firm who shall perform field
acceptance testing of the generator set. The testing firm shall have
experience in the inspection and testing of the equipment and shall be a
member company of NETA. Acceptance testing shall be in accordance
with the requirements specified under Article 3.04.
A. Generators shall be delivered, stored and handled in accordance with the Detailed
Specifications 01651 – Transportation and Handling of Materials, the generator
manufacturer’s instructions and the following:
1. Generators shall be inspected for shipping damage when received.
2. All sleeve or oil lubricated bearings generators shall be identified and the
bearing reservoirs filled to normal level.
3. Generators shall be handled using base lifting lugs. Avoid pounding or
bumping of generator which may damage unit. A hoist and spreader bar
arrangement shall be used to avoid damage.
16231E-6 11/2017
2128
CONTRACT DEL-260E
4. Generators shall be stored indoors in clean, dry, heated areas.

5. Generators shall not be stored in areas subject to continuous vibration. A
small quantity of grease shall be injected into each bearing on a monthly
basis. Purged grease shall be inspected for water or rust.
1.09 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
A. The generator set manufacturer guaranty shall include all equipment furnished
under this Section against defects in workmanship and material for a period of
twenty-four (24) months from the date of final acceptance of the equipment.
B. All costs for labor, transportation, freight and replacement parts required to
satisfactorily repair any piece of equipment as a result of equipment malfunction
during the guarantee period shall be considered to have been included in the lump
sum price bid for providing the generator sets.
C. The Service and Maintenance Agreement shall cover maintenance as well as
emergency repairs. The agreement shall at a minimum include the following:
1. All maintenance recommended by the manufacturer including checkout,
inspection and maintenance of all furnished components and wiring once
per year.
2. All parts, labor, and other expenses associated with providing emergency
(within forty-eight (48) hours) on-site repairs, regardless of the reason for
failure excepting misuse or vandalism.
3. A report shall be submitted after each site visit describing the problem,
solution, all work performed and parts replaced.
1.10 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the Engineer, at that part of the site
and at such time as the Engineer may direct, spare parts for the generator sets in
accordance with the Detailed Specifications 01750 – Spare Parts & Maintenance
Materials.
B. The spare parts shall be listed in an index and packed in containers suitable for
long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the manufacturer's part
number with complete information for use and reordering.
C. Spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations for the generator size and type. Spare parts shall include at a
minimum the following:
16231E-7 11/2017
2129
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. One complete set of air, oil and fuel filters shall be provided of each type
and size used.
2. One complete set of belts and hoses shall be provided of each type and
size used.
3. Two sets of control power fuses shall be provided of each type and size
used.
4. Two per ten pilot lights shall be provided of each size and type used.
D. The Contractor shall furnish as part of the bulk lubricant order the quantity of
lubricants required to operate and maintain the generators furnished under this
section for a period of one year after acceptance. As a minimum, there shall be
provided sufficient oil and grease to make a least one lubricant change. Replace
all lubricants used during startup and testing prior to acceptance of equipment.
Furnish this replacement lubricant in addition to the lubricants included in the
bulk order.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Standby generator sets shall be manufactured by:

1. Cummins Power Generation System, Minneapolis, MN
2. Caterpillar Inc., Peoria, IL
2.02 GENERATOR SET
A. Spark-Ignited Engine Generator Set:

1. 4 cycle, 1800 rpm, natural gas fueled standby generator set. Generator set
ratings: 1000 ekW, 1250 kVA at 0.8 PF, standby rating, based on Site
conditions noted below. System voltage of: 480Y/277 Volts AC, Three
phase, four wire, 60 hertz. Site Conditions: Altitude 365 ft., ambient
temperatures up to 122 degrees F.
2. Voltage regulation shall be +/ 1.0 percent for any constant load between
no load and rated load.
16231E-8 11/2017
2130
CONTRACT DEL-260E
3. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to

steady state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load
from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.25%.
4. The standby generator shall be capable of single step load pick up of
100% nameplate ekW and power factor, less applicable derating factors,
with the engine generator set at operating temperature.
5. Motor starting capability shall be a minimum of 1250 kVA. The generator
set shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of 90% of rated no load
voltage with the specified kVA load at near zero power factor applied to
the generator set.
6. The engine shall be 4-cycle radiator, fan cooled and fueled by low
pressure natural gas fuel. The horsepower rating of the engine at its
minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all
connected accessories.
7. The rated net horsepower of the engine at the generator synchronous
speed, with accessories, shall not be less than that required to produce
1000 ekW.
2.03 ENGINE
A. Generator set shall include an engine. The engine shall be configured for
generator set service and be of the internal combustion-natural gas. The engine
shall be equipped to operate on natural gas fuel and include radiator cooling, with
engine driven water pump, expansion tank and temperature control modulating
valve.
B. The rated net horsepower of the engine at the generator synchronous speed, with
all accessories, shall not be less than that required to produce 1000 kW.
C. The engine shall be capable of producing the specified kW, without overload, for
the duration of the power outage, at the altitude of 365 feet, with ambient
temperatures up to 122 degrees F.
D. The engine shall be constructed with cast iron cylinder heads and steel backed
bearings. Pistons shall be aluminum alloy with chrome faced rings. The engine
crank case shall be reinforced cast iron. The crank case shaft shall be forged alloy
steel with hardened journals, finished and dynamically balanced.
E. The engine shall be equipped with a solid state electronic governor, isochronous
type to maintain frequency within 1/4 percent of its mean value for constant loads
from no load to full load. The engine shall have a 3 seconds maximum transient
recovery time for one-step load acceptance and an 8 percent maximum transient
frequency dip on one-step application of a 0.8 power factor load at 80 percent of
unit full load rating.
16231E-9 11/2017
2131
CONTRACT DEL-260E
F. Engine cooling system shall consist of an engine mounted radiator with blower
type fan, sized to maintain safe operation. The cooling system shall be filled with
a 50 percent solution of ethylene glycol and be equipped with the following
accessories:
1. High engine temperature shutdown
2. Loss of coolant shutdown
3. Cooling water temperature gage
4. Fan guard
5. Radiator face duct connection
G. The engine shall be equipped with jacket water heaters. Heaters shall be in
accordance with the following:
1. Thermostatically controlled, of sufficient capacity to keep the jacket water
at a suitable temperature for trouble-free starting at an ambient
temperature up to 122 degrees F.
2. Heater shall be provided with a suitable contactor to automatically
disconnect the heater when the engine is started. Heater shall operate
single phase with a voltage of 120 VAC.
H. Engine lubrication system shall be equipped with the following accessories:
1. Lube oil temperature gage.
2. Lube oil pressure gage.
3. Oil level indicator.
4. Low oil pressure shutdown.
I. Engine accessories and features shall include:
1. Skid mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in
122 degrees F (50 degrees C) ambient as measured at the generator air
inlet. The cooling system shall be filled with 50/50 ethylene glycol/water
mixture by the equipment supplier. Rotating parts shall be guarded
against accidental contact per OSHA requirements.
2. An electric starter(s) capable of three complete cranking cycles without
overheating.
3. Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump.
4. Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin on canister elements
and dipstick oil level indicator.
5. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator.
6. Flexible fuel supply lines and with fuel shutoff solenoid.
16231E-10 11/2017
2132
CONTRACT DEL-260E
7. Engine mounted battery charging alternator, 37 ampere minimum, and

solid state voltage regulator.
8. Provide a crankcase emission control system that shall remove a minimum
of 99% of crankcase emissions. The crankcase emission control system
shall reduce Nox, hydrocarbon and oil from the crankcase emissions.
9. The engine shall be equipped to operate on natural gas fuel and include
radiator cooling, with engine driven water pump, expansion tank and
temperature control modulating valve.
10. The engine shall be capable of producing the 1000 ekW, without overload,
for the duration of the power outage, at the ambient temperature and site
altitude.
2.04 ALTERNATOR
A. Each generator set shall be provided with an alternator. The alternator shall be
engine-driven, single or two bearing type, synchronous, four pole, 2/3 pitch,
revolving field with brushless excitation and drip-proof, guarded construction,
single prelubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower
fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc. The alternator
shall be coupling connected to the engine flywheel housing to ensure permanent
alignment.
B. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG1 temperature limits for
Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance
method at full load shall not exceed 105 degrees Centigrade over 40 degrees C
ambient.
C. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced and include amortisseur windings to
minimize voltage deviations and heating effects under unbalanced load
conditions.
D. The alternator shall be equipped with a static electronic voltage regulator to
maintain voltage within plus or minus 1/2 percent under load, from no load to 100
percent load. The regulator shall also maintain the random voltage variation for
constant loads within plus or minus 1/2 percent under load, from no load to 100
percent load.
E. The alternator shall be equipped with an excitation support system. The system
shall consist of a permanent magnet exciter to provide a dedicated source of
power for the exciter field. The permanent magnet exciter shall isolate the
excitation system and sustain 300 percent short circuit current, under any short
circuit condition, for up to 10 seconds.
F. The Alternator shall be equipped with anti-condensation heaters of sufficient
wattage to maintain the temperature approximately 5 degrees above ambient when
16231E-11 11/2017
2133
CONTRACT DEL-260E
the generator is idle. Heaters shall be disconnected when generator is running.

Heaters shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Thermostatically controlled, of sufficient capacity to keep the alternator at
a suitable temperature to prevent internal condensation.
2. Heater shall be provided with a suitable contactor to automatically
disconnect the heater when the engine is started. Heater shall operate
single phase with a voltage of 120 VAC.
G. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated frequency
and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated
voltage.
H. A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable
source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit
performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating
current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of
rated current for not more than 10 seconds.
I. AC Generator shall have 12 lead reconnectable ends at three phase voltages while
still providing the full output rating of the generator.
2.05 AIR SUPPLY/EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Each generator set shall be provided with an air supply/exhaust system. The air
supply/exhaust system shall consist of a heavy duty air cleaner, silencer and
exhaust piping of suitable size, configuration and material in accordance with
engine manufacturer's recommendations and shall comply with NFPA 37.
B. Silencer: Critical type, constructed of double plate sheet with condensate drain
ports, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Measured sound level at a
distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge, shall be 85 dBA or less. If local codes
are more stringent, they shall apply. Similar to Hapco – complete with flanges.
C. Exhaust piping shall be welded schedule 40 stainless steel with standard bend
radius and stainless steel flexible exhaust fittings. All indoor exhaust piping shall
be insulated to maintain a surface temperature not to exceed 50 degrees C.
D. The engine exhaust stack shall have two, perpendicular sampling ports that meet
USEPA Method 1 criteria.
E. Oxidation Catalyst: The oxidation catalyst shall be a precious metal type catalyst.
The catalyst body shall be fabricated from stainless steel. The catalyst exhaust
inlet and outlet connections shall be Carbon steel with 150# R.F. Flanges. The
Oxidation Catalytic Converter shall be equipped with a flanged access portal for
easy access to the catalyst to facilitate servicing. The catalyst element shall be
mounted and sealed with gasket material into a frame which is inserted into a
16231E-12 11/2017
2134
CONTRACT DEL-260E
presized slot inside the catalyst housing. The arrangement must prevent exhaust
gas from bypassing the catalyst. The catalyst shall be properly supported to
prevent damage from mechanical vibration and thermal stress. Couplings rated at
3000 lbs shall be supplied in sufficient number to provide ports for monitoring
temperature upstream and downstream of the catalyst along with environmental
testing. Catalyst housing should also be provided with lifting brackets. The
catalytic converter shall be sized to treat the gas engine’s exhaust at rated capacity
to ensure complete compliance with all local, state, and federal environmental
regulations and emission standards.
F. Furnish and install an exhaust silencer. The silencer shall be insulated using a
calcium silicate material covered by a brushed aluminum skin or shall be
uninsulated with a brushed stainless steel skin. The silencer system shall be
designed, furnished, and installed to prevent moisture and condensation from
corroding the silencer. The work shall result in a long-term, aesthetically pleasing
installation.
G. Connect the silencer to the engine exhaust manifold with a high corrosion and
temperature resistant stainless steel flexible convoluted exhaust pipe. Use flange-
type connections. Provide a taper-cut tail pipe complete with rain cap to exhaust
the gases to the atmosphere.
H. All indoor exhaust piping shall be insulated to maintain a surface temperature not
to exceed 50° C. The exhaust piping and expansion fittings, shall be completely
covered with an insulation blanket in order to protect operating personnel and to
reduce noise. Insulation shall be composite fiberglass and stainless steel
construction capable of withstanding 1200° F continuously. The insulation
blankets shall be tailored and custom fabricated to fit the contours of the exhaust
system. Average weight of the insulating blanket shall be 1.5 psf. Insulation
shall conform to MIL-1-16411D, Type II and shall be custom fabricated to fit the
contours of the exhaust system.
1. Insulation shall be Hitco Blanket Armco, Hitco Blanket Insulation system,
or approved equal.
2.06 STARTING SYSTEM
A. The generator set shall be provided with a battery system. The battery system
shall consist of batteries, cables and a battery charger.
B. Batteries shall be heavy duty lead acid type, with number of cells, voltage and
rating in accordance with requirements of the engine manufacturer. The batteries
shall be sized for a minimum of four crank cycles of the specified engine and
have sufficient current available for break-away of the particular engine at worst
case temperature.
16231E-13 11/2017
2135
CONTRACT DEL-260E
C. Battery cables and connectors shall connect the starting motor and the generator
control panel to the battery supply.
D. Battery charger shall be automatic float type, current limited with 120 volts, 60
Hertz input. The battery charger shall be capable of recharging a discharged
battery in 12 hours while carrying normal loads. The battery charger shall be
equipped with the following additional features and accessories:
1. Equalizing switch and equalizing timer.
2. DC ammeter.
3. DC voltmeter.
4. DC cranking disconnect relay.
5. Low-high DC voltage alarm relay.
6. Current failure relay.
E. The battery system shall be provided with a suitable rack for mounting batteries
and battery charger.
2.07 FUEL SYSTEM
A. Natural Gas Fuel System:

1. The fuel system shall be constructed in accordance with NFPA 37, NFPA
54 and NFPA 110.
2. Engine fuel system shall operate with natural gas and consist of all piping
and valves required between the engine and the utility gas meter.
3. The Contractor shall coordinate gas supply pressure with Consolidated
Edison. Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment required for a
complete and operable system.
2.08 CONTROL PANEL
A. Each generator set shall be provided with a unit-mounted control panel. The
control panel shall include the necessary controls, instruments and lights to
manually and automatically start, stop and monitor the generator unit.
B. The control shall be UL 508 listed. The panel control shall be microprocessor
based with programmable adjustments and shall provide monitoring, metering and
control of the system based upon the manufacturer's standard arrangement.
Control power to the panel shall be DC supplied from the starting battery system.
C. The panel controls shall include the following:
16231E-14 11/2017
2136
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. Automatic engine starting control from a single pole contact which closes
for engine run and opens for engine stop.
2. Automatic cranking controls to disconnect engine while running.
3. Four (4) 7 seconds minimum, cranking cycles with cranking attempts
separated by appropriate rest periods.
4. Cranking controls shall be locked out, requiring manual reset, if engine
fails to start at the completion of the starting program.
5. Overspeed shutdown.
6. Overcrank shutdown.
7. 30 minute adjustable timer for cool down after transfer to utility power.
8. Three Position Selector Switch: Manual Start-Off-Auto Start, and Start-
stop Pushbuttons.
9. Voltage adjusting rheostat.
10. Auxiliary contacts for controlling generator space heaters.
D. The panel malfunction protection, status and alarm indicators and accessories
shall include the following:
1. Shutdown and alarm annunciation:
a. Engine high water temperature.
b. Engine low oil pressure.
c. Engine overspeed.
d. Engine overcrank.
e. Low coolant level.
2. Alarm annunciation without shutdown:
a. Engine low water temperature.
b. Engine high water temperature pre-alarm.
c. Engine low oil pressure pre-alarm.
d. Battery charger malfunction.
3. Normally open contact, common for all alarm conditions, for remotely
indicating generator malfunction.
4. Generator Run Relay with a minimum of two (2) normally open and two
(2) normally closed contacts for remotely indicating generator run.
5. Wattmeter and power factor meter.
6. Elapsed time meter.
7. Ammeter, voltmeter and phase selector switches.
16231E-15 11/2017
2137
CONTRACT DEL-260E
8. Frequency meter.
9. Oil pressure and temperature gauges, coolant temperature gauge and
battery voltmeter.
10. Normally open contact for remotely indicating generator selector switch in
Auto Start position.
E. The unit mounted control panel shall be completely pre-wired. All instruments,
controls and indicating lights shall be suitably mounted and properly identified.
All wires and terminals shall be individually identified.
F. The panel controls shall be arranged to accept a stop signal from a remote stop
station. Station shall provide emergency shutdown of the generator set.
G. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
1. The generator set shall be equipped with two (2) remote annunciator
panels. Remote annunciator panel shall be installed as shown on the
Contract Drawing.
2. The remote annunciator panels shall be from the same manufacturer that
supplies the generator set.
3. The remote annunciator panels shall provide visual and audible indication
20 separate alarm or status conditions based on discrete relay inputs or
network inputs.
4. Each remote annunciator panel shall be equipped to display with the
following statuses:
a. Customer Fault 1 (programmable)
b. Customer Fault 2 (programmable)
c. Customer Fault 3 (programmable)
d. Genset Supplying Load
e. Charger AC Failure
f. Low Coolant Level
g. Check Genset
h. Not In Auto
i. Genset Running
j. High Battery Voltage
k. Low Battery Voltage
l. Weak Battery
16231E-16 11/2017
2138
CONTRACT DEL-260E
m. Fail to Start
n. Low Coolant Temp
o. Pre-High Engine Temp
p. High Engine Temp
q. Pre-Low Oil Pressure
r. Low Oil Pressure
s. Overspeed
t. Custom Relay 1
u. Custom Relay 2
v. Custom Relay 3
w. Custom Relay 4
5. The remote annunciator panel shall be provided with a sealed membrane
panel design and with an enclosure for wall surface mounting.
H. GENERATOR REMOTE SHUTDOWN BREAK GLASS STATION
1. Provide quantity three (3) Emergency Generator Stop break glass stations
Pilla Model ST120SN3R or approved equal.
2. Break glass station shall be painted red and labeled “EMERGENCY
GENERATOR STOP”.
3. Each break glass switch shall be equipped with a minimum of one contact
block with one normally open switch with contacts rated for 10A at 600V
AC.
4. Provide one spare glass disc for each break glass station provided.
5. Each break glass switch shall be equipped with a normally open switch
with contacts rated for 10A at 600V AC.
6. Break glass switch shall be provided with an NEMA 3R enclosure.
2.09 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. The generator set shall be provided with unit mounted main circuit breaker and
exciter circuit breaker, sized for protecting the unit.
B. Circuit breakers shall be in accordance with the requirements of General
Specification 16442 - Electric Control Equipment - Low Voltage A.C. Motors and
Devices.
16231E-17 11/2017
2139
CONTRACT DEL-260E
C. Generator circuit breaker: Molded case, thermal-magnetic type; 100% rated;

complying with NEMA AB-1, UL 489.
D. Main Circuit Breaker: with adjustable trip set at 125% of generator full load
current.
E. Furnish and install main circuit breaker with Kirk-key cylinders & mounting
brackets. Coordinated Kirk-key interlocking with portable generator connection
cabinet. Refer to Article 2.13 for portable generator connection cabinet detail.
2.10 PAINTING
A. All ferrous metal surfaces to be cleaned and painted with a rust inhibiting primer.
All exterior surfaces shall be given three coats of manufacturer's standard finish
paint. Finish paint shall be suitable for the operating temperature.
B. Finish paint shall be manufacturer's standard color.
C. Generator enclosure shall be primed with two coats of zinc-chromate. The
enclosure exterior shall be finished painted with three coats of enamel. Color of
finish paint to be selected by the City from manufacturer's standard color chart.
2.11 ENCLOSURE
A. The generator sets shall be provided with a weatherproof, sound attenuating

protective enclosure. The enclosure shall completely enclose the entire generator
set, starting system and air supply/exhaust system.
B. Protective enclosure shall be walk-in type.
C. Walk-in type enclosures shall be custom-built for proper access of all components
within. Dimensions shall be based upon actual furnished equipment. The
equipment arrangement, shall at a minimum, provide 3 feet clear from the
generator frame to the front of the deepest wall mounted enclosure. Walk-in type
enclosures shall be in accordance with the following:
1. The enclosure shall be prepainted aluminum stressed skid construction
consisting of the following:
a. Roof: One piece roof sheet, .040 inch thick, 3003 aluminum alloy
with extruded aluminum recessed side and end rails and I beams,
6061-T6 alloy.
b. Side and End Walls: Two side walls and two end walls.
16231E-18 11/2017
2140
CONTRACT DEL-260E
c. Panels: .050 inch thick, 5052 H-34 aluminum sheet, riveted 3

inches on center, with extruded aluminum post sections on 24 inch
centers.
d. Floor and Underframe: Two 6 inch wide flange I beam
longitudinal skids with 10 gauge steel crossmembers on 12 inch
centers. Crossmembers to be overlayed with 3/4 inch tongue and
groove exterior FIR plywood subfloor surfaced with 1/8 thick
diamond plate steel.
e. Door and Frame: Aluminum frame and personnel door fully
gasketed to form a weather tight seal.
2. Louvers shall be provided and sized as required for sufficient engine
combustion and radiator cooling. Louvers shall be motorized and of
aluminum construction riveted into the steel frame forming a rigid water
resistant assembly.
3. The enclosure shall be completely wired with the following accessory
equipment:
a. A 120/208 volt, 100A three phase load center panel with circuit
breakers for all power requirements including lighting,
convenience receptacle, battery charger, and heaters.
b. Adequate Vapor tight lighting fixtures within the enclosure with a
snap switch at the entrance doors.
c. Provide two (2) 20A GFCI receptacles within the enclosure.
d. Enclosure shall be sound attenuated and shall reduce generator
noise to 85 db/A at 10 feet from enclosure.
2.12 SHOP TESTS
A. Certified Shop Tests:

1. Shop testing shall be performed on the generators at the manufacturer's
plant prior to shipment. Shop test shall be in accordance with the latest
revisions of NEMA MG1 and shall demonstrate that the equipment tested
conforms to the requirements specified.
2. The Contractor shall provide a shop test report. The report shall identify
the tests performed and the results obtained.
3. The completed generator set for each unit shall be given a routine test at
the manufacturer's factory. The set shall be tested for a period of two
hours at full load, 0.8 power factor.
16231E-19 11/2017
2141
CONTRACT DEL-260E
4. The test may include the manufacturer's standard test procedure, but, at a
minimum, shall include the following:
a. Verify generator set assembly, prior to operation, including all
mechanical and electrical connections.
b. Verify fuel and lubrication systems are clean and filled with proper
grades of fuel and lubricants.
c. Make adjustments as required to governor and voltage regulator
controls.
d. Inspect operation of all gauges, switches and meters. Verify
generator set monitoring meters against calibrated load bank
meters.
e. Verify operation of all safeties and alarms.
f. Maintain records of unit operation, at 15 minute intervals, for
duration of test. Records at a minimum shall include, water
temperature, oil pressure, ambient air temperature, voltage, current,
frequency, kilowatts and power factor.
B. Witnessed Shop Tests:
1. The Contractor shall perform witnessed shop tests.
2. Generators shall be witness tested in accordance with the procedures
specified under paragraph 2.12. Generators shall be given a complete test
two weeks before and then retested in the presence of the witness. The
Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of satisfactory and suitable
means for air travel, transportation, incidentals, meals and lodging for both
the Engineer and the City’s representatives to attend witness testing at the
factory.
3. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and
incidentals as shown, specified and required to perform shop testing,
before shipment, at the manufacturer’s facility to verify that the generators
are functioning properly and that they meet the functional and
performance requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. The Contractor shall submit shop testing procedures to verify testing
meets the requirements specified herein. Submittal shall be made at least
two months in advance of any scheduled testing and shall include dates of
scheduled tests.
5. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at least four weeks
before expected initiation of tests. The City and Engineer may elect to be
present at manufacturer’s facilities during pre-witness test. Presence of the
City and Engineer during this test shall not imply acceptance of the
equipment.
16231E-20 11/2017
2142
CONTRACT DEL-260E
6. Upon successful completion of the witness tests in the opinion of the

Engineer, the generator will be authorized for shipment. Arrangement for
receiving and storing the equipment at the Site shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor.
7. Provide witnessed shop test in accordance with the requirements of
Detailed Specification 01433 – Witness Shop Testing and Quality
Assurance Inspection.
2.13 PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION CABINET
A. A pad mounted 2000A Generator Connection Cabinet enclosure shall be provided

with lockable latches on the front door and an independent lower access panel
door. Lower access panel shall not open unless main lockable door has been
opened.
B. Generator Connection Cabinet shall be UL rated and provide with factory
provisions for the installation of a Kirk Key interlock cylinder. This provision
shall prevent the Generator Connection Cabinet door from being opened without
insertion of the Kirk Key from the generator main circuit breaker. Provide Kirk
Key Scheme 11.
C. Internal bus shall be sized for 1000A per square inch Ampacity and bus work
shall be supported with UL Recognized Component (QEUY2) insulators.
D. Connection box shall be provided with six (6) lugs per phase for line side
connections.
E. Generator connection cabinet shall be rated minimum 35KAIC short circuit
current rating.
F. The generator connection box shall be provided with a factory option convenience
outlet.
G. Enclosures shall be a pad mount NEMA Type 3R Stainless Steel Construction
with 4 inch wide channel base for elevated mount on concrete pad.
H. Generator connection cabinet shall be Model Number P20-5-S-M-2-10 as
manufactured by Berthold Electric Company of Chicago, Illinois or approved
equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
16231E-21 11/2017
2143
CONTRACT DEL-260E
A. Install generator sets in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations.
B. The generator set shall be mounted on a common structural steel frame base. The
base shall be provided with vibration isolators consisting of steel springs in
combination with rubber pads and anchor bolts.
C. A template shall be furnished by the manufacturer for setting anchor bolts, pipe
sleeves, and nuts for mounting the isolators to the concrete foundation. Bolts and
nuts shall be furnished for bolting the isolators to the channel frame base of the
standby generator.
D. Flexible connections shall be provided between the generator set and fuel lines,
radiator air discharge duct, exhaust system, conduit containing power or control
cables and other externally connected support systems.
3.02 FIELD TESTS
A. After installation, generator sets shall be field tested for operation and
conformance. The Contractor shall perform field tests as specified in this Article.
The field tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and certified by the Contractor.
B. Generator set testing shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative,
prior to energizing equipment. Equipment shall not be energized without the
permission of the Engineer. The testing shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer's representative and, at a minimum, shall
ensure the following:
1. That the entire installation has been made in accordance with the approved
manufacturer's drawings, and that the unit and all auxiliaries are ready for
operation.
2. That fuel and lubrication systems are complete, clean and filled with the
proper grades of fuel and lubricants.
3. That the units and all subsystems start, operate, and shutdown in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. That all safeties, alarms and shut-downs function at the correct set point
and sequence.
5. That the unit accepts load, governs speed and regulates voltage.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide the services of a qualified, factory-authorized, manufacturer’s

representative for the required work-days as specified hereunder. A work-day is
16231E-22 11/2017
2144
CONTRACT DEL-260E
defined as eight, on-site, working hours. The qualified manufacturer's

representative shall assist in the installation of the generator sets, check the
generator set installation before it is placed into operation, assist in the
performance of field tests, observe and assist initial operations and train the plant
operations and maintenance staff in the care, operation and maintenance of the
generator sets.
B. Provide a qualified manufacturer’s representative field services to assist the
Contractor in installation, testing, training and start-up of the equipment specified
under this section.
1. Equipment Installation and Inspection: Two (2) trip of (2) day duration.
2. Preliminary and/or Final Field Tests: Two (2) trip of (2) day duration.
3. Startup & Initial Operating Period: Two (2) trip of (2) duration.
4. Training: One (1) trip of (1) day duration.
C. The Contractor shall provide a field report from the manufacturer's representative
for each visit to the site. The report shall include complete information on time,
schedule, tasks performed, persons contacted, problems corrected, tests results,
training, instruction and all other pertinent information.
D. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation, as
determined by the Engineer, shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The
manufacturer’s representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer’s
Resident Project Representative on each day they are at the project.
A. The Contractor shall provide acceptance testing of the generator sets. All
acceptance testing shall be performed by the testing firm, after the completion of
the field tests specified under Article 3.02. The acceptance testing shall be
witnessed by the Engineer and certified by the Contractor.
B. Acceptance testing shall be performed on each generator set. Each set shall be
tested for a period of four hours, using portable resistance type load banks or plant
loads or combination of the two. Testing shall include the following:
1. Perform functionally tests to verify generator set shutdown features
operate as required.
2. Perform vibration base line test.
3. Unit shall be operated for a simulated power failure test. Tests shall be
initiated by simulating a failure of the normal supply. Tests shall end by
returning normal supply.
16231E-23 11/2017
2145
CONTRACT DEL-260E
4. Apply the actual plant loads available plus load banks necessary to total
full load. Unit shall be load tested, 30 minutes at 25 percent load, 30
minutes at 50 percent load and three hours at 100 percent load.
5. Records shall be maintained, at 30 minute intervals, for duration of test.
Records at a minimum shall include fuel consumption, water temperature,
oil pressure, ambient air temperature, voltage, current, frequency,
kilowatts and power factor.
6. That the unit is EPA emissions compliant as operated with oxidation
catalyst installed.
C. Acceptance electrical testing shall be performed on each alternator. Testing shall
1. Insulation-resistance tests shall be performed on each alternator winding
with respect to ground. Determine polarization index.
D. All tests and values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and NETA, ATS Acceptance Testing Specification.
E. The Contractor shall provide an acceptance testing report. The report shall be in
accordance with NETA, ATS Acceptance Testing Specification.
3.05 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing

that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s
representative’s certification.
3.06 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner’s
representatives for one (1) normal workday at jobsite location determined by the
Owner.
B. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer’s qualified
representative. The training program shall consist of the instruction on the
operation of the assembly, circuit breakers and major components within the
assembly.
3.07 WARRANTY
16231E-24 11/2017
2146
CONTRACT DEL-260E
A. The generator set manufacturer shall include a comprehensive warranty including

parts and labor for a period of sixty (60) months from the date of final acceptance
of the equipment.
B. All costs for labor, transportation, freight and replacement parts required to
satisfactorily repair any piece of equipment as a result of equipment malfunction
during the warranty period are included in the lump sum price bid.
C. All work covered by the manufacturer’s warranty shall be performed by the
generator set manufacturer or its authorized representative.
END OF SECTION
16231E-25 11/2017
2147
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16231E-26 11/2017
2148
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16271E- DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16271E
Dry Type Transformers
Specification 16271 – Dry Type Transformers except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Dry type transformers shall be manufactured by:

1. Square D, Palatine, IL
2. Cutler-Hammer, Cleveland, OH
2.06 CAST COIL TRANSFORMERS
A. The customer owned service transformer shall be solid-cast dry-type construction

designed for 13.8kV, 3 phase, 60 hertz, with delta connected primary, 480/277 volt
wye connected secondary with the neutral brought out through a bushing.
Transformers shall have an impedance of 5.75 percent and efficiency of 98 percent
minimum.
B. Transformer KVA capacity and primary voltage shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings. Transformers shall be rated 60 KV BIL for 15 KV connected primaries.
Transformer secondaries shall be rated 10 KV BIL.
C. Transformer winding construction shall be in accordance with the following:
16271E-1 11/2017
2149
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. Epoxy resin shall be rated 185 degrees C used throughout the construction.
Winding temperature rise shall not exceed 80 degrees C above 40 degrees C
ambient.
2. Cores shall be silicon steel construction assembled and rigidly clasped to ensure
mechanical strength and to reduce vibration. Core shall be grounded to the frame
with a flexible grounding strap.
3. Windings shall be copper and have high dielectric and mechanical strength
insulation. Coils shall be sized, insulated and supported for short circuit forces
and be impervious to moisture. The windings shall withstand impulse, induced
and dielectric test voltage and short circuit testing without damage.
4. The high voltage primary windings shall be disc wound for enhanced voltage
stress distribution and to facilitate complete epoxy penetration. The high voltage
primary windows shall be completely impregnated and cast in epoxy resin under
vacuum in molds and be over cured.
5. The low voltage secondary winding shall be resin encapsulated by winding epoxy
impregnated insulation. All exposed surfaces shall be covered and sealed with
epoxy. The entire winding shall be oven cured.
D. Transformers shall be equipped with six 2 ½ percent fully rated taps. Taps shall
include two 2 ½ percent primary taps above normal and four 2 ½ percent primary taps
below normal. Easily accessible bolted tap links in the high-voltage windings shall be
changed when the transformer is de-energized.
E. Transformer enclosure shall be grounded heavy gauge sheet steel. The transformer
enclosure shall include ventilation louvers, removable panels for access to taps, and
vibration isolating pads. Each enclosure shall be equipped with a diagrammatic
nameplate.
F. Transformer shall be equipped with provisions for future forced air cooling
equipment. Transformer components shall be suitable for the forced air rating
G. Transformer shall be equipped with multi-phase electronic temperature monitor

controlled automatically by sensors placed in the LV air ducts. The temperature
monitor must contain yellow and red indicating lights. The yellow lamp indicates fan
power, while the red lamps signal that alarm and trip contacts have been activated. A
0-1 milliampere output is required for remote indication. Alarm contacts shall be
provided for fans, alarm, and trip function. An audible alarm must sound when the
highest phase temperature exceeds a preset point. Temperature monitor shall include:
control power transformer, control wiring, controller with test switch, current limiting
fuses in the power supply to the controller, indication lights, alarm silencing relay, and
necessary push buttons to properly control the temperature monitoring system.
Temperature monitor shall be Square D Model 98A or approved equal.
H. The transformer enclosure shall have high voltage signs in accordance with the
requirements of General Specification 16076 - Labeling and Identification.
16271E-2 11/2017
2150
CONTRACT DEL-260E
I. Manufacturers
1. Cast coil transformers shall be manufactured by Square D, Palatine, IL, ABB,
Cary, NC or approved equal.
2.07 FACTORY TESTING
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on all equipment provided
under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and
NEMA standards.
1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection of each
unit and at the tap extremes of one unit only of a given rating on this project
2. Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections
3. Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connections
4. No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection
5. Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection
6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection of each
unit and on the tap extremes of one unit only of a given rating on this project
7. Applied potential test
8. Induced potential tests
9. For dry-type and cast-coil units, the manufacturer shall perform additional 100%
quality control impulse test on the primary windings of each unit
B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports.
C. Factory tests as outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner’s representative.

1. The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests
are to be performed
2. The Contractor shall include in his bid cost of satisfactory and suitable means for
air travel, transportation, incidentals, meals and lodging for the Engineer and the
City’s representatives to attend witness testing at the factory.
2.08 SPARE PARTS
A. The following spare parts shall be furnished:
1. One (1) 1500kVA Delta Wye Pad Mounted Cast Coil Transformer 13.8kV
Primary, 480Y/277V Secondary;
a. This shall also include all the necessary accessories, components and lugs
provided with the transformer that is to be installed to provide a complete
working system.
END OF SECTION
16271E-3 11/2017
2151
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16271E-4 11/2017
2152
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16281E – POWER FILTERS AND CONDITIONERS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16281E
Power Filters and Conditioners
Specification 16281 – Power Filters and Conditioners except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
Replace paragraph 1.04.A.7 with the following:
7. UL Standard No. 1449 - Standard for Safety for Surge Protective

Devices
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Certificates of Compliance: Certified documentation of UL 1449 Third Edition listing,

from the surge protective device manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The surge protective devices shall be manufactured by:

1. Advanced Protection Technology, Clearwater, FL
2. Innovative Technology Surge Suppression Inc, Cleveland, OH
16281E-1 11/2017
2153
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16281E – POWER FILTERS AND CONDITIONERS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Replace “suppressor”, “suppression device” and “suppressor device” with “protective device”
for all instances in this Article.
3. The maximum UL 1449 voltage protection rating for the protective device shall
be rated for Type 1 locations shall not exceed the following:
a. For 208Y/120 volt systems, 700 volts line-neutral, 700V line-ground and
700V neutral-ground. 1200 volts line-line.
b. For 480Y/277 volt systems, 1200 volts line-neutral, 1200V line-ground and
1200V neutral-ground. 2000 volts line-line.
Delete paragraph 2.02.B.4 in its entirety. Renumber paragraphs 5 to 6 as paragraphs 4 to 5.
Replace existing paragraph 2.02.B.6 with the following:
6. The minimum total surge current that the suppression device shall be capable of
withstanding shall be as follows:
a. For service entrance equipment, category C (Type 1) locations, 320 KA per
phase, 160 KA per mode.
b. For distribution panelboards, category B (Type 2) locations, 160 KA per
phase, 80 KA per mode.
c. For branch panelboards, category A (Type 3) locations, 80 KA per phase, 40
KA per mode.
B. The Contractor shall provide power filter start-up services and training.
END OF SECTION
16281E-2 11/2017
2154
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16285 – SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16285
Surge Protective Devices (SPD)
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 16285 – Surge Protective Devices (SPD) has been
General Specifications 16285 – Surge Protective Devices (SPD).
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: The Work specified in this Section consists of materials for furnishing,
installing, connecting, energizing, testing, cleaning and protecting enclosed surge
protective devices (SPD).
B. Related Sections:
1. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of
Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or
otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work
complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
a. Detailed Specification 01270 – Measurement and Payment

b. Detailed Specification 01330 - Submittal Procedures
c. Detailed Specification 01432 – Contractor’s Work Quality
d. Detailed Specification 01651 – Transportation and Handling of Materials
e. Detailed Specification 01831 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals
f. General Specification 09900 - Painting
g. Detailed Specification 16010E – General Electrical Requirements.
h. Detailed Specification 16061E - Grounding
i. Detailed Specifications 16071E – Supporting Devices
j. Detailed Specification 16121E – Electric Wires and Cables
k. Detailed Specification 16131E – Electrical Conduit System
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/Underwriters Laboratories (ANSI/UL):

1. ANSI/UL 1449 Third Edition (2009) – Safety for Surge Protective Devices.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 285.
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers/American National Standards Institute

(IEEE/ANSI):
16285-1 11/2017
2155
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-

Voltage AC Power Circuits.
2. ANSI/IEEE C62.45 IEEE Guide on Surge Testing Equipment Connected to
Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Detailed Specification 01330 –
Submittal Procedures, Shop Drawings, factory test reports, product data, certified letters
of compliance and information required to establish compliance with this section.
B. Testing Agency/Quality Verification: Provide with all product data evidence of testing
agency/quality verification, listing, and labeling either by printed mark on the data or by a
separate listing card. Provide from product manufacturers a written statement indicating
why an item does not have a quality assurance verification. Such statements are subject to
the approval of the Owner and the Engineer.
C. Product Data and Catalog Cuts: Provide product data within 60 days of Contract award
for all products provided.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for all Surge Protective Devices.
E. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for all Surge Protective Devices.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed elevation and locations of equipment
and wiring on record Contract and Shop Drawings as specified in Detailed Specification
16010E- General Electrical Requirements.
G. Include Record Drawings, Shop Drawings and product data with Operation and
Maintenance Manuals and submit at project closeout in accordance with Detailed
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conform all quality control work to Detailed Specification 01432 – Contractor’s Work
Quality.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory, approved by
Factory Mutual or certified as meeting the standards of United Laboratories by the
16285-2 11/2017
2156
CONTRACT DEL-260E
Electrical Testing Laboratory for the location installed in and the application intended
unless products meeting the requirements of these testing laboratories are not available or
unless standards do not exist for the products.
C. Unless products meeting the requirements of nationally recognized testing laboratories are
not readily available for a category of products, provide products that are:
1. Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory.
2. Approved by Factory Mutual.
3. Certified as meeting the standards of Underwriters Laboratory by the Electrical
Testing Laboratory.
D. Conform all Work to regulatory requirements of all state, local, and national governing
codes and requirements, NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, and the requirements of
Detailed Specification 16010E – General Electrical Requirements.
E. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installing Work of this Section with

minimum three years documented experience.
F. Install Work by or under supervision of licensed electricians.
A. Protect items from damage during delivery, storage and handling in accordance with
Detailed Specification 01651 – Transportation and Handling of Materials and as detailed
below.
B. Store all products indoors in heated warehouses on blocking or pallets.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. SPD shall have a ten-year warranty. Warranty shall be the responsibility of the electrical
distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be supported by their respective field
service division.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES EQUIPMENT
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide only products satisfying the applicable requirements for testing and reporting
as established herein. Devices proposed for use on this project shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/UL 1449 Third Edition, as prescribed by ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
The residual or "clamping" voltages shall be recorded for all applicable mode of
operation and for each of the test standard waveforms referenced. The results of
16285-3 11/2017
2157
CONTRACT DEL-260E
these tests shall be submitted to the Engineer with the product data sheets as outlined
under in this Section.
2. Products furnished for use on this project are to incorporate protective elements in all
applicable modes, unless specifically indicated otherwise.
3. Install SPD equipment where so indicated on the Contract Drawings. Voltage class
and type of unit to be compatible with distribution voltage being protected.
B. Integral Surge Protective Devices (Service Entrance/Switchboard, Motor Control Center,

Panelboard]:
1. SPD shall be Component Recognized in accordance with ANSI/UL 1449 Third
Edition, Standard for Safety, Surge Protective Devices.
2. SPD shall be installed by and shipped from the electrical distribution equipment
manufacturer’s factory, or field installed integral to provision space within equipment
when previously approved by the Engineer.
3. SPD shall be modular in design. Each protection element shall be a user replaceable
surge current diversion module (MOV based). Each surge current diversion module
shall be fused with 200 kAIC rated fuses. Each surge current diversion module shall
include solid state status indicator lights.
4. SPD shall provide redundant surge current diversion modules for each mode of
Protection. Modes of Protection shall be: L-N, L-G, N-G in WYE systems and L-L,
L-G in DELTA systems.
5. SPD shall incorporate copper bus bars for the surge current path. Small gauge round
wiring or plug-in connections shall not be used in the path for surge current
diversion. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted connections to the bus
bars for reliable low impedance connections.
6. Nominal Discharge Current (In) – SPD applied to the distribution system shall have a
20kA In rating.
7. 320kA and/or 250 kA SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application
within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C (Type 1) environments.
8. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Minimum surge current rating per mode shall be:
L-N 160 kA
L-G 160 kA
N-G 160 kA
Per phase 320 kA
9. UL 1449 Third Edition component recognized voltage protection ratings shall not
exceed the following:
VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G L-L
480 DELTA XXX 1800V XXX 1800V
AND/OR
480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 2000V
AND/OR
208Y/120 700V 700V 700V 1200V
16285-4 11/2017
2158
CONTRACT DEL-260E
AND/OR
240/120 700V 700V 700V 1200V
10. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage

(MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage.
11. SPD shall be equipped with onboard visual and audible diagnostic monitoring. Red
and green indicator lights shall provide full time visual diagnostic monitoring of the
operational status of each phase as well as each surge current diversion module.
Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall
activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence
the alarm. An alarm push to test switch shall be provided. The SPD diagnostic
monitoring devices shall be mounted on the front of the switchboard enclosure. The
diagnostic monitoring circuits shall continually monitor the operational status of the
surge current diversion modules. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD
monitoring or testing before or after installation.
12. SPD shall have a response time no greater than 1 nanosecond for any of the
individual Protection modes.
13. SPD shall be mounted integral to the distribution equipment and connected to the
power bus through a dedicated circuit breaker or disconnect.
14. SPD shall include Form C dry contacts to monitor the performance of each phase and
provide a summary alarm.
15. SPD shall include an event surge counter. The counter shall be equipped with a
manual reset and a battery or flash memory to retain memory upon loss of AC power.
The surge counter display and reset switch shall be mounted on the front of the
switchboard enclosure.
a. Eaton Electric, Cleveland, OH
b. Square D Company, Palatine, IL
c. General Electric, Fairfield, CT
d. Siemens, Washington, D.C
e. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc Clearwater, FL.
f. LEA International, Hayden, Idaho
g. Or approved equal
C. External Surge Protective Devices (Distribution/Switchboard, Motor Control Center,

Panelboard):
1. SPD shall be Component Recognized in accordance with ANSI/UL 1449 Third
Edition, Standard for Safety of Surge Protective Devices.
2. SPD installed on Distribution equipment the line side of the service entrance
disconnect shall be Type 2 SPDs. All SPDs installed on the load side of the service
entrance disconnect shall be Type 2 or Type 2 SPDs.
16285-5 11/2017
2159
CONTRACT DEL-260E
3. SPD shall be installed by and shipped directly from the manufacturer of the electrical
distribution equipment.
Protection. Modes of Protection shall be L-N, L-G, N-G in WYE systems, and L-L,
7. Nominal Discharge Current (In) –SPD applied to the distribution system shall have a
20kA In rating.
8. 120 kA SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B (Type 2) environments. Select this for 120kA per
phase device
9. 250 kA SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C (Type 1) environments.
L-N 120 kA
L-G 120 kA
N-G 120 kA
Per phase 250 Ka
1) UL 1449 Third Edition component recognized voltage protection ratings
shall not exceed the following:
AND/OR
480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 2000V
AND/OR
208Y/120 700V 700V 700V 1200V
AND/OR
240/120 700V 700V 700V 1200V

operational status of each phase. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of
16285-6 11/2017
2160
CONTRACT DEL-260E
audible alarm. This alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off
switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push to test switch shall be
provided. The SPD diagnostic monitoring devices shall be mounted on the front of
the Distribution/Switchboard, Motor Control Center, and Panelboard enclosure. The
14. SPD shall be mounted external to the distribution equipment and connected to the
power bus through a dedicated circuit breaker or disconnect.
15. SPD shall be mounted in a NEMA enclosure rated to match the rooms NEMA
designation.
manual reset and a battery or flash memory to retain memory upon loss of AC
power. The surge counter display and reset switch shall be mounted on the front of
the Distribution/Switchboard, Motor Control Center, and Panelboard enclosure.
b. Square D Company, Palatine, IL
c. General Electric, Fairfield, CT
d. Siemens, Washington, D.C.
e. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc., Clearwater, FL.
g. Or approved equal.
.
D. External Surge Protective Devices (Service Entrance, Distribution, Branch Circuit

Panelboard/Switchboard, Motor Control Center, and Panelboard):
1. SPD shall be UL Listed in accordance with ANSI/UL 1449 Third Edition, Standard
for Safety, Surge Protective Devices, and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference
Filters.
Protection. Modes of Protection shall be L-N, L-G, N-G in WYE systems, and L-L,
16285-7 11/2017
2161
CONTRACT DEL-260E
5. Nominal Discharge Current (In) –SPD applied to the distribution system shall have a
20kA In rating.
6. SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE
C62.41 Category C (Type 1) environments.
L-N 120 kA
L-G 120 kA
N-G 120 kA
Per phase 250 kA
b. ANSI/UL 1449 Third Edition component recognized voltage protection ratings
shall not exceed the following:
AND/OR
480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1200V 2000V
AND/OR
208Y/120 700V 700V 700V 1200V
AND/OR
240/120 700V 700V 700V 1200V

operational status of each phase as well as each surge current diversion module.
Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall
activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence
the alarm. An alarm push to test switch shall be provided. The SPD diagnostic
monitoring devices shall be mounted on the front cover of the enclosure. The
11. SPD shall be mounted in a NEMA enclosure rated to match the rooms NEMA
designation.
manual reset and a battery or flash memory to retain memory upon loss of AC power.
16285-8 11/2017
2162
CONTRACT DEL-260E
The surge counter display and reset switch shall be mounted on the front cover of the
enclosure.
b. Square D Company, Palatine, IL.
c. General Electric, Fairfield, CT.
d. Siemens, Washington, D.C.
e. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc Clearwater, FL.
g. Or approved equal.
2.02 SIGNAL CIRCUITS SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Vibration Monitor SPD Unit:

1. 4-20 mA analog loop floating ground signals shall be protected by a device that
features line-to-line (normal mode) protection with silicon avalanched diode
components and line-to-line and line-to-ground (normal and common mode)
protection with high powered gas discharge tube technology. The device shall assure
the integrity of the floating ground signal as no component with leakage current is
connected to ground (only the gas discharge tube makes a ground connection). Cable
shield shall be isolated from ground and protected by a gas discharge tube.
2. Unit shall be two-piece, consisting of a base and plug. The base shall be DIN rail-
mountable.
3. Technical specifications:
a. Nominal operating voltage 24 VDC
b. Maximum continuous operating voltage 26 VDC
c. Nominal current 450 mA
d. Nominal discharge current (8/20) 10 kA
e. Peak clamping voltage (tested at 1 kV
per microsecond rate of rise)
Normal Mode < 41.6 VDC
Common Mode < 650 V
f. Resistance per line 2.2 ohms
g. Approvals UL 497B
a. Phoenix Contact, Middletown, PA catalog number PT 1x2-24DC-ST plug and
PT 1x2+F-BE base element.
b. LEA International DRDC, Hayden, Idaho
B. RTD SPD Unit:

1. Three and four-wire sensor signals shall be protected by a device that features silicon
avalanched diode and gas discharge tube technology. Cable shield shall be isolated
from ground and protected by a gas discharge tube.
16285-9 11/2017
2163
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2. Unit shall be two-piece, consisting of a base and plug. The base shall be DIN rail-
mountable.
3. Technical specifications:
a. Nominal operating voltage 24 VDC
b. Maximum continuous operating voltage 26.4 VDC
c. Nominal current 2A
d. Nominal discharge current (8/20) 10 kA
e. Peak clamping voltage (tested at 1 kV
per microsecond rate of rise)
Normal Mode < 40 VAC
Common Mode < 650 V
f. Resistance per line neglible
a. Phoenix Contact, Middletown, PA catalog number PT 4-24DC-ST plug and PT
4+F-BE base element.
b. LEA International DRDC, Hayden, Idaho
2.03 TELEPHONE AND DATA-LINE (COMPUTER) SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Direct Wire Protective Unit: Provide in-line (series) connected for module rated for a
nominal operating voltage of 25 volts and a maximum operating current of 160 milliamps.
Units shall be wired for terminal connect of line and load side wiring.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Telephone Protective Unit:
a. MCG Electronics Inc., Deer Park, NY, DLP Series
b. LEA, Hayden, Idaho, TE-PS Series
c. Or approved equal
2. Data-Line Protective Unit:
a. MCG Electronics Inc., Deer Park, NY, DLP Series
b. LEA, Hayden, Idaho, TE-DB25 Series
2.04 BRANCH CIRCUIT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Direct Wire Protective Unit: Provide in-line (series) connected module for branch circuit
equipment Protection rated for 120 VAC 20 amp (min), 60 hertz. Units shall be wired for
terminal connect of line and load side wiring.
a. Leviton, Melville, NY, No. 51020-WM.
b. MCG Electronics Inc., Deer Park, NY
c. LEA, Hayden, Idaho
d. Or approved equal
16285-10 11/2017
2164
CONTRACT DEL-260E
B. Plug-in Protective Unit: 6 outlet plug-in strip type protective unit rated 120 VAC, 15
amperes, sine wave tracking.
a. Leviton, Melville, NY, No. 5200PS.
b. MCG Electronics Inc., Deer Park, NY
c. LEA, Hayden, Idaho, DPS series
d. Or approved equal
2.05 MATERIALS
A. Grounding Materials: Conform to Detailed Specification 16061E - Grounding
B. Steel Supports and Anchors: Conform to Detailed Specification16071E – Supporting

Devices
C. Wiring, External to Equipment and Connectors: Conform to Detailed Specification

16121E – Electric Wires and Cables
D. Conduit Materials: Conform to Detailed Specification 16131E – Electrical Conduit

System
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Painted surfaces, which will be covered by items of this Section, shall have a prime and
finish coat of paint per General Specification 09900 - Painting.
B. Ensure that all indoor areas are enclosed from the weather.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Space enclosures out from surfaces mounted on 1/4-inch spacers or u-channel supports.
Provide supports as specified in Detailed Specification 16071E – Supporting Devices.
B. Install all Surge Protective Devices in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Ground all Surge Protective Devices in accordance with Detailed Specification 16061E -
Grounding, and the manufacturer’s instructions using wire as specified in Detailed
Specification 16121E – Electric Wires and Cables, of size No. 6 AWG or larger if
otherwise indicated, recommended, or specified.
D. Connect all Surge Protective Devices in accordance with Detailed Specification 16121E –
Electric Wires and Cables and the manufacturer’s instructions. For service, Surge
Protective Devices use No. 4 AWG or larger if otherwise indicated or recommended. For
16285-11 11/2017
2165
CONTRACT DEL-260E
branch circuit Surge Protective Devices use No. 6 AWG or larger if otherwise indicated
on the Contract Drawings, recommended, or specified. For instrument, communication,
and data and telephone unit protectors use wire sized the same as the circuit, data-line that
the Surge Protective Devices is connected to or larger if otherwise indicated,
recommended, or specified.
E. Install all SPD’s with the shortest practical lead length.
F. Set enclosure top 6-feet 6-inches above finished floor or grade unless otherwise indicated
or specified. If other equipment is installed in an area, the top of the units may be set
lower then 6-feet 6-inches but in no case set the bottom of the enclosure lower than 12-
inches above the finish floor or grade.
G. Make all holes for conduit entries with punches.
H. In all areas except dry areas install conduit drain-fitting in punched hole in bottom of
enclosure, conduit breather fitting in top of enclosure.
I. Interface with other work:

1. Connect conduits to enclosure with watertight hubs except in damp locations on the
bottom of enclosures. A sealing locknut may be used in place of watertight hubs and
in dry locations two locknuts and bushings may be used.
2. Connect wiring to line and load terminals with lugs provided or approved by
manufacturer in conformance with Detailed Specification 16121E – Electric Wires
and Cables. Remove interior or protect interior components during wire pulling.
3. Connect to conduit systems in conformance with Detailed Specification 16131E –
Electrical Conduit System.
4. Connect to wiring systems in conformance with Detailed Specification 16121E –
Electric Wires and Cables.
A. Site Testing:
1. Visually and mechanically inspect the SPD unit and connections.
2. Use an AC voltmeter to check all voltages and ensure that normal operating voltages
of the power system match the voltage rating on the SPD nameplate.
3. Check LED status indicators on the display panels and suppression modules to
confirm normal status.
4. Press the alarm test button to confirm the audible alarm and LED.
5. Operate the alarm silence switch to confirm proper operation.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. During painting mask all nameplates, all plastic parts, pushbuttons, operating shafts and
all items not to be painted.
16285-12 11/2017
2166
CONTRACT DEL-260E
B. Protect all items during Work of other trades including welding and cutting.
C. Protect Surge Protective Devices against short circuits and improper operation.
END OF SECTION
16285-13 11/2017
2167
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16285-14 11/2017
2168
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16292E – POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16292E
Power Distribution System
Specification 16292 – Power Distribution System Coordination except as modified
herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.05.B.2. with the following:
2. The Contractor shall retain the services of an independent testing firm who shall
perform field testing of the power distribution system. The testing firm shall
have experience in the inspection and testing of the system equipment, shall be a
member company of NETA, and shall provide proof of the certification, or
demonstrate that the standards and experience required for certification are
possessed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
Add the following after paragraph 2.01.D:
E. Provide an arc flash hazard study for the electrical distribution system shown on the
one line drawings. The intent of the arc flash hazard study is to determine hazards
that exist at each major piece of electrical equipment shown on the one line drawing.
This includes new and existing 480V & 120/208V equipment such as switchgear,
switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, PDUs, UPS, ATSs, transformers,
control panels & safety disconnect switches. The study will include creation of arc
flash hazard warning labels. These labels serve as a guide to assist technicians and
others in the selection of proper Personal Protective Equipment when working around
exposed and energized conductors. The Electrical Contractor will install the labels.
16292E-1 11/2017
2169
CONTRACT DEL-260E
Example of Arc Flash Warning Label
1. The arc flash hazard study shall include the electrical distribution system
equipment shown on the one line drawing. If an existing up-to-date current short-
circuit and protective device coordination study is not available, perform a short
circuit and protective device coordination study for the electrical distribution
system before performing the arc flash hazard study. The arc flash hazard study
shall consider operation during normal conditions alternate operations,
emergency power conditions, and any other operations, which could result in
maximum arc flash hazard.
2. Qualifications
The Contractor shall have the study prepared by qualified engineers of an independent
consultant. The consultant shall be a Registered Professional
a. Electrical Engineer (licensed in the state where the project is completed)
who has at least five (5) years of experience and specializes in performing
power system studies.
b. The arc flash hazard study shall be performed using computer software
package such as DesignBase 5.0 or approved equal.
3. Submittals
a. The Contractor shall submit the arc flash hazard study and arc flash warning
labels at least 45 days prior to energizing the electrical equipment. The arc
16292E-2 11/2017
2170
CONTRACT DEL-260E
flash hazard study and arc flash warning labels shall be approved by the
Engineer on record prior energizing the equipment.
b. Submit three (3) copies of the power systems study and (1) set of warning
labels. Submit one (1) copy of study saved in the native electronic format of
the software used to prepare study.
2.02 STUDY REPORT
B. The results of the arc flash study shall be summarized in a final typewritten report.
The report shall include the following:
1. The study shall be calculated by means of computer software package. Pertinent

data, rationale employed and assumptions in developing the calculations shall be
incorporated in the introductory remarks of the study.
2. The study shall be in accordance with applicable NFPA 70E, OSHA 29-CFR,
Part 1910 Sub part S and IEEE 1584 Standards.
3. Determine the following:

a. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary
b. Limited Approach Boundary
c. Restricted Boundary
d. Prohibited Boundary
e. Incident Energy Level
f. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class
g. Type of Fire Rated Clothing
4. Produce an Arc Flash Warning label listing items 3.a through 3.g above. Also
include the bus name and voltage. Labels shall be printed in color and be printed
on adhesive backed Avery labels. See example above.
5. Produce Bus Detail sheets that lists the items 3.a through 3.g from above and the
following additional items:
a. Bus Name
b. Upstream Protective Device Name, Type and Settings
c. Bus Line to Line Voltage
6. Produce Arc Flash Evaluation Summary Sheet listing the following additional
items:
a. Bus Name
b. Upstream Protective Device Name, Type and Settings
c. Bus Line to Line Voltage
16292E-3 11/2017
2171
CONTRACT DEL-260E
d. Bus Line Bolted Fault

e. Protective Device Bolted Fault Current
f. Arcing Fault Current
g. Protective Device Trip/Delay Time
h. Breaker Opening Time
i. Solidly Grounded Column
j. Equipment Type
k. Gap
l. Arc Flash Boundary
m. Working Distance
n. Incident Energy
o. Required Protective Fire Rated Clothing Type and Class
7. Analyze the short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash
calculations and highlight any equipment that is determined to be underrated or
causes an abnormally high incident energy calculation. Propose approaches to
reduce the energy levels. Proposed major corrective modifications will be taken
under advisement by the Engineer, and the Contractor will be given further
instructions.
8. The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final report. The
report shall include the following sections.
a. Introduction, executive summary and recommendations, assumptions,
reduced copy of the one line drawing.
b. Arc Flash Evaluations Summary Spreadsheet
c. Bus Detail Sheets
d. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels printed in color on adhesive backed
labels.
END OF SECTION
16292E-4 11/2017
2172
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16361 – MEDIUM VOLTAGE
LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16361
Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 16361 – Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear
has been prepared specifically for the Work of this Contract. There is no
corresponding General Specifications 16361 – Medium Voltage Load Interrupter
Switchgear.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the medium voltage load interrupter
switchgear as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. The following index of this specification is presented for convenience:

Article Title Page
PART 1 GENERAL ................................................................................................1

1.1 SCOPE..............................................................................................................1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ....................................................................................2
1.3 PAYMENT .......................................................................................................2
1.4 REFERENCES .................................................................................................2
1.5 SUBMITTALS - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL....................................... 2
1.6 SUBMITTALS - FOR CONSTRUCTION.............................................. 3
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS .........................................................................................3
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ..................................................4
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .......................................4
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................5

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .......................................................................................5
2.2 RATINGS .........................................................................................................5
2.3 15 KV CONSTRUCTION................................................................................5
2.4 BUS ..........................................................................................................7
2.5 BUS INSULATION SYSTEM ........................................................................7
2.6 FUSES. ..........................................................................................................8
2.7 ENCLOSURES ................................................................................................8
2.8 NAMEPLATES ................................................................................................8
2.9 FINISH ............................................................................................................. 8
PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................9

3.1 FACTORY TESTING ....................................................................................9
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................9
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION ......................................................9
3.4 TRAINING .....................................................................................................9
16361-1 11/2017
2173
CONTRACT DEL-260E
3.5 INSTALLATION..........................................................................................10
A. Detailed Specification 01270 - Measurement and Payment
B. Detailed Specification 01831 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1.03 PAYMENT
A. There shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section; all costs shall be included
in the lump sum price bid for Contract Item E-LS-1, as described in Detailed
1.04 REFERENCES
A. The medium voltage load interrupter switchgear and all components shall be designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards as follows:
1. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3
2. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4
3. ANSI C37.22
4. ANSI C37.57, C37.58
5. NEMA SG5
6. EEMAC G8-3.3
B. Listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) shall be provided for 15 kV class medium

voltage load interrupter switchgear.
1.05 SUBMITTALS - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:

1. Master drawing index
2. Front view elevation
3. Floor plan
4. Top view
5. Single line
6. Nameplate schedule
7. Component list
8. Conduit entry/exit locations
9. Assembly ratings including:
a. Short-circuit rating
b. Voltage
c. Continuous current
d. Basic Impulse Level
10. Major component ratings including:
16361-2 11/2017
2174
CONTRACT DEL-260E
a. Voltage
b. Continuous current
c. Interrupting ratings
11. Cable terminal sizes
B. Where applicable or required by the Engineer the following additional information shall be
submitted to the Engineer:
1. Bus duct connection

2. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies
3. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies
4. Electrical schematic diagram
5. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations
6. Descriptive bulletins
7. Product data sheets
8. Description of shop and field testing methods, procedures and apparatus with
calibration dates shall be submitted. Testing methods and procedures shall be
submitted at least 45 days in advance prior to confirmation of witness testing dates
and actual testing.
1.06 SUBMITTALS - FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.05, and
shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process
2. Wiring diagrams
3. Certified production test reports
4. Installation information including equipment anchorage provisions
5. Seismic certification as specified
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major

components within the assembly.
B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002
certified.
C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical

equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer,
an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided
demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
D. Provide Seismic tested equipment as follows:

16361-3 11/2017
2175
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet
all applicable seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) for
zone 4 application. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these
requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based
upon testing of representative equipment. The test response spectrum shall be
based upon a 5% minimum damping factor, IBC: a peak of 2.45g's (3.2-11 Hz),
and a ZPA of 0.98g's applied at the base of the equipment. The tests shall fully
envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural frequencies up to at
least 35 Hz.
2. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met,

unless specifically modified by the above referenced standards.
a. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated
with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a
licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be
provided by the manufacturer based upon approved shake table tests used
to verify the seismic design of the equipment.
b. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand,
that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and
lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes.
c. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary
for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall
be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or
exceeds the specified response spectra.
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of
shipment.
B. Each switchgear assembly shall be split into shipping groups for handling as
indicated on the Contract Drawings or per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail or ship. Shipping
groups shall be bolted to skids. Accessories shall be packaged and shipped
separately. Each switchgear shipping group shall be equipped with lifting eyes for
handling solely by crane.
1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be in accordance with

Detailed Specification 01831 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals and provided
with each assembly shipped, and shall include instruction leaflets and instruction
bulletins for the complete assembly and each major component.
16361-4 11/2017
2176
CONTRACT DEL-260E
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D, Palatine, IL
B. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer products, Cleveland, OH
C. Or Approved equal
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their
products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Contractor is not
relieved from providing a product that meets these specifications. Products in compliance
with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if
pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date.
2.02 RATINGS
A. Switchgear assembly ratings shall be as follows:

1. Nominal System Voltage 15 kV three-phase, three wire
2. System Grounding
B. Main Bus Continuous Current 1200 A
1. Maximum Design Voltage 15 kV

2. BIL 95 kV
3. Main Bus Momentary Current (10 Cycle) 61 kA Asymmetrical
RMS
4. Fuse Interrupting Rating 63 kA Sym RMS
5. Fused Switch Fault close 101 kA Asymmetrical
RMS
2.03 15 KV SWITCHGEAR CONSTRUCTION
A. The metal-enclosed load interrupter switchgear shall consist of deadfront, completely

metal-enclosed vertical sections containing load interrupter switches and fuses (where
shown) of the number, rating and type noted on the Contract Drawings or specified
herein.
B. The following features shall be supplied on every vertical section containing a three-
pole, two-position open-closed switch:
1. A minimum 8-inch x 16-inch high-impact viewing window that permits full view
of the position of all three switch blades through the closed door. The window
shall not be more than 58-inches above the switch pad level to allow ease of
inspection
2. The door shall be interlocked with the switch so that:

16361-5 11/2017
2177
CONTRACT DEL-260E
a. The switch must be opened before the door can be opened.

b. The door must be closed before the switch can be closed.
3. A hinged grounded metal barrier that is bolted closed in front of every switch to
prevent inadvertent contact with any live part, yet allows for a full-view
inspection of the switch blade position
4. Provision for padlocking the switch in the open or closed position
5. Green OPEN, Red CLOSED switch position indicators with the words "Open"
and "Closed".
6. A hinged cover with rustproof quarter turn nylon latches over the switch operating
mechanism to discourage casual tampering
7. The switch shall be removable from the structure as a complete operational
component
C. Vertical section construction shall be of the universal frame type using die- formed and
bolted parts. All enclosing covers and doors shall be fabricated from steel with
thickness equal to or greater than that specified in ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3. No owner
removable hardware for covers or doors shall be thread- forming type. To facilitate
installation and maintenance of cables and bus in each vertical section, a split removable
top cover and padlockable hinged rear door held closed by bolts shall be provided. A
G90 grade galvanized base shall isolate equipment from contact with the concrete pad
providing protection from rust. Heavy-duty hot dipped galvanized anchor clips shall be
provided to anchor the switchgear to the concrete pad.
D. Each vertical section containing a switch shall have a single, full-length, flanged front
door and shall be equipped with two (2) rotary latch-type padlockable handles. Provision
shall be made for operating the switch and storing the removable handle without
opening the full length door.
E. Each load interrupter switch shall have the following features:
1. Three-pole gang-operated mechanism
2. Manual quick-make, quick-break over-toggle-type mechanism that does not require

the use of a chain or a cable for operation, and utilizes a heavy-duty coil spring to
provide opening and closing energy
3. The speed of opening and closing the switch shall be independent of the operator,
and it shall be impossible to tease the switch into any intermediate position under
normal operation
4. Separate main and break contacts to provide maximum endurance for fault close and
load interrupting duty
16361-6 11/2017
2178
CONTRACT DEL-260E
5. Insulating barriers between each phase and between the outer phases and the
enclosure
6. A maintenance provision for slow closing the switch to check switch blade
engagement and slow opening the switch to check operation of the arc interrupting
contacts.
F. Provide a grounding switch on the load side of the fuses to discharge any capacitive voltage
in the feeder cable prior to gaining access to the fuse compartment. Switch shall be
mechanically interlocked with the main grounding switch of the load interrupter switch.
G. Provide line and load side live line indicators as standard on the mechanism compartment.
The live line indicator assembly shall be mounted in the mechanism compartment and shall
be an easily removable module containing three neon indicators powered from voltage
dividers within the 3 standoff insulators.
2.04 BUS
A. All phase bus conductors shall be silver-plated copper.
B. Ground bus shall be silver-plated copper and be directly fastened to a galvanized

metal surface of each vertical section, and be of a size sufficient to carry the rated (2-
second) current of the switchgear assembly.
C. A neutral bus shall be provided only when indicated on the Contract Drawings. It shall
be insulated for 1000 Vac to ground. The current rating of the neutral bus shall be
600 amperes.
2.05 BUS INSULATION SYSTEM
A. All bus shall be supported utilizing a high strength and high creep support providing
10.5-inch of creep distance between phases and ground. The molded fins shall be
constructed of high track resistant.
B. All standoff insulators on switches and fuse mountings shall be glass polyester or
cycloaliphatic epoxy Wiring/Terminations
C. One (1) terminal pad per phase shall be provided for attaching contractor-supplied cable
terminal lugs for a maximum of two (2) conductors per phase of the sizes indicated
on the Contract Drawings. Sufficient space shall be allowed for Contractor- supplied
electrical stress relief termination devices.
D. Small wiring, fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the vertical section shall be
furnished as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Each control wire shall be labeled with
wire markers. Terminal blocks shall be provided for owner's connections to other
16361-7 11/2017
2179
CONTRACT DEL-260E
apparatus.
2.06 FUSES
A. Fault protection shall be provided by fuses with continuous ratings as shown in the
C ontract Documents. Any fuse/switch integrated momentary and fault close ratings
specified shall have been verified by test and UL and CSA certified.
B. Furnish surge arresters with ratings in accordance with manufacture's

recommendations.
2.07 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosures shall be constructed per IEEE/ANSI C37.20.3 Outdoor specifications.

(Exceeds NEMA 3R.)
B. Each vertical section shall have a sloped weatherproof roof with labyrinth shaped
joints. Use of gasket or caulking to make roof joints weatherproof shall not be
permitted. All exterior openings shall be covered with screens to prevent the entrance
of small animals and barriered to inhibit the entrance of snow, sand, etc. A minimum
of one (1) 250-watt, 120-volt space heater shall be provided in each vertical section.
Power for the space heater(s) shall be furnished by a control power transformer mounted
in the switchgear. The design of the enclosure shall be non-walk-in type.
C. Enclosure shall be dust resistant. All ventilated openings shall be filtered to inhibit the
ingress of dust. The ventilated covers shall be externally removable to allow safe
maintenance of the filter media without providing access to live parts. All external
doors and covers shall be gasketed.
2.08 NAMEPLATES
A. A nameplate shall be mounted on the front door of each switch vertical section in
accordance with the Contract Drawings.
2.09 FINISH
A. Prior to assembly, all enclosing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized. A
powder coating shall be applied electrostatically, then fused-on by baking in an oven.
The coating shall have a thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. The finish shall have the
following properties: Impact resistance (ASTM D-2794); 60 direct/60 indirect Pencil
hardness (ASTM D-3363); H Flexibility (ASTM D-522) Pass 1/8- inch mandrel bend
test; Salt spray (ASTM B117-85 [20]) 600 hours; Color ANSI 61 gray
PART 3 EXECUTION

16361-8 11/2017
2180
CONTRACT DEL-260E
A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests
shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards.
B. Factory tests as outlined above shall be witnessed by the owner's representative.
1. The manufacturer shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date the
tests are to be performed
2. The Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of satisfactory and suitable means
for air travel, transportation, incidentals, meals and lodging for the Engineer and
the City’s representatives to attend witness testing at the factory.
3. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports.
A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist

the Contractor in installation and startup of the equipment specified under this section for
a period of 3 working days. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical
direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment,
connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained
therein.
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field startup
report.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall provide a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative

shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All test and values shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and NETA, ATS Acceptance
Testing Specifications.
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's
certification.
3.04 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide a two-day training session for up to five (5) Owner's
representatives at a location determined by the Owner.
B. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative and

consist of instruction on the assembly, switches and major components.
16361-9 11/2017
2181
CONTRACT DEL-260E
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and
B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
16361-10 11/2017
2182
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16430E – LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16430E
Low Voltage Switchgear
Specification 16430 – Low Voltage Switchgear except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
Replace paragraph 1.06 B with the following:
B. Seismic Requirements: The switchgear shall be designed, constructed and installed

suitable for earthquake regulations in accordance with the seismic requirements of the
City of New York Building Code and the Uniform Building Code for Zone 2A
applications and in accordance with local and state building codes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Switchgear equipment shall be manufactured by:

3. General Electric Company, Fairfield, CT
2.02 SWITCHGEAR
A. The low voltage switchgear shall consist of individually mounted molded case circuit
breakers in fixed mounting construction and auxiliary transition compartments.

16430E-1 11/2017
2183
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2. Continuous AC main bus ampacity, bracing and number of wires shall be as

shown on the Contract Drawings. Each circuit breaker shall be fully rated. Each
Circuit breaker shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 65KAIC unless
otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. The breakers shall have a short
circuit interrupting rating greater than the maximum available short circuit
current at the breaker line side terminals.
Add following after paragraph 2.02.D.4:
5. Where the highest continuous current trip setting for which the actual overcurrent
device is installed in a circuit breaker is rated or can be adjusted is 1200A or
higher provide energy reducing active arc flash mitigation system or energy
reducing maintenance switching with local status indicator.
Replace paragraph 2.02.E with the following:
E. The switchgear shall include low voltage molded case circuit breakers, 3 pole fixed
mounting type and shall include an electronic microprocessor based trip system.
Breaker frame size and sensor rating shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Switchgear breakers shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Each circuit breaker shall be UL listed for 100 percent continuous ampere rating
when operating within the switchgear compartment
2. Each circuit breaker shall be fully rated. Each Circuit breaker shall have a
minimum short circuit rating of 65KAIC. The breakers shall have a short circuit
interrupting rating greater than the maximum available short circuit current at the
breaker line side terminals.
3. Each circuit breaker shall be fully rated. The breakers shall have a short circuit
interrupting greater than the maximum available short circuit current at the
breaker line side terminals.
4. The electronic trip system shall include a plug-in protection programmer, a flux
shift trip device and current sensor package. The programmer, sensor and flux-
shifting trip device shall be constructed as integral elements of the breaker,
requiring no externally mounted assemblies for proper operation.
5. A neutral current sensor shall be provided for each circuit breaker when used in
the 4 wire circuits shown on the Contract Drawings.
6. The protection programmer shall be solid state, microprocessor based, nine

function type and shall provide true RMS current sensing. The programmers
16430E-2 11/2017
2184
CONTRACT DEL-260E
shall be equipped with electronic monitoring and communication circuitry. The

programmer shall be in accordance with the following:
a. The programmer’s protective functions shall include adjustable continuous

and instantaneous current elements with adjustable long time, short time and
zero sequence ground fault pickup and delay.
b. The programmer’s monitoring and communication circuitry shall include

communications, control and energy monitoring features, to permit both
local and remote interface with the breakers circuits from the breaker
interface module at the switchgear and from a microcomputer terminal.
c. The protective monitoring and communication type programmers shall

provide complete communications and energy monitoring functions and be
capable of passing the following minimum information to the breaker
interface module and microcomputer:
1) Harmonic content and percent THD.
2) Waveform analysis.
3) Energy consumption plus MVA and VAR.
7. Where on the Contract Drawings circuit breaker is rated 1200A or higher provide
arc energy reduction in accordance with the following:
a. For each main/tie or feeder circuit breaker, provide a maintenance OFF/ON

selector switch on the compartment door to switch the circuit breaker
instantaneous tripping characteristics to an alternate setting temporarily
during maintenance activity.
b. Provide a lock feature for the energy reduction maintenance setting (ERMS)
switch so that it may be locked in either the OFF or ON maintenance mode
position.
c. Provide a blue LED indicating light to indicate trip unit is in the ERMS
mode.
d. Wire contacts on all ERMS switches to a common alarm input to plant
control system.
8. Circuit breaker accessories shall include the following:
a. Auxiliary contacts for remote indication of circuit breaker’s open and close
status.
b. Indicators for overload, short circuit and ground trip indication.
c. Hand-held programmer for accessing, displaying, configuring and testing
each breaker trip unit.
Replace paragraph 2.02 F. with the following:
16430E-3 11/2017
2185
CONTRACT DEL-260E
F. Low voltage switchgear accessories shall be provided in accordance with the

following:
1. The switchgear shall include microprocessor type bus metering. The bus
metering shall consist of three current transformers, ampere ratio as shown on the
Contract Drawings and a microprocessor based meter device. The meter device
shall include self-contained potential transformers and internal fuses, and shall
include the following direct reading metered values:
a. AC amperes, each phase.
b. AC voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral.
c. Watts, VARS and VA.
d. Watt-hours, VAR-hours and VA-hours.
e. Power factor.
f. Frequency.
g. Percent THD.
h. Watt, VAR, VA and Ampere Demand.
i. Individual Ampere and Voltage Harmonics.
j. Trend Analysis.
k. Event Logging and Recording.
2. The switchgear shall include an electronic interface module. The module shall
permit central monitoring and display of each circuit breaker programmer
parameter. The module shall also communicate information from the protective
and energy monitoring type programmers over a monitoring data network to a
microcomputer. The module shall permit configuration, display and testing
features and shall include the following displayed parameters:
a. Phase and average demand current.
b. Present and peak demand watts.
c. Energy.
d. Trip information.
e. Percent THD.
f. Percent harmonic content.
3. The switchgear shall have identifying nameplates in accordance with the

requirements of General Specification 16076 - Labeling and Identification. A
switchgear master nameplate shall also be provided mounted on the assembly.
The master nameplate shall identify switchgear designation, voltage, ampere and
short circuit rating, manufacturer’s name, general order number and item number.
4. Each low voltage switchgear shall be provided with bus surge protection. The
bus surge protection shall consist of a three phase secondary type arrester and
capacitor suitable for applications at 600 volts and below.
Add following after paragraph 2.02.F:
16430E-4 11/2017
2186
CONTRACT DEL-260E
G. Protective relays
1. The switchgear manufacturer shall furnish and install in the switchgear the phase
loss relay and capacitor trip device. Phase loss relay shall provide phase
loss/unbalance phase detection, low voltage detection and overvoltage detection
features. Provide voltage and current transformer for protective relay.
Manufacture shall provide adequate quantity, type and ratings of relays and
associated equipment. Protective relays and associated equipment ratings shall be
coordinated with arc-flash and short circuit coordination study.
2. Phase loss relay type PND-LV-O by Taylor Electronic Inc. or approved equal.
2.04 SHOP TESTS
Add following after paragraph 2.04 B.2.:
3. The Contractor shall notify the owner two (2) weeks prior to the date the tests are
to be performed.
4. The Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of satisfactory and suitable means
for air travel, transportation, incidentals, meals and lodging for the Engineer and
the City’s representatives to attend witness testing at the factory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.03 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES
B. The Contractor shall provide equipment start-up services and training.
Replace paragraph 3.04 C.5. with the following:
5. Communications and metering wiring performance test shall be performed.
END OF SECTION
16430E-5 11/2017
2187
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16430E-6 11/2017
2188
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16441E – PANELBOARDS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16441E
Panelboards
Specification 16441 – Panelboards except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
A. There is shall be no separate payment for the Work of this Section; all costs shall be
B. The panelboards shall be designed, constructed and installed suitable for earthquake
regulations in accordance with the seismic requirements of the City of New York
Building Code and the Uniform Building Code for Zone 2A applications and in
accordance with local and state building codes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02 PANELBOARDS
Add the following after paragraph 2.02 D.4:
5. All exterior panelboards shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled

space heater inside the cabinet.
Add the following after paragraph 2.02 E.6.

7. Breakers used for air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment evaluated
for HACR-type circuit breakers shall be marked as HACR type.
8. Where required to meet the interrupting ratings shown on the Contract Drawings,
the main circuit breaker design shall include a current limiting feature for proper
performance of the circuit breaker during short circuit conditions.
END OF SECTION
16441E-1 11/2017
2189
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16441E – PANELBOARDS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16441E-2 11/2017
2190
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16442E – ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT-
LOW VOLTAGE AC MOTORS AND DEVICES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16442
Electrical Control Equipment- Low Voltage AC Motors and Devices
Specification 16442 – Electrical Control Equipment – Low Voltage AC Motors and
Devices except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SWITCHING DEVICES
Replace paragraph 2.01 D.1 with the following:
1. Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with number of poles, voltage and
current ratings as shown on the Contract Drawings. Circuit breakers shall have a
minimum short circuit rating of 65KAIC.
2.02 MAGNETIC STARTERS
Replace paragraph 2.02 H. with the following:
H. Pilot devices shall be heavy duty type, rated 10 amp continuous, minimum.
Pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights and other devices shall be located on
the starter enclosure. Indicating lights shall be push-to-test, LED transformer type.
Lens color shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
2.04 CONTROL STATIONS
Replace paragraph 2.04 D. with the following:
D. Pilot devices shall be heavy duty type, rated 10 amp continuous, minimum.
Pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights and other devices shall be located on
the starter enclosure. Indicating lights shall be push-to-test, LED transformer type.
Lens color shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
16442E-1 11/2017
2191
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16442E – ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT-
LOW VOLTAGE AC MOTORS AND DEVICES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2.05 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosures shall be provided for the electric control equipment. Unless otherwise
indicated on the Contract Drawings, enclosures shall meet the following requirements:
1. For all locations enclosures shall be corrosion resistant, NEMA Type 4X. Except
for chlorine areas, boxes shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel material with
sealed seams. Enclosures in chlorine areas shall be constructed of non-metallic
FRP materials.
2. For enclosures located in the Electrical Service Room and on the Mezzanine
Floor enclosures shall meet NEMA 12 requirements.
Delete paragraph 2.05 B.
Delete paragraph 2.05 C
Relabel paragraph 2.05 D as paragraph 2.05 B.
END OF SECTION
16442E-2 11/2017
2192
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16482 – MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16482
Motor Control Centers
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 16482 – Motor Control Centers has been prepared
specifically for the Work of this Contract. There is no corresponding General
Specifications 16482 – Motor Control Centers.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown,
specified and required to furnish and install motor control centers complete and
operational.
B. An index of the Articles in this Specification is presented hereinafter for the

Article Title Page

16482-
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Section Includes .........................................................................1
1.02 Related Specifications ................................................................2
1.03 Payment………………………………………………………..2
1.04 References ..................................................................................2
1.05 Submittals ..................................................................................2
1.06 Quality Assurance ......................................................................3
1.07 Delivery, Storage and Handling .................................................4
1.08 Spare Parts .................................................................................4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers ............................................................................5

2.02 Ratings .......................................................................................5
2.03 Structure .....................................................................................5
2.04 Bus System.................................................................................6
2.05 Unit Compartments ....................................................................7
2.06 Electronic Metering System ......................................................10
2.07 Wiring .......................................................................................10
2.08 Painting .....................................................................................11
2.09 Shop Tests .................................................................................11
PART 3 EXECUTION
16482-1 11/2017
2193
CONTRACT DEL-260E
3.01 Installation.................................................................................12
3.02 Field Tests .................................................................................12
3.03 Manufacturer’s Field Services ..................................................12
3.04 Acceptance Testing ...................................................................13
A. Detailed Specification 01270 – Measurement and Payment

B. Detailed Specification 01821 –Equipment Start Up and Training
C. General Specification 16076 - Labeling and Identification.
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 REFERENCES
A. The motor control centers shall comply with the latest applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following.
2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
3. NEMA ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems.
4. NEMA ICS 2.3, Instruction for Handling, Installation, Operation and
Maintenance.
5. UL No. 845, Standard for Motor Control Centers.
6. NETA, International Electrical Testing Association.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Detailed Specification 01330 –

Submittal Procedures.
B. Working Drawings:
1. Prior to equipment submission, submit the proposed manufacturer.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data required to demonstrate
compliance with the specific requirements. Data shall be submitted for each
component to be provided. Data shall include type, ratings, settings and other
technical information.
3. A completed materials list with outline and summary sheets and schedule of
equipment in each unit.
4. Unit control schematics and wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal
points and all interconnections. A separate diagram shall be provided for each
compartment. The diagram shall also include the equipment name, number and
the motor control center designation.
16482-2 11/2017
2194
CONTRACT DEL-260E
5. Description of shop and field testing methods, procedures and apparatus with
calibration dates shall be submitted. Testing methods and procedures shall be
submitted at least 45 days in advance prior to conformation of witness testing
dates and actual testing.
6. Qualifications of proposed testing firm to perform acceptance testing shall be
submitted. Submit firm experience records at least 45 days in advance to
actual testing, five recent references with phone numbers shall be submitted.
C. Certificate of Compliance:
1. The Contractor shall submit seismic qualification certification from the
manufacturer including mounting recommendations.
2. All data and results of witness tests shall be accompanied by a certificate of
authenticity sworn to before a notary public by an officer of the manufacturing
company. Upon approval, release for shipment to the Site shall proceed.
D. Reports:
2. Manufacturer’s Site visit and acceptance testing reports shall be submitted.
E. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with

Detailed Specification 01831 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
A. General:
1. Motor control centers shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with
the latest applicable requirements of NEMA, UL, NFPA and the Electrical
Code of the City of New York.
2. The Contractor shall obtain motor nameplate data on the actual equipment
being furnished of all Contracts for properly sizing circuit breakers, starters
and overloads. The settings of all devices shall be based upon the actual
motors furnished.
3. The motor control center manufacturer shall use a shop test facility that has
recently calibrated testing apparatus and qualified, experienced technicians, for
all factory tests. Calibration of testing apparatus shall be within one year.
4. All test equipment and instrument calibration shall be in accordance with the
latest edition of the accuracy standard of the U.S. National Institute of
Standards and Technology and the NETA acceptance testing specification.
5. Shop Tests and Inspection: The Motor Control Centers specified in this
Division and shown on the Contract Drawings shall be witness shop tested and
inspected in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s standard
procedures. The testing and inspection procedures shall be approved by the
Engineer. At least 45 days’ notice shall be given to the Engineer prior to such
tests and inspection dates. The test(s) shall be witnessed by the Engineer and
one Engineer form the DEP. The NYCDEP Engineer’s travel room and board
16482-3 11/2017
2195
CONTRACT DEL-260E
associated with the tests(s) is to be at the Contractor’s expenses. Provide

reservations and tickets in advance at least 10 days prior departure
B. Seismic Requirements:
1. The motor control centers shall be designed, constructed and installed suitable
for earthquake regulations in accordance with the seismic requirements of the
City of New York Building Code and the Uniform Building Code for zone 2A
application.
C. Field Tests:
1. The motor control centers shall be field tested. Field testing shall be performed
in accordance with the requirements specified under Article 3.02.
2. The services of the motor control center manufacturer shall be retained for
field service. Field service shall be in accordance with the requirements
acceptance testing of the motor control centers. The testing firm shall have
experience in the inspection and testing of the equipment and shall be a
member company of NETA. Acceptance testing shall be in accordance with
the requirements specified under Article 3.04.
Field testing(contractor), field services (contractor), and field acceptance (independent
contractor)
A. Motor control center equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the following.
1. Motor control centers shall be inspected for shipping damage or loose parts
when received. Contractor shall check that water has not entered the
equipment during transit.
2. Motor control centers shall be lifted, rolled or jacked into locations shown on
3. Motor control centers shall be stored in a clean, dry location in which a
uniform temperature is maintained. Equipment shall be protected with
coverings and maintain air circulation.
4. Where dampness or condensation may be encountered, heaters shall be
provided for equipment to prevent moisture damage.
1.08 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and deliver spare parts for the motor control centers to
the Engineer, at the time and location specified by the Engineer.
B. The spare parts shall be listed in an index and packed in containers suitable for long
term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the manufacturer’s part number with
complete information for use and reordering.
C. Spare parts for each motor control center shall include at a minimum the following:
16482-4 11/2017
2196
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. One (1) starter and one (1) circuit breaker or MCP per each of six (6) starters
or circuit breakers or MCP’s of a type/size, but not less than a minimum of
one(1) spare starter or circuit breaker or MCP shall be provided.
2. Twelve (12) fuses shall be provided, for each type and size used.
3. Four (4) control relays and timers shall be provided, for each type and size
used.
4. Four (4) control power transformers shall be provided, for each type and size
used.
5. Twelve (12) indicating lamp assemblies with lamps shall be provided, for each
type and size used.
6. Twelve (12) control station assemblies shall be provided, for each type and
size used.
7. Two (2) interlock system keys shall be provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The motor control centers shall be manufactured by:

2.02 RATINGS
A. The motor control centers shall be 600 volt class suitable for operation on a three
phase, 60 hertz system. The system operating voltage, number of wires, bus
ampacity and short circuit withstand capability shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
B. The circuit breakers and combination motor circuit protectors, motor starters shall
have a short circuit interrupting rating of 65KAIC.
C. Motor control center wiring shall be rated NEMA Class II, Type B. All motor
starters shall be NEMA rated, NEMA size 1 minimum.
2.03 STRUCTURE
A. Structures shall be totally enclosed dead-front, free-standing, front accessible

assemblies. They shall be 90 inches high and 20 inches wide. Larger widths shall be
utilized as required or as shown on the Contract Drawings. Minimum depth shall be
20 inches.
B. The structure shall consist of vertical sections of heavy gauge steel bolted together
forming a rigid unit assembly. Removable lifting angles or tabs shall be mounted on
16482-5 11/2017
2197
CONTRACT DEL-260E
top of each section. Removable bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear
of vertical section and shall extend full width of line-up.
C. The structure enclosures shall be NEMA Type 12 dust-tight and drip-proof.
D. Each vertical section shall contain a top and bottom horizontal wireway for
incoming lines and wiring between sections. A vertical wireway shall be adjacent to
each vertical unit and shall be covered by a hinged door. Vertical wireways shall
contain cable tie supports. Each individual device compartment shall have a side
barrier to permit pulling wire from vertical wireway without disturbing adjacent
device compartments.
E. Compartments for mounting units shall be incrementally arranged such that not
more than six NEMA Size 1 starters can be mounted within any vertical structure.
Guide rails shall be provided.
F. Construction for mounting units shall be back to back. Back to back construction
shall permit the mounting of units within the front and rear of a single section.
G. The structure and each compartment within shall have identifying nameplates in
accordance with the requirements of General Specification 16076 - Labeling and
Identification. Each spare and space compartments shall be labeled as such.
2.04 BUS SYSTEM
A. Each motor control center shall contain a main horizontal and vertical tin-plated
copper bus. Vertical buses feeding unit compartments shall be 800 ampere
minimum, and main horizontal bus shall be 800 ampere. Vertical bussing shall be
securely bolted to the horizontal main bus. All joints shall be front accessible for
ease of maintenance. Two independent front and rear vertical buses shall be
provided within each section arranged for back to back construction. The current
density of the busses shall not exceed 1000A/in2.
B. Main bus shall be isolated from wireways, starters and other areas by insulated
barriers. Bus bars shall be supported on white polyester reinforced insulators.
C. Vertical buses shall be completely isolated and insulated. Small openings in bus
sandwich shall permit unit stabs to plug into vertical bus bars, rather onto them.
Shutter mechanism shall be furnished to completely isolate vertical bus, including
stab area opening, when plug-in device is removed.
D. Neutral buses shall be tin-plated copper and extend the entire length of the
equipment. The neutral bus shall have a capacity equal to one half the capacity of
the main power bus.
16482-6 11/2017
2198
CONTRACT DEL-260E
E. Each motor control center shall contain a tin-plated copper horizontal ground bus
which extends the full width of the structure. The horizontal ground bus shall be
rated 300 ampere. Pressure type ground lugs shall be mounted on the ground bus in
the incoming line sections.
F. A vertical plug-in ground bus shall be tin-plated copper and linked to the horizontal
ground bus. The vertical plug-in ground bus shall be rated 150 ampere. This tin-
plated copper vertical plug-in ground bus, in combination with the unit ground bus
stab, shall establish unit insert grounding before the plug-in power stabs engage the
power bus, and conversely, as the unit is withdrawn, grounding is maintained until
after the plug-in power stabs are disengaged.
G. A vertical load ground bus shall be tin-plated copper and linked to the horizontal
ground bus. The vertical load ground bus shall be rated 150 ampere. The bus
assembly shall provide a termination point for the load ground cable at the unit. The
fixed connection shall not require removal, when the unit is withdrawn.
2.05 UNIT COMPARTMENTS
A. General:
1. Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door.
Plug-in units shall be supported and guided by a removable support pan, so
that unit rearrangement is easily accomplished.
2. The rearrangement of the unit support pan from one location to the other shall
be accomplished without use of tools. After insertion, each plug-in unit shall
be held in place by at least two multi-turn latches, located on the front of the
unit. At least one latch shall be located at the top of the unit and one at the
bottom, for front accessibility and inspection convenience.
3. Unit compartments shall contain circuit breakers, combination motor starters,
and related control equipment as required and shown on the Contract
Drawings.
4. Full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 5 shall be of the draw-out type.
Draw-out provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab
shrouds to absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Draw-out
units shall have a stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. Cables shall
be connected to stabs with maintenance free crimp connectors. No wiring to
these stabs shall extend into the bus compartment.
5. All units shall be isolated from one another, above and below, by unit support
pans or steel barriers which can remain in place when the units are withdrawn.
6. Incoming line compartments shall be isolated from horizontal and vertical
wireways by steel barriers.
7. All spare compartments shall be fully equipped with mounting rails and
accessories and all miscellaneous hardware. Spare starters shall also include
terminal blocks and pilot devices in accordance with starter types shown on
16482-7 11/2017
2199
CONTRACT DEL-260E
8. All space compartments shall be fully equipped with mounting rails and
accessories and all miscellaneous hardware required for the future installation
of a breaker or starter.
B. Operating Mechanisms:
1. An operating mechanism shall be mounted on the primary disconnect of each
feeder or starter unit. It shall be mechanically interlocked with the unit
door to prevent access unless the disconnect is in the OFF position. A defeater
shall be provided to bypass this interlock.
2. With the door open, an interlock shall be provided to prevent inadvertent
closing of the disconnect. A second interlock shall be provided to prevent
removal or re-insertion of the unit while in the ON position.
3. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in the
OFF position with from one to three padlocks with the door open or closed. In
addition, means shall be provided to padlock the unit in a partially withdrawn
position with the stabs free of the vertical bus.
C. Main Incoming Line and Feeder Compartments:

1. Main incoming line lug compartments shall be equipped with terminal lugs
suitable for terminating the cables shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. Feeder circuit breakers shall be the molded case type. All feeder circuit
breakers shall be molded case, manually operated thermal magnetic type,
including inverse-time overload and instantaneous short-circuit protection.
3. Breakers shall have 100 ampere frames as a minimum. Overload protection
shall be provided on all poles, with trip settings as shown on the Contract
Drawings. Breakers with frame sizes 225 ampere or larger shall have
interchangeable trip units and adjustable magnetic trip elements.
4. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a
quick-make/quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is
mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly
indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy
and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes.
5. Where required to meet the interrupting ratings shown on the Contract
Drawings, the circuit breaker design shall include a current limiting feature for
proper performance of the circuit breaker during short circuit conditions.
D. Combination Motor Control Units:

1. Combination motor control units shall consist of a main disconnect device, a
motor starter and auxiliary control devices, as required and shown on the
Contract Drawings.
2. The disconnect device shall be a circuit breaker, motor circuit protector type.
The motor circuit protector shall be molded case device with a magnetic
current sensing coil in each of the three poles. The current sensing coil shall
have an adjustable trip setting by means of a single dial, mounted on the front
of the breaker.
16482-8 11/2017
2200
CONTRACT DEL-260E
3. Where required to meet the interrupting ratings shown on the Contract

Drawings, the circuit breaker design shall include a current limiting feature for
proper performance of the circuit breaker and motor starter in combination
during short circuit conditions.
4. Motor starters shall be electrically operated, electrically held, three-pole type
with arc extinguishing characteristics and silver-to-silver renewable contacts.
They shall have provisions for a total of four normally open and four normally
closed auxiliary contacts. Starter shall be full voltage single speed non-
reversing, reversing and two speed, two winding type as shown on the
Contract Drawings. Starters shall be equipped with extra contactors and
interlocking contacts as required.
5. The starters shall be provided with thermal overload relays of the ambient
temperature compensated, bimetallic strip type, one for each ungrounded
phase. The capacity of the overload relays shall be manually adjustable
through a range of 85 to 115 percent of the normal trip rating.
6. The overload relays shall be equipped with a reset. The reset shall be mounted
on the starter compartment door and shall allow manual reset without opening
the compartment door. The relays shall include isolated dry contacts, one
normally open and one normally closed to signal an overload trip condition.
7. Control power transformers shall be provided with each combination motor
control unit. Control power transformers shall be 480-120 volt, 60 Hertz and
shall have the following minimum volt-amp ratings unless required or shown
on the Contract Drawings:
NEMA Size Starter VA
1&2 200
3 300
4&5 500
8. Control power transformers be epoxy encapsulated, core and coil units
designed for machine tool applications. Insulation temperature classes shall be
185 degrees C, 115 degrees C rise. Maximum surface temperature shall be 65
degrees C.
9. Control power transformers shall be provided with one secondary lead
furnished with a Class H control fuse and clip, and the other secondary lead
grounded. Both primary leads shall be provided with Class CC control fuses
and clips.
10. Control relays and pilot devices shall be provided as required for the control
operation, shown on the Contract Drawings.
11. Control relays shall be machine tool type, rated 600 volt with contacts rated 10
ampere continuous, and shall be capable of making 7200VA and breaking
720VA. Contacts shall be bifurcated and convertible, coil voltage shall be 120
volt, 60 Hertz unless otherwise shown Contract Drawings.
12. Relays shall be standard, latching type, pneumatic or solid state time delay
type. Each relay shall be furnished with the number of contacts required and
contain a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts.
16482-9 11/2017
2201
CONTRACT DEL-260E
13. Pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights and other pilot devices shall
be provided with a door mounted control station. The control station shall be
removable for the purpose of mounting and wiring the pilot devices, and shall
be held in place with mounting screws. Contact blocks of the pilot devices
shall be mounted in a recessed control station housing to minimize the hazard
of accidental contact when the unit door is opened.
14. The pilot devices shall be heavy duty, machine-tool service type. Pilot
devices shall be rated 600 volt with contacts rated 10 ampere continuous, and
shall be capable of making 7200VA and breaking 720VA. Pilot lights shall
be LED push-to-test, transformer type.
15. Terminal blocks shall be pull-apart type on plug-in units for easy removal of
the unit from the structure. Terminal blocks on non plug-in units shall be the
fixed type. Terminal blocks shall be mounted on the right side or bottom of the
unit compartment for easy accessibility. Control terminal blocks shall be rated
20 ampere, 600 volt minimum.
16. Power pull-apart blocks shall be 3-pole rated 60 ampere at 600 volts and shall
be supplied through NEMA Size 2 starters. A non-pull-apart block rated 195
amps, 600 volts shall be supplied for NEMA Size 3 starters.
2.06 ELECTRONIC METERING SYSTEM
A. The motor control centers shall include a bus metering system. The system shall
permit central monitoring and display of each main bus.
B. The bus metering system shall consist of three current transformers, ampere ratio as
indicated on the Contract Drawings, a pull fuse disconnect and a microprocessor
based meter device.
C. The microprocessor based meter device shall include self-contained potential

transformers and internal fuses, and shall include a display with keypad for the
following direct reading metered values:
1. AC ampere, each phase.
2. AC voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral.
3. Watts, VARS and VA.
4. Watt-hours, VAR-hours and VA-hours.
5. Power factor.
6. Frequency.
7. Percent THD.
D. Current transformers shall be window type, designed for 600 volt indoor service.
Transformers shall be metering class, 1 percent accuracy suitable for operating the
meters.
16482-10 11/2017
2202
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2.07 WIRING
A. Control and power wiring shall be flame-retardant, VW-1 moisture, heat and oil
resistant thermoplastic insulation rated 600 volt, 90 degree C, with stranded copper
conductors, types MTW and THW.
B. Control wires shall be colored red. Power phase wires shall be colored black, with
neutral wires white. Ground wires shall be colored green.
C. Control wire size shall be No.14 AWG minimum. Power wire size shall be No.12
AWG minimum.
D. Wiring shop terminations, shall be compression type or pressure type terminals

furnished on devices. All control wiring shall terminate with heavy duty ring type
terminals. External type current transformers shall be wired to shorting terminal
blocks.
E. All wiring shall be labeled in accordance with the wiring numbers shown the wiring
diagrams. Wire numbers shall not repeat.
2.08 PAINTING
A. All metal surfaces of the motor control centers shall be thoroughly cleaned and
given one coat of zinc chromate primer. All interior surfaces shall then be given one
shop finishing coat of a nitro- cellulose lacquer enamel.
B. All exterior surfaces shall be given three coats of the same lacquer. The color of the
finishing coats shall be light gray ANSI No. 61.
C. All unit compartment interiors shall be painted white.
2.09 SHOP TESTS

A. Certified Shop Tests:
1. Shop testing shall be performed on the motor control centers at the
manufacturer’s plant prior to shipment. Shop tests shall be in accordance with
the latest revisions of NEMA and shall demonstrate that the equipment tested
conforms to the requirements specified.
2. The Contractor shall provide a shop test report. The report shall identify the
tests performed and the results obtained.
3. Motor control center shop tests shall include the following:
a. Physical inspection shall be performed, including torque tests of bus
bolts.
b. Mechanical and functionality operations tests shall be performed to
insure proper functioning of operating mechanisms and control devices.
c. Continuity tests shall be performed on power and control wiring.
16482-11 11/2017
2203
CONTRACT DEL-260E
d. High potential tests shall be performed on the power and control circuits.
Power circuits shall be tested phase to phase and phase to ground at 2200
volt for one minute or 2700 volt for one second. Control circuits shall be
tested at 1500 volt for one minute or 1800 volt for one second.
B. Witness Shop Tests:

1. The Contractor shall perform witnessed shop tests in accordance with
Detailed Specification - 01433 Witness Shop Testing and Quality Assurance
Inspections.
2. Each new motor control center shall be witnessed shop tested in accordance
with the procedures specified under paragraph 2.09(A). The Contractor shall
include in his bid the reasonable cost of air travel, transportation, incidentals,
meals and lodging for the Engineer and the City’s representatives to attend
witness testing at the factory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Motor control centers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions and recommendations.
B. Motor control centers shall be installed so that sufficient access and working space
is provided for ready and safe operation.
C. Motor control centers shall be installed on concrete pads at locations shown on the
Contract Drawings. Steel channels shall be provided for support of equipment,
which shall be securely mounted to surface with anchor bolts. Anchor motor control
centers to satisfy the specified seismic requirements in accordance with the
anchorage details.
D. All circuits within motor control centers shall be wired together and identified with
durable tag secured to cabling twine.
E. All motor control center protection and control devices shall be properly adjusted
such that the circuits operate correctly and safely.
F. Install nameplates for identification of equipment.
3.02 FIELD TESTS
A. After installation, the motor control centers shall be field tested for operation and
conformance. The Contractor shall perform field testing in accordance with
Detailed Specification 01811 – Preliminary and Final Field Tests. The field tests
shall be witnessed by the Engineer and certified by the Contractor.
16482-12 11/2017
2204
CONTRACT DEL-260E
B. All motor control center testing shall be performed by the manufacturer’s

representative, prior to energizing equipment. All the tests and values shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer’s representative.
Equipment shall not be energized without the permission of the Engineer.
A. A qualified manufacturer’s representative shall assist in the installation of the motor

control centers, check the motor control centers installation before it is place into
operation, assist in the performance of field tests and train the plant operations and
maintenance staff in the care, operation and maintenance of the motor control
centers.
B. The Contractor shall provide equipment start-up services and training in accordance
with Detailed Specification 01821 –Equipment Start Up and Training.
C. The Contractor shall provide a field report from the manufacturer’s representative
for each visit to the Site. The report shall include complete information on time,
schedule, tasks performed, persons contacted, problems corrected, tests results,
training instruction and all other pertinent information.
D. The service representative shall sign in with the Engineer on each day they are at
the Site.
A. The Contractor shall provide acceptance testing of the motor control centers. All
acceptance testing shall be performed by the testing firm, after the completion of the
field tests specified under Article 3.02. The acceptance testing shall be witnessed by
the Engineer and certified by the Contractor.
B. Acceptance testing inspection shall be performed on each motor control center.

Inspection shall include:
1. Physical, electrical and mechanical condition shall be inspected.
2. Short circuit and overload protection shall be confirmed with the full load
current rating of the motors.
3. All connections shall be inspected for high resistance.
4. Electrical and mechanical interlock systems and control circuits shall be
checked for proper operation.
C. Acceptance electrical testing shall be performed on each motor control center.

Testing shall include the following:
1. Insulation - resistance tests shall be performed on each bus section, on each
starter and circuit breaker, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
2. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit with respect to ground.
3. Motor overload units shall be tested by current injection.
16482-13 11/2017
2205
CONTRACT DEL-260E
D. All tests and values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications.
E. The Contractor shall provide an acceptance testing report. The report shall be in
accordance with NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications.
END OF SECTION
16482-14 11/2017
2206
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16491E – FUSES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16491E
Fuses
Specification 16491 – Fuses except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 PAYMENT
1.03 REFERENCES
6. Consolidated Edison Company of New York (ConED) standard for medium

voltage class primary electric service fuses.
1.07 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish and deliver spare fuses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Primary metering fuses shall be installed in accordance with Con Ed requirements.
END OF SECTION
16491E-1 11/2017
2207
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16491E – FUSES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16491E-2 11/2017
2208
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16496 – AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16496
Automatic Transfer Switches
NOTE: This Detailed Specification 16496 – Automatic Transfer Switches has been
prepared specifically for the Work of this Contract. There is no corresponding General
Specifications 16496 – Automatic Transfer Switches.
PART 1 GENERAL
shown, specified and required to furnish and install automatic transfer switches
(ATSs) complete and operational.
B. Furnish and install ATSs with number of poles, amperage and voltage, withstand
and close-on ratings as shown on the Contract Drawings. Each automatic transfer
shall consist of an inherently double-throw power transfer switch mechanism and a
microprocessor controller to provide automatic operation. All transfer switches
and controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
C. The Contractor shall obtain motor nameplate data on the equipment being
furnished of all Contracts for properly sizing circuit breakers, starters and
overloads. The settings of all devices shall be based upon the actual motors
furnished.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The automatic transfer switches and controls shall conform to the requirements of:
1. UL 1008 - Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
2. IEC 60947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear; Multifunction
equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
4. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems
5. IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications
6. NEMA Standard ICS10-1993 (formerly ICS2-447) - AC Automatic Transfer
Switches
7. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
16496-1 11/2017
2209
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1.03 PAYMENT
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Detailed
Specification 01330 - Submittal Procedures: qualifications of proposed
manufacturer and testing agency; Shop Drawings; factory test reports; product
data; certificates of compliance; and all other information required to establish
compliance with this section.
B. Manufacturer and testing agency:

1. Prior to equipment submission, submit documents demonstrating that the
proposed manufacturer complies with the requirements of Article 1.05.
2. Qualifications of proposed testing agency to perform acceptance testing shall
be submitted. Submit agency experience records at least 45 days in advance to
actual testing; five recent references with phone numbers shall be submitted.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data required to demonstrate
compliance with the specific requirements. Data shall be submitted for each
component to be provided. Data shall include type, ratings, settings and other
technical information.
2. A completed materials list with outline and summary sheets and schedule of
equipment in each unit.
3. Unit control schematics and wiring diagrams showing numbered terminal
points and all interconnections. A separate diagram shall be provided for each
compartment. The diagram shall also include the equipment name, number
and the ATS designation.
4. The Contractor shall submit a description of shop and field testing methods,
procedures and apparatus with calibration dates. Testing methods and
procedures shall be submitted at least 45 days in advance prior to
conformation of witness testing dates and actual testing.
D. Certificate of Compliance:
1. Seismic qualification certification from the manufacturer including mounting
recommendations.
2. Data and results of witness tests accompanied by a certificate of authenticity
sworn to before a notary public by an officer of the manufacturing company.
Upon approval, release for shipment to the Site shall proceed.
E. Reports:
2. Manufacturer’s Site visit and acceptance testing reports shall be submitted.
16496-2 11/2017
2210
CONTRACT DEL-260E
F. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with

Detailed Specification 01831 - Operation And Maintenance Manuals.
A. Manufacturer:
1. The ATS manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of
company-employed personnel located throughout the contiguous United
States. The service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on
call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
2. The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality
Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying
quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and
servicing in accordance with ISO 9001.
3. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for
a minimum of 20 years.
B. ATS Installation and Testing:

1. The Contractor shall coordinate ATS installation with Consolidated Edison
Company (ConEd). Con Ed must approve the ATS based on its suitability to
ConEds requirements for its intended use.
2. ATS shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with the latest
applicable requirements of NEMA, UL, NFPA and the Electrical Code of the
City of New York.
3. The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the
individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure
that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are
in compliance with the specification requirements.
4. The ATS manufacturer shall use a shop test facility that has recently
calibrated testing apparatus and qualified, experienced technicians, for all
factory tests. Calibration of testing apparatus shall be within one year.
5. All test equipment and instrument calibration shall be in accordance with the
latest edition of the accuracy standard of the U.S. National Institute of
Standards and Technology and the NETA, acceptance testing specification.
6. Witnessed Shop Tests: The ATS shall be witness shop tested and inspected in
accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s standard procedures. The
testing and inspection procedures shall be approved by the Engineer. At least
45 days’ notice shall be given to the Engineer prior to such tests and
inspection dates.
7. The manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with
all of the requirements of this Specification including compliance with the
above codes and standards, and withstand and closing ratings. The
certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No
exceptions to the Specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the
submittal, shall be included in the certification.
C. Seismic Requirements:
16496-3 11/2017
2211
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. The ATS shall be designed, constructed and installed suitable for earthquake
regulations in accordance with the seismic requirements of the City of New
York Building Code and the Uniform Building Code for zone 2A application.
D. Field Tests:
1. The ATS shall be field tested. Field testing shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements specified under Article 3.03.
2. The services of the ATS manufacturer shall be retained for field service. Field
service shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under Article
3.06.
acceptance testing of the ATS. The testing firm shall have experience in the
inspection and testing of the equipment and shall be a member company of
NETA. Acceptance testing shall be in accordance with the requirements
A. ATS equipment shall be delivered, stored and handled in accordance the

manufacturer’s instructions and the following.
1. ATS shall be inspected for shipping damage or loose parts when received.
Evidence of water which may have entered equipment during transit shall be
checked.
2. ATS shall be lifted, rolled or jacked into locations shown on the Contract
Drawings.
3. ATS shall be stored in a clean, dry location in which a uniform temperature is
maintained. Equipment shall be protected with coverings and maintain air
circulation.
4. Where dampness or condensation may be encountered, heaters shall be
provided for equipment to prevent moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH
A. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The
electrical operator shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism.
Main operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices, linear motors or
gears shall not be acceptable. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to
ensure only two possible positions, normal or emergency.
a. Automatic transfer switches shall be ASCO 7000 Series by ASCO,
Alexandria, VA
16496-4 11/2017
2212
CONTRACT DEL-260E
B. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of
maintenance and commonality of parts.
C. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so

that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise
is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.
D. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 800 amperes and
above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close-on
capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.
E. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without
disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors.
Switches rated 600 amperes and higher shall have front removable and replaceable
contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without
removing power conductors and/or bus bars.
F. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts

thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty are not acceptable.
G. Where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the Contract Drawings,

the ATS shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts.
The neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources shall be connected
together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and remain connected
together until power source contacts close on the source to which the transfer is
being made. The overlapping neutral contacts shall not overlap for a period
greater than 100 milliseconds. Neutral switching contacts which do not overlap
are not acceptable.
H. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected as shown on the Contract

Drawings, a neutral conductor plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors
shall be provided.
2.02 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER
A. The controller's sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in

microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to
communicate serially through a serial communication module.
B. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for maximum
application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall
be true RMS type and shall be accurate to ± 1% of nominal voltage. Frequency
sensing shall be accurate to ± 0.2%. The panel shall be capable of operating over a
temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C and storage from -55 to +85 degrees C.
16496-5 11/2017
2213
CONTRACT DEL-260E
C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting

wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the
controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance.
Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards.
Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade plug-in type with dust covers. The panel
shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the
transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance. The protective cover shall
include a built-in pocket for storage of the operator’s manuals.
D. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify

field-wiring connections.
E. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC) as follows:
1. EN 55011:1991 Emission standard - Group 1, Class A
2. EN 50082-2:1995 Generic immunity standard, from which:
3. EN 61000-4-2:1995 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) immunity
4. EN 50140:1993 Radiated Electro-Magnetic field immunity
5. EN 61000-4-4:1995 Electrical fast transient (EFT) immunity
6. EN 61000-4-5:1995 Surge transient immunity
7. EN 61000-4-6:1996 Conducted Radio-Frequency field immunity
2.03 ENCLOSURE
A. The ATS shall be furnished in a weather proof NEMA 3R enclosure.
B. All standard and optional door-mounted switches and pilot lights shall be 16-mm
industrial grade type or equivalent for easy viewing & replacement. Door controls
shall be provided on a separate removable plate, which can be supplied loose for
open type units.
2.04 BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH
A. A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to

either source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source
and load power conductors. All main contacts shall be manually driven.
B. Power interconnections shall be silver-plated copper bus bar. The only field
installed power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the
bypass-isolation switch. All control interwiring shall be provided with disconnect
plugs.
C. Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear distinction
between the functions. Handles shall be permanently affixed and operable without
opening the enclosure door. Designs requiring insertion of loose operating handles
or opening of the enclosure door to operate are not acceptable.
16496-6 11/2017
2214
CONTRACT DEL-260E
D. Bypass to the load-carrying source shall be accomplished with no interruption of

power to the load, make before break contacts. Designs which disconnect the load
when bypassing are not acceptable. The bypass handle shall have three operating
modes: "Bypass to Normal," "Automatic," and "Bypass to Emergency." The
operating speed of the bypass contacts shall be the same as the associated transfer
switch and shall be independent of the speed at which the manual handle is
operated. In the "Automatic" mode, the bypass contacts shall be out of the power
circuit so that they will not be subjected to fault currents to which the system may
be subjected.
E. The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: "Closed," "Test," and
"Open."
1. The "Test" mode shall permit testing of the entire emergency power system,
including the automatic transfer switches with no interruption of power to the
load.
2. The "Open" mode shall completely isolate the automatic transfer switch from
all source and load power conductors. When in the "Open" mode, it shall be
possible to completely withdraw the automatic transfer switch for inspection
or maintenance to conform to code requirements without removal of power
conductors or the use of any tools.
3. When the isolation switch is in the "Test" or "Open" mode, the bypass switch
shall function as a manual transfer switch.
F. Designs requiring operation of key interlocks for bypass isolation or ATSs which
cannot be completely withdrawn when isolated are not acceptable.
2.05 CONTROLLER DISPLAY AND KEYPAD
A. A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the
controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters.
Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control
through the serial communications input port. The following parameters shall only
be adjustable via DIP switches on the controller:
1. Nominal line voltage and frequency
2. Single or three phase sensing
3. Operating parameter protection
4. Transfer operating mode configuration
a. (Open transition, Closed transition, or Delayed transition)
B. All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and
accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals.
16496-7 11/2017
2215
CONTRACT DEL-260E
2.06 VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY AND PHASE ROTATION SENSING
A. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted
below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout, and
trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise indicated):
Parameter Sources Dropout / Trip Pickup / Reset

Undervoltage N&E,3φ 70 to 98% 85 to 100%
Overvoltage N&E,3φ 102 to 115% 2% below trip
Underfrequency N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100%
Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2% below trip
Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1% below dropout
B. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 0.5% over an operating

temperature range of -20°C to 60°C.
C. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either

locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port
access.
D. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial
port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The
source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred
rotation.
E. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to pro-vide
digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation.
F. The controller shall include a user selectable algorithm to prevent repeated transfer
cycling to a source on an installation which experiences primary side, single phase
failures on a Grounded Wye – Grounded Wye transformer which regenerates
voltage when unloaded. The algorithm shall also inhibit retransfer to the normal
(utility) source upon detection of a single phasing condition until a dedicated timer
expires, the alternate source fails, or the normal source fails completely and is
restored during this time delay period. The time delays associated with this feature
shall be adjustable by the user through the controller keypad and LCD.
2.07 TIME DELAYS
A. An adjustable time delay of zero to six seconds shall be provided to override

momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting
signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by
providing an external 24 VDC power supply.
B. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency power, adjustable from 0

to 60 minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
16496-8 11/2017
2216
CONTRACT DEL-260E
C. Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on
re-transfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and
the other for the test mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to
60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source
fails and the normal source is acceptable.
D. Time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down,
adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes.
E. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external
relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability
to activate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute time delay in any of the following modes:
1. Prior to transfer only.
2. Prior to and after transfer.
3. Normal to emergency only.
4. Emergency to normal only.
5. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.
6. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.
F. The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for optional
Closed Transition and Delayed Transition operation:
1. 1 to 5 minute time delay on failure to synchronize normal and emergency
sources prior to closed transition transfer.
2. 0.1 to 9.99 second time delay on an extended parallel condition of both power
sources during closed transition operation.
3. 0 to 5 minute time delay for the load disconnect position for delayed transition
operation.
G. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended
parallel time, which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments.
H. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a
remote device connected to the serial communications port.
2.08 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
A. A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test /
automatic / reset modes. The “test” position will simulate a normal source failure.
The “reset” position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or
retransfer to normal.
B. A Single Pole Double Throw (SPDT) contact, rated 5 amps at 30 VDC, shall be
provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry
cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and
run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal
source restores before the load is transferred.
16496-9 11/2017
2217
CONTRACT DEL-260E
C. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one
contact, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact
closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source.
D. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided
energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of
the normal and emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip and
reset settings for each source. Green shall indicate when the ATS is connected to
the normal source and red shall indicate when the ATS is connected to the
emergency source.
E. The following features shall be built-in to the controller, and must be capable of
activation through either keypad programming or the serial port as required y the
user:
1. Allow the user to select “commit/no commit to transfer” when determining if
the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source
restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.
2. An inphase monitor shall be provided in the controller. The monitor shall
control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal
starting currents, and shall not require external control of power sources. The
inphase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the
ATS manufacturer. The inphase monitor shall be equal to ASCO Feature 27
or approved equal.
3. The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will
allow the transfer switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an
external control device.
F. Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The
engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to seven different exercise
routines. For each routine, the user shall be able to:
1. Enable or disable the routine.
2. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine.
3. Set the start time:
a. Time of day
b. Day of week
c. Week of month (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every)
4. Set the duration of the run.
5. At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to
normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-year
life battery that supplies power to the real time clock in the event of a power
loss will maintain all time and date information.
G. The following feature shall be built into the controller, but capable of being
activated through keypad programming or the communications interface port.
Note: The transfer switch will operate in a non-automatic mode with this feature
activated.
16496-10 11/2017
2218
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the
ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to inhibit
transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit
signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port.
H. System Status - The controller LCD display shall include a “System Status” screen
which shall be readily accessible from any point in the menu by depressing the
“ESC” key a maximum of two times. This screen shall display a clear description
of the active operating sequence and switch position. For example:
1. Normal Failed
2. Load on Normal
3. TD Normal to Emerg
4. 2min15s
I. Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display

“coded” system status messages, which must be explained by references in the
operator’s manual, are not permissible.
J. Self-Diagnostics - The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose
of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status
input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands
from being completed.
K. Communications Interface – The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through

an optional serial communication module, with a network of transfer switches,
locally (up to 4000 ft.) or remotely through modem serial communications.
Standard software specific for transfer switch applications shall be available by the
transfer switch manufacturer. This software shall allow for the monitoring, control
and setup of parameters.
L. Data Logging – The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the
last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be
time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory:
1. Event Logging
a. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency.
b. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal.
c. Data and time and reason for engine start.
d. Data and time engine stopped.
e. Data and time emergency source available.
f. Data and time emergency source not available.
2. Statistical Data
a. Total number of transfers.
b. Total number of transfers due to source failure.
c. Total number of days controller is energized.
d. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available.
16496-11 11/2017
2219
CONTRACT DEL-260E
M. Communications Module - A full duplex RS485 interface shall be installed in the

ATS controller to enable serial communications. The serial communications shall
be capable of a direct connect or multi-drop configured network. This module shall
allow for the seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer
devices. The serial communication interface shall be equal to ASCO Accessory
72A.
N. External DC Power Supply – An optional provision shall be available to connect

an external 24 VDC power supply to allow the LCD and the door mounted control
indicators to remain functional when both power sources are dead. This option
shall be equivalent to ASCO accessory 1G.
O. Withstand and Closing Ratings:

1. The ATS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS
symmetrical short circuit current at the ATS terminals with the type of
overcurrent protection shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in
accordance with that standard's 1½ and 3 cycle, long-time ratings. ATSs
which are not tested and labeled with 1½ and 3 cycle (any breaker) ratings and
have series, or specific breaker ratings only, are not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Automatic transfer switches shall be fully assembled with all required devices,
wiring, nameplates, terminal blocks and enclosures.
2. Mount automatic transfer switches rigidly and securely to the building
structure or to supporting devices, which are rigidly and securely supported to
the building structure.
3. Automatic transfer switches shall be fastened with bolts and expansion shields
on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts or hollow masonry units, and with
machine screws or welded studs on steel work.
4. Mount automatic transfer switches with sides parallel or perpendicular to
walls or equipment, and such that the local control station is installed in a neat
and professional manner.
5. Install all automatic transfer switches such that door swing is not hampered.
B. Locations and Sizes:

1. Automatic transfer switches locations shown on the Contract Drawings are
approximate. Sizes shall be as dimensioned on the Contract Drawings, or, if
not specifically dimensioned, as required to house all devices, terminal blocks
and conduits which enter the control station.
2. All automatic transfer switches sizes and locations shall be submitted by the
Contractor for Engineer approval.
16496-12 11/2017
2220
CONTRACT DEL-260E
C. Grounding:
1. All automatic transfer switches shall be grounded in accordance with NEC
requirements.
2. The use of two (2) locknuts and a grounding bushing will be required at all
conduit terminations where hub type fittings are not required. Conduit
grounding bushings within automatic transfer switches shall be bonded
together with jumper cables where control station size or number of conduits
warrants their use per NEC requirements.
D. Terminal Blocks:
1. Terminal blocks shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the automatic
transfer switch enclosure sides. Approximately 20 percent spare terminals
shall be provided (minimum of two (2)). Terminals shall be lettered or
numbered to conform to the wiring diagrams.
E. Wires:
1. The wires within automatic transfer switch shall be neatly harnessed to
prevent the door damaging the wires and to prevent the wires hampering the
door operation.
2. All wires shall have identification markers on each end. Marker numbers shall
match the terminal block numbers.
F. Identification:
1. All automatic transfer switches shall have a nameplate attached which
properly identifies the box. Nameplates shall be installed as specified in
Detailed Specification 16076 - Labeling and Identification.
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided
under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL
and NEMA standards.
1. Insulation check to ensure the integrity of insulation and continuity of the
entire system
2. Visual inspection to ensure that the switch matches the Specification
requirements and to verify that the fit and finish meet quality standards
3. Mechanical tests to verify that the switch’s power sections are free of
mechanical hindrances
4. Electrical tests to verify the complete electrical operation of the switch and to
set up time delays and voltage sensing settings of the logic.
B. All tests and values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and NETA, ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications.
C. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports.
D. Witnessed Shop Tests:

16496-13 11/2017
2221
CONTRACT DEL-260E
1. The Contractor shall perform witnessed shop tests.
2. Automatic transfer switch shall be witness shop tested in accordance with the
procedures specified under paragraph 3.02. The Contractor shall include in his
bid cost of satisfactory and suitable means for air travel, transportation,
incidentals, meals and lodging for the Engineer and the City’s representatives
to attend witness testing at the factory.
A. Provide the services of a qualified, factory-authorized, manufacturer’s

representative for the required man-days as specified hereunder. A man-day is
defined as eight, on-site, working hours.
B. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to

assist the Contractor in installation, testing, training and start-up of the equipment
specified under this section for a period of nine (9) man-days. The manufacturer’s
representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in
general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of
the assembly and components contained therein.
C. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation, as

determined by the Engineer, shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The
manufacturer’s representative shall sign in and out at the office of the Engineer’s
Resident Project Representative on each day he is at the project.
D. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s field start-up
report.
3.04 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing

that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the
B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s

representative’s certification.
3.05 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner’s
representatives for 3 normal workday at a jobsite location determined by the
owner.
B. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer’s qualified

representative. The training program shall consist of the instruction on the
16496-14 11/2017
2222
CONTRACT DEL-260E
operation of the assembly, circuit breakers and major components within the
assembly.
3.06 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. The manufacturer of the ATS shall also have a national service organization that is
available throughout the contiguous United States and is available on call 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year.
B. Provide manufacturer’s representative field services in accordance with the

requirements of Detailed Specification 01821 – Equipment Startup and Training:
1. Equipment Installation and Inspection: One (1) trip of three-day duration.

2. Preliminary and/or Final Field Tests: One (1) trip of two-day duration.
3. Startup & Initial Operating Period: One (1) trip of one-day duration.
4. Training: One (1) trip of three-day duration.
END OF SECTION
16496-15 11/2017
2223
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16496-16 11/2017
2224
DETAILED SPECIFICATION 16511E – LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES
CONTRACT DEL-260E
SECTION 16511E
Lighting Fixtures and Devices
Specification 16511- Lighting Fixtures and Devices except as modified herein.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.03 PAYMENT
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHT FIXTURES
Replace paragraph 2.01 D. with the following:
D. Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by means of an enclosed and gasketed cushion

type hanger. The hanger shall be suitable to be mounted directly to the fixture outlet
box and shall provide a minimum of 8 degrees swing from the vertical. Fixture stems
shall be threaded rigid metal conduit, ¾ inch minimum size. Stems shall be PVC
coated where necessary according to the NEMA room designations on the Contract
Drawings.
Add the following after paragraph 2.01.H:
I. The fixture schedule exit sign catalog numbers list only the manufacturer’s name and
the series type. Exit sign catalog numbers are dependent on single face, double face,
mounting method and/or indicating arrows being used. Provide exit signs accordingly
suitable for the various arrangements shown on the Contract Drawings.
2.02 LAMPS
B. Fluorescent lamps shall be cool white, energy efficient rapid start type. Unless
specifically indicated otherwise, fluorescent lamps shall be 32 watt T8, suitable for
ambient operation above 50 degrees F. For operation outdoors, at 50 degrees and
below, standard lamps shall be provided. All fluorescent lamps shall be Toxicity
16511E-1 11/2017
2225
CONTRACT DEL-260E
Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)-compliant without the use of additives to

achieve compliance.
Replace paragraph 2.02 F. with the following:
F. Lamps shall be as manufactured by:

1. General Electric Company, Fairfield, CT
2. Sylvania Company, Wilmington, MA
3. Alto lamp technology by Philips Lighting, Andover, MA
2.05 LIGHTING CONTACTOR PANELS
B. The panel enclosures shall be steel, single door type. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X
stainless steel where necessary according to the NEMA room designations shown on
the Contract Drawings, NEMA 4X non-metallic in chlorine storage, feed rooms and
scrubber room. Each enclosure shall be equipped with a control fuse with mounting
block and 600 volt screw terminals. All other panel enclosures shall meet the
requirements of its associated NEMA room designations shown on the Contract
Drawings.
2.06 RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES
2. Not Used.
3. Receptacles shall be marine duty, straight blade type, with heat resistant
melamine body. Special receptacles in NEMA 4X locations shall be Type 316
stainless steel.
1. Stainless steel plates shall be furnished for devices in finished or dry locations.
They shall have beveled edges and shall be made of 302/304 stainless steel.
3. For other locations, neoprene gasketed covers shall be used. Covers shall be
galvanized ferrous or cast ferrous metal. Covers shall be PVC-coated where
necessary according to the NEMA room designations shown on the Contract
16511E-2 11/2017
2226
CONTRACT DEL-260E
Drawings. Covers shall be equipped with gasketed spring doors for receptacles
and an external operating mechanism for switches. Receptacle cover shall
maintain wet location rating with plug inserted where necessary according to the
NEMA room designations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
B. The Contractor shall provide equipment start-up services and training.
END OF SECTION
16511E-3 11/2017
2227
CONTRACT DEL-260E
16511E-4 11/2017
2228
THE CITY OF NEW YORK
DEPARTMENT OF
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Invitation for Bids for Furnishing all Labor and Material

Necessary and Required for:
DEL-260G – GENERAL
DEL-260H – HVAC
DEL-260E – ELECTRICAL
SHAFT 18 DA KENSICO ELECTRICAL AND HV

UPGRADES
Volume 2 of 2
Contract Terms and Specifications
(with separate Bid Booklets)
December 2017

Construction Contract

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction Contract

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

New York City

59-17 Junction Boulevard

Vincent Sapienza, P.E.

Invitation for Bids for Furnishing all Labor and

Contract: DEL-260G - GENERAL, DEL-260H - HVAC,

Description: SHAFT 18 DA KENSICO ELECTRICAL AND HV UPGRADES

SHAFT 18 DA KENSICO ELECTRICAL AND HV UPGRADES

TOWN OF MOUNT PLEASANT, WESTCHESTER NY

NOTICE TO BIDDERS .................................................................................................1

CITY OF NEW YORK STANDARD CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT ................13

WESTCHESTER COUNTY SCHEDULE OF PREVAILING WAGES .............129

DAVIS BACON ACT – SCHEDULE OF PREVAILING WAGES ......................229

1 Scope and Intent ..........................................................................................249

13 NOT USED .................................................................................................259

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

05501 Metal Fabrications ......................................................................................703

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTIC

06100 Rough Carpentry .........................................................................................743

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07140 Fluid Applied Waterproofing ......................................................................749

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTIC

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

15830H Fans ...........................................................................................................2007

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

B. Work included under Contract DEL-260G General

C. Work included under Contract DEL-260H HVAC

D Work included under Contract DEL-260E Electrical

E. Inspection before bidding

G. Environmental Health and Safety Policies And Procedures

1.04 LOCATION OF WORK

C. Restrictions concerning access to the Site are specified in Detailed Specifications

1.05 CONTRACT DEL-260G General

B. The Principal Items of Work are:

3. Landscaping improvements outside the building.

4. Removal of interior generator and conversion of area to new electrical room.

1.06 CONTRACT DEL-260H HVAC

B. The Principal Items of Work are:

2. Install a heating and ventilation system for the electrical room.

3. Install a Hydronic Pump.

1.07 CONTRACT DEL-260E Electrical

B. The Principal Items of Work are:

1. Replacement of all power system components including panels, circuit breakers,

2. Installation of standby outdoor natural gas generator.

3. Completion of Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) data

1.08 INSPECTION BEFORE BIDDING

1.09 DATUM PLANE

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

1. These will be revised and updated by the BEDC Division of Environmental

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

NO TEXT ON THIS PAGE

Signature: ___ Title: _

Print Name: ________________ Date: Phone #: